Https WWW - Stuckegmbh

SYMAP -Compact
Protection & Control
Manual
User Manual
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

ALL UNAUTHORISED REPRODUCTION OF THE PRESENT DOCUMENT BY WHATEVER
MEANS OR MAKING IT ACCESSIBLE TO THIRD WITHOUT EXPRESS WRITTEN CONSENT
BY STUCKE ELEKTRONIK GMBH IS PROHIBITED AND WILL BE PROSECUTED UNDER
LAW.
THE MANUAL IS FOR INFORMATION ONLY.
THE DOCUMENT IS SUBJECT TO ALTERATION WITHOUT PRIOR NOTICE. IT IS TO BE
CONSIDERED AS INDICATIVE AND DOES NOT IN ANY WAY COMMIT STUCKE
ELEKRTRONIK GMBH.
STUCKE ELEKTRONIK GMBH IS NOT RESPONSIBLE OR LIABLE FOR ERRORS OR
INACCURACIES THAT MAY APPEAR IN THE DOCUMENTATION.
Document version: v18.0

Date of modification: 19.08.2016
Author: Frank Boese
File name: SYMAP-Compact_Manual_v18.0_GB.docx
Validity
Firmware: v006_ext_1.0-1.22.x
Hardware: v1-1.x
v1-2.x
- 2/839 - SYMAP-Compact_Manual_v18.0_GB.docx SYMAP-Compact

User Manual
SYMAP-Compact SYMAP-Compact_Manual_v18.0_GB.docx - 3/839 -

User Manual
Contents
1 Introduction ............................................................................................................................................ 9
1.1 SYMAP-Compact General Outline ......................................................................................... 9
1.2 Human machine interface (HMI) ................................................................................................. 9
1.3 Extension Board System EBS .................................................................................................... 9
1.4 Functional scope ....................................................................................................................... 10
1.4.1 SYMAP-Compact: Hardware and Software standard equipment ............................ 10
1.4.2 Extension Board System EBS ................................................................................... 24
1.4.2.1 EB-PS Communication and Power supply ........................................... 25
1.4.2.2 EB-BI8-A 8 Binary inputs ...................................................................... 26
1.4.2.3 EB-BI10-OC 10 Binary inputs (opto-couplers) ..................................... 27
1.4.2.4 EB-BO4-R 4 Binary outputs (change-over contacts)............................ 28
1.4.2.5 EB-BO6-R 6 Binary outputs (normal open NO contacts) ..................... 29
1.5 Diagnostics and Monitoring ....................................................................................................... 30
1.6 SYMAP-Compact Terminal Connections ............................................................................. 32
1.6.1 Analog Inputs for Measurement ................................................................................ 32
1.6.2 Binary Inputs and Outputs ......................................................................................... 33
1.6.3 Service interface ........................................................................................................ 33
1.6.4 Grounding Instructions .............................................................................................. 34
1.6.5 SYMAP-Compact Connection Diagrams .............................................................. 37
1.6.5.1 Hardware version 1-1.1 ........................................................................... 37
1.6.5.2 Hardware version 1-2.2 (SYMAP-Compact+ only!) ............................... 50
1.6.6 Plug-In Connection for Auxiliary Supply .................................................................... 56
1.7 Extension Board System EBS Terminal connections ............................................................ 57
1.7.1 EBS connection diagrams ......................................................................................... 57
1.8 Mounting instruction .................................................................................................................. 60
2 Operation of SYMAP-Compact(+) ..................................................................................................... 66

2.1 Front Panel................................................................................................................................ 66
2.2 Back Panel ................................................................................................................................ 69
2.2.1 Reference to documentation ..................................................................................... 69
2.2.1.1 Hardware version v1-1.x .......................................................................... 69
2.2.1.2 Hardware version v1-2.x (SYMAP-Compact+ only!) ............................. 70
2.3 Menu Structure.......................................................................................................................... 71
2.4 Start page / Main menu ............................................................................................................. 72
2.4.1 Operating................................................................................................................. 73
2.4.1.1 Meters ................................................................................................... 74
2.4.1.2 Synchronizer ......................................................................................... 90
2.4.1.3 Status (SD-card, Debug) ....................................................................... 91
2.4.1.4 PMS Power Management System ..................................................... 93
2.4.2 Alarms ..................................................................................................................... 98
2.4.2.1 Active Alarms ........................................................................................ 98
2.4.2.2 Active Events....................................................................................... 100
2.4.3 Breaker .................................................................................................................. 100
2.4.4 Parameters ............................................................................................................ 101
2.4.4.1 SETUP ................................................................................................ 105
2.4.4.2 SYSTEM.............................................................................................. 106
2.4.4.3 RECORDER ........................................................................................ 106
2.4.4.4 PROTECTION ..................................................................................... 107
2.4.4.5 ALARMS .............................................................................................. 107
2.4.4.6 I/O ........................................................................................................ 107
2.4.4.7 LVM ..................................................................................................... 108
2.4.4.8 SWITCHGEAR CONTROL ................................................................. 108
2.4.4.9 PMS ..................................................................................................... 109
2.4.5 Recorder (File information and Manual trigger) .................................................... 110
2.4.5.1 Event Recorder ................................................................................... 111
2.4.5.2 Fault Recorder..................................................................................... 112
2.4.5.3 Disturbance Recorder ......................................................................... 114
2.4.6 Settings ................................................................................................................. 115
2.4.6.1 Display ................................................................................................. 115
2.4.6.2 Language & Time ................................................................................ 116
2.4.6.3 User Level (Change-over via touchscreen) ........................................ 116

User Manual
2.4.6.4 Reset ................................................................................................... 117
2.4.7 Info ........................................................................................................................ 118
3 System settings ................................................................................................................................. 119

3.1 ALL EVENTS .......................................................................................................................... 119
3.1.1 Introduction Event System ....................................................................................... 119
3.1.2 Event list .................................................................................................................. 120
3.2 SETUP (Basic device settings)............................................................................................. 141
3.2.1 User levels............................................................................................................. 141
3.2.2 Measuring inputs ................................................................................................... 145
3.3 SYSTEM (System parameters) ............................................................................................ 147
3.3.1 General .................................................................................................................. 147
3.3.2 Nominals (Rated data of the application) .............................................................. 148
3.3.2.1 Reference Values (Reference values for protection settings) ............ 149
3.3.2.2 Potential transformers (Rated data of PTs) ........................................ 155
3.3.2.3 Current transformers (Rated data of CTs) .......................................... 157
3.3.3 Measuring (Coordination of measuring channels) ................................................ 160
3.3.3.1 Power .................................................................................................. 161
3.3.3.2 Energy ................................................................................................. 167
3.3.3.3 Differential ........................................................................................... 168
3.3.3.4 Impedance ........................................................................................... 170
3.3.3.5 PT inputs ............................................................................................. 172
3.3.3.6 DC voltage ........................................................................................... 173
3.3.3.7 Sampler ............................................................................................... 174
3.3.3.8 Floating average.................................................................................. 176
3.3.3.9 Other ................................................................................................... 177
3.3.4 Counter (Counting functions) ................................................................................ 178
3.3.5 Filter (Filter functions for measurement, display and event recording) ................. 183
3.3.6 Communication (configuration of interfaces) ........................................................ 186
3.3.6.1 Serial port 1 ......................................................................................... 186
3.3.6.2 Serial port 2 ......................................................................................... 187
3.3.6.3 Profibus DP ......................................................................................... 189
3.3.6.4 Ethernet Service Port .......................................................................... 190
3.3.6.5 Ethernet ............................................................................................... 191
3.3.6.6 Network topology (IEC 61850) ............................................................ 192
3.3.6.7 SNTP ................................................................................................... 193
3.3.6.8 IEC 61850 ........................................................................................... 194
3.3.6.9 IEC 60870-5-103 ................................................................................. 195
3.3.6.10 CAN Bus 1........................................................................................... 196
3.3.6.11 FTP ...................................................................................................... 198
3.3.6.12 RSTP ................................................................................................... 199
3.3.6.13 IRIG-B ................................................................................................. 200
3.3.7 Graphic (Referencing and selection of displayed measurement values) ............. 201
3.4 PROTECTION ...................................................................................................................... 209
3.4.1 General (Parameter set changeover) ................................................................... 211
3.4.2 ANSI 21 Distance Protection.............................................................................. 216
3.4.3 ANSI 21FL Fault locator ..................................................................................... 255
3.4.4 ANSI 25 Synchronizing ...................................................................................... 259
3.4.5 ANSI 25A Automatic synchronizing (Controller) ................................................ 291
3.4.6 ANSI 27 Undervoltage Protection ...................................................................... 306
3.4.7 ANSI 27Q Undervoltage-/Reactive power protection ........................................ 311
3.4.8 ANSI 27T Undervoltage Protection; time-dependent ......................................... 324
3.4.9 ANSI 32 Directional Power Protection ............................................................... 332
3.4.10 ANSI 32N/G Zero Power Protection .................................................................. 340
3.4.11 ANSI 37 Undercurrent Protection ...................................................................... 349
3.4.12 ANSI 46 Negative Phase Sequence Current Protection (NPS) ......................... 353
3.4.13 ANSI 47 Negative Phase Sequence Voltage Protection ................................... 369
3.4.14 ANSI 49 Thermal replica .................................................................................... 373
3.4.15 ANSI 50/51 Overcurrent Protection ................................................................... 378
3.4.16 ANSI 50BF Breaker Failure Protection .............................................................. 391
3.4.17 ANSI 50G/51G Ground Overcurrent Protection ................................................. 396
3.4.18 ANSI 51/46 VR Voltage restraint ....................................................................... 410
3.4.19 ANSI 52 Pole discordance protection ................................................................ 413
3.4.20 ANSI 59 Overvoltage Protection ........................................................................ 420

User Manual
3.4.21 ANSI 59N/G Neutral Voltage Displacement (NVD)............................................ 425
3.4.22 ANSI 64REF Restricted Earth Fault Protection ................................................. 429
3.4.23 ANSI 67 Directional Overcurrent Protection ...................................................... 436
3.4.24 ANSI 67G Directional Ground Overcurrent Protection ...................................... 455
3.4.25 ANSI 74TC Trip Circuit Supervision ................................................................... 472
3.4.26 ANSI 78 Vector Surge Protection ...................................................................... 479
3.4.27 ANSI 79 Automatic Reclose (AR) ...................................................................... 484
3.4.28 ANSI 81 Frequency Protection .......................................................................... 490
3.4.29 ANSI 81R Rate of Change of Frequency (RoCoF) ............................................ 497
3.4.30 ANSI 86 Lockout Relay ...................................................................................... 505
3.4.31 ANSI 87 Current Differential Protection ............................................................. 510
3.4.32 ANSI 95i Harmonics stabilizer............................................................................ 534
3.4.33 CLD Cold Load Detection .................................................................................. 538
3.4.34 CTS Current Transformer Supervision .............................................................. 542
3.4.35 DCVM DC voltage monitoring ............................................................................ 547
3.4.36 PTS Potential Transformer Supervision ............................................................. 556
3.4.37 SOTF Switch On To Fault .................................................................................. 569
3.4.38 TIG Transient/Intermittent Ground Fault Protection ........................................... 574
3.4.39 YG Neutral Admittance Ground Fault Protection ............................................... 578
3.5 ALARMS (Parameters of Alarm control and LEDs).............................................................. 586
3.5.1 General .................................................................................................................. 586
3.5.2 Alarm channels ..................................................................................................... 587
3.5.3 LEDs (Hardware) .................................................................................................. 591
3.6 I/O (Parameters of binary/virtual inputs and outputs) ........................................................... 593
3.6.1 General .................................................................................................................. 593
3.6.2 Binary inputs.......................................................................................................... 597
3.6.2.1 Binary inputs (of SYMAP-Compact) .................................................. 597
3.6.2.2 EBS Binary inputs ............................................................................... 601
3.6.3 Binary outputs (Relay outputs) .............................................................................. 606
3.6.3.1 Shunt Trip 1 ......................................................................................... 607
3.6.3.2 Shunt Trip 2 ......................................................................................... 609
3.6.3.3 Lockout relay ........................................................................................ 610
3.6.3.4 Synchron ON ....................................................................................... 613
3.6.3.5 Function outputs 1 to 8 ........................................................................ 614
3.6.3.6 EBS Function outputs ......................................................................... 615
3.6.4 Analog inputs ........................................................................................................ 616
3.6.4.1 Analog input 1 and Analog input 2 (Resistor) ................................... 616
3.6.4.2 Analog input 3 and Analog input 4 (0 to 20mA) ................................. 619
3.6.5 Analog outputs ...................................................................................................... 624
3.6.5.1 Analog output 1 and Analog output 5 (+/-10V) ................................. 624
3.6.5.2 Analog output 2 (+/-20mA) .................................................................. 630
3.6.5.3 Analog output 3 and Analog output 4 (0 to 20mA) ........................... 636
3.7 LVM Limit Value Monitoring ............................................................................................... 642
3.8 Virtual IO ............................................................................................................................... 645
3.8.1 IEC 61850 subscribers .......................................................................................... 645
3.8.2 IEC 61850 inputs mapping .................................................................................... 647
3.8.3 IEC 61850 ouputs mapping................................................................................... 650
3.8.4 IEC 61850 device test mode ................................................................................. 652
3.8.5 Communication events transfer table ................................................................... 653
3.9 SWITCHGEAR CONTROL ................................................................................................... 654
3.9.1 General .................................................................................................................. 655
3.9.2 Feedback............................................................................................................... 656
3.9.3 Control & Interlocking ............................................................................................ 665
3.9.4 Counter (Counter and events of control operations) ............................................. 674
3.10 RECORDER ......................................................................................................................... 676
3.10.1 Fault Recorder ...................................................................................................... 676
3.10.2 Disturbance Recorder ........................................................................................... 676
3.11 PLC (Programmable logic control) ....................................................................................... 682
3.11.1 Logic elements ...................................................................................................... 682
3.11.1.1 AND/OR .............................................................................................. 682
3.11.1.2 NOT (Inverter) ..................................................................................... 685
3.11.1.3 XOR (Exclusive OR) ........................................................................... 687
3.11.1.4 FlipFlops .............................................................................................. 689
3.11.1.5 Counter ................................................................................................ 692
3.11.1.6 Timer ................................................................................................... 695
User Manual
3.11.1.7 Timer switch ........................................................................................ 698
3.12 PMS (Power management system) ...................................................................................... 701
3.12.1 Generator Control ................................................................................................. 704
3.12.1.1 General settings .................................................................................. 704
3.12.1.2 Net configuration ................................................................................. 709
3.12.1.3 Active Power Controller ....................................................................... 713
3.12.1.4 Frequency Controller ........................................................................... 729
3.12.1.5 Voltage Controller ............................................................................... 740
3.12.1.6 Power Factor Controller ...................................................................... 751
4 Maintenance, Servicing and Retesting ............................................................................................ 767
5 Safety guidelines ............................................................................................................................... 770
6 Trouble-shooting ............................................................................................................................... 771
7 Technical Data.................................................................................................................................... 772

7.1 General Technical Data .......................................................................................................... 772
7.1.1 SYMAP-Compact Hardware version v1-1.x ....................................................... 772
7.1.2 SYMAP-Compact Hardware version v1-2.x (SYMAP-Compact+ only!) ........... 773
7.1.3 Extension board system EBS Hardware version v1-0.x ....................................... 774
7.2 Type tests Hardware ............................................................................................................ 776
7.2.1 Environment............................................................................................................. 776
7.2.1.1 SYMAP-Compact Hardware version v1-1.x ..................................... 776
7.2.1.2 SYMAP-Compact Hardware version v1-2.x (SYMAP-Compact+
only!) ...................................................................................................... 777
7.2.2 Electromagnetic capability (EMC) ........................................................................... 779
only!) ...................................................................................................... 779
7.3 Type tests Software ............................................................................................................. 782
7.3.1 Protection and monitoring functions Accuracy ..................................................... 782
only!) ...................................................................................................... 783
7.4 Binary Inputs and Outputs ...................................................................................................... 807
7.4.1 Binary Inputs ............................................................................................................ 807
7.4.1.1 Hardware version v1-1.x ........................................................................ 807
7.4.1.2 Hardware version v1-2.x (SYMAP-Compact+ only!) ........................... 808
7.4.1.3 Extension board system EBS Hardware version v1-0.x ..................... 810
7.4.2 Binary Outputs ......................................................................................................... 813
7.4.2.1 Hardware version v1-1.x ........................................................................ 813
7.4.2.2 Hardware version v1-2.x (SYMAP-Compact+ only!) ........................... 815
7.4.2.3 Erweiterungsboardsystem EBS Hardwareversion v1-0.x .................. 817
7.5 U/I Measuring Inputs Hazardous live voltage (HLV) ............................................................ 819
only!) ...................................................................................................... 820
7.7 Analog outputs (AO) Extra low voltage (ELV) ...................................................................... 822
7.7.1 SYMAP-Compact Hardware version v1-1.0 ....................................................... 822
7.7.2 SYMAP-Compact Hardware version v1-1.1 and v1-2.x ..................................... 823
7.8 Analog inputs (AI) Extra low voltage (ELV) .......................................................................... 824
7.8.1 SYMAP-Compact Hardware version v1-1.x and v1-2.x...................................... 824
7.9 Communication Interfaces ...................................................................................................... 825
7.9.1 SYMAP-Compact Hardware version v1-1.x ....................................................... 825
7.9.2 SYMAP-Compact Hardware version v1-2.x (SYMAP-Compact+ only!) ........... 826
7.9.3 Extension Board System EBS Hardware version................................................. 828
8 Order Information .............................................................................................................................. 830

8.1 SYMAP-Compact Hardware versions v1-1.x and v1-2.x (HW v1-2.x only available for
SYMAP-Compact+!) .............................................................................................................. 830
8.2 Extension Boards System EBS ............................................................................................... 835
8.2.1 EB-PS Communication and Power supply ........................................................... 835
8.2.2 EB-BI8-A 8 Binary inputs ...................................................................................... 835
8.2.3 EB-BI10-OC 10 Binary inputs (opto-couplers) ..................................................... 836
User Manual
8.2.4 EB-BO4-R 4 Binary outputs (change-over contacts) ........................................... 836
8.2.5 EB-BO6-R 6 Binary outputs (normal open NO contacts) ..................................... 837

User Manual
1 Introduction
This manual describes the digital protection relays of the SYMAP-Compact product line. The
overview represents relay features, applications and functionalities.
CAUTION: SYMAP-Compact(+) devices are not applicable for 3-phase power systems
with anti-clockwise rotating field!
Please refer to Table 1-1 to Table 1-8 in section 1.4.1 for detailed information on software and
hardware capacities of SYMAP-Compact(+) device variants.
1.1 SYMAP-Compact General Outline
The SYMAP-Compact(+) is a numerical protection relay for use in low, medium and high-
voltage systems and, by its integrated protective functions and its HMI interface capacities, it
has proven to be an efficient and cost-effective solution for all types of switch panel. It is
equipped with three high-performance micro-processors and offers a comprehensive range of
protective functions for generators, motors (synchronous or asynchronous), transformers, power
lines, and substations. All protection functions can be activated and used at a time and without
restrictions. Both, digital and analog outputs can be connected to the controls of the main panel
via SYMAP-Compact(+) control unit. These features guarantee highest flexibility during
commissioning and subsequent use In addition, communication of the SYMAP-Compact(+)
and the SCADA system is possible via several serial ports and different data protocols.
1.2 Human machine interface (HMI)
Programming and operating a SYMAP-Compact(+) device is very easy. A resistive touch

screen allows menu navigation. Graphic representations, events and parameters can be
individually created on a PC and transferred to the SYMAP-Compact(+) device. This
customized design allows you to adapt the menus to your requirements.
To guarantee the highest possible safety standards, access to SYMAP-Compact(+) settings is

password protected. Access is possible only after entry of password.
The men is navigated using the touchscreen from the main menu, which provides access to
the submenus Operating, Alarms, Breaker, Parameters, Recorder, Settings and Info.
1.3 Extension Board System EBS
For many applications the number of binary inputs and binary output of SYMAP-Compact(+) is
not sufficient. To provide the possibility to process additional, peripheral signal via SYMAP-
Compact(+), special extension boards (Extension Board System EBS) for binary inputs and
outputs can be connected to the SYMAP-Compact(+). Parameter setting of the boards can be
conducted via application software SYMAP-Compact Parameter Toll (SCPT).

User Manual
1.4 Functional scope
1.4.1 SYMAP-Compact: Hardware and Software standard equipment
The SYMAP-Compact product line comprises two different device types:

SYMAP-Compact and
SYMAP-Compact+
According to different, available hardware versions Table 1-1 to Table 1-8 list the standard
equipment of hardware components and software functions for all device variants.
Hardwareversion v1-1.x
Table 1-1 Standard equipment of SYMAP-Compact(+)Fx device variants HW v1-1.x
PRODUCT LINE SYMAP-Compact
DEVICE TYPE Compact Compact+
DEVICE VARIANT F0 F1 F2 F3 F4 F1 F2 F3 F4
Application
Portection system - - - -
Protection and Control system - - - - -
Dimensions
Housing dimensions (WxHxD = (210x210x87)mm - - - -
Housing dimensions (WxHxD = (210x250x87)mm - - - - -
Front plate dimensions (WxHxD = (210x210x4)mm - - - -
Front plate dimensions (WxHxD = (210x250x4)mm - - - - -
Cutout (WxH = 192x192)mm - - - -
Cutout (WxH = 192x232)mm - - - - -
Front plate
Stucke Design
LED indications
3 Status LEDs (TRIP:red/ ALARM: yellow/ SYSTEM: red/ green)
8 Alarm LEDs (parameterizable; colour: red) - - - -
8 Alarm LEDs (parameterizable; colours: red/green/yellow) - - - - -
Membrane keyboard
4 membrane keys (navigation/ parameter setting/reset) - - - -
6 membrane keys (navigation/parameter setting/reset /ON/OFF) - - - - -
Display
Graphical LC-Display / Touchscreen (320x240 pixel)
Current measurement
1 x CT1 (3-phase; 020 x In; sec. nominal current: see order code) -
1 x CT-GND1 (1-phase; sec. nominal current: see order code) -
Voltage measurement
1 x PT1 (3-phase; meas. ranges**: 50 to 200V AC and 200 to 700 V AC) - - - -
1 x PT2 (3-phase: meas. ranges**: 50 to 200V AC and 200 to 700 V AC) - - - - - -
1 x PT3 (3-phase: meas. ranges**: 50 to 200V AC and 200 to 700 V AC) - - - - - - - -
1 x PT-GND1 (1-phase: meas. ranges**: 50 to 200V AC and 200 to 700 V
- -
AC)
Binary inputs
5 pcs (10220V DC/230V AC; rooted) - - - -
19 pcs. (10220V DC/230V AC; rooted) - - - - -
Binary outputs
5 pcs (potential-free contacts, NO) - - - -
12 pcs (potential-free contacts, NO) - - - - -
Communication interfaces
1 x Mini-USB (side of housing; for parameter setting)
1 x RS485/422* (Modbus RTU; half- and full duplex*)
1 x USB-A (at front plate; for parameter setting)
1 x RJ45 (side of housing; for EBS and for parameter setting*)
1 x CANBUS1 (external communication*)

User Manual
* not available yet!

** to be set by parameter
Table 1-2 Standard equipment of SYMAP-Compact(+) Genset device variants HW v1-1.x

DEVICE VARIANT SYN EC GC ECG* GC ECG*
Application
Portection and Control - - - - -
Engine control - - - - -
Generator control incl. protective functions - - - -
Engine control and Generator protection - - - -
Dimensions
Housing dimensions (WxHxD = (210x210x87)mm - --
Front plate dimensions (WxHxD = (210x210x4)mm - -
Cutout (WxH = 192x192)mm - -
Cutout (WxH = 192x232)mm - - - -
Front plate
Stucke Design
LED indications
3 Status LEDs (TRIP:red/ ALARM: yellow/ SYSTEM: red/ green)
8 Alarm LEDs (parameterizable; colour: red) - -
8 Alarm LEDs (parameterizable; colours: red/green/yellow) - - - -
Membrane keyboard
6 membrane keys (navigation/ parameter setting/reset) - - -
6 membrane keys (navigation/parameter setting/reset /ON/OFF) - - -
Display
Current measurement
1 x CT1 (3-phase; 020 x In; sec. nominal current: see order code) - -
1 x CT-GND1 (1-phase; sec. nominal current: see order code) - -
Voltage measurement
1 x PT1 (3-phase; meas. ranges**: 50 to 200V AC and 200 to 700 V AC) -
1 x PT2 (3-phase: meas. ranges**: 50 to 200V AC and 200 to 700 V AC) -
1 x PT3 (3-phase: meas. ranges**: 50 to 200V AC and 200 to 700 V AC) -
1 x PT-GND1 (1-phase: meas. ranges**: 50 to 200V AC and 200 to 700 V AC) - - - -
Binary inputs
5 pcs (10220V DC/230V AC; rooted) - - - - - --
19 pcs. (10220V DC/230V AC; rooted)
Binary outputs
5 pcs (potential-free contacts, NO) - - - - - --
12 pcs (potential-free contacts, NO)
1 x RS485/422* (Modbus RTU; half- and full duplex*)
1 x USB-A (at front plate; for parameter setting) - - - - - --
1 x CANBUS1 (external communication)

User Manual
Hardwareversion v1-2.x (SYMAP-Compact+ only!)

Table 1-3 Standard equipment of SYMAP-Compact(+)Fx device variants HW v1-2.x
DEVICE TYPE Compact* Compact+
Application
Portection system - - - -
Protection and Control system - - - - -
Dimensions
Housing dimensions (WxHxD = (210x250x87)mm - - - - -
Front plate dimensions (WxHxD = (210x250x4)mm - - - - -
Cutout (WxH = 192x192)mm - - - -
Cutout (WxH = 192x232)mm - - - - -
Front plate
Stucke Design
LED indications
3 Status LEDs

(TRIP: red; ALARM: red/yellow/-flashing; SYSTEM: red/green)
8 Alarm LEDs (parameterizable; colour: red) - - - -
8 Alarm LEDs (parameterizable; colours: red/green/yellow) - - - - -
Membrane keyboard
4 membrane keys (navigation/ parameter setting/reset) - - - -
6 membrane keys (navigation/parameter setting/reset /ON/OFF) - - - - -
Display
Current measurement
1 x CT1 (3-phase; 0,0232 x In; sec. nominal current: see order code) -
1 x CT-GND1 (1-phase; sec. nominal current: see order code) -
Voltage measurement
1 x PT1 (3-phase; meas. ranges**: 0,02 to 200V AC and 0,02 to 1100V AC) - - - -
1 x PT2 (3-phase: meas. ranges**: 0,02 to 200V AC and 0,02 to 1100V AC) - - - - - -
1 x PT3 (3-phase: meas. ranges**: 0,02 to 200V AC and 0,02 to 1100V AC) - - - - - - - -
1 x PT-GND1 (1-phase: meas. ranges**: 0,02 to 200V AC and 0,02 to 1100V
- -
AC)
Binary inputs
7 pcs (24/48/60/220V DC, 110V AC/DC, 230V AC) - - - -
18 pcs. (24/48/60/220V DC, 110V AC/DC, 230V AC) - - - - -
Binary outputs
5 pcs (potential-free contacts, NO) - - - -
12 pcs (potential-free contacts, NO) - - - - -
1 x RS485/422* (Modbus RTU; half- and full* duplex)
1 x USB-A (at front plate; for parameter setting)

User Manual
Table 1-4 Standard equipment of SYMAP-Compact(+) Genset device variants HW v1-2.x

DEVICE VARIANT SYN EC GC ECG GC ECG
Application
Portection and Control - - - - -
Engine control - - - - -
Generator control incl. protective functions - - - -
Engine control and Generator protection - - - -
Dimensions
Housing dimensions (WxHxD = (210x210x87)mm - --
Front plate dimensions (WxHxD = (210x210x4)mm - -
Cutout (WxH = 192x192)mm - -
Cutout (WxH = 192x232)mm - - - -
Front plate
Stucke Design
LED indications
3 Status LEDs

(TRIP: red; ALARM: red/yellow/-flashing; SYSTEM: red/green)
8 Alarm LEDs (parameterizable; colour: red) - -
8 Alarm LEDs (parameterizable; colours: red/green/yellow) - - - -
Membrane keyboard
6 membrane keys (navigation/ parameter setting/reset) - - -
6 membrane keys (navigation/parameter setting/reset /ON/OFF) - - -
Display
Current measurement
1 x CT1 (3-phase; 0,0232 x In; sec. nominal current: see order code) - -
1 x CT-GND1 (1-phase; sec. nominal current: see order code) - -
Voltage measurement
1 x PT1 (3-phase; meas. ranges**: 0,02 to 200V AC and 0,02 to 1100V AC) -
1 x PT2 (3-phase: meas. ranges**: 0,02 to 200V AC and 0,02 to 1100V AC) -
1 x PT3 (3-phase: meas. ranges**: 0,02 to 200V AC and 0,02 to 1100V AC) -
1 x PT-GND1 (1-phase: meas. ranges**: 0,02 to 200V AC and 0,02 to 1100V AC) - - - -
Binary inputs
7 pcs (24/48/60/220V DC, 110V AC/DC, 230V AC) - - - - - --
18 pcs. (24/48/60/220V DC, 110V AC/DC, 230V AC)
Binary outputs
5 pcs (potential-free contacts, NO) - - - - - --
12 pcs (potential-free contacts, NO)
1 x RS485/422* (Modbus RTU; half- and full* duplex)
1 x USB-A (at front plate; for parameter setting) - - - - - --
1 x CANBUS1 (external communication)

User Manual
In compliance with the standards of the American National Standards Institute (ANSI), product
line SYMAP-Compact offers different protection functions according to the device variants.
Table 1-5 Standard equipment of SYMAP-Compact(+)Fx device variants Software functions
Protection functions (ANSI Code)
21B Generator backup protection - - - - - - -
21FL Fault locator - - - - -
24 Overexcitation U/F* - - - - -
25 Synchrocheck - - - - - -
27 Under voltage - - - -
27Q Reactive power/Under Voltage (BDEW) - - - - -
27T Under Voltage, time-dependent (BDEW; Fault ride through) - - - -
32 Directional Power - - - - -
32N/G Zero Power - - -
37 Undercurrent -
40 Loss of Field* - - - - -
46 Negative phase sequence I2 -
46BC Negative phase sequence I2/I1 (broken conductor) -
47 Phase sequence / Phase balance - - - - -
48 Motor start up (incomplete sequence) -
49 Thermal Replica -
50BF Breaker failure -
50/51 Time Overcurrent -
51LR Locked Rotor* -
51MS Motor start* -
50/51G Time Ground Overcurrent -
51/46VR Overcurrent (voltage restrained) - - - - -
52 Pole discordance -
55 Power factor* - - - - -
59 Over voltage - - - -
59AV 10 min overvoltage RMS protection - - - -
59N/G Neutral Voltage Displacement (NVD) - -
64REF Restricted earth fault (REF) -
66 No. Of Starts (Motor)* -
67 Directional Time Overcurrent - - - - -
67G Directional Time Ground Overcurrent - - -
74TC Trip circuit supervision
78 Vector surge - - - -
78S Power Swing / Out-Of-Step* - - - - -
79 Automatic Reclose (AR) -
81 Under / Over Frequency - - - -
81R RoCoF (df/dt) - - - -
81RAV Frequency supervised average (DF/DT) - - - -
86 Lockout relay
87H High impedance phase current differential protection* -
87GH High impedance ground current differential protection* -
95i Harmonics stabilizer -
CLD Cold Load Detection -
CTS Current transformer supervision -
DCVM DC voltage monitoring - - - -
PTS Potential transformer supervision - - - -
SGF 100% stator ground fault protection* - - -
SOTF Switch-On-To-Fault -
Control and Interlocking
Indirect control: 1 switching element; Field interlocking: up to 3 sw. devices) - - - - - - - - -
Indirect control: 5 switching elements; Field interlocking: up to 8 sw. devices) - - - - -
Measurement (indication)
Current measurement values -
Voltage measurement values - - - -
Power measurement values - - - - -
MIN*-/MAX- and average* (AVG) measuring values (statistic)
Recording functions
Alarm control
Active Alarms/Events
Event recorder
Fault recorder
Disturbance recorder**

User Manual
Counters
Operating hours
Energy counters - - - - -
Short circuit currents* -
Switching operations (breaker control) - - - - -
Monitoring functions
Wire fault supervision: Binary inputs*
Short circuit supervision: Binary inputs*
LVM Limit value monitoring
Logical functions
PLC (programmable logic control)
Graphical functions
Configurable menu pages
Trend representation of measuring values*
Vector representation of measuring values
Representation of harmonics
* not available yet
** not available for HW v1-1.0!

User Manual
Table 1-6 Standard equipment of SYMAP-Compact(+) Genset device variants Software

functions
DEVICE VARIANT SYN EC GC ECG GC ECG
Protection functions (ANSI Code)
21B Generator backup protection - - - -
21FL Fault locator - - - -
24 Overexcitation U/F* - -
25 Synchrocheck - -
25A Automatic synchronization -
27 Under voltage - -
27Q Reactive power/Under Voltage (BDEW) - -
27T Under Voltage, time-dependent (BDEW; Fault ride through) - -
32 Directional Power - -
32N/G Zero Power - -
40 Loss of Field* - -
46 Negative phase sequence I2 - -
46BC Negative phase sequence I2/I1 (broken conductor) - -
47 Phase sequence / Phase balance - -
49 Thermal Replica - -
50BF Breaker failure - -
50/51 Time Overcurrent - -
50/51G Time Ground Overcurrent - -
51/46VR Overcurrent (voltage restrained) - -
52 Pole discordance - -
55 Power factor* - -
59 Over voltage - -
59AV 10 min overvoltage RMS protection - -
59N/G Neutral Voltage Displacement (NVD) - -
64REF Restricted earth fault (REF) - -
67 Directional Time Overcurrent - -
67G Directional Time Ground Overcurrent - -
74TC Trip circuit supervision -
78 Vector surge - -
78S Power Swing / Out-Of-Step* - -
81 Under / Over Frequency - -
81R RoCoF (df/dt) - -
81RAV Frequency supervised average (DF/DT) - -
86 Lockout relay -
87H High impedance phase current differential protection* - -
87GH High impedance ground current differential protection* - -
95i Harmonics stabilizer - -
CLD Cold Load Detection - -
CTS Current transformer supervision - -
DCVM DC voltage monitoring -
PTS Potential transformer supervision - -
SOTF Switch-On-To-Fault - -
Control and Interlocking
Indirect control: 3 switching elements; Field interlocking: up to 3 sw. devices) - - -
Indirect control: 5 switching elements; Field interlocking: up to 8 sw. devices) - - - -
Power Management
Generator Control -
Diesel Control - - -
Blackout Management - - - -
Load Management - - - -
Matching device
Measurement (indication)
Current measurement values - -
Voltage measurement values - -
Power measurement values - -
MIN*-/MAX- and average* (AVG) measuring values (statistic) - -
Recording functions
Alarm control
Active Alarms/Events
Event recorder
Fault recorder
Disturbance recorder** -

User Manual
Counters
Operating hours
Energy counters - -
Short circuit currents* - - -
Switching operations (breaker control) - - -
Monitoring functions
Wire fault supervision: Binary inputs*
Short circuit supervision: Binary inputs*
Aux. power supervision: Binary outputs (Shunt 1 and 2 only)*
LVM Limit value monitoring -
Logical functions
PLC (programmable logic control)
Graphical functions
Configurable menu pages
Trend representation of measuring values* -
Vector representation of measuring values -
Representation of harmonics -
* not available yet
** not available for HW v1-1.0!
NOTE: Please note that the above mentioned table represents the availability of protection
functions at the final development state. At this time, only those protective functions
which are described in this manual are available!

User Manual
According to different, available hardware versions the two following tables give conclusion
about all ordering options of all device variants.
Hardware version v1-1.x and HW v1-2.x

Table 1-7 Ordering options for SYMAP-Compact(+)Fx device variants
1 DEVICE VARIANT F0 F1 F2 F3 F4 F1 F2 F3 F4
Ordering
Ordering identifier
option
2 Phase current transformer CT1
A without - - - - - - - -
CT1: 1 A secondary, rated current
B -
(HW v1-1.x: 0,02-20 x In; HW v1-2.x: 0,02-32In)
C -
(HW v1-1.x: 0,02-20 x In; HW v1-2.x: 0,02-32In)
CT1: 1A and 5 A secondary, rated current
D (1A: HW v1-1.x: 0,02-20 x In; HW v1-2.x: 0,02-32In; or - - - - - - - - -
5A: 0,02-5xIn)
CT1-MP: 1 A secondary, rated current
E (M: 0,02-2In, P: HW v1-1.x: 0,02-20 x In; HW v1-2.x: 0,02- - - - - -
32In), device variants without CT-GND2* and without CT3* only!
F (M: 0,02-2In, P: HW v1-1.x: 0,02-20 x In; HW v1-2.x: 0,02- - - - - -
32In), device variants without CT-GND2* and without CT3* only!
0 without (Standard) - - - - - - - -
1 - - - - -
(HW v1-1.x: 0,02-20 x In; HW v1-2.x: 0,02-32In)
2 - - - - -
(HW v1-1.x: 0,02-20 x In; HW v1-2.x: 0,02-32In)
4 Phase current transformer CT3*
A without (Standard) - - - - - - - -
CT3: 1 A secondary, rated current *
B (HW v1-1.x: 0,02-20 x In; HW v1-2.x: 0,02-32In), - - - - -
device variants without CT-GND2* and without CT1-M only!
C (HW v1-1.x: 0,02-20 x In; HW v1-2.x: 0,02-32In), - - - - -
5 Ground current transformer CT-GND1
0 without - - - - - - - -
CT-GND1: 1 A secondary, rated current
1 -
(HW v1-1.x: 0,02-20 x In; HW v1-2.x: 0,02-32In)
2 -
(HW v1-1.x: 0,02-20 x In; HW v1-2.x: 0,02-32In)
3 CT-GND1: 2-3000mA, secondary rated current -
6 Ground current transformer CT-GND2*
A without (Standard) - - - - - - - -
CT-GND2: 1 A secondary rated current *
B (HW v1-1.x: 0,02-20 x In; HW v1-2.x: 0,02-32In), - - - - -
device variants without CT3* and without CT1-M only!
C (HW v1-1.x: 0,02-20 x In; HW v1-2.x: 0,02-32In), - - - - -
CT-GND2: 0,02 - 50 A DC *
D (UL: upt to 35A DC, IEC: up to 41A), - - - - -
7 Power supply Device
0 12 DC* - - - - - - - - -
1 24V DC
2 48V DC
3 60V DC
4 110V AC/DC; 220V DC; 230V AC
8 Binary inputs
A Standard (see device variant)
19 pcs (HW_v1-1.x) or 18 pcs (HW_v1-2.x or HW_v1-3.0*);
B - - - -
SYMAP-Compact F0 bis F4 only!

User Manual
18 pcs. (Un: 24/48/60/220V DC; 110V AC/DC; /230V AC:

C - - - - - - - - -
parameterizable; HW_v1-3.0* only!); only Gen-Set controls
Speed sensing input
D
(magnetic pickup, proximity switch; incl. ANSI 12 and ANSI 14)
9 Binary outputs
0 Standard (see device variant)
1 12 pcs (Standard + 7 pcs) - - - -
10 Analog Inputs and Outputs
A without (Standard)
2 pcs Analog Inputs (420mA);
B and 2 pcs Analog Inputs (Resistor);
and 2 pcs Analog Outputs (420mA)
and 2 pcs Analog Inputs (Resistor);
C and 2 pcs Analog Outputs (420mA);
and 1 pc Analog Output (+/-20mA)
and 1 pc Analog Output (+/-10V)
E and 2 pcs Analog Outputs (420mA);
and 1 pc Analog Output (+/-20mA);
and 2 pcs Analog Outputs (+/-10V)
2 pcs Analog Inputs (420mA)*;
and 2 pcs Analog Inputs (Resistor)*;
and 2 pcs Analog Outputs (420mA)*;
F
and 1 pc Analog Output (+/-20mA)*;
and 1 pc Analog Output (+/-10V)*
and 1 pcs Analog Output (PWM)*
11 Communication SCADA Port-1
0 without (Standard)
1 Profibus DP; RS485
2 Profibus DP (Star); fibre optic (FO)*
3 Profibus DP (Ring/Line); fibre optic (FO)* - - - - -
4 Profinet*
B IEC 61850 (single), fibre optic (FO)& RJ45
C IEC 61850 (single), RJ45
D IEC 61850 (single), fibre optic (FO)
E IEC 61850 (redundancy), RJ45 - - - - -
F IEC 61850 (redundancy), fibre optic (FO) - - - - -
0 IEC 60870-5-103; RS485
1 IEC 60870-5-103; fibre optic (FO)
2 DNP3.0; RS485*
3 DNP3.0; fibre optic (FO)*
4 Modbus TCP/IP (star); RJ45*
5 Modbus TCP/IP (star); fibre optic (FO)*
6 Modbus TCP/IP (ring); RJ45* - - - - -
7 Modbus TCP/IP (ring); fibre optic (FO)* - - - - -
14 Communication Interfaces
B CANBUS3 (Engine control); Gen-Set controls only ! - - - - - - - - -
C USB-A (front plate); Gen-Set controls only ! - - - - - - - - -
D CANBUS3 (Engine control) and USB-A (front plate) - - - - - - - - -
E IRIG-B (modulated/non-modulated: parametrierbar)
Line diff. protection; fibre optic (FO): 2km; POF 2,5 (ST-
F -
connector); multimode 860 nm; diameter 65/125 um
Line diff. protection; fibre optic (FO): 20km; POF 2,5 (ST-
G -
connector); monomode 1300 nm; diameter 9/125 um
H Line diff. protection; RS422: full-duplex, max. distance: 300m -
IRIG-B (modulated/non-modulated: parametrierbar) + Line diff
J -
protection, fibre optic (FO): 2km
I -
protection, fibre optic (FO): 20km
K -
protection; RS422: 300m
15 Frequency measurement

User Manual
G59 (ANSI 78 and 81R acc. to British GridCode);

1 - - - -
CAUTION: no f-measuring at PT3!
16 Additional protection functions
B ANSI 21 Distance protection* - - - - -
ANSI 87 Current differential protection (2-winding transformer
C - - - - -
only!)
D Extended Ground fault protection: YG, TIG - - -
E ANSI 25A: Automatic Synchroniser - - - - - -
F ANSI 21 and ANSI 87 (2-winding transformer only!)* - - - - - - -
G ANSI 21 and Extended Ground fault protection: YG, TIG* - - - - -
ANSI 87 (2-winding transformer only!) and Extended Ground fault
H - - - - - -
protection: YG, TIG
ANSI 87 (2-winding transformer only!) and ANSI 25A: Automatic
I - - - - - - - -
Synchroniser
ANSI 21 und ANSI 87 (2-winding transformer only!) and Extended
J - - - - - - -
Ground fault protection: YG, TIG*
17 User levels
0 Standard, Touch screen (4 user levels)
1 3 x USB-Stick, hardware-coded (4 user levels)*
2 1 key switch (3 user levels)*
3 2 key switches (4 user levels)*
18 Control and interlocking
Direct control: 8 SE, via ext. power circuit module;
B - - - - -
via additional extension board only!*
Indirect control: 8 SE; field interlocking 8 SE;
C - - - - -
via additional extension boards only!
Indirect control: 1 SE; field interlocking: 3 SE; SYMAP-Compact
D - - - -
F0 to F4 only !
19 Safety Device
0 without (Standard device)
1 DTOC protection (redundancy of first degree)* - - - - -
20 Front plate (Design)
A Standard ("Stucke"-Design)
B OEM-Design (on request!)
21 Detached HMI panel
1 Basic device with detached HMI *
2 Basic device without detached HMI*
22 Voltage measurement inputs
B Seperated, neutral conductors (NOTE: no PT-GND1 available!)* - - - - - -
C Seperated, neutral conductors and PT-GND1* - - - - - - -
D Seperated, neutral conductors (NOTE: no PT3 available!)* - - - - - - - - -
23 LED indications front plate
0 Standard ( see device variant)
1 16 parameterizable LEDs*; (on request!) - - - - -
8 LEDs and 8 puhs buttons: parameterizable; SYMAP-Compact+
2 - - - - -
only !
24 Firmware version (FW)
A Standard (latest version)
B Archived version (FW version must be specified when ordering) - - - - -
25 Hardware version (HW)
0 v1-2.x - - - - -
1 v1-1.x
* not available yet

User Manual
Table 1-8 Ordering options for SYMAP-Compact(+) Genset device variants

1 DEVICE VARIANT SYN EC GC ECG* GC ECG*
Ordering
Ordering identifier
option
A without - - - - - -
B - -
(HW v1-1.x: 0,02-20 x In; HW v1-2.x: 0,02-32In)
C - -
(HW v1-1.x: 0,02-20 x In; HW v1-2.x: 0,02-32In)
CT1: 1A and 5 A secondary, rated current
D (1A: HW v1-1.x: 0,02-20 x In; HW v1-2.x: 0,02-32In; or - - -
5A: 0,02-5xIn)
E (M: 0,02-2In, P: HW v1-1.x: 0,02-20 x In; HW v1-2.x: 0,02-32In), - - -
device variants without CT-GND2* and without CT3* only!
F (M: 0,02-2In, P: HW v1-1.x: 0,02-20 x In; HW v1-2.x: 0,02-32In), - - -
device variants without CT-GND2* and without CT3* only!
0 without (Standard) - - - -
1 - - - -
(HW v1-1.x: 0,02-20 x In; HW v1-2.x: 0,02-32In)
2 - - - -
(HW v1-1.x: 0,02-20 x In; HW v1-2.x: 0,02-32In)
4 Phase current transformer CT3*
A without (Standard) - - - -
B (HW v1-1.x: 0,02-20 x In; HW v1-2.x: 0,02-32In), - - - -
C (HW v1-1.x: 0,02-20 x In; HW v1-2.x: 0,02-32In), - - - -
5 Ground current transformer CT-GND1
0 without - - - - - -
1 - - - -
(HW v1-1.x: 0,02-20 x In; HW v1-2.x: 0,02-32In)
2 - - - -
(HW v1-1.x: 0,02-20 x In; HW v1-2.x: 0,02-32In)
3 CT-GND1: 2-3000mA, secondary rated current - - - -
6 Ground current transformer CT-GND2*
A without (Standard) - - - - - -
B (HW v1-1.x: 0,02-20 x In; HW v1-2.x: 0,02-32In), - - - -
C (HW v1-1.x: 0,02-20 x In; HW v1-2.x: 0,02-32In), - - - -
CT-GND2: 0,02 - 50 A DC *
D (UL: upt to 35A DC, IEC: up to 41A), - - - -
7 Power supply Device
0 12 DC*
1 24V DC
2 48V DC
3 60V DC
4 110V AC/DC; 220V DC; 230V AC
8 Binary inputs
19 pcs (HW_v1-1.x) or 18 pcs (HW_v1-2.x or HW_v1-3.0*); SYMAP-
B - - -
Compact F0 bis F4 only!
18 pcs. (Un: 24/48/60/220V DC; 110V AC/DC; /230V AC:
C
parameterizable; HW_v1-3.0* only!); only Gen-Set controls*
Speed sensing input *
D - - - - - -
(magnetic pickup, proximity switch; incl. ANSI 12 and ANSI 14)
9 Binary outputs

User Manual

1 12 pcs (Standard + 7 pcs) - - - - - -
10 Analog Inputs and Outputs
B and 2 pcs Analog Inputs (Resistor);
and 2 pcs Analog Outputs (420mA)
C and 2 pcs Analog Outputs (420mA);
and 1 pc Analog Output (+/-20mA)
and 1 pc Analog Output (+/-10V)
E and 2 pcs Analog Outputs (420mA);
and 1 pc Analog Output (+/-20mA);
2 pcs Analog Inputs (420mA)*;
and 2 pcs Analog Inputs (Resistor)*;
and 2 pcs Analog Outputs (420mA)*;
F
and 1 pc Analog Output (+/-20mA)*;
and 1 pc Analog Output (+/-10V)*
and 1 pcs Analog Output (PWM)*
1 Profibus DP; RS485
2 Profibus DP (Star); fibre optic (FO)*
3 Profibus DP (Ring/Line); fibre optic (FO)* - - - -
4 Profinet* - - - -
B IEC 61850 (single), fibre optic (FO) & RJ45 - - - -
C IEC 61850 (single), RJ45
D IEC 61850 (single), fibre optic (FO)
E IEC 61850 (redundancy), RJ45 - - - -
F IEC 61850 (redundancy), fibre optic (FO) - - - -
0 IEC 60870-5-103; RS485
1 IEC 60870-5-103; fibre optic (FO)
2 DNP3.0; RS485*
3 DNP3.0; fibre optic (FO)*
4 Modbus TCP/IP (star); RJ45*
5 Modbus TCP/IP (star); fibre optic (FO)*
6 Modbus TCP/IP (ring); RJ45*
7 Modbus TCP/IP (ring); fibre optic (FO)* - - - -
14 Communication Interfaces
B CANBUS3 (Engine control); Gen-Set controls only !*
C USB-A (front plate); Gen-Set controls only !
D CANBUS3 (Engine control) and USB-A (front plate)*
E IRIG-B (modulated/non-modulated: parametrierbar)* - - - - - -
Line diff. protection; fibre optic (FO): 2km; POF 2,5 (ST-connector);
F - - - - - -
multimode 860 nm; diameter 65/125 um*
Line diff. protection; fibre optic (FO): 20km; POF 2,5 (ST-connector);
G - - - - - -
monomode 1300 nm; diameter 9/125 um*
H Line diff. protection; RS422: full-duplex, max. distance: 300m* - - - - - -
J - - - - - -
protection, fibre optic (FO): 2km*
I - - - - - -
protection, fibre optic (FO): 20km*
K - - - - - -
protection; RS422: 300m*
15 Frequency measurement
G59 (ANSI 78 and 81R acc. to British GridCode);
1 -
CAUTION: no f-measuring at PT3!
16 Additional protection functions
B ANSI 21 Distance protection* - - - - -

User Manual
C ANSI 87 Current differential protection (2-winding transformer only!) - - - -

D Extended Ground fault protection: YG, TIG - - - - - -
E ANSI 25A: Automatic Synchroniser
F ANSI 21 and ANSI 87 (2-winding transformer only!)* - - - - -
G ANSI 21 and Extended Ground fault protection: YG, TIG* - - - - - -
ANSI 87 (2-winding transformer only!) and Extended Ground fault
H - - - - - -
protection: YG, TIG
ANSI 87 (2-winding transformer only!) and ANSI 25A: Automatic
I - - - - - -
Synchroniser
ANSI 21 und ANSI 87 (2-winding transformer only!) and Extended
J - - - - - -
Ground fault protection: YG, TIG*
17 User levels
1 3 x USB-Stick, hardware-coded (4 user levels)*
2 1 key switch (3 user levels)*
3 2 key switches (4 user levels)*
18 Control and interlocking
Direct control: 8 SE, via ext. power circuit module;
B - - - - -
via additional extension board only!*
Indirect control: 8 SE; field interlocking 8 SE;
C - - - - -
via additional extension boards only!
Indirect control: 1 SE; field interlocking: 3 SE; SYMAP-Compact F0 to
D - - - - - -
F4 only !
19 Safety Device
1 DTOC protection (redundancy of first degree)* - - - - -
20 Front plate (Design)
A Standard ("Stucke"-Design)
B OEM-Design (on request!)
21 Detached HMI panel
1 Basic device with detached HMI *
2 Basic device without detached HMI *
22 Voltage measurement inputs
B Seperated, neutral conductors (NOTE: no PT-GND1 available!)* - - -
C Seperated, neutral conductors and PT-GND1* - - - - - -
D Seperated, neutral conductors (NOTE: no PT3 available!)* - - - -
23 LED indications front plate
0 Standard ( see device variant)
1 16 parameterizable LEDs; (on request!) -- - - -
2 8 LEDs and 8 puhs buttons: parameterizable; SYMAP-Compact+ only ! - - - -
24 Firmware version (FW)
B Archived version (FW version must be specified when ordering) - - - - -
25 Hardware version (HW)
0 v1-2.x - - - -
1 v1-1.x
* not available yet

User Manual
1.4.2 Extension Board System EBS
The Extension Board System EBS consists of several board types for different functions. Each
board is designed for DIN rail mounting according to the standard DIN TS35. Communication
between the boards is established by internal CAN BUS connection (Inter.Link); communication
to the SYMAP-Compact(+) device is Ethernet.
Figure 1-1 Extension Board System EBS connection overview
CAUTION: For EBS constellation the following rules shall apply:

For each extension board system (EBS) there is required only one
communication and power sypply unit EB-PS wich is connected to the basic
device (e.g. SYMAP-Compact(+))!
The maximum number of extension boards which are connected to the
communication and power supply unit EB-PS complies with the power index
of the different board types! The sum of its individual power indexes must not
exceed 100!
The maximum number of binary input extension boards (board types: B-BI8-
A and EB-BI10-OC) which are connected to the communication and power
supply unit EB-PS complies with the maximum number of EBS binary inputs
which can be processed by the firmware of the basic device.
For basic device SYMAP-Compact(+) it is 100 EBS binary inputs.
The maximum number of binary output extension boards (board types: EB-
BI4-R und EB-BI6-R) which are connected to the communication and power
supply unit EB-PS complies with the maximum number of EBS binary
outputs which can be processed by the firmware of the basic device.
For basic device SYMAP-Compact(+) it is 78 EBS binary outputs.

User Manual
1.4.2.1 EB-PS Communication and Power supply
Using extension boards for e.g. binary inputs requires the communication and power supply
board EB-PS. On the one hand this board establishes communication between the connected
boards to the SYMAP-Compact(+) device, on the other hand it provides the necessary power
supply to the other boards.
Communication of EB-PS to the SYMAP-Compact(+) device uses the Ethernet protocol with
the physical interface 2 x RJ45. The second RJ45 is the service interface for parameter setting
of the devices via application software SYMAP-Compact Parameter Tool (SCPT). The service
interface has to be activated via parameter EBS Ethernet switch enabled [P] in the menu:
I/O\General.
Besides main tasks such as communication and power supply board EB-PS provides three
binary inputs and one binary output which is designed as change-over contact.
Readiness of EB-PS is indicated by a System-LED at its front. Separate LEDs for the binary
inputs and the binary output give conclusion about their status.
Figure 1-2 Communication and Power supply: EB-PS

User Manual
1.4.2.2 EB-BI8-A 8 Binary inputs
Board EB-BI8-A provides 8 binary inputs which are devided into two groups with 4 Bis and two
common termials each. Each BI-group can be operated with different nominal voltages to
activate the binary inputs. The applied nominal voltages can be assigned via parameters EBx
Group 1 [P] und EBx Group 2 [P] in the menu: I/O\Binary inputs/EBS Groups.
Separate LEDs for the binary inputs give conclusion about their status.
Power index: 5
Figure 1-3 8 Binary inputs: EB-BI8-A

User Manual
1.4.2.3 EB-BI10-OC 10 Binary inputs (opto-couplers)
Board EB-BI8-A provides 10 binary inputs which are devided into two groups with 5 BIs and two
common termials each. Each BI-group can be operated with different nominal voltages to
activate the binary inputs.
NOTE: It is not possible to operate the binary inputs with different voltages. Different voltages
can only be processed by different variants of board EB-BI10-OC (see order code).
Power index: 5
Figure 1-4 10 Binary inputs (opto-couplers): EB-BI108-OC

User Manual
1.4.2.4 EB-BO4-R 4 Binary outputs (change-over contacts)
Board EB-BO4-R provides 4 binary outputs which are designed for change-over contacts. Each
binary output can individually be adjusted via the parameters of menu I/O\Binary outputs\EBS
Function outputs.
Power index: 18
Figure 1-5 4 Binary outputs (change-over contacts): EB-BO4-R

User Manual
1.4.2.5 EB-BO6-R 6 Binary outputs (normal open NO contacts)
Board EB-BO6-R provides 6 binary outputs which are designed for normal open contacts (NO).
Each binary output can individually be adjusted via the parameters of menu I/O\Binary
outputs\EBS Function outputs.
Power index: 18
Figure 1-6 Connection diagram: EB-BO6-R

User Manual
1.5 Diagnostics and Monitoring
All of the three SYMAP-Compact(+) microprocessors have an integrated system for mutual
monitoring. Self-supervision comprises the internal hardware components of SYMAP-
Compact(+), and is done through cyclical requests and plausibility checks.
SYMAP-Compact detects the following internal faults:

Table 1-9 System self-supervision Functions for error detection
Cycle Delay
Type of error Description Detailed reason
[ms] [s]
Serial Flash Supervision of the Serial Flash 1000 30 Wrong return value (ID) from driver
CU Parameter file Supervision of the Parameter file 1000 30 CRC checksum error
MU Parameter file Supervision of the Parameter file 1000 30 CRC checksum error
GU Parameter file Supervision of the Parameter file 1000 30 CRC checksum error
CU Unit Supervision of the CU processor 1000 10 No Sign Of Life message
MU Unit Supervision of the MU processor 1000 10 No Sign Of Life message
GU Unit Supervision of the GU processor 1000 10 No Sign Of Life message
CAN intern Supervision of the internal communication 1000 1 CAN Bus Off detected
Binary Inputs ADC Supervision of the ADC for the Binary Inputs 100 10 ADC-Test channel deviation
Binary Outputs Supervision of the Binary Outputs 500 10 Wrong feedbacks of the output relays
Table 1-10 System self-supervision Events about error detection

Event Cycle Delay
Description Detailed reason Prio
No. [ms] [s]
Common alarm of system
E9000 - - Active if any of the system supervision events are active
supervision
E9001 Common alarm system total error - - Active if a critical error is active (see column "Prio")
E9002 CU CPU communication failure 1000 - CAN Bus OFF
E9003 MU CPU communication failure 1000 30 No CAN messages
E9004 GU CPU communication failure 1000 30 No CAN messages
E9005 ComU CPU communication failure 1000 30 No CAN messages
E9006 CU Bad CPU communication 1000 - iCAN Rx/Tx buffer overflow
E9007 Firmware constellation invalid 1000 1 Firmware incompatible detected by one controller
E9008 Unknown parameter file 1000 1 Unknown parameter file detected by one controller
E9009 Unknown hardware 1000 1 Unknown hardware detected by one controller

E9010 CU DRAM error - - Write-Read-Test error (@ PowerON)
E9011 CU Serial Flash error 1000 30 Wrong return value (ID) from driver
E9012 CU Binary Inputs ADC SPI error 100 20 Test channel out of range/ Wrong channel address
CU Binary Outputs DAC MAX4820
E9013 500 20 Wrong feedback signals
error
E9014 CU Serial Port 1 Framing error 1000 30 Wrong Baudrate or noise
CU Analog Inputs ADC AD7914
E9015 100 20 Wrong channel numbers from ADC
error
E9016 CU Profibus error 1000 20 VPC3+C Read-Test error
E9017 CU SD card error - - General SD card error
E9018 CU Binary Inputs ADC IC error 10 20 IC communication error (No ACK, Bus error, etc).
E9020 CU Parameter file error 1000 - CRC error

E9021 MU Parameter file error 1000 90 CRC error flag set
E9022 GU Parameter file error 1000 90 CRC error flag set
E9023 ComU Parameter file error 1000 90 CRC error flag set
E9024 Web server file error - - -
Event system feedback loop

E9030 1000 60 More than 500 event changes per sec during 60 seconds
detected
E9031 Serial number error 3000 - Device serial number equals zero.
E9032 Analog IO calibration error 1000 - Analog IOs are not calibrated (file crc error).
E9040 MU kWh counter crc error - - CRC error in SRAM (@ WD reset)

E9041 MU EEPROM error - - Communication error (@ Systemstart)
E9042 MU Calibration file crc error - - CRC error in EEPROM (@ Systemstart)
E9043 MU Overload - - CPU overload error
E9044 MU ADC0 error 10000 30 Wrong channel numbers from ADC
E9045 MU ADC1 error 10000 30 Wrong channel numbers from ADC
E9046 MU Battery low alarm - - The battery voltage reached critical level
E9047 MU Calibration error - - At least one analog input (U/I) is not calibrated
Battery load test is carried out 5s after device reset,
E9048 MU Battery defect - -
thereafter every 30 days. Event reset by device reset.

User Manual
E9049 DCVCF CRC Fehler - - -

E9050 DCVCF Kalibrierungsfehler - - -
E9060 EBS communication error - - -
E9061 EBS version incompatibility - - -
E9062 EBS constellation error - - -
E9063 EBS firmware incompatibility - - -
E9064 EBS module failure - - -
E9065 EBS module periphery error - - -
E9066 EBS calibration error - - -
NOTE: All system supervision events can only be reset with ACK.
Following the detection of an internal error, the measures listed in Table 1-11 will be
performed. If these measures are not successful, event [E9000] will be activated, which can be
assigned to any binary output.
Table 1-11 System self-supervision Debugging and error message

Type of error Measure Activation of event [E9000]
Serial Flash Reset the Serial Flash controller after third repetition
CU Parameter file System reboot after third repetition
MU Parameter file System reboot after third repetition
GU Parameter file System reboot after third repetition
CU Unit Initialize the CAN controller again after third repetition
MU Unit Initialize the CAN controller again after third repetition
GU Unit Initialize the CAN controller again after third repetition
CAN intern Initialize the CAN controller again immediately
Binary Inputs ADC Reset, and reread of ADC (analog digital converter) values after third repetition
Binary Outputs Reset the relay driver. Write the relay driver again after third repetition
CAUTION: In case of a power supply failure, all binary outputs are being de-energized!
While booting mode the states of all binary outputs are maintained!
Following errors will not be detected by SYMAP-Compact(+):

All three of processor units monitor each other. This monitoring is no longer available if two of
the three controllers have failed.
Monitoring of the following components is being prepared:

Ethernet controller
External CANBUS
Serial communication channel

User Manual
1.6 SYMAP-Compact Terminal Connections
The SYMAP-Compact(+) field interface is via plug connectors at the back of the device. This
makes device replacement simple. The terminal blocks are divided into the following groups:
Analog inputs for measurement
Binary inputs and outputs
1.6.1 Analog Inputs for Measurement
Depending on the device variant and ordering options, SYMAP-Compact(+) provides a

different number of measurement inputs for current and voltage measurement.
NOTE: The SYMAP-Compact(+) has been designed to be operated with conventional

current and potential transformers.
If current transformer plug is disconnected (SEOIL plugs only, see ordering option), circuits
close automatically to preclude interruption of CT circuits. All of the possible SYMAP-
Compact(+) connections for current and potential transformers are listed below:
Three phase current measurement inputs CT1-M/P*
Optionally**: additional three phase current measurement inputs CT2-M/P
(e.g. two-winding transformer differential protection)
Optionally**: additional three phase current measurement inputs CT3-M/P
(e.g. three-winding transformer differential protection, not available yet!)
Single phase current measurement input CT-GND1 (ground current)
Optionally***: additional single phase current measurement input CT-GND2
(e.g. applications with a second ground current measurement)
Three-phase voltage measurement inputs PT1 (e.g. voltage at incoming feeder)
Three-phase voltage measurement inputs PT2 (e.g. voltage at busbar 1)
Three-phase measurement inputs PT3 (e.g. voltage at busbar 2)**
Single-phase measurement input PT-GND1 (residual voltage)
* CT1: separate terminal connections: CT1-M for measuring winding and CT1-P for protection winding of current
transformers; SYMAP-Compact+ only
** SYMAP-Compact+ only!
*** SYMAP-Compact+: device variants without CT3 and CT1-M only! (not available yet!)
CAUTION: When using device variant equipped with CT1-M, e.g. for connecting separate
measuring core of an external CT to measure operating currents with a higher
accuracy, all terminals of CT1-M must be connected to the external CT!
NOTE: In case of SYMAP-Compact+ device variants with protection (CT1-P) and

measurement (CT1-M) transformers, the protection functions process values of CT1-
M for current values which are less than or equal to 2 x In. For higher current values
the measuring values of the CT1-P are used.
In case of a current transformer failure at CT1-M and a current-carrying CT connected
to CT1-P, all current protection functions will use current values within the range of 2
x In.

User Manual
CAUTION: If any of the voltage measurement inputs (e.g. PT1) is interconnected by V-

connection of the voltage transformers to a power system, the relay terminal N
must not be connected to anything!
If combined transformers (combined sensors) are used, the SYMAP-Compact(+) allows

connection of feeding current/voltage:
3 current measurement inputs for feeding current
3 voltage measurement inputs for feeding voltage
The following values are measured via analog inputs and displayed:
Phase-to-Phase and Phase-to-Ground voltages of incoming feeder, busbar 1 and busbar 2
Three-phase feeding current (average/maximum)
Frequencies of all systems (minimum/maximum)
Ground current (maximum)
Residual voltage
Operating hours
1.6.2 Binary Inputs and Outputs
SYMAP-Compact(+) offers the following binary inputs and relay outputs:

5*/(19)** binary inputs (Hardwareversion v1-1.x)
7*/(18)** binary inputs (Hardwareversion v1-2.x; not available yet!)
5*/(12)** binary outputs (output relays)
* SYMAP-Compact F0 to F4 only!
** SYMAP-Compact F0 to F4: ordering option ; SYMAP-Compact+: Standard
NOTE: Hardware version v1-1.x provides up to 19 binary inputs with interconnected (rooted)
common terminals (Fct 10 to Fct 28: GND2).
Hardware version v1-2.x provides up to 18 binary inputs. Thus, Fct 28 is not
available!
The two binary inputs Fct. 26 and Fct. 27 are equipped with a seggregated common
terminal each (Fct. 26: GND 11 and Fct. 27: GND 10). Binary inputs Fct. 10 to Fct.
25 are provided with a rooted common terminal (GND2).
1.6.3 Service interface
To operate the SYMAP-Compact(+) device by using a PC/notebook, there is a USB-A interface

located at the front of the device, and a mini-USB interface on the side. The side interface is
useful when the relay is installed in switchgear where the panel front swings open for access.

User Manual
1.6.4 Grounding Instructions
Hardware version 1-1.x
Figure 1-7 Grounding instruction for SYMAP-Compact(+) HW v1-1.x

User Manual
Hardware version 1-2.x (SYMAP-Compact+ only!)
Figure 1-8 Grounding instruction for SYMAP-Compact(+) HW v1-2.x

User Manual
Ground straps of 250mm in length and above are to be used to connect the earthing connection
point of SYMAP-Compact(+) housing to the panel housing. The following table provides
information about standard cross sections and dimensions of ground straps to be applied
according to their lengths.
Table 1-12 Ground straps Standard cross sections and dimensions
Length (l) Cross section (A) Diameter of wire (d) Dimensions (width x thickness)
[mm] [mm2] [mm] [mm2]
250 500 6 2.75 9x1
500 750 10 3.55 14 x 1,5
750 1000 16 4.49 20 x 1,6

User Manual
1.6.5 SYMAP-Compact Connection Diagrams

NOTE: The following connection diagrams are designed according to order code version
v1-6.x for both, hardware version v1-1.x and v1-2.x!
1.6.5.1 Hardware version 1-1.1
Connection diagram SYMAP-Compact F0
Figure 1-9 SYMAP-Compact F0; HW v1-1.1; as from order code version v1-6.x

User Manual

User Manual

User Manual

User Manual

User Manual
Connection diagram SYMAP-Compact SYN
Figure 1-14 SYMAP-Compact SYN; HW v1-1.1; as from order code version v1-6.x

User Manual
Connection diagram SYMAP-Compact GC
Figure 1-15 SYMAP-Compact GC; HW v1-1.1; as from order code version v1-6.x

User Manual
Connection diagram SYMAP-Compact+F1
Figure 1-16 SYMAP-Compact+F1; HW v1-1.1; as from order code version v1-6.x

User Manual

User Manual

User Manual

User Manual
Connection diagram SYMAP-Compact+GC
Figure 1-20 SYMAP-Compact+GC; HW v1-1.1; as from order code version v1-6.x

User Manual
Communication interfaces options
Figure 1-21 SYMAP-Compact(+): Communication interfaces (options); HW v1-1.1; as from order

code version v1-6.x
NOTE: Communication options vary according to the ordering code!

User Manual
1.6.5.2 Hardware version 1-2.2 (SYMAP-Compact+ only!)

User Manual

User Manual

User Manual

User Manual
Connection diagram SYMAP-Compact+GC
Figure 1-26 SYMAP-Compact+GC; HW v1-2.2; as from order code version v1-6.x

User Manual
Communication interfaces options (SYMAP-Compact+ only!)
Figure 1-27 SYMAP-Compact(+): Communication interfaces (options); HW v1-2.2; as from order

code version v1-6.x
NOTE: Communication options vary according to the ordering code!

User Manual
1.6.6 Plug-In Connection for Auxiliary Supply
Press
here
Maintain depressed and push up

Maintain depressed and push up
Figure 1-28 Releasing plug-in locking of device supply
NOTE: To release the plug-in connector, please press the lower area of the grooved side
where the lock catches.

User Manual
1.7 Extension Board System EBS Terminal connections
1.7.1 EBS connection diagrams
EB-PS Communication and Power supply
Figure 1-29 Connection diagram: EB-PS
EB-BI8-A 8 Binary inputs
Figure 1-30 Connection diagram: EB-BI8-A

User Manual
EB-BI10-OC 10 Binary inputs (opto-couplers)
Figure 1-31 Connection diagram: EB-BI10-OC
EB-BO4-R 4 Binary outputs (change-over contacts)

User Manual
EB-BO6-R 6 Binary outputs (normal open NO contacts)

User Manual
1.8 Mounting instruction
Before connecting and start-up the SYMAP-Compact(+), it is necessary to install the device
into a housing or switchgear cabinet.
The following mounting instruction describes the installation of the SYMAP-Compact+ device
as an example!
Figure 1-34 Detailed 3-view-drawing of SYMAP-Compact+

User Manual
First, it is necessary to prepare a cut-out in the door panel of the cubicle. The only restriction
regarding this is the size of the excisting installation surface. This may not fall below the overall
dimensions of the SYMAP-Compact+ device.
The next figure displays the dimensions of the device and the required cut-out:
Figure 1-35 Mounting and cut-out dimensions

User Manual
1. After finishing the cut-out it shall look like the following example.
Figure 1-36 Cut-out for the SYMAP-Compact+ device
2. Now, the device can be fit into the door panel.
Figure 1-37 SYMAP-Compact+ device placement in cut-out

User Manual
3. For keeping the device position in the cut-out, employ a slight counter-pressure to the
front plate of the device and look to the backside. Each side of the housing provides four
bolt heads for installation of the fixing clamps:
Figure 1-38 Bolt heads (e.g. on the top)
4. While holding the SYMAP-Compact+ device, click one fixing clamp to the that bolt head
which is next to the rear of the housing:
Figure 1-39 Installing fixing clamps

User Manual
5. Insertation of the device into the panel cutout shall be conducted with a slight offset for
vertical and horizontal direction.To bring the head of the bolts into the cutout one after
the other please push the device alternateingly into the cutout in the following order:
right, top, left, and down until the seal is evenly seated on the installation surface (door
panel).
Figure 1-40 Device to be inserted with slight offset during installation into cutout

User Manual
6. Now, turn the fixing clamp to the second bolt head with slight pressure. Hearing a click
indicates the correct installation.
Figure 1-41 Fixing clamp in the bolt head
7. Thereafter, install the remaining three fixing clamps on the other sides of the housing.
Now the four fastened fixing clamps can be tightened by using a screwdriver.
Figure 1-42 Finished installation
NOTE: Unmounting or changing the SYMAP-Compact+ device can be done in reverse

order.

User Manual
2 Operation of SYMAP-Compact(+)
This section describes the user interface (HMI) which comprises the display elements and the
keypads.
2.1 Front Panel
The interface of the SYMAP-Compact(+) consists of a large graphic LCD touchscreen.

The following figures represent the two different front panels and their elements in detail.
1
Compact
SYMAP- COMPACT
2 TRIP
7 ALARM 3
SYSTEM
20.06.2012 15:16:39
5 5
ALARM
Figure 2-1 Display and operating elements SYMAP-Compact front panel
1. Light sensor for display brightness control (in preparation)

2. Back-lit LCD touchscreen (screen refresh rate: 250ms, cyclic)
3. Alarm LEDs for indication of protection trip, alarms and system state
4. Key switchtes (ordering option) for selection of user levels
5. Parameterizable function keys
6. USB-A communication interface for PC/Notebook (SCPT software)
7. Eight configurable LED indications (mono-coloured: red)

User Manual
Compact
SYMAP- COMPACT+
1
TRIP
7 3 ALARM
SYSTEM
2
20.06.2012 16:19:42
4
I
6
ALARM
0
Figure 2-2 Display and operating elements SYMAP-Compact+ front panel
1. Light sensor for display brightness control (in preparation)

2. Back-lit LCD touchscreen (screen refresh rate: 250ms, cyclic)
3. Alarm LEDs for indication of protection trip, alarms and system state
4. Parameterizable function keys
5. Eight configurable LED indications (multi-coloured: green/red/yellow) and labelling area for
LED-indications (inserted strip, see Figure 2-3 : mm as unit of measure)
6. USB-A communication interface for PC/Notebook (SCPT software)
7. Key switchtes (ordering option) for selection of user levels
8. Optionally: 8 additional push buttons (not parameterizable; button operation activates
event)

User Manual
Figure 2-3 Insertable label strip for LEDs

User Manual
2.2 Back Panel
2.2.1 Reference to documentation !

2.2.1.1 Hardware version v1-1.x
The lable See documentation at the back panel of SYMAP-Compact(+) points to the location
of an exchangeable, rechargeable battery within the device.
Figure 2-4 HW v1-1.x: Overview back panel

User Manual
2.2.1.2 Hardware version v1-2.x (SYMAP-Compact+ only!)
Figure 2-5 HW v1-2.x: Overview back panel

User Manual
2.3 Menu Structure
On its LC-display, the SYMAP-Compact(+) offers several display options. Device settings and
controls are also shown. The user can navigate the menus using the resistive touchscreen. PC-
created graphics, alarms, events and measured values can be transferred to the SYMAP-
Compact(+). The large graphic display allows the user to view all important data at a glance.
G
CT2-M/P
CT1-M/P
PT1
30.08.2012 17:29:34
2072,56 A
20.00 kV
50,01 Hz
PT1 (Ph-Ph)
71,5 A
Frequency
CT2
CT1
start page
user page
assigned to
Figure 2-6 Menu tree

User Manual
2.4 Start page / Main menu
The Main Menu appears as a start page after switching on orresetting the SYMAP-
Compact(+).
Figure 2-7 Main Menu as start page
The start page may be changed into a configured User Page, containing custom information
such as a bay single diagram or an alarm page.
NOTE: Up to four different user pages can be set up using SYMAP-Compact Parameter
Tool (SCPT) software.
Figure 2-8 User Page as start page example
To navigate from the User Page to the main menu, a hotkey may be set up on the User Page
which is assigned to the start page. For this, a pre-defined Main Menu hotkey is available via
the library in SCPT software (see Figure 2-8).

User Manual
From the menu page Main Menu the following hotkeys are available in order to navigate back
through the menu:
Back: changes to previous menu page
Home: changes directly to start page
Indications of the lower status line:
Lower display status line: symbol for indicating the currently, active parameter set
Lower display status line: symbol for indicating effective Disturbance recorder
Figure 2-9 Main menu including navigation hotkeys
2.4.1 Operating
Menu Operating provides all of the relevant data generated while the SYMAP-Compact(+) is
in operating mode. The following operating data is available:
measuring values of current and voltage inputs,
measuring values during synchronizing process,
information about SD-card and Debug menu, and
measuring values of power management system PMS (availability depends on device
variant)
Figure 2-10 Operating data

User Manual
2.4.1.1 Meters
There are several measured value pages which can be used to view measured values in detail,
such as:
Figure 2-11 Operating Meters
Meters \ Voltage/Frequency
Depending on the SYMAP-Compact(+) device variant and according to the number of voltage
measuring inputs PT1, PT2 and PT3, phase-to-ground voltages and phase-to-phase voltages
will be displayed phase-selectively. Displayed frequency values refer to the voltage measuring
inputs.
Figure 2-12 Operating measurements Voltage/Frequency

User Manual
Meters \ Current
This page displays information on current values. In addition to the currently measured values,
changes from previous measurements are calculated and the maximum value is saved.
Differential currents are displayed only for devices with differential current input.
The bargraphs indicate the current trends as a percentage of the nominal value. Depending on
the set values of the bargraphs colour thresholds (parameters), the bargraphs show the colours
green, orange or red.
Figure 2-13 Operating measurements Current
Meters \ Power
Display of power values accords to the selected current measurement input by Ref hotkey.
This selection hotkey determines which current and voltage measurement input are used for
power value display.
The first row displays total power measurement values; it follows a phase-selective
representation according to phases L1, L2 and L3. Measured quantities are as follows:
Active Power P [kW]
Reactive Power Q [kvar]
Power Factor PF
Apparent Power S [kVA]
Figure 2-14 Operating measurements Power

User Manual
Referencing of displayed power measurement values by Ref hotkey:

Common, device-independent sign definition of active power P, reactive power Q and power
factor PF
The real power factor PF determines the ration between the amount of active power P to the
apparent power S:
PF = |P| / S
with:
P: active power
S: apparent power
The real power factor PF does not carry any sign and is given in a range between 0 to 1.
Displayed power measurement values of the system (active power P, reactive power Q,
apparent power S and power factor PF) are deducted from measured phase currents and
voltages.
Depending on which measuring inputs are used to measure phase currents and voltages, there
are different selection options of touchscreen hotkey Ref for referencing the displayed power
values:
CT1: Displayed power measurement values, based on phase currents measured by
CT1 and measurement of the voltages by that measuring input which is assigned
to Parameter PT reference [P9410].
CT2: Displayed power measurement values, based on phase currents measured by
CT2 and measurement of the voltages by that measuring input which is assigned
to Parameter PT reference [P9413].
NOTE: The assignment of the voltage measurement input (PT1, PT2 or PT3) to the current
measurement input CT1 (or CT2) should be done using the following parameters, in
the submenu SYSTEM\Measuring\Power:
PT reference [P9410] for CT1 and
PT reference [P9413] for CT2.

User Manual
Common, device-independent sign definition of power mesurement values
Load Reference Arrow System (LRAS)
2.Quadrant 1.Quadrant
Generator (lagging) Load (inductive)
P < 0: Active power output P > 0: Active power (consuming)

Q > 0: Ind. react. power (consuming) Q > 0: Ind. react. power (consuming)
PF > 0 (inductive) PF > 0 (inductive)
-P P
Generator (leading) Load (capacitive)

Q < 0: Ind. react. power output Q < 0: Ind. react. power output
PF > 0 (capacitive) PF > 0 (capacitive)
-Q
Im
Generator Reference Arrow System (GRAS)

Re
Q
Load (capacitive) Generator (leading)
P < 0: Active power (consuming) P > 0: Active power output

Q > 0: Ind. react. power output Q > 0: Ind. react. power output
-P P
Load (inductive) Generator (lagging)

Q < 0: Ind. react. power (consuming) Q < 0: Ind. react. power (consuming)
-Q
Figure 2-15 Common sign definition of power measurement values

User Manual
Device-depending sign definition of active power P, reactive power Q and power factor PF
To differentiate the different AC loads without any further indicator and to control the reactive
power by the power factor, in SYMAP-Compact(+) devices the power factor shows the sign of
the reactive power.
Device-dependent sign definition of power mesurement values
Load Reference Arrow System (LRAS)
Generator (lagging) Load (inductive)

Q > 0: Ind. react. power (consuming) Q > 0: Ind. react. power (consuming)
-P P
Generator (leading) Load (capacitive)

Q < 0: Ind. react. power output Q < 0: Ind. react. power output
PF < 0 (capacitive) PF < 0 (capacitive)
-Q
Im
Generator Reference Arrow System (GRAS)

Re
Q
Load (capacitive) Generator (leading)

Q > 0: Ind. react. power output Q > 0: Ind. react. power output
-P P
Load (inductive) Generator (lagging)

Q < 0: Ind. react. power (consuming) Q < 0: Ind. react. power (consuming)
PF < 0 (inductive) PF < 0 (inductive)
-Q
Figure 2-16 Device-depending sign definition of power measurement values

User Manual
Sign definition of active power P and reactive power Q

The positive or negative sign indication of the measurement quantities P and Q depends on:
the connection of the potential transformer (as reference) and
the connection of the current transformer and
the parameter settings to invert the direction of current measurement per phase in CT1:
o Direction L1 (Measuring) [P662],
o Direction L1 (Protection) [P665],
o Direction L3 (Protection) [P667], or
the parameter settings to invert the direction of current measurement per phase in CT2:
o Direction L3 (Protection) [P673], and
the setting of parameter:
o Definition [P9411] to define power direction of POWER CT1 or
o Definition [P9414] to define power direction of POWER CT2 and
the direction of the primary load flow (while normal operating) in the feeder which is
considered for power measurement.
NOTE: The above mentioned is only valid for a three-phase system whith clockwise field of
rotation!
When SYMAP-Compact(+) is connected and configured according to the LRAS, active power
P (ohmic load) and reactive power Q (inductive load) will be indicated with a positive sign. The
power factor is also indicated as positive. In case of a capacitive load the reactive power as well
as the power factor shows a negative sign.
According to the above mentioned, the following graphics show the sign definition of the
measuring values P, Q and PF as examples:

User Manual
LRAS (e.g. Feeder)

L1
U12 U31
L2
U23
L3
17
U'12 U'31 SYMAP-Compact F3
19
U'23
PT1
21
U'L1 U'L2 U'L3
26
15
U'GND PT-GND1
16
I1 I2 I3
P1 I'1
S1
1
I'1
2
P2 S2
P1 S1 I'2
3
I'2 CT1
4
P2 S2
P1 S1 I'3
5
I'3
6
S2
P2
I'GND
7
CT-GND1
8
Parameter settings:
SCPT SYSTEM\Measuring\Power:
POWER CT1:
PT reference [P9410] = PT1
Direction [P9411] = 0
SCPT SYSTEM\Nominals\Current transformers (CT):
CT1:
Direction L1 (Measuring) [P662] = 0
Direction L1 (Protection) [P665] = 0
Sign indication of measuring values P, Q and PF:
Device menu Main Manu\Operating\Meters\Power:
Active power P: P > 0"

Reactive power Q and
Power factor PF: Q > 0" and LF > 0" if the current lags the voltage (inductive load)
or
Q < 0" and LF < 0" if the currentleads the voltage (capacitive load)
Figure 2-17 Example: Power measurement of outgoing feeder (LRAS) connection diagram
and sign definition of measuring values P, Q and PF
CAUTION: Earthing of the secondary side of the phase current transformers must take place
at that side where the secondary side of the CTs are interconnected!

User Manual
LRAS (e.g. incoming feeder)

L1
U12 U31
L2
U23
L3
17
19
U'23
PT1
21
U'L1 U'L2 U'L3
26
15
U'GND PT-GND1
16
I1 I2 I3
P1 I'1
S1
1
I'1
2
P2 S2
P1 S1 I'2
3
I'2 CT1
4
P2 S2
P1 S1 I'3
5
I'3
6
S2
P2
I'GND
7
CT-GND1
8
Parameter settings:
POWER CT1:
CT1:
Device menu Main Manu\Operating\Meters\Power:
Active power P: P < 0"

Power factor PF: Q < 0" and LF < 0" if the current lags the voltage (generator, leading)
or
Q > 0" and LF > 0" if the currentleads the voltage (generator, lagging)
Figure 2-18 Example: Power measurement of incoming feeder (LRAS) connection diagram
NOTE: Any change in one of the conditions for sign definition of the measured power values
will lead to a change in the sign for measured values of P and Q!

User Manual
GRAS (e.g. incoming feeder)

L1
U12 U31
L2
U23
L3
17
19
U'23
PT1
21
U'L1 U'L2 U'L3
26
15
U'GND PT-GND1
16
I1 I2 I3
P1 I'1
S1
1
I'1
2
P2 S2
P1 S1 I'2
3
I'2 CT1
4
P2 S2
P1 S1 I'3
5
I'3
6
S2
P2
I'GND
7
CT-GND1
8
Parameter settings:
POWER CT1:
CT1:
Device menu Main Menu\Operating\Meters\Power:
Active power P: P > 0"

Power factor PF: Q > 0" and LF > 0" if the current lags the voltage (generator, leading)
or
Q < 0" and LF < 0" if the current leads the voltage (generator, lagging)
Figure 2-19 Example: Power measurement of incoming feeder (GRAS) connection diagram

User Manual
Meters \ Counter
The Counter page provides energy counting values and counting values of operating hours.
Figure 2-20 Operating measurements Counter
Energy counting
For each measuring sample, the values of different power quantities are calculated. At the end
of the nominal period each power value is multiplied by the duration of the nominal period which
provides the energy values for one nominal period. Displayed energy conuting values represent
summation of all the energy values of one nominal period individually for all the different energy
quantities.
Absolute/Temporary energy counting values of different power quantities:
o positive, active power Wp+
o negative, active power Wp-
o positive, reactive power Wq+
o negative, reactive power Wq-
Absolute/Temporary operating hours:
o h: hours
o m: minutes
o s: seconds
Reset
The Reset touch-screen button only refers to temporary counting values (energy values and
operating hours). After reset of temporary counting values counting starts from start value 0.
Using the reset function it is possible to have counting values for a certain time period without
deleting the counting values for the total operating time.

User Manual
Meters \ Ground
The Ground page shows all measured or calculated residual voltage and ground current
values.
Figure 2-21 Operating measurements Ground
Referencing of displayed ground measurement values UG and IG:
According to different manners of building the measurement quantities of the zero sequence
system, there are following variedly generated measuring values available:
UG,PT1: residual voltage calculated from the phase voltages of PT1
UG,PT-GND1: residual voltage directly measured via PT-GND1
IG,CT1: ground current calculated from phase currents of CT1 (3 x I0,CT1 = IG,CT1)
IG,CT2: ground current calculated from phase currents of CT2 (3 x I0,CT2 = IGND,CT2)
IG,CT-GND1: ground current directly measured via CT-GND1
Meters \ U/I Complex

The U/I Complexpage shows voltage and/or current measuring values (signals) which can be
displayed in tabulated form or values via vector diagram.
Figure 2-22 Selection of display representation

User Manual
Selection
Up to six selectable voltage and current measurement quantities can be displayed via vector
diagram. The measurement quantities (Signal button) have to be assigned to the vector
(Channel button) using the touchscreen. One additional reference channel (selection option
Ref. signal) is used to define the reference vector (0) for the alignment of all other vectors
within the diagram.
NOTE: That measurement quantity (signal) which is assigned to the Ref. signal channel is
not to be displayed in the vector diagram!
The magnitude of measuring quantities can be displayed using the Unit ref. button, either as
absolute value (units: [V], [A]), or as relative value ([%]).
Figure 2-23 Operating measurements Selection of meas. displayed quantities as vectors
Vector diagram
The colour serves as the corresponding factor between vector and measuring quantity (signal)
listed on the left side of the diagram.
Figure 2-24 Operating measurements selected U/I values via vector diagram

User Manual
Tabulated form
Each available voltage and current measurement quantity (signal) is displayed according to its
magnitude and phase angle.
Figure 2-25 Operating measurements U/I values in tabulated form
Selection and representation (tabulated form) of measuring quantity

The indicated absolute unit of the measuring value depends on the type of the selected
measuring quantity.
NOTE: The reference quantity of the measuring values relative unit depends on the physical
measuring quantity (see table below)!
Depending on the SYMAP-Compact(+) device variant the following measuring quantities are
available:
Table 2-1 U/I values in tabulated form measuring quantities
Name of meas. Absolute Relative
Description Reference quantity of the relative unit
quantity unit unit
U12,PT1 Phase-to-phase voltage U12, PT1 V % Voltage (L-L) [P603], [P613], [P623]
UL1,PT1 Phase voltage UL1, PT1 V % Voltage (L-L) [P603], [P613], [P623]
UG; PT1 Residual voltage UG, PT1 V % (Voltage (L-L) [P603], [P613], [P623]) / 3
Uo,PT1 Zero sequence voltage Uo, PT1 V % (Voltage (L-L) [P603], [P613], [P623]) / 3
U1,PT1 Positive sequence voltage U1, PT1 V % (Voltage (L-L) [P603], [P613], [P623]) / 3
U2,PT1 Negative sequence voltage U2, PT1 V % (Voltage (L-L) [P603], [P613], [P623]) / 3
U23 PT2 Phase-to-phase voltage U23, PT2 V % Voltage (L-L) [P603], [P613], [P623]
UG,PT2 Residual voltage UG, PT2 V % (Voltage (L-L) [P603], [P613], [P623]) / 3
U12,PT3 Phase-to-phase voltage U12, PT3 V % Voltage (L-L) [P603]; [P613]; [P623]
UL1,PT3 Phase voltage UL1, PT3 V % Voltage (L-L) [P603]; [P613]; [P623]
UG,PT3 Residual voltage UG, PT3 V % (Voltage (L-L) [P603], [P613], [P623]) / 3
UG,PT-GND1 Residual voltage UG, PT-GND1 V % Residual voltage [P606]; [P616]; [P626]
IL1,CT1 Phase current IL1, CT1 A % Current [P604]; [P614]; [P624]

User Manual

IG,CT1 Ground current IG, CT1 A % Current [P604]; [P614]; [P624]
Io,CT1 Zero sequence current Io, CT1 A % Current [P604]; [P614]; [P624]
I1,CT1 Positive sequence current I1, CT1 A % Current [P604]; [P614]; [P624]
I2,CT1 Negative sequence current I2, CT1 A % Current [P604]; [P614]; [P624]
IG,CT2 Ground current IG, CT2 A % Current [P604]; [P614]; [P624]
Io,CT2 Zero sequence current Io, CT2 A % Current [P604]; [P614]; [P624]
I1,CT2 Positive sequence current I1, CT2 A % Current [P604]; [P614]; [P624]
I2,CT2 Negative sequence current I2, CT2 A % Current [P604]; [P614]; [P624]
IG,CT-GND1 Ground current IG, CT-GND1 A % Ground current [P607]; [P617]; [P627]
IdG Ground differential current IdG A % Ground current [P607]; [P617]; [P627]
Meters \ DC Voltage
This submenu shows the actual measurement values of DC voltage measurement.
Figure 2-26 Operating measurements DC voltage values
Meters \ Harmonics
This submenu shows the harmonic content (fundamental oscillation and harmonics) of a
selected measuring value which is represented in tabulated form and as bar chart.
Harmonics are additional, sinusoidal oscillations with frequencies fx which are multiple integers
of the measuring quantitys fundamental frequency f1 (= nominal frequency fn). The fundamental
oscillation and the harmonics are represented on the display according to their ordinal number n
(multiple integer of the fundamental frequency n = fx/f1) and the magnitude of the measuring
value:
Fundamental oscillation: ordinal number 1, and
Harmonics: ordinal number 2 to 17.
The magnitude of the fundamental oscillation is shown as an absolute value; the magnitude of
the harmonics as percentage referrring to the absolute value of the measuring signals
fundamental.

User Manual
Figure 2-27 Harmonics Selection and table of measuring quantity
Selection and representation (tabulated form) of measuring quantity

The measuring quantity which is represented on the display is selected by selection hotkey of
the touchscreen. The indicated unit of the measuring values fundamental oscillation depends
on the type of the selected measuring quantity. Depending on the SYMAP-Compact(+) device
variant the following measuring quantities are available:
Table 2-2 Harmonics Selection of measuring quantity
Unit of Unit of
Name of meas. quantity Description Harmonics
Fundamental
U12,PT1 Phase-to-phase voltage U12, PT1 V %
UL1,PT1 Phase voltage UL1, PT1 V %
Uo,PT1 Zero sequence voltage Uo, PT1 V %
U1,PT1 Positive sequence voltage U1, PT1 V %
U2,PT1 Negative sequence voltage U2, PT1 V %
U23 PT2 Phase-to-phase voltage U23, PT2 V %
UG,PT-GND1 Residual voltage UG, PT-GND1 V %
IL1,CT1 Phase current IL1, CT1 A %
Io,CT1 Zero sequence current Io, CT1 A %
I1,CT1 Positive sequence current I1, CT1 A %
I2,CT1 Negative sequence current I2, CT1 A %
Io,CT2 Zero sequence current Io, CT2 A %
I1,CT2 Positive sequence current I1, CT2 A %
I2,CT2 Negative sequence current I2, CT2 A %

User Manual
Graphical representation
Operating Diagram hotkey opens menu page Harmonics diagram which shows a bar chart
with the percentage distribution of the total of all different harmonics.
The amount of the fundamental oscillation A1 and the amount of the harmonics Ax are
represented as percentage according to their ordial number n = fx/f1 referring to the measuring
quantitys fundamental oscillation.
Figure 2-28 Harmonics bar chart
Meters \ Analog inputs

This menu page shows all measurement values of the analog inputs AI1 to AI4.
Figure 2-29 Operating measurements Measurement values of analog inputs

User Manual
2.4.1.2 Synchronizer
While synchronizing process all relevant measurement values of each synchronizing unit
(Sync. unit 1, Sync. unit 2 or Sync. unit 3). are displayed via the Synchronizer menu page.
Figure 2-30 Operating Selection of synchronizer unit
Depending on parameter setting of menu SETUP and the synchronizing units, it is possible to
perform a manual start of the synchronizing functions using the Manual Start hotkey.
NOTE: Hotkey Manual Start only appears at the synchronizing page if function Start
synchronizer manually is assigned to one of the four user levels and the assigned user
level is activated!
Figure 2-31 Synchronizer Manual start of Sync. unit 1
NOTE: When synchronisation is conducted between two voltage systems of different voltage
levels (e.g. high-voltage side and low-voltage side of a transformer), displayed
voltage values at the synchronisation page refer to that voltage reference system
which is assigned to parameter Voltage reference [P2307], [P2347] or [P2387].

User Manual
As soon as a synchronizing unit is activated, hotkey Manual Stop is shown as well as status
information of the selected synchronizing unit. The current synchronization can be cancelled by
using Manual Stop hotkey.
Figure 2-32 Synchronizer Current state of Sync. unit 1
2.4.1.3 Status (SD-card, Debug)
Figure 2-33 Operating Status

User Manual
SD-card
This menu page provides information about the type of SD-card which is used for data
recordings.
NOTE: The maximum size of the SD card is 2000MB!
Figure 2-34 Status SD card
Debug
This menu page only provides information about special data of communication standard IEC
61850.
Figure 2-35 Status Debug

NOTE: For IEC 61850 communication MAC address is displayed at DEBUG menu page
405.

User Manual
2.4.1.4 PMS Power Management System
While operating the PMS actual measurement values and status indications of the power
management functions are displayed in PMS menu.
Figure 2-36 Power Management System PMS
PMS overview
Figure 2-37 PMS overview status indications
PMS overview
No. LOAD 100% I% Net M STATUS APC FC
2 98 85 1 A CB ON SYM ON
5 96 80 1 A CB ON ON ON
6 63 57 1 M CB ON OFF OFF
11 0 0 17 A CB OFF OFF OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Figure 2-38 PMS overview status indications

User Manual
1: No.: this column shows the device numbers of those generators which are operating
for the power management. The device number of the local device is highlighted.
2: Load: this column shows the actual measuring value of the emitted/consumed active
power of each generator. The values are given as a percentage of the nominal power
value which is set by parameter Power [P6x5]. The power values are represented
digitally and graphically (via bar graph: top scale value = 0%, indicated graduation bar =
100%, full scale = 127%). Any occurring reverse power is indicated by a change of the
bar graph colour: blue turns to red (reverse power), and the digital value has a
negative sign.
3: I%: this column shows the actual current measuring value of each generator. The
values are given as a percentage of the nominal generator current value which is set by
parameter current [P6x4].
4: Net: this column shows the actual net number (busbar section) one or more
generators are operating at.
5: M: this column shows the actual operating mode of each generator (A: automatic
mode, M: manual mode).
6: STATUS: this column shows the actual status indications of the switching element
(CB) positions for those generators which are operating for the power management.
Status indications are as follows:
Table 2-3 Status indications of CB positions
Status Description
CB OFF Circuit breaker is open.
CB ON Circuit breaker is closed.
7: APC: this column shows the actual status indications of the active power controller
(APC) of the local device. Status indications are as follows:
Table 2-4 Status indications of active power controller
Status Description
OFF The controller is disabled/blocked.
ON The controller is active.
SYM The controller is in balanced mode.
8: FC: this column shows the actual status indications of the active frequency controller
(FC) of the local device. Status indications are as follows:
Table 2-5 Status indications of frequency controller
Status Description
OFF The controller is disabled/blocked.
ON The controller is active.

User Manual
PMS controller 1
This menu page shows actual status indications and measuring values of the active power
controller and the frequency controller of the local device.
Figure 2-39 PMS controller 1 status indications
PMS controller 1
1 Net: 23 AUTO LOAD FREQUENCY
2 Status Balanced 4 ON
3 Setpoint 60.0 % 50.00 Hz
4 Actual 50.0 % 51.00 Hz
5 Difference 10.0 % 1.00 Hz
6 Interval 1.50 s 3.00 s
7 Pulse 0.37 s 0.87 s
1: Net: this cell shows the actual net number the local generator is operating at, and it
shows the actual status of the operating mode of all four controllers
2: Status: this cell shows the actual status of the active power controller and the
frequency controller of the local device. Status indications are as follows:
Table 2-6 Status indications of controller 1
Status Description
OFF Disabled
ON Active
BALANCED Balanced mode (the number of devices is shown also)
BLOCK NET All devices in the own net are blocked by own device
BLOCK OWN Blocked by own device
BLOCK CB OFF Blocked by CB OFF
BLOCK MANU Blocked by manual mode
All devices in the own net are blocked by other
BLOCK BY DEVICE
device(s)
BLOCK NO DEVICE No devices: balanced mode not possible
BLOCK FREQ Speedcontrol outside range (P7004, 7005)
DEADBAND Controller is idle
3: Setpoint: this line shows the actual setpoint of the active power controller and the
frequency controller.
4: Actual: this line shows the actual measurement value of the active power controller
and the frequency controller.

User Manual
5: Difference: this line shows individually the actual control deviation (= setpoint actual
value) of the active power controller and the frequency controller.
6: Interval: this line shows individually the set interval time of the active power controller
and the frequency controller of the local device.
7: Pulse: this line shows individually the actual, calculated pulse time of the active power
controller and the frequency controller of the local device.
PMS controller 2
This menu page shows actual status indications and measuring values of the voltage controller
and the power factor controller of the local device.
PMS controller 2
1 Net: 23 AUTO VOLTAGE POWER FACTOR
2 Status ON Balanced 3
3 Setpoint 100.0 % 0.95
4 Actual 90.0 % -0.90
5 Difference 10.0 % 0.15
6 Interval 1.50 s 3.00 s
7 Pulse 0.37 s 0.83 s
1: Net: this cell shows the actual net number the local generator is operating at, and it
shows the actual status of the operating mode of all four controllers
2: Status: this cell shows the actual status of the active power controller and the
frequency controller of the local device. Status indications are as follows:
Table 2-7 Status indications of controller 1
Status Description
OFF Disabled
ON Active
BALANCED Balanced mode (the number of devices is shown also)
BLOCK NET All devices in the own net are blocked by own device
BLOCK OWN Blocked by own device
BLOCK CB OFF Blocked by CB OFF
BLOCK MANU Blocked by manual mode

User Manual
BLOCK BY DEVICE All devices in the own net are blocked by other device(s)
BLOCK NO DEVICE No devices: balanced mode not possible
BLOCK RANGE Block by range
DEADBAND Controller is idle
3: Setpoint: this line shows the actual setpoint of the voltage controller and the power
factor controller.
4: Actual: this line shows the actual measurement value of the voltage controller and the
power factor controller.
5: Difference: this line shows individually the actual control deviation (= setpoint actual
value) of the voltage controller and the power factor controller.
6: Interval: this line shows individually the set interval time of the voltage controller and
the power factor controller of the local device.
7: Pulse: this line shows individually the actual, calculated pulse time of the voltage
controller and the power factor controller of the local device.

User Manual
2.4.2 Alarms
The user can find information on the active alarm messages as well as all active events on the
front panel (HMI) display.
2.4.2.1 Active Alarms
When an alarm occurs, this page will open automatically. Depending on the configuration of the
alarm channels, the alarm number (which also serves as event number), the active alarm colour
(OFF, red, green or yellow), and the alarm description (editable text; max. 40 characters) are
displayed. Up to 449 alarms can be managed.
Figure 2-43 Active Alarms
Active alarms appear in order of occurrence. If the SYMAP-Compact(+) saves more than 11
alarm messages, the list can be scrolled up and down via:
touch-screen or
if configured assigned buttons on the front panel of the device (see menu: SYSTEM\
Graphic\Button Configuration.
NOTE: For configuration of the alarms please refer to chapter 3.5.2 Alarm channels
(configuration via software SYMAP-Compact Parameter Tool (SCPT) only!).
If an alarm occurs, the Alarm LED at the front plate and the active alarm colour in the Active
alarms menu page will blink fast until acknowledged or until the alarm is no longer active.
The Alarm LED and the active alarm colour in the Active alarms menu page will blink at a
slower interval if the alarm is no longer active but not yet acknowledged.
An audible signal may also be activated.
Table 2-8 describes LED and audible signal control (beeper) according to the alarm status.
Table 2-8 Alarm status

Alarm LED/
Alarm status Beeper
active alarm colour
Alarm is active (upon occurrence) Fast blinking Fast interval of sounds
Alarm is active and acknowledged Permanently ON OFF
Alarm is inactive and not acknowledged Slow blinking Slow interval of sounds
If the audible signal is ON, an alarm has to be acknowledged twice: once to switch the beeper
OFF and a second time to register the alarm.

User Manual
NOTE: If the alarm is still active after registering, the audible signal (beeper) will be activated
again!
Click on the Events hotkey to open the Active Events submenu.
Reset of alarms via touch screen

The alarms which are indicated at menu page Active alarms (alarm page) can be reset
(acknowledged) commonly or individually via touch screen of SYMAP-Compact(+).
NOTE: Alarms are only resettable if parameter setting is Condition = LATCHED and the
alarms are not activated anymore!
To reset the indicated alarms commonly, the button which is assigned function ACK has to be
operated
For individual reset the alarm has to be selected by clicking at the referring line in the display.
Subsequently, the following menu page is shown which gives the opportunity to conduct ot
cancel procedure of resetting the selected alarm:
Figure 2-44 Reset of the selected alarm

Operating execution button OK will reset the alarm and erase its indication at menu page
Active alarms and the alarm page will be displayed again.
Operating execution button Cancel will abort reset procedure and the alarm page will be
displayed again.

User Manual
2.4.2.2 Active Events
This page represents all active events by their respective event numbers as well as the total
number of active events. Event registration occurs chronologically with the first column top
down.
Figure 2-45 Active events
2.4.3 Breaker
The Breaker selection page gives an overview of the current status of switching elements
(circuit breakers, disconnectors, grounding switches, etc.) used in the application.
Figure 2-46 Current breaker status

User Manual
2.4.4 Parameters
For device configuration the parameter setting can be conducted either:

by configuration software SYMAP-Compact Parameter Tool (SCPT), or
by using the touchscreen of the device.
Device configuration via SCPT

see document SYMAP-Compact Manual.docx
Device configuration via touchscreen

CAUTION: Parameter setting via touchscreen (LCD) is a special function. Blocking of this
function is possible via assignment of function Blocking of parameter changes
via LCD to one or more of the different user levels!
Among others the main menu also shows submenu Parameters. After clicking to this submenu
the following pop-up window gives opportunity to enter the parameter mode:
Figure 2-47 Entering the parameter mode
Operating execution button Yes will open men Parameters:
Figure 2-48 Parametermode menu Parameters
Here, the parameters of the different submenus can be set via touchscreen.
Example: Menu SYSTEM\Nominals\Voltage transformers; setting of parameter
Assignment [P642]

User Manual
By clicking to the parameter the following window opens in which selection of the required
selection option can be done:
Figure 2-49 Parameter selection options
Operating the OK execution button will open the following window:
Figure 2-50 Highlighting the modified parameter setting
Any modification of parameter setting will be highlighted by * symbol in column P/E.

Operating Back arrow button provides further changing of any other parameter setting of other
submenus.
After finishing parameter setting clicking to the Home page button requires users decision
about the following parameter saving selection options:
Apply changes
Discard changes or
Cancel

User Manual
Figure 2-51 Parameter saving selection options
Cancel is for returning back to menu Parameters.
Discard changes will ignore any modification of parameter settings and shows the adjusted
Home page.
Apply changes will lead to system reboot of the device to save all the changes of parameter
settings:
Figure 2-52 Saving changes of parameter settings by system reboot

User Manual
The Parameters Selection page displays all device settings:

SETUP: Configuration of user levels, and selection of applied current
and voltage measurement inputs
SYSTEM: Nominals, counters, filters, communication und graphic
PROTECTION: Protection settings
ALARMS: Parameter number to stop Event-Historie; Alarm numbers
and assigned texts of the Alarm chanels, and LED
configuration
I/O: Analog and binary inputs and outputs
LVM: Limit value monitoring of measurement quantities
BREAKER CONTROL: Feedback signals of switching elements, configuration of
applied switching elements, and counter for switching
operations
RECORDER: Configuration of fault recorder and disturbance recorder
PMS: Power Management System for generator control device
variantes such as SYMAP-Compact GC, ECG, +GC and
+ECG
NOTE: Device parameters cannot be set or modify from the HMI display, they can be set only
via configuration software SYMAP-Compact Parameter Tool (SCPT)!
Figure 2-53 Parameter settings of SYMAP-Compact(+)

User Manual
2.4.4.1 SETUP
The SETUP menu shows how the SYMAP-Compact(+) variant has been adapted to the
application. For this, two sub-menus are provided:
User levels sub-menu (configuration of different user levels) and
Measuring inputs sub-menu (enable/disable the current measurement inputs: CT1, CT2
and CT-GND1, and voltage measurement inputs: PT1,
PT2, PT3, PT-GND1)
Figure 2-54 SETUP Adaption of device variant to the application
User levels
The User levels submenu provides parameters to individually configurate the different user
levels. Parameters refer to:
the activation of the different user access levels, and
the assignment of certain functions to the different user levels.
Measuring inputs
The Measuring inputs submenu provides parameters to enable/disable current and voltage
measurement inputs according to the application.
NOTE: Disabled measurement inputs will not provide any measurement quantities.

User Manual
2.4.4.2 SYSTEM
The SYSTEM submenu provides all of the system parameters of SYMAP-Compact(+).

Further information on this can be found in the System settings chapter.
Figure 2-55 System parameters
2.4.4.3 RECORDER
The RECORDER submenu provides all of the parameters about configuration of recording
functions such as Fault recorder and Disturbance recorder. Further information on this can
be found in the Recorder (File information and Manual trigger) chapter.
Figure 2-56 Parameters of recording functions

User Manual
2.4.4.4 PROTECTION
The PROTECTION submenu provides all of the protection parameters of SYMAP-

Compact(+). Further information on this can be found in the 3.4 PROTECTION chapter.
Figure 2-57 Protection parameters
2.4.4.5 ALARMS
The ALARMS submenu provides all of the parameters relating to alarms and LED
configuration of SYMAP-Compact(+). Further information on this can be found in the System
settings chapter.
Figure 2-58 Alarm parameters
2.4.4.6 I/O
The I/O provides submenu all of the parameters about analog/binary inputs and outputs of the
SYMAP-Compact(+). Further information on this can be found in the System settings chapter.

User Manual
Figure 2-59 Parameters of analog/binary inputs and outputs
2.4.4.7 LVM
The LVM submenu provides all of the parameters about configuration of LVM Limit Value
Monitoring function. Further information on this can be found in the LVM Limit Value
Monitoring chapter.
2.4.4.8 SWITCHGEAR CONTROL
The SWITCHGEAR CONTROL submenu provides all of the parameters about configuration of
switching elements. Further information on this can be found in the System settings chapter.
Figure 2-60 Configuration of switching elements

User Manual
2.4.4.9 PMS
The submenu PMS provides all functions of the power management system. At present only
function Generator control is available for device variants SYMAP-Compact GC, ECG, +GC
and +ECG.
Figure 2-61 Configuration of Power Management System PMS
The generator control function split up into the following submenus:

General
Net selector
Active power controller
Frequency controller
Voltage controller
Power factor controller
Further information on this can be found in the PMS chapter.

User Manual
2.4.5 Recorder (File information and Manual trigger)
SYMAP-Compact(+) device variants provide the following recording functions:

Event recorder
Fault recorder and
Disturbance recorder.
Figure 2-62 Recording functions
For each recording function a recording file can be generated. The file endings of the recording
files are assigned as follows:
Event recorder: xxx.ser
Fault recorder: xxx.sfr
Disturbance recorder: xxx.sdr
Read-out data and saving of data recordings

It Is possible to read the recorded data of the event recorder either via the display of
SYMAP-Compact(+) or via PC/Notebook by using the application software SYMAP-
Parameter Tool (SCPT); see SCPT menu bar Tools\Event recorder\executive button
Read Data\executive button Start.
Clicking File, then Save in the SYMAP-Compact(+) Event recorder window will
generate an event recording file (xxx.ser) including the recorded data. This file can be
saved via PC/notebook. This file can only be read using the SYMAP-Parameter Tool
(SCPT) application software.
It Is possible to read the recorded data of the fault recorder either via display of SYMAP-
Compact(+) or via PC/Notebook by using application software SYMAP-Parameter Tool
(SCPT); see SCPT menu bar Tools\Fault recorder\executive button Read
Data\executive button Start.
Clicking File, then Save in the SYMAP-Compact(+) Fault recorder window will generate
an event recording file (xxx.sfr) including the recorded data. This file can be saved via
PC/notebook. This file can only be read using the SYMAP-Parameter Tool (SCPT)
application software.
It is not possible to read the recorded data of the disturbance recorder via the display of
SYMAP-Compact(+).
When disturbance recorder data recording is triggered, either manually or by trigger event,
a recording file (xxx.sdr) is generated on the non-removable SD card. This file can be saved
by either reading the file directly from the SD card or by using the SYMAP-Parameter Tool
(SCPT) application software.

User Manual
NOTE: Saved recording file xxx.sdr cannot be read using the SYMAP-Parameter Tool
(SCPT) application software! However, the file can be converted to Comtrade
format. The Comtrade file can then be opened using appropriate software.
2.4.5.1 Event Recorder
The event history saves up to 10000 events by using the first-in-first-out (FIFO) principle. Each
event provides information such as:
the consecutive number
the event number
the event text
date and time stamp
Figure 2-63 Event recorder
NOTE: In the displayed event list active events are are highlighted light green; and inactive
events are represented with white backgroung colour.
The latest event is always assigned to consecutive number 0.
Events are recorded with a temporal resolution of 1ms, and will be displayed in chronological
order. The latest event is on the top of the event list. To scroll the list either use button Up/Down
or the scroll bar on the left of the display.
To refresh the displayed event list automatically, an Auto Refresh button is available on the
screen, with the settings:
ON: will activate automatic refresh.
OFF: will deactivate automatic refresh of the displayed event list.
NOTE: When using the scroll buttons or the scroll bar, the automatic refresh of the event list
is stopped (Auto Refresh: OFF).

User Manual
2.4.5.2 Fault Recorder
The fault recorder saves up to 1000 recordings by using the first-in-first-out (FIFO) principle.
When fault recording is started by the active trigger-event which is assigned to parameter
Trigger event [P8061] (see menu: RECORDING/Fault recorder), it takes a snapshot of the
measurement values.
At the time of activating the fault recorder records:

all relevant file informationen (record number, trigger-event number, event text, date and
time stamp) and
all available measuring values of current, voltage and frequency (depending on the
SYMAP-Compact(+) device variant) for one record,
at the time of activating the trigger-event.
Figure 2-64 Fault recorder File information
In addition to any trigger-event (assigned event to parameter P[8061] or any trip-event), fault
recording can also be started manually via the Trigger hotkey. In this case, there is no
registered event-number in the fault recorder, but the Manual trigger event-text will be
indicated.

User Manual
Main menu\Recorder\Fault Recorder\

Fault recorder Level 2
Label Value Unit
Event no.
Event name
Date
Time
Pickup source
Fault phase
Prot. step no.
Prot. set no.
UL1 (PT1) 0,00 V
UL2 (PT1) 0,00 V
UL3 (PT1) 0,00 V
U12 (PT1) 0,00 V
U23 (PT1) 0,00 V
U31 (PT1) 0,00 V
UL1 (PT2) 0,00 V
UL2 (PT2) 0,00 V
UL3 (PT2) 0,00 V
U12 (PT2) 0,00 V
U23 (PT2) 0,00 V
U31 (PT2) 0,00 V
UL1 (PT3) 0,00 V
UL2 (PT3) 0,00 V
UL3 (PT3) 0,00 V
U12 (PT3) 0,00 V
U23 (PT3) 0,00 V
U31 (PT3) 0,00 V
UG (PT-GND1) 0,00 V
Udc+,PT1 0,00 V
Udc-,PT1 0,00 V
Udc,PT2 0,00 V
Udc+,PT2 0,00 V
Udc-,PT2 0,00 V
Udc,PT3 0,00 V
Udc+,PT3 0,00 V
Udc-,PT3 0,00 V
IL1 (CT1) 0,00 A
IL2 (CT1) 0,00 A
IL3 (CT1) 0,00 A
IL1 (CT2) 0,00 A
IL2 (CT2) 0,00 A
IL3 (CT2) 0,00 A
IG (CT-GND1) 0,00 A
f (PT1) 0,00 Hz
f (PT2) 0,00 Hz
f (PT3) 0,00 Hz
Figure 2-65 Fault recorder Snaphot of measuring values
NOTE: The recorded data of each fault recording is saved as an individual fault recording file
(xxx.sfr) on the SD card. A read-out of the recording file data is only possible via
SYMAP-Compact Parameter Tool (SCPT)!
The recorded data of a fault recording can be shown on the device display via double-
clicking the selected file entry on the following menu page:
Main Menu\Recorder\Fault Recorder.

User Manual
2.4.5.3 Disturbance Recorder
Figure 2-66 Disturbance recorder manual trigger

User Manual
2.4.6 Settings
This page allows changes to device settings of colour and brightness of LC-display, menu
language and time, displayed single line diagram, entering different user levels. By the
submenu Resets all available counters and memories can be reset.
Figure 2-67 Settings
2.4.6.1 Display
Settings of colour layout and brightness for menu pages components can be changed for the
following ranges:
Background colour of menu pages (Page Background)
Background colour of hotkey lower half (Button Bottom)
Background colour of hotkey upper half (Button Top)
Text colour of Hotkeys (Button Text)
Settings of brightness only refer to the whole menu page. For changing brightness please use
the touch-screen slider control. Colours can be adapted separately by red, green and blue. The
array Preview shows the adjusted colour scheme. To save the settings, press button Apply.
For resetting the colour scheme to factory settings, press button Restore Defaults.
Figure 2-68 Display Settings

User Manual
2.4.6.2 Language & Time
Menu language, date and time can be set under Change Language & Time.
Figure 2-69 Change Language & Time
2.4.6.3 User Level (Change-over via touchscreen)
Changing to different user levels via touchscreen is possible under Change User Level.
Figure 2-70 Change User Level

To change User Level, a 4 digit password should be entered via the number keypad on the
touchscreen. Pressing the OK hotkey will automatically open the required user level.
When user level 2, 3 or 4 is activated, a symbol of a key and the number of the active user
level is shown in the date row.
Figure 2-71 Example: Indication of acitve user level 2

The Reset User Level hotkey allows the user to exit from an advanced access level and resets
the device to Level 1 access.
NOTE: There is no symbol for active user level 1!

User Manual
2.4.6.4 Reset
The Reset page enables the reset (erase data) of

the event recorder,
the fault recorder or
automatic initialisation of extension board system EBS configuration.
Figure 2-72 Resets
Event recorder und Fault recorder

After pressing one of the available recorders hotkeys, a confirmation prompt will be displayed;
here e.g. event recorder.
Figure 2-73 Example: Reset of event recorder

Pressing the OK button will release the reset. The Cancel button returns the user to the
previous menu page.
Initialization of extension boards system

For commissioning of the connected extension boards the EBS configuration has always to be
initialized! This requires the following steps:
Completion of parameter setting of SYMAP-Compact(+) and EBS (via SCPT)
Completion of wiring the SYMAP-Compact(+) and all EBS boards
Switch on power supply for SYMAP-Compact(+) and EB-PS board
Initialization of EBS after finished boot phase of SYMAP-Compact(+) via Reset menu

User Manual
After pressing the EBS automatic configuration hotkey of Reset menu, a confirmation prompt
for starting the initialisation process will be displayed.
Figure 2-74 Initialisation of EBS configuration
Pressing the OK button will release the initialisation process. The Cancel button returns the
user to the previous menu page.
NOTE: Duration of the EBS initialization process is < 1s!
2.4.7 Info
The System Information page gives informationen about:

firmware version of the device
hardware version of the device
order code according to the order code version
order code version
name of the parameter file which is saved in the device
Figure 2-75 System Information

User Manual
3 System settings
3.1 ALL EVENTS
3.1.1 Introduction Event System
The event system of SYMAP-Compact(+) allows the user to implement individual applications,
as events are used to activate or deactivate device functions. An event is the internal logic
representation of the device process. The event system offers source and sink events.
The source events have unique and permanent event numbers. A source event will be activated
(positive logic: true) if the conditions of this event are met (e.g. threshold exceeded); otherwise
it is inactive (positive logic: false).
Sink events are linked to fixed processes or functions and are user-programmable. The user
may connect source and sink by assigning the source number to the sink. The sink (function)
will then be active as soon as the corresponding source gets active.
NOTE: Some modules are both, a source and a sink; for example all binary outputs are sinks
and activated by a source event. But each binary output, however, again generates
source events upon its activation. The same applies for alarm messages and all
elements of the programmable logic unit (PLC). Source events can be linked via logic
elements of the PLC and then generate new source events.
EXAMPLE: The overcurrent protection ANSI 50/51 is meant to open a breaker via binary
output (Shunt Trip 1). ANSI 50/51 is a source and the binary output a sink. For
instance, an event number referring to ANSI 50/51 is ANSI50/51-1 trip [E1425]
(1st limit attained and delay time run down).
This event number has to be assigned to one parameter (e.g. 01 = 1425) of
the binary output Shunt Trip 1 and, as a consequence, protection trip signal
opens the breaker.

User Manual
3.1.2 Event list
The event list summarizes all software events that are available by the device.
NOTE: Event numbers (e.g. [E1234]) relating to parameter sets (SET1 SET4) exist only once
for all four parameter sets!
Table 3-1 SYMAP-Compact(+) event list

Event Event
Event No. Name Description
system recorder
Static event
E0000 OFF-Event Event is always inactive (untrue) -
E9999 ON-Event Event is always active (true) -
Alarm events 0001 0499
E001 E449 Alarm Alarm channel 1 449
E450 E499 Groups Alarm groups 450 499
Communication events E0910 E0989
Event is activated when SYMAP-
E910 Profibus baudrate Compact(+) recognizes masters
baudrate
Event is activated when data
E911 Profibus data exchange exchange takes place between master
and slave (SYMAP-Compact(+)).
CAN BUS 1 operational without any
E920 CAN BUS 1 OK
errors
E921 CAN BUS 1 Send error CAN BUS 1 no ack from transmitter
CAN BUS 1 devices with same
E922 CAN BUS 1 Address error
address existing
CAN BUS 1 number of actual devices
E923 CAN BUS 1 Device error
less then P923
SET1 SET4 Protection events E1000 E3999
E1000 Prot. param. set 1 acitve Protection parameter set 1 active
E1004 Prot. param. set 1 acitvated manually
E1050 ANSI27 module active
E1051 ANSI27 blocked module
E1054 ANSI27-1 step active
E1055 ANSI27-1 blocked step
E1056 ANSI27-1 blocked step by min. start voltage
E1057 ANSI27-1 blocked step by min. start frequency
E1058 ANSI27-1 pickup
E1059 ANSI27-1 trip
E1067 ANSI27-2 trip
E1075 ANSI27-3 trip
E1083 ANSI27-4 trip

User Manual
Event Event
system recorder
E1091 ANSI27-5 trip
E1099 ANSI27-6 trip
E1107 ANSI27-7 trip
E1115 ANSI27-8 trip
E1123 ANSI27-9 trip
E1131 ANSI27-10 trip
E1157 ANSI59-1 trip
E1164 ANSI59-2 trip
E1173 ANSI59-3 trip
E1181 ANSI59-4 trip
E1189 ANSI59-5 trip
E1197 ANSI59-6 trip

User Manual
Event Event
system recorder
E1205 ANSI59-7 trip
E1213 ANSI59-8 trip
E1221 ANSI59-9 trip
E1258 ANSI81-1 trip
E1266 ANSI81-2 trip
E1274 ANSI81-3 trip
E1282 ANSI81-4 trip
E1290 ANSI81-5 trip
E1298 ANSI81-6 trip
E1306 ANSI81-7 trip
E1314 ANSI81-8 trip
E1322 ANSI81-9 trip

User Manual
Event Event
system recorder
E1350 ANSI27T module active
E1351 ANSI27T blocked module
E1352 ANSI27T reactivate limit reached
E1353 ANSI27T activate limit reached
E1354 ANSI27T pickup
E1355 ANSI27T trip
E1356 ANSI27T trip by voltage drops count
E1357 ANSI27T trip by curve underrun
E1370 ANSI59N/G module active
E1371 ANSI59N/G blocked module
E1373 ANSI59N/G-1 step active
E1374 ANSI59N/G-1 blocked step
E1375 ANSI59N/G-1 pickup
E1376 ANSI59N/G-1 trip
E1405 ANSI27Q module active
E1406 ANSI27Q blocked module
E1408 ANSI27Q pickup
E1409 ANSI27Q 1st trip
E1410 ANSI27Q 2nd trip
E1412 ANSI27Q voltage reclosing limit reached
E1413 ANSI27Q reclosing release
E1415 ANSI50/51 module active
E1416 ANSI50/51 blocked module
E1422 ANSI50/51-1 step active
E1423 ANSI50/51-1 blocked step
E1424 ANSI50/51-1 pickup
E1425 ANSI50/51-1 trip
E1470 ANSI95i-CT1 module active
E1471 ANSI95i-CT1 blocked module

User Manual
Event Event
system recorder
E1472 ANSI95i-CT1 blocked module by Imax
E1473 ANSI95i-CT1 L1 blocked by 2H
E1479 ANSI95i-CT1 2H supervision blocked
E1485 ANSI95i-CT2 module active
E1486 ANSI95i-CT2 blocked module
E1487 ANSI95i-CT2 blocked module by Imax
E1515 ANSI95i-GND1 module active
E1516 ANSI95i-GND1 blocked module
E1517 ANSI95i-GND1 blocked module by Imax
E1518 ANSI95i-GND1 blocked by 2H
E1519 ANSI95i-GND1 blocked by 5H
E1520 ANSI95i-GND1 2H supervision blocked
E1521 ANSI95i-GND1 5H supervision blocked
E1578 ANSI78-1 blocked by min. start voltage
E1580 ANSI78-1 trip
E1588 ANSI78-2 trip
E1596 ANSI78-3 trip
E1653 ANSI87-1 trip
E1654 ANSI87-1 L1 blocked by CTS
E1657 ANSI87-1 CTS supervision active
E1673 ANSI87-2 trip
E1680 ANSI50G/51G module active
E1681 ANSI50G/51G blocked module
E1687 ANSI50G/51G-1 step active
E1688 ANSI50G/51G-1 blocked step
E1689 ANSI50G/51G-1 pickup
E1690 ANSI50G/51G-1 trip

User Manual
Event Event
system recorder
E1743 ANSI67-1 pickup L1
E1747 ANSI67-1 trip L1
E1750 ANSI67-1 trip
E1751 ANSI67-1 low voltage L1
E1766 ANSI67-2 trip
E1782 ANSI67-3 trip
E1798 ANSI67-4 trip
E1810 ANSI32-1 trip

User Manual
Event Event
system recorder
E1818 ANSI32-2 trip
E1826 ANSI32-3 trip
E1834 ANSI32-4 trip
E1842 ANSI32-5 trip
E1850 ANSI32-6 trip
E1855 ANSI25-1 Active
E1856 ANSI25-1 Blocked
E1857 ANSI25-1 Negative phase seq. PT1
E1865 ANSI25-1 SC: Blocked
E1866 ANSI25-1 SC: PT1 > Max. voltage
E1867 ANSI25-1 SC: PT1 < Min. voltage
E1868 ANSI25-1 SC: PT1 > Max. frequency
E1869 ANSI25-1 SC: PT1 < Min. frequency
E1870 ANSI25-1 SC: PT1 in range
E1876 ANSI25-1 SC: dU > Max. dU
E1877 ANSI25-1 SC: dU < Min. dU
E1878 ANSI25-1 SC: dU in range
E1879 ANSI25-1 SC: df < Min. df
E1880 ANSI25-1 SC: df > Max. df
E1881 ANSI25-1 SC: df in range
E1882 ANSI25-1 SC: dPHI < Min. dPHI
E1883 ANSI25-1 SC: dPHI > Max. dPHI
E1884 ANSI25-1 SC: dPHI in range
E1885 ANSI25-1 SC: Synchronous pre-event
E1886 ANSI25-1 SC: Synchronous
E1890 ANSI25-1 VC: Blocked
E1891 ANSI25-1 VC: PT1 > Max. voltage
E1892 ANSI25-1 VC: PT1 < Min. voltage
E1893 ANSI25-1 VC: PT1 > Max. frequency
E1894 ANSI25-1 VC: PT1 < Min. frequency
E1895 ANSI25-1 VC: PT1 in range
E1896 ANSI25-1 VC: PT1 > No voltage limit
E1897 ANSI25-1 VC: PT1 < No voltage limit
E1900 ANSI25-1 VC: PT2 > Max. fequency
E1905 ANSI25-1 VC: Synchronous pre-event
E1906 ANSI25-1 VC: Synchronous

User Manual
Event Event
system recorder

User Manual
Event Event
system recorder
E2020 ANSI25A-1 Frequency higher event
E2021 ANSI25A-1 Frequency lower event
E2022 ANSI25A-1 Voltage higher event
E2023 ANSI25A-1 Voltage lower event
E2035 ANSI67G module active
E2036 ANSI67G blocked module
E2038 ANSI67G-1 step active
E2039 ANSI67G-1 blocked step
E2040 ANSI67G-1 pickup
E2041 ANSI67G-1 trip
E2042 ANSI67G-1 low voltage
E2070 PTS-1 symmetry check active
E2071 PTS-1 symmetry check blocked
E2072 PTS-1 symmetry failure
E2073 PTS-1 symmetry failure delayed
E2076 PTS-1 fuse failure check active
E2077 PTS-1 fuse failure check blocked
E2078 PTS-1 fuse failure 3 phase
E2079 PTS-1 fuse failure failure
E2080 PTS-1 fuse failure failure delayed
E2084 PTS-1 general check active
E2085 PTS-1 general check blocked
E2086 PTS-1 general failure
E2087 PTS-1 general failure delayed

User Manual
Event Event
system recorder
E2130 CTS-1 symmetry check active
E2131 CTS-1 symmetry check blocked
E2132 CTS-1 symmetry fault
E2133 CTS-1 symmetry fault delayed
E2135 CTS-1 diff check active
E2136 CTS-1 diff check blocked
E2137 CTS-1 diff fault
E2138 CTS-1 diff fault delayed
E2140 CTS-2 symmetry check active
E2141 CTS-2 symmetry check blocked
E2142 CTS-2 symmetry fault
E2143 CTS-2 symmetry fault delayed
E2145 CTS-2 diff check active
E2146 CTS-2 diff check blocked
E2147 CTS-2 diff fault
E2148 CTS-2 diff fault delayed
E2335 SOTF active
E2336 SOTF blocked
E2338 SOTF-1 active
E2339 SOTF-1 blocked
E2340 SOTF-1 trigger
E2341 SOTF-1 pickup
E2342 SOTF-1 trip
E2344 SOTF-2 active
E2345 SOTF-2 blocked
E2346 SOTF-2 trigger
E2347 SOTF.2 pickup
E2348 SOTF-2 trip
E2160 ANSI79 Ready
E2161 ANSI79 Blocked
E2162 ANSI79 Locked
E2163 ANSI79 Cycle
E2164 ANSI79 1. Pause time
E2172 ANSI79 Breaker close command
E2173 ANSI79 Breaker close success time
E2174 ANSI79 Success
E2175 ANSI79 Fail
E2176 ANSI79 Off-time
E2180 YG active
E2181 YG blocked
E2185 YG-1 active
E2186 YG-1 blocked
E2187 YG-1 pickup
E2188 YG-1 trip
E2190 YG-2 active
E2191 YG-2 blocked
E2192 YG-2 pickup
E2193 YG-2 trip
E2195 YG-3 active
E2196 YG-3 blocked
E2197 YG-3 pickup
E2198 YG-3 trip
E2200 YG-4 active
E2201 YG-4 blocked
E2202 YG-4 pickup
E2203 YG-4 trip
E2205 YG-5 active
E2206 YG-5 blocked
E2207 YG-5 pickup

User Manual
Event Event
system recorder
E2208 YG-5 trip
E2210 YG-6 active
E2211 YG-6 blocked
E2212 YG-6 pickup
E2213 YG-6 trip
E2215 ANSI50BF module active
E2216 ANSI50BF blocked module
E2217 ANSI50BF-1 step active
E2218 ANSI50BF-1 blocked step
E2219 ANSI50BF-1 pickup
E2220 ANSI50BF-1 trip
E2235 ANSI74TC active
E2236 ANSI74TC blocked
E2237 ANSI74TC pickup
E2238 ANSI74TC trip
E2240 ANSI51/46VR module active
E2241 ANSI51/46VR blocked module
E2242 ANSI51/46VR prot.blocking
E2251 ANSI46-1 trip
E2259 ANSI46-2 trip
E2267 ANSI46-3 trip
E2275 ANSI46-4 trip
E2280 ANSI32N/G module active
E2281 ANSI32N/G blocked module
E2330 CLD active
E2331 CLD blocked

User Manual
Event Event
system recorder
E2332 CLD pickup
E2333 CLD cold load
E2351 ANSI49 module blocked
E2353 ANSI49-1 step blocked
E2354 ANSI49-1 warning
E2355 ANSI49-1 trip
E2359 ANSI49-2 trip
E2363 ANSI49-3 trip
E2367 ANSI49-4 trip
E2370 ANSI64REF active
E2371 ANSI64REF blocked
E2372 ANSI64REF-1 active
E2374 ANSI64REF-1 blocked
E2375 ANSI64REF-1 pickup
E2376 ANSI64REF-1 trip
E2379 ANSI64REF-2 active
E2380 ANSI64REF-2 blocked
E2381 ANSI64REF-2 pickup
E2382 ANSI64REF-2 trip
E2385 ANSI21FL active
E2386 ANSI21FL blocked
E2387 ANSI21FL busy
E2390 TIG active
E2391 TIG blocked
E2392 TIG pickup
E2393 TIG trip
E2395 DCVM module active
E2396 DCVM module blocked
E2397 DCVM-1 step active
E2398 DCVM-1 blocked step
E2399 DCVM-1 overvoltage pickup
E2400 DCVM-1 overvoltage trip
E2401 DCVM-1 undervoltage pickup
E2402 DCVM-1 undervoltage trip
E2403 DCVM-1 GF +pole pickup
E2404 DCVM-1 GF +pole trip
E2405 DCVM-1 GF -pole pickup
E2406 DCVM-1 GF -pole trip

User Manual
Event Event
system recorder
E2458 ANSI37 module blocked
E2462 ANSI37-1 trip
E2466 ANSI37-2 trip
E2470 ANSI37-3 trip
E2471 ANSI81R module active
E2472 ANSI81R blocked module
E2473 ANSI81R-1 step active
E2474 ANSI81R-1 blocked step
E2475 ANSI81R-1 pickup
E2476 ANSI81R-1 trip

User Manual
Event Event
system recorder
E2502 ANSI47-1 trip
E2506 ANSI47-2 trip
E2510 ANSI47-3 trip
E2514 ANSI47-4 trip
E2518 ANSI47-5 trip
E2522 ANSI47-6 trip
E2528 ANSI52-1 trip
E2532 ANSI52-2 trip
E2536 ANSI52-3 trip
E2539 ANSI21 group B active
E2540 ANSI21 low voltage
E2545 ANSI21 pickup
E2546 ANSI21 earth fault pickup
E2547 ANSI21 pickup loop L1-E
E2550 ANSI21 pickup loop L1-L2
E2553 ANSI21-1 zone active
E2554 ANSI21-1 blocked zone
E2565 ANSI21-1 trip
E2581 ANSI21-2 trip

User Manual
Event Event
system recorder
E2597 ANSI21-3 trip
E2613 ANSI21-4 trip
E2629 ANSI21-5 trip
Binary input events E4000 E4899

E4010 Binary input Fct. 10 input event Binary input event input event
E4029 E4099
Extension Board System EBS:
and EBS: input event Fct. x
binary input Fct. x: input event
E4700 E4739
E4100 EBS OK
E4110 Binary input Fct. 10 predelay event Binary input event predelay event
E4129 E4199 Extension Board System EBS:
EBS: predelay event Fct. x
and binary input Fct. x: predelay event

User Manual
Event Event
system recorder
E4740 E4779
E4210 Binary input Fct. 10 inverted event Binary input event inverted event
E4229 E4299
and EBS: inverted event Fct. x
binary input Fct. x: inverted event
E4780 E4819
Active if any of the wirefault events is
4300 Binary input general wirefault event
active
E4310 Binary input Fct. 10 wirefault event Binary input event wirefault event
E4329 E4399
and EBS: wirefault event Fct. x
Binary input Fct. x: wirefault
E4820 E4859
Active if one of the short circuit events
4400 Binary input general shortcircuit event
is active
E4410 Binary input Fct. 10 shortcircuit event Binary input event shortcircuit event
E4429 E4499
and EBS: shortcircuit Fct. x
Binary input Fct. x:shortcircuit
E4860 E4899

User Manual
Event Event
system recorder
Binary output events E4500 E4599
E4500 Shunt Trip 1 output set Shunt Trip 1 output event
E4501 Shunt Trip 2 output set Shunt Trip 2 output event
E4502 Lockout relay set Lockout relay event
E4503 Lockout relay predelay Lockout relay predelay event
E4504 Synchron relay set Synchron relay event
E4505 Synchron relay predelay Synchron relay predelay event
E4506 Function output Fct. 1 set Function output 1event
E4507 Function output Fct. 1 predelay Function output 1 predelay event
E4508 Function output Fct. 2 set Function output 2 event
E4522 EBS: Function output 1 activated
Function output 1: output event
EBS: Function output 1 additional predelayed
E4523 Function output 1: delayed output
event activated
event

E4680 EBS: Function output 80 activated
Function output 80: output event
EBS: Function output 80 additional predelayed
E4681 Function output 80: delayed output
event activated
event
Analog input events E4900 E4902
E4900 Analog inputs: wirefault Analog inputs general event: wirefault
Analog inputs 3
E4901 Analog input 3: wirefault
(0 to 20mA): wirefault
Analog inputs 4
E4902 Analog input 4: wirefault
(0 to 20mA): wirefault
Event system
E5950 Event history stop Event recording stop is active
Breaker feedback events E6010 E6085
E6010 ON-Feedback 1 Breaker 1 (feedback)
E6011 OFF-Feedback 1 Breaker 1 (feedback)
E6012 OUT-Feedback 1 Breaker 1 (feedback)
E6013 IN-Feedback 1 Breaker 1 (feedback)
E6014 EARTH ON-Feedback 1 Breaker 1 (feedback)
E6015 EARTH OFF-Feedback 1 Breaker 1 (feedback)

User Manual
Event Event
system recorder
Breaker position events E6110 E6187
E6110 OPEN 1 Breaker 1 (position)
E6111 CLOSED 1 Breaker 1 (position)
E6112 OUT OPEN 1 Breaker 1 (position)
E6113 OUT CLOSED 1 Breaker 1 (position)
E6114 EARTH 1 Breaker 1 (position)
E6115 DIFF (Moving) 1 Breaker 1 (position)
E6116 FAIL 1 Breaker 1 (position)
E6117 OPEN ERROR 1 Breaker 1 (position)

User Manual
Event Event
system recorder
Breaker counter events E6311 E6383
E6311 CLOSED -> OPEN cycles max 1 Breaker 1 (counter)
E6313 OPEN -> EARTH cycles max 1 Breaker 1 (counter)
Breaker select events E6391 E6398
E6391 Select Breaker 1 Breaker 1 selected via touchscreen
Event of assigned function is active as
Function key (front plate) events E6400 E6414
long as button is pressed
E6400 0
E6401 1
E6402 Stop
E6403 Start
E6404 Page Up
E6405 Page Down"
E6406 Key Calls up menu page User levels
E6407 Alarm Ack Acknowledgement of alarms
E6408 Alarm page Calls up menu page Alarms
E6409 Auto/Manual
E6414 Emergency OFF 1 / Emergency OFF 2
8 additional function keys (optionally; front plate) Button event is active as long as
events E6415 E6422 button is pressed
E6415 (not parameterizable) Button 1
ComU general events 6432 - 6497
E6432 - E6497 ComU general events ComU general purpose events
ComU GGIO4 events 6500 - 6515
E6500 - E6515 GGIO4 events Events for GGIO4
ComU general events 6516 - 6593

User Manual
Event Event
system recorder
E6516 - E6593 ComU general events ComU general purpose events
Modbus/Profibus in events 6600 - 6631
E6600 - E6631 Modbus/Profibus in events Could be set via Modbus or Profibus
Operation mode events 6810 - 6811
E6810 Local mode
E6811 Remote mode
User levels E6801 - E6804
E6801 - User level 1 activated
GU user page events E6900 - E6963
Event activated by GU user page
E6900 E6963 GU user page button
button
System events
Event becomes active when system
starts (booting phase) and
E6970 System booting automatically becomes inactive when
system start has finished (booting has
finished).
E6971 WD reset CU Watchdog for reset of control unit (CU)
Watchdog for reset of measuring unit
E6972 WD reset MU
(MU)
Watchdog for reset of graphic unit
E6973 WD reset GU
(GU)
Watchdog for reset of communication
E6974 WD reset ComU
unit (ComU)
E6975 HMI OK Detached HMI operates without error
Device restart after loss of power
E6976 System reset: Power on
supply
Device restart after uploading
E6977 System reset: Parameter file
parameter file
PMS Generator control: E7000 E7274
E7000 Manual mode
E7001 Automatic mode
E7004 Collective event: speed increase
E7005 Collective event: speed decrease
E7006 Collective event: voltage increase
E7007 Collective event: voltage decrease
E7100 Active power controller active
E7101 Active power controller blocked
E7123 Active power increase
E7124 Active power decrease
E7140 Limit active
E7141 Limit reached
E7160 Frequency controller active
E7161 Frequency controller blocked
E7183 Frequency increase
E7184 Frequency decrease
E7200 Voltage controller active
E7201 Voltage controller blocked
E7223 Voltage increase
E7224 Voltage decrease
E7250 Power factor controller active
E7251 Power factor controller blocked
E7273 Excitation increase
E7274 Excitation decrease
E7290 Power factor curve active
Disturbance recorder E8000 - E8007
E8000 DiREC-Ready
E8001 DiREC-Recording
E8002 DiREC-Buffer overflow
E8003 DiREC-Backup
E8004 DiREC-Full memeory
E8005 DiREC-No memory card
E8006 DiREC-Memory error
E8007 DiREC-File error

User Manual
Event Event
system recorder
Limit value monitoring LVM E8100 - E8299

E8100 E8299
Limit value monitoring LVM: 1. Stufe:
E8100 LVM-1: Anregung
pickup
Limit value monitoring LVM: 1. Stufe:
E8101 LVM-1: Auslsung
trip

Limit value monitoring LVM: 100.
E8298 LVM-100: Anregung
Stufe: pickup
Limit value monitoring LVM: 100.
E8299 LVM-100: Auslsung
Stufe: trip
System supervision events E9000 - E9199
E9000 Common alarm of system supervision
E9001 Common alarm system total error
E9002 CU CPU communication failure
E9003 MU CPU communication failure
E9004 GU CPU communication failure
E9005 ComU CPU communication failure
E9006 CU Bad CPU communication
E9007 Firmware constellation invalid
E9008 Unknown parameter file
E9009 Unknown hardware
E9010 CU DRAM error
E9011 CU Serial Flash error
E9012 CU Binary Inputs ADC SPI error
CU Binary Outputs DAC MAX4820
E9013
error
E9014 CU Serial Port 1 Framing error
E9015 CU Analog Inputs ADC AD7914 error
E9016 CU Profibus error
E9017 CU SD card error
E9018 CU Binary Inputs ADC IC error
E9020 CU Parameter file error
E9021 MU Parameter file error
E9022 GU Parameter file error
E9023 ComU Parameter file error
E9030 Event system feedback loop detected
E9031 Device serial number equals zero.
Analog IOs are not calibrated (file crc
E9032
error).
E9040 MU kWh counter crc error
E9041 MU EEPROM error
E9042 MU Calibration file crc error
E9043 MU Overload
E9044 MU ADC0 error
E9045 MU ADC1 error
E9046 MU Battery low alarm
E9047 MU Calibration error
E9048 MU Battery defect
E9049 DCVCF CRC error
E9050 DCVCF Calibration error
E9060 EBS communication error
E9061 EBS version incompatibility
E9062 EBS constellation error
E9063 EBS firmware incompatibility
E9064 EBS module failure
E9065 EBS module periphery error
E9066 EBS calibration error
GOOSE events E9200 - E9998
E9200 - E9998 GOOSE events Events for GOOSE (IEC 61850)
Static event
E9999 ON-Event Event is always active (true) -

User Manual
3.2 SETUP (Basic device settings)
3.2.1 User levels
Main Menu\Parameters\SETUP
User levels
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4

Events 6801 6802 6803 6804
Value Unit (Setting range)
Activation
Priority 2 3 4 - 2/3/4
Password 1111 0 0 - 0 9999
Activation time 300 0 0 s 0 65000
Active by event 0 0 0 event 0 9999
Block by event 0 0 0 event 0 9999
Active by USB stick 1 - /
Active by upper key pos.1 - /
Active by lower key pos.1 - /
Functions
Local mode [E6810] - /
Remote mode [E6811] - /
Change display settings - /
Change language/time - /
Breaker control via display - /
Start synchronizer manually - /
Reset mode: counters, histories, etc. - /
Block all histories - /
Block param upload - /
Block parameter download - /
Block view via LCD - /
Block param. change via LCD - /
Figure 3-1 Menu SETUP Configurabel User levels
Event description:
E 6801
to
E 6804
Event of activated user level 1; as soon as one of the four user levels is efffective, then
event [E6801], [E6802], [E6803] or [E6804] is activated.

User Manual
Parameter description:
Activation
P Priority
Priority setting of the user level against activation of other user levels; when two or more
user levels are activated simultaneously, then, the user level with the highest priority is
activated. According to the setting options of parameter Priority [P], order of priority is
as follows:
2: lowest priority
3: third highest priority
4: highest priority.
NOTE: User level 1 is only active, when none of the user levels 2, 3 and 4 are
activated!
P Password
Enter 4-digit password to activate the relevant user level
P Activation time
Duration for activated user level; as soon as user level 2, 3 or 4 is activated, activation
time set by parameter Activation time [P] starts. As soon as the timer has run down,
SYMAP-Compact(+) automatically activtes user level 1.
P Active by event
User level 2, 3 or 4 can be activated by any active event. For activation, the number
related to this activating event has to be assigned to parameter Active by event [P].
Activation is only effective, however, as long as the activating event is active. As soon as
the user level is active, corresponding event [E6802], [E6803] or [E6804] is activated.
If activation of user level 2, 3 or 4 by the activating event is not required, set this
parameter to 0.
P Block by event
User level 2, 3 or 4 can be blocked by any active event. For blocking, the number related
to this blocking event has to be assigned to parameter Block by event [P]. Blocking is
only effective, however, as long as the blocking event is active.
If blocking of user level 2, 3 or 4 by the blocking event is not required, set this parameter
to 0.
P Active by USB stick 1

(function is not available yet!)


P Active by upper key pos.1




User Manual
P Active by lower key pos.1



Funktionen (Functions)
P Local mode [E6810]

Authorisation for operating mode Local mode; if this operating mode is assigned to the
relevant user level and this user level is activated, then, the corresponding event Local
mode [E6810] is being activated.
CAUTION: Assigning Local mode to any user level only is only a declaration of the
assigned user level as local mode! Corresponding functionality of that user
level declared as Local mode has to be programmed by assigning
selected Functions (listed below) to the user level!
P Remote mode [E6811]

Authorisation for operating mode Remote mode; if this operating mode is assigned to
the relevant user level and this user level is activated, then, the corresponding event
Remote mode [E6811] is being activated.
CAUTION: Assigning Remote mode to any user level only is only a declaration of the
assigned user level as remote mode! Corresponding functionality of that
user level declared as Remote mode has to be programmed by assigning
selected Functions (listed below) to the user level!
P Change display settings

Authorisation for setting parameters of sub-menu Display (Main
Menu/Settings/Display); setting of these parameters is only permitted, if the user level
which is assigned to parameter Change display settings [P] is activated.
P Change language/time
Authorisation for setting parameters of sub-menu Language & Time (Main
Menu/Settings/Language & Time); setting of these parameters is only permitted, if the
user level which is assigned to parameter Change language/time [P] is activated.
P Breaker control via display

Authorisation for local breaker control function via touchscreen; local control of switching
elements via function keys of SYMAP-Compact(+) front plate is only permitted, if the
user level which is assigned to parameter Breaker control via display [P] is activated.
P Start synchronizer manually

Authorisation for manual synchronisation; manual synchronisation via function keys of
SYMAP-Compact(+) front plate is only permitted, if the user level which is assigned to
parameter Start synchronizer manually [P] is activated.
P Reset mode: counters, histories, etc.

Authorisation for resetting of recorder data and counter values; resetting of event
recorder, fault recorder or counters is only permitted, if the user level which is assigned
to parameter Reset mode: counters, histories, etc. [P] is activated.
P Block all histories

User Manual
Authorisation for blocking of data recordeing and counting functions; blocking of data
recording of event recorder, fault recorder or counting is only permitted, if the user level
which is assigned to parameter Block all histories [P] is activated.
P Block param. upload (read)

Authorisation for blocking of reading the SYMAP-Compact(+) parameter file by SCPT;
reading the parameter file via SCPT is only permitted, if the user level which is assigned
to parameter Block param. upload (read) [P] is activated.
P Block param. download (write)

Authorisation for blocking of writing the SYMAP-Compact(+) parameter file by SCPT;
writing the parameter file via SCPT is only permitted, if the user level which is assigned
to parameter Block param. download (read) [P] is activated.
P Block param. view via LCD

Authorisation for blocking of entering sub-menu Parameters via display; entering of
sub-menu Parameters (Main Menu/Parameters) is blocked, if the user level which is
assigned to parameter Block param. view via LCD [P] is activated.
P Block param. change via LCD

Authorisation for blocking of entering the parameter setting mode via display; entering of
parameter setting mode via display is blocked, if the user level which is assigned to
parameter Block param. change via LCD [P] is activated.

User Manual
3.2.2 Measuring inputs
Main Menu\Parameters\SETUP
Measuring inputs
P/E No. System Description Value Unit (Setting range)

Potential transformers
P91500 PT1 Enabled - Enabled/Disabled
E91503 PT-GND1 Enabled - Enabled/Disabled
Current transformers
P91510 CT1 Enabled - Enabled/Disabled
P91511 CT2 Enabled - Enabled/Disabled
P91512 CT-GND1 Enabled - Enabled/Disabled
Figure 3-2 Menu SETUP Enable/Disable current and voltage measurement inputs
Voltage measurement inputs
P91500 PT1
This parameter enables/disables 3-phase voltage measurement input PT1 where:
Enabled: enables or
Disabled: disables the measurement input.
P91501 PT2
Enabled: enables or
P91502 PT3
Enabled: enables or
P91500 PT-GND1
This parameter enables/disables 1-phase voltage measurement input PT-GND1 where:
Enabled: enables or
Current measurement inputs
P91510 CT1
This parameter enables/disables 3-phase current measurement input CT1 where:
Enabled: enables or
P91511 CT2
This parameter enables/disables 3-phase current measurement input CT2 where:

User Manual
Enabled: enables or
P91510 CT-GND1
This parameter enables/disables 1-phase current measurement input CT-GND1 where:
Enabled: enables or

User Manual
3.3 SYSTEM (System parameters)
System parameters adapt the SYMAP-Compact(+) to the system-specific peripheriy of the

application such as voltage and current transformers (PTs and CTs), communication systems
etc. The parameters are arrangend in the following submenus:
General (time zone and daylight saving time)
Nominals (Rated values of the aplication)
Measuring (Coordination of measuring inputs)
Counter (Counting functions)
Filter (Filter for measurement display)
Communication (Standard communication) and
Graphic (Referencing and selection of displayed measurement values; button, display and
bargraph configuration)
Figure 3-3 System parameters
3.3.1 General
The parameters of General submenu refer to parameters settings for time zone and daylight
saving time.
Main Menu\ Parameters\SYSTEM\
General

SNTP
P963 Daylight saving time OFF - OFF/ON
P964 Local time zone 0 - 0 12
Figure 3-4 Communication Optional interface SNTP
P963 Daylight saving time

Automatic time changeover at the yearly repeating summer-wintertime dates; the
automatic Daylight saving time switch (+1h at 01:00 Coordinated Universal Time
(UTC) or Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) on last Sunday in March, and -1h at 01:00

User Manual
UTC on last Sunday in October) can be deactivated/activated via parameter Daylight

saving time [P963]:
OFF: automatic time changeover is deactivated,
ON: automatic time changeover is activated.
P964 Local time zone

The local time zone can be adjusted via parameter Local time zone [P964] (up to 12
hours offset to Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) or Greenwich Mean Time (GMT)).
3.3.2 Nominals (Rated data of the application)
Parameters of Nominals menu are for setting rated values of the application. These include:
Rated data for protection functions and measurement values (Reference values),
PT ratios and PT assignment (Potential transformers) and adjustment of PT measuring
ranges,
CT ratios, CT assignment and measurement direction (Current transformers)
Figure 3-5 System parameters Nominals

User Manual
3.3.2.1 Reference Values (Reference values for protection settings)
Main Menu\Parameters\SYSTEM\Nominals
Reference
Values
Primary W1
P600 Connection type Y - none/Y/D
P602 Star point grounding isolated - isolated/compensated/earthed
P603 Voltage (L-L) 20000 V 0 999999
P604 Current 100 A 0 999999,9
P605 Power 3464 kW 0 9999999
P606 Ground voltage 20000 V 0 999999
P607 Ground current 100 A 0 99999,999
Secondary W2
P610 Connection type y - none/y/d
P611 Phase shift 0 deg 1/2/3/4/5/6/7/879/10/11
P613 Voltage (L-L) 20000 V 0 999999
P614 Current 100 A 0 999999,9
P615 Power 3464 kW 0 9999999
Tertiary W3
P620 Connection type y - none/y/d
P621 Phase shift 0 deg 1/2/3/4/5/6/7/879/10/11
P623 Voltage (L-L) 20000 V 0 999999
P624 Current 100 A 0 999999,9
P625 Power 3464 kW 0 9999999
Frequency
P630 Nominal frequency 50 Hz 50/60
Figure 3-6 System parameters Reference Values
Primary side W1 (or transformer primary side W1)
P600 Connection type

Setting the circuit configuration of the transformer primary side W1; the circuit type of the
winding strands at transformer primary side W1 can be considered as follows:
none: no transformer is present in the application,
Y: the winding strands of transformer primary side W1 will be wired in star Y
connection (starpoint does exist)
D: the winding strands of transformer primary side W1 will be wired in delta
connection (starpoint does not exist)
P602 Star point grounding

Grounding of star point at transformer primary side W1, depending on the circuit type of
the winding strands at transformer primary side W1, there are the following setting
options:

User Manual
isolated: no transformer is present in the application or

transformer is present, and the circuit type of the winding strands
at transformer primary side W1 will produce a neutral potential
(see star Y connection). However, the star point is insulated
against ground (isolated subnetwork)
compensated: transformer is present; and the circuit type of the winding strands
(see star Y connection), and the star point will be wired according
to one of the different kinds of neutral grounding (high impedance
or compensated grounded).
earthed: transformer is present; and the circuit type of the winding strands
to one of the different kinds of neutral grounding (low impedance
or solidly grounded).
P603 Voltage (L-L)

Nominal phase-to-phase voltage of the primary side W1 (or transformer primary side
W1); the absolute set point is taken as reference quantity (base quantity) for
measurement and percentage protection settings.
NOTE: For special applications (such as genset test beds or mobile, switchable rental
units) parameter setting of the nominal phase-to-phase voltage of the primary
side W1 can be changed by a command of the data protocol Profibus DP.
To change parameter settings the user must activate the parameter change
mode by sending once the instruction number 1000 (start of parameter change).
After that, one or more parameter settings can be changed by sending the
related instruction numbers 1002 to 1012 (see document SYMAP-
Compact_Appendix_Modbus-Profibus-IEC103) with appropriate data values.
To finish parameter setting process the user must send once the instruction
number 1001. Subsequently, the SYMAP-Compact(+) device will take ca 16s
for reboot.
P604 Current
Nominal phase current of the primary side W1 (or transformer primary side W1); the
absolute set point is taken as reference quantity (base quantity) for measurement and
percentage protection settings.
P605 Power
Nominal power of the primary side W1 (or transformer primary side W1); the absolute set
point is taken as reference quantity (base quantity) for measurement and percentage
protection settings. The absolute set point can refer to apparent power, active or reactive
power.
P606 Ground voltage

Nominal ground voltage of the primary side W1 (or transformer primary side W1); the
P607 Ground current

Nominal ground current of the primary side W1 (or transformer primary side W1); the

User Manual
Secondary side W2 (or transformer secondary side W2)

Setting the circuit configuration of the transformer secondary side W2; the circuit type of
the winding strands at transformer primary side W1 can be considered as follows:
none: no present transformer in the application,
Y: the winding strands of transformer secondary side W2 will be wired in star
Y connection (starpoint does exist)
D: the winding strands of transformer secondary side W2 will be wired in delta
P611 Phase shift

Factor for phase shift between the primary side W1 and the secondary side W2 of the
three-phase system; settings represent different phase shift factors as a multiple of 30.
EXAMPLE: The setting Phase shift [P611] = 5 means a phase shift between the
primary and secondary voltage of the transformer by 5 x 30 = 150.

Grounding of star point at transformer secondary side W2, depending on the circuit type
of the winding strands at transformer secondary side W2, there are the following setting
options:
at transformer secondary side W2 will produce a neutral potential
(see star Y connection). However, the star point is insulated
against ground (isolated subnetwork)
to one of the different kinds of neutral grounding (high impedance
or compensated grounded).
to one of the different kinds of neutral grounding (low impedance
or solidly gounded).
P613 Voltage (L-L)

Nominal phase-to-phase voltage of the secondary side W2 (or transformer secondary
side W2); the absolute set point is taken as reference quantity (base quantity) for
measurement and percentage protection settings.
units) parameter setting of the nominal phase-to-phase voltage of the
secondary side W2 can be changed by a command of the data protocol
Profibus DP.
for reboot.

User Manual
P614 Current
Nominal phase current of the secondary side W2 (or transformer secondary side W2);
the absolute set point is taken as reference quantity (base quantity) for measurement
and percentage protection settings.
P615 Power
Nominal power of the secondary side W2 (or transformer secondary side W2); the
percentage protection settings. The absolute set point can refer to apparent power,
active or reactive power.
P616 Ground voltage

Nominal ground voltage of the secondary side W2 (or transformer secondary side W2);
P617 Ground current

Nominal ground current of the secondary side W2 (or transformer secondary side W2);

User Manual
Tertiary side W3 (or transformer tertiary side W3)

Setting the circuit configuration of the transformer tertiary side W3; the circuit type of the
winding strands at transformer tertiary side W3 can be considered as follows:
none: no present transformer in the application,
Y: the winding strands of transformer tertiary side W3 will be wired in star Y
connection (starpoint does exist)
D: the winding strands of transformer tertiary side W3 will be wired in delta
P621 Phase shift

Factor for phase shift between the primary side W1 and the tertiary side W3 of the three-
phase system; settings represent different phase shift factors as a multiple of 30.
EXAMPLE: The setting Phase shift [P621] = 5 means a phase shift between the
primary and secondary voltage of the transformer by 5 x 30 = 150.

Grounding of star point at transformer tertiary side W3, depending on the circuit type of
the winding strands at transformer tertiary side W3, there are the following setting
options:
at transformer tertiary side W3 will produce a neutral potential (see
star Y connection). However, the star point is insulated against
ground (isolated subnetwork)
star Y connection), and the star point will be wired according to
one of the different kinds of neutral grounding (high impedance or
compensated grounded).
star Y connection), and the star point will be wired according to
one of the different kinds of neutral grounding (low impedance or
solidly grounded).
P623 Voltage (L-L)

Nominal phase-to-phase voltage of the tertiary side W3 (or transformer tertiary side W3);
units) parameter setting of the nominal phase-to-phase voltage of the tertiary
side W3 can be changed by a command of the data protocol Profibus DP.
for reboot.

User Manual
P624 Current
Nominal phase current of the tertiary side W3 (or transformer tertiary side W3); the
P625 Power
Nominal power of the tertiary side W3 (or transformer tertiary side W3); the absolute set
point is taken as reference quantity (base quantity) for measurement and percentage
protection settings. The absolute set point can refer to apparent power, active or reactive
power.
P626 Ground voltage

Nominal ground voltage of the tertiary side W3 (or transformer tertiary side W3); the
P627 Ground current

Nominal ground current of the tertiary side W3 (or transformer tertiary side W3); the
Frequency
P630 Frequency
Nominal frequency of the three-phase system; the absolute set point is taken as
reference quantity (base quantity) for measurement and percentage protection settings.
units) parameter setting of the nominal frequency of the three-phase system
can be changed by a command of the data protocol Profibus DP.
number 1001. Subsequently, the SYMAP-Compact(+) device will reboot.

User Manual
3.3.2.2 Potential transformers (Rated data of PTs)
Main Menu\ Parameters\SYSTEM\Nominals

Potential
Transformers
PT1
P640 PT1 primary side 0 V 0 999999
P641 PT1 secondary side 0 V 0 999999
P642 PT1 assignment W1 - W1/W2/W3
PT2
PT3
PT-GND1
P649 PT-GND1 primary side 0 V 0 999999
P650 PT-GND1 secondary side 0 V 0 999999
P651 PT-GND1 assignment W2 - W1/W2/W3
Figure 3-7 System parameters Potential Transformers
Potential transformer 1
P640 PT1 primary side

Primary side nominal voltage of potential transformer PT1
P641 PT1 secondary side

Secondary side nominal voltage of potential transformer PT1
P642 PT1 assignment

Assignment of the voltage level to the potential transformer PT1 (transformer winding
side: W1, W2 or W3) to PT1


P645. PT2 assignment


User Manual

P648 PT3 assignment

Potential transformer ground 1
P649 PT-GND1 primary side

Primary side nominal neutral voltage of potential transformer PT-GND1
P650 PT-GND1 secondary side

Secondary side nominal neutral voltage of potential transformer PT-GND1
P651 PT-GND1 assignment

Assignment of the voltage level to the potential transformer PT-GND1 (transformer
winding side: W1, W2 or W3) to PT-GND1.

User Manual
3.3.2.3 Current transformers (Rated data of CTs)
Main Menu\ Parameters\SYSTEM\Nominals

Current
Transformers
CT1
P660 Primary 0 A 0 65535
P661 Secondary 1A A 1A/5A
P662 Direction L1 (Measuring) 0 0/180
P665 Direction L1 (Protection) 0 0/180
P668 Assignment W1 - W1/W2/W3
CT2
P669 Primary 0 A 0 65535
P671 Direction L1 0 0/180
CT-GND1
P681 Primary 0 A 0 65535
P683 Direction 0 0/180
Figure 3-8 System parameters Current Transformers
Current transformer CT1-P (connecting protection winding of the current transformer to CT1)
P660 Primary
Primary side nominal current of current transformer CT1-M/P
P661 Secondary
Secondary side nominal current of current transformer CT1-M/P
P665 Direction L1 (Protection)

Setting the measuring direction for the phase current IL1 at the measurement inputs CT1-
P. With correct connection of the secondary side of the current transformer, setting 0
means for the SYMAP-Compact(+) a reference angle of 0 for determination of phase
position of the current IL1. Setting 180 reverses the phase position of the current by
180. In case of inversed secondary lines of the current transformer, this setting can be
used to correct measuring direction without need to modify wiring.


User Manual

P668 Assignment
Assignment of the voltage level (transformer winding side: W1, W2 or W3) to CT1-M.
Beyond the protection winding, the measurement winding of the used current transformer can
be additionally connected to the SYMAP-Compact+ for measurement purposes.
Current transformer CT1 (connecting measurement windings of current transformer to CT1)
P662 Direction L1 (Measuring)

M. With correct connection of the secondary side of the current transformer, setting 0
means for the SYMAP-Compact+ a reference angle of 0 for determination of phase


The connecting terminals for the CT2 only receive the protection winding on the SYMAP-
Compact+.
Current transformer CT2-M/P (connecting protection winding of the current transformer to CT2)
P669 Primary
Primary side nominal current of current transformer CT2-M/P
P670 Secondary
Secondary side nominal current of current transformer CT2-M/P
P671 Direction L1
M/P. With correct connection of the secondary side of the current transformer, setting
0 means for the SYMAP-Compact+ a reference angle of 0 for determination of

User Manual
phase position of the current IL1. Setting 180 reverses the phase position of the current
by 180. In case of inversed secondary lines of the current transformer, this setting can
be used to correct measuring direction without need to modify wiring.
P672 Direction L2
P673 Direction L3
P674 Assignment
Assignment of the voltage level (transformer winding side: W1, W2 or W3) to CT1-M/P.
Ground current transformer CT-GND1
P681 Primary
Primary side nominal current of the ground current transformer CT-GND1
P682 Secondary
Secondary side nominal current of the ground current transformer CT-GND1
P682 Secondary
Setting the measuring direction for the ground current IG at the measurement input CT-
GND1. With correct connection of the secondary side of the current transformer, setting
0 means for the SYMAP-Compact(+) a reference angle of 0 for determination of
phase position of the current IE. Setting 180 reverses the phase position of the current
P684 Assignment
Assignment of the voltage level (transformer winding side: W1, W2 or W3) to CT-GND1.

User Manual
3.3.3 Measuring (Coordination of measuring channels)
Parameters of menu Measuring are for coordinating the measuring channels to the
application; these include:
coordination of voltage and current measuring inputs for power measurement (Power),
assignment of power measuring for energy counters (Energy),
setting options for zero current compensation (star point grounding) and assignment of the
current measuring input for determination of the ground current for function ANSI 64REF-
Restricted ground fault protection (Differential),
setting options to adjust measuring ranges of voltage measurement inputs (PT inputs),
setting options to enable/disable DC voltage measurement via PT1, PT2 and/or PT3
(DC voltage),
coordination of sample function for frequency measurement (Sampler), and
setting of DC-filter for current measuring (Other).
Figure 3-9 System parameters Measuring

User Manual
3.3.3.1 Power
Main Menu\ Parameters\SYSTEM\Measuring
Power

POWER CT1
P9410 PT reference PT1 - PT1/PT2/PT3
POWER CT2
P9413 PT reference PT1 - PT1/PT2/PT3
GND POWER CT1
P9419 PT reference PT-GND1 - PT-GND1/PT1/PT2/PT3
GND POWER CT2
GND POWER CT-GND1
Figure 3-10 System parameters Measuring\Power
Assignment of voltage and current values for combined U/I measuring values (Measuring)
POWER CT1
9410 PT reference
For power measurement, this parameter determines which of the potential transformers
(PT1, PT2 or PT3) cooperates with the current transformer CT1.
In dependence of the SYMAP-Compact(+) device variant, the following options are
available:
PT1: current measuring by CT1, voltage measuring by PT1
NOTE: All protective functions whose protective criteria depends on current and
voltage measurement values as well (e.g. ANSI 32, 67 etc.), could optionally
refer to the setting of parameter PT reference [P9410] or parameter
PT reference [P9413].
P9411 Direction
Internal adaption of metered energy flow; to define the signs of measurement values, the
following setting options are available:
0: When the 3-phase voltage measurement input (PT1, PT2 or PT3),
assigned by parameter PT reference [P9410], is connected equally to the
connection diagram of this manual and
The current measurement input CT1 is connected the way that measured
secondary current flow is from terminal X1.1:1 to terminal X1.1:2, from

User Manual
terminal X1.1:3 to terminal X1.1:4 and from terminal X1.1:5 to terminal

X1.1:6 and
parameters Direction [P662] to [P667] are set to 0,
then, active power P and reactive power Q will show positive signs (P > 0,
Q > 0) in case that current lags the voltage. In case of the same connection
and setting preconditions the current leads the voltage, active power P will
show positive sign (P > 0) and reactive power will show negative sign (Q <
0).
180: In case that the 3-phase voltage measurement input (PT1, PT2 or PT3),
assigned by parameter PT reference [9410], is connected equally to the
X1.1:6 and
then, active power P and reactive power Q will show negative signs (P < 0,
Q < 0) in case that current lags the voltage. In case of the same connection
and setting preconditions the current leads the voltage, active power P will
show negative sign (P < 0) and reactive power will show positive sign (Q >
0).
POWER CT2
P9413 PT reference
For power measurement, this parameter determines which of the potential transformers
(PT1, PT2 or PT3) cooperates with the current transformer CT2.
available:
PT1: current measuring by, voltage measuring by PT1
voltage measurement values as well (e.g. ANSI 32, 67 etc.), could optionally
refer to the setting of parameter PT reference [P9410] or parameter
PT reference [P9413].
P9414 Direction
Internal adaption of metered energy flow; to define the signs of measurement values, the
following setting options are available:
0: When the 3-phase voltage measurement input (PT1, PT2 or PT3),
assigned, by parameter PT reference [P9413] is connected equally to the
X1.1:12 and
then, active power P and reactive power Q will show positive signs (P > 0,
Q > 0) when current lags the voltage. In case of the same connection and
setting preconditions the current leads the voltage, active power P will show
positive sign (P > 0) and reactive power will show negative sign (Q < 0).

User Manual
180: In case that the 3-phase voltage measurement input (PT1, PT2 or PT3),
assigned by parameter PT reference [P9413], is connected equally to the
X1.1:12 and
then, active power P and reactive power Q will show negative signs (P < 0,
Q < 0) when current lags the voltage. In case of the same connection and
setting preconditions the current leads the voltage, active power P will show
negative sign (P < 0) and reactive power will show positive sign (Q > 0).
GND POWER CT1
P9419 PT reference
For power measurement of the zero sequence system, this parameter determines which
of the potential transformers (PT1, PT2, PT3 or PT-GND1) cooperates with the current
transformer CT1.
available:
PT-GND1: caculation of IG by CT1, measuring of UG by PT-GND1
PT1: caculation of IG by CT1, caculation of UG by PT1
voltage measurement values of the zero sequence system as well (e.g. ANSI
67G etc.), could optionally refer to the setting of parameter
PT reference [P9419], PT reference [P9422] or parameter PT reference
[P9428].
P9420 Direction
Internal adaption of metered energy flow; to define the signs of measurement values of
the zero sequence system, the following setting options are available:
0: When the 1-phase or 3-phase voltage measurement input (PT-GND1,
PT1, PT2 or PT3), assigned by parameter PT reference [P9419], is
connected equally to the connection diagram of this manual and
the current measurement input CT1 is connected the way that measured
X1.1:6 and
then, active ground power P0 and reactive ground power Q0 will show
positive signs (P0 > 0, Q0 > 0) when ground current IG lags the residual
voltage UG. In case of the same connection and setting preconditions the
ground current IG leads the residual voltage UG, active ground power P0 will
show positive sign (P0 > 0) and reactive ground power will show negative
sign (Q0 < 0).
180: In case that the 1-phase or 3-phase voltage measurement input (PT-GND1,

User Manual

X1.1:6 and
negative signs (P0 < 0, Q0 < 0) when ground current IG lags the residual
ground current leads the residual voltage UG, active ground power P0 will
show negative sign (P0 < 0) and reactive ground power Q0 will show
positive sign (Q0 > 0).
GND POWER CT2
P9422 PT reference
of the potential transformers (PT1, PT2, PT3 or PT-GND1) cooperates with the current
transformer CT2.
available:
PT-GND1: caculation of IG by CT2, measuring of UG by PT-GND1
[P9428].
P9423 Direction
X1.1:12 and
sign (Q0 < 0).
X1.1:12 and

User Manual

GND POWER CT-GND1
9428 PT reference
of the potential transformers (PT1, PT2, PT3 or PT-GND1) cooperates with the ground
current transformer CT-GND1.
available:
PT-GND1: measuring of IG by CT-GND1, measuring of UG by PT-GND1
PT1: measuring of IG by CT-GND1, caculation of UG by PT1
NOTE: All protective functions whose protective criteria depends oncurrent and
[P9428].
P9429 Direction
the current measurement input CT-GND1 is connected the way that
measured secondary current flow is from terminal X1.1:7 to terminal X1.1:8,
(SYMAP-Compact) or from terminal X1.1:13 to terminal X1.1:14
(SYMAP-Compact+) and
parameter Direction [P683] is set to 0,
sign (Q0 < 0).
the current measurement input CT-GND1 is connected the way that
measured secondary current flow is from terminal X1.1:7 to terminal X1.1:8,
(SYMAP-Compact) or from terminal X1.1:13 to terminal X1.1:14
(SYMAP-Compact+) and
parameter Direction [P683] is set to 0,

User Manual

User Manual
3.3.3.2 Energy
Energy

P9434 kWh counter reference Power CT1 - Power CT1/ Power CT2
P9450 Min. start current 0 % 0 65535,5
P9451 Blocking 0 event 0 9999
Figure 3-11 System parameters Measuring\Energy
P9434 kWh counter reference

For energy counting (positive active energy: Wp+; negative active energy: Wp-; positive
reactive energy: Wq+; negative reactive energy: Wq-), this parameter determines the
applied current and voltage measurement inputs as well as as the definition of energy
direction.
Power CT1: current measurement by CT1, voltage measurement by the potential
transformer assigned by parameter PT reference [P9410] and
direction definition by parameter Direction [P9411]
Power CT2: current measurement by CT2, voltage measurement by the potential
transformer assigned by parameter PT reference [P9413] and
direction definition by parameter Direction [P9414].
P9450 Min. start current

Minimum limit of the measuring current to activate energy counting; energy counting is
blocked as long as the measured current in all three phases remain below this minimum
setting.
NOTE: The minimum limit of measuring current to activate energy counting is to be

set as a percentage of the nominal value of the process quantity phase
current. The nominal value of the process quantity is to be set by parameter:
Current [P604], for primary side W1 or
Current [P614], for secondary side W2 or
Current [P624], for tertiary side W3.
The parameters Current [P604], Current [P614] and Current [P624] are located in
submenu: SYSTEM\Nominals\Reference values
P9451 Blocking
Energy counting function can be completely blocked by any active event. For blocking,
the number related to this blocking event has to be assigned to parameter [P9451].
Blocking is only effective as long as the blocking event is active. If the blocking event
becomes inactive, blocking is abandoned and energy counting is to be continued with
the counting value which was saved at the point of time of blocking.
If blocking of the energy counting function is not required, set this parameter to 0.

User Manual
3.3.3.3 Differential
Differential

Zero compensation
P9436 W1 zero compensation OFF - OFF/ON
P9437 W2 zero compensation OFF - OFF/ON
Ground differential
P9439 CT-GNDx source CT-GND1 - CT-GND1
P9440 CTx source CT1 - CT1/CT2
P9441 Diff-current reference W1 - W1/W2/W3
Figure 3-12 System parameters Measuring\Differential
Zero compensation
P9436 W1 zero compensation

This parameter activates/deactivates zero current compensation when protective
function ANSI 87 Transformer differential protection is applied; whereby:
OFF: deactivates zero current compensation for winding side W1 or
ON: activates zero current compensation for winding side W1.
P9437 W2 zero compensation

This parameter activates/deactivates zero current compensation when protective
function ANSI 87 Transformer differential protection is applied; whereby:
OFF: deactivates zero current compensation for winding side W2 or
ON: activates zero current compensation for winding side W2.
Ground differential
The following parameters refer to the protective function Restriced earth fault ANSI 64REF
P9439 CT-GNDxsource
Assignment of the current measurement input which measures the ground current
directly for protective function Restricted earth fault ANSI 63REF. At present, the
characteristic quantity (ground current) of restricted earth fault protection is to be
measured via ground current measurement input CT-GND1:
CT-GND1: measured ground current IG by CT-GND1
P9440 CTxsource
Assignment of the current measurement input which calculates the ground current for
protective function Restricted earth fault ANSI 63REF. Depending on the SYMAP-
Compact(+) device variant, that measurement input which calculates the ground current
from the 3-phase current measurement input of protective function Restricted earth fault
ANSI 64REF, can be assigned to a certain current measurement input (CT1 or CT2).
Parameter [P9440] determines the current measurement input which will provide
measurement values as characteristic quantity (ground current) to the restricted earth
fault protection:

User Manual
CT1: calculated ground current: IG = 3 x I0 = I1+I2+I3 from the phase currents,

which are to be measured by CT1
CT2: calculated ground current: IG = 3 x I0 = I1+I2+I3 from the phase currents,
which are to be measured by CT2
P9441 Diff-current reference

Referencing of displayed zero phase sequence system power measurement values;
displayed differential current values have to refer to one winding side of the transformer.
Figure 3-13 Meters Current Differential currents DIFF
Displayed measuring values of the differential current (DIFF) may be referred to

W1: the primary winding W1,
W2: the secondary winding W2 or
W3: the tertiary winding W3
of the transformer.

User Manual
3.3.3.4 Impedance
Main Menu\Parameters\SYSTEM\Measuring
Impedance

P9470 CT Pickup source CT1 - CT1/CT2
P9471 3I0 Pickup source Calc - Calc/CT-GND1
P9472 PT Pickup source PT1 - PT1/PT2/PT3
P9473 3U0 Pickup source Calc - Calc/PT-GND1
Figure 3-14 System parameters Measuring\Impedance
P9470 CT Pickup source

Depending on the SYMAP-Compact(+) device variant function ANSI 21 Distance
protection can be assigned to a certain phase current measurement input (CT1 or CT2).
measurement values as characteristic quantity (phase current) for distance protection:
CT1: current input CT1
P9471 3I0 Pickup source

protection can be assigned to a certain current measurement input (CT1, CT2 or CT-
GND1) for ground current measuring. Hence, parameter [P9471] determines the current
measurement input which will provide measurement values as characteristic quantity
(ground current) for distance protection:
Calc: calculated ground current IG = 3 x I0 = I1 + I2 + I3 by measured phase
currents via the assigned current measurement input (CT1 or CT2)
set by parameter CT pickup source [P9470].
CT-GND1: ground current IG directly measured via ground current measuring
input CT-GND1
P9472 PT Pickup source

protection can be assigned to a certain phase voltage measurement input (PT1, PT2 or
PT3). Parameter [P9472] determines the voltage measurement input which will provide
measurement values as characteristic quantity (phase voltage) for distance protection:
PT1: voltage input PT1,
PT2: voltage input PT2, or
PT3: voltage input PT3.
P9473 3U0 Pickup source

protection can be assigned to a certain voltage measurement input (PT1, PT2, PT3 or
PT-GND1) for residual voltage measuring. Hence, parameter [P9473] determines the
voltage measurement input which will provide measurement values as characteristic
quantity (residual voltage) for distance protection:

User Manual
Calc: calculated ground currend UG = 3 x U0 = U1 + U2 + U3 by measured

phase voltages via the assigned voltage measurement input (PT1,
PT2 or PT3) set by parameter PT pickup source [P9472].
PT-GND1: residual voltage UG directly measured via ground voltage measuring
input PT-GND1

User Manual
3.3.3.5 PT inputs
PT inputs

PT input mode
P9400 PT1 mode 0 ... 1100V V 0 ... 200V/0 ... 1100V
P9401 PT2 mode 0 ... 1100V V 0 ... 200V/0 ... 1100V
P9402 PT3/PT-GND1 mode 0 ... 1100V V 0 ... 200V/0 ... 1100V
Figure 3-15 System parameters Measuring\PT inputs
PT input mode
Settings for measuring ranges of the potential transformers (Analog inputs)
Each of the voltage measurement inputs is equipped with two measuring ranges:
Lower range: 0 to 200V AC
Upper range: 0 to 1100V AC
Depending on the set values (parameters [P9400] to [P9402] of the voltage measuring inputs,
the different voltage measuring inputs of SYMAP-Compact(+) apply either the lower or the
upper measuring range.
P9400 PT1 mode :

To set the measuring range of voltage transformer PT1, please note the following
options:
0 200V: measuring input PT1 applies lower measuring range
(e.g. for nominal voltages Un = 100V, 110V)
0 1100V: measuring input PT1 applies upper measuring range
(e.g. for nominal voltages Un = 400V)
P9401 PT2 mode :

To set the measuring range of voltage transformer PT2, please note the following
options:
0 200V: measuring input PT2 applies lower measuring range
0 1100V: measuring input PT2 applies upper measuring range
P9403 PT3/PT-GND1 mode :

To set the measuring range of voltage transformers PT-GND1 and PT3, please note the
following options:
0 200V: measuring inputs PT-GND1 and PT3 apply lower measuring range
0 1100V: measuring inputs PT-GND1 and PT3 apply upper measuring range

User Manual
3.3.3.6 DC voltage
DC voltage

Sampler
P9460 DC voltage measurement on PT1 OFF - ON/OFF
Figure 3-16 DC voltage measurement
P9460 DC voltage measurement on PT1 :

This parameter enables/disables DC voltage measurement where:
OFF: disables or
ON: enables the DC voltage measurement via PT1.

OFF: disables or

OFF: disables or

User Manual
3.3.3.7 Sampler
Sampler

Sampler
P9455 Min frequency 10 Hz 0,10 ... 200
P9456 Max. frequency 80 Hz 0,10 ... 200
P9457 Frequency source Auto - Auto/PT1/PT2/PT3/Fn
Figure 3-17 System parameters Measuring\Sampler
Sampler
The Sampler sub-menu provides parameters of the module for sampling current and voltage
measurement values.
The sample rate for U/I measurement is 36 samples per cycle. In case that the frequency of the
measured voltage quantities will differ from the set value of parameter Nominal frequency
[P630], the time between two samples (sample time) has to be modified to the meet the rate of
36 samples per cycle.
Parameters [P9455] and [P9456] determine the range of the measured frequency which is valid
for effectiveness of sample time adaption.
P9455 Min. frequency :

Minimum frequency limit for adaption of the time between two samples; in the case that
the frequency of the measured voltage quantity falls below the set value of parameter
Min. frequency [P9455], then, calculation of the sample time reflects the set value of
parameter Nominal frequency [P630].
P9456 Max. frequency :

Maximum frequency limit for adaption of the time between two samples; in the case that
the frequency of the measured voltage quantity exceeds the set value of parameter Min.
frequency [P9455], then, calculation of the sample time reflects the set value of
parameter Nominal frequency [P630].
P9457 Frequency source :

Selection of the source for frequency measuring for calculation of the sample time;
where:
PT1: calculation of the sample time reflects the measured frequency value
of PT1. If there is no frequency measurement at PT1 (fPT1 = 0), then
calculation of the sample time reflects the set value of parameter
Nominal frequency [P630].

User Manual
Fn: calculation of the sample time reflects the set value of parameter
Nominal frequency [P630]
Auto: calculation of the sample time reflects the measured frequency value
calculation of the sample time reflects the measured frequency value
calculation of the sample time reflects the measured frequency value

User Manual
3.3.3.8 Floating average
Floating average

P9463 Source of Uavg 10min PT1 - PT1/PT2/PT3
Figure 3-18 System parameters Measuring\Floating average
P9463 Source of Uavg 10min

This parameter determines the voltage measurement input which will provide
measurement values as characteristic quantity (floating voltage average) to the ANSI 59
Overvoltage protection for those protection steps which are assigned to 10min
arithmetic mean protection (ANSI 59AV); e.g. step 1: Pickup source [P1205] = Uavg
10min:
PT1: voltage input PT1

User Manual
3.3.3.9 Other
Other

P9435 DC regulator 1 LSB 1 2048
Figure 3-19 System parameters Measuring\Other
P9435 DC regulator
Rapidity controller for DC elemination of analog current measurement values; generelly,
current measurement values are measured according to TRMS (true root means square)
principle. Such analog signals include harmonics as well as DC portion.
To eleminate the DC portion parameter DC regulator [P9435] can be used. The DC
regulator modifies the TRMS signal afflicted with DC portion, with an adjustable rapidity.
A low set value of parameter [P9435] means slow elemination; whereas a high set value
is for rapid elemination of DC portion:
For instance, a setting value of parameter DC regulator = 2048 LSB means an
elemination of the DC portion after one cycle of the measured current signal.
However, a setting value of parameter DC regulator = 1 LSB means an entire
elemination of the DC portion after 2048 cycles of the measured current signal.
Calculation of the DC portion is always done once a cycle.

User Manual
3.3.4 Counter (Counting functions)
Main Main Menu\ Parameters\SYSTEM\Counter
Counter

P700 Working hours counter 0 h 0 999999
P701 Working hours counter act 0 event 0 9999
Energy counter
P710 Wp+ 0 kWh 0 4294967295
P711 Wp- 0 kWh 0 4294967295
P712 Wq+ 0 kvarh 0 4294967295
P713 Wq- 0 kvarh 0 4294967295
E710 Wp+ overflow - - -
E711 Wp- overflow - - -
E712 Wq+ overflow - - -
E713 Wq- overflow - - -
E714 Wp+ overflow (temporary) - - -
E715 Wp- overflow (temporary) - - -
E716 Wq+ overflow (temporary) - - -
E717 Wq- overflow (temporary) - - -
ANSI 79 Automatic reclosing
P720 Success counter 0 - 0 65535
P721 Fail counter 0 - 0 65535
P722 Reclosing counter 0 - 0 65535
P723 Reclosing counter limit 1 0 - 0 65535
P724 Reclosing counter limit 2 0 - 0 65535
P725 Reset counter 0 event 0 9999
Figure 3-20 System parameters Counting functions
P701 Working hours counter act

The working hours counter can be activated by any active event. To activate the counter,
the number related to this activation event has to be assigned to parameter [P701].
Counting is only effective for as long as the activating event is active. If the activating
event becomes inactive, counting is abandoned.
If activation of working hours counter via activating event is not required, set this
parameter to 0.
NOTE: When sending the parameter file to the device, the set values of parameters [P700]
and [P710] to [P713] will only be saved if you tick the box Overwrite counters of
configuration software SCPT!

User Manual
Figure 3-21 SCPT Saving counter set values
P700 Working hours counter

Set counting value for the working hours counter; precisely at the time when the set
value of parameter Working hours counter [P700] is saved (download of parameter file
xxx.cpt; e.g. after exchange), the working hours counter continues operating using the
set counting value as new start value.
NOTE: The working hours counter will start if:
measured frequency value (via voltage measurement at PTx) exceeds
30Hz or
in case the device variant does not provide frequency measurement the
event assigned to parameter Working hours counter act [P701] is active.

User Manual
Energy counters (absolute counting values)
P710 Wp+
Set value for the absolute counting values of the positive, active energy counter;
precisely at the time when the set value of parameter Wp+ [P710] is saved (download
of parameter file xxx.cpt; e.g. after exchange of the device), the positive, active energy
counter continues operating using the set counting value as new start value.
P711 Wp-
Set counting value for the negative, active energy counter; precisely at the time when
the set value of parameter Wp- [P711] is saved (download of parameter file xxx.cpt;
e.g. after exchange of the device), the negative, active energy counter continues
operating using the set counting value as new start value.
P712 Wq+
Set counting value for the positive, reactive energy counter; precisely at the time when
the set value of parameter Wq+ [P712] is saved (download of parameter file xxx.cpt;
e.g. after exchange of the device), the positive, reactive energy counter continues
P713 Wq-
Set counting value for the negative, reactive energy counter; precisely at the time when
the set value of parameter Wq- [P713] is saved (download of parameter file xxx.cpt;
e.g. after exchange of the device), the negative, reactive energy counter continues
Event description:
Absolute counting values
E710 Wp+ overflow

At the moment that the absolute, positive, active energy counter exceeds its maximum
absolute counting value (232 1 = 4294967295), event Wp+ overflow [E710] is
activated, and counting will continue using 0 as new start value. Active event [E710] is
deactivated automatically 1s after its activation.
E711 Wp- overflow

At the moment that the absolute, negative, active energy counter exceeds its maximum
absolute counting value (232 1 = 4294967295), event Wp- overflow [E711] is
E712 Wq+ overflow

At the moment that the absolute, positive, reactive energy counter exceeds its maximum
absolute counting value (232 1 = 4294967295), event Wq+ overflow [E712] is
E713 Wq- overflow

At the moment that the absolute, negative, reactive energy counter exceeds its
maximum absolute counting value (232 1 = 4294967295), event Wq- overflow [E713]
is activated, and counting will continue using 0 as new start value. Active event [E713]
is deactivated automatically 1s after its activation.

User Manual
Temporary counting values
E714 Wp+ overflow (temporary)

At the moment that the temporary, positive, active energy counter exceeds its maximum
absolute counting value, event Wp+ overflow (temporary) [E714] is activated, and
counting will continue using 0 as new start value. Active event [E714] is deactivated
automatically 1s after its activation.
E715 Wp- overflow (temporary)

At the moment that the temporary, negative, active energy counter exceeds its maximum
absolute counting value, event Wp- overflow (temporary) [E715] is activated, and
counting will continue using 0 as new start value. Active event [E715] is deactivated
automatically 1s after its activation.
E716 Wq+ overflow (temporary)

At the moment that the temporary, positive, reactive energy counter exceeds its
maximum absolute counting value, event Wq+ overflow (temporary) [E716] is
E717 Wq- overflow (temporary)

At the moment that the temporary, negative, reactive energy counter exceeds its
maximum absolute counting value, event Wq- overflow (temporary) [E717] is activated,
and counting will continue using 0 as new start value. Active event [E717] is
ANSI 79 Automatic reclosing (AR)
P720 Success counter

Set counting value for the successful AR-cycles; precisely at the time when the set value
of parameter Success counter [P720] is saved, the counter continues operating using
the set counting value as new start value.
P721 Fail counter

Set counting value for the unsuccessful ( failed) AR-cycles; precisely at the time when
the set value of parameter Fail counter [P721] is saved, the counter continues
P722 Reclosing counter

Set counting value for all the reclosing attempts of Auto reclosing function; precisely at
the time when the set value of parameter Reclosing counter [P722] is saved, the
counter continues operating using the set counting value as new start value.
P723 Reclosing counter limit 1

First maximum set counting limit for all the reclosing attempts of Auto reclosing function
P724 Reclosing counter limit 2

Second maximum set counting limit for all the reclosing attempts of Auto reclosing
function
P725 Reset counter

Reset of all AR-counters; the actual counting values of all the AR-counters can be reset
by any active event. To reset, the number related to this event has to be assigned to
parameter [P725]. As soon as the assigned reset event is activated, counting is blocked
and the counting values are reset to the start couning values set by parameters: [P720]
bis [P721]. Blocking of all the counters is only effective as long as the blocking event is
active. If the reset event becomes inactive, counting is effective again.

User Manual
If reset of all AR-counters is not required, set this parameter to 0.

User Manual
3.3.5 Filter (Filter functions for measurement, display and event recording)
Main Menu\ Parameters\SYSTEM\Filter
Filter

Dead band
P800 Current 3,0 % 0 6553,5
P801 Voltage 3,0 % 0 6553,5
P802 Power 3,0 % 0 6553,5
Frequency
P806 Max. rate of change 2,0 Hz/per cycle 0,100 6553,5
Filter event recording
P880 Filter event recording from 0 event 0 ... 9999
P881 -to 0 event 0 ... 9999
P883 -to 0 event 0 ... 9999
P885 -to 0 event 0 ... 9999
P887 -to 0 event 0 ... 9999
P889 -to 0 event 0 ... 9999
P891 -to 0 event 0 ... 9999
P893 -to 0 event 0 ... 9999
P895 -to 0 event 0 ... 9999
P897 -to 0 event 0 ... 9999
P899 -to 0 event 0 ... 9999
Figure 3-22 System parameters Filter functions
Dead Band
Dead band parameters [P800] to [P802] are applicable for device display and transmission via
communication protocols of measurement values only!
P800 Current
Minimum limit of current measurement display; as soon as a measured current value
falls below the set value of parameter Current [P800], the current value is displayed as
NULL.
NOTE: The minimum limit [P800] is to be set as a percentage of the nominal value of
the characteristic quantity (phase current). The nominal value of the
characteristic quantity is to be set by parameter:

User Manual
The parameters Current [P604], Current [P614] and Current [P624] are
located in submenu: SYSTEM\Nominals\Reference values.
P801 Voltage
Minimum limit of voltage measurement display; as soon as a measured voltage value
falls below the set value of parameter Voltage [P801], the voltage value is displayed as
NULL.
the characteristic quantity (phase-to-phase voltage). The nominal value of the
Voltage (L-L) [P603], for primary side W1 or
Voltage (L-L) [P613], for secondary side W2 or
Voltage (L-L) [P623], for tertiary side W3.
The parameters Voltage (L-L) [P603], Voltage (L-L) [P613] and Voltage (L-
L) [P623] are located in submenu: SYSTEM\Nominals\Reference values.
P802 Power
Minimum limit of power measurement display; as soon as a measured power value falls
below the set value of parameter Power [P802], the power value is displayed as NULL.
the characteristic quantity (active power, reactive power or apparent power).
The nominal value of the characteristic quantity is to be set by parameter:
Power [P605], for primary side W1 or
Power [P615], for secondary side W2 or
Power [P625], for tertiary side W3.
The parameters Power [P605], Power [P615] and Power [P625] are
Frequency
P806 Max. rate of change

Filter function for frequency measurement to distinguish between an increasing
frequency and a frequency jump caused by disturbance influence.
NOTE: This feature can be used for applications in which no high frequency jumps
are expected. However, a recognized high frequency jump might be due to a
disturbing, electromagnetic influence (EMC). The filter function can then be
used to suppress such frequency peak and to avoid any unwanted tripping of
the CB via active frequency protective functions.
At the end of each measuring cycle a new frequency measurement value ft is
determined. Subsequently, this value is to be compared with the previously measured
frequency value ft-1. The frequency difference is then calculated: f = ft ft-1, which gives
conclusion about the extent of the frequency jump:
f > [P806]:
If the frequency difference f exceeds the set value of parameter Max rate of
change [P806] three times in succession, the following measured frequency value
is being ignored and the previously measured value remains valid for the measuring
unit of SYMAP-Compact.
f < [P806]:

User Manual
If the frequency difference f is below the set value of parameter Max rate of
change [P806], the new measured frequency value is valid for the measuring unit of
SYMAP-Compact.
Filter event recording
P880 Filter event recording from

Blocking of event recording for selected event(s); for blocking the event recording of a
selected event or a range of selectable events, the number of the (first) selected event
has to be assigned to parameter [P880]. Together with parameter - to [P881] a
selected range of consecutive events can be determined which are not to be recordered
by the event recorder.
If blocking of event recording for selected event(s) is not required, set this parameter to
0.
P881 - to
Blocking of event recording for selected events; together with parameter Filter event
recording from [P880] a range of consecutive events can be determined which are not
to be recordered by the event recorder. For blocking the event recording of a selectable
range of consecutive events, the number of the last selected event has to be assigned to
parameter [P881].
If blocking of event recording for a selected range of consecutive events is not required,
set this parameter to 0.
P883 Filter event recording from

to
P899 - to
(see description of parameters [P880] and [P881])

User Manual
3.3.6 Communication (configuration of interfaces)
Each SYMAP-Compact(+) provides a standard interface RS422/485 using the Modbus RTU
data protocol. For additional communication options, please refer to the valid order code. As
well as the standard communication, the following parameter descriptions also take into account
all available communication options.
3.3.6.1 Serial port 1
Main Menu\ Parameters\SYSTEM\Communication
Port settings

Serial port 1
P900 Port OFF - OFF/RS485/RS422
P901 Address 1 - 0 255
P902 Baudrate 57600 Bd 9600/19200/38400/57600
P903 Protocol none - none/Modbus
P904 Format 8,None,1 8,None,1/8,None,2/8,Even,1/
8,Even,2/8,Odd,1/8,Odd,2
Figure 3-23 Communication Standard interface Serial port 1
P900 Port
Standard interface of SYMAP-Compact(+); the physical interface provides following
setting options:
OFF: disabled,
RS485: enabled (working principle of physical interface is RS485) or
RS422: enabled (working principle of physical interface is RS422)
P901 Address
Slave address of standard interface; the setting range of slave addresses is between 0
and 255.
P902 Baudrate
Unit of the symbol rate for data transmission; the following setting options provide
different symbol rates (unit: [Bd]):
9600
19200
38400
57600
NOTE: Care should be taken that the symbol rate (Baud rate) is the same for both,
the sender and the receiver.
P903 Protocol
Options for data protocol of standard interface; the data protocol (Modbus RTU) of the
standard interface can be:
none: disabled, or

User Manual
Modbus: enabled (standard configuration: Modbus RTU).
P904 Format
Format definition (byte frame) of date telegram for protocoll type MODBUS RTU; the
byte frame of the data telegram of SYMAP-Compact(+) can be adapted to the interface
configuration of the applied Modbus Master system. The byte frame is determined as
follows: Start bit = 1 (fix); No. of data bits, parity, No. of Stop bits.
8, None, 1: 1 start bit, 8 data bits, no parity, 1 stop bit
8, None, 2: 1 start bit, 8 data bits, no parity, 2 stop bits
8, Even, 1: 1 start bit, 8 data bits, even parity, 1 stop bit
8, Even, 2: 1 start bit, 8 data bits, even parity, 2 stop bits
8, Odd, 1: 1 start bit, 8 data bits, odd parity aritt, 1 stop bit
8, Odd, 2: 1 start bit, 8 data bits, odd parity, 2 stop bits
3.3.6.2 Serial port 2
Main Menu\ Parameters\SYSTEM\Communication\
Serial port 2

Serial port 2
P905 Port OFF - OFF/ON
P906 Address 1 - 0 255
P907 Baudrate 57600 Bd 9600/19200/38400/57600
P908 Protocol IEC 870-5-103 - IEC 870-5-103
P909 Format 8,None,1 8,None,1/8,None,2/8,Even,1/
8,Even,2/8,Odd,1/8,Odd,2
P915 The fiber optic lighting in
Light off - Light off/Light on
the idle state
P916 Wait before response 0 ms 0 2000ms
Figure 3-24 Communication Optional interface Serial port 2
P905 Port
Standard interface of SYMAP-Compact(+); the physical IEC 60870-5-103 interface
provides following setting options:
OFF: disabled or
ON: enabled.
P906 Address
Slave address of standard interface; the setting range of slave addresses is between 0
and 255.
P907 Baudrate
different symbol rates (unit: [Bd]):
9600
19200

User Manual
38400
57600
P908 Protocol
Options for data protocol of standard interface; the data protocol of interface serial port
2 is only:
IEC 870-5-103: data protocol IEC 60870-5-103 is enabled.
P909 The fiber optic lighting in the idle state

Selection of the optic lighting logic in idle state; the following setting options are
available:
Light off: idle state: transmission LED is off
Light on: idle state: transmission LED is on
P915 Format
Format definition (byte frame) of date telegram for protocoll type IEC 60870-5-103; the
byte frame of the data telegram of SYMAP-Compact(+) can be adapted to the interface
configuration of the applied Modbus Master system. The byte frame is determined as
follows: Start bit = 1 (fix); No. of data bits, parity, No. of Stop bits.
8, None, 1: 1 start bit, 8 data bits, no parity, 1 stop bit
8, None, 2: 1 start bit, 8 data bits, no parity, 2 stop bits
8, Even, 1: 1 start bit, 8 data bits, even parity, 1 stop bit
8, Even, 2: 1 start bit, 8 data bits, even parity, 2 stop bits
8, Odd, 1: 1 start bit, 8 data bits, odd parity aritt, 1 stop bit
8, Odd, 2: 1 start bit, 8 data bits, odd parity, 2 stop bits
P916 Wait before response

Waiting period until the SYMAP-Compact(+) device is sending a response to a master
IEC 60870-5-103 protocol request; applying the waiting period can be useful in case of
using some slower media converter like RS232/RS485, between control station and
SYMAP-Compact(+) device.

User Manual
3.3.6.3 Profibus DP
Profibis

Profibus DP
P910 Port OFF - OFF/RS485/RS422
P911 Address 1 - 1 123
P912 Byte order Little endian - Little endian/Big endian
Figure 3-25 Communication Optional interface Profibus DP
P910 Port
Profibus interface of SYMAP-Compact(+); the physical Profibus interface provides
following setting options:
OFF: disabled or
ON: enabled
P911 Address
Slave address of Profibus interface; the setting range of slave addresses is between 1
and 123.
P912 Byte order

Byte order within a Profibus DP telegram; to define the data format (serial byte order of
usage data which are to be transmitted or received), there are following setting options:
Little Endian: The least significant byte (LSB) will be transmitted first (e.g.
Motorola standard).
Big Endian: The most significant byte (MSB) will be transmitted first (e.g.
SIEMENS S7 standard).

User Manual
3.3.6.4 Ethernet Service Port
The Ethernet port (RJ45) at the housing side can simultaneously be used:
to connect the extension board system EBS, and/or
to connect a notebook/PC via LAN to configurate the SYMAP-Compact(+) device via
configuration software SCPT => service port.
For using the Ethernet port as service port there are the following parameters available to adjust
the IP address for the SYMAP-Compact(+) device:
Ethernet Service Port

Ethernet Service Port
P937 Ethernet Service Port OFF - OFF/ON
P938 IP address part 1 (L) 169 - 0 255
P939 IP address part 2 254 - 0 255
Figure 3-26 Communication Ethernet Service Port
P937 Ethernet Service Port

This parameter enables/disables Ethernet service port for parameter setting via
SYMAP-Compact Parameter Tool (SCPT) where:
OFF: disables or
ON: enables the Ethernet service port.
P938 IP address part 1 (L)

and
P939 IP address part 2
and
and
Via parameters [P938] to [P941] the IP address of the SYMAP -Compact device can be
adjusted.
Example: IP address = 169.234.4.12

User Manual
3.3.6.5 Ethernet
Ethernet

Ethernet
P950 IP address part 1 (L) 192 - 0 255
P954 Subnet mask part 1 (L) 255 - 0 255
P955 Subnet mask part 2 255 - 0 255
P958 Gateway address 1 (L) 192 - 0 255
P959 Gateway address 2 168 - 0 255
Figure 3-27 Communication Optional interface Ethernet
P950 IP address part 1 (L)

and
and
and
Via parameters [P950] to [P953] the IP address of the SYMAP -Compact device can be
adjusted.
Example: IP address = 192.168.1.10
P954 Subnet mask part 1 (L)

and
P955 Subnet mask part 2
and
and
Via parameters [P954] to [P957] the Subnet mask of the network can be adjusted.
Example: Subnet mask = 255.255.255.0
P958 Gateway address part 1 (L)

and
P959 Gateway address part 2
and
and
Via parameters [P958] to [P961] the router address of the Gateway can be adjusted.
Example: Gateway address = 255.255.255.0

User Manual
3.3.6.6 Network topology (IEC 61850)
Network Topology

Network topology
- Ring/Double Star/Ring with HSR/
P978 Network topology OFF
Double Start with PRP
Figure 3-28 Communication IEC 61850 network topology
P978 Network topology

If the SYMAP-Compact(+) device variant is equipped with IEC 61850 redundancy
communication ports (see order code), the following selection options are available:
Ring: Ring topology - Ethernet communication port 1 and port 2
are active; device can send and receive Ethernet frames
via both ports using protocol type Rapid Spanning Tree
Protocol (RSTP)
RSTP is used to quickly reconnect a network in case of the
network fault. The fault recovery time depends on the
number of devices in the ring, and on the time taken by the
devices to determine the root bridge and compute the port
roles. The port roles are: discarding, learning and
forwarding. See the IEEE 802.1D - 2004 standard for
additional informations.
According the standard 802.1D - 2004, the recommended
set values of the most important parameters such as Bridge
Hello Time, Bridge Max Age, Bridge Forward Delay, and
Bridge Priority are shown in the following table:
Table 3-2 RSTP Bridge parameters
S.-No. Parameter Default setting [s]
1 Bridge Max Age 20
2 Bridge Hello Time 2
3 Bridge Forward Delay 15
4 Bridge Priority 32768
Double Star: Star topology with one additional (stand by) port. Ethernet
communication via port 1 and port 2 are active,
however, the device can receive and send Ethernet frames
via first connected port. If connection is broken down
(Link down), the device will try to establish connection via
the next connected port (Link up). It can be the same port
or the second port. If connection breaks down (Link down)
again, the device will try to establish connection via next
connected (Link up) port,
Ring with HSR: Ring topology - Ethernet communication port A and port B
are active; device can send and receive Ethernet frames
via both ports using protocol type IEC 62439-3 High-
availability Seamless Redundancy (HSR) protocol.

User Manual
Double Star with PRP: Star topology; the device receives and sends Ethernet
frames via both ports (port A and port B) at the same time.
This is redundancy using the double Star topology with
IEC 62439-3 Parallel Redundancy Protocol (PRP) protocol.
NOTE: The above selection options are not valid for SYMAP-Compact(+) device
variants equipped with IEC 61850 single communication port!
3.3.6.7 SNTP
SNTP

SNTP
P962 SNTP (Time synchronisation) OFF - OFF/ON
P965 SNTP Server addr. part 1 (L) 192 - 0 255
P966 SNTP Server addr. part 2 168 - 0 255
Figure 3-29 Communication Optional interface SNTP
P962 SNTP (Time synchronisation)

Time synchronisation via SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol) can be activated via
parameter SNTP (Time synchronisation) [P962]:
OFF: time synchronisation is deactivated,
ON: time synchronisation is activated.
CAUTION: The correct system time of SYMAP-Compact(+) does not only accords to
the active time synchronisation and the set local time, but also to
enabled/disabled switch-over to the daylight saving time (parameter
Daylight saving time [P963]!
When switch-over to daylight saving tme is enabled the basic time in
SYMAP-Compact(+) is the winter time !
P965 SNTP Server addr. part 1 (L)

and
P966 SNTP Server addr. Part 2
and
and
The time server IP-address can be set via parameters [P965] to [P968]. An Internet
connection and a router (see parameters [P958] to [P961]) must exist in order to connect
to an Internet time server. The SYMAP-Compact(+) operates as a client periodically
sending requests to the time server (512 sec polling interval).
The SYMAP-Compact(+) accepts also SNTP broadcast messages via Local Broadcast
or Multicast from a local time server (SCADA system).
If parameters [P965] to [P968] are all set to zero, SYMAP-Compact(+) will not send any
requests.

User Manual
3.3.6.8 IEC 61850
IEC 61850

IEC 61850
P969 IEC 61850 OFF OFF/ON
P970 IEDName Index (Dxxx) 1 0 255
P975 Command for IEC 61850 data formating 0 - 0 9999
Figure 3-30 Communication Optional interface IEC 61850
P969 IEC 61850

The interface IEC61850 communication can be dectivated/activated via parameter IEC
61850:
OFF: IEC61850 communication is deactivated
ON: IEC61850 communication is activated
As soon as a link with the IEC 61850 client has established, the event [E0328] is
activated.
NOTE: For more informationen about IEC61850 communication, please refer to the
SYMAP-Compact_Appendix_IEC61850 document.
P970 IEDName Index (Dxxx)

Index referring to the name of the applied intelligent electronic device IED SYMAP-
Compact.
NOTE: The index of one device may exist only once within the network!
P975 Command for IEC 61850 data formating

Password to authorize formating of the IEC 61850 memory area at the communication
board for IEC 61850 communication; when executing the command, all data sets,
reports and controls (created by IED Manager or some Clients) for IEC 61850
communication will be deleted.
To gain access in order to execute the command, a 4-digit password has to be assigned
to parameter [P975]. Instructions for this are as follows:
1. Go to: Main Menu\Operating\Status\Debug
2. Scroll up to page no. 424 using the +1 button
3. Press send cmd,
4. Enter the 4-digit password
5. Press send
NOTE: It is recommended to format the memory area for IEC 61850 communication
before uploading any new data model CID file (data model depends on
firmware version of IEC 61850 communication). Please use User level access
to avoid intentional or accidental deletion!

User Manual
3.3.6.9 IEC 60870-5-103
IEC 60870-5-103

IEC 60870-5-103
P976 Report telegrams with function type 240 OFF - OFF/ON
P977 Report telegrams with function type 148 OFF - OFF/ON
Figure 3-31 Communication IEC 60870-5-103 report telegrams
P976 Report telegrams with function type 240

This parameter enables/disables transmission of those data points (measurement
values) in accordance with function type 240 where:
OFF: disables or
ON: enables the data transmission.
P977 Report telegrams with function type 148

This parameter enables/disables transmission of those data points (measurement
values) in accordance with function type 148 where:
OFF: disables or
ON: enables the data transmission.
NOTE: For more informationen about IEC60870-5-103 communication, please refer to the
SYMAP-Compact_Appendix_Modbus-Profibus-IEC103 document.

User Manual
3.3.6.10 CAN Bus 1
CAN Bus 1 is for device-to-device communication between two or several SYMAP-Compact(+)

devices.
NOTE: At present CAN Bus 1 can only be used for SYMAP-Compact GC and +GC devices
variants. Here, CAN Bus 1 supports function Generator control of Power
management system PMS.
CAN bus 1

Serial port 2
P920 Port OFF - OFF/ON
P921 Baudrate 125 kBd 15,6/25/50/100/125/250/500/1000
P922 Address 1 - 1 127
P923 Number of devices 1 - 1 127
P924 Time synchronisation OFF - OFF/ON
E920 CAN OK - - -
E921 Send error - - -
E922 Address error - - -
E923 Device error - - -
Figure 3-32 Communication Optional interface CAN Bus 1
P920 Port
CAN Bus 1 interface of SYMAP-Compact(+); the physical interface provides following
setting options:
OFF: disabled or
ON: enabled.
When parameter setting Port [P920] = ON and data transfer is performed correctly,
then event CAN OK [E920] is activated.
In case that:
CAN Bus 1 communication wiring is disrupted or short-circuited, or
there is no further SYMAP-Compact(+) device conntected to CAN Bus 1, or
the set baud rates of the SYMAP-Compact(+) devices are different,
then event Send error [E921] is activated.
P921 Baudrate
different symbol rates (unit: [kBd]):
15,6
25
50
100
125

User Manual
250
500
1000
P922 Address
Slave address of CAN Bus 1 interface; the setting range of slave addresses is between
1 and 127.
CAUTION: All SYMAP-Compact(+) devices connected to the CAN Bus 1 must show
different address numbers, set by parameter [P922]. If there are devices
set with the same address number, then event Address error [E922] is
activated.
P923 Number of devices

Actual number of devices linked to CAN Bus 1; it is possible to connect up to 32
SYMAP-Compact(+) devices to the CAN Bus 1.
When the number of devices conntected to CAN Bus 1 is less than the set value of
parameter Number of devices [P923], then event Device error [E923] is activated.
P924 Time synchronisation

This parameter activates/deactivates the time synchronisation of SYMAP-Compact(+)
devices connected to CAN BUS 1, where selection option:
OFF: disables time synchronisation via CAN BUS 1, or
ON: enables time synchronisation via CAN BUS 1.
When time synchronisation is activated, all SYMAP-Compact(+) devices connected to
CAN BUS 1 save the new current time setting of that device which is set to the lowest
CAN identification number (see parameter Address [P923]). Time synchronisation is
conducted:
cyclically, at 60s time intervalls, or
immediately, when time setting of the device which is set to the lowest CAN
identification number has changed.
Duration for time synchronisation is 1ms.

User Manual
3.3.6.11 FTP
FTP

P980 FTP OFF - OFF/ON
P981 User name Admin - 0 255
P986 Password Admin - 0 9999
P991 Port 21 0 65535
Figure 3-33 Communication File transfer protocol (FTP)
P980 FTP
This parameter activates/deactivates the TCP connection to the File transfer protocol
(FTP) server, where:
OFF: disables or
ON: enables the TCP connection.
P981 User name

This parameter is for setting the username which will be used for login in on the FTP
server.
P986 Password
This parameter is for setting the password which will be used for login in on the FTP
server.
P991 Port
Number of the TCP port which is used for FTP connection; standard port No. is 21!

User Manual
3.3.6.12 RSTP
RSTP

P980 Priority 32768 - 0 61440
P981 Hello Time 2 - 1 10
P986 Max Age 20 - 6 40
P991 Forward Delay 15 4 30
Figure 3-34 Communication Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP)
P980 Priority
This parameter is for setting the default value for Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP)
bridge priority.
P981 Hello Time

bridge hello time.
P986 Max Age

message maximum age.
P991 Forward Delay

bridge forward delay.

User Manual
3.3.6.13 IRIG-B
IRIG-B

P942 IRIG-B (Time synchrinisation) OFF - ON/OFF
P943 IRIG-B receive time format UTC - UTC/Local time
P944 IRIG-B signal is modulated NO - YES/NO
P945 IRIG-B High Voltage Signal Level 5 V 5 30
Figure 3-35 Communication IRIG-B time synchronisation
P942 IRIG-B (Time synchrinisation)

This parameter activates/deactivates the IRIG-B time synchronisation function, where:
OFF: disables or
ON: enables IRIG-B time synchronisation.
P943 IRIG-B receive time format

This parameter determines the time format for the time signal of IRIG-B time
synchronisation function, where:
UTC: Coordinated Universal Time (UTC)
Local time: local time set by parameter Local time [P964].
P944 IRIG-B signal is modulated

This parameter determines the modulation type for the time signal of IRIG-B time
synchronisation function, where:
YES: time signal is modulated
NO: time signal is non-modulated.
P945 IRIG-B High Voltage Signal Level

This parameter determines the limit of the voltage level to define recognition of time
signal level as high.

User Manual
3.3.7 Graphic (Referencing and selection of displayed measurement values)
Main Menu\ Parameters\SYSTEM\Graphic
Graphic

Button configuration
none/0/1/Stop/Start/Page
Up/Page Down/Key/Alarm
P60010 Button 1 function Page Up - Ack/Alarm Page/
Auto\Manual/Emergency OFF
1/Emergency OFF 2
P60011 Button 2 function Key - (s. Button function 1)
P60012 Button 3 function 1 - (s. Button function 1)
P60013 Button 4 function Page
- (s. Button function 1)
Down
P60014 Button 5 function ACK - (s. Button function 1)
P60015 Button 6 function 0 - (s. Button function 1)
E6400 Hardware button (function 0) - - -
E6401 Hardware button (function 1) - - -
E6402 Hardware button (function Stop) - - -
E6403 Hardware button (function Start) - - -
E6404 Hardware button (function UP) - - -
E6405 Hardware button (function DOWN) - - -
E6406 Hardware button (function Key) - - -
E6407 Hardware button (function Alarm ACK) - - -
E6408 Hardware button (function Alarm page) - - -
E6409 Hardware button (function Auto/Manuell) - - -
E6414 Hardware button (function Emergency Off 1) - - -
E6414 Hardware button (function Emergency Off 2) - - -
Menu configuration
P60020 Meters -> Voltage ON - ON/OFF
P60021 Meters -> Current ON - ON/OFF
P60022 Meters -> Power ON - ON/OFF
P60023 Meters -> Counter ON - ON/OFF
P60025 Meters -> Ground ON - ON/OFF
P60026 Meters -> Frequency ON - ON/OFF
P60029 Meters -> DC voltage ON - ON/OFF
Main Menu/User page 1/
Main
P60031 Home Screen - User page 2/ User page 3/
Menu
User page 4
Display configuration
P60041 Show Phase Voltage ON - ON/OFF
P60050 Time to shut off LCD 300 s 10 3600
P60051 Inactivity timer 120 s 30 3600
Bargraph Parameter
P60057 Current Bargraph upper threshold Green 100 % 0 ... 150
P60058 Current Bargraph lower threshold Red 120 % 0 ... 200
Figure 3-36 System parameters Referencing and selection of displayed measurement values

User Manual
Button Configuration
Function keys at the front plate are to be configurable individually by the following parameters.
Parameter description of parameter Button 1 functionality [P60010] is presented as an
example.
P60010 Button 1 function

Functional configuration of function key 1;there are following setting options available:
none: no function. Operating function key 1 will not activate any
event.
0: switchgear control: operating function key 1 will switch off
the previously selected switching element. Operating function
key 1 will activate event [E6400] as long as function key 1 is
pressed.
1: switchgear control: operating function key 1 will switch on
the previously selected switching element. Operating function
pressed.
Stop: (GenSet control: function not available yet!) Operating function
pressed.
Start: (GenSet control: function not available yet!) Operating function
pressed.
Page Up: Menu navigation: operating function key 1 will scroll up the
displayed menu page. Operating function key 1 will activate
event [E6404] as long as function key 1 is pressed.
Page Down: Menu navigation: operating function key 1 will scroll down
the displayed menu page. Operating function key 1 will
activate event [E6405] as long as function key 1 is pressed.
Key: Menu navigation: operating function key 1 will call up the
menu page User level. Operating function key 1 will activate
Alarm Ack: Menu navigation: operating function key 1 will reset all the
latched, active alarms and menu page Active Alarms will be
displayed. Operating function key 1 will activate event [E6407]
as long as function key 1 is pressed.
Alarm Page: Menu navigation: operating function key 1 will call up menu
page Active Alarms. Operating function key 1 will activate
Auto/Manual: (GenSet control: function not available yet!) Operating function
pressed.
Emergency Off 1: Function Breaker control: simultaneous operating of function
key 1 and second function key, which is configured with
setting option Emergency Off 2 ,will switch off the circuit
breaker (CB) immediately without consideration of active
interlocking or user level. Simultaneous operating of function
key 1 and the function key assigned with function Emergency
Off 2 will activate event [E6414] as long as both function keys
are pressed.

User Manual
Emergency Off 2: Function Breaker control: simultaneous operating of function

key 1 and second function key, which is configured with
setting option Emergency Off 2 ,will switch off the circuit
breaker (CB) immediately without consideration of active
interlocking or user level. Simultaneous operating of function
key 1 and the function key assigned with function Emergency
Off 2 will activate event [E6414] as long as both function keys
are pressed.

See description of parameter [P60010]





User Manual
Menu Configuration
Depending on the application, all Meters pages accessed by the selection page Meters may
be hidden individually.
Figure 3-37 Configuration of selection page Meters
P60020 Meters -> Voltage/Frequency

Display of Meters page Voltage; to display or to hide this page please choose from
the following setting options:
OFF: the selection key Voltage/Frequency and Meters page
Voltage/Frequency will be hidden,
ON: the selection key Voltage/Frequency and Meters page
Voltage/Frequency will be displayed.
P60021 Meters -> Current

Display of Meters page Current; to display or to hide this page please choose from
OFF: the selection key Current and Meters page Current will be hidden,
ON: the selection key Current and Meters page Current will be displayed.
P60022 Meters -> Power

Display of Meters page Power; to display or to hide this page please choose from the
OFF: the selection key Power and Meters page Power will be hidden,
ON: the selection key Power and Meters page Power will be displayed.
P60023 Meters -> Counter

Display of Meters page Counter; to display or to hide this page please choose from
OFF: the selection key Counter and Meters page Counter will be hidden,
ON: the selection key Counter and Meters page Counter will be displayed.
P60025 Meters -> Ground

Display of Meters page Ground; to display or to hide this page please choose from
OFF: the selection key Ground and Meters page Ground will be hidden,
ON: the selection key Ground and Meters page Ground will be displayed.

User Manual
P60026 Meters -> Analog inputs

Display of analog inputs at Meters page Analog inputs; to display or to hide the
analog inputs value(s) please choose from the following setting options:
OFF: Analog inputs values will be hidden, or
ON: Analog inputs values will be displayed at Meters page Analog inputs.
P60027 Meters -> U/I Complex

Display of measuring values at Meters page U/I Complex; to display or to hide the
selected measuring value(s) please choose from the following setting options:
OFF: U/I Complex values will be hidden, or
ON: U/I Complex values will be displayed at Meters page U/I Complex.
P60029 Meters -> DC voltage

Display of Meters page DC voltage; to display or to hide this page please choose
from the following setting options:
OFF: the selection key DC voltage and Meters page DC voltage will be
hidden,
ON: the selection key DC voltage and Meters page DC voltage will be
displayed.
P60031 Home Screen

Definition of the displayed start page; when operating hotkey Home or after automatic,
time-depending switchover to the home screen (see parameter Inactivity timer
[P60051]) the following menu page can be configured as Home screen:
Main Menu
User page 1
User page 2
User page 3
User page 4
Display configuration
P60041 Show Phase Voltage

Display of phase voltages UL1, UL2 and UL3 at Meters page Voltage/Frequency can
be enabled or disabled.
Figure 3-38 Meters Voltage Display of phase voltages UL1, UL2, UL3

User Manual
Display of Meters page Voltage; to display or to hide phase measuring values of the
voltages, please choose among the following setting options:
OFF: display of phase voltage measuring values is disabled,
ON: display of phase voltage measuring values is ensabled.
NOTE: Depending on the SYMAP-Compact(+) device variant, setting options of

parameter Show Phase Voltage [P60041] apply to all voltage measuring
inputs.
P60050 Time to shut off LCD

Delay time of the LC-display to shut off; if no button was pressed or the screen was not
touched for the duration set by parameter Time to shut off LCD [P60050], the LC-
display will automatically shut off. After pressing any button or touching the screen, the
LC-display will operate immediately.
NOTE: The minimum setting time is 10s!
P60051 Inactivity timer

Delay time of the LC-display for automatic switch-over to the home screen; if no button
was pressed or the screen was not touched for the duration set by parameter Inactivity
timer [P60051], the LC-display will automatically show that menu page which is
assigned to parameter Home screen [P60031].
NOTE: The minimum setting time is 30s!

User Manual
Bargraph configuration
Besides percentage currents, the colours of the bargraphs displayed on the Meters page
Current represents the applications current load. Depending on the actual level of currents
and the set limits for colour changes (see parameters [P60057] and [P60058]), the bargraphs
show green, orange or red.
Figure 3-39 Meters Current Display of current load by bargraphs
Different colours apply to defined scopes. The thresholds of the defined scopes are given as
percentages of the phase current and ground current, referring to the nominal values of the
application.
NOTE: The scopes of colours are to be set as a percentage of the nominal value of the
characteristic quantities (phase current and ground current). The nominal values of
the characteristic quantities are to be set by parameter:

Current [P624], for tertiary side W3, and
Ground current [P607], for primary side W1 or
Ground current [P617], for secondary side W2 or
Ground current [P627], for tertiary side W3.
The parameters Current [P604], Current [P614], Current [P614], Ground current
[P607], Ground current [P617] and Ground current [P627] are located in submenu:
SYSTEM\Nominals\Reference values.
P60057 Current Bargraph upper threshold Green

Upper Limit for bargraph (phase currents and differential currents) to display colour
green; if the set value of parameter Current Bargraph upper threshold Green [P60057]
is exceeded, bargraph colour will change from green to orange.
Colour changes from orange to green in case that the current percentage falls below the
set value.
P60058 Current Bargraph lower threshold Red

Upper Limit for bargraph (phase currents and differential currents) to display colour red;
if the set value of parameter Current Bargraph upper threshold Green [P60057] is
exceeded, bargraph colour will change from orange to red.
Colour changes from red to orange in case that the current percentage falls below the
set value, but is above the set value of parameter Current Bargraph upper threshold
Green [P60057].

User Manual
NOTE: In case that set values are the same for both, parameter [P60057] and
[P60058], colour changes only between green and red.

User Manual
3.4 PROTECTION
Protective functions have been implemented in the SYMAP-Compact product line according to
the American National Standard Institute (ANSI) standard. Refer to the following figure for
allocation of process variables (measured values) and protection functions.
CT-GND1
PT-GND1
CT1-M/P
PT2
PT1
74TC 86
5*
12*
TIG
YG
21** (1)
21B
21FL
24
25
27
27T
27Q (1)
32 (1)
32N/G (1)
37
40 (1)
47 46
48
49
50BF
50/51
50/51G
51LR
51MS
51/46VR
55 (1)
59
59AV 52
(2) 59N/G CTS
PTS 64REF
DCVM 66
67 (1)
67G (2)
78
78S (1)
79
81
81R 87GH
81RAV 87**
95i
CLD
SOTF
SGF (2)
* Gen-Set controls only

** ordering option (see order code)
(1) depending on power measurement at common changeover
(2) measured or calculated
Figure 3-40 SYMAP-Compact Process variables of protection functions

User Manual
CT-GND1
PT-GND1
CT1-M/P
CT2-M/P
PT3
PT2
PT1
74TC 86
5*
12*
TIG
YG
21** (1)
21B
21FL
24
25
27
27T
27Q (1)
32 (1)
32N/G (1)
37
40 (1)
46
47 48
49
50BF
50/51
50/51G
51LR
51/46VR
55 (1)
59
59AV 52
(2) 59N/G CTS
PTS 64REF
DCVM 66
67 (1)
67G (2)
78
78S (1)
79
81
81R 87GH
81RAV 87**
95i
CLD
SOTF
SGF (2)
Figure 3-41 SYMAP-Compact+ Process variables of protection functions

* Gen-Set controls only
** ordering option (see order code)
(1) depending on power measurement at common changeover
(2) measured or calculated

User Manual
3.4.1 General (Parameter set changeover)
The SYMAP-Compact(+) offers four, identical protection parameter sets which each represent
the complete protective functionality with regards to setting options. Depending on the grid or
system situation, adaptation of the protection setting to current requirements may be necessary.
This demand can be met by pre-configuring up to four protection parameter sets and activating
them according to specific events occurring.
NOTE: Parameter numbers (e.g. [P2345]) relating to parameter sets (SET1 SET4) exist only
once for all four parameter sets!
General Protection Parameters

In general, one protection parameter set only is active but when using the general protection
parameter, changeover to another parameter set is possible.
NOTE: The duration for parameter set changeover is about 15ms. Within this time window
none of the protective functions is active! Parameter set changeover is carried out at
run-time; this means no system reboot is required!
Each protection parameter set is provided a general parameter to which a specific event
required for changeover is assigned.
Figure 3-42 General protection parameters Protection parameter set changeover
CAUTION: The currently active parameter set is displayed at the lower status line of the
device display:
Figure 3-43 Status line: indication of currently active parameter set
The corresponding event [E1000], [E1001], [E1002] or [E1003] is also activated.

The event status can be checked via the following submenu: Main
Manu\Alarms\operate button Events\Active Events. The event table will show
either active event [E1000], [E1001], [E1002] or [E1003].

User Manual
The following is determined on behalf of priority for the active protection parameter set in order
to guarantee that in case of simultaneously active events assigned to parameters [P1000] to
[P1002] only one protection parameter set is active.
Table 3-3 Parameter set changeover Active parameter set

Event for Event for Event for
Active protection parameter set
parameter [P1000] parameter [P1001] parameter [P1002]
inactive inactive inactive Protection parameter set 1
inactive inactive active Protection parameter set 4
inactive active inactive Protection parameter set 3
inactive active active Protection parameter set 4
active inactive inactive Protection parameter set 2
active inactive active Protection parameter set 4
active active inactive Protection parameter set 3
active active active Protection parameter set 4
Main Menu\ Parameters\PROTECTION\
General

Parameter Sets
P1000 Enable prot. param. set 2 by event 0 event 0 9999
E1000 Prot. param. set 1 active - - -
E1004 Prot. param. set 1 activated manually - - -
Figure 3-44 Protection: General parameters [P] and events[E]
P1000 Enable protection parameter set 2

Protection parameter set 2 can be activated by any event. For activation the number of
the activating event has to be allocated to parameter [P1000]. Activation is, however,
only active for the time the allocated event is active. As soon as activation is active,
event Prot. param. set 2 active [E1001] is activated, and event Prot. param. set 1
active [E1000] becomes inactive. If the activation event becomes inactive, activation of
parameter set 2 is abandoned and parameter set 1 is effective again. Event [E1001] is
then deactivated automatically and event [E1000] becomes active again.
If changeover to parameter set 2 is not required, set parameter [P1000] to 0.
Protection parameter set 1 is given the lowest priority!
Protection parameter set 2 is given the second lowest priority!

active [E1000] becomes inactive. If the activation event turns inactive, activation of

User Manual
then deactivated automatically and event [E1000] becomes active again.
Protection parameter set 3 is given the third lowest priority!

active [E1000] becomes inactive. If the activation event turns inactive, activation of
deactivated automatically and event [E1000] becomes active again.
Protection parameter set 4 is given the highest priority!
Event description:
Parameter set changeover via SYMAP-Compact Parameter Tool (SCPT)
E1004 Prot. parameter set 1 activated manually

to
E1007 Prot. parameter set 4 activated manually
Changover from one prot. parameter set to another can be done via SYMAP-Compact
Parameter Tool (SCPT) as follows:
1. Set up connection between SYMPA-Compact(+) device and your PC/Notebook
2. Launch SYMAP-Compact Parameter Tool (SCPT)
3. Open the Tools\Change parameter set sub menu
4. If the device and PC/Notebook are connected correctly, the message Monitoring
ENABLED will appear
5. Choose the prot. parameter set your wish to activate by clicking Change parameter
set
6. Click the Send button.

User Manual
Figure 3-45 Example: Activation of prot. parameter set 2 via SCPT sending command
7. After sending the command, selected parameter set x (example: parameter set 2)
becomes active, which will be indicated by the following window:
Figure 3-46 Example: Activation of prot. parameter set 2 via SCPT actual status
As soon as the command Send is sent, the corresponding event Prot. param. set x
activated manually [E100x] is activated.

User Manual
CAUTION: Once a parameter set is activated via SCPT, it is not possible to change the
active parameter set via any activation event assigned to parameters [P1000],
[P1001] or [P1002]!
In order to change the active parameter set via activation events again, first the
user has to go Change Parameter SET in the SYMAP-Compact Parameter
Tool (SCPT), select none and send it to the device.
Figure 3-47 Recovery of parameter switch possibility via activation events Send = None
After executing the command Send the following window appears:
Figure 3-48 Parameter switch possibility via activation events is recovered

User Manual
3.4.2 ANSI 21 Distance Protection (not released yet!)
Introduction
The distance protection function (impedance protection) is an impedance- and current
direction-dependent type of time grading protection and is based on the protection criterion
impedance Z as quotient of the voltage U and the current I variables as measured at the relay
location. Continuous comparison between the limit impedance value as set in the relay and the
lower value (loop impedance) occurring in case of fault causes the decision for: operating/fault
event.
Due to its operating principle, the distance protection, depending on the fault distance, is a
protection which allows locating the fault point (distance) measured from the protection device
location by determining the fault type as well as the direction. Its tripping times are graded and
rising with increasing fault distance (grading plan).
Station A Station B Station C
SC A SC B SC C
Grid
t
tA3
tA2
tA1
Z
ZA1
ZA2
ZA3
ZB1
ZB2
ZB3
ZC1
with:
SC: protection device (distance protection) ZC2
ZA1: first impedance zone of protection device A
ZA2: second impedance zone of protection device A ZC3
ZA3: third impedance zone of protection device A
tA: tripping times of impedance zone for protection device A
Figure 3-49 Impedance zones and phases of tripping times

User Manual
The distance or impedance protection serves as short-circuit protection (with and without earth
fault) for lines and cables of all network to which specific requirements apply according to
selectivity or short fault finding times and availability of the supply network regarding switching
off the faulty sections on the one hand or on the other hand for which selective fault detection
based on current alone is not possible due to changing or generally high source impedances.
The multi-stage, distance-dependent time grading protection is used as main protection (1st
stage or zone) in medium-voltage network as well as in high voltage and extra-high voltage
network for:
Current transmission:
o Overhead lines in transmission networks and
Current distribution:
o For cable and lines in particular in meshed networks, as well as
o Parallel lines (double lines)
Beyond that, distance protection takes on the function of back-up protection of second order
(the second and the then following protection stages or zones) for:
adjacent line sections which are up- or downstream the main protection zone,
transformers, and
generators.
Operating principle
In electrical transmission and distribution networks, overhead lines and earth cables are used
for power transmission. Depending on the conductor material, geometry, disposition and cross-
section, electrical parameters are defined which are constant in a homogeneous line and are
referred to as characteristic impedance. Find the specific longitudinal components which are
relevant for the impedance settings
characteristic resistance (RL: line resistance) and
characteristic inductivity (XL: line reactance),
indicated in the data sheets by the line and cable manufacturer in [/km]. The absolute
impedance of a line or a cable thus depends on the actual line length; i.e. the longer the line the
higher its impedance.
The specific line angle L is calculated from both above components as follows:
L = arctan(XL / RL)
and is used to determine the so-called line straight within the complex R-X level of
representing the locus for impedance measurement. The line straight again is used as
reference for adapting the distance protection characteristic of the protection unit (SYMAP-
Compact(+): polygonal surface as impedance locus) by means of the line impedance to the
possible load and short-circuit impedances in the available three-phase network.
The length of the line straight (absolute value of the impedance vector in the locus) then
corresponds to the maximum length of protected line run whose end represents the peak of the
impedance vector. The line starts in the zero point of the R-X level and represents the location
of the distance protection unit and thus the measurement point of currents and voltages used
for determining the impedance Z.
Depending on their distance to the line sending end, all network nodes which are located within
the line run, can be arranged on the impedance straight of the line.
During normal operation, the line impedance and the impedances of the subsequent load add
up to such that the total impedance which is measured at the installation point, is higher than
the line itself. In case of fault on the line, however, the measured impedance reduces and

User Manual
generally attains values below the impedance of the total line length; the fault impedance then is
within the defined impedance zone (tripping range) and the distance protection will detect fault.
With the station points on the impedance straight line and according to the protection concept, it
is possible to determine the individual protection stages (impedance zones) to which the time
graduation for output of the tripping command is linked. Generally, time graduation is as follows:
Close-range fault: fast tripping (fault in the reach of the 1st protection zone Z1, up to
approx. 85% of line length)
Fault in the overreach range: fast tripping (fault out of reach of the 1st protection zone Z1;
approx. 120% of line length) in connection with automatic reclosing (AR) applications or
signal comparison protection processes
Distant-range fault: delayed tripping (back-up protection: fault in the reach of the
subsequent protection zones Z3 or Z4); the farther a protection zone reaches from the relay
installation point towards the line, the longer the selected tripping time of each stage
Line straight
X
Station D
Z4
Station C
Z3
Station B Z2
Z1
L L L L L
Station A R
with:
Z1: first impedance zone of protection device in station A
Z2: overreach impedance zone of protection device in station A
Z3: first impedance zone of protection device in station B
Z4: first impedance zone of protection device in station C
L: line angle
Figure 3-50 Impedance zones

User Manual
Fault Types
In three-phase networks, the distance protection function provides protection of the network
upon occurrence of transverse faults. These are single, double or three-phase faults, with or
without earth. Protection in case of longitudinal faults (e.g. conductor continuity faults) is
effected by other protection functions.
With regard to the distance the fault currents cover from relay to fault point and back,
combinatorial logic of external phases and earth lead to the following different six fault loops:
Phase-to-earth loops: L1 Earth; L2 Earth; L3 Earth, and
Phase-to-phase loops: L1 L2; L2 L3; L3 L1
Digital distance protection units make available a separate measuring system for each fault loop
so as to guarantee determination of fault type as well as phase-selective fault detection.
Direction decision
In order to locate the fault unambiguously, the protection device has to feature power flow
direction detection which defines decision for forward or backward direction in case of fault.
Generally, direction of the protection device operation can be determined by the following
definition:
NOTE: Forward direction: protection device measurement from network node towards the
line.
Backward direction: protection device measurement directed towards the line
behind the node.
Station D
F F
SC 7 SC 8
R R
Station A Station B Station C

F F F F F F
SC 1 SC 2 SC 3 SC 4 SC 5 SC 6
R R R R R R
Grid
Fault
location
Station E
F
SC 9
with:
SC: protection device
F: forward direction
R: reverse direction
Figure 3-51 Definition of forward and backward direction

User Manual
Example: Assuming that forestanding figure shows the fault location at 45% of the line section
AB and each of the SC protection devices activate two protection stages
(impedance stages) in forward direction (stage 1: setting to 85%; stage 2: setting to
120%) only and one stage in backward direction (setting to 85%), the distance
protection relays will pick-up the stations as follows:
SC 1: pick-up in backward direction

SC 2: pick-up in forward direction
SC 3: pick-up in forward direction
SC 4: pick-up in backward direction
SC 5: no pick-up
SC 6: no pick-up
SC 7: no pick-up
SC 8: no pick-up
SC 9: no pick-up
Restrictions (Static and Transient Influences)

Restricted protection zone (approx. 85% of line length) for the fast tripping conditioned by:
transformer tolerances, measurement tolerances of the protection device as well as
imprecise line data (static)
High fault impedances which are still in the range of the operating impedance (short-circuit
currents which, under certain conditions such as e.g. reduced supply voltage (high pre-
impedance or in times of weak loads), can be lower than the highest load currents, current
sharing on parallel distances in meshed network, limitation of earth current by resistances
and reactances in the transformer star point) => no differentiation: operating/fault event
possible! (static)
Lack of linearity between measured impedance Z and fault location e.g. by inhomogeneous
lines and branching of the network regarding the line-specific characteristic data
(characteristic impedance), arc resistances and other fault transition impedances (ohmic)
=> precise determination of the fault point is impossible! (static)
Power swing as e.g. dynamic transients: short-circuits, load shutdown, automatic reclosing
(AR), switching processes (transient)

User Manual
Distance protection ANSI 21 in SYMAP-Compact
Impedance measurement pickup sources

Depending on the SYMAP-Compact(+) device variant distance protection function ANSI 21
can be assigned to different current and voltage measurement inputs which will provide
measurement values as characteristic quantities to the distance protection. The assignment of
measuring inputs can be done by the following parameters in the submenu:
SYSTEM\Measuring\Impedance:
ANSI 21 pickup program [I>], [U/I], [U/I/phi] and [Z<]:
CT pickup source [P9470]: Phase currents are measured via selected input CT1 or
CT2
PT pickup source [P9472]: Phase voltages are measured via selected input PT1, PT2
or PT3
ANSI 21 earth fault protection:
3I0 pickup source [P9471]: Ground current IG is measured via selected input CT-GND1
or is calculated by the phase currents measured via selected
measuring input of parameter CT pickup source [P9470]
3U0 pickup source [P9473]: Residual voltage UG is measured via selected input PT-
GND1 or is calculated by the phase voltages measured via
selected measuring input of parameter PT pickup source
[P9472]
Impedance calculation
Distance protection relay estimates line positive sequence impedance from the relay to the fault
in order to determinate whether the fault is within the protection zone or outside. The apparent
impedance calculation is based on dynamic phasor method. Dynamic phasor method assumes
that phasors are changeable over time. For an RL series circuit/loop equation is as follows:
X I
U RI
0 t
where :
U U (t ), I I (t ), 0 2 f 0
f 0 50 Hz / 60 Hz
Two equations for real and imaginary components are:
X ReI
ReU R ReI
0 t
X ImI
ImU R ImI
0 t
Solving linear system of two equations, we get:
ImU ReI ReU ImI

R
ImI ReI ReI ImI
Equation 1

User Manual
ReU ImI ImU ReI

X 0 Td
ImI ReI ReI ImI
Equation 2
Impedance calculation is based on the two equations above. Distance protection algorithm
processes current and voltage samples from the A/D converter. For each of the six supervised
fault loops, sampled values of voltage (u), current (i), and current differential (i) are fed to the
Fourier filter. The filter provides two orthogonal values for each input, real component and
imaginary component of complex phasor.
Polarizing quantities for R and X calculation according to measuring loops

Polarizing quantities for the R and X calculation according to measuring loops are:
Phase-to-earth loops: Lx-E; x = 1, 2 or 3
o U = ULx
o I = ILx + 3I0 (RE/R1)
o I = ILx + 3I0 (XE/X1)
Phase-to-phase loops: Lx-Ly; xy = 12, 23 or 31
o U = Uxy
o I = ILx ILy
o I = ILx ILy
NOTE: Based on parameters:

Zero seq. comp. factor Ze/Zl [P3768],
Zero seq. comp. angle [P3769], and
X'-line reductance per km [P3770],
relay calculates residual compensation factors RE/R1 and XE/X1 which are needed to
calculate the impedance for phase-to-earth loops:
RE/R1 = 1/3[(R0/R1)-1]
XE/X1 = 1/3[(X0/X1)-1]
NOTE: Relay will operate correctly if parameters:

Zero seq. comp. factor Ze/Zl [P3768],
Zero seq. comp. angle [P3769], and
X'-line reductance per km [P3770]
yields to residual compensation factors that are by absolute values less than 32, which
is in practice always the case.

User Manual
Fault resistance seen by the relay for single side fed phase-earth fault
L p L (1-p)
L3
L
L2
GRID
IL1
L1
z1 = r1 + j x1[/km] Rf
z0 = r0 + j x0[/km]
UL1
Figure 3-52 Single side fed L1-Earth fault

For single side fed phase L1-to-earth fault, figure above, relay sees:
U L1
R X I X 3I 0
R1 I L1 E 3I 0 1 L1 E R f I L1
R1 0 t X 1 t

R1 R f
1 I X 1 I
R 0 t
1 E
R1
For non-metallic single side fed fault, relay measures:

1 1
R R1 R f r1 L p R f
R R
1 E 1 E
R1 R1
X X 1 x1 L p
NOTE: Please note that relay sees fault resistant scaled by factor 1/(1 + RE/R1). This is
consequence of selected impedance calculation method method based on dynamic
phasors.

Pickup Ph-E [P3817] (Zone1 Trip Ph-E)
- 224/839 -
Figure 3-53
(Zone1 Pickup Ph-E) Internal signal
Internal signal T
1
(T-single phase (ph-e) delay") [E2565]
(ANSI21 Pickup loop L1-E) [E2547] Pickup Ph-Ph

1 (ANSI21-1 Trip)
[P3818]
(ANSI21 Pickup loop L2-E) [E2548] (Zone1 Pickup Ph-Ph) (Zone1 Trip Ph-Ph)
ANSI 21 Trip logic
(ANSI21 Pickup loop L3-E) [E2549] ( Pickup L1-E) Internal signal T Internal signal
(ANSI21 Pickup loop L1-L2) [E2550] Internal signal 1
(ANSI21 Pickup loop L2-L3) [E2551]
(ANSI21 Pickup loop L3-L1) [E2552]
( Pickup L2-E) (T-multi phase delay")
Internal signal
[P3777]
( Pickup L3-E)
Z< D Internal signal
Loop selection
I> E
U/I
U/I/phi & M ( Pickup L1-L2)
U Internal signal
(Pickup program")
X
Zone definition & ( Pickup L2-L3)
directional element Internal signal
Measurement
(Pickup L3-L1)
Internal signal
Z
[E2566]
[E2562] & (ANSI21-1 Trip L1)
1 (ANSI21-1 Pickup L1)
(Zone1: Z L1-E<) Internal signal
(Zone1: Z L1-L2<) Internal signal
(Zone1: Z L2-L3<) Internal signal [E2567]
(Zone1: Z L3-L1<) Internal signal &
[E2563] (ANSI21-1 Trip L2)
SYMAP-Compact_Manual_v18.0_GB.docx
[E2568]
[E2564] & (ANSI21-1 Trip L3)
ANSI 21 Trip logic diagram: e.g. pickup and trip via impedance zone 1
[E2561]
1 (ANSI21-1 Pickup)
User Manual
SYMAP-Compact
User Manual
General General protection parameters of parameter SET 1 ANSI 21
Main Menu\Parameters\PROTECTION\ANSI 21Distance protection
General
SET 1 SET 2 SET 3 SET 4

Functional scope
P3753 Distance protection ON - ON/OFF
P3754 Blocking protection module 0 event 0 9999
P3755 Sel. parameter group B 0 event 0 9999
Miscellaneous parameters
P3756 Delay pickup in cycles 0 cycle/4 0 100
General parameters
P3757 Shape of distance zones polygon - polygon/circle
Voltage recorder
P3758 Recorder start voltage 5 % 5 100
P3759 Voltage rec.replay time 0,1 s 0,1 10,0
E2537 ANSI21 module active - - -
E2538 ANSI21 blocked module - - -
E2539 ANSI21 group B active - - -
E2540 ANSI21 low voltage - - -
Figure 3-54 ANSI 21 Distance protection\General set parameters [P] and events [E]
General General protection parameters of parameter SET 1 ANSI 21
The following parameter descriptions refer to all general protection parameters of one
parameter set in General submenu of distance protection function ANSI 21.
NOTE: Each of the four parameter sets always provides the same group of general
protection parameters which apply for both, parameter group A and group B.
Hence, the parameter descriptions of the general protection parameters of SET 1
represented below are described in detail in the following examples.
Functional scope
P3753 Distance protection

This parameter enables/disables distance protection where:
OFF: disables or
ON: enables the protective function.
When distance protection ANSI 21 is enabled by parameter [P3753], then event
ANSI21 module active [E2537] is activated.
P3754 Blocking protection module

Distance protection can be completely blocked by any active event. For blocking, the
number related to this blocking event has to be assigned to parameter [P3754]. Blocking

User Manual
is only effective, however, as long as the blocking event is active. As soon as blocking is
active, event ANSI21 blocked module [E2538] is activated. If the blocking event turns
inactive, blocking is abandoned and protective function is effective again. Then, event
[E2538] is deactivated automatically.
If blocking of the distance protection is not required, set this parameter to 0.
P3755 Sel. parameter group B

Parameter group change-over; it is possible to change over from the active parameter
group A to parameter group B by any active event. For change-over, the number related
to this change-over event has to be assigned to parameter [P3755]. Parameter group B
is only acitve, however, as long as the change-over event is active. As soon as
parameter group B is active, event ANSI21 group B active [E2539] is activated. If the
change-over event becomes inactive, activation of parameter group B is abandoned and
parameter group A is active again. Event [E2539] is then deactivated automatically.
If change-over to parameter group B is not required, set this parameter to 0.
Miscellaneous parameters
P3756 Delay pickup in cycles

Pickup delay time tpickup delay of the selected pickup program set by parameter Pickup
program [P3777]; if the pickup conditions of the selected pickup program are fulfilled,
then the pickup will be activated. Via parameter [P3756] the pickup can be delayed in a
multiple of the nominal cycle divided by factor 4 (nominal quarter cycle Tn/4). The
nominal quarter cycle depends on the nominal frequency fn of the electrical power
system:
Nominal frequency fn = 50Hz
=> nominal quarter cycle T50Hz/4 = (1/fn)/4 = (1/50Hz)/4 = 20ms/4 = 5ms
Nominal frequency fn = 60Hz
=> nominal quarter cycle T60Hz/4 = (1/fn)/4 = (1/60Hz)/4 = 16,6ms/4 = 4,16ms
Example: Nominal frequency: fn = 50Hz.

Parameter setting: Delay pickup in cycles [3756] = 3 cycles/4
=> Pickup delay time tpickup delay = 3 cycles/4 = 3 T50Hz/4 = 3 5ms = 15ms.
NOTE: The total trip delay time (time between physical fault occurance and activation
of the trip command) takes into account:
the intrinsic delay time (app. 35ms),
the pickup delay time, and
the trip delay time according to the zone setting.
General parameters
P3757 Shape of distance zones

Selection of the pickup surface basic shape for all impedance zones Z1 to Z5 of group A
and B; subsequently, the pre-selected basic shape can be individually modified by
referring parameters of each impedance zone. The basic shape can be defined either
as:

User Manual
polygon: polygon surface; e.g. impedance zone Z1, group A:

via parameters for ZPP:
R (Z), resistance/ph-ph [P3814], X (Z), reactance [P3815],
and parameters for ZPE:
RE (Z), resistance/ph-e [P3816] and X (Z), reactance [P3815], or
circle: circular surface; e.g. impedance zone Z1, group A:
via parameter for ZPP and ZPE: X (Z), reactance [P3815].
Voltage recorder polarizing voltage and direction determination

For determining the fault energy flow direction the angle between fault current and referring
polarizing voltage is needed. Positive sequence voltage U1 will be used as criterion for
polarizing voltage. In case that the measured positive sequence voltage is too less for angle
calculation, the voltage recorder provides measuring values of U1 to determine the direction of
fault energy flow.
Polarizing voltage
Positive sequence voltage U1 is used as polarizing voltage Upol. When positive sequence
voltage falls below its minimal operating value set by parameter Recorder start voltage
[P3758] memorized positive voltage U1_M from voltage recorder is used to ensure directional
sensitivity for close-in three phase faults. When both, measured positive sequence voltage U1
and memorized positive sequence voltage U1_M are available, polarization voltage is calculated
as follows:
U pol 0.8 U 1 0.2 U 1_ M
NOTE: If either U1 or U1_M is unavailable, then the missing quantity is dismissed from equation
above to calculate polarization voltage Upol.
If both, U1 and U1_M are unavailable, then function ANSI 21 Distance protection is
blocked!
Direction determination
Direction determination is based on argument of apparent impedance calculated using
polarizing voltage and loop current. Polarizing quantities are shown in table below.
Forward characteristic is determined by:
U pol
Direction angle 1 < arg < Direction angle 2

I loop
Backward characteristic is obtained by rotating forward characteristic by 180:
U pol
Direction angle 1 180 < arg < Direction angle 2 180

I pol

User Manual
Table 3-4 Polarizing quantities
Loop Polarizing voltage Loop current

L1 E 0.8 U1,L1 + 0.2 U1,L1_M IL1
L2 E 0.8 U1,L2 + 0.2 U1,L2_M IL2
L3 E 0.8 U1,L3 + 0.2 U1,L3_M IL3
L1 L2 0.8 U1,12 + 0.2 U1,12_M IL1 IL2
L2 L3 0.8 U1,23 + 0.2 U1,23_M IL2 IL3
L3 L1 0.8 U1,31 + 0.2 U1,31_M IL3 IL1
P3758 Recorder start voltage

Minimum limit of the measured positive sequence voltage U1 to activate the voltage
recorder; as soon as measured positive sequence voltage U1 exceeds the set value of
parameter [P3758], the voltage recorder starts writing U1 measuring values into the
internal voltage buffer. As soon as measured value of U1 falls below the set value of
parameter [P3758] voltage recording is stoppend and event ANSI21 low voltage
[E2540] is aktivated.
NOTE: The minimum positive sequence voltage limit U1,min is to be set as a

percentage of the nominal value of the characteristic quantity (phase-to-
ground voltage UL-E = phase-to-phase voltage UL-L/3). The nominal value of
the phase-to-phase voltage UL-L is to be set by parameter:
Voltage (L-L) [P623], for tertiary side W3
P3759 Voltage rec.replay time

Recording cycle time of the voltage recorder; when the voltage recorder is activated by
sufficiently high positive sequence voltage U1 (positive sequence voltage has exceeded
the set value of parameter Recorder start voltage [P3758]), the measured values of U1
are cyclically written into an internal buffer. According to the set value of parameter
[P3759] the recorded values will be cyclically overwritten (FIFO principle).
NOTE: Since the angle error between recorded values and measured, momentary
values of U1 increases rapidly, recording cycle times longer than one or two
seconds are not applicable!
When the positive sequence voltage U1 falls below the minimum limit of the measured
positive sequence voltage U1 set by parameter Recorder start voltage [P3758],
memorized voltage U1_M is cyclically re-read from the 5 cycle buffer.
and does not restore within the set recording cycle time, distance protection function will
be blocked until positive sequence voltage recovers accordingly.
When distance protection is blocked due to low voltage, i.e. no positive sequence
voltage and replay time expired, then events ANSI21 low voltage [E2540] and ANSI21
blocked module [E2538] are activated.

User Manual
Group A and Group B General protection parameters of parameter SET 1 ANSI 21
Main Menu\Parameters\PROTECTION\ANSI 21 Distance protection\Group A
General

Power system
P3763 Line angle 75 deg 30,0 90,0
P3764 R load, min.load imp. PP 600 0 600,00
P3765 PHI load, max. load angle 30 deg 0 90,00
P3766 R load, min. load imp. PE 600 0 600,00
P3768 Zero seq. comp. factor Ze/Zl 0,95 - 0 9,99
P3769 Zero seq. comp. angle 10 deg 0 359,9
P3770 X'-line reductance per km 0,4 /km 0 600,00
Impedance zone definition
P3775 Direction angle 1 -15 deg -45,0 -5,0
P3776 Direction angle 2 115 deg 90,0 175,0
Figure 3-55 ANSI 21 Distance protection\Group A\General\ - parameters [P]
Main Menu\Parameters\PROTECTION\ANSI 21 Distance protection\Group B
General

Power system
P3865 Line angle 75 deg 30,0 90,0
P3866 R load, min.load imp. PP 600 0 600,00
P3868 R load, min. load imp. PE 600 0 600,00
P3870 Zero seq. comp. factor Ze/Zl 0,95 - 0 9,99
P3871 Zero seq. comp. angle 10 deg 0 359,9
P3872 X'-line reductance per km 0,4 /km 0 600,00
P3877 Direction angle 1 -15 deg -45,0 -5,0
P3878 Direction angle 2 115 deg 90,0 175,0
Figure 3-56 ANSI 21 Distance protection\Group B\General\ - parameters [P]

User Manual
General General protection parameters of Group A, parameter SET 1 ANSI 21
The following parameter descriptions refer to all general protection parameters of one
parameter set in General submenu of distance protection function ANSI 21.
NOTE: Each of the four parameter sets within parameter group A and B always provides the
same group of general protection parameters. Hence, the parameter descriptions of
the general protection parameters of Group A\SET 1\General represented below
are described in detail as examples.
Power system
P3763 Line angle

Line angle (line-specific impedance angle) of the used line type; the line angle
determines inclination of the line straight to the real axis of the complex R-X level. By
restricting the line reactance applying to an impedance zone and under consideration of
ohmic transition resistances (e.g. electric arc) parallel displacement of the line straights
on the R axis a rhomboid forms at first which represents the acquisition range for the
measured impedance. By defining additional parameters, this shape of the pick-up range
can be modified and adapted to the requirements.
P3764 R load, min.load imp. PP

Minimum phase-to-phase load impedance (in the case of a resistive load, the minimum
load impedance = Resistance R); for definition of the load range
P3765 PHI load, max. load angle

Maximum angle of the phase-to-phase load impedance; for definition of the load range
P3766 R load, min. load imp. PE

Minimum phase-to-earth load impedance (in the case of a resistive load, the minimum
load impedance = Resistance R), for definition of the load range
P3767 PHI load, max. load angle

Maximum angle of the phase-to-earth load impedance; for definition of the load range
P3768 Zero seq. comp. factor Ze/Zl

Absolute value of the complex correction factor Ze/Zl = 1/3[(Z0/Z1)-1] for earth fault
impedance adaptation, where:
Z0 is complex zero sequence impedance of the line which is to protect, and
Z1 is complex positive sequence impedance of the line which is to protect.
P3769 Zero seq. comp. angle

Angle of the complex correction factor Ze/Zl = 1/3[(Z0/Z1)-1] for earth fault impedance
adaptation, where:
Z0 is complex zero sequence impedance of the line which is to protect, and
Z1 is complex positive sequence impedance of the line which is to protect.

User Manual
P3770 X'-line reductance per km

Specific line reactance of the line which is to protect

The pick-up ranges for forward or backward direction of an impedance zone is defined by two
direction straight lines 1 and 2 which can be rotated in the zero point of the R-X level (relay
location) by the variable angles (direction angle 1 and direction angle 2). Determination of the
forward direction simultaneously defines the backward direction.
Direction straight 2
Forward direction
Direction angle 2 [P3776]:

e.g.: 120
Direction angle 1 [P3775]:

e.g.: -20
Backward direction
Figure 3-57 Forward/backward direction: direction straights and direction angles
NOTE: The ranges occurring between forward and backward direction are not defined as far
as fault detection is concerned and are not included.
P3775 Direction angle 1

Direction angle 1 for alignment of direction straight 1; direction angle 1 determines
position of the direction straight 1 in the R-X level for definition of the forward and
backward direction of the impedance zones.
Together with the related setting of the upper direction straight (parameter [P3776]), the
impedance zone range stretches (valid for all 5 zones).
P3776 Direction angle 2

Direction angle 2 for alignment of direction straight 2; direction angle 2 determines
position of the direction straight 2 in the R-X level for definition of the forward and
backward direction of the impedance zones.

User Manual
Together with the related setting of the lower direction straight (parameter [P3775]) the
impedance zone range stretches (valid for all 5 zones).

User Manual
Group A and Group B Pickup parameters of parameter SET 1 ANSI 21

Pickup

Pickup program
P3777 Pickup program Z< - [Z<] / [I>] / [U/I] / [U/I/phi]
[I>]
P3778 I> 100 % 5,0 6553,5
[U/I]
P3779 I> 100 % 5,0 6553,5
P3780 I>> 100 % 5,0 200,0
P3781 U_LE< (I>) 50 % 5,0 200,0
P3782 U_LL< (I>) 50 % 5,0 200,0
P3783 U_LE< (I>>) 50 % 5,0 200,0
P3784 U_LL< (I>>) 50 % 5,0 200,0
[U/I/phi]
P3785 I> 25 % 5,0 6553,5
P3786 I>> 100 % 5,0 6553,5
P3787 I_phi> 100 % 5,0 6553,5
P3788 Angle min 50 deg 30,0 90,0
P3789 Angle max 110 deg 90,0 120,0
P3790 U_LE< (I>) 50 % 5,0 200,0
P3791 U_LL< (I>) 50 % 5,0 200,0
P3792 U_LE< (I>>) 50 % 5,0 200,0
P3793 U_LL< (I>>) 50 % 5,0 200,0
P3794 U_LE< (I_phi>) 50 % 5,0 200,0
P3795 U_LL< (I_phi>) 50 % 5,0 200,0
[Z<]
P3796 I> 100 5,0 6553,5
P3797 R (Z<), resistance/ph-ph 14 0,00 600,00
P3798 X (Z<), reactance 14 0,00 600,00
P3799 RE (Z<), resistance/ph-e 14 0,00 600,00
Earth fault recognition
P3801 Earth fault recognition None - None/I0/I0 AND U0/I0 OR U0/U0
P3802 3I0> Limit 10 % 0,0 6553,5
P3803 3I0 stab. start Imax/In 1,5 - 1,0 20,0
P3804 stab. factor 0,25 - 0,00 1,00
P3805 CT saturation limit 7,5 - 1,0 20,0
P3806 3U0> 50 % 5,0 200,0
E2545 ANSI21 pickup - - -
E2546 ANSI21 earth fault pickup - - -
E2547 ANSI21 pickup loop L1-E - - -
E2550 ANSI21 pickup loop L1-L2 - - -
Figure 3-58 ANSI 21 Distance protection\Group A\Pickup\ - parameters [P] and events [E]

User Manual
Pickup

Pickup program
P3879 Pickup program Z< - [Z<] / [I>] / [U/I] / [U/I/phi]
[I>]
P3880 I> 100 % 5,0 6553,5
[U/I]
P3881 I> 100 % 5,0 6553,5
P3882 I>> 100 % 5,0 200,0
P3883 U_LE< (I>) 50 % 5,0 200,0
P3884 U_LL< (I>) 50 % 5,0 200,0
P3885 U_LE< (I>>) 50 % 5,0 200,0
P3886 U_LL< (I>>) 50 % 5,0 200,0
[U/I/phi]
P3887 I> 25 % 5,0 6553,5
P3888 I>> 100 % 5,0 6553,5
P3889 I_phi> 100 % 5,0 6553,5
P3890 Angle min 50 deg 30,0 90,0
P3891 Angle max 110 deg 90,0 120,0
P3892 U_LE< (I>) 50 % 5,0 200,0
P3893 U_LL< (I>) 50 % 5,0 200,0
P3894 U_LE< (I>>) 50 % 5,0 200,0
P3895 U_LL< (I>>) 50 % 5,0 200,0
P3896 U_LE< (I_phi>) 50 % 5,0 200,0
P3897 U_LL< (I_phi>) 50 % 5,0 200,0
[Z<]
P3898 I> 100 5,0 6553,5
P3899 R (Z<), resistance/ph-ph 14 0,00 600,00
P3900 X (Z<), reactance 14 0,00 600,00
P3901 RE (Z<), resistance/ph-e 14 0,00 600,00
None - None/I0/I0 AND U0/
P3903 Earth fault recognition
I0 OR U0/U0
P3904 3I0> Limit 10 % 0,0 6553,5
P3905 3I0 stab. start Imax/In 1,5 - 1,0 20,0
P3906 stab. factor 0,25 - 0,00 1,00
P3907 CT saturation limit 7,5 - 1,0 20,0
P3908 3U0> 50 % 5,0 200,0
Figure 3-59 ANSI 21 Distance protection\Group B\Pickup\ - parameters [P]

User Manual
Pickup pickup parameters of Group A, parameter SET 1 ANSI 21
The following parameter descriptions refer to all pickup protection parameters of one parameter
set in Pickup submenu of distance protection function ANSI 21.
same group of pickup protection parameters. Hence, the parameter descriptions of
the pickup protection parameters of Group A\SET 1\Pickup represented below are
described in detail as examples.
Pickup program
Different network conditions lead to different behaviour of process parameters such as current
and voltage and this requires adaptation of the pick-up processes to the fault detection. The
different pick-up modes generally include the following criteria:
current,
voltage,
phase angle between current and voltage and
impedance
Depending on the network situation, cases may occur in which the impedance behaviour
significantly distinguishes from that of the overcurrent criterion and the fault currents occurring
then do not attain the set short-circuit current values for overcurrent pick-up. This fact requires
alternative pick-up criteria which determine the fault situation unambiguously.
The SYMAP-Compact(+) provides the following four different pick-up modes:
overcurrent pick-up (I>pick-up),
angle-independent under-impedance pick-up (U/I pick-up),
angle-dependent under-impedance pick-up (U/I/phi pick-up) and
impedance pick-up Z<
For each of the above pick-up types, 5 impedance zones Z1, Z2, Z3, Z4 and Z5 are available
for each fault loop.
Generally, pick-up is effected only after all conditions for the selected pick-up mode have been
met; these are:
For I> pick-up:

selection of the pick-up type I> and
no active blocking of the distance protection function or the related impedance zone(s) and
set pick-up value for phase currents is exceeded in at least one external conductor or
pick-up by the module for earth fault detection
For U/I pick-up:

selection of the pick-up type U/I and

User Manual
the pick-up value set for phase currents is exceeded in at least one phase (threshold I>)
and simultaneously, the pick-up value set for measurement voltages (phase-to-phase
voltages or phase-to-earth voltages) is fallen below in at least one phase or
pick-up value set for the phase currents is exceeded in at least one phase (threshold I>>) or
For U/I/phi pick-up:

selection of the pick-up type U/I/phi and
pick-up value set for phase currents is exceeded in at least one phase (threshold I>) and
simultaneously, the pick-up value set for measurement voltages (phase-to-phase voltages
or phase-to-earth voltages) is fallen below in at least one phase and the measured phase
angle between current and voltage of the faulty conductor being within the range of the
minimum and maximum phase angle or
pick-up value set for phase currents is exceeded in at least one phase (threshold I>>) and
the measured phase angle between current and voltage of the faulty conductor being within
the range of the minimum and maximum phase angle or
simultaneously, the pick-up value set for measurement voltages (phase-to-phase voltages
or phase-to-earth voltages, U/I characteristic) is fallen below in at least one phase or
pick-up value set for phase currents is exceeded in at least one phase (threshold I>>) or
For Z< pick-up:

selection of the pick-up type Z< and
no active blocking of the distance protection function and
the currently measured current and voltage values cause an impedance value which falls
into the impedance zone Z< defined for Z< pick-up
or pick-up by the module for earth fault detection
In contrast to the impedance pick-up Z<, impedance calculation for the pick-up modes I>, U/I
and U/I/phi is effected after pick-up. It is only then that the related fault loop is selected and the
calculated impedance value is compared to the polygons of the impedance zones. Depending
on the polygon into which the impedance vector then falls, the timer for tripping delay will start.
P3777 Pickup program

Pickup mode for distance protection function; when setting the pick-up mode of the
distance protection, selection of the following is possible:
I>: overcurrent pick-up, or
U/I: voltage-dependent overcurrent pick-up (under-impedance pick-up), or
U/I/phi: angle- and voltage-dependent overcurrent pick-up (angle-dependent
under-impedance pick-up), or
Z<: impedance pick-up.

User Manual
ANSI 21 Pickup I>
The overcurrent pick-up monitors the phase currents for exceeding the set pick-up
value I>.
Condition for detecting earth faults: earth faults have to cause pick-up in the faulty
phase => the earth short-circuit currents have to be sufficiently high => this is possible
only in solidly earthed networks.
U
PICKUP
I
I>
PICKUP
Imin
5% Inom
PICKUP
5% Inom dI
Figure 3-60 - U/I pickup
For I> pickup, all measuring quantities (I, Imin, dI) must fall into corresponding pickup
regions presented in figure above. In addition, earth fault detection determinates
whether phase-to-earth or phase-to-phase loops will be released. Measuring quantities
are shown in table below.
Table 3-5 Measuring quantity for I> pickup
Measuring Loop
quantity L3-L1 L2-L3 L1-L2 L3-E L2-E L1-E
I IL1 IL3 IL2 IL3 IL2 IL1
Imin IL3 IL2 IL1 =1 =1 =1
dI IL3 IL1 IL2 IL3 IL1 IL2 =1 =1 =1
EF EF == 0 EF == 0 EF == 0 EF == 1 EF == 1 EF == 1

User Manual
ANSI 21 U/I pickup

Should, in the case of fault, high impedances form in the fault loop (see Restrictions
(Static and Transient Influences), voltage drop will be taken as additional criterion for
protection pick-up (overcurrent pick-up depending on the voltage). High-voltage
networks are the main field of use:
The voltage-dependent under-impedance pick-up applies for the range in which the
current exceeds the pick-up value I> up to attaining the short-circuit pick-up I>>.
Should current be higher than I>>, distance protection function proceeds to pick-up
disregarding the voltage height since this is a high-current fault already.
U
U< (I>>)
U< (I>)
PICKUP
I
I> I>>
PICKUP
Imin
I>
PICKUP
dI
I>
Figure 3-61 - U/I pickup

For U/I pickup, all measuring quantities (U, I, Imin, dI) must fall into corresponding
pickup region presented in figure above. In addition, earth fault detection determinates
if phase-to-earth or phase-to-phase loops will be released. Measuring quantities are
shown in table below.

User Manual
Table 3-6 Measuring quantity for U/I pickup
Measuring Loop
U U31 U23 U12 UL3 UL2 UL1
EF EF == 0 EF == 0 EF == 0 EF == 1 EF == 1 EF == 1
ANSI 21 U/I/phi pickup

Application:
In case of short-circuit faults where neither high short-circuit currents nor
significant voltage drops occur.
Mainly in extremely high current networks (overhead lines) with low-ohmic star
point earthing with long, highly loaded transmission lines
In order to differentiate in such cases the fault case from the load case and apart from
the current and voltage variables, the related phase angle is also measured.
To do so, the under-impedance pick-up is additionally equipped with an angle-
dependent region linked to the criterion of the phase angle between current and
voltage of the faulty phase (overcurrent pick-up depending on the undervoltage pick-up
and evaluation of the angle between current and voltage).
Angle-dependent underimpedance pickup U/I/phi basically consist of angle-
independent U/I characteristic and separate angle-dependent U/I characteristic,
working in parallel.
In case of fault the phase angle is significantly larger than in the load case such that by
adding the fault criterion phase angle the pick-up range can be made more sensitive
if compared to the angle-independent underimpedance pick-up. A minimum and a
maximum phase angle define the pick-up range.
If measurement proves angles which are smaller than the minimum phase angle
angle min, load range can be supposed, only angle independent UI pickup
characteristic, left side on figure below, is active. For angles in range between angle
min and angle max, angle dependent U/I pickup characteristic is active also.
Angles which are larger than the maximum set phase angle angle max may indicate
a fault in backward direction or equally a load range with a power flow in backward
direction; e.g. in case of a line with two-side supply, consequently only the angle
independent U/I pickup is possible.
The voltage- and angle-dependent under-impedance pick-up applies for the range in
which the current exceeds the current pick-up value I> to up to attaining the short-
circuit pick-up I>>. Should the current exceed I>>, the distance protection function
proceeds to pick-up disregarding the voltage level since it is a high-current fault
already.

User Manual
U U
U< (Iphi>)
U< (I>>)
U< (I>) U< (I>)
PICKUP PICKUP
I I
I> I>> I> Iphi>
OR
U U
PICKUP PICKUP
Imin Imin
I> I>
U U
PICKUP PICKUP
dI dI
I> I>
PICKUP
Angle max
Angle min
ref
PICKUP
Figure 3-62 - U/I/phi pickup

For U/I/phi pickup, all measuring quantities (U, I, Imin, dI) must fall into pickup region
represented in figure above (left side: angle independent pickup), or all measuring

User Manual
quantities (U, I, Imin, dI, ) must fall into pickup region presented in figure above (right
side: angle dependent pickup).
In addition, earth fault detection determinates whether phase-to-earth or phase-to-
phase loops will be released. Measuring quantities are shown in table below.
Table 3-7 Measuring quantity for U/I/phi pickup
Measuring Loop
EF EF == 0 EF == 0 EF == 0 EF == 1 EF == 1 EF == 1
OR
Measuring Loop
angle(UL3) angle(UL2) angle(UL1)
angle(U31) angle(U23) angle(U12)

angle(IL3 IL1) angle(IL2 IL3) angle(IL1 IL2)
angle(IL3) angle(IL2) angle(IL1)
EF EF == 0 EF == 0 EF == 0 EF == 1 EF == 1 EF == 1

User Manual
ANSI 21 Z< pickup

For the impedance pick-up Z<, the impedance is continuously calculated from the
process variables and the balanced instantaneous impedance vector constantly
compared to the polygon of impedance stage Z<. Pick-up will be activated only after
the impedance vector falls into the polygon and the phase loop is selected.
Within this variable processing, the impedance vectors play an important role for the
load range. It is therefore recommended to define a range of admissible impedances
for the load events as well.
CAUTION: When determining the polygon selected for impedance pick-up, make
sure that it does not overlap the impedance range of the load!
On the one hand, the surface of the load range is determined by the minimum phase-
to-phase impedance or minimum phase-to-earth impedance. On the other hand, load
range surface is determined by the maximum angle of load impedance. The impedance
surface then appears in trapezoidal shape.
As soon as impedance pick-up is active, the fault loop will be selected and then the
instantaneous impedance vector is compared to the polygons (impedance stages Z1 to
Z5). Depending on the polygon into which the impedance vector then falls, the timer for
tripping delay will start.
The shape of the impedance zones can be defined either as a polygon/quadrilateral
surface or as a circular surface.
X
Line straight
X[Z<]
impedance zone Z< Load range PP
Load max PP
Direction straight 2 R1 Load range PE
Load max PE
L L L
R2 R
R[Z<] PE
R[Z<] PP
RLoad min PP
RLoad min PE
Figure 3-63 Forward quadrilateral impedance characteristic

User Manual
Quadrilateral impedance characteristic for forward direction is shown in figure above.

For impedance zone Z1 (forward direction) of the group A, symbols in figure above
correspond to the following parameters:
L: parameter Line angle [P3763]
R1: parameter Direction angle 1 [P3775]
R2: parameter Direction angle 2 [P3776]
X[Z<]: parameter X (Z), reactance [P3815]
R[Z<] PE: parameter RE (Z), resistance/ph-e [P3816]
R[Z<] PP: parameter R (Z), resistance/ph-ph [P3814]
RLoad min PE: parameter R load, min. load imp. PE [P3766]
RLoad min PP: parameter R load, min.load imp. PP [P3764]
Load max PE: parameter PHI load, max. load angle [P3767]
Load max PP: parameter PHI load, max. load angle [P3765]

User Manual
PICKUP
I
I>
PICKUP
Imin
I>
PICKUP
I> dI
Z
PICKUP
Figure 3-64 Z< pickup

For Z< pickup, all measuring quantities (I, Imin, dI, Z) must fall into pickup region
presented in figure above. In addition, earth fault detection determinates if phase-earth
or phase-phase loops will be released. Measuring quantities are shown in table below.

User Manual
Table 3-8 Measuring quantity for Z< pickup
Measuring Loop
Z Z31_2p Z23_2p Z12_2p Z3E_1p Z2E_1p Z1E_1p
EF EF == 0 EF == 0 EF == 0 EF == 1 EF == 1 EF == 1
Impedance calculation is based on dynamic phasor method:
ImU ReI ReU ImI

R
ImI ReI ReI ImI
ReU ImI ImU ReI

X 0 Td
ImI ReI ReI ImI
Polarizing quantities for the R and X calculation according to measuring loops are:
Phase-to-earth loops: ZxE_1p; x = 1, 2 or 3
o U = ULx
o I = ILx (1 + RE/R1)
o I = ILx (1 + XE/X1)
Phase-to-phase loops: Zxy_2p; xy = 12, 23 or 31
o U = Uxy
o I = -2 ILy
o I = -2 ILy
NOTE: For phase-to-earth loops, residual current has no influence on impedance

calculation for Z< pickup.
In case of a three-phase fault pickup region for phase-phase loops appears
rotated by 30 counterclockwise and scaled/expended by factor 2/3.
[I>]
P3778 I>
Limit value of the overcurrent pick-up mode, this parameter is active only when the I>
mode setting has been selected via parameter Pickup program [P3777]
[U/I]
P3779 I>
First overcurrent pick-up value of under-impedance pick-up; this parameter is active only
when the U/I pickup mode setting has been selected for the parameter [P3777]
P3780 I>>
Second overcurrent pick-up value of under-impedance pick-up; this parameter is active
only when the U/Ipickup mode setting has been selected for the parameter [P3777]

User Manual
P3781 U_LE< (I>)

Under-voltage pick-up value (phase-to-earth voltage) for the first overcurrent pick-up
value (I>, parameter [P3779]) of the under-impedance pickup; this parameter is active
P3782 U_LL< (I>)

Under-voltage pick-up value (phase-to-phase voltage) for the first overcurrent pick-up
P3783 U_LE< (I>>)

Under-voltage pick-up value (phase-to-earth voltage) for the second overcurrent pick-up
value (I>>, parameter [P3780]) of the under-impedance pickup; this parameter is active
P3784 U_LL< (I>>)

Under-voltage pick-up value (phase-to-phase voltage) for the second overcurrent pick-
up value (I>>, parameter [P3780]) of the under-impedance pickup; this parameter is
active only when the U/Ipickup mode setting has been selected for the parameter
[P3777]
[U/I/phi]
P3785 I>
First overcurrent pick-up value of under-impedance pick-up; this parameter is active only
when the U/I/phi pickup mode setting has been selected for the parameter [P3777]
P3786 I>>
Second overcurrent pick-up value of under-impedance pick-up; this parameter is active
only when the U/I/phi pickup mode setting has been selected for the parameter [P3777]
P3787 I_phi>
Second overcurrent pick-up value of under-impedance pick-up for angle dependent
region; this parameter is active only when the U/I/phi pickup mode setting has been
selected for the parameter [P3777]
P3788 Angle min

Minimum angle for under-impedance pick-up of angle dependent region; this parameter
is active only when the U/I/phi pickup mode setting has been selected for the
parameter [P3777]
P3789 Angle max

Maximum angle for under-impedance pick-up of angle dependent region; this parameter
is active only when the U/I/phi pickup mode setting has been selected for the
parameter [P3777]
P3790 U_LE< (I>)

Under-voltage pick-up value (phase-to-earth voltage) for the first overcurrent pick-up

User Manual
P3791 U_LL< (I>)

Under-voltage pick-up value (phase-to-phase voltage) for the first overcurrent pick-up
P3792 U_LE< (I>>)

value (I>>, parameter [P3786]) of the under-impedance pickup; this parameter is active
P3793 U_LL< (I>>)

up value (I>>, parameter [P3786]) of the under-impedance pickup; this parameter is
active only when the U/I/phi pickup mode setting has been selected for the parameter
[P3777]
P3794 U_LE< (I_phi>)

for angle dependent region (see parameter I_phi> [P3787]) of the under-impedance
pickup; this parameter is active only when the U/I/phi pickup mode setting has been
P3795 U_LL< (I_phi>)

up for angle dependent region (see parameter I_phi> [P3787]) of the under-impedance
pickup; this parameter is active only when the U/I/phi pickup mode setting has been
[Z<]
P3796 I>
Minimum current for pickup-program Z<. This parameter is active only when the Z<
mode setting has been selected for the parameter [P3777]
P3797 R (Z<), resistance/ph-ph

Resistance of the fault loop for phase-to-phase faults; defines the active component
(section on the R axis) for determination of the polygonal of the distance protection
impedance zone Z<. This parameter allows including fault resistance in addition to the
line resistance. This parameter is active only when Z< pickup mode setting has been
P3798 X (Z<), reactance

Reactance of the line section to protect (reach); defines the reactive component (section
on the X axis) for determination of the polygonal surface of the impedance zone Z<. This
parameter is active only when Z< pickup mode setting has been selected for the
parameter [P3777]
P3799 RE (Z<), resistance/ph-e

Resistance of the fault loop for phase-to-earth faults; defines the active component

User Manual
(section on the R axis) for determination of the polygonal of the distance protection
impedance zone Z<. This parameter allows including fault resistance in addition to the
line resistance. This parameter is active only when Z< pickup mode setting has been

For detecting earth faults, SYMAP-Compact(+) provides a separate module which, according
to the network type, processes the suitable measurement variable(s) by either including the
earth current 3I0 only, the residual voltage 3U0 only or both variables. In case of higher phase
current, pick-up will be stabilized with regard to the increasing ground current. Prerequisite for
correct ground current measurement is that no current transformer saturation applies.
Logic diagram for earth fault recognition is shown in figure below.

[P3801]
None
I0
I0 AND U0
I0 OR U0
U0
(Earth fault recognition)
[P3802]
Ground current
3I0 3I0> [E2545]
stabilisation
& (ANSI21 earth fault pickup)
(3I0> Limit)
[P3806]
1
3U0 3U0>
(3U0> Limit)
Figure 3-65 Earth fault recognition
P3801 Earth fault recognition

Protection criteria for earth fault detection; the following selection options are available:
None: phase-to-phase loops only, or
I0: earth current only, or
I0 AND U0: earth current and earth voltage, or
I0 OR U0: earth current or earth voltage or
U0: residual voltage only.
P3802 3I0> Limit

3I0 limit for ground current pickup; the limit is to be set as percentage of the set value for
nominal ground current of the referenced winding side W1, W2 or W3 (see parameter
Ground current [P607], [P617] or [P627]).
Ground current stabilization

User Manual
In systems where the zero sequence current is measured as a sum of three phase currents, an
artificial ground current signal is measured when one or more of the phase current transformers
are driven into saturation. Saturation of a current transformer means that some part of the
primary current is lost in transmission and does not appear on the secondary side. So the
balance of currents is corrupted on the secondary side even if there is no zero sequence current
on the primary side.
Current transformer saturation is possible when short circuits take place in the main circuit. In
such cases, it is helpful to restrain ground current detection in order to maintain selectivity. The
ground current stabilization can be used for all ground current detecion that are based on the
three phase currents (either calculated inside SYMAP-Compact(+) or measured as the sum of
the current transformer secondarys in parallel connection).
Ground current stabilization is not recommended when a dedicated ground current transformer
is present that measures the zero sequence current with one magnetic core that embraces all
three phase conductors. In this case, the single phase current is of low effect for the
measurement.
NOTE: Some ground current transformers with very large core-windows and small iron cross-
section tend to a phase current depending error when the conductors are not placed in
the center of gravity. In such cases, a carefully adjusted ground current stabilization
might help too.
Ground current stabilization algorithm

Depending on the highest phase current IPHmax the calculated ground current will be reduced
according to the following algorithm:
While: IPHMAX > 3I0 stab. start Imax/In [P3803]:

4
I PH 2 "3I0 stab. start Imax/In" 2

I 0,stab I 0 1 " stab. factor" MAX
I PHMAX 2

While: IPHMAX 3I0 stab. start Imax/In [P3803]:

I 0 ,stab I 0
with:
I0 : measured zero sequence current.
I0,stab : stabilized (reduced) zero sequence current for further calculations.
IPHmax : highest RMS value of the three phase currents.
P3803 3I0 stab. start Imax/In

Ratio of the maximal phase current to the phase nominal/reference current at which 3I0
stabilization starts
P3804 stab. factor

Factor for 3I0 ground current stabilization; where setting:
[P3804] = 0 means no gound current stabilization,
[P3804] = 1 means maximum ground current stabilization.

User Manual
Ground current stabilization
stab. factor [P3804]
[P3804] = 0
[P3804] = 0.3
[P3804] = 0.5
[P3804] = 0.8
[P3804] = 1
Imax/In [%]
Figure 3-66 Ground current stabilization
P3805 CT saturation limit

Maximum current limit for ground current stabilization; this parameter determines the
ratio of the maximum phase current to the phase nominal/reference current Imax/In at
which 3I0 stabilization ends. If ratio of the maximum phase current to the phase nominal
current is greater than [P3805] and [P3804] is not zero (zero means that no stabilization
will take place), then the stabilization factor will be set to zero.
P3806 3U0>
3U0 limit for residual voltage pickup; the limit is set as percentage of the set value for the
nominal ground voltage of the referenced winding side W1, W2 or W3 (see parameter
Ground voltage [P606], [P616] or [P626]).

User Manual
Group A and Group B Zone definition parameters of parameter SET 1 ANSI 21

Zone definition

Impedance zone Z1
P3810 Zone ON - ON/OFF
P3811 Blocking zone 0 event 0 9999
Non-directional/
P3812 Operation mode Non-directional -
Forward/Backward
P3814 R (Z), resistance/ph-ph 600 0,00 600,00
P3815 X (Z), reactance 600 0,00 600,00
P3816 RE (Z), resistance/ph-e 600 0,00 600,00
P3817 T-single phase (ph-e) delay 0 s 0,000 999999,999
P3818 T-multi phase delay 0 s 0,000 999999,999
P3819 Zone reduction angle 0 deg -90,0 0,00
P3820 Z immediate trip by event 0 event 0 9999
E2553 ANSI21-1 zone active - - -
E2554 ANSI21-1 blocked zone - - -
E2561 ANSI21-1 pickup - - -
E2562 ANSI21-1 pickup L1 - - -
E2565 ANSI21-1 trip - - -
E2566 ANSI21-1 trip L1 - - -
E2567 ANSI21-1 trip L2 - - -
E2568 ANSI21-1 trip L3 - - -
Impedance zone Z2
Non-directional/
Forward/Backward

Figure 3-67 ANSI 21 Distance protection\Group A\ Zone definition\ - parameters [P] and events
[E]

User Manual
Zone definition

Impedance zone Z1
Non-directional/
Forward/Backward
P3916 R (Z), resistance/ph-ph 600 0,00 600,00
P3917 X (Z), reactance 600 0,00 600,00
P3918 RE (Z), resistance/ph-e 600 0,00 600,00
P3919 T-single phase (ph-e) delay 0 s 0,000 999999,999
P3920 T-multi phase delay 0 s 0,000 999999,999
P3921 Zone reduction angle 0 deg -90,0 0,00
P3922 Z immediate trip by event 0 event 0 9999
Impedance zone Z2
Non-directional/
Forward/Backward

Figure 3-68 ANSI 21 Distance protection\Group B\ Zone definition\ - parameters [P]
Zone definition zone definition parameters of Group A, parameter SET 1 ANSI 21
The following parameter descriptions refer to all zone definition parameters of one parameter
set in Zone definition submenu of distance protection function ANSI 21.
same group of zone definition parameters. Hence, the parameter descriptions of the
zone definition parameters of Group A\SET 1\Impedance zone Z1 represented
below are described in detail as examples.
Impedance zone Z1
P3812 Zone
This parameter enables/disables impedance zone Z1:
OFF: disables or
ON: enables the protective zone.
When impedance zone Z1 is enabled by parameter [P3810], then event ANSI21-1 zone
active [E2553] is activated.
P3813 Blocking zone

User Manual
Blocking of impedance zone Z1; it is possible to block the pick-up zone Z1 by any active
event after assigning the related event number to parameter [P3813]. Blocking is active
only for the time the blocking event is active. As soon as this event becomes inactive,
blocking is deactivated and pick-up zone Z1 is activated again.
If blocking of pick-up zone Z1 is not required, set the parameter to 0.
When impedance zone Z1 is blocked, then event ANSI21-1 blocked zone [E2554] is
activated.
P3814 Operation mode

Selection of operating mode according to the direction for pickup of impedance zone Z1;
the pickup surface of impedance zone Z1 is optionally adjustable as:
Non-directional: non-directional pick-up, or
Forward: pick-up in forward direction, or
Backward: pick-up in backward direction.
P3814 R (Z), resistance/ph-ph

Resistance of the fault loop for phase-to-phase faults; this parameter defines the active
component (section on the R axis) to determine the polygonal surface of impedance
zone Z1. This parameter allows including the ohmic contact resistances at the fault
location (e.g. electric arc resistance) in addition to the line resistance.
P3815 X (Z), reactance

Reactance of the line section to protect (reach); this parameter defines the reactive
component (section on the X axis) to determine the polygonal or circular surface of
impedance zone Z1.
P3816 RE (Z), resistance/ph-e

Resistance of the fault loop for phase-to-earth faults; this parameter defines the active
component (section on the R axis) to determine the polygonal surface of impedance
zone Z1. This parameter allows including the ohmic contact resistances at the fault
location (e.g. electric arc resistance) in addition to the line resistance.
P3817 T-single phase (ph-e) delay

Tripping delay for single-phase faults (phase-to-earth); if, for example, zone 1 pickups
for the phase L1-to-earth fault, then event ANSI21-1 pickup L1 [E2562] is activated.
Also, event ANSI21-1 pickup [E2561] is activated. If pickup persists longer then time
defined by parameter T-single phase (ph-e) delay [P3817], relay operates, events
ANSI21-1 trip L1 [E2562] and ANSI21-1 trip [E2565] are activated.
P3818 T-multi phase delay

Tripping delay for multi-phase faults (phase-to-phase); if, for example, zone 1 pickups for
the phase L1-to-phase L2 fault, then events ANSI21-1 pickup L1 [E2562] and event
ANSI21-1 pickup L2 [E2563] are activated. Also, event ANSI21-1 pickup [E2561] is
activated. If pickup persists longer then time defined by parameter T-multi phase delay
[P3817], relay operates, events ANSI21-1 trip L1 [E2562], ANSI21-1 trip L2 [E2563]
and ANSI21-1 trip [E2565] are activated.
P3819 Zone reduction angle

User Manual
Reduction angle for inclining the polygon in direction of the R axis for impedance zone
Z1; double-fed high resistive faults could cause overreaching of the distance protection.
Overreaching is not acceptable for distance protection zone Z1, which is generally
applied as underreaching zone and must not overreach in any possible cases. To
prevent zone Z1 to overreach, zone reduction defined by inclination angle can be used,
as shown in figure below.
a) Reduction angle = 0 b) Reduction angle = 15
Line straight Line straight
L L
Figure 3-69 Reduction angle of impedance zones
For group A and impedance zone Z1, symbols in figure above correspond to the
following parameters:
L: parameter Line angle [P3763]
: parameter Zone reduction angle [P3819]
P3820 Z immediate trip by event

Instantaneous tripping of pickup zone Z1; in connection with additional circuit technology
measures which include the opposite station into the tripping logic, it is possible to
control the pick-up zone Z1 of the local distance protection device by any active event of
the opposite station (e.g. as binary signal). This requires assigning the related event
number to the parameter [P3820].
If the impedance vector of the local SYMAP-Compact(+) falls into the impedance zone
Z1 and the parameterized event is active, protection tripping is effected without delay.
This way, the local distance protection device realizes a comparative direction circuit e.g.
by indirect remote tripping (PUTT: Permissive Underreaching Transfer Trip), which
allows selective activation in case of fault on approx. 85 to 100% of the monitored line
section. The impedance stage Z1 of the local distance protection device and that of the
opposite station is to be set to approx. 85% of the line section.
Setting the parameter [P3820] to 0 activates tripping after the delay as set for the zone
Z1 according to the fault loop for single- or multi-phase faults (parameter [P3817] or
[P3818]).

User Manual
3.4.3 ANSI 21FL Fault locator
In case of a protection trip function ANSI 21FL Fault locator is used for calculating the
distance between the fault location and the location of the corresponding protective device.
Calculation is automatically initiated for protective function:
ANSI 21.
Within the following protection functions:
ANSI 50/51,
ANSI 50G/51G,
ANSI 67 and
ANSI 67G
each protection step provides a separate paramater Start fault locator [Pxxxx] to start
calculation of fault distance.
Immediately prior to the protection trip all relevant current and voltage values are saved. At the
moment of protection trip, calculation of the fault location starts and event ANSI21FL busy
[E2387] is activated. When calculation is finished, event [E2387] is deactivated. The fault
location will be represented in the fault recorder subsequently to the evaluation of the
measuring values:
Fault loop: indication of the faulty phase-to phase or phase-to-earth loop
Fault type: indication of faulty phase
Resistance: calculated, absolute value of cable/line resistance referring to fault
distance
Reactance: calculated, absolute value of cable/line reactance referring to fault
distance
Distance: calculated, absolute value of fault distance
Distance [%]: calculated, relative value of fault distance referring to the total length of
the protectd cable/line
Figure 3-70 ANSI 21FL Representation of fault values at device display
NOTE: Additionally to the tripping overcurrent protective function, function ANSI 21FL will
generate a fault recording which is accessable via SYMAP-Compact(+) display or

User Manual
via SCPT application software. The xxx.sfr fault recording file can be read-out and
saved via SCPT.
ANSI 21FL

P3465 Function OFF - OFF/PowerCT1/PowerCT2
P3467 Length unit km - km/miles
P3468 Cable length 100 Km/miles 0 1000,000
P3469 Reactance per km/miles 0 per km/miles 0 40000,00000
P3470 kE-amplitude 0 - 0 40000,00000
P3471 kE-angle 0 deg 0 180,0
E2385 ANSI21FL active - - -
E2386 ANSI21FL blocked - - -
E2387 ANSI21FL busy - - -
Figure 3-71 ANSI 21FL: Parameters [P] and events [E]
The following parameter descriptions refer to all protection parameters of one parameter set.
NOTE: Each of the four parameter sets always provides only one protection STEP and, as
consequence, only one group of parameters. SET PARAMETERS are therefore equal
to STEP parameters. The protection parameters of SET 1 represented below are
described in detail in the following examples.
Protection parameters of parameter SET 1 ANSI 21FL
P3465 Function
This parameter activates/deactivates the fault locator function where the setting:
OFF: deactivates the fault locator function or
ON: activates the fault locator function.
When fault locator function ANSI 21FL is enabled by parameter [P3465], then event
ANSI21FL active [E2385] is activated.
P3466 Blocking
Fault locator function can be completely blocked by any active event. For blocking, the
is only effective as long as the blocking event is active. As soon as blocking is active,
event ANSI21FL blocked [E2386] is activated. If the blocking event becomes inactive,
blocking is abandoned and fault locator function is effective again. Event [E2386] is then
deactivated automatically.
If blocking of the fault locator function is not required, set this parameter to 0.
P3467 Length unit

Selection of applied unit for cable/line length; whereby the setting:
km: indicates the cable/line length unit as kilometer or
miles: indicates the cable/line length unit as miles.

User Manual
P3468 Cable length

Total length of the protected cable/line;
P3470 Reactance per km/miles

This parameter is to set the value of the characteristic quantity specific inductive
resistance per unit length X' = X/l.
It is:
X' = L' 2 f
with: specific inductance L' and frequency f
and:
L' = L/l
with: inductance L [H] and unit length l [km or miles]
=> characteristic quantity Reactance per km/miles: X' = X/l [ per km] or [ per miles]
for a defined conductor length of a single cable lead or line. The characteristic quantity is
indicated of e.g. 1 km/mile (see data sheet of the applied conductor).
Impedance correction of phase-to-ground loop

As a single-phase earth fault causes impedance measurement of the complete phase-to-ground
fault loop ZF,meas., but the set value of parameter Reactance per km/miles [P3469] only
considers the cable/line impedance Zcable/line, the ground impedance ZE on precise determination
of the fault distance has to be taken into account. For this, complex correction factor kE for
ground fault impedance adaption can be set by two parameters [P3471] and [P3472]:
jX
ZE
Zcable/line Zcable/line
ILx
ZF,meas.
RF = 0
ULx-E
ZE
R
Figure 3-72 ANSI 21FL Correction of earth fault impedance
=> ZF,meas = Zcable/line + ZE

With measuring values of ILx and ULx-E it is:
ULx-E / ILx = ZF,meas
= Zcable/line + ZE
It is: ZE = Zcable/line*kE
=> ZF,meas = Zcable/line + Zcable/line*kE
= Zcable/line * (1 + kE)
=> Zcable/line = ZF,meas / (1 + kE) = Rcable/line + jXcable/line

User Manual
=> Distance to fault location = Xcable/line / X`cable/line

= Xcable/line / Reactance per km/miles [P3469]
Setting of the complex correction factor kE
It is: kE = |kE|*e jkE = (Z0,cable/line Z1,cable/line) / 3*Z1, cable/line

with:
|kE|: absolute value of the correction factor = Parameter kE-amplitude [P3470]
kE: angle of the complex correction factor = Parameter kE-angle [P3471]
Z0,cable/line: specific zero sequence impedance of the cable/line (see data sheet of cable/line)
Z1,cable/line: specific positive sequence impedance of the cable/line (see data sheet of cable/line)
P3471 kE-amplitude
Amplitude correction factor for impedance of phase-to-ground loop; the setting of the
absolute value kE-amplitude [P3471] of the complex correction factor kE is as follows:
kE-amplitude [P3470] = |kE|
= [(X0,cable/line X1,cable/line)2 + (R0,cable/line R1,cable/line)2] / [3 * (R12,cable/line + X12,cable/line)]
with:
R0,cable/line: specific zero sequence resistance of the cable/line (see data sheet of cable/line)
R1,cable/line: specific positive sequence resistance of the cable/line (see data sheet of cable/line)
X0,cable/line: specific zero sequence resistance of the cable/line (see data sheet of cable/line)
X1,cable/line: specific positive sequence resistance of the cable/line (see data sheet of cable/line)
P3472 kE-angle
Angle correction factor for impedance of phase-to-ground loop; the setting of the angle
kE-angle [P3472] of the complex correction factor kE is as follows:
kE-angle [P3471] = kE
= arc tan [(X0,cable/line X1,cable/line)/(R0,cable/line R1,cable/line)] arc tan [X1,cable/line/ R1,cable/line]

User Manual
3.4.4 ANSI 25 Synchronizing
Depending on the device variant SYMAP-Compact(+) provides up to three 3-phase voltage

measurement inputs PT1, PT2 and PT3. For synchronization of two three phase systems each,
Synchronizing ANSI 25 function comprises three independent synchronizing units
Synchronisizing unit 1 (Sync. unit 1) for PT1 and PT2,
Synchronisizing unit 2 (Sync. unit 2) for PT1 and PT3
Synchronisizing unit 3 (Sync. unit 3) for PT2 and PT3
Figure 3-73 ANSI 25 Synchronizing units 1 to 3

Each synchronisizing unit provides the following sub-functions depending on the
synchronization of two three phase power systems:
Sync unit x
o Synchrocheck (synchronizing check: U, f, dU, df, dPHI) and
o Voltage check (U, f)
Voltage measurement for synchronizing

All critreia for Synchrocheck and Voltage check function bases on measuring the phase-to-
phase voltages U12 of the two 3-phase power systems to be synchronized. For this, at each
side, voltage U12PTx can either be measured by:
3-phase voltage measurement via three 1-pole isolated voltage transformers, or
2-phase voltage voltage measurement via one 2-pole isolated voltage transformer.
NOTE: When using a 2-pole isolated voltage transformer for measuring phase-to-phase
voltage U12, the secondary side of the voltage transformer has to be connected to
terminals designated as UL1 and UL2 of the SYMAP-Compact(+) voltage
measurement inputs PT1, PT2 or PT3.

User Manual
L1
L2
L3
ANSI 25 - Synchronizing Incoming feeder
-X1.3
SYMAP-Compact+
A N a n
17 UL1
U31 U12
W1 19 UL2
U23 PT1
21 UL3
GCB
-X1.3
A N a n
18 UL1
U31 U12
20 UL2 PT2
U23
22 UL3
W2
G
3~
Figure 3-74 ANSI 25 U12 voltage measurement via 1-pole isolated voltage transformers

User Manual
L1
L2
L3
ANSI 25 - Synchronizing Incoming feeder
-X1.3
SYMAP-Compact+
A a
17 UL1
U12
W1 19 UL2
B b PT1
21 UL3
GCB
-X1.3
A a
18 UL1
U12
20 UL2 PT2
B b
22 UL3
W2
G
3~
Figure 3-75 ANSI 25 U12 measuremnt via 2-pole isolated voltage transformers

User Manual
The parameters of the sub-functions relate to the following three submenus of one
synchronizing unit:
Submenu General: parameters, valid for all sub-functions, of one synchronizing
unit
Submenu Synchrocheck: parameters of synchronizing check and
Submenu Voltage check: parameters to determine the voltage and frequency operating
range
Figure 3-76 Synchronizing unit 1 [Synch. unit 1 (PT1-PT2)] Parameter menu of sub-functions.
Synchronizing unit 1 (Sync. unit 1)

Main Menu\ Parameters\PROTECTION\ANSI25\Sync. unit 1 (PT1-PT2)
General

General
P2305 Active by event 0 event 0 9999
P2307 Voltage reference PT2 - PT1/PT2
P2308 Max. operating time (manual) 60 s 0 999999,999
P2309 Rotating field supervision ON - OFF/ON
P2310 Switching element none - None/SE1/SE2/SE3/SE4/SE5
/SE6/SE7/SE8
P2311 Show synchronizer page automatic OFF - OFF/Open
automatically/Close
automatically/Open/close
automatically
P2312 PT1lable PT1 - (editable text parameter)
P2313 PT2 lable PT2 - (editable text parameter)
E1855 ANSI25-1 Active - - -
E1856 ANSI25-1 Blocked - - -
E1857 ANSI25-1 Negative phase seq. PT1 - - -
Figure 3-77 ANSI 25 Sync. unit 1 (PT1-PT2): General parameters [P] and events [E]

User Manual

Synchrocheck

Sync check
P2315 Function OFF - OFF/ON
P2317 Max. voltage 110 % 0 200,0
P2318 Min. voltage 90 % 0 200,0
P2319 Max. frequency 52 Hz 0 80,00
P2320 Min. frequency 48 Hz 0 80,00
P2321 Max. dU 2 % -50,0 50,0
P2322 Min. dU -2 % -50,0 50,0
P2323 Max. df 0,02 Hz -5,000 5,000
P2324 Min. df 0 Hz -5,000 5,000
P2325 Max. dPHI 5 deg -90,0 90,0
P2326 Min. dPHI 0 deg -90,0 90,0
P2327 Correction angle 0 deg -30,0 30,0
P2328 Delay time 0 s 0 65,535
P2329 CB closing delay 0,30 s 0 65,535
E1865 ANSI25-1 SC: Blocked - - -
E1866 ANSI25-1 SC: PT1 > Max. voltage - - -
E1867 ANSI25-1 SC: PT1 < Min. voltage - - -
E1868 ANSI25-1 SC: PT1 > Max. frequency - - -
E1869 ANSI25-1 SC: PT1 < Min. frequency - - -
E1870 ANSI25-1 SC: PT1 in range - - -
Figure 3-78 ANSI 25 Sync. unit 1 (PT1-PT2): Synchrocheck parameters [P] and events [E]

User Manual

Voltage check

Voltage check
OFF/Not PT1 and PT2/PT1 and
P2335 Function Not PT1 and PT2 - Not PT2/Not PT1 and Not PT2/
Not PT1 or Not PT2
P2337 Max. voltage 110 % 0 200,0
P2338 Min. voltage 90 % 0 200,0
P2341 No voltage limit 5 % 0 100,0
P2342 Delay time 0 s 0 65,535
Figure 3-79 ANSI 25 Sync. unit 1 (PT1-PT2): Voltage check parameters [P] and events [E]

User Manual

General

General
P2350 Switching element none - None/SE1/SE2/SE3/SE4/SE5
/SE6/SE7/SE8
P2351 Show synchronizer page automatic OFF - OFF/Open
automatically/Close
automatically
P2352 PT1lable PT1 - (editable text parameter)

Syncrocheck

Synchrocheck
P2357 Max. voltage 110 % 0 200,0
P2358 Min. voltage 90 % 0 200,0
P2361 Max. dU 2 % -50,0 50,0
P2362 Min. dU -2 % -50,0 50,0
P2363 Max. df 0,02 Hz -5,000 5,000
P2364 Min. df 0 Hz -5,000 5,000
P2365 Max. dPHI 5 deg -90,0 90,0
P2366 Min. dPHI 0 deg -90,0 90,0
P2368 Delay time 0 s 0 65,535

User Manual


Voltage check

Voltage check
Not PT1 or Not PT3
P2377 Max. voltage 110 % 0 200,0
P2378 Min. voltage 90 % 0 200,0
P2382 Delay time 0 s 0 65,535

User Manual

General

General
None/SE1/SE2/SE3/SE4/SE5
P2390 Switching element none -
/SE6/SE7/SE8
P2391 OFF/Open
automatically/Close
Show synchronizer page automatic OFF -
automatically
Synchrocheck

Sync check
P2397 Max. voltage 110 % 0 200,0
P2398 Min. voltage 90 % 0 200,0
P2401 Max. dU 2 % -50,0 50,0
P2402 Min. dU -3 % -50,0 50,0
P2403 Max. df 0,02 Hz -5,000 5,000
P2404 Min. df 0 Hz -5,000 5,000
P2405 Max. dPHI 5 deg -90,0 90,0
P2406 Min. dPHI 0 deg -90,0 90,0
P2408 Delay time 0 s 0 65,535

User Manual

Voltage check

Voltage check
Not PT2 or Not PT3
P2417 Max. voltage 110 % 0 200,0
P2418 Min. voltage 90 % 0 200,0
P2422 Delay time 0 s 0 65,535

User Manual
NOTE: Each of the four parameter sets always provides the same group of protection
parameters for all three synchronizing units (Sync. unit 1 to Sync. unit 3).
Parameter descriptions of the SET PARAMETERS and the parameters of the first
synchronizing unit (Sync. unit 1) represented below, are described below in detail as
examples.
CAUTION: SYMAP-Compact(+) device variants which were built according to ordering option
G59:
do not provide frequency measurement via voltage measurement input PT3!
do provide phase-seggregated frequency measurement (zero crossings of
phase voltages) only at voltage measurement input PT2!
do provide frequency measurement at PT1 based on crossings of phase-to-
neutral voltages UL1 and UL2!
Protection parameter set 1 (SET 1) ANSI 25-1 Sync. unit 1
General Parameter (GENERAL)

The following general parameters exist only once in each of the three synchronizing units.
Therefore, the general parameters apply to all of the following sub-functions of the
synchronizing units:
Synchrocheck (synchronizing check: U, f, dU, df, dPHI) and
Voltage check (U, f)
P2305 Active by event

Synchronizing unit 1 (Sync. unit 1) of function ANSI25 can be activated by any active
event. For activation, the number related to this event has to be assigned to parameter
[P2305]. Activation is only effective, however, as long as the assigned event is active. As
soon as activation is active, event ANSI25-1 Active [E1855] is activated. If the assigned
event becomes inactive, synchronizing unit 1 is deactivated. Then, event [E1855] is
If activation of synchronizing unit 1 is not required, set this parameter to 0.
P2306 Blocking
Synchronizing unit 1 (Sync. unit 1) of function ANSI25 can be blocked by any active
event. For blocking, the number related to this blocking event has to be assigned to
parameter [P2306]. Blocking is only effective, however, as long as the blocking event is
active. As soon as blocking is active, event ANSI25-1 Blocked [E1856] is activated. If
the blocking event becomes inactive, blocking is abandoned and synchronizing unit 1 is
effective again. Then, event [E1856] is deactivated automatically.
If blocking of synchronizing unit 1 is not required, set this parameter to 0.
P2307 Voltage reference

Three phase power reference system (e.g. mains busbar) for that three phase power
system which is to be synchronized (e.g. genreator); the reference system can be
assigned either to the voltage measurement input:
PT1 or
PT2.

User Manual
When synchronisation is conducted between two voltage systems of different voltage

levels (e.g. high-voltage side and low-voltage side of a transformer), the settings of the
reference quantities of the relating winding sides (W1 and W2 or W2 and W3 or W1 and
W3) have to be considered! This is required, since working direction during
synchrionisation process (control pulses via events for frequency increase/decrease as
well as voltage increase/decrease) depends on the assigned power system to the
reference system. Corresponding parameters are located in the submenu:
SYSTEM \Nominals\Reference values:
Vector shift group:
Connection type [P600], [P610] or [P620] and
Phase shift [P611] or [P621], and
Transformer ratio:
Voltage (L-L) [P603], [P613] or [P623]
NOTE: When frequency of the three phase power system which is to be synchronized
is lower than frequency of the reference system, then angle indicator (red
triangle) in the graphical synchronizer page rotates anti-clockwise.
Subsequently, events for frequency decrease are activated.
When frequency of the three phase power system which is to be synchronized
is higher than frequency of the reference system, then angle indicator (red
triangle) in the graphical synchronizer page rotates clockwise. Subsequently,
events for frequency increase are activated.
Figure 3-86 Rotation direction of angle indicator (red triangle)
P2308 Max. operating time (manual)

Maximum time delay until the automatic deactivation of a manually initiated
synchronization via synchronizing unit 1 (Sync. unit 1); as soon as synchronizing unit 1
is activated manually, the timer Max. operating time starts. When synchronisation has
not stopped manually before Max. operation time has run down, synchronizing unit 1 is
automatically deactivated.
NOTE: Parameter Max. operation time (manual) [P2308] is valid only for a
manually initiated synchronization via synchronizing unit 1 which can apply
the following sub-functions:
Synchrocheck (synchronizing check: U, f, dU, df, dPHI) and/or
Voltage check (U, f) and/or
Controller (see ANSI 25A Automatic synchronization (controller)).
To provide the possibility of a manually initiated synchronization, it is
necessary to use a configurable user page and include hotkeys for

User Manual
Manual start and Manual stop!
P2309 Rotating field supervision

This parameter enables/disables rotating field supervision (phase sequence check of
both three phase power systems) where:
OFF: disables or
ON: enables rotating field supervision.
Rotating field supervision does not come into effect before:
parameter Rotating field supervision [P2309] = ON and
all measured phase-to-phase voltages of both three phase power systems (PT1 and
PT2) exceed 40% the set minimum value of nominal voltage (Voltage L-L).
NOTE: The nominal value of the characteristic quantity (phase-to-phase voltage) is to

be set by parameter:
Voltage (L-L) [P603], for winding side W1 or
Voltage (L-L) [P623], for winding side W3.
As soon as the rotating field supervision detects an incorrect phase sequence in either of
the two three phase power systems,
the event ANSI25-1 Negative phase seq. PT1 [E1857] and/or event ANSI25-1
Negative phase seq. PT2 [E1858] is activated and
functions Synchrocheck and Voltage check are automatically blocked!
CAUTION: Function Rotating field supervision is not applicable in case that phase-to-
phase voltage U12 is measured at PT1 and PT2 by a 2-pole isolated
voltage transformer each!
P2310 Switching element

Assignment of the switching element to the graphical synchronizer page; depending on
the SYMAP-Compact(+) device variant, one of the available switching elements can be
depicted on the synchronizer page of synchronizing unit 1. Available selection options
are as follows:
none: none of the switching elements is assigned; no symbol to be depcited
SE 1: symbol of assigned switching element 1 (SE 1) is to be depicted
The symbol always shows the current state of the assigned switching element SE x.

User Manual
Figure 3-87 Assignment of the switching element to the graphical synchronizer page
APPLICATION NOTE: Usually, it is that switching element to be assigned to the

synchronizer page which is expected to perform the closing
command of the synchronizing unit 1.
P2311 Synchronizer page

Automatic pop-up of the synchronizer page; as soon as synchronizing unit 1 is activated
by the event which is assigned to parameter Activate by event [P2305], the
synchronizing page of sync. unit 1 can be configured to pop-up immediately when
synchronizing process starts and/or to close automatically when synchronizing process
has finished. Selection option:
OFF: disables automatic opening/closing of synchronizer
page, or
Open automatically: ensables automatic opening of synchronizer page, or
Close automatically: ensables automatic closing of synchronizer page, or
Open/close automatically: ensables automatic opening and closing of
synchronizer page.
P2312 PT1 lable

Text editor for voltage and frequency lables of PT1 at synchronizer page; designation of
U and f indicators of voltage measurement input PT1 can be changed by the user (max.
four characters)
Figure 3-88 Synchronizer page: Sync. unit 1 lables of voltage and frequency
indicators

User Manual
P2313 PT2 lable

Text editor for voltage and frequency indicators of PT2 at synchronizer page; description
is analog to description of parameter [P2312].

User Manual
Synchronizing check (U, f, dU, df, dPHI) Synchrocheck

Function Sync check checks synchronism of two live three phase power systems (PT1 and
PT2). When synchronizing unit 1 (Sync. unit 1) of function ANSI 25 is activated (see parameter
Active by Event [P2305]), both three phase power systems are checked to verify wether:
the amount of the phase-to phase voltages U12, and the
frequencies of the phase-to phase voltages U12PT1 and U12PT2
meet the required operating range set by parameters [P2317] to [P2320]. Only when these
conditions are fulfilled, synchronizing check procedure will start according to the synchronizing
criteria:
Amount difference U of the phase-to phase voltages U12PT1 and U12PT2
Frequency difference f of the phase-to phase voltages U12PT1 and U12PT2 and
Phase angle difference (dPHI) of the phase-to phase voltages U12PT1 and U12PT2
As reference system for synchronizing check (Synchrocheck), it is the three phase power
system, which is assigned to parameter Voltage reference [P2307].
G59:
P2315 Function
This parameter enables/disables the effectiveness of synchronizing unit 1 (Sync. unit 1)
for synchronizing check (Synchrocheck: U, f, U, f, ) where:
OFF: disables or
ON: enables the effectiveness of synchronizing unit 1.
Synchronizing check is only initiated when

the effectiveness of synchronizing unit 1 is activated (Function [P2315] = ON) and
synchronizing unit 1 is activated by the event which is assigned to parameter Active
by event [P2305].
P2316 Blocking
Function Synchrocheck (U, f, U, f, ) of synchronizing unit 1 (Sync. unit 1) can be
blocked by any active event. For blocking, the number related to this blocking event has
to be assigned to parameter [P2316]. Blocking is only effective, however, as long as the
blocking event is active. As soon as blocking is active, event ANSI25-1 SC: Blocked
[E1865] is activated. If the blocking event becomes inactive, blocking is abandoned and
synchronizing check is effective again. Then, event [E1865] is deactivated automatically.
If blocking of synchronizing check of synchronizing unit 1 is not required, set this
parameter to 0.

User Manual
Definition of operating range as condition for synchronizing check (Synchrocheck: U, f, U, f,

)
t
t0
Im
Parameter: Max. voltage [P2317]
U12 PT1
U12 PT2
Parameter: Min. voltage [P2318]
Re
Figure 3-89 Synchrocheck operating range: phase-seggregated voltage check (amount)
Once all phase-to-phase voltages and frequencies of PT1 and/or PT2 are within the operating
range set by parameters:
Max. voltage [P2317] and Min. voltage [P2318], and
Max. frequency [P2319] and Min frequency [P2320],
the event:
ANSI25-1 SC: PT1 in range [E1870] and/or the event
ANSI25-1 SC: PT2 in range [E1875]
is activated, and the synchronizing check procedure (dU, df, dPHI) will be conducted.

User Manual
Ueff
[P2317]
Max. voltage
Umax
U12 PT2
Un
U12 PT1
[P2318]
Min. voltage
Umin
t
f
[P2319]
Max. frequency
fmax
f12 PT2
fn
[P2320]
Min. frequency
fmin f12 PT1
t
[E1866]
ANSI25-1 SC: PT1 > Max. voltage
1
0
t
[E1867]
ANSI25-1 SC: PT1 < Min. voltage
1
0
t
[E1868]
ANSI25-1 SC: PT1 > Max. frequency
1
0
t
[E1869]
ANSI25-1 SC: PT1 < Min. frequency
1
0
t
[E1870]
ANSI25-1 SC: PT1 in range
0
t
Figure 3-90 Function Synchrocheck operating range PT1: parameters [P] and events [E]
NOTE: Verification of compliance with the set operating range for phase-to-phase voltages
and frequency of PT2 is conducted in a similar manner to PT1.

User Manual
P2317 Max. voltage

Maximum voltage limit (voltage amount) of the operating range of the phase-to-phase
voltages U12 to be synchronized; for a successful synchronizing check (Synchrocheck:
U, f, U, f, ), voltages must not exceed the maximum voltage limit.
The maximum voltage limit is valid for both, three phase power system PT1 and PT2.
When the measured phase-to-phase voltage U12 of PT1 and/or PT2 exceeds the
maximum voltage limit set by parameter Max.voltage [P2317], the event:
ANSI25-1 SC: PT1 > Max. voltage [E1866] for PT1 and/or
ANSI25-1 SC: PT2 > Max. voltage [E1871] for PT2
is activated.
P2318 Min. voltage

Minimum voltage limit (voltage amount) of the operating range of the phase-to-phase
voltages U12 to be synchronized; for a successful synchronizing check (Synchrocheck:
U, f, U, f, ), voltages must not fall below the minimum voltage limit.
The minimum voltage limit is valid for both, three phase power system PT1 and PT2.
When the measured phase-to-phase voltage U12 of PT1 and/or PT2 falls below the
minimum voltage limit set by parameter Min.voltage [P2318], the event:
ANSI25-1 SC: PT1 < Min. voltage [E1867] for PT1 and/or
ANSI25-1 SC: PT2 < Min. voltage [E1872] for PT2
is activated.
P2319 Max. frequency

Maximum frequency limit of the operating range of the phase-to-phase voltages U12PT1
and U12PT2; for a successful synchronizing check (Synchrocheck: U, f, U, f, ),
frequencies must not exceed the maximum frequency limit.
The maximum frequency limit is valid for both, three phase power system PT1 and PT2.
When the frequency of the measured phase-to-phase voltages of PT1 or PT2 exceeds
the maximum frequency limit set by parameter Max. frequency [P2319], the event:
ANSI25-1 SC: PT1 > Max. frequency [E1868] for PT1 and/or
ANSI25-1 SC: PT2 > Max. frequency [E1873] for PT2
is activated.
units) parameter setting of the maximum frequency limit of the operating range
of the phase-to-phase voltages U12PT1 and U12PT2 can be changed by a
command of the data protocol Profibus DP.
for reboot.

User Manual
P2320 Min. frequency

Minimum frequency limit of the operating range of the phase-to-phase voltages U12PT1
and U12PT2; for a successful synchronizing check (Synchrocheck: U, f, U, f, ),
frequencies must not fall below the minimum frequency limit.
The minimum frequency limit is valid for both, three phase power system PT1 and PT2.
When the frequency of the measured phase-to-phase voltages of PT1 or PT2 falls below
the minimum frequency limit set by parameter Min. frequency [P2320], the event:
ANSI25-1 SC: PT1 < Min. frequency [E1869] for PT1 and/or
ANSI25-1 SC: PT2 < Min. frequency [E1874] for PT2
is activated.
units) parameter setting of the minimum frequency limit of the operating range
for reboot.

User Manual
Continuation of synchronizing check according to the synchronizing criteria U, f and
The following figure represents the verification of compliance with the set voltage difference U
Example: Voltage reference [P2307] = PT2
t
t0
Im dU = U Uref = dU12 PT1; PT2

U12PT1 > U12PT2
= U12PT1 - U12PT2 = { >< 00 ;; for:
for: U12PT1 < U12PT2
U12, PT1

U12, PT2
Parameter: Max. dU [P2321]
Parameter: Min. dU [P2322]
Re
with:
dU: Voltage difference (amount) between phase-to-phase voltages U12PT1 and U12PT2
U: Phase-to-phase voltage of the three phase power system PT1 to be synchronized
Uref: Reference voltage of the three phase power system PT2, PT1 is to be synchronised to
Figure 3-91 Function Synchrocheck Verification of compliance with voltage difference U
NOTE: As soon as the voltage difference U lies within the tolerance range set by
parameters Max. dU [P2321] und Min dU [P2322], event ANSI25-1 SC: dU in
range [E1878] is activated.
P2321 Max. dU
Maximum limit of the voltage differenz U (difference between phase-to-phase voltages
U12PT1 and U12PT2) of a level in excess of the reference voltage Uref; for a successful
synchronizing check (Synchrocheck: U, f, U, f, ), voltages must not exceed the
maximum limit of the voltage differenz U.
In case that the measured voltage differenz U exceeds the maximum limit of the
voltage differenz U set by parameter Max.dU [P2321], the event ANSI25-1 SC: dU >
Max. dU [E1876] is activated.
P2322 Min. dU
Minimum limit of the voltage differenz U (difference between phase-to-phase voltages
U12PT1 and U12PT2) of a level below the reference voltage Uref; for a successful
synchronizing check (Synchrocheck: U, f, U, f, ), voltages must not fall below the
minimum limit of the voltage differenz U.
In case that the measured voltage differenz U falls below the minimum limit of the
voltage differenz U set by parameter Min.dU [P2322], the event ANSI25-1 SC: dU <
Min. dU [E1877] is activated.

User Manual
The following figure represents the verification of compliance with the set voltage difference U
and the set frequency differencef.
Ueff
Max. dU [P2321] Min. dU [P2322]
[P2317]
Max. voltage
Umax
U12 PT2
Un
U12 PT1
[P2318]
Min. voltage
Umin
t
f
Max. df [P2323] Min. df [P2324]
[P2319]
Max. frequency
fmax
f12 PT2
fn
[P2320]
Min. frequency
fmin
f12 PT1
t
[E1866]
ANSI25-1 SC: PT1 > Max. dU
1
0
t
[E1867]
ANSI25-1 SC: PT1 < Min. dU
1
0
t
[E1870]
ANSI25-1 SC: dU in range
0
t
[E1868]
ANSI25-1 SC: PT1 > Max. df
1
0
t
[E1869]
ANSI25-1 SC: PT1 < Min. df
0
t
[E1870]
ANSI25-1 SC: df in range
0
t
Figure 3-92 Function Synchrocheck Verification of compliance with dU and df

User Manual
NOTE: As soon as the frequency difference f lies within the tolerance range set by
parameters Max. df [P2323] und Min df [P2324], event ANSI25-1 SC: df in range
[E1881] is activated.
P2323 Max. df
Maximum limit of the frequency differenz f (difference between frequencies of phase-to-
phase voltages U12PT1 and U12PT2); for a successful synchronizing check
(Synchrocheck: U, f, U, f, ), the frequency difference must not exceed the
maximum limit of the frequency differenz f.
When the measured frequency differenz f exceeds the maximum limit of the frequency
differenz f set by parameter Max.df [P2323], the event ANSI25-1 SC: df > Max. df
P2324 Min. df
Minimum limit of the frequency differenz f (difference between frequencies of phase-to-
phase voltages U12PT1 and U12PT2); for a successful synchronizing check
(Synchrocheck: U, f, U, f, ), the frequency difference must not fall below the
minimum limit of the frequency differenz f.
When the measured frequency differenz f falls below the maximum limit of the
frequency differenz f set by parameter Min.df [P2324], the event ANSI25-1 SC: df <
Min. df [E1880] is activated.

User Manual
The following figure represents the verification of compliance with the set phase angle
difference .
Parameter: Max. dPHI [P2325]

t
for: > PT2
t0
U12, PT1
d = Ref = d PT1; PT2 = { <> 00 ;; for: PT1

PT1 < PT2
Im
Parameter: Min. dPHI [P2326]
U12, PT2
Ref

Re
with:
U12, PT1: Measured phase-to-phase voltage U12 of the three phase power system PT1 to be synchronized
U12, PT2: Measured phase-to-phase voltage U12 of the three phase power system PT2 (reference system), PT1 is to be synchronized to
d: Phase angle difference (dPHI) between the phase-to-phase voltages U12PT1 and U12PT2
: Phase angle of the phase-to-phase voltage U12PT1 of the three phase power system PT1 to be synchronized
Ref: Phase angle of the phase-to-phase voltage U12PT2 of the three phase power system PT2 (reference system), PT1 is to be
synchronized to
Figure 3-93 Function Synchrocheck Verification of compliance with phase angle difference
d
NOTE: As soon as the phase angle difference lies within the tolerance range set by
parameters Max. dPHI [P2325] und Min dPHI [P2326], event ANSI25-1 SC: dPHI
in range [E1884] is activated.
P2325 Max. dPHI

Maximum limit of the phase angle difference (difference between phase angles of
phase-to-phase voltages U12PT1 and U12PT2); for a successful synchronizing check
(Synchrocheck: U, f, U, f, ), the phase angle difference must not exceed the
maximum limit of the phase angle difference
When the measured phase angle difference exceeds the maximum limit of the phase
angle differenz f set by parameter Max. dPHI [P2325], the event ANSI25-1 SC: dPHI
> Max. dPHI [E1882] is activated.
P2326 Min dPHI

Minimum limit of the phase angle difference (difference between phase angles of
phase-to-phase voltages U12PT1 and U12PT2); for a successful synchronizing check
(Synchrocheck: U, f, U, f, ), the phase angle difference must not fall below the
minimum limit of the phase angle difference
When the measured phase angle difference falls below the maximum limit of the
phase angle differenz f set by parameter Min. dPHI [P2326], the event ANSI25-1 SC:
dPHI < Min. dPHI [E1883] is activated.

User Manual
The following figure represents the correction of angular errors caused by connected potential
transformers (PT)
For the following example, assumptions are listed below:
the reference system is assigned to PT2 (parameter Voltage reference [P2307] = PT2)
the phase angle difference of the phase-to-phase voltages U12PT1 and U12PT2 is taken
to be zero
t
t0
dF, PT = F, PT1 + F, PT2
U12, PT1, mess.
Im
U12, PT1
F, PT1 = +6 For the angular error correction it is:
dF, PT Correction angle [P2327] = 0

!
U12, PT2
U12, PT2, mess.

=> Correction angle [P2327] = F, PT1 + F, PT2
F, PT2 = 8 = (+6) + ( 8)
= 14
Re
with:
U12, PT1: Actual phase-to-phase voltage U12 of the three phase power system PT1 to be synchronized
U12, PT2: Actual phase-to-phase voltage U12 of the three phase power system PT2, PT1 is to be synchronized to
U12, PT1, mess.: Measured phase-to-phase voltage U12 of the three phase power system PT1 to be synchronized
U12, PT2, mess.: Measured phase-to-phase voltage U12 of the three phase power system PT2, PT1 is to be synchronized to
F, PT1: Angular error of potential transformer (PT) connected to PT1
F, PT2: Angular error of potential transformer (PT) connected to PT2
dF, PT: Total angular error of potential transformers connected to PT1 and PT2
Figure 3-94 Function Synchrocheck Correction of PT angle faults
NOTE: Correction of angular errors does not depend on the current phase angles of the
phase-to-phase voltages U12PT1 und U12PT2.
P2327 Correction angle

Correction angle for eliminating the angular errors of the potential transformers (PT);
measured phase angle deviations caused by measuring inaccuracy of potential
transformers, can be elimintated by the set value of parameter Correction angle
[P2327].
NOTE: The correction angle is not for transformer vector group matching!
Vector group matching is to be set by appropriate parameter setting in
submenu SYSTEM\Nominals\Reference values.
P2328 Delay time

Delay time for activating the synchronous-event ANSI 25-1 SC: Synchronous [E1886];
as soon as the events:
ANSI25-1 SC: PT1 in range [E1870] and
ANSI25-1 SC: PT2 in range [E1875] and

User Manual
ANSI25-1 SC: dU in range [E1878] and

ANSI25-1 SC: df in range [E1881] and
ANSI25-1 SC: dPHI in range [E1884]
are simultaneously activated, event Synchronous pre-event [E1885] is activated, and
the Delay time [P2328] is started.
As soon as the delay time has run down, synchronous-event ANSI 25-1 SC:
Synchronous [E1886] is activated.
Consideration of operating times of additionally applied, external components

Based on synchronizing check functionality (Synchrocheck), SYMAP-Compact(+) calculates
the actual time taken for contacts to close its binary output Synchron ON. Due to the operating
times of additional, external components such as auxiliary relais, circuit breaker etc., the actual
electrical connection (at primary contacts of the CB) of the two three phase power systems PT1
and PT2 is delayed.
There is therefore a possibility that the synchronizing criteria are no longer fulfilled. As a
consequence, such circumstances would lead to an asynchronous connection of the two three
phase power systems.
To avoid any asynchronous, electrical connection between the two three phase power systems,
a delay time can be set by parameter CB closing delay [P2329] bringing forward the activation
of:
the synchronous-event ANSI25-1 SC: Synchronous pre-event [E1885], and
if configured the start of Delay time [P2328] for an on-delayed activation of
synchronous-event ANSI25-1 SC: Synchronous [E1886].
NOTE: The set value of parameter CB closing delay [P2329] should be equal to the sum of
all operating times
Specific operating times of additionally applied, external components can be taken
from the data sheets of the maufacturer
P2329 CB closing delay

Time of bringing forward the activation of the synchronous-event ANSI25-1 SC:
Synchronous pre-event [E1885], and the start of Delay time [P2328] for an on-delayed
activation of synchronous-event ANSI25-1 SC: Synchronous [E1886];
The decision for activating synchronous-event ANSI25-1 SC: Synchronous pre-event
[E1885], and the start of Delay time [P2328] depends on the verification of compliance
with the synchronizing criterion phase angle difference between phase-to-phase
voltages U12PT1 and U12PT2.
Based on cyclical measuring of frequencies fPT1 (phase-to-phase voltage U12PT1) and
fPT2 (phase-to-phase voltage U12PT2) at a time tn, the phase angle difference is
calculated for the time tn+1 = tn + tCB closing time, and compared with the tolerance range set
by parameters Max. dPHI [P2325] und Min. dPHI [P2326].

User Manual
xt
t0 1tn+1 tn+1 = tn + tCB closing time
U12, PT1 1tn

Im
U12, PT1
2tn+1
d
U12, PT2 d
2tn
U12, PT2
Re
with:
U12, PT1: Phase-to-phase voltage U12 of the three phase power system PT1 to be synchronized PT1, at the time tn
U12, PT1: Phase-to-phase voltage U12 of the three phase power system PT1 to be synchronized PT1, at the time tn+1
U12, PT2: Phase-to-phase voltage U12 of the three phase power system PT2, PT1 is to be synchronized to, at the time tn
U12, PT2: Phase-to-phase voltage U12 of the three phase power system PT2, PT1 is to be synchronized to, at the time tn+1
d: Phase angle difference, at the time tn
d: Phase angle difference, at the time tn+1
1: Angular frequency (1 = 2 fPT1) of phase-to-phase voltage U12 of the three phase power system PT1
2: Angular frequency (2 = 2 fPT2) of phase-to-phase voltage U12 of the three phase power system PT2, PT1 is to be
synchronized to
Figure 3-95 Function Synchrocheck Consideration of operating times: phasor
diagram
If at the time tn the calculated phase angle difference for the time tn+1 = tn + tCB closing time
is within the required tolerance range, then
synchronous-event ANSI25-1 SC: Synchronous pre-event [E1885] is activated and
if configured the Delay time [P2328] for on-delayed of the synchronous-event
ANSI 25-1 SC: Synchronous [E1886] is started.

User Manual
Voltage.check (U, f)
Independent of function Synchrocheck (U, f, U, f, ) function Voltage check (U, f) checks
the voltage conditions of the two three phase power systems PT1 and PT2 to clearly
discriminate a live power system from a dead power system.
Definition dead three phase power system:

None of the three phase-to-phase voltages of the three phase power system must should
exceed the defined voltage limit set by parameter No voltage limit [P2341].
Definition live three phase power system:

Phase-to-phase voltage U12 of a three phase power system must meet the defined voltage
range set by parameters Max.voltage [P2337] and Min. voltage [P2338] and
The frequency of the phase-to-phase voltage U12 of a three phase power system must
meet the defined frequency range set by parameters Max. frequency [P2339] und Min.
frequency [P2340]
When synchronizing unit 1 (Sync. Unit 1) of function ANSI 25 is activated (see parameter
Active by Event [P2305]), function Voltage check of synchronizing unit 1 (Sync. Unit 1)
checks, wether both three phase power systems meet the defined operating range set by
parameters [P2337] to [P2340] according to:
the amount of the phase-to-phase voltages U12PT1 and U12PT2 and
the frequency of the phase-to-phase voltages U12PT1 and U12PT2
P2335 Function
This parameter defines the preconditions for the effectiveness of function Voltage
check (U, f) relating to the voltage conditions of the three phase power systems PT1
and PT2 and, subsequently, the activation of synchronous-events.
Function Voltage check (U, f) will only be initiated when
its effectiveness is activated (Function [P2335] OFF) and
synchronizing unit 1 (Sync. unit 1) is activated by the event which is assigned to
parameter Active by event [P2305].
Activation of synchronous-event ANSI25-1 VC: Synchronous pre-event [E1905] and

start of Delay time [P2342] for on-delayed activation of synchronous-event ANSI25-1
VC: Synchronous [E1906] will take place under different conditions depending on the
Not PT1 and PT2: dead power system PT1 (Not PT1) and
live power system PT2 (PT2),
PT1 and Not PT2: live power system PT1 (PT1) and
dead power system PT2 (Not PT2),
Not PT1 and Not PT2: both power systems are dead,
Not PT1 or Not PT2: dead power system PT1 (Not PT1) and
live power system PT2 (PT2)
or
live power system PT1 (PT1) and
dead power system PT2 (Not PT2)
or
both power systems are dead.
Setting option:
OFF: deactivates function Voltage check (U, f).

User Manual
P2336 Blocking
Function Voltage check (U, f) of synchronizing unit 1 (Sync. unit 1) can be blocked by
any active event. For blocking, the number related to this blocking event has to be
assigned to parameter [P2336]. Blocking is only effective, however, as long as the
blocking event is active. As soon as blocking is active, event ANSI25-1 VC: Blocked
[E1890] is activated. If the blocking event becomes inactive, blocking is abandoned and
synchronizing check is effective again. Then, event [E1890] is deactivated automatically.
If blocking of function Voltage check (U, f) of synchronizing unit 1 is not required, set
this parameter to 0.
Definition of tolerance ranges as precondition for determination of live and dead power
systems => Voltage check (U, f:
t
t0
Im
U12 PT1
U12 PT2
Re
Parameter: No voltage limit [P2341]
Figure 3-96 Voltage check operating ranges: phase-seggregated voltage check (amount)
As soon as the amount and the frequency of the phase-to-phase voltages U12 of PT1 and/or
PT2 are within the operating range set by parameters:
Max. voltage [P2337] and Min. voltage [P2338], and
Max. frequency [P2339] and Min frequency [P2340],
the event:
ANSI25-1 VC: PT1 in range [E1895] and/or the event
ANSI25-1 VC: PT2 in range [E1902]
is activated.

User Manual
P2337 Max. voltage

Maximum voltage limit (voltage amount) of the operating range of the phase-to-phase
voltages U12PT1 and U12PT2 to be synchronized; for a defined live power system;
voltages must not exceed the maximum voltage limit.
The maximum voltage limit is valid for both, three phase power system PT1 and PT2.
When one of the measured phase-to-phase voltages U12 of PT1 and/or PT2 exceeds
the maximum voltage limit set by parameter Max.voltage [P2337], the event:
ANSI25-1 VC: PT1 > Max. voltage [E1891] for PT1 and/or
ANSI25-1 VC: PT2 > Max. voltage [E1898] for PT2
is activated.
P2338 Min. voltage

Minimum voltage limit (voltage amount) of the operating range of the phase-to-phase
voltages U12PT1 and U12PT2 to be synchronized; for a defined live power system;
voltages must not fall below the minimum voltage limit.
When one of the measured phase-to-phase voltages U12 of PT1 and/or PT2 falls below
the minimum voltage limit set by parameter Min.voltage [P2338], the event:
ANSI25-1 VC: PT1 < Min. voltage [E1892] for PT1 and/or
ANSI25-1 VC: PT2 < Min. voltage [E1899] for PT2
is activated.

Maximum frequency limit of the operating range of the phase-to-phase voltages U12PT1
and U12PT2 for a defined live power system; frequencies must not exceed the
maximum frequency limit.
The maximum frequency limit is valid for both, three phase power system PT1 and PT2.
When the frequency of the measured phase-to-phase voltage U12 of PT1 and/or PT2
exceeds the maximum frequency limit set by parameter Max. frequency [P2339], the
event:
ANSI25-1 VC: PT1 > Max. frequency [E1893] for PT1 and/or
ANSI25-1 VC: PT2 > Max. frequency [E1900] for PT2
is activated.
units) parameter setting of the maximum frequency limit of the operating range
for reboot.

User Manual

Minimum frequency limit of the operating range of the phase-to-phase voltages U12PT1
and U12PT2 for a defined live power system; frequencies must not fall below the
minimum frequency limit.
The minimum frequency limit is valid for both, three phase power system PT1 and PT2.
When the frequency of the measured phase-to-phase voltage U12 of PT1 and/or PT2
falls below the minimum frequency limit set by parameter Max. frequency [P2340], the
event:
ANSI25-1 VC: PT1 < Min. frequency [E1894] for PT1 and/or
ANSI25-1 VC: PT2 < Min. frequency [E1901] for PT2
is activated.
units) parameter setting of the minimum frequency limit of the operating range
for reboot.
P2341 No voltage limit

Minimum voltage limit (voltage amount) of the measured phase-to-phase voltages for
definition of a dead power system:
When the measured phase-to-phase voltage U12 of a power system (PT1 and/or PT2)
falls below the minimum voltage limit set by parameter No voltage limit [P2341], the
event:
ANSI25-1 VC: PT1 < Min. voltage [E1892] for PT1 and/or
ANSI25-1 VC: PT2 < Min. voltage [E1899] for PT2
is activated.
When the measured phase-to-phase voltage U12 of a power system (PT1 and/or PT2)
falls below the minimum voltage limit set by parameter No voltage limit [P2341], the
event:
ANSI25-1 VC: PT1 > No voltage limit [E1896] for PT1 and/or
ANSI25-1 VC: PT2 > No voltage limit [E1903] for PT2
is activated.
NOTE: The minimum voltage limit [P2341] of measuring voltage is to be set as a

percentage of the nominal value of the characteristic quantity (phase-to-phase
voltage). The nominal value of the characteristic quantity should be set by
parameter:
Voltage (L-L) [P623], for winding side W3.

User Manual
P2342 Delay time

Delay time for on-delayed activation of synchronous-event ANSI 25-1 VC:
Synchronous [E1906]; in case that, depending on the setting options of parameter
Function [P2335], the followings events are being activated according to the following
table:
Function [P2335] = Not PT1 and PT2:
ANSI25-1 VC: PT1 < no voltage limit [E1897] and ANSI25-1 VC: PT2 in range
[E1902] or
Function [P2335] = PT1 and Not PT2:
ANSI25-1 VC: PT1 in range [E1895] and ANSI25-1 VC: PT2 < no voltage limit
[E1904] or
Function [P2335] = Not PT1 and Not PT2:
ANSI25-1 VC: PT1 < no voltage limit [E1897] and ANSI25-1 VC: PT2 < no
voltage limit [E1904] or
Function [P2335] = Not PT1 or Not PT2:
ANSI25-1 VC: PT1 < no voltage limit [E1897] and ANSI25-1 VC: PT2 in range
[E1902] or
ANSI25-1 VC: PT1 in range [E1895] and ANSI25-1 VC: PT2 < no voltage limit
[E1904] or
ANSI25-1 VC: PT1 < no voltage limit [E1897] and ANSI25-1 VC: PT2 < no
voltage limit [E1904]
Then, synchronous-event ANSI25-1 VC: Synchronous pre-event [E1905] activated and
the Dealy time [P2342] for on-delayed activating of synchronous-event Synchron-
Event ANSI 25-1 VC: Synchronous [E1906] is then started.

User Manual
3.4.5 ANSI 25A Automatic synchronizing (Controller)
Automatic synchronization Controller of synchronizing units Sync. unit 1 (PT1-PT2), Sync.

unit 2 (PT1-PT3) and Sync. unit 3 (PT2-PT3) can be applied for synchronizing the three
phase power system of a generator to a three phase power system of a busbar (reference
system), and, subsequently, to give a closing command to the generator circuit breaker by the
binary output Synchron ON of SYMAP-Compact(+) device.
According to the synchronizing criteria
Frequency,
Phase angle and
Voltage.
Function ANSI 25A Automatic synchronization (Controller) provides the following control
functions:
Frequency control,
Phase angle control and
Voltage control.
NOTE: Control functions of ANSI 25A Automatic Synchronisation will not be executed until
the correspnoding synchronizing unit of function ANSI 25 Synchronization is
activated!
G59:
Main Menu\ Parameters\PROTECTION\ANSI25A-Automatic synchronizing\Sync. unit 1 (PT1-PT2)
Controller

Controller
P2427 Frequency controller interval time 2 s 0 6553,5
P2428 Frequency controller max pulse time 100 s 0 6553,5
P2429 Phase controller active at 0,12 Hz 0 65,535
P2430 Phase controller max pulse time 1 s 0 655,35
P2431 Voltage controller interval time 2 s 0 6553,5
P2432 Voltage controller max pulse time 150 s 0 6553,5
E2020 ANSI25-1 Frequency higher event - - -
E2021 ANSI25-1 Frequency lower event - - -
E2022 ANSI25-1 Voltage higher event - - -
E2023 ANSI25-1 Voltage lower event - - -
Figure 3-97 ANSI 25A Sync. unit 1 (PT1-PT2): Controller parameters [P] and events [E]

User Manual

Controller

Controller
Figure 3-98 ANSI 25A Sync. unit 2 (PT1-PT3): Controller-Parameter [P] und Events [E]
Controller

Controller
Figure 3-99 ANSI 25A Sync. unit 3 (PT2-PT3): Controller parameters [P] and events [E]
The following parameter descriptions refer to all control parameters of one parameter set.
parameters for all three synchronizing units (Sync. unit 1 to Sync. unit 3).
Parameter descriptions of the SET PARAMETERS and the parameters of the first
synchronizing unit (Sync. unit 1) represented below, are described below in detail as
examples.
G59:

User Manual

Protection parameter set 1 (SET 1) ANSI 25A-1 Sync. unit 1
The following parameters Function [P2425] and Blocking [P2426] refer to all of the three
above mentioned control functions.
P2425 Function
This parameter enables/disables the effectiveness of synchronizing unit 1 (Sync. unit 1)
for automatic synchronization (Controller: frequency control, phase angle control and
voltage control) where:
OFF: disables or
ON: enables the effectiveness of synchronizing unit 1 for automatic
synchronization.
Automatic synchronization is only initiated when

the effectiveness of automatic synchronization is activated (Function [P2325] =
ON) and
synchronizing unit 1 is activated by the event which was assigned to parameter
Active by event [P2305].
Blocking of automatic synchronisation ANSI 25A

Control functions (voltage controller, frequency controller and phase angle controller) of function
ANSI 25A Automatic sychronisation can be blocked either:
automatically, depending on voltage and frequency levels of the voltage systems connected
to PT1 and PT2, or by
blocking event (see parameter Blocking [P2426]).
Automatic blocking of ANSI 25 Synchronizing control functions

With regard to the actual voltage and frequency levels of the voltage systems connected to PT1
and PT2 two cases have to be differentiated which lead to automatic blocking of the generators
voltage control, frequency control and phase angle control.
Assumption: PT1 = Generator; PT2 = Busbar
Hence follows that function voltage check (see function ANSI 25 Synchronizing) has to be
activated according to parameter setting: Function [P2335] = PT1 and NOT PT2.
1.case: Generator (PT1) voltage and frequency is in the defined Voltage check operating
range of function ANSI 25 Synchronizing, see parameters: Max. voltage [P2337],
Min. voltage [P2338], Max. frequency [P2339] and Min. frequency [P2340];
Busbar (PT2) is dead; means busbar voltage is below the set value of parameter No
voltage limit [P2341].
ANSI25-1 VC: PT1 in range [E1895] = active and
ANSI25-1 VC: PT2 < No voltage limit [E1904] = active
Under these circumstances automatic blocking of the control functions avoids permanent
generator control actions to synchronize with the dead busbar.

User Manual
2.Fall: Generator (PT1) voltage and frequency is in or out of the defined Voltage check
operating range of function ANSI 25 Synchronizing;
Busbar (PT2) voltage and frequency is out of the defined Synchrocheck operating
range of function ANSI 25 Synchronizing, see parameters: Max. voltage [P2317],
Min. voltage [P2318], Max. frequency [P2319] and Min. frequency [P2320],
however, voltage level exceeds the set value of parameter No voltage limit [P2341].
ANSI25-1 SC: PT2 in range [E1875] = inactive and
ANSI25-1 VC: PT2 > No voltage limit [E1903] = active
Under these circumstances automatic blocking of the control functions avoids any
generator control actions to synchronize with the reference voltage system (busbar)
which is not dead but out of its defined Synchrocheck operating range.
Event-controlled blocking of control functions
P2426 Blocking
Automatic synchronization (Controller: frequency control, phase angle control and
voltage control) of synchronizing unit 1 (Sync. unit 1) can be blocked by any active
active. If the blocking event becomes inactive, blocking is abandoned and automatic
synchronization is effective again.
If blocking of automatic synchronization Controller of synchronizing unit 1 is not
required, set this parameter to 0.

User Manual
Frequency control
As soon as synchronizing unit 1 is activated, frequency control is activated independently of
functions Voltage control and Phase angle control. Function frequency control affects that
three phase system, which is connected to PT1 (e.g. generator).
Due to the proportionality of motor revolutions RPM (e.g. Diesel motor drives generator) and
generator frequency, fast frequency control (frequency range: Hz) is to be done by the RPM
governer of the electric drive engine (motor) in a time range of milliseconds. Small and slow
frequency deviations (frequency range: millihertz; time range: seconds to minutes) are to be
equalized by function Frequeny control of SYMAP-Compact(+).
Function Frequency control of SYMAP-Compact(+) is designed as a three step control
including the output states: frequency increase and frequency decrease. For this, the following
two control-events are provided:
Frequency higher event [E2020]: signal to external speed governer to increase RPM
(=> Frequency increase), and
Frequency lower event [E2021]: signal to external speed governer to decrease RPM
(=> Frequency decrease)
Depending on the type of motor speed governer the control events have to be assigned to:
two different binary outputs of the SYMAP-Compact(+) (binary control, e.g. for naval
applications)
function Frequency control is only effective, if frequency fPT1 of Power system PT1 lies within
the tolerance range set by the set limits fmin and fmax.
REMARK: In view of the following statements the momentary control deviation (frequency
difference fU12 PT1; PT2) is given as a percentage f[%] of the nominal frequency fn
set by parameter Nominal Frequency [P603].
The procedure of frequency control is to be described as follows:

1. Determination of the control direction:and control deviation f[Hz]:
Depending on the circumstance, wether the frequency of power system PT1 (generator) is
lower/higher than frequency of power system PT2 (busbar), synchronizing unt 1 needs to
increase/decrease the generator frequency.
The following rules apply:
a. fPT1 < fPT2
The frequency of power system PT1 is smaller than the frequency of power system
PT2 (reference system); according to the measuring algorithm fU12 PT1; PT2 = fU12, PT2
fU12, PT1, it follows a positive sign for the calculated frequency difference:
f[Hz] > 0 => frequency increase!
b. fPT1 > fPT2
The frequency of power system PT1 is higher than the frequency of power stem PT2
(reference system); according to the measuring algorithm fU12 PT1; PT2 = fU12, PT2 fU12,
PT1, it follows a negative sign for the calculated frequency difference:
f[Hz] < 0 => frequency decrease!
2. Determination of the control speed:
The speed of generator frequency control is proportional of the level of control deviation
f[%]. Pulse times are calculated according to the amount of the control deviation f[%].
The duration of one pulse time is equal to the period of activation of the corresponding
control-event which is to increase/decrease the generator frequency.
Pulse times are being recaculated immediately after the break time has run down. The
break time starts cyclically for a duration set by parameter Frequency controller interval

User Manual
time [P2427].
f2 f4 f7 f9 f11 f13 f14 f16 f18 f20 f23

f1 f3 f5 f6 f8 f10 f12 f13 f15 f17 f19 f22
f
[P2319]
Max. frequency
fmax
fU12, PT2 fmax

fn
fmin
[P2320]
Min. frequency
fmin
fU12, PT1
t
Counter pulse time
[P2428]
Frequency controller max pulse time
0
tFreq. contr. pulse 1
t
tFreq. contr. pulse 8 tFreq. contr. pulse 15
Counter break time

[P2427]
Frequency controller interval time
0
t
tFreq. contr. interval tFreq. contr. interval tFreq. contr. interval
[E2021]
Frequency lower event
1
0
t
[E2020]
Frequency higher event
1
0
t
Figure 3-100 Function Controller Frequency control
NOTE: When frequency of power system PT1 (generator) lies within the tolerance range set
by fmax and fmin (parameters Max. df [P2323] and Min df [P2324]), function
Frequency control is blocked.
P2427 Frequency controller interval time

Defined break time tFreq. contr. interval between the times of calculating the pulse times tFreq.
contr. pulse x; the break time always triggers the cyclic calculation of the pulse time, and
restarts when it has run down (cyclical).
P2428 Frequency controller max pulse time

Fundamental value T[P2428] for calculating the pulse time tFreq. contr. pulse x; while
synchronizing, the fundamental value meets a defined pulse time which is needed to

User Manual
equalize 100% of frequency deviation referring to the nominal frequency fn (see

parameter Nominal frequency [P630]).
Frequency deviations less than 100% of nominal frequency f n are considered by
individually calculated pulse times depending on the amount of the frequency difference
f. As calculation approach, the ratio of the pulse time tFreq. contr. pulse x to be calculated to
the fundamental value T[P2428] is equated with the ration of the measured frequency
difference f[Hz] to the maximum frequency difference (fn[%] = 100% fn).
tFreq. contr. pulse x[s] / T[P2428][s] = f[Hz] / fn[Hz]
= f[%] / 100%
The formula for the calculated pulse time[s] is therefore as follows:

=> tFreq. contr. pulse x[s] = T[P2428][s] x f[%] / 100%
= Frequency controller max puls time [P2428] x f[%] / 100%
Example: Parameter Frequency controller max puls time [P2428] = 100s (typical set
value)
Determination of the control direction:

f[Hz] > 0
If the frequency difference f is positive (fPT1 < fPT2), the frequency boost event
Frequency higher event [E2020] is activated for the duration of the calculated
pulse time (RPM increase).
f[Hz] < 0
If the frequency difference f is negative (fPT1 > fPT2), the frequency boost
event Frequency lower event [E2021] is activated for the duration of the
calculated pulse time (RPM decrease).
Determination of the control speed:

f[%] = 100%
A frequency difference f between the generator system (PT1) and the busbar
system (PT2) of 100% of the secondary nominal frequency (e.g. 50Hz), set by
parameter Nominal frequency [P630], will result in the calculated pulse time
of: tVolt.contr. pulse x[s]= 100s.
f[%] = 1%
A frequency difference f between the generator system (PT1) and the busbar
system (PT2) of 1% of the secondary nominal frequency (e.g. 50Hz), set by
parameter Nominal frequency [P630], will result in the calculated pulse time
of: tVolt.contr. pulse x[s]= 1s.
NOTE: An activated control-event will only become inactive, if the subsequent,

calculated pulse time is below the set value of the set break time (parameter
Frequency controller intervall time [P2427]) or if the control direction changes
for the next calculated pulse time.

User Manual
Phase angle control

For regulation of a remaining phase angle difference between the voltage system of PT1
(generator) and the voltage system of PT2 (busbar) function Phase angle control can be
activated. Phase angle control is initiated if:
the measured frequency difference f is lower than the maximum allowable frequency
difference fphase contr.max, and
the measured phase angle difference is higher than the maimum allowable phase angle
difference max or min.
As soon as Phase angle control ist activated, Frequency control is blocked. The regulation of
the phase angle is done by the control of the motor RPM governer which is used to change the
generator frequency. Thus, function Phase angle control also operates the control-events
Frequency higher event [E2020] and Frequency lower event [E2021].
The following figure shows as example the interactions between frequency control and phase
angle control with the implications for the control-events

User Manual
f2 f9 f11 f18 f20 f22

f1 f3 f10 f19 f21 f23
f
fPhase contr.max
[P2429] fU12, PT2 fmax
Phase controller active at
fn
fmin
fPhase contr.max
fU12, PT1
t
5 7 12 14 16
4 6 8 13 15 17
180 U12, PT1
[P2325]
Max. dPHI max U12, PT2
[P2326]
Min. dPHI min t
-180
Counter pulse time
Phase controller max pulse time [P2430]
Frequency controller max pulse time [P2428]
0
tFreq. contr. pulse 1 t
tPhase contr. pulse 4 tPhase contr. pulse 16
Counter break time
Frequency controller interval time [P2427]
0
t
tFreq. contr. interval tFreq. contr. interval tFreq. contr. interval
Frequency lower event [E2021]
0
t
Frequency higher event [E2020]
[E1885]
t
ANSI25-1 SC: Synchronous pre-event
Assumption: synchronizing criterion Umin > U < Umax is fulfilled!
0
t
Figure 3-101 Function Controller Phase angle control

User Manual
P2429 Phase controller active at

Maximum limit of the frequency-diffenrence-dependent phase angle control for power
system PT1 (generator) by cyclically calculated pulse times for controlling the RPM
governer (and therefore the frequency);
Function Phase angle control is initiated,
if the set value of parameter Phase controller active at [P2429] is not equal to 0,
and
as soon as the measured frequency difference f falls below the set value
fphase contr.max of parameter Phase controller active at [P2429].
NOTE: For most applications it is useful to choose the same settings of parameters
Phase controller active at [P2429] and Max. dPHI [P2325] or Min. dPHI
[P2326]. So, it is granted that phase angle control should begin, if
synchronizing criterion fU12, PT1; U12, PT2 < fmax respectively fU12, PT1; U12, PT2 <
fmin is fulfilled.
When the phase angle control is activated, the frequency control is deactivated.The
corresponding control-event:
Frequency higher event [E2020]: signal to external speed governer to increase
RPM (=> Frequency increase), or
Frequency lower event [E2021]: signal to external speed governer to decrease
RPM (=> Frequency decrease)
is activated due to the cyclically calculated pulse times tPhase contr. pulse x which depend on
the set value of parameter Phase controller max pulse time [P2430].
As soon as the measured phase angle difference lies within the tolerance range
(max; min) set by parameters Max. dPHI [P2325] and Min. dPHI [P2326],
synchronizing criterion min > U12 PT1; U12 PT2 < max is fulfilled.
There are the following cases to differentiate:

1. For settings: fphase contr.max [P2429] > fmin [P2324] and
fphase contr.max [P2429] > fmax [P2323] it is:
a. When at the time: t = t[min > U12 PT1; U12 PT2 < max] synchronizing
conditions:
synchronous frequencies: fmin > fU12 PT1; U12 PT2 < fmax and
synchronous voltages: Umin > U12PT1; PT2 < Umax
are fulfilled, synchronous-event ANSI25-1 SC: Synchronous pre-event [E1885]
is activated, and if configured Delay time [P2328] for on-delayed activation
of synchronous-event ANSI25-1 SC: Synchronous [E1886] begins.
b. When at the time: t = t[min > U12 PT1; U12 PT2 < max] only synchronizing
condition:
is fulfilled, activation of synchronous-event ANSI25-1 SC: Synchronous pre-
event [E1885] and if configured the start of Delay time [P2328] for on-
delayed activation of synchronous-event ANSI25-1 SC: Synchronous [E1886],
is blocked.
c. When at the time: t = t[min > U12 PT1; U12 PT2 < max] only synchronizing
condition:
synchronous frequencies: fmin > fU12 PT1; U12 PT2 < fmax

User Manual
is fulfilled, activation of synchronous-event ANSI25-1 SC: Synchronous pre-

event [E1885] and if configured the start of Delay time [P2328] for on-
is blocked. Synchronizing procedure is to be continued by function Voltage
control and/or Frequency control.
d. When at the time: t = t[min > U12 PT1; U12 PT2 < max] synchronous conditions:
synchronous frequencies: fmin > fU12 PT1; U12 PT2 < fmax and
are not fulfilled, activation of synchronous-event ANSI25-1 SC: Synchronous
pre-event [E1885] and if configured the start of Delay time [P2328] for on-
control; synchronizing condition synchronous frequencies is not considered
any more.
2. For setting: fphase contr.max [P2429] fmax [P2323] it is:

a. When at the time: t = t[min > U12 PT1; U12 PT2 < max] synchronizing condition:
is fulfilled, synchronous-event ANSI25-1 SC: Synchronous pre-event [E1885]
is activated, and if configured Delay time [P2328] for on-delayed activation
of synchronous-event ANSI25-1 SC: Synchronous [E1886] will be started.
b. When at the time: t = t[min > U12 PT1; U12 PT2 < max] synchronizing condition:
is not fulfilled, activation of synchronous-event ANSI25-1 SC: Synchronous
pre-event [E1885] and if configured the start of Delay time [P2328] for on-
control and/or Frequency control.
As soon as measured frequency difference f exceeds the set value of parameter

Phase controller active at [P2429], phase angle control is deactivated. The
synchronizing procedure will be continued depending on the measuring values of
process quantities, due to the above mentioned parameter settings.
If the application does not require function frequency-diffenrence-dependent phase
angle control, then set parameter Phase controller active at [P2429] to 0.
P2430 Phase controller max pulse time

Fundamental value T[P2430] for calculating the pulse time tPhase contr. pulse x; while
equalize a maximum allowable phase angle deviation of 180.
Phase angle deviations less than 180 are considered by individually calculated pulse
times depending on the amount of the phase angle difference . The ratio of the pulse
time tPhase contr. pulse x to be calculated to the fundamental value T[P2430] is equated with the
ration of the measured phase angle difference [] to the maximum phase angle
difference of 180.
tPhase contr. pulse x[s] / T[P1018][s] = [] / 180
The formula for the calculated pulse time[s] is as follows:

=> tPhase contr. pulse x[s] = T[P1018][s] x [] / 180
= Phase controller max pulse time [P2430] x [] / 180

User Manual
Example: Parameter Phase controller max pulse time [P2430] = 0,5s (typical set value)

> 0
If the phase angle difference is positive (U12 PT1 < U12 PT2), the frequency
boost event Voltage higher event [E2022] is activated for the duration of the
calculated pulse time (RPM increase).
< 0
If the phase angle difference is negative (U12 PT1 > U12 PT2), the frequency
boost event Voltage lower event [E2021] is activated for the duration of the
calculated pulse time (RPM decrease).

= 180
A phase angle difference of 180 between the generator system (PT1) and
the busbar system (PT2) will result in the calculated pulse time of:
tVolt.contr. pulse x[s]= 0,25s.
= 36
A phase angle difference of 36 between the generator system (PT1) and
the busbar system (PT2) will result in the calculated pulse time of:
NOTE: An activated control event will only become inactive, if the subsequent,
Frequency controller intervall time [P2427]) or if the control direction changes
for the next calculated pulse time.

User Manual
Voltage regulation
As soon as synchronizing unit 1 is activated, voltage control is activated independently of
functions Frequency control and Phase angle control. Function voltage control affects the
three phase system that is connected to PT1 (e.g. generator).
Function Voltage control of SYMAP-Compact(+) is designed as a three step control
including the output states: voltage increase and voltage decrease. For this, the following two
control-events are provided:
Voltage higher event [E2022]: signal to external voltage governer (=>Voltage increase),
and
Voltage lower event [E2023]: signal to external voltage governer (=>Voltage decrease)
Depending on the type of motor voltage governer the control events have to be assigned to:
two different binary outputs of the SYMAP-Compact(+) (binary control, e.g. for naval
applications)
Voltage control is only effective, if voltage UPT1 of Power system PT1 lies within the tolerance
range set by the set limits Umin and Umax.
REMARK: In view of the following statements the momentary control deviation (voltage
difference U12 PT1; PT2) is given as a percentage U[%] of the nominal voltage Un
set by parameter Voltage (L-L) [P603].
The procedure of voltage control is as follows:

1. Determination of the control direction:and control deviation U[V]:
Depending on the circumstance, wether the voltage of power system PT1 (generator) is
lower/higher than voltage of power system PT2 (busbar), synchronizing unt 1 needs to
increase/decrease the generator voltage.
a. UPT1 < UPT2
The voltage of power system PT1 is lower than the voltage of power stem PT2
(reference system); according to the measuring algorithm U12 PT1; PT2 = U12, PT2 U12,
PT1, it follows a positive sign for the calculated voltage difference:
U[V] > 0 => voltage increase!
b. UPT1 > UPT2
The voltage of power system PT1 is higher than the voltage of power stem PT2
(reference system); according to the measuring algorithm fU12 PT1; PT2 = fU12, PT2 fU12,
PT1, it follows a negative sign for the calculated voltage difference:
U[V] < 0 => voltage decrease!

The speed of generator voltage control is proportional of the level of control deviation
U[%]. Depending on the amount of the control deviation U[%], pulse times are
calculated. The duration of one pulse time is equal to the period of activation of the
corresponding control-event which is to increase/decrease the generator voltage.
Pulse times are recalculated immediately after the break time has run down. The break
time starts cyclically for a duration set by parameter Voltage controller interval time
[P2431].

User Manual
U2 U4 U7 U9 U11 U13 U14 U16 U18 U20 U23

U1 U3 U5 U6 U8 U10 U12 U13 U15 U17 U19 U22
U
[P2337]
Max. voltage
Umax
U12, PT2 Umax

Un
Umin
[P2338]
Min. voltage Umin
U12, PT1
t
Counter pulse time
[P2432]
Voltage controller max pulse time
0
tVolt. contr. pulse 1
t
tVolt. contr. pulse 8 tVolt. contr. pulse 15
Counter break time

[P2431]
Voltage controller interval time
0
t
tVolt. contr. interval tVolt. contr. interval tVolt. contr. interval
[E2023]
Voltage lower event
1
0
t
[E2022]
Voltage higher event
1
0
t
Figure 3-102 Function Controller Voltage control
P2431 Voltage controller interval time

Defined break time tVolt. contr. interval between the times of calculating the pulse times tVolt.contr.
pulse x; the break time triggers the cyclic calculation of the pulse time, and restarts when it
has run down (cyclical).
P2432 Voltage controller max pulse time

Fundamental value T[P2432] for calculating the pulse time tFreq. contr. pulse x; while
equalize 100% of voltage deviation referring to the nominal voltage Un.
Voltage deviations less than 100% of nominal voltage Un are considered by individually
calculated pulse times depending on the amount of the voltage difference U. The ration
of the pulse time tVolt.contr. pulse x to be calculated to the fundamental value T[P2432] is
equated with the ration of the measured voltage difference U[%] to the maximum
voltage difference (Un[%] = 100% Un).

User Manual
tVolt.contr. pulse x[s] / T[P2432][s] = U[V] / Un[V]

= U[%] / 100%

=> tVolt.contr. pulse x[s] = T[P2432][s] x U[%] / 100%
= Voltage controller max puls time [P2432] x U[%] / 100%
Example: Parameter Voltage controller puls time [P2432] = 10s (typical set value)
U[V] > 0
If the voltage difference U is positive (UPT1 < UPT2), the voltage boost event
Voltage higher event [E2022] is activated for the duration of the calculated
pulse time.
U[V] < 0
If the voltage difference U is negative (UPT1 > UPT2), the voltage boost event
Voltage lower event [E2023] is activated for the duration of the calculated
pulse time.

U[%] = 100%
A voltage difference U between the generator system (PT1) and the busbar
system (PT2) of 100% of the secondary nominal voltage (e.g. 100V), set by
parameter Secondary [P641], will result in the calculated pulse time of:
tVolt.contr. pulse x[s]= 10s.
U[%] = 1%
A voltage difference U between the generator system (PT1) and the busbar
system (PT2) of 1% of the secondary nominal voltage (e.g. 100V), set by
parameter Secondary [P641], will result in the calculated pulse time of:

Voltage controller interval time [P2431]) or if the control direction changes for
the next calculated pulse time.

User Manual
3.4.6 ANSI 27 Undervoltage Protection
ANSI 27 Undervoltage

SET PARAMETERS
P1050 Undervoltage protection OFF - ON/OFF
STEP 1
P1056 Pick-up source PT1 - none/PT1/PT2/PT3
P1057 Blocking protection step 0 event 0 9999
P1058 Min. start voltage 10 % 0 200,0
P1059 Min. start frequency 10 Hz 0 80,00
P1060 Limit 95 % 1 200,0
P1061 Delay time 0,5 s 0 999999,999
P1062 Reset limit 97 % 1 200,0
P1063 Reset delay time trip 0 s 0 999999,999
P1064 Reset delay time pick-up 0 s 0 999999,999
P1065 Activate start condition 0 event 0 9999
P1066 Voltage reference L-L - L-L/L-N
E1054 ANSI27-1 step active - - -
E1055 ANSI27-1 blocked step - - -
E1056 ANSI27-1 blocked step by min. start voltage - - -
E1057 ANSI27-1 blocked step by min. start frequency - - -
E1059 ANSI27-1 trip - - -
STEP 2
P1068 Pick-up source PT1 - none/PT1/PT2/PT3

Figure 3-103 ANSI 27 Protection parameters [P] and events [E] of SET 1
parameters. Hence, the parameter descriptions of the SET PARAMETERS and the
parameters of STEP 1 represented below are described in detail in the following
examples.
Protection parameters of parameter SET 1 ANSI 27
SET PARAMETERS
The following SET PARAMETERS of the undervoltage protection exist only once in each of the
four parameter sets. Thus, the SET PARAMETERS apply to all of the 12 protection STEPS of
one parameter SET.
P1050. Undervoltage protection

This parameter enables/disables undervoltage protection where:

User Manual
OFF: disables or
NOTE: When no voltage measurement is possible, caused by locating the PTs below
the circuit breaker, and which is open, undervoltage protection must be
blocked by a suitable event. For this, the related number of such blocking
event has to be assigned to parameter [P1051].
When undervoltage protection ANSI 27 is enabled by parameter [P1050], then event


Undervoltage protection can be completely blocked by any active event. For blocking,
Blocking is only effective, however, as long as the blocking event is active. As soon as
blocking is active, event ANSI27 blocked module [E1050] is activated. If the blocking
event becomes inactive, blocking is abandoned and protective function is effective
again. Event [E1050] is then deactivated automatically.
If blocking of the undervoltage protection is not required, set this parameter to 0.
Protection parameters of STEP 1

The following STEP parameters of the undervoltage protection exist only once in each of the 12
independent protection STEPS. Thus, the STEP PARAMETERS apply only to one of the 12
protection STEPS of one parameter SET.
P1056 Pick-up source

Depending on the SYMAP-Compact(+) device variant every protection step of
undervoltage protection can be assigned to a certain voltage measurement input (PT1,
PT2 or PT3). Parameter [P1056] determines the voltage measurement input which will
provide measurement values as characteristic quantities (voltage) to the undervoltage
protection:
none: no voltage measurement; protection step is deactivated
For settings PT1, PT2 or PT3, event ANSI27-1 step acitve [E1054] is activated.
P1057 Blocking protection step

The first step of undervoltage protection can be blocked by any active event. For
blocking, the number related to this blocking event has to be assigned to parameter
[P1057]. Blocking is only effective, however, as long as the blocking event is active. As
soon as blocking is active, event ANSI27-1 blocked step [E1055] is activated. If the
blocking event becomes inactive, blocking is abandoned and protective function is
effective again. Event [E1055] is then deactivated automatically.
If blocking of the first step of undervoltage protection is not required, set this parameter
to 0.
P1060 Limit
Pick-up value of the first undervoltage protection element. At the moment that the
characteristic quantity (voltage) falls below this limit, pick-up event ANSI27-1 pickup
[E1058] will become active, and the trip delay time (Delay time) of the first
undervoltage protection element will start.

User Manual
NOTE: The pick-up value is to be set as a percentage of the nominal value of the
chosen characteristic quantity (phase-to-phase voltage or phase-to-neutral
voltage) by parameter Voltage reference [P1066]. However, the chosen
characteristic value refers to the nominal value of the phase-to-phase voltage
to be set by parameter:
Voltage (L-L) [P613], for secondary side W2
When the calculation of the pick-up value refers to the phase-to-neutral

voltage, parameter Voltage reference [P1066] should be set to L-N, so that
factor 3 is not necessary to be considered for calculation.

Reference value of protection set values for the first step of undervoltage protection
module; the settings of parameters Limit and Reset limit can be assigned by the
following setting options either:
L-L: to phase-to-phase voltage UL-L as characteristic quantity or
L-N: to phase-to-neutral voltage UL-N as characteristic quantity.
P1061 Delay time

Trip delay time; it is the delay time of the trip event ANSI27-1 trip [E1059].
As soon as the pick-up event ANSI27-1 pickup [E1058] is active and Delay time runs
down, trip event [E1059] will be activated. This event can be used for alarm or output
control purposes.
When the characteristic quantity (voltage) exceeds the pick-up value (Limit) of the first
undervoltage protection step before the trip delay time (Delay time) has run down, the
timer of Delay time will be stopped and the counter value is saved. If the characteristic
quantity subsequently exceeds the Reset limit, then, the Reset delay time pick-up
timer will start and the pick-up event [E1058] will be deactivated.
P1064 Reset delay time pick-up

Pick-up reset delay time; it is the delay time for resetting the trip delay time (Delay
time).
As soon as the pick-up reset delay time (Reset delay time pick-up) has run down the
counter of the trip delay time (Delay time) is reset.
P1062 Reset limit

Reset limit of the first step of undervoltage protection. As soon as the trip event
ANSI27-1 trip [E1059] is active and the characteristic quantity (voltage) exceeds the
Reset limit, the timer of the trip reset delay time (Reset delay time trip) will start.
NOTE: The reset limit should be set as a percentage of the nominal value of the

User Manual
When the calculation of the pick-up value refers to the phase-to-neutral

voltage, parameter Voltage reference [P1066] should be set to L-N, so that
factor 3 is not necessary to be considered for calculation.
P1063 Reset delay time trip

Trip reset delay time; it is the delay time for resetting the trip event ANSI27-1 trip
[E1059].
If the trip reset delay time (Reset delay time trip) has run down, trip event ANSI27-1
trip [E1059] is deactivated. In case that the characteristic quantity (voltage) falls below
the pick-up value (limit) of the first undervoltage protection element before the timer of
Reset delay time trip has run down, the timer of Reset delay time trip will be reset.
Then trip event ANSI27-1 trip [E1059] remains active.
Generator start phase

During generator start phase undervoltage protection can be blocked if the voltage and/or
frequency values falls below the set values of parameters Min start voltage [P1058] and/or
Min start frequency [P1059]. For this, the corresponding event to the external generator start
phase signal is to be assigned to parameter Activate start condition [P1065].
NOTE: Parameters Min start voltage [P1058] and Min start frequency [P1059] are only
effective in case that the activation event which is assigned to parameter Activate start
condition [P1065] is activated.
P1058 Min. start voltage

Minimum limit of the measuring voltage to activate undervoltage protection; the first
protection step of undervoltage protection is blocked as long as the measured value of
the characteristic quantity (voltage) remains below this minimum setting at least in one
phase. For the duration of blocking event ANSI27-1 blocked step by min. start voltage
NOTE: The minimum limit of measuring voltage is to be set as a percentage of the

nominal value of the characteristic quantity (phase-to-phase voltage). The
nominal value of the characteristic quantity is to be set by parameter:
P1059 Min. start frequency

The first protection step of undervoltage protection is blocked as long as the measured
frequency remains below this minimum setting. For the duration of blocking event
ANSI27-1 blocked step by min. start frequency [E1057] is activated.
P1065 Activate start condition

Blocking criteria (see [P1058] and P1059]) of first step of undervoltage protection can be
activated by any active event. For activation, the number related to this activation event
has to be assigned to parameter [P1065]. Activation is only effective, however, as long
as the activation event is active. If the activation event turns inactive, activation is
abandoned and blocking criteria ([see P1058] and P1059] are ineffective again.

User Manual
If activation of the blocking criteria (see parameters [P1058] and/or [P1059]) during
generator start phase is not required, set parameter Activate start condition [P1065] to
0.
Ueff/Un
100%
[P1062] reset limit
[P1060] limit
t
[E1058]
ANSI27-1 pick-up
0
t
[P1061]
delay time
t
[P1064]
reset delay time
pick-up
t
[E1059]
ANSI 27-1 trip
0
t
[P1063]
reset delay time
trip
Figure 3-104 Undervoltage Tripping and reset characteristic

User Manual
3.4.7 ANSI 27Q Undervoltage-/Reactive power protection
More and more distributed energy resources (DER) are fitted in the MV grid. The amount of
controllable power reserve (active and inductive reactive power) by means of large-scale
conventional plants is decreasing. Reactive power is used to maintain mains voltage stability.
Faults in the grid, increasing load with reactive power requirements and changes within the
network may lead to mains voltage drops.
In the event of serious voltage drops in several grid sections, such voltage instability may cause
a collapse of the mains voltage by means of cutting the power supply (blackout).
Protection equipment is of considerable importance for secure and reliable operation of
networks, connection facilities and generating plants. National grid codes and regulations
require that DER units feeding into MV grid have to support the mains voltage of a network
failure. Therefore, the purpose of voltage and frequency protection units at machine level is to
disconnect the generating units from the grid in case of faults. If a voltage drop and a inductive,
reactive power flow in the direction towards the generating unit are detected at the network
connection point simultanouslay, then first, the affected generating unit will be switched off
(disconnecting the generator circuit breaker). After an unsuccessfull attempt to disconnect the
generating unit, the whole DER plant will be switched of by the circuit breaker at the network
connection point.
As far as the disconnection of the affected generating unit (generator circuit breaker) from the
medium voltage network bases on one of the following protective functions:
Undervoltage protection (U<, U<<) or
Overvoltage protection (U>, U>>) or
Under frequency protection (f<, f<<) or
Overfrequency protection (f>, f>>)
Reclosing of the generating unit CB shall take place only if:

the mains voltage is above a given minimum limit and
the mains frequency is within a given value range.
The mains voltage may not necessarily measured at the network connection point. According to
the above mentioned protective functions, reclosing of the generator CB shall only take place
after a certain, given period of time (release signal for reclosing the generator CB).
In so far as the DER is disconnected from the grid at the network connection point, the
individual generating units are shut down, too. Consequently, reclosing of the CB at the network
connection point does not require any mains voltage measurement. Reclosing is done
manually.
Transmission Code 2007, Network and System Rules of the German Transmission System
Operators, Version 1.1, August 2007, from the German Electricity Association (VDEW) and
Association of network operator (VDN), see chapter 3.3.13.5 (6)
Technical guideline: Generating plants connected to the medium-voltage network
(Guideline for generating plants connection to and parallel operation with the medium-
voltage network), June 2008, Federal Association of the Energy and Water Industry -
BDEW, see chapter 3.2.3.2 Reactive power-Undervoltage protection Q&U<
Specification sheet Reactive power-Undervoltage protection, February 2010, Grid
technology/grid operation forum (FNN) of VDE

User Manual
This U<& Q> protection is an upstream system protection. This U<& Q> protection function is
implemented in the SYMAP-Compact(+) devices as an autonomous protection element
according to the above mentioned BDEW (German) regulations.
ANSI 27Q Reactive power / Undervoltage

GLOBAL
P1580 QU-protection OFF - ON/OFF
P1582 Pickup source Power_CT1 - POWER_CT1/Power_CT2
P1583 Reference arrow system LRAS - LRAS/GRAS
PICKUP
P1585 Voltage limit 85 % 0 100,0
P1586 Current limit 10 % 0 20,0
P1587 Reactive power limit 5 % 0 10,0
P1589 1. delay time 1 s 0 999999,999
P1590 2. delay time 1,5 s 0 999999,999
P1591 1. reset delay time (1st trip) 1 s 0 999999,999
P1592 2. reset delay time (2nd trip) 1,5 s 0 999999,999
RECLOSING
P1616 Function OFF - ON/OFF
P1596 Min. frequency 47,5 Hz 0 80,0
P1597 Max. frequency 50,5 Hz 0 80,0
P1598 Delay time 2 s 0 999999,999
P1599 External voltage release event 0 event 0 9999
P1600 Reclosing trigger event 1 0 event 0 9999
E1405 ANSI27Q module active - - -
E1406 ANSI27Q blocked module - - -
E1408 ANSI27Q pickup - - -
E1409 ANSI27Q 1st trip - - -
E1410 ANSI27Q 2nd trip - - -
E1412 ANSI27Q voltage reclosing limit reached - - -
E1413 ANSI27Q reclosing release - - -
Figure 3-105 ANSI 27Q Protection parameters [P] and events [E] of SET 1

User Manual
consequence, only one group of parameters. Thus, SET PARAMETERS are equal to
STEP parameters. The protection parameters of SET 1 represented below are
described in detail in the following examples.
Protection parameters of parameter of SET 1 ANSI 27Q
P1580 QU- protection

This parameter enables/disables undervoltage-/reactive power protection where:
OFF: disables or
NOTE: In case that no voltage measurement is possible, caused by locating the PTs
below the circuit breaker, and which is open, then undervoltage-/reactive
power protection must be blocked by a suitable event. For this, the related
number of such blocking event has to be assigned to parameter [P1581].
When undervoltage-/reactive power protection ANSI 27Q is enabled by parameter

[P1535], then event ANSI27Q module active [E1405] is activated.

Undervoltage-/reactive power protection can be completely blocked by any active event.
For blocking, the number related to this blocking event has to be assigned to parameter
soon as blocking is active, event ANSI27Q blocked module [E1406] is activated. If the
If blocking of the undervoltage-/reactive power protection is not required, set this
parameter to 0.

Depending on the SYMAP-Compact(+) device variant undervoltage/reactive power
protection can be assigned to a certain current measurement input (CT1 or CT2 if
available) and subsequently to a certain voltage measurement input (PT1, PT2 or PT3).
Parameter [P1582] determines the power measurement input which will provide
measurement values to build the characteristic quantity (reactive power) of the
undervoltage/reactive power protection:
Power_CT1: current measurement by CT1 and voltage measurement by the
assigned voltage transformer (PT1, PT2 or PT3)
Power_CT2: current measurement by CT2 and the assigned voltage
measurement input (PT1, PT2 or PT3)
NOTE: The assignment of the voltage measurement input (PT1, PT2 or PT3) to the
current measurement input CT1 or CT2 is to be done by the following
parameters (referring to the setting options of parameter [P1582]), in the
submenu SYSTEM\Measuring\Power:
PT reference [P9410], for Power_CT1 and
PT reference [P9413], for Power_CT2

User Manual
To measure positive sequence reactive power direction correctly, the needed

energy flow direction is to be defined by following parameters:
Direction [P9411], for Power_CT1 and
Direction [P9414], for Power_CT2.
P1583 Reference arrow system

This parameter determines wether the undervoltage/reactive power protection working
principle is regarded from the point of view of a utility, then the Load reference arrow
system (LRAS) must be applied. If ANSI27Q shall operate from the viewpoint of a
generator operator, the Generator reference system (GRAS) should have been
applied. The adaption of the protective function to the required working principle can be
selected by the following adjustment options.
LRAS: protection trip, if reactive power measurement value is positive (Q1 > 0)
(Load Reference Arrow System)
GRAS: protection trip, if reactive power measurement value is negative (Q1 < 0)
(Generator Reference Arrow System)

User Manual
L1
L2
L3
Generator unit (incoming feeder)
-X1.1
P1 1 SYMAP-Compact
S1 Parameter settings:
CT1-M: Direction L1 (Measuring) [P662] = 0

P2 S2
2 CT1-M: Direction L3 (Measuring) [P664] = 0
P1 3
S1 CT1-P: Direction L1 (Protection) [P665] = 0
CT1-P: Direction L2 (Protection) [P666] = 0
CT1-M/P CT1-P: Direction L3 (Protection) [P667] = 0
P2 S2
4 CT2-MP: Direction L1 [P671] = 0
P1 5 CT2-MP: Direction L2 [P672] = 0
LRAS
S1 CT2-MP: Direction L3 [P673] = 0
Reference arrow system = LARS
P2 S2
6
Normal operation: Example
Measuring values: viewpoint of Utility (LRAS)

=> P < 0: Grid takes active power of Generator unit
=> Q < 0: Grid takes ind. reactive power of Generator
Measuring values: viewpoint of Generator operator (GRAS)

Generator => P > 0: Generator delivers active power to the grid
3~ => Q > 0: Generator delivers ind. reactive power to the grid
GRAS
Fault situation: Example
Measuring values: viewpoint of Utility (LRAS)

=> P < 0 / P>0: Grid takes/delivers active power of/to Generator unit
-X1.2 => Q > 0: Grid delivers ind. reactive power to the Generator
P2 7
S2 (Measuring values: viewpoint of Generator operator (GRAS)
=> P > 0: Generator delivers active power to the grid
=> Q < 0: Generator takes ind. reactive power of the grid
P1 S1
8
9 ANSI 27Q: working principle by viewpoint of Utility (LRAS)
P2 S2 => protection trip: if U< and Q>0
CT2-M/P
P1 S1
10
P2 11
S2
P1 S1
12
Figure 3-106 ANSI 27Q Connection example and definition of load flow direction

User Manual
Parameters for mains decoupling (PICK-UP)
[P1587]
[P1583] Q1 >
(Reference arrow system) UL1, UL2, UL3 (LARS)
U12 IL1, IL2, IL3 (Reactive power limit)
U23
1
[P1587]
U31
Q1 <
IL1 (GRAS)
IL2 S1 = P1 + jQ1
(Reactive power limit)
IL3
[P1589]
T 0 [E1409]
[P1586]
(ANSI27Q 1st trip)
I1>
(1. delay time")
[E1409]
(Current limit) & (ANSI27Q pickup)
[P1590]
[P1585]
T 0 [E1410]
U12< (ANSI27Q 2nd trip)
(2. delay time")

(Voltage limit)
[P1585]
U23<
(Voltage limit)
[P1585]
U31<
(Voltage limit)
Figure 3-107 ANSI 27Q Working principle of Undervoltage-/Reactive power protection

User Manual
P1585 Voltage limit

Pick-up value of the characteristic quantity phase-to-phase voltage of the
undervoltage/reactive power protection function. As soon as
all measured values of the characteristic quantity phase-to-phase voltage falls
below the set value of parameter Voltage limit [P1585] and
the measured value of the characteristic quantity positive sequence current I1
(release current) exceeds the set value of parameter Current limit [P1586] and
the measured value of the characteristic quantity positive sequence reactive power
Q1 falls below (Reference arrow system [P1583] = GRAS) or exceeds
(Reference arrow system [P1583] = LRAS) the set value of parameter Reactive
power limit [P1587],
then the pick-up event ANSI27Q pickup [E1408] is activated, and the counters of 1st
delay time and 2nd delay time are started. As soon as one of the above mentioned
conditions becomes false, pick-up event ANSI27Q pickup [E1408] will be decativated.
NOTE: The voltage limit should be set as a percentage of the nominal value of the
characteristic quantity (phase-to-phase voltage). The nominal value of the
characteristic quantity should be set by parameter:
P1586 Current limit

Pick-up value of the characteristic quantity positive sequence current I1 of the
then the pick-up event ANSI27Q pickup [E1408] is activated, and the counters of 1st
delay time and 2nd delay time are started. As soon as one of the above mentioned
conditions becomes false, pick-up event ANSI27Q pickup [E1408] will be decativated.
NOTE: The current limit should be set as a percentage of the nominal value of the
characteristic quantity (phase current). The nominal value of the characteristic
quantity should be set by parameter:

User Manual
P1587 Reactive power limit

Pick-up value of the characteristic quantity positive sequence reactive power Q1 of the
then, the pick-up event ANSI27Q pickup [E1408] is activated, and the counters of 1st
delay time and 2nd delay time are being started. As soon as one of the above
mentioned conditions becomes untrue, pick-up event ANSI27Q pickup [E1408] will be
decativated.
NOTE: The reactive power limit is to be set as a percentage of the nominal value of
the characteristic quantity (according to users input either as active power,
reactive power or apparent power). The nominal value of the characteristic
quantity is to be set by parameter:
Power [P615], for secondary side W2.
Here, it is that winding side relating to the directional reactive power

monitoring, which is assigned to the applied current measurement input by
parameter
Assignment [P668], for current measurement input CT1 or
Assignment [P674], for current measurement input CT2.
The parameters Power [P605] and Power [P615] are located in submenu:
The parameters Assignment [P668] and Assignment [P674] are located in

submenu: SYSTEM\Nominals\Current transformer.
P1589 1. delay time

First trip delay time; it is the delay time of the trip event ANSI27 1st trip [E1409].
As soon as the pick-up event ANSI27Q pickup [E1408] is active and 1. delay time run
control purposes, e.g. to switch of the generator circuit breaker (generating unit).
P1590 2. delay time

Second trip delay time; it is the delay time of the trip event ANSI27 2nd trip [E1410].
As soon as the pick-up event ANSI27Q pickup [E1408] is active and 2. delay time run
control purposes, e.g. to switch of the circuit breaker at the network connection point
(mains).
P1591 1. reset delay time (1st trip)

First trip reset delay time, it is the delay time for resetting the trip event ANSI27 1st trip
[E1409]. As soon as the pick-up event ANSI27Q pickup [E1408] is deactivated, and trip
event ANSI27Q 1st trip [E1409] is activated, then the counter of 2 reset delay time (1st

User Manual
trip) will start. If the 1. reset delay time (1st trip) has run down, trip event ANSI27Q 1st
trip [E1409] is deactivated.
In case that the pick-up ANSI27Q pickup [E1408] becomes active before the first trip
reset delay time has run down, then counter 1. reset delay time (1st trip) will be reset
immediately.
P1592 2. reset delay time (2nd trip)

Second trip reset delay time, it is the delay time for resetting the trip event ANSI27 2nd
trip [E1410]. As soon as the pick-up event ANSI27Q pickup [E1408] is deactivated,
and trip event ANSI27Q 2nd trip [E1410] is activated, then the counter of 2. reset
delay time (2nd trip) will start. If the 2. reset delay time (2nd trip) has run down, trip
event ANSI27Q 2nd trip [E1410] is deactivated.
In case that the pick-up ANSI27Q pickup [E1408] becomes active before the second
trip reset delay time has run down, then counter 2. reset delay time (2nd trip) will be
reset immediately.
Reclosing parameters (RECLOSING)

[P1616]
(Function")
Event [P1600]
(Reclosing trigger event 1")
Event [P1601]
[P1598]
A T 0 B
. 1
.
. (Delay time")
Event [P1615]
&
[P1596] [E1413]
(ANSI27Q reclosing release)
f f>
( Min. frequency, z.B. f > 47,5 Hz)
[P1597]
&
f<
(Max. frequency, z.B. f < 50,05 Hz)
[P1595]
U12 U12>
(Voltage limit)
[P1595]
[E1412]
U23 U23> & (ANSI27Q voltage reclosing limit reached)
(Voltage limit) &

[P1595]
1
U31 U31>
(Voltage limit)
[P1599]
(External voltage release event)
Event [P1599]
Figure 3-108 ANSI 27Q Working principle of reclosing: block diagram

User Manual
Function [P1616] = ON
f
[P1597] Max. frequency
fn
[P1596] Min. frequency
t
URMS/Un
100%
[P1595] Voltage limit
t
[E1058]
ANSI27-1 trip
Reclosing trigger event 1 [P1600]

= ANSI27-1 trip [E1058]
A t
(Input signal of counter
Delay time)
1
0
t
[P1598]
Delay time
B
(Output signal of counter t
Delay time)
1
0
t
[E1412]
ANSI27Q Voltage reclosing
limit reached 1
0
t
[E4010]
Binary input Fct.10
External voltage release event [P1599]

= Binary input Fct.10 [E4010]
0
t
[E1413]
ANSI27Q reclosing release
0
t
Figure 3-109 ANSI 27Q Working principle of reclosing: function/time diagram

User Manual
P1616 Function
This parameter enables/disables reclosing function of ANSI 27Q Undervoltage-
/Reactive power protection where:
OFF: disables the reclosing function or
ON: enables the reclosing function.
NOTE: Disabling of reclosing function can be used for testing purposes of the
protection function.
P1595 Voltage limit

Minimum limit of measuring voltage at the network connection point; as soon as all three
phase-to-phase voltages exceeds the set value of parameter Voltage limit [P1595],
event ANSI27Q voltage reclosing limit reached [E1412] will be activated. This event,
generated at the network connection point, can be used as an enable signal to be
forwarded to protective devices of the generating units for reclosing purposes.
NOTE: Parameter [P1595] can be used to generate event ANSI27Q voltage

reclosing limit reached [E1412] if the SYMAP-Compact(+) is located at the
network connection point. Hence, no external enable signal is necessary,
since it is generated by the internal voltage monitoring function of SYMAP-
Compact(+). Criterion voltage supervision via parameter Voltage limit
[P1595] for reclosing release is only valid for parameter setting: External
voltage release event [P1599] = 0!
NOTE: The minimum limit of measuring voltage is to be set as a percentage of the


Minimum frequency value; it is needed to generate the reclosing release signal.
Parameter [P1596] is to be set as an absolute value.

Maximum frequency value; it allows the generation of the reclosing release signal.
Parameter [P1597] is to be set as an absolute value.
P1598 Delay time

Reclosing delay time; this parameter set the delay time between voltage restoration and
reclosing.
When all the trip events assigned to parameters [P1600] to [P1615] are deactivated,
then the time counter of the reclosing delay time (delay time) is being started.
If the reclosing delay time has run down and all other conditions for reclosing (see block
diagram) are fulfilled, then event ANSI27Q reclosing release [E1413] is activated.
NOTE: As long as one of the trip events assigned to parameters [P1600] to [P1615] is
activated, reclosing release is blocked by means of deactivating event
ANSI27Q reclosing release [E1413].

User Manual
P1599 External voltage release event

If the SYMAP-Compact(+) uses an external enable signal for reclosing purposes, then
the event number (e.g. of a binary input; in case that the signal was connected to a
binary input) will have to be assigned to parameter External voltage release event
[E1599].
Criterion External voltage release event for reclosing release is only valid for parameter
setting: External voltage release event [P1599] 0!
P1600 Reclosing trigger event 1

This parameter specifies the trip event which triggers the protective relay for decoupling.
For this, the event number of this trip event has to be assigend to parameter [P1600]. If
the assigned trigger event becomes active the counter of the reclosing delay time (delay
time between voltage restoration and reclosing release) will be reset and event
ANSI27Q reclosing release [E1413] is deactivated.
NOTE: SYMAP-Compact(+) is able to consider up to 16 different trigger events. For

this, parameters Reclosing trigger event 1 [P1600] to Reclosing trigger
event 16 [P1615] are available.














User Manual



User Manual
3.4.8 ANSI 27T Undervoltage Protection; time-dependent
According to the German Energy and Water Association (Bundesverband der Energie- und
Wasserwirtschaft e.V. BDEW) directive on connection and parallel operation of power plants in
medium-voltage grids (Erzeugungsanlagen am Mittelspanungsnetz (Richtlinie fr Anschluss
und Parallelbetrieb von Erzeugungsanlagen am Mittelspannungsnetz)), power plants being
operated in parallel to operators medium-voltage grids have to meet certain requirements of
grid support.
As far as their protection devices are concerned, such power plants shall, in case of voltage
drop, contribute to grid support and thus not be disconnected from the grid. Conventional under
voltage protection can thus not necessarily be used.
The time-dependent undervoltage relay ANSI 27T as used in the SYMAP-Compact(+) fully
meets the above mentioned requirement. The trigger characteristic can be freely defined by
parameterizing to up to 10 characteristic points. Due to this feature, the user may configure
several different time-dependent trigger areas. The number of tolerated brief voltage drops
(Number of blocked voltage drops) can be set by parameter and is acquired by a counter.
Maximum duration of counting (Time slot for voltage drops count) can be set.
Trigger characteristic is activated (Start of functional timer) as soon as the low limit pick-up
setting for under voltage (Activate Limit) is fallen below and will be reset (Stop of functional
timer) if grid voltage exceeds the reset value (Reactivate limit) for a settable duration
(Reactivate delay time).
Protection triggering depends on the situation in the grid. Generally, two situations can be
differentiated:
1st case: Grid voltage falls below the low trigger value set in the characteristic curve
and triggers a time-dependent protection
nd
2 case: The counted value is exceeded and triggers an immediate time-independent
protection
After the counter attains the set value, the characteristic curve will not be reset and the
subsequent voltage drop triggers a protection depending on the characteristic curve.
27t
150
100
%
50
0
-100 900 1900 2900 3900
ms
Setting limit
Figure 3-110 ANSI 27T Configurable trip curve

User Manual
Main Menu\Parameters\PROTECTION\
ANSI 27T Time dependent undervoltage
SATZ 1 SATZ 2 SATZ 3 SATZ 4

P/E Nr. Beschreibung Wert Einheit (Einstellbereich)
GLOBAL
P1475 Time dependent undervoltage protection AUS - ON/AUS
P1476 Blocking protection 0 event 0 9999
P1477 Pickup source PT1 - PT1/PT2/PT3
P1478 Number of blocked voltage drops 2 - 0 10
P1479 Time slot for voltage drops count 2 s 0 999999,999
P1483 Activate limit 95 % 0 200,0
P1484 Reactivate limit 97 % 0 200,0
P1485 Reactivate delay time 2 s 0 999999,999
CURVE SETTINGS
P1487 1. Curve limit 95 % 0 200,0
P1488 1. Curve time 2 s 0 999999,999
P1489 2. Curve limit 95 % 0 200,0
P1490 2. Curve time 2 s 0 999999,999
P1491 3. Curve limit 95 % 0 200,0
P1492 3. Curve time 2 s 0 999999,999
P1493 4. Curve limit 95 % 0 200,0
P1494 4. Curve time 2 s 0 999999,999
P1495 5. Curve limit 95 % 0 200,0
P1496 5. Curve time 2 s 0 999999,999
P1497 6. Curve limit 95 % 0 200,0
P1498 6. Curve time 2 s 0 999999,999
P1499 7. Curve limit 95 % 0 200,0
P1500 7. Curve time 2 s 0 999999,999
P1501 8. Curve limit 95 % 0 200,0
P1502 8. Curve time 2 s 0 999999,999
P1503 9. Curve limit 95 % 0 200,0
P1504 9. Curve time 2 s 0 999999,999
P1505 10. Curve limit 95 % 0 200,0
P1506 10. Curve time 2 s 0 999999,999
E1350 ANSI27T module active - - -
E1351 ANSI27T blocked module - - -
E1352 ANSI27T reactivate limit reached - - -
E1353 ANSI27T activate limit reached - - -
E1354 ANSI27T pickup - - -
E1355 ANSI27T trip - - -
E1356 ANSI27T trip by voltage drops count - - -
E1357 ANSI27T trip by curve underrun - - -
- - -
Figure 3-111 ANSI 27T Protection parameters [P] and events [E] of SET 1
described in the following in detail as examples.

User Manual
Protection parameters of parameter SET 1 ANSI 27T
P1475 Time dep. Undervoltage protection

This parameter enables/disables time-dependent undervoltage protection where:
OFF: disables or
below the circuit breaker, and which is open, then, time-dependent
undervoltage protection must be blocked by a suitable event. For this, the
related number of such blocking event has to be assigned to parameter
[P1476].
When time-dependent undervoltage protection ANSI 27T is enabled by parameter

[P1475], then event ANSI27T module active [E1350] is activated.
P1476 Blocking protection

Time-dependent undervoltage protection can be completely blocked by any active event.
soon as blocking is active, event ANSI27T module active [E1351] is activated. If the
blocking event turns inactive, blocking is abandoned and protective function is effective
again. Then, event [E1351] is deactivated automatically.
If blocking of the time-dependent undervoltage protection is not required, set this
parameter to 0.

Depending on the SYMAP-Compact(+) device variant every protection step of time-
dependent undervoltage protection can be assigned to a certain voltage measurement
input (PT1, PT2 or PT3). Parameter [P1477] determines the voltage measurement input
which will provide measurement values as characteristic quantities (voltage) to the time-
dependent undervoltage protection:
P1478 Number of blocked voltage drops

Parameter [P1478] indicates the number of tolerable pick-up events ANSI27T pick-up
[E1354] (recognized voltage drops).
P1483 Activate limit

Pick-up value for voltage drop; if the characteristic quantity (voltage) falls below the
Activate limit [P1483], pick-up event ANSI27T pick-up [E1354] is activated and the
functional timer starts. Simultanously, the timer for counting the voltage drops (Time slot
for voltage drops count) is being started, and the pick-up event counter (voltage drops
counter) is incremented.
NOTE: The pick-up value for voltage drop is to be set as a percentage of the nominal
value of the characteristic quantity (phase-to-phase voltage). The nominal
value of the characteristic quantity is to be set by parameter:

User Manual
P1479 Time slot for voltage drops count

Parameter [P1479] indicates the maximum period in which the pick-up events are
counted. The Time slot for voltage drops count starts with the first pick-up event
ANSI27T pick-up [E1354] for the time set in parameter [P1479].
In case that:
the number of tolerable voltage drops is exceeded (voltage drops count) or
the duration of a tolerable voltage drop exceeds the maximum permissible period of
a voltage drop according to the trip curve (voltage underrun),
then, the trip-event ANSI27T trip [E1355] is being acitvated, so too does either:
event ANSI27T trip by voltage drop count [E1356] or
event ANSI27T trip by voltage underrun [E1357].
Also the Time slot for voltage drops count is being reset. In case that there is no further
voltage drop, the attained value for counted voltage drops will be set to zero after the
expiry of the Time slot for voltage drops count.
P1484 Reactivate limit

Reset limit for voltage drops; if the characteristic quantity (voltage) exceeds this limit,
pick-up reset event ANSI27T reactive limit reached [E1352] is activated and the
counter for pick-up reset delay time (Reactive delay time) will start.
NOTE: The reset limit for voltage drops is to be set as a percentage of the nominal
value of the characteristic quantity (phase-to-phase voltage). The nominal
P1485 Reactivate delay time

Pick-up reset delay time; if characteristic quantity (voltage) exceeds the value set in
parameter Reactivate limit [P1484], the pick-up reset delay time will start. After the set
time [P1485] has expired, the functional timer is stopped, and the pick-up event
ANSI27T pick-up [E1354] is deactivated. So too, does a possible active trip-event
ANSI27T trip [E1355].
In dependence of the trip cause:
exceeding the tolerable number of voltage drops (voltage drops count) or
exceeding the permissible duration of a tolerable voltage drop (voltage underrun),
the event:
ANSI27T trip by voltage drop count [E1356] or
ANSI27T trip by voltage underrun [E1357]
is deactivated.
P1487 1. curve limit

First limit value of trip curve at the moment of pick-up (t=0)

User Manual
P1488 1. curve time

Moment of second limit value of the trip curve

Second limit value of the trip curve
P1490 2. curve time

Moment of second limit value of the trip curve

Third limit value of the trip curve
P1492 3. curve time

Moment of third limit value of the trip curve

Fourth limit value of the trip curve
P1494 4. curve time

Moment of fourth limit value of the trip curve

Fifth limit value of the trip curve
P1496 5. curve time

Moment of fifth limit value of the trip curve

Sixth limit value of the trip curve
P1498 6. curve time

Moment of sixth limit value of the trip curve

Seventh limit value of the trip curve
P1500 7. curve time

Moment of seventh limit value of the trip curve

Eights limit value of the trip curve
P1502 8. curve time

Moment of eighth limit value of the trip curve

Ninth limit value of the trip curve
P1504 9. curve time

Moment of ninth limit value of the trip curve

Tenth limit value of the trip curve
P1506 10. curve time

Moment of tenth limit value of the trip curve

User Manual
Ueff/Un
Voltage drop Voltage curve
[P1497] 100%
[P1495]
[P1483] activate limit
Programmable
tripping curve
[P1491], [P1493]
[P1487], [P1489]
t
t1 = 0s t2, t3 t4 t5 t6
[P1488] [P1494] [P1496] [P1498]
[P1490], [P1492]
Figure 3-112 ANSI 27T Programmable tripping curve

User Manual
Ueff/Un
Anrege-Event / Voltage drop
100%
[P1484] reactivate limit
[E1354] t
ANSI 27T pick-up
1
0
t
(internal function timer)
[E1352] t
ANSI 27T reactive limit reached
1
0
t
[P1485]
reactivate delay time
0
t
[P1478]
number of blocked 3
voltage drops = 2"
1
[P1479]
t
time slot for voltage drops
count
0
[E1355] t
ANSI 27T trip
1
0
[E1357] t
ANSI 27T trip by curve underrun
1
0
t
Figure 3-113 Time-dependent protection trip

User Manual
Ueff/Un Anrege-Events / Voltage drops
100%
[P1484] reactivate limit
t
[E1354]
ANSI 27T pick-up
1
0
t
(internal function timer)
t
[E1352]
ANSI 27T reactive limit reached
1
0
t
[P1485]
reactivate delay time
0
t
[P1478]
number of blocked 3
voltage drops = 2"
1
t
[P1479]
time slot for voltage drops
count
0
[E1355] t
ANSI27T trip
1
0
[E1356] t
ANSI 27T trip by voltage drops count
1
0
t
Figure 3-114 Time-independent protection trip

User Manual
3.4.9 ANSI 32 Directional Power Protection
ANSI 32 Power protection

SET PARAMETERS
P2240 Power protection ON - ON/OFF
STEP 1
P2245 Pickup source Power_CT1 - none/Power_CT1/Power_CT2
P2247 Mode Qr> - S</S>/P</P>/Q</Q>/Pr</Pr>/Qr</Qr>
P2248 Limit 30 % 0 65535,0
P2249 Delay time 0,5 s/- 0 999999,999
P2250 Reset limit 27 % 0 65535,0
P2251 Reset delay time trip 1 s/- 0 999999,999
P2252 Reset delay time pickup 1 s 0 999999,999
E1810 ANSI32-1 trip - - -
STEP 2
P2255 Pickup source Power_CT1 - none/Power_CT1/Power_CT2

parameters of STEP 1 represented below are described in the following in detail as
examples.
SET PARAMETERS
The following SET PARAMETERS of the directional power protection exist only once in each of
the four parameter sets. Thus, the SET PARAMETERS apply to all of the 6 protection STEPS of
one parameter SET.
P2240 Power protection

This parameter enables/disables directional power protection where:
OFF: disables or
When overcurrent protection ANSI 32 is enabled by parameter [P2240], then event

User Manual

Directional power protection can be completely blocked by any active event. For
soon as blocking is active, event ANSI32 blocked module [E1806] is activated. If the
If blocking of the directional power protection is not required, set this parameter to 0.

The following STEP parameters of the directional power protection exist only once in each of
the 6 independent protection STEPS. Thus, the STEP PARAMETERS apply only to one of the 6

directional power protection can be assigned to a certain current measurement input
(CT1 or CT2). Parameter [P2245] determines the current measurement input which will
provide measurement values as characteristic quantities to the directional power
protection:
none: no current measurement; protection step is deactivated
Power_CT1: measurement values by CT1, and the assigned voltage transformer
Power_CT2: measurement values by CT2, and the assigned voltage transformer
To measure power direction correctly, the needed energy flow direction is to
be defined by following parameters:
For settings Power_CT1 or Power_CT2, event ANSI32-1 step acitve [E1807] is

activated.

The first step of directional power protection can be blocked by any active event. For
If blocking of the first step of directional power protection is not required, set this
parameter to 0.
P2247 Mode
Selction of operating mode according to the protective criterion (characteristic quantity)
of the directional power protection; the first step of of directional power protection is
optionally adjustable. The set value of parameter Limit [P2248] refers to the

User Manual
characteristic quantity of the set protective criterion of parameter Mode [P2247].

Following setting options of the characteristic quantity are available:
P<: protective function detects an alarm in case of active power limit under-run
P>: protective function detects an alarm in case of active power limit over-run
Q<: protective function detects an alarm in case of reactive power limit
under-run
Q>: protective function detects an alarm in case of reactive power limit over-run
S<: protective function detects an alarm in case of apparent power limit
under-run
S>: protective function detects an alarm in case of apparent power limit
over-run
Pr<: protective function detects an alarm in case of active power limit under-run
Pr>: protective function detects an alarm in case of reverse active power limit
over-run
Qr<: protective function detects an alarm in case of reactive power limit
under-run
Qr>: protective function detects an alarm in case of reverse reactive power limit
over-run
NOTE: Definition of reverse active power: Pr = P

Definition of reverse reactive power: Qr = Q
The following graphics represents all the different setting options for the applied
characteristic quantity as protective criterion.

User Manual
[P2247] Mode = P> [P2247] Mode = P<
Q Q
Trip zone
Trip zone
P P
[P2248] Limit
[P2248] Limit
[P2247] Mode = Pr> [P2247] Mode = Pr<
Q Q
Trip zone Trip zone
P P
[P2248] Limit [P2248] Limit
[P2247] Mode = Q> [P2247] Mode = Q<

Q Q
Trip zone
[P2248] Limit
[P2248] Limit
P P
Trip zone
[P2247] Mode = Qr> [P2247] Mode = Qr<

Q Q
[P2248] Limit Trip zone

P P
[P2248] Limit
Trip zone
[P2247] Mode = S> [P2247] Mode = S<

Q Q
Trip zone
P P
[P2248] Limit
[P2248] Limit
Trip zone
Figure 3-116 Directional power protection Selection of protective criterion
P2248 Limit
Pick-up value of the first directional power protection element (STEP1); at the moment
that the characteristic quantity depending on the set value of parameter Mode

User Manual
[P2247] exceeds (or falls below) this limit, ANSI32-1 pick-up [E1809] will become
active, and Delay time of the first directional power protection element will start.
In case that the characteristic quantity falls below (or exceeds) the Limit of the first
directional power protection element before Delay time has run down, the timer of
Delay time will be stopped and the attained time value is being safed.
measurement quantity Power (according to users input either as active
power, reactive power or apparent power). The nominal value of this
measurement quantity is to be set by parameter:
Here, it is that winding side relating to the directional power monitoring, which
is assigned to the applied current measurement input by parameter

P2249 Delay time

As soon as the pick-up event ANSI32-1 pickup [E1809] is active and Delay time run
control purposes.
In case that the characteristic quantity depending on the set value of parameter
Mode [P2247] exceeds (or falls below) the pick-up value (Limit) of the first
directional power protection step before the trip delay time (Delay time) has run down,
the timer of Delay time will be stopped and the counter value is being saved. If the
characteristic quantity subsequently exceeds (or falls below) the Reset limit, then, the
Reset delay time pick-up timer will start and the pick-up event [E1809] will be
deactivated.

time).
counter of the trip delay time (Delay time) is being reset.
P2250 Reset limit

Reset limit of the first step of directional power protection. As soon as the trip event
ANSI32-1 trip [E1810] is active and the characteristic quantity depending on the set
value of parameter Mode [P2247] exceeds (or falls below) the Reset limit, the timer
of the trip reset delay time (Reset delay time trip) will start.
NOTE: The reset limit is to be set as a percentage of the nominal value of the

User Manual

Here, it is that winding side relating to the directional power monitoring, which

submenu: SYSTEM\Nominals\ Current transformer.

[E1810].
trip [E1809] is deactivated. In case that the characteristic quantity depending on the
set value of parameter Mode [P2247] falls below (or exceeds) the pick-up value
(Limit) of the first directional power protection element before the timer of Reset delay
time trip has run down, the timer of Reset delay time trip will be reset. Then trip event
ANSI32-1 trip [E1810] remains active.

User Manual
Peff/Pn
[P2247] Mode = P>
[P2248] Limit
[P2250] reset limit
100%
t
[E1809]
ANSI32-1 pick-up
1
0
t
[P2249]
Delay time
[P2252]
Reset delay time pick-up
t
[E1810]
ANSI32-1 trip
0
t
[P2251]
Reset delay time trip
Figure 3-117 Directional power protection Tripping and reset characteristic: over-run of P>

User Manual
Peff/Pn
[P2247] Mode = P<
100%
[P2248] Reset limit
[P2250] Limit
t
[E1809]
ANSI32-1 pick-up
0
t
[P2249]
Delay time
t
[P2252]
t
[E1810]
ANSI32-1 trip
0
t
[P2251]
Figure 3-118 Directional power protection Tripping and reset characteristic: under-run of P<

User Manual
3.4.10 ANSI 32N/G Zero Power Protection
ANSI 32N/G Zero power protection

SET PARAMETERS
P2970 Zero power protection ON - ON/OFF
E2280 ANSI32N/G module active - - -
E2281 ANSI32N/G blocked module - - -
STEP 1
none/GND_Power_CT1/
P2975 Pickup source GND_Power_CT1 -
GND_Power_CT2/GND_Power_CT-GND1
S0</S0>/P0</P0>/Q0</Q0>/P0r</P0r>/
P2977 Mode Q0r> -
Q0r</Q0r>
P2978 Limit 30 % 0 65535,0
P2979 Delay time 0,5 s/- 0 999999,999
P2980 Reset limit 27 % 0 65535,0
P2981 Reset delay time trip 1 s/- 0 999999,999
E2282 ANSI32N/G-1 step active - - -
E2283 ANSI32N/G-1 blocked step - - -
E2284 ANSI32N/G-1 pickup - - -
E2285 ANSI32N/G-1 trip - - -
STEP 2
P2985 Pickup source none/GND_Power_CT1/
GND_Power_CT1 -
GND_Power_CT2/GND_Power_CT-GND1

Figure 3-119 ANSI 32N/G Protection parameters [P] and events [E] of SET 1
examples.
Protection parameters of parameter SET 1 ANSI 32N/G
SET PARAMETERS
The following SET PARAMETERS of the zero power protection exist only once in each of the
one parameter SET.
P2970 Zero power protection

This parameter enables/disables zero power protection where in:
OFF: disables or

User Manual

When zero power protection ANSI 32N/G is enabled by parameter [P2970], then event
ANSI32N/G module active [E2280] is activated.

Zero power protection can be completely blocked by any active event. For blocking, the
active, event ANSI32N/G blocked module [E2281] is activated. If the blocking event
turns inactive, blocking is abandoned and protective function is effective again. Then,
event [E2281] is deactivated automatically.
If blocking of the zero power protection is not required, set this parameter to 0.

The following STEP parameters of the zero power protection exist only once in each of the 6
independent protection STEPS. Thus, the STEP parameters apply only to one of the 6

Depending on the SYMAP-Compact(+) device variant each protection step of zero
power protection can be assigned to a certain current measurement input (CT1, CT2 or
CT-GND1). Hence, parameter [P2975] determines the zero current measurement input
and its assigned residual voltage measurement input which will provide measurement
values as characteristic quantities (zero current and phase angle between zero current
and residual voltage as reference voltage) for the zero power protection:
GND Power_CT1: zero power measurement by CT1 and
determination of zero power direction by additionally
measured residual voltage U0 via the assigned voltage
measurement input set by parameter PT reference
[P9419].
GND Power_CT2: zero power measurement by CT2 and
[P9422].
GND Power CT-GND1: zero power measurement by CT-GND1 and
[P9428].
NOTE: The assignment of the voltage measurement input (PT1, PT2, PT3 or PT-
GND1) to the zero current measurement input CT1, CT2 or CT-GND1 is to be
done by the following parameters (referring to the setting options of parameter
[P2460]), in the submenu SYSTEM\Measuring\Power:
PT reference [P9419], for GND Power_CT1
PT reference [P9422], for GND Power_CT2 and
PT reference [P9428], for GND Power_CT-GND1
To measure zero power direction correctly, the required energy flow direction
is to be defined by following parameters:
Direction [P9420], for GND Power_CT1 and

User Manual
Direction [P9423], for GND Power_CT2

Direction [P9429], for GND Power_CT-GND1.
For settings GND Power_CT1, GND Power_CT2,or GND Power_CT-GND1 event

ANSI32N/G-1 step active [E2282] is activated.
NOTE: In case that residual voltage is to be calculated by voltage measuring via PT1,
PT2 or PT3 it is required to connect terminal N of SYMAP-Compact(+)
device (SYMAP-Compact: -X1.2:18; SYMAP-Compact+: -X1.2:26) to ground
potential!
For test purposes via voltage generator test equipment it is required to
connect terminal N of SYMAP-Compact(+) device to the neutral potential
of the voltage test equipment!

The first step of zero power protection can be blocked by any active event. For blocking,
blocking is active, event ANSI32N/G-1 blocked step [E2283] is activated. If the blocking
event turns inactive, blocking is abandoned and protective function is effective again.
Then, event [E2283] is deactivated automatically.
If blocking of the first step of zero power protection is not required, set this parameter to
0.
P2977 Mode
Selection of operating mode according to the protective criterion (characteristic quantity)
of the zero power protection; the first step of zero power protection is optionally
adjustable. The set value of parameter Limit [P2978] refers to the characteristic
quantity of the set protective criterion of parameter Mode [P2977]. Following setting
options of the characteristic quantity are available:
P0<: protective function detects an alarm in case of zero active power limit
under-run
P0>: protective function detects an alarm in case of zero active power limit over-
run
Q0<: protective function detects an alarm in case of zero reactive power limit
under-run
Q0>: protective function detects an alarm in case of zero reactive power limit
over-run
S0<: protective function detects an alarm in case of zero apparent power limit
under-run
S0>: protective function detects an alarm in case of zero apparent power limit
over-run
P0r<: protective function detects an alarm in case of zero active power limit
under-run
P0r>: protective function detects an alarm in case of zero reverse active power
limit over-run
Q0r<: protective function detects an alarm in case of zero reactive power limit
under-run
Q0r>: protective function detects an alarm in case of zero reverse reactive power
limit over-run

User Manual
NOTE: Definition of zero reverse active power: P0r = P0

Definition of zero reverse reactive power: Q0r = Q0

User Manual
The following graphics represents all the different setting options for the applied
characteristic quantity as protective criterion.
[P2977] Mode = P0> [P2977] Mode = P0<
Q0 Q0
Trip zone
Trip zone
P0 P0
[P2978] Limit
[P2978] Limit
[P2977] Mode = P0r> [P2977] Mode = P0r<
Q0 Q0
Trip zone Trip zone
P0 P0
[P2978] Limit [P2978] Limit
[P2977] Mode = Q0> [P2977] Mode = Q0<

Q0 Q0
Trip zone
[P2978] Limit
[P2978] Limit
P0 P0
Trip zone
[P2977] Mode = Q0r> [P2977] Mode = Q0r<

Q0 Q0
[P2978] Limit Trip zone

P0 P0
[P2978] Limit
Trip zone
[P2977] Mode = S0> [P2977] Mode = S0<

Q0 Q0
Trip zone
P0 P0
[P2978] Limit
[P2978] Limit
Trip zone
Figure 3-120 Zero power protection Selection of protective criterion

User Manual
P2978 Limit
Pick-up value of the first zero power protection element (STEP1); at the moment that the
characteristic quantity depending on the set value of parameter Mode [P2977]
exceeds (or falls below) this limit, ANSI32N/G-1 pick-up [E2284] will become active,
and Delay time of the first zero power protection element will start.
In case that the characteristic quantity falls below (or exceeds) the Limit of the first zero
power protection element before Delay time has run down, the timer of Delay time will
be stopped and the attained time value is being saved.
Here, it is that winding side relating to the zero power monitoring, which is
assigned to the applied current measurement input by parameter
Assignment [P684], for current measurement input CT-GND1.
The parameters Assignment [P668], Assignment [P674] and Assignment

[P684] are located in submenu:SYSTEM\Nominals\Current transformer.
P2979 Delay time

Trip delay time; it is the delay time of the trip event ANSI32N/G-1 trip[E2285].
As soon as the pick-up event ANSI32N/G-1 pickup [E2284] is active and Delay time
run down, trip event [E2285] will be activated. This event can be used for alarm or output
control purposes.
In case that the characteristic quantity depending on the set value of parameter
Mode [P2977] exceeds (or falls below) the pick-up value (Limit) of the first zero
power protection step before the trip delay time (Delay time) has run down, the timer of
Delay time will be stopped and the counter value is being saved. If the characteristic
quantity subsequently exceeds (or falls below) the Reset limit, then, the Reset delay
time pick-up timer will start and the pick-up event [E2284] will be deactivated.
P2980 Reset limit

Reset limit of the first step of zero power protection. As soon as the trip event
ANSI32N/G-1 trip [E2285] is active and the characteristic quantity depending on the
set value of parameter Mode [P2977] exceeds (or falls below) the Reset limit, the
timer of the trip reset delay time (Reset delay time trip) will start.

User Manual
Here, it is that winding side relating to the zero power monitoring, which is
Assignment [P684], for current measurement input CT-GND1.
The parameters Assignment [P668], Assignment [P674] and Assignment

[P684] are located in submenu: SYSTEM\Nominals\ Current transformer.

Trip reset delay time; it is the delay time for resetting the trip event ANSI32N/G-1 trip
[E2285]. If the trip reset delay time (Reset delay time trip) has run down, trip event
ANSI32N/G-1 trip [E2285] is deactivated. In case that the characteristic quantity
depending on the set value of parameter Mode [P2977] falls below (or exceeds) the
pick-up value (Limit) of the first zero power protection element before the timer of
Then trip event ANSI32N/G-1 trip[E2285] remains active.

time). As soon as the pick-up reset delay time (Reset delay time pick-up) has run
down the counter of the trip delay time (Delay time) is being reset.

User Manual
P0 eff/Pn
[P2977] Mode = P0>
[P2978] Limit
[P2980] reset limit
10%
t
[E2284]
ANSI32N/G-1 pick-
up
1
0
t
[P2979]
Delay time
[P2982]
t
[E2285]
ANSI32N/G-1
trip
1
0
t
[P2981]
Figure 3-121 Zero power protection Tripping and reset characteristic: over-run of P0>

User Manual
P0 eff/Pn
[P2977] Mode = P0<
30%
[P2980] Reset limit
[P2978] Limit
t
[E2284]
ANSI32N/G-1 pick-
up
1
0
t
[P2979]
Delay time
t
[P2982]
[E2285] t
ANSI32N/G-1
trip
1
0
t
[P2981]
Figure 3-122 Zero power protection Tripping and reset characteristic: under-run of P0<

User Manual
3.4.11 ANSI 37 Undercurrent Protection
ANSI 37 Undercurrent

SET PARAMETERS
P3559 Undercurrent protection ON - ON/OFF
STEP 1
P3561 Pickup source CT1 - none/CT1/CT2
P3563 Limit 300 % 0 1999,9
P3564 Delay time 1,0 s 0 999999,999
P3565 Reset limit 350 % 0 1999,9
E2462 ANSI37-1 trip - - -
STEP 2

Figure 3-123 ANSI 37 Protection parameters [P] and events [E]
examples.
Standard protection parameters of parameter SET 1 ANSI 37
SET PARAMETERS
The following SET PARAMETERS of the undercurrent protection exist only once in each of the
one parameter SET.
P3559 Undercurrent protection

This parameter enables/disables undercurrent protection where:
OFF: disables or
When undercurrent protection ANSI 37 is enabled by parameter [P3559], then event

User Manual

Undercurrent protection can be completely blocked by any active event. For blocking,
blocking is active, event ANSI37 blocked module [E2458] is activated. If the blocking
If blocking of the undercurrent protection is not required, set this parameter to 0.
Standard protection parameters of STEP 1

The following STEP parameters of the undercurrent protection exist only once in each of the 3

undercurrent protection can be assigned to a certain current measurement input (CT1 or
CT2). Parameter [P3561] determines the current measurement input which will provide
measurement values as characteristic quantities (phase current) to the overcurrent
protection:
none:no current measurement; protection step is deactivated
For settings CT1 or CT2, event ANSI37-1 step acitve [E2459] is activated.

The first step of undercurrent protection can be blocked by any active event. For
If blocking of the first step of undercurrent protection is not required, set this parameter
to 0.
P3563 Limit
Pick-up value of the first undercurrent protection element (STEP1); at the moment that
the characteristic quantity (phase current) falls below this limit in one of the three
phases, ANSI37-1 pick-up [E2461] will become active, and Delay time of the first
undercurrent protection element will start.
In case that the characteristic quantity (phase current) exceeds Limit of the first
undercurrent protection element in all three phases before Delay time has run down,
the timer of Delay time will be stopped and the attained time value is being safed.

User Manual
P3564 Delay time

Trip delay time; it is the delay time (definite time DT) of the trip event ANSI37-1 trip
[E2462].
As soon as the pick-up event ANSI37-1 pickup [E2461] is active and Delay time runs
control purposes.
When the characteristic quantity (phase current) exceeds the pick-up value (Limit) of
the first undervoltage protection step in all three phases before the trip delay time
(Delay time) has run down, the timer of Delay time will be stopped and the counter
value is saved. If the characteristic quantity subsequently exceeds the Reset limit in all
three phases, then, the Reset delay time pick-up timer will start and the pick-up event
[E2461] will be deactivated.

time).
P3565 Reset limit

Pick-up reset limit of the first undercurrent protection element (STEP1); if the
pick-up event ANSI37-1 pickup [E2461] is active and
the characteristic quantity (phase current) exceeds the pick-up value Limit in all
three phases, and
the characteristic quantity (phase current) exceeds the pick-up reset value Reset
limit in all three phases,
then, pick-up event [E2461] is deactivated and the timer of the Reset delay time pick-
up will start.
NOTE: The Reset Limit is to be set as a percentage of the nominal value of the

[E2462].
If the trip reset delay time (Reset delay time trip) has run down, trip event ANS327-1
trip [E2462] is deactivated. In case that the characteristic quantity (voltage) falls below
the pick-up value (limit) of the first undercurrent protection element before the timer of

User Manual
Ieff/In
100%
[P3564] Reset limit
[P3563] Limit
t
[E2461]
ANSI37-1 pickup
0
t
[P3564]
Delay time
t
[P3567]
Reset delay time pickup
t
[E2462]
ANSI 37-1 trip
0
t
[P3566]
Figure 3-124 Undercurrent protection Trip characteristic (DT) and Reset characteristic (DT)

User Manual
3.4.12 ANSI 46 Negative Phase Sequence Current Protection (NPS)
Main Menu\ Parameters\PROTECTION\ANSI46 Negative phase sequence current\
STD

SET PARAMETERS
P2885 NPS current OFF - ON/OFF
P2887 DP1 activation 0 event 0 9999
STEP 1
P2890 Pickup source none - none/CT1/CT2
P2892 Reference I2/In - I2/In / I2/I1
Definite/ANSI NINV/ANSI VINV/ANSI EINV/
P2893 Pickup curve Definite - IEC NINV/IEC VINV/IEC LINV/IEC EINV/
Therm Flat/IT/I2T/I4T
P2894 Limit 20 % 0 65535,5
P2895 Delay time/TMS 10 s/- 0 999999,999
P2896 Min. delay time 0 s/- 0 999999,999
P2897 Reset curve Definite -
IEC NINV/IEC VINV/IEC LINV/IEC EINV
P2898 Reset after TRIP immediately OFF - ON/OFF
P2899 Reset limit 10 % 0 65535,5
P2900 Reset delay time trip/TMS 1 s/- 0 999999,999
P2902 Harmonics stabilizer OFF - OFF / 2H / 5H / 2H/5H
P2903 Voltage restrained OFF - ON/OFF
E2251 ANSI46-1 trip - - -
STEP 2
P2910 Pickup source none - none/CT1/CT2

Figure 3-125 ANSI 46 Standard (STD) protection parameters [P] and events [E] of SET 1

User Manual
DP1

STEP 1
P3275 Limit 20 % 0 65535,5
P3276 Delay time/TMS 10 s/- 0 999999,999
P3277 Min. delay time 0 s/- 0 999999,999
P3278 Reset limit 10 % 0 65535,5
STEP 2
P3281 Limit 20 % 0 65535,5

Figure 3-126 ANSI 46 Dynamic parameters (DP1) of protection parameters [P] of SET 1
DP2

STEP 1
P3299 Limit 20 % 0 65535,5
P3300 Delay time/TMS 10 s/- 0 999999,999
P3301 Min. delay time 0 s/- 0 999999,999
P3302 Reset limit 10 % 0 65535,5
STEP 2
P3305 Limit 20 % 0 65535,5

Figure 3-127 ANSI 46 Dynamic parameters (DP2) protection parameters [P] of SET 1
examples.

User Manual
STD Standard protection parameters of parameter SET 1 ANSI 46
STD SET PARAMETERS

The following SET PARAMETERS of the NPS current protection exist only once in each of the
one parameter SET.
P2885 NPS current

This parameter enables/disables negative phase sequence protection where:
OFF: disables or
When NPS current protection ANSI 46 is enabled by parameter [P2885], then event

NPS current protection can be completely blocked by any active event. For blocking, the
If blocking of the NPS current protection is not required, set this parameter to 0.
P2887 DP1 activation

Dynamic parameters 1 of function ANSI46 can be activated by any active event. For
activation, the number related to this event has to be assigned to parameter [P2887].
Activation is only effective, however, as long as the assigned event is active. If the
assigned event turns inactive, DP1 is deactivated.
If activation of DP1 is not required, set this parameter to 0.

Dynamic parameters 2 of function ANSI46 can be activated by any active event. For
NOTE: Appropriate settings of the corresponding parameters of DP1/DP2 are to be
done in the submenu: PROTECTION\Negative phase sequence current ANSI
46\DPx.
With dynamic parameters DP1 and/or DP2 it is possible to activate a set of
parameters in submenu DP1 and/or DP2.
STD Standard protection parameters of STEP 1

The following STEP parameters of the negative phase sequence current protection exist only
once in each of the 4 independent protection STEPS. Thus, the STEP parameters apply only to
one of the 4 protection STEPS of one parameter SET

Depending on the SYMAP-Compact(+) device variant every protection step of NPS
current protection can be assigned to a certain current measurement input (CT1 or CT2).
measurement values as characteristic quantities (inverse component of current) to the
NPS current protection:

User Manual

For settings CT1 or CT2, event ANSI46-1 step active [E2248] is activated.

The first step of NPS current protection can be blocked by any active event. For
If blocking of the first step of NPS current protection is not required, set this parameter to
0.
P2892 Reference
The reference parameter sets the characteristic quantity for the NPS current protection
module; calculation the settings of parameters Limit and Reset limit of the NPS
current protection ANSI 46 can be assigned by the following setting options either:
I2/In: where I2 is negative phase sequence current component (NPS) of actual
measure current value and In is nominal current or
I2/I1: where I2 is negative phase sequence current component (NPS) of actual
measure current value and I1 is positive phase sequence current component
of actual measured current value
P2893 Pick-up curve

Tripping characteristic of the delay time; via parameter [P2893]; the tripping
characteristic of the first step of NPS current protection is optionally adjustable as:
Definite Time-delay NPS current protection (DT) or
Inverse Definite Minimum Time-delay protection (IDMT), or
Thermal pickup curve representing the thermal characteristic of motors: Therm
Flat and IxT.
There are up to 7 different inverse time characteristics (IDMT) available, which accords
to the US standard of the American National Standard Institute ANSI or the
international standard of International Electrotechnical Commission IEC:
Definite: definite time (DT)
ANSI NINV: Normal Inverse (ANSI);
ANSI VINV: Very Inverse (ANSI);
ANSI EINV: Extremely Inverse (ANSI);
IEC NINV: Normal Inverse (IEC);
IEC VINV: Very Inverse (IEC);
IEC LINV: Long-term Inverse (IEC);
IEC EINV: Extremely Inverse (IEC)

User Manual
Table 3-9 Parameters of inverse curves (IDMT)

Curve
Operate (trip) time Reset time
type

tr
k t r (G ) TMS
t (G ) TMS c
Designating
1 G

G
1
G
S

S
G
k c tr
[s] [s] - [s] -
A 0,14 0 0,02 0,14 2 Normal Inverse
B 13,5 0 1 13,5 2 Very inverse
- 120 0 1 120 2 Long-term inverse
C 80 0 2 80 2 Extremely invers
D 0,0515 0,1140 0,02 4,85 2 IEEE normal inverse
E 19,61 0,491 2 21,6 2 IEEE very invers
F 28,2 0,1217 2 29,1 2 IEEE extremely inverse
whereby:
t(G): theoretical operate time with constant value of G (seconds)
tr(G): time setting (reset time for G=0 and TMS = 1)
k, c, : constant values which define the chosen curve shape
TMS: Time Multiplier Setting
G: measured value of the characteristic quantity
GS: setting value (start) of the characteristic quantity

User Manual
Figure 3-128 Inverse IEC curves examples

User Manual
For motor protection applications there are the following four thermal curves available
which represents different kinds of thermal characteritics:
Therm Flat
IT
I2T
I4T
Table 3-10 Parameters of thermal curves

5* k 5 * 3
t (G ) TMS t r (G ) TMS
Designating
G G

Gn Gn
1 2 0 2 0 Therm Flat
3 1 1 2 0 IT
3 2 2 2 0 I2 T
3 4 4 2 0 I4 T
whereby:
t(G): theoretical operate time with constant value of G (seconds)
k, , : constant values which define the chosen curve shape
Gn: nominal value (start) of the characteristic quantity
P2894 Limit
Pick-up value of the first NPS current protection element (STEP1); at the moment that
the characteristic quantity (inverse component of current) exceeds this limit the ANSI46-
1 pick-up [E2250] will become active, and Delay time/TMS of the first NPS current
protection element will start.
In case that the characteristic quantity (inverse component of current) falls below Limit
of the first NPS current protection element before Delay time/TMS has run down, the
timer of Delay time/TMS will be stopped and the attained time value is being saved.
NOTE: Inverse component of current is calculated via equation:

I2 = 1/3 x [IL1 + a2IL2+aIL3 ]. If the parameter Reference [P2892] is set to I2/In,
the pick-up value is set as percentage of the nominal values of the
characteristic quantity regarding with nominal current. The nominal value of
the characteristic quantity is to be set by parameter:

User Manual
If the parameter Reference [P2892] is set to I2/I1 the pick-up value is to be

set as percentage. The measured value of the characteristic quantity is in
percentage and will be compared directly with the limit.
P2895 Delay time/TMS

Tripping delay time of trip event ANSI46-1 trip [E2251]; the working principle of the
delay time counter depends on the tripping characteristic set by parameter Pickup
curve [P2893]. Hence follows that parameter Delay Time/TMS [P2895] takes on a
different meaning, depending on the chosen tripping characteristic (DT or IDMT).
DT tripping characteristic: Pickup curve [P2893] = Definite,

Here, the tripping delay time is equal to a constant time value set by parameter
Delay time/TMS [P2895].
IDMT tripping characteristic: e.g. Pickup curve [P2893] = ANSI NINV, or e.g.
Pickup curve [P2893] = I2T
For this, the tripping delay time is not constant, but, it will be calculated cyclically,
depending on the adjusted IDMT curve (or thermal curve) and the level of
momentary inverse component of current increase (characteristic quantity).
Therefore, setting of parameter Delay Time /TMS [P2895] means a displacement
with regard to the time axis of the tripping curve (TMS: Time Multiplier Setting)
If pick-up event ANSI46-1 pick-up [E2250] is active and Delay Time/TMS run down,
trip event ANSI46-1 trip [E2251] will be activated. This event can be used for alarm or
output control purposes.
P2896 Min. delay time

NOTE: This parameter only applies for inverse trip characteristics (IDMT curves and
thermal curves)!
Minimum trip delay time for inverse trip curves; in case of high current faults the tripping
delay time could be too less for the application. To avoid this, a minimum trip delay time
can be set by parameter Min. delay time [P2896]
t
[P2896] Min. delay time
I/In
Figure 3-129 IDMT Trip characteristic minimum trip delay time

User Manual
P2897 Reset curve

Reset characteristic of Delay time/TMS; via parameter [P2897] the reset characteristic
of the first step of NPS current protection is optionally adjustable as:
Definite Time-delay NPS current protection (DT), or
Inverse Definite Minimum Time-delay protection (IDMT), or
Thermal reset curve for motor protection applications: Therm Flat and IxT.
There are up to 7 different inverse time characteristics available, which accords to the
US standard of the American National Standard Institute ANSI or the international
standard of International Electrotechnical Commission IEC:
NOTE: If the tripping characteristic of Delay time/TMS is set to Definite (DT), then
parameter Reset curve [P2897] only provides setting option Definite (DT).
If the tripping characteristic of Delay time/TMS is set to xxx INV (IDMT)or
themal curve, then parameter Reset curve [P2897] provides both, setting
option Definite (DT) or setting option xxx INV (IDMT) or themal curve.
For motor protection applications there are the following four thermal reset curves
available which represents different kinds of thermal characteritics:
Therm Flat
IT
I2T
I4T
As a result, processing of the stored counter value of the tripping delay time takes on a
different working principle, depending on the reset characteristic of Delay time/TMS
(DT or IDMT) to be set by parameter Reset curve [P2897]:
DT: the stored counter value is to be processed according to
the settings of Reset delay time pick-up
IDMT or thermal curves: the stored counter value is to be processed according to
the settings of Reset delay time trip/TMS
P2898 Reset after TRIP immediately

Immediate reset of trip event ANSI46-1 trip [E2251]; in case that the reset curve is
assigned an inverse characteristic (IDMT or thermal curves), then the Reset after TRIP
immediately can be activated/deactivated by parameter [P2898] as soon as the
characteristic quantity falls below the Reset Limit.
OFF: Immediate reset of trip event ANSI46-1 trip [E2251] is deactivated
ON: Immediate reset of trip event ANSI46-1 trip [E2251] is activated
NOTE: If the reset curve of the first protection element (STEP1) is assigned a definite
time (DT) characteristic (parameter Reset curve [P2897] = Definite), and

User Manual
the trip event ANSI46-1 trip [E2251] should immediately be reset, then set
parameter Reset Delay time trip/TMS [P2900] = 0.
P2899 Reset limit

Pick-up reset limit of the first NPS current protection element (STEP1); if the
pick-up event ANSI46-1 pickup [E2250] is active and
the characteristic quantity (inverse component of current) falls below the pick-up
value Limit and
the characteristic quantity (inverse component of current) falls below the pick-up
reset value Reset limit,
up will start.
NOTE: Inverse component of current is calculated via equation I2 = 1/3 x [IL1 +

a2IL2+aIL3 ]. If the parameter Reference [P2892] is set to I2/In the pick-up
value is set as percentage of the nominal values of the characteristic quantity
regarding with nominal current. The nominal value of the characteristic
located in submenu: SYSTEM\Nominals\Reference values
If the parameter Reference [P2892] is set to I2/I1 the pick-up value is to be

set as percentage. The measured value of the characteristic quantity is in
percentage and will be compared directly with the reset limit.
P2900 Reset delay time trip/TMS

Delay time to reset the trip event ANSI46-1 trip [E2251]; the operating procedure of the
timer for resetting the trip event depends on the set characteristic of the reset curve.
Hence follows that parameter Reset delay time trip/TMS [P2900] takes on a different
meaning, depending on the reset characteristic of Reset curve (DT or IDMT) set by
parameter Reset curve [P2897]:
DT reset characteristic: Reset curve [P2897] = Definite
The delay time to reset the trip event is equal to a constant time value, to be set by
parameter Reset delay time/TMS [P2900].
IDMT reset characteristic: e.g. Reset curve [P2897] = ANSI NINV, or e.g. Reset
curve [P2897] = I2T
The delay time to reset the trip event is not a constant time value, but, depending on
the inverse curve shape and the measured value of the characteristic quantity
(inverse component of current) it will be cyclically re-calculated. When applying any
inverse curve (IDMT or thermal curve) to the reset curve, this means the setting of
parameter Reset delay time trip/TMS [P2900] takes on a displacement of the
inverse curve shape with regard to the time axis (TMS: Time Multiplier Setting).
If trip event ANSI46-1 trip [E2251] is activated and Reset delay time trip/TMS has run
down, the trip event ANSI46-1 trip [E2251] will be deactivated.
NOTE: In dependence of the set value of parameter Reset after TRIP immediately
[P2900], deactivating of trip event ANSI46-1 trip [E2251] takes on a different
working principle.

User Manual

Delay time to reset the stored counter value of the tripping delay time; in case that the
tripping delay time (Delay time/TMS) has not yet run down.
CAUTION: Parameter [P2901] is only valid in case of Reset curve [P2897] =

Definite!
While the timer of the Reset delay time pick-up is running, the counter value of the
tripping delay time maintains at a constant level.
After the Reset delay time pick-up has run down, the counter value of the tripping delay
time (Delay time/TMS) will be reset.
P2902 Harmonics stabilizer

Blocking of protection element (STEP1) of NPS current protection by harmonics
stabilizer ANSI 95i function; according to the settings of the harmonics stabilizer ANSI
95i function, the pickup of the NPS current protection may be temporarily blocked upon
exceeding of defined contents of the 2nd and/or 5th harmonic (I100Hz and/or I250Hz) in the
phase current:
OFF: blocking of ANSI 46-1 by ANSI 95i is deactivated
2H: blocking of ANSI 46 -1 by ANSI 95i in case of 2nd harmonic
5H: blocking of ANSI 46 -1 by ANSI 95i in case of 5th harmonic
2H/5H: blocking of ANSI 46 -1 by ANSI 95i in case of 2nd or 5th harmonic
NOTE: Appropriate settings of the corresponding parameters of ANSI95i are to be

done in the submenu: PROTECTION\95i Harmonics stabilizer.
P2903 Voltage restrained

Voltage restraint modification of the pick-up value (Limit) and the reset value (Reset
Limit) of the first protection element (STEP1) NPS current protection by function
Voltage restrained ANSI 51/46VR; according to the settings of the Voltage restrained
ANSI 51/46VR function, the NPS current protection may automatically be sensitised.
OFF: Sensitization of ANSI 46-1 by 51/46VR is deactivated
ON: Sensitization of ANSI 46-1 by 51/46VR is activated
NOTE: Appropriate settings of the corresponding parameters of function Voltage

restrained ANSI 51/46VR are to be done in the submenu:
PROTECTION\51/46VR Voltage restrained.

Minimum limit of the measuring current to activate NPS current protection; the first
protection step of NPS current protection is blocked as long as the measured current in
all three phases remain below this minimum setting.
If measured currents fall below this minimum setting in all three phases, event ANSI46-
1 blocked step [E2249] turns to active.
NOTE: If the parameter Reference[P2892] is set to I2/In the min. start limit is set as
percentage of the nominal values of the characteristic quantity (phase current)
regarding with nominal current. The nominal value of the characteristic

User Manual
submenu: SYSTEM\Nominals\Reference values
Dynamic protection parameters of STEP 1

Dynamic parameters can be used to adapt the protection settings of the protective function
temporarily to the conditions of the electrical system. Changing of network conditions might be
caused by:
Cold load situation,
load changes,
automatic reclosing, etc.
While normal conditions the standard parameters STD are valid. When network conditions
change, dynamic parameters DP1 or DP2 can be activated by the event assigned to parameter
DP1 activation [P2887] or DP1 activation [P2888]. Hence, parameters [P3275] to [P3280] or
[P3275] to [P3280] becomes active and corresponding standard parameters becomes inactive.
As soon as the activating event becomes inactive,standard parameters are being activated and
dynamic parameters becomes inactive.
The duration of change-over between standard parameters and dynamic parameters accords to
the protection cycle time (<2ms) of the protection device.
The following dynamic STEP parameters of the negative phase sequence current protection
exist only once in each of the 4 independent protection STEPS. Thus, the dynamic STEP
parameters apply only to one of the 4 protection STEPS of one parameter SET
Dynamic protection parameters DP1
P3275 Limit


P3278 Reset limit


P3280 Reset delay time pickup

P3299 Limit



User Manual
P3302 Reset limit




User Manual
INPS/I
[P2894] Limit
[P2899] Reset limit
10%
t
[E2250]
ANSI46-1 pick-up
1
0
t
for: [P2893] Pickup curve = Definite
[P2895]
Delay time/TMS
t
[P2901]
t
[E2251]
ANSI 46-1 trip
0
t
for: [P2897] Reset curve = Definite
[P2900]
Reset delay time trip/TMS
Figure 3-130 NPS current protection Trip characteristic (DT) and Reset characteristic (DT)

User Manual
INPS/I
[P2894] Limit
[P2899] Reset limit
10%
t
[E2250]
ANSI46-1 pick-up
1
0
t
for: [P2893] Pickup curve = IEC NINV
(current dependent
delay time Ttrip)
t
[P2901]
t
[E2251]
ANSI 46-1 trip
0
t
[P2900]
Figure 3-131 NPS current protection Trip characteristic (IDMT) and Reset characteristic (DT)

User Manual
INPS/I
[P2894] Limit
[P2899]Reset limit
10%
t
[E2250]
ANSI46-1 pick-up
0
t
for instance: [P2893] Pickup curve = IEC NINV

AND
for instance: [P2897] Reset curve = IEC NINV
AND
for instance: [P2898] Reset after TRIP immediately = OFF
(current dependent
delay time Ttrip)
t
[E2251]
ANSI 46-1 trip
1
0
t

AND
AND
for instance: [P2898] Reset after TRIP immediately = ON
(current dependent
delay time Ttrip)
t
[E2251]
ANSI 46-1 trip
1
0
t
Figure 3-132 NPS current protection Trip characteristic (IDMT) and Reset characteristic (IDMT)

User Manual
3.4.13 ANSI 47 Negative Phase Sequence Voltage Protection
ANSI 47 Negative phase sequence voltage

SET PARAMETERS
P3674 Negative phase sequence voltage OFF - ON/OFF
STEP 1
P3676 Pickup source PT1 - none/PT1/PT2/PT3
P3678 Limit 20 % 1 200
P3679 Delay time 1 s 0 999999,999
P3680 Reset limit 19 % 1 200
E2502 ANSI47-1 trip - - -
STEP 2

examples.
SET PARAMETERS
The following SET PARAMETERS of the negative phase sequence voltage protection exist only
once in each of the four parameter sets. Thus, the SET PARAMETERS apply to all of the 12
P3674 Negative phase sequence voltage

This parameter enables/disables negative phase sequence voltage protection where:
OFF: disables or
When negative phase sequence voltage protection ANSI 47 is enabled by parameter

[P3674], then event ANSI47 module active [E2497] is activated.

User Manual

Negative phase sequence voltage protection can be completely blocked by any active
active. As soon as blocking is active, event ANSI47 blocked module [E2498] is
activated. If the blocking event turns inactive, blocking is abandoned and protective
function is effective again. Then, event [E2498] is deactivated automatically.
If blocking of the negative phase sequence voltage protection is not required, set this
parameter to 0.

The following STEP parameters of the negative phase sequence voltage protection exist only
once in each of the 12 independent protection STEPS. Thus, the STEP PARAMETERS apply
only to one of the 12 protection STEPS of one parameter SET.

Depending on the SYMAP-Compact(+) device variant every protection step of negative
phase sequence voltage protection can be assigned to a certain voltage measurement
input (PT1, PT2 or PT3). Parameter [P3676] determines the voltage measurement input
which will provide measurement values as characteristic quantity (negative phase
sequence voltage U2 of the 3-phase voltage system) to the negative phase sequence
voltage protection:

The first step of negative phase sequence voltage protection can be blocked by any
active event. For blocking, the number related to this blocking event has to be assigned
to parameter [P3677]. Blocking is only effective, however, as long as the blocking event
is active. As soon as blocking is active, event ANSI47-1 blocked step [E2500] is
If blocking of the first step of negative phase sequence voltage protection is not required,
P3678 Limit
Pick-up value of the first negative phase sequence voltage protection element. At the
moment that the characteristic quantity (negative phase sequence voltage U2 of the 3-
phase voltage system) exceeds this limit, pick-up event ANSI47-1 pickup [E2501] will
become active, and the trip delay time (Delay time) of the first overvoltage protection
element will start.
process quantity Phase-to-Ground voltage UL-E (UL-E = UL-L/3). The nominal
value of the phase-to-phase voltage UL-L is to be set by parameter:

User Manual
P3679 Delay time

control purposes.
In case that the characteristic quantity (negative phase sequence voltage U2 of the 3-
phase voltage system) falls below the pick-up value (Limit) of the first negative phase
sequence voltage protection step before the trip delay time (Delay time) has run down,
the timer of Delay time will be stopped and the counter value is saved. If the
characteristic quantity subsequently falls below the Reset limit, then, the Reset delay

time).
P3680 Reset limit

Reset limit of the first step of negative phase sequence voltage protection. As soon as
the trip event ANSI47-1 trip [E2502] is active and the characteristic quantity (negative
phase sequence voltage U2 of the 3-phase voltage system) exceeds the Reset limit,
the timer of the trip reset delay time (Reset delay time trip) will start.
NOTE: The reset limit is to be set as a percentage of the nominal value of the process
quantity Phase-to-Ground voltage UL-E (UL-E = UL-L/3). The nominal value of
the phase-to-phase voltage UL-L is to be set by parameter:

[E2502].
trip [E1157] is deactivated. In case that the characteristic quantity (negative phase
sequence voltage U2 of the 3-phase voltage system) exceeds the pick-up value (Limit)
of the first negative phase sequence voltage protection element before the timer of

User Manual
U2/Un
[P3678] Limit
[P3680] Reset limit
15%
t
[E2501]
ANSI47-1 pick-up
1
0
t
[P3679]
Delay time
[P3682]
t
[E2502]
ANSI 47-1 trip
0
t
[P3681]
Figure 3-134 ANSI 47 Tripping and reset characteristic

User Manual
3.4.14 ANSI 49 Thermal replica
ANSI 49 Thermal replica

SET PARAMETERS
P3395 Thermal replica OFF - OFF/ON
P3397 Reset thermal level 0 event 0 9999
P3398 Thermal level reset value 0 % 0 6553,5
P3399 Store thermal level volatile - volatile/nonvolatile
P3400 Pick-up source CT1 - CT1/CT2
P3401 Basic current 100,0 % 1 6553,5
P3402 Basic current factor k 1,00 1 655,35
P3403 Current heating threshold 0 % 0 6553,5
P3404 Heating time constant 2244 s 0 65535
P3405 Cooling time constant 6732 s 0 65535
STEP 1
P3411 Enable protection step OFF - OFF/ON
P3413 Warning limit 0 % 0 6553,5
P3414 Delay time 0 s 0 6553,5
P3415 Trip limit 0 % 0 6553,5
P3416 Delay time 0 s 0 6553,5
E2353 ANSI49-1 step blocked - - -
E2354 ANSI49-1 warning - - -
E2355 ANSI49-1 trip - - -
STEP 2
P3417 Thermal replica step OFF - OFF/ON

examples.
SET PARAMETERS
The following SET PARAMETERS of the Thermal replica exist only once in each of the four
parameter sets. Thus, the SET PARAMETERS apply to all of the 4 protection STEPS of one
parameter SET.

User Manual
P3395 Thermal replica

This parameter enables/disables thermal replica where:
OFF: disables, or
When function Thermal replica ANSI 49 is enabled by parameter [P3395], then event

Thermal replica can be completely blocked by any active event. For blocking, the
active, event ANSI49 module blocked [E2351] and corresponding events for every step
ANSI49-x step blocked [E23xx] are being activated. If the blocking event turns inactive,
blocking is abandoned and protective function is effective again. Then, event [E2351]
and corresponding events [E23xx] for every step are being deactivated automatically.
If blocking of the thermal replica is not required, set this parameter to 0.
P3397 Reset thermal level

The actual thermal level can be reset by any active event. For reset, the number related
to this reset event has to be assigned to parameter Reset thermal level [P3397].
If reset of the actual thermal level is not required, set this parameter to 0.
P3398 Thermal level reset value

The actual thermal level will be reset to this value.
P3399 Store thermal level

volatile: current state of thermal level will not be stored after system reboot, or
nonvolatile: current state of thermal level will be stored after system reboot.
P3400 Pickup source

Depending on the SYMAP-Compact(+) device variant every protection step of thermal
replica can be assigned to a certain current measurement input (CT1 or CT2).
measurement values as characteristic quantities (phase current) to the thermal replica:
P3401 Basic current

Basic current IB to define the maximum permissible thermal operating current Ithermal,max.
(thermal limit) of the operating device to be protected (motor, transformer, cable/line); the
thermal limit .is obtained by multiplying the basic current IB by the overload factor k (see
parameter Basic current factor k [P3402]):
Ithermal,max. = IB x k
with:
IB: Basic current: percentage of nominal current In of the operating device to be protected
k: Basic current factor: overload factor as multiplier for basic current
NOTE: The basic current is to be set as a percentage of the nominal value of the

User Manual

P3402 Basic current factor k

Overload factor to define the maximum permissible thermal operating current Ithermal,max. of
the operating device to be protected (motor, transformer, cable/line); with basis current
factor k it is possible to set the thermal limit to meet special costumer requirements as
well as to prevent any measurement inaccuracies.
P3403 Current heating threshold

Current threshold to discriminate the heating situation from the cooling situation of an
operating device depending on the power flow;
Heating:
The actual thermal level will be calculated according to the "Heating time constant"
[P3404] if the equivalent current is greater than the set value of parameter [P3404].
Example:
A motor is driving a load.
Cooling:
The actual thermal level will be calculated according to the "Cooling time constant"
[P3405] if the equivalent current is less or equal than set value of parameter
[P3404].
Example:
A motor is operated in idle mode.
NOTE: The current heating threshold is to be set as a percentage of the nominal

value of the characteristic quantity (phase current). The nominal value of the
P3404 Heating time constant

Specific heating time constant of an operating device to be protected; the heating time
constant of an electrical equipment is defined as response time required for the
equipment to reach 63,2% of its thermal stabilization temperature when subjected to a
unit step of current, with basic (or nominal or rated) load.
P3405 Cooling time constant

Specific cooling time constant of an operating device to be protected; the cooling time
constant is the time which the thermal level of electrical equipment needs to reach the
ambient temperature after the equipment is switched off.
The cooling of electrical equipment depends on its mechanical structure and cooling
system used. The efficiency of the ventilation system varies widely in between the states
of equipment operation (fan and ventilation system in operation) and equipment at rest
(fan and ventilation system stopped). In this case the cooling of the equipment occurs
much more slowly with the equipment stopped than the equipment in operation.

User Manual
If there is no datasheet of the operating device available, the cooling time constant
usually should be twice or three times as much as the set value for the heating time
constant.
[P3403]
Current heating treshold
1,2
1,1
1,0
0,9
0,8
0,7
0,6
0,5
0,4
0,3
0,2
0,1
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
t
Normalised time (multiples of heating time constant)
t
Equipement switched on Equipement switched off
Figure 3-136 Equipment temperature due operation at nominal current followed by

switching-off

The following STEP parameters of the thermal replica exist only once in each of the 4
P3411 Enable protection step

This parameter enables/disables Thermal replica protection step where:
OFF: disables or
ON: enables the protection step.
When thermal replica protection step is enabled by parameter [P3411], then event
ANSI49-1 step active [E2352] is activated.

The first step of thermal replica can be blocked by any active event. For blocking, the
active, event ANSI49-1 blocked step [E2353] is activated. If the blocking event turns
If blocking of the first step of thermal replica is not required, set this parameter to 0.

User Manual
P3413 Warning limit

Pick-up value for warning of the first thermal replica element (STEP1); at the moment
that the characteristic quantity exceeds the Warning limit, the Delay time, set by
parameter [P3414], of the first thermal replica element will start.
In case that the characteristic quantity falls below the Warning limit of the first thermal
replica element before Delay time has run down, the timer of Delay time will be
stopped and the attained time value is being saved.
P3414 Delay time

Warning delay time of event ANSI49-1 warning [E2354]. As soon as the characteristic
value exceeds the Warning limit set by parameter [P3413] and Delay time [P3414]
run down, warning event ANSI49-1 warning [E2354] will be activated. This event can
be used for alarm or output control purposes.
P3415 Trip limit

Pick-up value for tripping of the first thermal replica element (STEP1); at the moment
that the characteristic quantity exceeds the Trip limit, the Delay time, set by
parameter [P3415], of the first thermal replica element will start.
In case that the characteristic quantity falls below the Trip limit of the first thermal
replica element before Delay time has run down, the timer of Delay time will be
stopped and the attained time value is being saved.
P3416 Delay time

Tripping delay time of event ANSI49-1 trip [E2355]. As soon as the characteristic value
exceeds Trip limit set by parameter [P3415] and Delay time [P3416] run down, trip
event ANSI49-1 trip [E2355] will be activated. This event can be used for alarm or

User Manual
3.4.15 ANSI 50/51 Overcurrent Protection
Main Menu\Parameters\PROTECTION\ANSI 50/51 Overcurrent
STD

SET PARAMETERS
P1620 Overcurrent protection ON - ON/OFF
E1415 ANSI50/51 module active - - -
E1416 ANSI50/51 blocked module - - -
STEP 1
P1627 Pickup curve Definite - Definite/ANSI NINV/ANSI VINV/ANSI EINV/
P1628 Limit 200 % 5 1999,9
P1629 Delay time/TMS 0,03 s/- 0 999999,999
P1630 Reset curve Definite - Definite/ANSI NINV/ANSI VINV/ANSI EINV/
P1632 Reset limit 195 % 5 1999,9
P1637 Voltage restrained ON - ON/OFF
P1638 Start fault locator No - No/Yes
P1642 Min delay time 0 s/- 0 999999,999
E1422 ANSI50/51-1 step active - - -
E1423 ANSI50/51-1 blocked step - - -
E1424 ANSI50/51-1 pickup - - -
E1425 ANSI50/51-1 trip - - -
STEP 2

Figure 3-137 ANSI 50/51 Standard (STD) protection parameters [P] and events [E] of SET 1

User Manual
DP1

STEP 1
P3035 Limit 200 % 5 65535,5
P3036 Delay time/TMS 0,03 s/- 0 999999,999
P3037 Min. delay time 0 s/- 0 999999,999
P3038 Reset limit 195 % 5 65535,5
STEP 2
P3041 Limit 20 % 0 65535,5

Figure 3-138 ANSI 50/51 Dynamic parameters (DP1) of protection parameters [P] of SET 1
DP2

STEP 1
P3071 Limit 200 % 5 65535,5
P3072 Delay time/TMS 0,03 s/- 0 999999,999
P3073 Min. delay time 0 s/- 0 999999,999
P3074 Reset limit 195 % 5 65535,5
STEP 2
P3077 Limit 20 % 0 65535,5

Figure 3-139 ANSI 50/51 Dynamic parameters (DP2) protection parameters [P] of SET 1
examples.
STD Standard protection parameters of parameter SET 1 ANSI 50/51
STD SET PARAMETERS

The following SET PARAMETERS of the overcurrent protection exist only once in each of the
one parameter SET.

User Manual
P1620 Overcurrent protection

This parameter enables/disables overcurrent protection where:
OFF: disables or
When overcurrent protection ANSI 50/51 is enabled by parameter [P1620], then event
ANSI50/51 module active [E1415] is activated.

Overcurrent protection can be completely blocked by any active event. For blocking, the
active, event ANSI50/51 blocked module [E1416] is activated. If the blocking event
turns inactive, blocking is abandoned and protective function is effective again. Then,
event [E1416] is deactivated automatically.
If blocking of the overcurrent protection is not required, set this parameter to 0.

Dynamic parameters 1 of function ANSI50/51 can be activated by any active event. For

Dynamic parameters 2 of function ANSI50/51 can be activated by any active event. For
done in the submenu: PROTECTION\Overcurrent ANSI 50/51\DPx.

The following STEP parameters of the overcurrent protection exist only once in each of the 6

overcurrent protection can be assigned to a certain current measurement input (CT1 or
CT2). Parameter [P1625] determines the current measurement input which will provide
measurement values as characteristic quantities (phase current) to the overcurrent
protection:
For settings CT1 or CT2, event ANSI50/51-1 step acitve [E1422] is activated.

User Manual
The first step of overcurrent protection can be blocked by any active event. For blocking,
blocking is active, event ANSI50/51-1 blocked step [E1423] is activated. If the blocking
If blocking of the first step of overcurrent protection is not required, set this parameter to
0.
P1627 Pick-up curve

Tripping characteristic of Delay time/TMS; via parameter [P1627]; the tripping
characteristic of the first step of overcurrent protection is optionally adjustable as:
Definite Time-delay overcurrent protection (DT) or
Inverse Definite Minimum Time-delay protection (IDMT)

ANSI NINV: Normal Inverse, (ANSI)
ANSI VINV: Very Inverse (ANSI)
ANSI EINV: Extremely Inverse (ANSI)
IEC NINV: Normal Inverse, (IEC)
IEC VINV: Very Inverse (IEC)
IEC LINV: Long-term Inverse (IEC)

Curve
type

tr
k t r (G ) TMS
t (G ) TMS c
Designating
1 G

G
1
G
S

GS
k c tr
[s] [s] - [s] -

User Manual
whereby:
t(G): theoretical operate timewith constant value of G (seconds)

User Manual
P1628 Limit
Pick-up value of the first overcurrent protection element (STEP1); at the moment that the
characteristic quantity (phase current) exceeds this limit, ANSI50/51-1 pick-up [E1424]
will become active, and Delay time/TMS of the first overcurrent protection element will
start.
In case that the characteristic quantity (phase current) falls below Limit of the first
overcurrent protection element before Delay time/TMS has run down, the timer of
Delay time/TMS will be stopped and the attained time value is being safed.

Tripping delay time of trip event ANSI50/51-1 trip [E1425]; the working principle of the
DT tripping characteristic: Pickup curve [P1627] = Definite

In this case the tripping delay time is equal to a constant time value set by
parameter Delay time/TMS [P1629].
IDMT tripping characteristic: e.g. Pickup curve [P1627] = ANSI NINV
depending on the adjusted IDMT curve and the level of momentary phase current
increase (characteristic quantity). Therefore, setting of parameter Delay Time
/TMS [P1629] means a displacement with regard to the time axis of the tripping
curve (TMS: Time Multiplier Setting)
If pick-up event ANSI50/51-1 pick-up [E1424] is active and Delay Time/TMS run
down, trip event ANSI50/51-1 trip [E1425] will be activated. This event can be used for
alarm or output control purposes.
P1632 Reset limit

Pick-up reset limit of the first overcurrent protection element (STEP1); if the
pick-up event ANSI50/51-1 pickup [E1424] is active and
the characteristic quantity (phase current) falls below the pick-up value Limit and
the characteristic quantity (phase current) falls below the pick-up reset value Reset
limit,
up will start.

User Manual
P1630 Reset curve

of the first step of overcurrent protection is optionally adjustable as:
Definite Time-delay overcurrent protection (DT)or
If the tripping characteristic of Delay time/TMS is set to xxx INV (IDMT),
then parameter Reset curve [P1630] provides both, setting option Definite
(DT) or setting option xxx INV (IDMT).
(DT or IDMT) to be set set by parameter Reset curve [P1630]:
DT: the stored counter value is to be processed according to the settings of
IDMT: the stored counter value is to be processed according to the settings of


Definite!

Delay time to reset the trip event ANSI50/51-1 trip [E1425]; the operating procedure of
the timer for resetting the trip event depends on the set characteristic of the reset curve.

User Manual
IDMT reset characteristic: e.g. Reset curve [P1630] = ANSI NINV
(phase current) it will be cyclically re-calculated. When applying any inverse curve
(IDMT) to the reset curve, this means the setting of parameter Reset delay time
trip/TMS [P1633] takes on a displacement of the inverse curve shape with regard to
the time axis (TMS: Time Multiplier Setting).
If trip event ANSI50/51-1 trip [E1425] is activated and Reset delay time trip/TMS has
run down, the trip event ANSI50/51-1 trip [E1425] will be deactivated.
[P1631], deactivating of trip event ANSI50/51-1 trip [E1425] takes on a
different working principle.

Immediate reset of trip event ANSI50/51-1 trip [E1425]; in case that the reset curve is
assigned an inverse characteristic (IDMT), then the Reset after TRIP immediately can
be activated/deactivated by parameter [P1631] as soon as the charactristic quantity falls
below the Reset Limit.
OFF: Immediate reset of trip event ANSI50/51-1 trip [E1425] is deactivated
ON: Immediate reset of trip event ANSI50/51-1 trip [E1425] is activated
the trip event ANSI50/51-1 trip [E1425] should immediately be reset, then set
parameter Reset Delay time/TMS [P1633] = 0.

Blocking of protection element (STEP1) of overcurrent protection by harmonics
stabilizer ANSI 95i function for measuring values of CT1; according to the settings of
the harmonics stabilizer ANSI 95i function, the pickup of the overcurrent protection may
be temporarily blocked upon exceeding of defined contents of the 2nd and/or 5th
harmonic (I100Hz and/or I250Hz) in the phase current:
OFF: blocking of ANSI 50/51-1 by ANSI 95i is deactivated
2H: blocking of ANSI 50/51-1 by ANSI 95i in case of 2nd harmonic
5H: blocking of ANSI 50/51-1 by ANSI 95i in case of 5th harmonic
2H/5H: blocking of ANSI 50/51-1 by ANSI 95i in case of 2nd or 5th harmonic

P1637 Voltage restrained

Voltage restrained modification of the pick-up value (Limit) and the reset value (Reset
Limit) of the first protection element (STEP1) overcurrent protection by function Voltage
restrained ANSI 51/46VR; according to the settings of the Voltage restrained ANSI
51/46VR function, the overcurrent protection may automatically be sensitised.
OFF: Sensitization of ANSI 50/51-1 by 51/46VR is deaktivated

User Manual
ON: Sensitization of ANSI 50/51-1 by 51/46VR is aktivated
NOTE: Appropriate settings of the corresponding parameters of function Voltage

restrained ANSI 51/46VR are to be done in the submenu:
PROTECTION\51/46VR Voltage restrained.
P1638 Start fault locator

Start of function Fault locator ANSI 21FL in case of a protection trip via the first step of
overcurrent protection; where:
OFF: does not start the fault locator function or
ON: starts the calculation of fault location by function Fault locator ANSI 21FL
in case that:
o function Fault locator ANSI 21FL is enabled (parameter Function
[P3465] = ON) and
o the trip event ANSI50/51-1 trip [E1425] becomes active.

NOTE: This parameter only applies for invers trip characteristics (IDMT curves)!
Minimum trip delaytime for inverse trip curves; in case of high.current faults the tripping
delay time could be too less for the application. To avoid this, a minimum trip
delaytimecan be set by parameter Min. delay time [P1642]
I/In

Dynamic parameters can be used to adapt the protection settings of the overcurrent protection
function temporarily to the conditions of the electrical system. Changing of network conditions
might be caused by:
load changes,

User Manual

As soon as the activating event becomes inactive, standard parameters are being activated and
The following dynamic STEP parameters of the overcurrent protection exist only once in each of
the 6 independent protection STEPS. Thus, the dynamic STEP parameters apply only to one of
the 6 protection STEPS of one parameter SET
P3035 Limit


P3038 Reset limit



P3071 Limit


P3074 Reset limit




User Manual
Ieff/In
[P1628] Limit
[P1632] Reset limit
100%
t
[E1424]
ANSI50/51-1 pick-up
1
0
t
[P1629]
Delay time/TMS
t
[P1634]
t
[E1425]
ANSI 50/51-1 trip
0
t
[P1633]
Figure 3-142 Overcurrent protection Trip characteristic (DT) and Reset characteristic (DT)

User Manual
Ieff/In
[P1628] Limit
[P1632] Reset limit
100%
t
[E1424]
ANSI50/51-1 pick-up
1
0
t
(current dependent
delay time Ttrip)
t
[P1634]
t
[E1425]
ANSI 50/51-1 trip
0
t
[P1633]
Figure 3-143 Overcurrent protection Trip characteristic (IDMT) and Reset characteristic (DT)

User Manual
Ieff/In
Limit: [P1628]
Reset limit: [P1632]
100%
t
[E14240]
ANSI50/51-1 pick-up
0
t

AND
AND
(current dependent
delay time Ttrip)
t
[E1425]
ANSI 50/51-1 trip
1
0
t

AND
AND
(current dependent
delay time Ttrip)
t
[E1425]
ANSI 50/51-1 trip
1
0
t
Figure 3-144 Overcurrent protection Trip characteristic (IDMT) and Reset characteristic (IDMT)

User Manual
3.4.16 ANSI 50BF Breaker Failure Protection
ANSI 50BF Breaker failure

SET PARAMETERS
P2835 Breaker failure protection ON - ON/OFF
E2215 ANSI50BF module active - - -
E2216 ANSI50BF blocked module - - -
STEP 1
P2840 Trigger 0 event 0 9999
P2841 Limit 20 % 5 1999,9
P2842 Delay time 0 s 0 999999,999
P2843 Reset limit 15 % 5 1999,9
E2217 ANSI50BF-1 step active - - -
E2218 ANSI50BF-1 blocked step - - -
E2219 ANSI50BF-1 pickup - - -
E2220 ANSI50BF-1 trip - - -
STEP 2

Figure 3-145 ANSI 50BF Protection parameters [P] and events [E] of SET 1
examples.
Protection parameters of parameter SET 1 ANSI 50BF
SET PARAMETERS
The following SET PARAMETERS of the breaker failure protection exist only once in each of
one parameter SET.
P2835 Breaker failure protection

This parameter enables/disables breaker failure protection where:
OFF: disables or
When breaker failure protection ANSI 50BF is enabled by parameter [P2835], then event
ANSI50BF module active [E2215] is activated.

User Manual

Breaker failure protection can be completely blocked by any active event. For blocking,
blocking is active, event ANSI50BF blocked module [E2216] is activated. If the blocking
If blocking of the breaker failure protection is not required, set this parameter to 0.

The following STEP parameters of the breaker failure protection exist only once in each of the 3
independent protection STEPS. Thus, the SET PARAMETERS apply only to one of the 3

Depending on the SYMAP-Compact(+) device variant every protection step of breaker
failure protection can be assigned to a certain current measurement input (CT1 or CT2).
measurement values as characteristic quantities (phase current) to the breaker failure
protection:
For settings CT1 or CT2, event ANSI50BF-1 step acitve [E2217] is activated.

The first step of breaker failure protection can be blocked by any active event. For
soon as blocking is active, event ANSI50BF-1 blocked step [E2218] is activated. If the
If blocking of the first step of breaker failure protection is not required, set this parameter
to 0.
P2840 Trigger
The first step of breaker failure protection can be activated (triggered) by any active
event. To activate, the number related to this trigger event has to be assigned to
parameter [P2840].
NOTE: Usually, those trIp-events of the current protection functions are used for the
trigger event. The trips events can be combined by a logical function of
function PLC. If so, output event of the logical function can be assigned to
parameter Trigger [P2840].
External tripping signals which are to be processed by binary inputs, for
instance, the events of the binary inputs are to be used as trigger-events.
If activating of the first step of breaker failure protection is not required, set this
parameter to 0.
P2841 Limit
Pick-up value of the first breaker failure protection element (STEP1); at the moment that
the characteristic quantity (phase current) exceeds this limit and the trigger-event

User Manual
assigned to parameter Trigger [2840] is active, then ANSI50BF-1 pick-up [E2219] will
become active, and Delay time of the first breaker failure protection element will start.
In case that the characteristic quantity (phase current) falls below Limit of the first
overcurrent protection element before Delay time/TMS has run down, the timer of
Delay time/TMS will be stopped and the attained time value is being safed.
P2842 Delay time

Trip delay time; it is the delay time of the trip event ANSI50BF-1 trip [E2220].
As soon as the pick-up event ANSI50BF-1 pick-up [E2219] is active and Delay time
control purposes.
In case that the characteristic quantity (phase current) falls below the pick-up value
(Limit) of the first breaker failure protection step before the trip delay time (Delay time)
has run down, the timer of Delay time will be stopped and the counter value is being
saved. If the characteristic quantity subsequently exceeds the Reset limit, then, the
Reset delay time pick-up timer will start and the pick-up event [E2219] will be
deactivated.
P2843 Reset limit

Pick-up reset limit of the first breaker failure protection element (STEP1); if the
pick-up event ANSI50BF-1 pick-up [E2219] is active and
limit,
up will start.


User Manual

Trip reset delay time; it is the delay time for resetting the trip event ANSI50BF-1 trip
[E2220].
If the trip-event trip ANSI50BF-1 trip [E2220] is active and the reset delay time (Reset
delay time trip) has run down, trip event [E2220] is deactivated.
In case that the characteristic quantity (phase current) exceeds the Reset limit before
the timer of Reset delay time trip has run down, the timer of Reset delay time trip will
be reset. Then trip event ANSI50BF-1 trip [E2220] remains active.

User Manual
Ieff/In
100%
[P2841] Limit
[P2843] Reset limit
t
[E1425] For instance:
ANSI 50/51-1 trip Protection trip by 1. step of
ANSI 50/51
1
0
t
[P2840] Trigger
0
t
[E2219]
ANSI50BF-1 pick-up
1
0
t
[P2842] Delay time
t
[P2845]
t
[E2220]
ANSI 50BF-1 trip
0
t
[P2844]
Figure 3-146 ANSI 50BF Trip and reset characteristic

User Manual
3.4.17 ANSI 50G/51G Ground Overcurrent Protection
Main Menu\Parameters\PROTECTION\ANSI 50G/51G Ground overcurrent
STD

SET PARAMETERS
P2030 Ground overcurrent protection ON - ON/OFF
E1680 ANSI50G/51G module active - - -
E1681 ANSI50G/51G blocked module - - -
STEP 1
P2035 Pickup source CT1 - none/CT-GND1/CT1/CT2
P2038 Limit 50 % 5 1999,9
P2039 Delay time/TMS 0,03 s/- 0 999999,999
P2042 Reset limit 45 % 5 1999,9
P2052 Min delay time 0 s/- 0 999999,999
E1687 ANSI50G/51G-1 step active - - -
E1688 ANSI50G/51G-1 blocked step - - -
E1689 ANSI50G/51G-1 pickup - - -
E1690 ANSI50G/51G-1 trip - - -
STEP 2
P2055 Pickup source CT1 - none/CT-GND1/CT1/CT2

Figure 3-147 ANSI 50G/51G Standard (STD) protection parameters [P] and events [E] of SET 1

User Manual
DP1

STEP 1
P3107 Limit 50 % 5 1999,9
P3108 Delay time/TMS 0,03 s/- 0 999999,999
P3109 Min. delay time 0 s/- 0 999999,999
P3110 Reset limit 50 % 5 1999,9
STEP 2
P3113 Limit 20 % 0 65535,5

Figure 3-148 ANSI 50G/51G Dynamic parameters (DP1) of protection parameters [P] of SET 1
DP2

STEP 1
P3143 Limit 50 % 5 1999,9
P3144 Delay time/TMS 0,03 s/- 0 999999,999
P3145 Min. delay time 0 s/- 0 999999,999
P3146 Reset limit 50 % 5 1999,9
STEP 2
P3149 Limit 20 % 0 65535,5

Figure 3-149 ANSI 50G/51G Dynamic parameters (DP2) protection parameters [P] of SET 1
examples.
STD Standard protection parameters of parameter SET 1 ANSI 50G/51G
STD SET PARAMETERS

The following SET PARAMETERS of the ground overcurrent protection exist only once in each
of the four parameter sets. Thus, the SET PARAMETERS apply to all of the 6 protection STEPS
of one parameter SET.

User Manual
P2030 Ground overcurrent protection

This parameter enables/disables ground overcurrent protection where:
OFF: disables or
When ground overcurrent protection ANSI 50G/51G is enabled by parameter [P2030],
then event ANSI50G/51G module active [E1680] is activated.

Ground overcurrent protection can be completely blocked by any active event. For
soon as blocking is active, event ANSI50G/51G blocked module [E1681] is activated. If
the blocking event turns inactive, blocking is abandoned and protective function is
If blocking of the ground overcurrent protection is not required, set this parameter to 0.

Dynamic parameters 1 of function ANSI50G/51G can be activated by any active event.
For activation, the number related to this event has to be assigned to parameter [P2032].

Dynamic parameters 2 of function ANSI50G/51G can be activated by any active event.
done in the submenu: PROTECTION\ ANSI50G/51G Ground overcurrent
\DPx.

The following STEP parameters of the ground overcurrent protection exist only once in each of

Depending on the SYMAP-Compact(+) device variant every protection step of ground
overcurrent protection can be assigned to a certain current measurement input (CT-
GND1, CT1 or CT2). Parameter [P2035] determines the current measurement input
which will provide measurement values as characteristic quantity (ground current) to the
first step of ground overcurrent protection:
none: no ground current measurement; protection step is deactivated
CT-GND1: measured ground current IG by CT-GND1
CT1: calculated ground current: IG = 3 x I0 = I1 + I2 + I3 from the phase
currents, which are to be measured by CT1

User Manual
CT2: calculated ground current: IG = 3 x I0 = I1 + I2 + I3 from the phase

currents, which are to be measured by CT2
For settings CT1 or CT2, event ANSI50G/51G-1 step acitve [E1687] is activated.

The first step of ground overcurrent protection can be blocked by any active event. For
soon as blocking is active, event ANSI50G/51G-1 blocked step [E1688] is activated. If
If blocking of the first step of ground overcurrent protection is not required, set this
parameter to 0.
P2037 Pick-up curve

characteristic of the first step of ground overcurrent protection is optionally adjustable as:
Definite Time-delay ground overcurrent protection (DT) or

User Manual

Curve
type

tr
k t r (G ) TMS
t (G ) TMS c
Designating
1 G

G
1
G
S

GS
k c tr
[s] [s] - [s] -
whereby:

User Manual
P2038 Limit
Pick-up value of the first ground overcurrent protection element (STEP1); at the moment
that the characteristic quantity (ground current) exceeds this limit, ANSI50G/51G-1 pick-
up [E1689] will become active, and Delay time/TMS of the first ground overcurrent

User Manual
In case that the characteristic quantity (ground current) falls below Limit of the first
ground overcurrent protection element before Delay time/TMS has run down, the timer
of Delay time/TMS will be stopped and the attained time value is being safed.
characteristic quantity (ground current IG). The nominal value of the
The parameters Ground current [P607], Ground current [P617] and

Ground current [P627] are located in submenu:

Tripping delay time of trip event ANSI50G/51G-1 trip [E1690]; the working principle of
the delay time counter depends on the tripping characteristic set by parameter Pickup

If pick-up event ANSI50G/51G-1 pick-up [E1689] is active and Delay Time/TMS run
down, trip event ANSI50G/51G-1 trip [E1690] will be activated. This event can be used
for alarm or output control purposes.
P2042 Reset limit

Pick-up reset limit of the first ground overcurrent protection element (STEP1); if the
pick-up event ANSI50G/51G-1 pickup [E1689] is active and
the characteristic quantity (ground current) falls below the pick-up value Limit and
the characteristic quantity (ground current) falls below the pick-up reset value Reset
limit,
up will start.
NOTE: The Reset limit is to be set as a percentage of the nominal value of the
characteristic quantity (ground current IG). The nominal value of the

User Manual
The parameters Ground current [P607], Ground current [P617] and Ground
current [P627] are located in submenu: SYSTEM\Nominals\Reference
values.
P2040 Reset curve

of the first step of ground overcurrent protection is optionally adjustable as:
Definite Time-delay ground overcurrent protection (DT) or


Definite!

Delay time to reset the trip event ANSI50G/51G-1 trip [E1690]; the operating procedure
of the timer for resetting the trip event depends on the set characteristic of the reset
curve. Hence follows that parameter Reset delay time trip/TMS [P2043] takes on a
different meaning, depending on the reset characteristic of Reset curve (DT or IDMT)
set by parameter Reset curve [P2040]:
parameter Reset delay time trip/TMS [P2043].

User Manual
(ground current) it will be cyclically re-calculated. When applying any inverse curve
If trip event ANSI50G/51G-1 trip [E1690] is activated and Reset delay time trip/TMS
has run down, the trip event ANSI50G/51G-1 trip [E1690] will be deactivated.
[P2041], deactivating of trip event ANSI50G/51G-1 trip [E1690] takes on a

Immediate reset of trip event ANSI50G/51G-1 trip [E1690]; in case that the reset curve
is assigned an inverse characteristic (IDMT), then Reset after TRIP immediately can be
activated/deactivated by parameter [P2041] as soon as the charactristic quantity (ground
current) falls below the Reset Limit.
OFF: Immediate reset of trip event ANSI50G/51G-1 trip [E1690] is deactivated
ON: Immediate reset of trip event ANSI50G/51G-1 trip [E1690] is activated
the trip event ANSI50G/51G-1 trip [E1690] should immediately be reset, then
set parameter Reset Delay time/TMS [P2043] = 0.

Blocking of the first protection element (STEP1) of ground overcurrent protection by
harmonics stabilizer ANSI 95i function for measuring values of CT1; according to the
settings of the harmonics stabilizer ANSI 95i function, the pickup of the ground
overcurrent protection may be temporarily blocked upon exceeding of defined contents
of the 2nd and/or 5th harmonic (I100Hz and/or I250Hz) in the phase current:
OFF: blocking of ANSI 50G/51G-1 by ANSI 95i is deactivated
2H: blocking of ANSI 50G/51G-1 by ANSI 95i in case of 2nd harmonic
5H: blocking of ANSI 50G/51G-1 by ANSI 95i in case of 5th harmonic
2H/5H: blocking of ANSI 50G/51G-1 by ANSI 95i in case of 2nd or 5th harmonic


ground overcurrent protection; where:
in case that:
[P3465] = ON) and
o the trip event ANSI50G/51G-1 trip [E1690] becomes active.

User Manual

Minimum trip delaytime for inverse trip curves; in case of high.current faults the tripping
I/In

Dynamic parameters can be used to adapt the protection settings of the ground overcurrent
protection function temporarily to the conditions of the electrical system. Changing of network
conditions might be caused by:
load changes,
The following dynamic STEP parameters of the ground overcurrent protection exist only once in
each of the 6 independent protection STEPS. Thus, the dynamic STEP parameters apply only
to one of the 6 protection STEPS of one parameter SET

User Manual
P3107 Limit


P3110 Reset limit



P3143 Limit


P3146 Reset limit




User Manual
IGND eff/In
[P2038] Limit
[P2042] Reset limit
t
[E1689]
ANSI50G/51G-1 pick-up
1
0
t
[P2039]
Delay time/TMS
t
[P2044]
t
[E1690]
ANSI 50G/51G-1 trip
0
t
[P2043]
Figure 3-152 Ground overcurrent prot. Trip characteristic (DT) and Reset characteristic (DT)

User Manual
IGND eff/In
[P2038] Limit
[P2042] Reset limit
t
[E1690]
1
0
t
(current dependent
delay time Ttrip)
t
[P2044]
t
[E1690]
ANSI 50G/51G-1 trip
0
t
[P2043]
Figure 3-153 Ground overcurrent prot. Trip characteristic (IDMT) and Reset characteristic (DT)

User Manual
IGND eff/In
Limit: [P2038]
t
[E1689]
0
t

AND
AND
(current dependent
delay time Ttrip)
t
[E1690]
ANSI 50G/51G-1 trip
1
0
t

AND
AND
(current dependent
delay time Ttrip)
t
[E1690]
ANSI 50G/51G-1 trip
1
0
t
Figure 3-154 Ground overcurrent prot. Trip characteristic (IDMT) and Reset characteristic (IDMT)

User Manual
3.4.18 ANSI 51/46 VR Voltage restraint
ANSI 51/46VR Voltage restrained

SET PARAMETERS
P2878 Limit 1 10 % 0 200
P2879 Multiplier 1 0,1 s 01
P2880 Limit 2 95 s 0 200
P2881 Multiplier 2 1 01
P2882 Blocking protection OFF ON/OFF
E2240 ANSI51/46VR active - - -
E2241 ANSI51/46VR blocked - - -
E2242 ANSI51/46VR prot. blocking - - -
Figure 3-155 ANSI 51/46 VR Protection parameters [P] and events [E] of SET 1
consequence, only one group of parameters. Thus, SET PARAMETERS of SET 1
represented below are described in the following in detail as examples.
Protection parameters of parameter of SET 1 ANSI 51/46 VR
P2875 Function
This parameter enables/disables voltage restraint overcurrent protection where:
OFF: disables or
When overvoltage protection ANSI 51/46 VR is enabled by parameter [P2875], then

event ANSI51/46VR active [E2240] is activated.

Voltage restraint overcurrent protection can be completely blocked by any active event.
soon as blocking is active, event ANSI51/46VR blocked [E2241] is activated. If the
If blocking of the voltage restraint overcurrent protection is not required, set this
parameter to 0.

Reference value of protection set values for the voltage restraint overcurrent protection
module; calculation the settings of parameters Limit and Reset limit of the

User Manual
Overcurrent protection ANSI 50/51 and/or

Negative phase sequence current protection (NPS) ANSI46
can be assigned by the following setting options of parameter Voltage reference
[P2877] either:
Setting the voltage restraint curve for calculating the multiplier for adaption of pick-up value
Limit and the Reset limit of activated protection steps of ANSI 50/51 and/or ANSI46
Each protective element of overcurrent protection ANSI 50/51 and negative phase sequence
current protection (NPS) ANSI46 provides an additional parameter Voltage restrained [Pxxxx]
for activating the voltage restrained adaption of the pick-up value Limit and the Reset limit.
These limits are to be multiplied by a calculated factor (Multiplier).
The multiplier is proportional to the voltage ratio U/Un. The curve for calculating the multiplier is
to be set by the following four parameters.
Multiplier
[P2881] Multiplier 2
[P2879] Multiplier 1
[P2878] Limit 1 [P2880] Limit 2 U/Un
Figure 3-156 ANSI 51/46VR Voltage-dependent curve for calculation of the multiplier
P2878 Limit 1
Start value of the voltage ratio U/Un to define the voltage stabilising curve; together with
parameter Mulitplier 1 [P2879] the set value of parameter [P2878] determines the
beginning of the voltage-stabilized curve.
P2879 Multiplier 1
Start value of the multiplier to define the voltage stabilising curve; together with
parameter Limit 1 [P2878] the set value of parameter [P2879] determines the
beginning of the voltage-stabilized curve,
P2880 Limit 2
Maximum value of the voltage ratio U/Un to define the voltage stabilising curve; together
with parameter Mulitplier 2 [P2881] the set value of parameter [P2880] determines the
end of the voltage-stabilized curve, and as consequence, the maximum adaption of the
pick-up value Limit and the Reset limit.
P2881 Multiplier 2

User Manual
Maximum value of the voltage ratio U/Un to define the voltage stabilising curve; together
with parameter Limit 2 [P2880] the set value of parameter [P2881] determines the end
of the voltage-stabilized curve, and as consequence, the maximum adaption of the pick-
up value Limit and the Reset limit.

Blocking of a voltage restrained overcurrent protection step; whereas:
OFF: disables Blocking protection or
ON: enables Blocking protection.
If:
function Blocking protection is activated and
the voltage ratio U/Un exceeds the set value of parameter Limit 2 [P2880],
all the voltage restrained overcurrent protection steps (Voltage restrained [Pxxxx] =
ON) of function Overcurrent protection ANSI 50/51 automatically will be blocked.

User Manual
3.4.19 ANSI 52 Pole discordance protection
ANSI 52 Pole discordance protection

P/E No. Description Vaule Unit (Setting range)
SET PARAMETERs
P3718 Pole discordance protection OFF - ON/OFF
STEP 1
P3720 Function OFF - OFF/Auxiliary contacts/
CT1/CT2
P3722 Open L1 0 event 0 9999
P3723 Open L2 0 event 0 9999
P3724 Open L3 0 event 0 9999
P3725 Closed L1 0 event 0 9999
P3728 Current limit 10 % 0 100
P3729 Delay time 1 s 0 999999,999
P3730 External pole discordance detection 0 event 0 9999
E2525 ANSI52-1 active - - -
E2526 ANSI52-1 blocked - - -
E2528 ANSI52-1 trip - - -
STEP 2
P3731 Function OFF - OFF/Auxiliary contacts/
current criterion

Figure 3-157 ANSI 52 Parameter set 1: Protection parameters [P] and Events [E]
examples.

User Manual
SET PARAMETERS
The following SET PARAMETERS of the pole discordance protection exist only once in each of
one parameter SET.
P3718 Pole discordance protection

This parameter enables/disables pole discordance protection where:
OFF: disables or
When pole discordance protection ANSI 52 is enabled by parameter [P3718], then event

Pole discordance protection can be completely blocked by any active event. For
If blocking of the pole discordance protection is not required, set this parameter to 0.

The following STEP parameters of the pole discordance protection exist only once in each of
P3720 Function
This parameter enables/disables the first step of pole discordance protection, activation
of the protection step takes place by selecting the protection criterion (characteristic
quantity) for detection of the individual pole positions of the switching element primary
contacts) where selection option:
OFF: disables the protective function, or
Auxiliary contacts: enables the protective function => protective criterion:
detection of switching elements pole position via evaluation of
switching elements auxiliary contacts, or
CT1: enables the protective function => protective criterion:
detection of switching elements pole position via phase-
seggregated current check of phase currents measured by
CT1, or
CT2: enables the protective function => protective criterion:
detection of switching elements pole position via phase-
seggregated current check of phase currents measured by
CT2, or
When pole discordance protection is enabled by parameter [P3720], then event

ANSI52-1 active [E2525] is activated.

User Manual

The first step of pole discordance protection can be blocked by any active event. For
If blocking of the first step of pole discordance protection is not required, set this
parameter to 0.
Detection criterion Auxiliary contacts and pickup logic

The pole positions of the switching device can be transmitted via auxiliary contacts to the
SYMAP-Compact via binary inputs. For evaluation of the pole positions the referring events
have to be assigned to the following parameters [P3722] to [P3727].
CAUTION: Parameters [P3722] to [P3727] are only valid for the first step of pole discordance
protection when parameter setting is as follows: Function [P3720 = Auxiliary
contacts!
CAUTION: To gain a proper functionality when using auxiliary contacts as detection criterion,
the primary cntacts have to be fully syncronized with the auxiliary contacts of the
monitored switching element. This means, primary contacts and the auxiliary
contacts have to switch simultaneously!
The pickup logic according to detection criterion auxiliary contacts is as follows:

User Manual
Event [P3725] (Feedback: L1 Closed")

&

&
Check Position Open

&

&

&
Event [P37275 (Feedback: L1 Closed")

&
ANSI52-1 pickup [E3723]
1
Event [P3722] (Feedback: L1 Open")
&

&
Check Position Closed

&

&

&

&
Figure 3-158 ANSI 52 Detection criterion: Auxiliary contacts
Check position Open

If one or two of the pole position feedbacks (phase L1, L2, and/or L3) of the monitored switching
element indicate position Closed, then pickup-event ANSI52-1 pickup [P2527] is activated
and the and the trip delay time (Delay time) of the first pole discordance protection element will
start.

User Manual
When all three pole position feedbacks (phase L1, L2, and/or L3) indicate position Open
before the trip delay time (Delay time) has run down, the timer of Delay time will be stopped
and reset to zero, and the pick-up event [E2527] will be deactivated.
Check position Closed

If one or two of the pole position feedbacks of the monitored switching element indicate position
Open, then pickup-event ANSI52-1 pickup [P2527] is activated and the and the trip delay
time (Delay time) of the first pole discordance protection element will start.
When all three pole position feedbacks indicate position Closed before the trip delay time
(Delay time) has run down, the timer of Delay time will be stopped and reset to zero, and the
pick-up event [E2527] will be deactivated.
P3722 Open L1
Detection criterion for monitoring switching elements pole position Open of phase L1
P3723 Open L2
(analog to description of parameter [P3722], relating to phase L2)
P3724 Open L3
P3725 Closed L1
Detection criterion for monitoring switching elements pole position Closed of phase L1
P3726 Closed L2
P3727 Closed L3
Detection criterion current check and pickup logic

As an alternative to the detection criterion auxiliary contacts, the pole positions can also be
monitored by applying the current check.
CAUTION: Parameter [P3722] are only valid for the first step of pole discordance protection
when parameter setting is as follows: Function [P3720 = CT1 or Function [P3720
= CT2!
CAUTION: Current check is only applicable if the monitored switching element is energized!
The pickup logic according to detection criterion current criterion is as follows:

User Manual
Current limit [P3728]

(Feedback: L1 Closed")
IL1
IL2 &
IL3
IL1
IL2 (Feedback: L2 Closed")
&
IL3
Check Position Open (I<)
IL1
IL2 &
IL3
IL1
&
IL3
IL1
&
IL3
IL1
IL2 &
IL3
ANSI52-1 pickup [E3723]
1
(Feedback: L1 Open")
IL1
IL2 (Feedback: L2 Open")
&
IL3
IL1
IL2 &
IL3
Check Position Closed (I>)
IL1
IL2 &
IL3
IL1
IL2 (Feedback: L2 Open")
&
IL3
IL1
IL2 &
IL3
IL1
IL2 &
IL3
Figure 3-159 ANSI 52 Detection criterion: Current check
P3728 Current limit

Pickup value for the first step of pole discordance protection according to the detection
criterion Current criterion;
Check position Open

At the moment that the process quantity (phase current) exceeds this limit in one or two
phases it can be concluded that one or more pole contacts are closed. Then pickup-

User Manual
event ANSI52-1 pickup [P2527] is activated and the trip delay time (Delay time) of the
first pole discordance protection element will start.
In case that the process quantity (phase current) falls below the Current limit in all
three phases before Delay time has run down, the timer of Delay time will be stopped
and reset to zero, and the pick-up event [E2527] will be deactivated.
Check position Closed

At the moment that the process quantity (phase current) falls below this limit in one or
two phases it can be concluded that one or more pole contacts are open. Then pickup-
event ANSI52-1 pickup [P2527] is activated and the and the trip delay time (Delay
time) of the first pole discordance protection element will start.
In case that the process quantity (phase current) exceeds the Current limit in all three
phases before Delay time has run down, the timer of Delay time will be stopped and
reset to zero, and the pick-up event [E2527] will be deactivated.
P2529 Delay time

control purposes.
P3730 External pole discordance detection

When external pole discordance equipment (external pickup) is used to detect any
mismatch of the pole contacts, then the event number of the relating signal (e.g. binary
input) which is transmitted to the SYMAP-Compact has to be assigned to parameter
[P3730].
NOTE: Detection criterion External pole discordance is only valid when parameter
setting is as follows: External pole discordance detection 0 !

User Manual
3.4.20 ANSI 59 Overvoltage Protection
Function ANSI 59 Overvoltage Protection of SYMAP-Compact(+) can be applied for the

following voltage systems:
Measuring and protection of AC voltage systems
Measuring and protection of DC voltage systems (e.g. batteries)
Measuring and protection of AC voltage systems as floating 10min arithmetic mean
protection (ANSI 59AV) in compliance with the German guideline Power generation
systems connected to the low voltage distribution network Technical minimum
requirements for the connection to and parallel operation with low-voltage distribution
networks, VDE-AR-N-4105: 2011-08
Measuring and protection of AC voltage systems

Depending on the voltage level, the voltages of electric power systems can be measured by
SYMAP-Compact(+) either directly, without voltage transformers (e.g. 400V low voltage
system) or via voltage transformers (e.g. 10kV medium voltage system). For voltage
measurement SYMAP-Compact(+) provides up to three 3-phase voltage measurement inputs,
depending on the device variant.
For voltage measurement the measuring range of SYMAP-Compact(+) measuring inputs have
to be adapted to the connected, external voltage system. For this, parameters PTx inputs.
To measure voltage correctly, voltage measurement of SYMAP-Compact(+) shall be set to the
nominal value (rated voltage) of the connected voltage system. This can be done by the
parameters of submenu: SYSTEM\Nominals\Potential transformers.
Here, the voltage transformer ratios (primary and secondary side) can be set for those voltage
systems which require using voltage transformers. When voltage is measured directly, means
without voltage transformers, parameters of primary and secondary side (Primary,
Secondary) shall be set to the same value (nominal voltage) of the connected power system.
Measuring and protection of DC voltage systems (e.g. batteries)

SYMAP-Compact(+) voltage measuring inputs PT1, PT2 and PT3 can also be applied
seperately for DC voltage measurement. Here, measurement input have to be adjusted for DC
measurement via submenu: SYSTEM\Measuring\DC voltage. For DC measuring parameters
Primary and Secondary shall be set to the same value (nominal voltage) of the connected
DC voltage system.
Measuring and protection of AC voltage systems as floating 10min arithmetic mean protection
(ANSI 59AV)
When overvoltage protection is used for 10min arithmetic mean protection of decentralized
power generation systems in grid parallel operation, one of the SYMAP-Compact(+) voltage
measurement inputs PT1, PT2 or PT3 has to be configured accordingly via parameter Source
of Uavg 10min [P9463] of submenu: SYSTEM\Measuring\Floating voltage.
For those protection steps of overvoltage protection which shall operated as 10min arithmetic
mean protection the folowing parameter setting shall apply: Pickup source [12xx] = Uavg
10min.

User Manual
ANSI 59 Overvoltage

SET PARAMETERS
P1200 Overvoltage protection OFF - ON/OFF
STEP 1
P1205 Pickup source PT1 - none/PT1/PT2/PT3/Uavg 10min
P1207 Limit 110 % 1 200
P1208 Delay time 0,5 s 0 999999,999
P1209 Reset limit 105 % 1 200
E1157 ANSI59-1 trip - - -
STEP 2

examples.
SET PARAMETERS
The following SET PARAMETERS of the overvoltage protection exist only once in each of the
one parameter SET.
P1200 Overvoltage protection

This parameter enables/disables overvoltage protection where:
OFF: disables or
When overvoltage protection ANSI 59 is enabled by parameter [P1200], then event


User Manual
Overvoltage protection can be completely blocked by any active event. For blocking, the
If blocking of the overvoltage protection is not required, set this parameter to 0.

The following STEP parameters of the overvoltage protection exist only once in each of the 12

overvoltage protection can be assigned to a certain voltage measurement input (PT1,
PT2 or PT3). Parameter [P1205] determines the voltage measurement input which will
provide measurement values as characteristic quantities (voltage) to the overvoltage
protection:
Uavg 10min: voltage input: see parameter setting Source of Uavg10min
[P9463] of submenu: SYSTEM\Measuring\Floating average
For settings PT1, PT2, PT3 or Uavg 10min, event ANSI59-1 step acitve [E1154]
is activated.

The first step of overvoltage protection can be blocked by any active event. For blocking,
blocking is active, event ANSI59-1 blocked step [E1155] is activated. If the blocking
If blocking of the first step of overvoltage protection is not required, set this parameter to
0.
P1207 Limit
Pick-up value of the first overvoltage protection element. At the moment that the
characteristic quantity (voltage) exceeds this limit, pick-up event ANSI59-1 pickup
[E1156] will become active, and the trip delay time (Delay time) of the first overvoltage

User Manual
Hence, in case that the calculation of the pick-up value refers to the phase-to-
neutral voltage, parameter Voltage reference [P1212] is to be set to L-N, so
that factor 3 is not necessary to be considered for calculation.

Reference value of protection set values for the first step of overvoltage protection
module; the settings of parameters Limit and Reset limit can be assigned by the
following setting options either:
P1208 Delay time

control purposes.
In case that the characteristic quantity (voltage) falls below the pick-up value (Limit) of
the first overvoltage protection step before the trip delay time (Delay time) has run
down, the timer of Delay time will be stopped and the counter value is being saved. If
the characteristic quantity subsequently falls below the Reset limit, then, the Reset
delay time pick-up timer will start and the pick-up event [E1156] will be deactivated.
1211 Reset delay time pick-up

time).
P1209 Reset limit

Reset limit of the first step of overvoltage protection. As soon as the trip event ANSI59-1
trip [E1157] is active and the characteristic quantity (voltage) exceeds the Reset limit,
the timer of the trip reset delay time (Reset delay time trip) will start.
NOTE: The reset limit is to be set as a percentage of the nominal value of the chosen
characteristic quantity (phase-to-phase voltage or phase-to-neutral voltage) by
parameter Voltage reference [P1212]. However, the chosen characteristic
value refers to the nominal value of the phase-to-phase voltage to be set by
parameter:
Hence, in case that the calculation of the pick-up value refers to the phase-to-
neutral voltage, parameter Voltage reference [P1212] is to be set to L-N, so
that factor 3 is not necessary to be considered for calculation.

[E1157].

User Manual
trip [E1157] is deactivated. In case that the characteristic quantity (voltage) exceeds the
pick-up value (Limit) of the first overvoltage protection element before the timer of
Ueff/Un
[P1207] limit
[P1209] reset limit
100%
t
[E1156]
ANSI59-1 pick-up
1
0
t
[P1208]
delay time
[P1211]
reset delay time
pick-up
t
[E1157]
ANSI 59-1 trip
0
t
[P1210]
reset delay time
trip
Figure 3-161 Overvoltage Tripping and reset characteristic

User Manual
3.4.21 ANSI 59N/G Neutral Voltage Displacement (NVD)
ANSI 59N/G Neutral voltage displacement

SET PARAMETERS
P1535 Ground voltage protection OFF - ON/OFF
E1370 ANSI59N/G module active - - -
E1371 ANSI59N/G blocked module - - -
STEP 1
P1540 Pickup source PT-GND1 - none/PT-GND1/PT1/PT2/PT3
P1542 Limit 110 % 0 200
P1543 Delay time 2 s 0 999999,999
P1544 Reset limit 105 % 0 200
E1374 ANSI59N/G-1 blocked step - - -
E1375 ANSI59N/G-1 pickup - - -
E1376 ANSI59N/G-1 trip - - -
STEP 2
P1550 Pickup source PT-GND1 - none/PT-GND1/PT1/PT2/PT3

Figure 3-162 ANSI 59N/G Protection parameters [P] and events [E] of SET 1
examples.
Protection parameters of parameter SET 1 ANSI 59N/G
SET PARAMETERS
The following SET PARAMETERS of the neutral voltage displacement protection exist only
P1535 Neutral voltage protection

This parameter enables/disables neutral voltage displacement protection where:
OFF: disables or
When neutral voltage displacement protection ANSI 59N/G is enabled by parameter

[P1535], then event ANSI59N/G module active [E1150] is activated.

User Manual

Neutral voltage displacement protection can be completely blocked by any active event.
soon as blocking is active, event ANSI59N/G blocked module [E1371] is activated. If
If blocking of the neutral voltage displacement protection is not required, set this
parameter to 0.

The following STEP parameters of the neutral voltage displacement protection exist only once
in each of the 4 independent protection STEPS. Thus, the STEP PARAMETERS apply only to
one of the 4 protection STEPS of one parameter SET.

Depending on the SYMAP-Compact(+) device variant every protection step of neutral
voltage displacement protection can be assigned to a certain voltage measurement input
(PT-GND1, PT1, PT2 or PT3). Parameter [P1540] determines wether the neutral voltage
is measured directly (PT-GND1), or the voltage measurement inputs will provide phase
voltages for the calculation of neutral voltage displacement:
PT-GND1: neutral voltage is measured by PT-GND1
PT1: neutral voltage is calculated by measurement values of voltage input
PT1
PT2
PT3
For settings PT-GND1, PT1, PT2 or PT3, event ANSI59N/G-1 step acitve
potential!

The first step of neutral voltage displacement protection can be blocked by any active
active. As soon as blocking is active, event ANSI59N/G-1 blocked step [E1374] is
If blocking of the first step of neutral voltage displacement protection is not required, set
P1542 Limit
Pick-up value of the first neutral voltage displacement protection element; at the moment
that the characteristic quantity (neutral voltage) exceeds this limit, pick-up event

User Manual
ANSI59N/G-1 pickup [E1375] will become active, and the trip delay time (Delay time)
of the first neutral voltage displacement protection step will start.
characteristic quantity (residual voltage UG). The nominal value of the
Ground voltage [P606], for primary side W1 or
Ground voltage [P616], for secondary side W2 or
Ground voltage [P626], for tertiary side W3
The parameters Ground voltage [P606], Ground voltage [P616] and

Ground voltage [P626] are located in submenu:
P1543 Delay time

Trip delay time; it is the delay time of the trip event ANSI59N/G-1 trip [E1376].
As soon as the pick-up event ANSI59N/G-1 pickup [E1375] is active and Delay time
control purposes.
In case that the characteristic quantity (neutral voltage) falls below the pick-up value
(Limit) of the first neutral voltage displacement protection step before the trip delay time
(Delay time) has run down, the timer of Delay time will be stopped and the counter
value is being saved. If the characteristic quantity subsequently falls below the Reset
limit, then, the Reset delay time pick-up timer will start and the pick-up event [E1375]
will be deactivated.

time).
P1544 Reset limit

Trip reset limit of the first step of neutral voltage displacement protection. As soon as the
trip event ANSI59N/G-1 trip [E1376] is active and the characteristic quantity (neutral
voltage) exceeds the Reset limit, the timer of the trip reset delay time (Reset delay
time trip) will start.
characteristic quantity (residual voltage UG). The nominal value of the
Ground voltage [P626], for tertiary side W3


Trip reset delay time; it is the delay time for resetting the trip event ANSI59N/G-1 trip
[E1376].
If the trip reset delay time (Reset delay time trip) has run down, trip event ANSI59N/G-
1 trip [E1376] is deactivated. In case that the characteristic quantity (neutral voltage)
exceeds the pick-up value (Limit) of the first neutral voltage displacement protection

User Manual
element before the timer of Reset delay time trip has run down, the timer of Reset
delay time trip will be reset. Then trip event ANSI59N/G-1 trip [E1376] remains active.
UGND eff /Un

100%
[P1542] limit
[P1544] reset limit
t
[E1375]
ANSI59N/G-1 pick-up
0
t
[P1543]
delay time
[P1546]
reset delay time
pick-up
t
[E1376]
ANSI 59N/G-1 trip
0
t
[P1545]
reset delay time
trip
Figure 3-163 Neutral Voltage Displacement (NVD) Tripping and reset characteristic

User Manual
3.4.22 ANSI 64REF Restricted Earth Fault Protection
Functioning of the differential protection is based on a balance of ground current IG measured at

the transformer star point (CT-GNDx) and the summation current I = 3 x I0 = [IL1 + IL2 + IL3 ]
calculated from measured phase currents of current input CTx.
Id,G = IG + I
The resulting variable of this current comparison is the differential ground current Id,G as
protection criterion for easy differentiating operating or ground fault event.
For the operating event ideally applies: I = 0 (Kirchhoffs law)
In the event of fault, a differential ground current occurs: I 0 = Id,G
This protection principle is advantageous because of the high degree of selectivity since the
CTs unambiguously define the protection range on both ends of the equipment to protect.
Consequently, fault finding can be effected in fast mode.
yn SYMAP-Compact(+)
IG
Protected CT-GNDx
zone
I = 3 x I0 = [I1 + I2 + I3 ]
CT1 or CT2
Figure 3-164 ANSI 64REF Protective zone
NOTE: For assigning the measuring input channels to measure IG and I see parameters:
CT-GNDx source [P9439] and
CTx source [P9440]
In the sub-menu: SYSTEM\Measuring\Differential

User Manual
ANSI 64REF Restricted earth fault

SET PARAMETERS
P3440 Restricted earth fault OFF - ON/OFF
P3442 Hysteresis 0,0 % 0 1999,9
E2370 ANSI64REF active - - -
E2371 ANSI64REF blocked - - -
STEP 1
P3447 Function ON - ON/OFF
P3449 Is0 setting 300,0 % 0 1999,9
P3450 Is1 setting 600,0 % 0 1999,9
P3451 Is2 setting 900,0 % 0 1999,9
P3452 Id0 setting 20,0 % 0 1999,9
P3453 Id1 setting 41,0 % 0 1999,9
P3454 Id2 setting 191,0 % 0 1999,9
P3455 Delay time 0,03 s 0 ... 65,535
P3456 Harmonics stabilizer CT-GNDx OFF - OFF / 2H / 5H / 2H/5H
P3457 Harmonics stabilizer CTx OFF - OFF / 2H / 5H / 2H/5H
E2373 ANSI 64REF-1 active - - -
E2374 ANSI 64REF-1 blocked - - -
E2375 ANSI 64REF-1 pickup - - -
E2376 ANSI 64REF-1 trip - - -
STEP 2
P3462 Id>> 300,0 % 0 1999,9
P3463 Delay time 0,03 s 0 ... 65,535
E2379 ANSI 64REF-2 active - - -
E2380 ANSI 64REF-2 blocked - - -
E2381 ANSI 64REF-2 pickup - - -
E2382 ANSI 64REF-2 trip - - -
Figure 3-165 ANSI 64REF Protection parameters [P] and events [E] of SET 1
Protection parameters of parameter SET 1 ANSI 64REF
SET PARAMETERS
The following SET PARAMETERS of the restricted earth fault protection (ground fault
differential protection) exist only once in each of the four parameter sets. Thus, the SET
PARAMETERS apply to protection STEP 1 and protection STEP 2 of one parameter SET.
P3440 Restricted earth fault :

This parameter activates/deactivates the restricted earth fault protection whereby the
setting:

User Manual
OFF: deactivates the protection function or

ON: activates the protection function.
When restricted earth fault protection ANSI 64REF is enabled by parameter [P3440],
then event ANSI64REF active [E2370] is activated.
P3441 Blocking :
Restricted earth fault differential protection can be completely blocked by any active
active. As soon as blocking is active, event ANSI64REF blocked [E2371] is activated. If
If blocking of the restricted earth fault protection is not required, set this parameter to 0.
P3442 Hystersis :
This parameter [P3442] determines the reset limit for the pick-up event ANSI64REF-1
pickup [E2375] of the stabilized restricted earth fault protection element (STEP1) or
ANSI64REF-2 pickup [E2381] for the unstabilized high-set restricted earth fault
protection element (STEP 2). At the moment the characteristic value (differential ground
current) falls below the reset limit, the activated pick-up event [E2375] or [E2381] will be
deactivated.
NOTE: Stabilized restricted earth fault protection element (STEP 1):

(reset limit) = configured trip curve Hysteresis [P3442]
High-set restricted earth fault protection element (STEP 2):
(reset limit) = Id>> [P3462] Hysteresis [P3442]
Protection parameters Stabilized restricted earth fault protection element (STEP 1)
P3447 Function
This parameter activates/deactivates the stabilized restricted earth fault protection
element (STEP 1) whereby the setting:
OFF: deactivates the stabilized restricted earth fault protection element or
ON: activates the stabilized restricted earth fault protection element.
When stabilized restricted earth fault protection element is enabled by parameter

[P3447], then event ANSI64REF-1 active [E2373] is activated.
P3448 Blocking
Stabilized restricted earth fault protection element (STEP 1) can be completely blocked
by any active event. For blocking, the number related to this blocking event has to be
blocking event is active. As soon as blocking is active, event ANSI64REF-1 blocked
[E2374] is activated. If the blocking event turns inactive, blocking is abandoned and
protective element is effective again. Then, event [E2374] is deactivated automatically.
If blocking of the stabilized restricted earth fault protection element (STEP 1) is not

User Manual
Configuration of the tripping curve

The tripping characteristic of the SYMAP-Compact+ stabilized restricted earth fault protection
element (STEP 1) is defined by three separately settable points such that the corresponding
parameterization results in three ranges with differing gradient factor of the tripping
characteristic (stabilization):
Range 1: constant tripping value (gradient factor = 0) up to a settable value for the
stabilization current (see parameters Is0 [P3449]; Id0 [P3452])
Range 2: stabilized tripping characteristic with 1st gradient factor (see parameters Is1
[P3450]; Id1 [P3453])
Range 3: stabilized tripping characteristic with 2nd gradient factor (see parameters Is2
[P3451]; Id2 [P3454])
Calculation of stabilization current:

Istab = |IG| + |I1| + |I2| + |I3|
= IG +I1 + I2 +I3
Id eff/In
Tripping range
Id>>
Id2"
Id1"
Blocking range
Id0"
Is0" Is1" Is2" IStab/In
(IS res")
Figure 3-166 SYMAP-Compact+ ANSI 64REF-1 tripping characteristic
NOTE: Parameters [P3449] to [P3454] are to be set as a percentage of the nominal value of
the characteristic quantity (ground current). The nominal value of the characteristic
Ground Current [P607], for primary side W1 or
Ground Current [P617], for secondary side W2 or
Ground Current [P627], for tertiary side W3.

User Manual
The parameters Ground Current [P607], Ground Current [P617] and Ground
Current [P627] are located in submenu: SYSTEM\Nominals\Reference values.
P3449 Is0
In combination with parameter Id0 [P3452] parameter [P3449] defines the first straight
line segment (as well as the starting point of the second straight line segement) of the
tripping curve of the stabilized restricted earth fault protection. The first straight line
segment is valid for a value range of the stabilisation current between Istab = 0 and Istab =
Is0, in which the tripping characteristic corresponds to the constant pick-up value of the
characteristic quantity (differential ground current Id) Id0.
P3450 Is1
In combination with parameter Id1 [P3453] parameter [P3450] defines the second
straight line segment (as well as the starting point of the third straight line segement) of
the tripping curve of the stabilized restricted earth fault. The second straight line
segment is valid for a value range of the stabilisation current between Istab = Is0 and
Istab = Is1.
P3451 Is2
In combination with parameter Id2 [P3454] parameter [P3451] defines the second point
to determine the slope of the third straight line segment of the tripping curve of the
stabilized restricted earth fault. An ending point of the third straight line segment can be
set by using parameter Id>> [P3462] which brings forth a corresponding stabilisation
current (IS res). Then, the third straight line segment is valid for a value range of the
stabilisation current between Istab = Is1 and Istab = IS res.
P3452 Id0
First, constant tripping value of the differential ground current Id for definition of the
tripping characteristic curve; exceeds the characteristic quantity (differential ground
current Id), the set value of parameter [P3452] for stabilization ground currents in the
range between Istab = 0 and Istab = Is0 the pick-up event ANSI64REF-1 pick-up
[E2375] will be activated.
If there is no active blocking of the Harmonics stabilizer ANI95i and Delay time
(Parameter Delay time [P3455]) run down, then, also trip event ANSI64REF-1 trip
[E2376] is activated. This event can be used for alarm or output control purposes.
P3453 Id1
In combination with parameter Is1 [P3450] parameter [P3453] defines the second
straight line segment (as well as the starting point of the third straight line segement) of
the tripping curve of the stabilized restricted earth fault. If the characteristic quantity
(differential ground current Id) exceeds the range of values set with the parameters
[P3450] and [P3453] for stabilization ground currents in the range between Istab = Is0
and Istab = Is1 the pick-up event ANSI64REF-1 pick-up [E2375] will be activated.
P3454 Id2
In combination with parameter Is2 [P3451] parameter [P3454] defines the second point
to determine the slope of the third straight line segment of the stabilized restricted earth
fault protection tripping curve. If the characteristic variable (differential ground current Id)
exceeds the range of values set with the parameters [P3451] and [P3454] for
stabilization ground currents in the range between Istab = Is1 and Istab = Is res the
pick-up event ANSI64REF-1 pick-up [E2375] will be activated.

User Manual
P3455 Delay time

Trip delay time; it is the delay time of the trip event ANSI64REF-1 trip [E2376].
As soon as the pick-up event ANSI64REF-1 pick-up [E2375] is active and Delay time
run down and there is no active blocking of the Harmonics stabilizer ANI95i ,then, trip
event [E2376] will be activated. This event can be used for alarm or output control
purposes.
P3456 Harmonics stabilizer CT-GNDx

Blocking of stabilized restricted earth fault protection element (STEP 1) by harmonics
stabilizer ANSI 95i function for measuring values of CT-GND1; according to the settings
of the harmonics stabilizer ANSI 95i function, the pickup of the stabilized restricted
earth fault protection element (STEP 1) may be temporarily blocked upon exceeding of
defined contents of the 2nd and/or 5th harmonic (I100Hz and/or I250Hz) in the ground current:
OFF: blocking of ANSI 64REF-1 by ANSI 95i is deactivated
2H: blocking of ANSI 64REF-1 by ANSI 95i in case of 2nd harmonic
5H: blocking of ANSI 64REF-1 by ANSI 95i in case of 5th harmonic
2H/5H: blocking of ANSI 64REF-1 by ANSI 95i in case of 2nd or 5th harmonic

P3457 Harmonics stabilizer CTx

Blocking of stabilized restricted earth fault protection element (STEP 1) by harmonics
stabilizer ANSI 95i function for measuring values of CT1 or CT2; (see description of
parameter [P3456]).
Protection parameter High-set restricted earth fault protection element (STEP 2)
P3460 Function
This parameter activates/deactivates the high-set restricted earth fault protection
element (STEP 2) whereby the setting:
OFF: deactivates the high-set restricted earth fault protection element or
ON: activates the high-set restricted earth fault protection element.
When high-set restricted earth fault protection element is enabled by parameter [P3460],
then event ANSI64REF-2 active [E2379] is activated.
P3461 Blocking
High-set restricted earth fault protection element (STEP 2) can be completely blocked by
blocking event is active. As soon as blocking is active, event ANSI64REF-2 blocked
If blocking of the high-set restricted earth fault protection element (STEP 2) is not
P3462 Id>>
This parameter defines the pick-up value for the characteristic quantity (differential
ground current Id) of the high-set restricted earth fault protection element (STEP 2),
disregarding the height of the stabilization current Istab.
If the characteristic quantity exceeds the value set for parameter [P3462], the trip event
ANSI64REF-2 trip [E2382] will be activated disregarding the stabilized tripping
characteristic. This event can be used for alarm or output control purposes.

User Manual
characteristic quantity (ground current). The nominal value of the
Ground Current [P607], for primary side W1 or
Ground Current [P617], for secondary side W2
Ground Current [P627], for tertiary side W3.
The parameters Ground Current [P607], Ground Current [P617] and
Ground Current [P627] are located in submenu:
P3463 Delay time

Trip delay time; it is the delay time of the trip event ANSI64REF-2 trip [E2382].
As soon as the pick-up event ANSI64REF-2 pick-up [E2381] is active and Delay time
control purposes.

User Manual
3.4.23 ANSI 67 Directional Overcurrent Protection
Main Menu\Parameters\PROTECTION\ANSI 67 Directional overcurrent\
STD

SET PARAMETERS
P2155 Directional overcurrent protection ON - ON/OFF
STEP 1
P2160 Pickup source CT1 - none/Power_CT1/Power_CT2
P2163 Limit 200 % 5 1999,9
P2164 Delay time/TMS 0,03 s/- 0 999999,999
P2167 Reset limit 150 % 5 1999,9
P2170 Direction mode Forward - Non-directional/Forward/Backward/Angle
P2171 Angle absolute 0 deg 0 359,9
P2172 Angle relative 60 deg 0 179,9
P2174 Voltage low limit % 0 200,0
P2175 Voltage low mode Blocked/Non-directional
P2179 Min. delay time 0 s 0 999999,999
E1747 ANSI67-1 trip L1 - - -
E1748 ANSI67-1 trip L2 - - -
E1749 ANSI67-1 trip L3 - - -
E1750 ANSI67-1 trip - - -
E1751 ANSI67-1 low voltage L1 - - -
STEP 2

Figure 3-167 ANSI 67 Standard (STD) protection parameters [P] and events [E] of SET 1

User Manual
DP1

STEP 1
P3179 Limit 200 % 5 1999,9
P3180 Delay time/TMS 0,03 s/- 0 999999,999
P3181 Min. delay time 0 s/- 0 999999,999
P3182 Reset limit 150 % 5 1999,9
STEP 2
P3185 Limit 20 % 0 65535,5

Figure 3-168 ANSI 67 Dynamic parameters (DP1) of protection parameters [P] of SET 1
DP2

STEP 1
P3203 Limit 200 % 5 1999,9
P3204 Delay time/TMS 0,03 s/- 0 999999,999
P3205 Min. delay time 0 s/- 0 999999,999
P3206 Reset limit 150 % 5 1999,9
STEP 2
P3209 Limit 20 % 0 65535,5

Figure 3-169 ANSI 67 Dynamic parameters (DP2) protection parameters [P] of SET 1
examples.
STD Standard protection parameters of parameter SET 1 ANSI 67
STD SET PARAMETERS

The following SET PARAMETERS of the overcurrent protection exist only once in each of the
one parameter SET.

User Manual
P2155 Directional Overcurrent protection

This parameter enables/disables directional overcurrent protection where:
OFF: disables or
When directional overcurrent protection ANSI 67 is enabled by parameter [P2155], then
event ANSI67 module active [E1735] is activated.

Directional overcurrent protection can be completely blocked by any active event. For
If blocking of the directional overcurrent protection is not required, set this parameter to
0.

Dynamic parameters 1 of function ANSI 67 can be activated by any active event. For

Dynamic parameters 2 of function ANSI 67 can be activated by any active event. For
done in the submenu: PROTECTION\Directional overcurrent ANSI 67 \DPx.

The following STEP parameters of the directional overcurrent protection exist only once in each
of the 4 independent protection STEPS. Thus, the STEP PARAMETERS apply only to one of
the 4 protection STEPS of one parameter SET.

Depending on the SYMAP-Compact(+) device variant each protection step of
directional overcurrent protection can be assigned to a certain current measurement
input (CT1 or CT2 if available). Hence, parameter [P2160] determines the current
measurement input and its assigned voltage measurement input which will provide
measurement values as characteristic quantities (phase current and phase angle
between phase current and reference voltage) to the directional overcurrent protection:
Power_CT1: current measurement by CT1 and calculation of current direction via
voltage measurement by the assigned voltage measurement input
(PT1, PT2 or PT3)

User Manual
Power_CT2: current measurement by CT2 and calculation of current direction via

voltage measurement by the assigned voltage measurement input
(PT1, PT2 or PT3)
To measure current direction correctly, the needed energy flow direction is to
For settings Power_CT1 or Power_CT2, event ANSI67-1 step acitve [E1741] is

activated.

The first step of directional overcurrent protection can be blocked by any active event.
If blocking of the first step of directional overcurrent protection is not required, set this
parameter to 0.
P2162 Pick-up curve

characteristic of the first step of directional overcurrent protection is optionally adjustable
as:

User Manual

Curve
type

tr
k t r (G ) TMS
t (G ) TMS c
Designating
1 G

G
1
G
S

S
G
k c tr
[s] [s] - [s] -
whereby:
tr(G): time setting (reset time for G = 0 and TMS = 1)

User Manual
P2163 Limit
Pick-up value of the first directional overcurrent protection element (STEP1); at the
moment that the characteristic quantity (phase current) exceeds this limit and the
characteristic angle between phase current ILx and reference voltage UILx ref (with: x = 1,
2, 3) is located within the trip angle range, events ANSI67-1 pick-up [E1746] and phase
seggragated pickup event(s) depending on the fault loop ANSI67-1 pickup L1
[E1743] and/or ANSI67-1 pickup L2 [E1744] and/or ANSI67-1 pickup L3 [E1745] will

User Manual
become active, and Delay time/TMS of the first directional overcurrent protection
element will start.
In case that the characteristic quantity (phase current) falls below Limit or the
characteristic angle is out the trip angle range of the first directional overcurrent
protection element before Delay time/TMS has run down, the timer of Delay time/TMS
will be stopped and the attained time value is being saved.
NOTE: Depending on the fault loop the phase-segregated pickup event(s) ANSI67-1
pickup L1 [E1743] and/or ANSI67-1 pickup L2 [E1744] and/or ANSI67-1
pickup L3 [E1745] and common pickup event ANSI67-1 pickup [E1746] will
be activated/deactivated simultaneously.
Table 3-14 ANSI 67 Fault loops and corresponding pickup events
Fault loop
Active pickup event
L1-E L2-E L3-E L1-L2 L1-L3 L2-L3 L1-L2-L3
ANSI67-1 pickup L1 [E1743] active inactive inactive active active inactive active
ANSI67-1 pickup L2 [E1744] inactive active inactive active inactive active active
ANSI67-1 pickup L3 [E1745] inactive inactive active inactive active active active
ANSI67-1 pickup [E1746] active active active active active active active

Tripping delay time of trip event ANSI67-1 trip [E1750] and phase-seggregated trip
event(s) depending on the fault loop ANSI67-1 trip L1 [E1747] and/or ANSI67-1
trip L2 [E1748] and/or ANSI67-1 trip L3 [E1749]; the working principle of the delay
time counter depends on the tripping characteristic set by parameter Pickup curve
[P2162]. Hence follows that parameter Delay Time/TMS [P2164] takes on a different
meaning, depending on the chosen tripping characteristic (DT or IDMT).

If pick-up event ANSI67-1 pick-up [E1746] and phase-seggregated pickup event(s) are
active, and Delay Time/TMS run down, trip event ANSI67-1 trip [E1750] and phase-
seggregated trip event(s) will be activated. These events can be used for alarm or
NOTE: Depending on the fault loop the phase-segregated trip event(s) ANSI67-1 trip
L1 [E1747] and/or ANSI67-1 trip L2 [E1748] and/or ANSI67-1 trip L3
[E1749] and common trip event ANSI67-1 trip [E1750] will be
activated/deactivated simultaneously.

User Manual
Table 3-15 ANSI 67 Fault loops and corresponding trip events
Fault loop
Active trip event
L1-E L2-E L3-E L1-L2 L1-L3 L2-L3 L1-L2-L3
ANSI67-1 trip L1 [E1747] active inactive inactive active active inactive active
ANSI67-1 trip L2 [E1748] inactive active inactive active inactive active active
ANSI67-1 trip L3 [E1749] inactive inactive active inactive active active active
ANSI67-1 trip [E1750] active active active active active active active
P2167 Reset limit

Pick-up reset limit of the first directional overcurrent protection element (STEP1); if the
pick-up event ANSI67-1 pickup [E1746] and phase-seggregated pickup event(s)
are active and
the characteristic quantity (phase current) falls below the pick-up value Limit and
limit,
then, pick-up event ANSI67-1 pick-up [E1746] and phase-seggregated pickup event(s)
are deactivated and the timer of the Reset delay time pick-up will start.
P2165 Reset curve

of the first step of directional overcurrent protection is optionally adjustable as:
Definite: definite time (DT);
IEC LINV: Long-term Inverse (IEC) ;

User Manual
DT: The stored counter value is to be processed according to the settings of
IDMT: The stored counter value is to be processed according to the settings of


Definite!

Delay time to reset the trip event ANSI67-1 trip [E1750] and phase-seggregated trip
event(s); the operating procedure of the timer for resetting the trip event depends on the
set characteristic of the reset curve. Hence follows that parameter Reset delay time
trip/TMS [P2168] takes on a different meaning, depending on the reset characteristic of
Reset curve (DT or IDMT) set by parameter Reset curve [P2165]:
(phase current) it will be cyclically re-calculated. When applying any inverse curve
If trip event ANSI67-1 trip [E1750] and phase-seggregated trip event(s) are activated
and Reset delay time trip/TMS has run down, the trip event ANSI67-1 trip [E1750]
and phase-seggregated trip event(s) will be deactivated.
[P2168], deactivating of trip event ANSI67-1 trip [E1750] and phase-
seggregated trip event(s) take on a different working principle.

Immediate reset of trip event ANSI67-1 trip [E1750] and phase-seggregated trip
event(s); in case that the reset curve is assigned an inverse characteristic (IDMT), then
the Reset after TRIP immediately can be activated/deactivated by parameter [P2166]
as soon as the charactristic quantity falls below the Reset Limit.
OFF: Immediate reset of trip event ANSI67-1 trip [E1750] and phase-
seggregated trip event(s) is deactivated
ON: Immediate reset of trip event ANSI67-1 trip [E1750] and phase-
seggregated trip event(s) is activated

User Manual
time (DT) characteristic (parameter Reset curve [P2165] = Definite), and the
trip event ANSI67-1 trip [E1425] and phase-seggregated trip event(s) should
immediately be reset, then set parameter Reset Delay time/TMS [P2166] =
0.
P2170 Direction mode

Selection of operating mode according to the direction of the directional overcurrent
protection; the first step of of directional overcurrent protection is optionally adjustable
as:
Non-directional: The protection step trips in forward and in backward direction
Forward: The protection step trips only in forward direction
(the absolute angle difference between phase current Ix and
reference voltage UILx ref (with: x = 1; 2, 3) is 0; the tripping
range is constructed by +/-90 along the absolute angle)
Backward: The protection step trips only in backward direction
(the absolute angle difference between phase current Ix and
reference voltage UILx ref (with: x = 1, 2, 3) is 180; the tripping
range is constructed by +/-90 along the absolute angle)
Angle: The protection step trips only in that tripping range, which is
determined by parameters Angle absolute [P2171] and
Angle relative [P2172].
Reference voltages for selection options Forward, Backward and Angle:

Phase current IL1: reference voltage UIL1 ref = U23 = U2E U3E
NOTE: In case of reference voltage loss phase-seggregated operating of directional
overcurrent protection ANSI 67G operates according to the selected option of
parameter Voltage low mode [P2176].
The following graphics represents all the different setting options of parameter Direction
mode [P2170], each an example of phase L1 (phase current IL1 and its reference
voltage UIL1 ref):

User Manual
Figure 3-171 ANSI 67: Selection of direction mode Non-directional
Figure 3-172 ANSI 67: Selection of direction mode Forward

User Manual
Figure 3-173 ANSI 67: Selection of direction mode Backward
Figure 3-174 ANSI 67: Selection of direction mode Angle

User Manual
P2171 Angle absolute

Absolute angle difference between phase current ILx and reference voltage UILx ref to
define tripping direction; setting of parameter Angle absolute [P2171] defines the
location of the direction straight which is to be used to construct the tripping range
according to the selected option of parameter Direction mode [P2172]:
Angle relative [P2172] = Forward or Angle relative [P2172] = Forward
tripping range: +/-90 or
Angle relative [P2172] = Angle:
tripping range: defined by set value of parameter Angle relative [P2172].
NOTE: Parameter Angle absolute [P2171] is not valid for parameter setting option:
Direction mode [P2170] = Non-directional !
P2172 Angle relative

Relative angle difference between the direction straight and the limiting line 1 firstly, and
secondly between the direction straight and the limitng line 2; via setting of parameter
Angle absolute [P2171] the tripping angle range is to be constructed along the direction
straight set by parameter Angle relative [P2172].
NOTE: Parameter Angle relative [P2172] is only valid for parameter setting options:
Direction mode [P2170] = Angle !

Blocking of protection element (STEP1) of directional overcurrent protection by
harmonics stabilizer ANSI 95i function for measuring values of CT1; according to the
settings of the harmonics stabilizer ANSI 95i function, the pickup of the directional
overcurrent protection may be temporarily blocked upon exceeding of defined contents
of the 2nd and/or 5th harmonic (I100Hz and/or I250Hz) in the phase current:
2H: blocking of ANSI 67-1 by ANSI 95i in case of 2nd harmonic
5H: blocking of ANSI 67-1 by ANSI 95i in case of 5th harmonic
2H/5H: blocking of ANSI 67-1 by ANSI 95i in case of 2nd or 5th harmonic

P2174 Voltage low limit

Minimum limit of the measuring voltage to activate directional overcurrent protection; as
soon as at least one measured reference voltage UILx ref falls below this minimum setting,
the operating mode of the first protection step of directional overcurrent protection
accords to the set value of parameter Voltage low mode [P2175]. For the duration of
the undercutting of the reference voltage low limit, event ANSI67-1 low voltage [E1751]
is activated.
NOTE: The minimum limit of the measuring voltage is to be set as a percentage of the
Voltage (L-L) [P623], for tertiary side W3

User Manual
P2175 Voltage low mode

Selection of operating mode in case of undercutting of the measured reference voltage
low limit which is used for determination of the phase current direction; as soon as the
measured reference voltage falls below this minimum setting at least in one phase,
corresponding event(s) ANSI67-1 Voltage low mode L1 [E1751] and/or ANSI67-1
Voltage low mode L2 [E1752] and/or ANSI67-1 Voltage low mode L3 [E1753] will be
activated, and the operating mode of first step of directional overcurrent protection is
either:
Blocked: protection step is blocked or
Non-directional: the first protection step is working non-directionally.

directional overcurrent protection; where:
in case that:
[P3465] = ON) and
o the trip event ANSI67-1 trip [E1750] and phase-seggregated trip
event(s) are become active.

Minimum trip delay time for inverse trip curves; in case of high.current faults the tripping
I/In

User Manual

Dynamic parameters can be used to adapt the protection settings of the directional overcurrent
protection function temporarily to the conditions of the electrical system. Changing of network
conditions might be caused by:
load changes,
Change-over duration between standard parameters and dynamic parameters accords to the
protection cycle time (<2ms) of the protection device.
The following dynamic STEP parameters of the directional overcurrent protection exist only
once in each of the 4 independent protection STEPS. Thus, the dynamic STEP parameters
apply only to one of the 4 protection STEPS of one parameter SET
P3179 Limit


P3182 Reset limit



P3203 Limit


P3206 Reset limit


User Manual



User Manual
Ieff/In
[P2163] Limit
[P2167] Reset limit
100%
Angle within trip range 1
0
t
[E1746]
ANSI67-1 pick-up
1
0
t
[P2164]
Delay time/TMS
t
[P2169]
t
[E1750]
ANSI 67-1 trip
0
t
[P2168]
Figure 3-176 Directional overcurrent protection Trip characteristic (DT) and Reset
characteristic (DT)

User Manual
Ieff/In
[P2163] Limit
[P2167] Reset limit
100%
0
t
[E1746]
ANSI67-1 pick-up
1
0
t
(current dependent
delay time ttrip)
t
[P2169]
t
[E1750]
ANSI 67-1 trip
0
t
[P2168]
Figure 3-177 Directional overcurrent protection Trip characteristic (IDMT) and Reset
characteristic (DT)

User Manual
Ieff/In
Limit: [P2163]
100%

0
[E1746]
ANSI67-1 pick-up t
0
t

AND
AND
(current dependent
delay time Ttrip)
t
[E1750]
ANSI 67-1 trip
1
0
t

AND
AND
(current dependent
delay time Ttrip)
t
[E1750]
ANSI 67-1 trip
1
0
t
Figure 3-178 Directional overcurrent protection Trip characteristic (IDMT) and Reset
characteristic (IDMT)

User Manual
3.4.24 ANSI 67G Directional Ground Overcurrent Protection
Main Menu\Parameters\PROTECTION\ANSI 67G Directional ground current\
STD

SET PARAMETERS
P2455 Direct. ground overcurrent OFF - ON/OFF
P2456 Blocking prot. module 0 event 0 9999
E1735 ANSI67G module active - - -
E1736 ANSI67G blocked module - - -
STEP 1
none/GND Power_CT1/
P2460 Pickup source none -
GND Power_CT2/GND Power CT-GND1
P2462 Pickup curve Definite -
P2463 Limit 50 % 5 1999,9
P2464 Delay time/TMS 0,03 s/- 0 999999,999
P2465 Reset curve Definite -
P2467 Reset limit 45 % 5 1999,9
Non-
P2470 Direction mode - Non-directional/ Angle
directional
P2471 Angle absolute 0 deg 0 359,9
P2472 Angle relative 60 deg 0 179,9
P2474 Voltage low limit % 0 200,0
P2475 Voltage low mode Blocked/Non-directional
P2479 Min. delay time 0 s 0 999999,999
E2038 ANSI67G-1 step active - - -
E2039 ANSI67G-1 blocked step - - -
E2040 ANSI67G-1 pickup - - -
E2041 ANSI67G-1 trip - - -
E2042 ANSI67G-1 low voltage - - -
STEP 2
none/GND Power_CT1/
none -
P2480 Pickup source GND Power_CT2/GND Power CT-GND1

Figure 3-179 ANSI 67G Standard (STD) protection parameters [P] and events [E] of SET 1

User Manual
DP1

STEP 1
P3227 Limit 50 % 5 1999,9
P3228 Delay time/TMS 0,03 s/- 0 999999,999
P3229 Min. delay time 0 s/- 0 999999,999
P3230 Reset limit 45 % 5 65535,5
STEP 2
P3233 Limit 20 % 0 65535,5

Figure 3-180 ANSI 67G Dynamic parameters (DP1) of protection parameters [P] of SET 1
DP2

STEP 1
P3251 Limit 50 % 5 1999,9
P3252 Delay time/TMS 0,03 s/- 0 999999,999
P3253 Min. delay time 0 s/- 0 999999,999
P3254 Reset limit 45 % 5 65535,5
STEP 2
P3257 Limit 20 % 0 65535,5

Figure 3-181 ANSI 67G Dynamic parameters (DP2) protection parameters [P] of SET 1
examples.
STD Standard protection parameters of parameter SET 1 ANSI 67G
STD SET PARAMETERS

The following SET PARAMETERS of the ground overcurrent protection exist only once in each
of the four parameter sets. Thus, the SET PARAMETERS apply to all of the 4 protection STEPS
of one parameter SET.

User Manual
P2455 Directional Overcurrent protection

This parameter enables/disables directional ground overcurrent protection where:
OFF: disables or
When directional ground overcurrent protection ANSI 67G is enabled by parameter
[P2455], then event ANSI67G module active [E2035] is activated.

Directional ground overcurrent protection can be completely blocked by any active
active. As soon as blocking is active, event ANSI67G blocked module [E2036] is
If blocking of the directional ground overcurrent protection is not required, set this
parameter to 0.

Dynamic parameters 1 of function ANSI 67G can be activated by any active event. For

Dynamic parameters 2 of function ANSI 67G can be activated by any active event. For
done in the submenu: PROTECTION\Directional ground overcurrent ANSI
67G \DPx.

The following STEP parameters of the directional ground overcurrent protection exist only once
in each of the 4 independent protection STEPS. Thus, the STEP PARAMETERS apply only to
one of the 4 protection STEPS of one parameter SET.

Depending on the SYMAP-Compact(+) device variant each protection step of
directional ground overcurrent protection can be assigned to a certain current
measurement input (CT1, CT2 or CT-GND1). Hence, parameter [P2460] determines the
ground current measurement input and its assigned residual voltage measurement input
which will provide measurement values as characteristic quantities (ground current and
phase angle between ground current and residual voltage as reference voltage) to the
directional ground overcurrent protection:
GND Power_CT1: ground current measurement by CT1 => determination
of ground current IG via calculation of total current I0

User Manual
(IG = 3 x I0 = [I1 + I2 + I3 ]) and

determination of ground current direction by additionally
measured residual voltage UG via the assigned voltage
[P9419].
(IG = 3 x I0 = [I1 + I2 + I3 ]) and
[P9422].
GND Power CT-GND1: ground current measurement by CT-GND1 and
[P9428].
GND1) to the ground current measurement input CT1, CT2 or CT-GND1 is to
be done by the following parameters (referring to the setting options of
parameter [P2460]), in the submenu SYSTEM\Measuring\Power:
To measure ground current direction correctly, the required energy flow
direction is to be defined by following parameters:
For settings GND Power_CT1, GND Power_CT2,or GND Power_CT-GND1 event

ANSI67G-1 step acitve [E2038] is activated.
potential!
In case that residual voltage is to be calculated by voltage measuring via PT1,
PT2 or PT3 it is required to take into account 180 compared to directly
measured residual voltage via PT-GND1!

The first step of directional ground overcurrent protection can be blocked by any active
active. As soon as blocking is active, event ANSI67G-1 blocked step [E2039] is

User Manual
If blocking of the first step of directional ground overcurrent protection is not required, set
P2462 Pick-up curve

characteristic of the first step of directional ground overcurrent protection is optionally
adjustable as:

User Manual

Curve
type

tr
k t r (G ) TMS
t (G ) TMS c
Designating
1 G

G
1
G
S

GS
k c tr
[s] [s] - [s] -
whereby:

User Manual
P2463 Limit
Pick-up value of the first directional ground overcurrent protection element (STEP1); at
the moment that the characteristic quantity (phase current) exceeds this limit and the
characteristic angle between ground current and residual voltage as reference voltage is
located within the trip angle range, ANSI67G-1 pick-up [E2040] will become active, and
Delay time/TMS of the first directional ground overcurrent protection element will start.

User Manual
In case that the characteristic quantity (ground current) falls below Limit or the
characteristic angle is out the trip angle range of the first directional ground overcurrent
protection element before Delay time/TMS has run down, the timer of Delay time/TMS
will be stopped and the attained time value is being safed.


Tripping delay time of trip event ANSI67G-1 trip [E2041]; the working principle of the

If pick-up event ANSI67G-1 pickup [E2040] is active and Delay Time/TMS run down,
trip event ANSI67G-1 trip [E2041] will be activated. This event can be used for alarm
or output control purposes.
P2467 Reset limit

Pick-up reset limit of the first directional ground overcurrent protection element (STEP1);
if the
pick-up event ANSI67G-1 pickup [E2040] is active and
the characteristic quantity (ground current) falls below the pick-up value Limit and
the characteristic quantity (ground current) falls below the pick-up reset value Reset
limit,
then, pick-up event ANSI67G-1 pick-up [E2040] is deactivated and the timer of the
Reset delay time pick-up will start.

User Manual

P2465 Reset curve

of the first step of directional ground overcurrent protection is optionally adjustable as:
Definite: definite time (DT);
IEC LINV: Long-term Inverse (IEC) ;
DT: The stored counter value is to be processed according to the settings of
IDMT: The stored counter value is to be processed according to the settings of


Definite!

Delay time to reset the trip event ANSI67G-1 trip [E2041]; the operating procedure of
the timer for resetting the trip event depends on the set characteristic of the reset curve.

User Manual
(ground current) it will be cyclically re-calculated. When applying any inverse curve
If trip event ANSI67G-1 trip [E2041] is activated and Reset delay time trip/TMS has
run down, the trip event ANSI67G-1 trip [E2041] will be deactivated.
[P2468], deactivating of trip event ANSI67G-1 trip [E2041] takes on a

Immediate reset of trip event ANSI67G-1 trip [E2041]; in case that the reset curve is
assigned an inverse characteristic (IDMT), then the Reset after TRIP immediately can
be activated/deactivated by parameter [P2466] as soon as the charactristic quantity falls
below the Reset Limit.
OFF: Immediate reset of trip event ANSI67G-1 trip [E2041] is deactivated
ON: Immediate reset of trip event ANSI67G-1 trip [E2041] is activated
the trip event ANSI67G-1 trip [E2041] should immediately be reset, then set
parameter Reset Delay time/TMS [P2466] = 0.

Selction of operating mode according to the direction of the directional overcrrent
protection; the first step of of directional overcurrent protection is optionally adjustable
as:
Angle: The protection step trips only in that tripping range, which is
determined by parameters Angle absolute [P2471] and Angle
relative [P2472].
The following graphics represents all the different setting options of parameter Direction
mode [P2470], each an example of phase L1 (ground current IG and residual voltage UG
as its voltage reference):

User Manual
Figure 3-183 ANSI 67G: Selection of direction mode Non-directional
Figure 3-184 ANSI 67G: Selection of direction mode Angle
P2471 Angle absolute

Absolute angle difference between ground current and residual voltage to define tripping
direction; setting of parameter Angle absolute [P2471] defines the location of the
direction straight which is to be used to construct the tripping angle range (by parameter
Angle relative [P2472]).

User Manual
P2472 Angle relative

Relative angle difference between the direction straight and the limiting line 1 firstly, and
secondly between the direction straight and the limitng line 2; via setting of parameter
Angle absolute [P2471] the tripping angle range is to be constructed along the direction
straight set by parameter Angle relative [P2472].

Blocking of protection element (STEP1) of directional ground overcurrent protection by
harmonics stabilizer ANSI 95i function for measuring values of ground current;
according to the settings of the harmonics stabilizer ANSI 95i function, the pickup of
the directional ground overcurrent protection may be temporarily blocked upon
exceeding of defined contents of the 2nd and/or 5th harmonic (I100Hz and/or I250Hz) in the
ground current:
OFF: blocking of ANSI 67G-1 by ANSI 95i is deactivated
2H: blocking of ANSI 67G -1 by ANSI 95i in case of 2nd harmonic
5H: blocking of ANSI 67G -1 by ANSI 95i in case of 5th harmonic
2H/5H: blocking of ANSI 67G -1 by ANSI 95i in case of 2nd or 5th harmonic

P2474 Voltage low limit

Minimum limit of the measuring voltage to activate directional ground overcurrent
protection; as soon as the measured reference voltage (residual voltage) falls below this
minimum setting, the operating mode of the first protection step of directional ground
overcurrent protection accords to the set value of parameter Voltage low mode
[P2475]. For the duration of the undercutting of the reference voltage low limit, event
ANSI67G-1 low voltage [E2042] is activated.
nominal value of the characteristic quantity (residual voltage). The nominal
Ground voltage [P626], for tertiary side W3 .

P2475 Voltage low mode

Selection of operating mode in case of undercutting of the measured reference voltage
low limit which is used for determination of the ground current direction; as soon as the
measured reference voltage (residual voltage) falls below this minimum setting, event
ANSI67G-1 low voltage [E2042] will be activated, and the operating mode of first step
of directional ground overcurrent protection accords either to:
Blocked: protection step is blocked or to
Non-directional: the first protection step is working non-directionally,
depending on the set value of parameter [P2475].

User Manual
directional ground overcurrent protection; where:
in case that:
[P3465] = ON) and
o the trip event ANSI67G-1 trip [E2041] becomes active.

Minimum trip delay time for inverse trip curves; in case of high.current faults the tripping
delay time could be too less for the application. To avoid this, a minimum trip delay time
can be set by parameter Min. delay time [P2479]
[P2479] Min.delay time
I/In

Dynamic parameters can be used to adapt the protection settings of the directional ground
overcurrent protection function temporarily to the conditions of the electrical system. Changing
of network conditions might be caused by:
load changes,

User Manual
The following dynamic STEP parameters of the directional overcurrent protection exist only
once in each of the 4 independent protection STEPS. Thus, the dynamic STEP parameters
apply only to one of the 4 protection STEPS of one parameter SET
P3227 Limit


P3230 Reset limit



P3251 Limit


P3254 Reset limit



See description of parameter [P2469

User Manual
IGND eff/In
[P2463] Limit
[P2467] Reset limit
0%
Angle within tripping range1
0
t
[E2040]
ANSI 67G-1 pickup
1
0
t
[P2464]
Delay time/TMS
t
[P2469]
t
[E2041]
ANSI 67G-1 trip
0
t
[P2468]
Figure 3-186 Directional ground overcurrent protection Trip characteristic (DT) and Reset
characteristic (DT)

User Manual
IGND eff/In
[P2463] Limit
[P2467] Reset limit
0%
t
Angle witin tripping range 1
0
t
[E2040]
ANSI 67G-1 pickup
1
0
t
(current dependent
delay time ttrip)
t
[P2469]
t
[E2041]
ANSI 67G-1 trip
0
t
[P2468]
Figure 3-187 Directional ground overcurrent protection Trip characteristic (IDMT) and Reset
characteristic (DT)

User Manual
IGND eff/In
Limit: [P2463]
0%
t
Angle within tripping range 1

0
[E2040]
ANSI 67G-1 pickup t
0
t

AND
AND
(current dependent
delay time Ttrip)
t
[E2041]
ANSI 67G-1 trip
1
0
t

AND
AND
(current dependent
delay time Ttrip)
t
[E2041]
ANSI 67G-1 trip
1
0
t
Figure 3-188 Directional ground overcurrent protection Trip characteristic (IDMT) and Reset
characteristic (IDMT)

User Manual
3.4.25 ANSI 74TC Trip Circuit Supervision
ANSI 74TC Trip circuit supervision

SET PARAMETERS
P2867 Mode Both - Both/Closed/Open
P2868 ON Feedback 6010 event 0 9999
P2869 OFF Feedback 6011 event 0 9999
P2670 Dealy time 5 s 0 6553,5
E2235 ANSI74TC active - - -
E2236 ANSI74TC blocked - - -
E2237 ANSI74TC pickup - - -
E2238 ANSI74TC trip - - -
Figure 3-189 ANSI 74TC Protection parameters [P] and events [E] of SET 1
Protection parameters of parameter of SET 1 ANSI 74TC
SET PARAMETERS
P2865 Function
This parameter enables/disables trip circuit supervision function where:
OFF: disables or
When trip circuit supervision ANSI74TC is enabled by parameter [P2865], then event
ANSI74TC active [E2235] is activated.
P2866 Blocking
Trip circuit supervision function can be completely blocked by any active event. For
soon as blocking is active, event ANSI74TC blocked [E2236] is activated. If the
blocking event turns inactive, blocking is abandoned and automatic reclosing (AR)
If blocking of trip circuit supervision ANSI74TC function is not required, set this
parameter to 0.

User Manual
Working principle of a Circuit breaker (CB) trip circuit supercision
For supervision of the CB trip circuit (circuit includes the binary output e.g. Shunt 1 of the
protective relais and the CB trip coil) two binary inputs are applied. Depending on the
connection with the auxiliary contacts of the CB (one normal open aux. contact: 52-a, and one
normal closed aux. contact: 52-b) the signal states of the binary inputs give conclusion about
an interrupted trip circuit.
NOTE: Function ANSI 74TC is only for trip circuit supervision of one breaker!
Table 3-17 Trip circuit supervision Signal states and supervision modes
Signal state of assigned events Supervision mode

ON Feedback [P2868] = [E4010] OFF Feedback [P2869] = [E4024] Both Closed Open
0 0 -
0 1 - - -
1 0 - - -
1 1 -
CAUTION: Please ensure that the trip coil is included in the supervised circuit!
To protect the hardware of SYMAP-Compact(+) against any disturbances by
high cut-off voltage of inductive components (e.g. auxiliary relays, CB trip coil,
etc.) connected to the binary inputs and/or binary outputs of SYMAP-
Compact(+), the inductive components must be equipped with a flywheel diodes
(DC voltage) or varistors (AC voltage)!
Depending on the different hardware versions, see the following connection diagrams as
examples:

User Manual
Hardware version v1-1.x
CAUTION: For correct operating of function ANSI74TC the polarity of the connected binary
inputs must accord to the following connection diagrams!
All of the binary inputs may be used for function ANSI 74TC.
CB position: OPEN
SYMPAP-Compact(+)
L
Binary output: (Shunt 1")
X2.3: 30 Binary input: (e.g. Fct. 10")
X2.3: 44 GND2
X2.5: 65 GND2

L+
A B
Free-
wheeling
diode!
52-a 52-b
CB
CB aux.
contacts
52 trip coil
Figure 3-190 HW v1-1.x: Trip circuit supervision example of a connected trip circuit: CB open
When signal line A is broken while CB is open this will be indicated by function ANSI 74TC not
before the CB is switched on. Wire break of line B will be indicated when the CB is open.

User Manual
CB position: CLOSED
SYMPAP -Compact(+)
L
X2.3: 44 GND2
X2.5: 65 GND2

L+
A B
Free-
wheeling
diode!
52-a 52-b
CB
CB aux.
contacts
52 trip coil
Figure 3-191 HW v1-1.x: Trip circuit supervision example of a connected trip circuit: CB closed
When signal line A is broken while CB is closed this will be indicated immediately by function
ANSI 74TC. Wire break of line B will be indicated not before the CB is switched off.

User Manual
Hardware version v1-2.x (not available yet!)
CAUTION: For correct operating of function ANSI74TC the polarity of the connected binary
inputs must accord to the following connection diagrams!
For connection example below binary inputs Fct. 26 and Fct. 27 have to be
used for function ANSI 74TC!
CB position: OPEN
SYMPAP-Compact(+)
L+
X2.3: 30 GND 10
X2.3: 31 Binary input: Fct. 26"
X2.3: 32 GND 11

L
A B
Free-
wheeling
diode!
52-a 52-b
CB
CB aux.
contacts
52 trip coil
Figure 3-192 HW v1-2.x: Trip circuit supervision example of a connected trip circuit: CB open
When signal line A is broken while CB is open this will be indicated by function ANSI 74TC not
before the CB is switched on. Wire break of line B will be indicated when the CB is open.

User Manual
CB position: CLOSED
SYMPAP -Compact(+)
L+
X2.3: 30 GND 10
X2.3: 32 GND 11

L
A B
Free-
wheeling
diode!
52-a 52-b
CB
CB aux.
contacts
52 trip coil
Figure 3-193 HW v1-2.x: Trip circuit supervision example of a connected trip circuit: CB closed
When signal line A is broken while CB is closed this will be indicated immediately by function
ANSI 74TC. Wire break of line B will be indicated not before the CB is switched off.
P2867 Mode
Supervision mode of the evaluation logic referring to the binary inputs; whereby setting:
Both: checks the equality of signal states 0 / 0 and 1 / 1
Closed: checks only the equality of signal states 1 / 1
Open: checks only the equality of signal states 0 / 0
At the time the signal states 0 / 0 or 1 / 1 are detected, event ANSI 74TC pickup
[E2237] is activated, and the Delay time [P2870] is being started.
P2868 ON Feedback
Binary input to indicate the closed auxiliary contact of the CB; the event of the binary
input which indicates the closed auxiliary contact of the CB is to be assigned to this
parameter.
P2869 OFF Feedback

Binary input to indicate the open auxiliary contact of the CB; the event of the binary input
which indicates the open auxiliary contact of the CB is to be assigned to this parameter.
P2870 Delay time

User Manual
Trip delay time; it is the delay time of the trip event ANSI74TC trip [E2238].
As soon as:
function Trip circuit supervision is activated by parameter [P2865] and
signal states 0 / 0 or 1 / 1 are detected by the binary inputs and
blocking of function Trip circuit supervision is not activated by the blocking event
of parameter [P2562]
the pick-up event ANSI 74TC pickup [E2237] is activated and Delay time is being
started.
As soon as the pick-up event ANSI 74TC pickup [E2237] is active and Delay time run
control purposes. Right after protection trip, and, as soon as faulty conditions will no
longer be existent, pick-up event [E2237] and trip event [E2238] are being deactivated
automatically.

User Manual
3.4.26 ANSI 78 Vector Surge Protection
ANSI 78 Vector surge

SET PARAMETERS
P1860 Vector surge OFF - ON/OFF
STEP 1
P1868 Min. start voltage delay time 2 s 0 999999,999
P1869 Pickup mode OR - OR/AND
P1870 Limit 6 deg 0 25
P1871 K1 1 - 0 999,9
P1872 Direction none - none/positive/negative
P1874 Current source none - none/CT1/CT2
P1875 Current increase 0 % 0 1999,9
P1876 Current increase time 2 s 0 999999,999
E1578 ANSI78-1 blocked by min. start voltage - - -
E1580 ANSI78-1 trip - - -
STEP 2

examples.
SET PARAMETERS
The following SET PARAMETERS of the vector surge protection exist only once in all four
parameter SET.

User Manual
P1860 Vector surge

This parameter enables/disables vector surge protection where:
OFF: disables or
below the circuit breaker, and which is open, then, vector surge protection
must be blocked by a suitable event. For this, the related number of such
blocking event has to be assigned to parameter [P1861].
When vector surge protection ANSI78 is enabled by parameter [P1860], then event

Vector surge protection can be completely blocked by any active event. For blocking, the
If blocking of the vector surge protection is not required, set this parameter to 0.

The following STEP parameters of the vector surge protection exist only once in each of the 3
P1865 Pickup source

Depending on the SYMAP-Compact(+) device variant every protection step of vector
surge protection can be assigned to a certain voltage measurement input (PT1, PT2 or
PT3). Parameter [P1865] determines the voltage measurement input which will provide
measurement values as characteristic quantities (voltage angle difference ) to the
vector surge protection:

The first step of vector surge protection can be blocked by any active event. For
If blocking of the first step of vector surge protection is not required, set this parameter to
0.

Minimum limit of the measuring voltage to activate vector surge protection; the first
protection step of vector surge protection is blocked as long as the measured voltage

User Manual
remains below this minimum setting at least in one phase. For the duration of blocking
event ANSI78-1 blocked step by min. start voltage [E1578] is activated.
P1868 Min. start voltage delay time

Delay time to reset the blocking of vector surge protection after voltage restoration; as
soon as the minimum limit Min. start voltage [P1867] is exceeded after a preceded
voltage restoration, the counter Min. start voltage delay time [P1868] starts. Once the
time has elapsed the counter is set to zero, the blocking of vector surge protection is
deactivated, and event ANSI78-1 blocked step by min. start voltage [E1578] is
deactivated.
Application: Min. start voltage delay time is used to detect a stable voltage
restoration.
P1869 Pickup mode

Selection of pickup condition for vector surge protection; the following selection options
are available:
OR: In case that at least in one phase the maximum permissible voltage angle
difference max (parameter Limit [P1870] and K1 [P1871]) is exceeded
and no blocking is active, then pickup event ANSI78-1 pick-up [E1579] is
being activated.
AND: In case that in all three phases the maximum permissible voltage angle
difference max (parameter Limit [P1870] and K1 [P1871]) is exceeded
and no blocking is active, then pickup event ANSI78-1 pick-up [E1579] is
being activated.
NOTE: Selection option OR is only capable for device variants built according to
ordering option G59!
P1871 K1
Correction factor to adjust the maximum permissible voltage angle difference (vector
surge) dependent of the grid impedance; multiplcation of the correction factor K1
[P1871] by the setting of parameter Limit [P1870] gives the maximum permissible
voltage angle difference max as the limit for vector surge protection.
Max. permissible voltage angle difference max = Limit [P1870] x K1 [P1871]
Typical rates are:

K1 = 1,0 Correction factor for low impedance grid, and
K1 = 1,66 2,0 Correction factor for high impedance grid.
P1870 Limit
Pick-up value of vector surge protection; as soon as the characterisitc quantity (voltage
angle difference ):

User Manual
exceeds the set value of the maximum permissible voltage angle difference max
(parameter Limit [P1864] and K1 [P1865]), and
no blocking event (parameter Blocking protection module [P1861]) is active, and
no blocking event (parameter Blocking protection step [P1866]) is active, and
no blocking by insufficient voltage (parameter Min. start voltage [P1867]) is active
the pick-up event ANSI78-1 pick-up [E1579] is activated. Dependent on

activation/deactivation of the Current increase monitoring trip event ANSI78-1 trip
[E1580] is to be activated as follows:
Current increase monitoring is deactivated: Parameter [P1874] Current source =
none:
At the same time as activating the pick-up event [E1579], trip event ANSI78-1 trip
[E1580] is activated, and the counter of Reset delay time trip starts. This event can
be used for alarm or output control purposes.
Current increase monitoring is activated: Parameter [P1874] Current source =
CT1 or CT2:
At the same time as activating the pick-up event [E1579], the counter Current
increase time [P1876] starts. While counting, the active state of the pick-up event
[E1579] is being saved.
1st case: The current value falls below the set value of parameter [P1875]:
As soon as the counter Current increase time has run down, pick-up
event [E1579] is activated; trip event ANSI78-1 trip [E1580] is not being
activated.
nd
2 case: The current value exceeds the set value of parameter [P1875]:
As soon as the counter Current increase time has run down, trip event
ANSI78-1 trip [E1580] is activated, and counter Reset delay time trip
starts. After the counter Reset delay time trip has run down, the active
state of pick-up event [E1579] is being reset.
P1872 Direction
Operating direction of vector surge protection protection; the working principle in view of
the vector surge direction ( > 0 => positive vector surge; < 0 => negative vector
surge) can be chosen by the following setting options of parameter Direction [P1872]:
none: supervision for the max. permissible voltage angle difference max
independent of a positive or negative vector surge
positive: supervision for a positive voltage angle difference
negative: supervision for a neagative voltage angle difference

Delay time for resetting the trip event ANSI78-1 trip [E1580]; after the counter Reset
delay time trip has run down, trip event [E1580] and the pick-up event [E1579] are being
deactivated.
P1875 Current increase

Minimum limit for detecting an inclining/declining phase current (current increase
monitoring function as an additional criterion to the vector surge protection); a vector
surge, caused by a grid fault, either leads to an increase or a decrease of the generator
load flow. Thus, function current increase monitoring can be used to detect such vector
surge safely. Here, the phase current values at the time of vector surge are compared
with the phase current values after the set Current increase time [P1876] has run
down. In case that the phase current difference exceeds the set value Current increase
[P1875] after the Current increase time [P1876] has run down, then, trip event
ANSI78-1 trip [E1580] is activated.

User Manual
NOTE: The minimum limit for detecting an inclining/declining phase current is to be

set as a percentage of the nominal value of the characteristic quantity (phase
current). The nominal value of the characteristic quantity is to be set by
parameter:
P1876 Current increase time

Maximum time window of current increase monitoring; as soon as pick-up event
ANSI78-1 pick-up [E1579] is activated, the counter Current increase time [P1876]
starts.
P1874 Current source

Depending on the SYMAP-Compact(+) device variant, function current increase
monitoring of every protection step can be assigned to a certain current measurement
input (CT1 or CT2):
none: function current increase monitoring is deactivated,
CT1: function current increase monitoring is assigned to current input CT1
CT2: function current increase monitoring is assigned to current input CT2

User Manual
3.4.27 ANSI 79 Automatic Reclose (AR)
ANSI 79 Automatic reclosing

GENERAL
P2675 Enable OFF - ON/OFF
P2676 Block 0 event 0 9999
P2677 Lock 0 event 0 9999
P2678 Unlock 0 event 0 9999
SETTING 1
P2679 Activate 0 event 0 9999
P2680 1. Pause time 0,3 s 0 655,35
P2681 2. Pause time 0,5 s 0 655,35
P2682 3. Pause time 0,8 s 0 655,35
P2683 4. Pause time 1,3 s 0 655,35
P2684 5. Pause time 1,5 s 0 655,35
P2685 6. Pause time 1,8 s 0 655,35
P2686 7. Pause time 2,3 s 0 655,35
P2687 8. Pause time 2,8 s 0 655,35
SETTING 2
P2688 Activate 0 event 0 9999
P2689 1. Pause time 0,5 s 0 655,35
P2690 2. Pause time 1 s 0 655,35
P2691 3. Pause time 2 s 0 655,35
P2692 4. Pause time 3 s 0 655,35
P2693 5. Pause time 4 s 0 655,35
P2694 6. Pause time 5 s 0 655,35
P2695 7. Pause time 6 s 0 655,35
P2696 8. Pause time 7 s 0 655,35
RECLOSING
P2697 Breaker close command time 0,1 s 0 655,35
P2698 Breaker close success time 0,5 s 0 655,35
P2699 Off-time 10 s 0 655,35
FEEDBACKS
P2700 Breaker closed 6111 event 0 9999
P2701 Breaker ready 0 event 0 9999
E2160 ANSI79 ready - - -
E2161 ANSI79 blocked - - -
E2162 ANSI79 locked - - -
E2163 ANSI79 cycle - - -
E2164 ANSI79 1. Pause time - - -
E2172 ANSI79 Breaker close command - - -
E2173 ANSI79 Breake close success time - - -
E2174 ANSI79 Success - - -
E2175 ANSI79 Fail - - -
E2176 ANSI79 Off-time - - -
Figure 3-195 ANSI 79 Parameter set 1: Protection parameters [P] and Events [E]

User Manual
Protection parameters of parameter of SET 1 ANSI 79
General parameters (GENERAL)

General parameters apply to activating and blocking of function Automatic Reclosing (AR).
P2675 Enable
This parameter enables/disables Automatic Reclose (AR) where:
OFF: disables or
When Automatic Reclose (AR) ANSI 79 is enabled by parameter [P2675], then event
ANSI79 Ready [E2160] is activated.
P2675 Block
Automatic Reclose (AR) function can be completely blocked by any active event. For
soon as blocking is active, event ANSI79 Blocked [E2161] is activated. If the blocking
If blocking of function Automatic Reclose (AR) is not required, set this parameter to 0.
P2676 Lock
An already running AR-cycle of Automatic Reclose (AR) function can be interrupted
(lcked) by any active event. For this, the number related to this locking event has to be
assigned to parameter [P2676]. As soon as locking is active, event ANSI79 Locked
[E2161] is activated. When the locking event becomes inactive, then the AR-cycle
remains interrupted.
If locking of an AR-cycle of function Automatic Reclose (AR) is not required, set this
parameter to 0.
P2677 Unlock
An already active but interrupted AR-cycle f Automatic Reclose (AR) function can be
released (unlocked) by any active event. For this, the number related to this unlocking
event has to be assigned to parameter [P2677]. As soon as the release event is active,
the locked AR-cycle is being continued, and event ANSI79 Locked [E2161] is
deactivated.
CAUTION: In the event that locking of an AR-Cycle is foreseen in the application,
please ensure that a corresponding unlocking event is being
assigned to parameter Unlock [P2677]!
Parameters of an AR-cycle e.g. for phase faults (SETTINGS 1)

The following parameters [P2678] to [P2687] apply to an AR-cycle which was started by the
event which is assigned to parameter [P2678]

User Manual
P2679 Activate
The AR-cycle of Automatic Reclose (AR) function can be activated by any active event.
As soon as the assigned is active, the AR-cycle is started and event ANSI79 Cycle
If an event-activation of an AR-cycle of function Automatic Reclose (AR) is not required,
P2680 1. Pause time

First pause time between activation of the event assigned to parameter [2679] and the
first automatic reclosing attempt; at the time the activation-event becomes active, the
first pause time set by parameter 1. Pause time [P2680] is started and event 1. Pause
time [E2689] is activated.
P2681 2. Pause time

(description is analog to description of 1.pause time)
P2682 3. Pause time

P2683 4. Pause time

P2684 5. Pause time

P2685 6. Pause time

P2686 7. Pause time

P2687 8. Pause time


User Manual
Parameters of an AR-cycle e.g. for earth faults (SETTINGS 2)

The following parameters [P2688] to [P2696] apply to an AR-cycle which was started by the
event which is assigned to parameter [P2688]
P2688 Activate
The AR-cycle of Automatic Reclose (AR) function can be activated by any active event.
As soon as the assigned is active, the AR-cycle is started and event ANSI79 Cycle
If an event-activation of an AR-cycle of function Automatic Reclose (AR) is not required,
P2689 1. Pause time

First pause time between activation of the event assigned to parameter [2689] and the
first automatic reclosing attempt; at the time the activation-event becomes active, the
first pause time set by parameter 1. Pause time [P2690] is started and event ANSI 79
1. Pause time [E2164] is activated.
P2690 2. Pause time

P2691 3. Pause time

P2692 4. Pause time

P2693 5. Pause time

P2694 6. Pause time

P2695 7. Pause time

P2696 8. Pause time

Parameters for auto-reclosing (RECLOSING)
P2697 Breaker close command time

Impuls duration for the reclosing command to the CB; when an active pause time has
run down, closing-event ANSI79 Breaker close command [E2172] is activated. This
event can be used for alarm or output control purposes.
Simultaneously,
the counter of the impuls duration set by parameter Breaker close command time
[P2697] and
the counter of the reclosing success supervision set by parameter Breaker success
time [P2698] are started and
event Breaker close success time [E2173] is activated.
P2698 Breaker close success time

User Manual
Supervision time for a successful reclosing attempt; when the success time set by
parameter [P2698] run down, function Automatic reclosing (AR) checks wether the CB
is closed.
Hereby, the following cases have to be taken into account:
Automatic reclosing attempt was successful

The CB is closed; events ANSI79 Success [E2174] and ANSI79 Off-time [E2176] are
activated. Simultaneously, the counter of the AR-blocking-time set by parameter Off-
time [P2699] is activated.
Automatic reclosing attempt was unsuccessful

The CB is open again (by further protection trip) and if configured the second pause
time set by parameter 2. Pause time [P2681] is being started. The procedure for the
second automatic reclosing attempt follows the rules mentioned above. In case that
second AR-attempt was unsuccessful, it is concuded a permanent fault and event
ANSI79 Ready [E2160] remains inactive.
NOTE: In case of a permanent fault, event ANSI79 Fail [E2175] is activated when
the AR-cycle has finished.
P2699 Off-time
Blocking time after the last AR-attempt; at the time the off-time run down, the events
ANSI79 Off-time [E2176] and ANSI79 Cycle [E2163] are deactivated and event
ANSI79 Ready [E2160] is activated.
Event ANSI79 Success [E2174] can be deactivated by command ACK (e.g. by
operating the function key at the front panel)
Parameters for indication CB ready state and CB position feedback of ON-position
P2700 Breaker closed

Event-parameter to indicate CB position closed; for this, the number related to this
event has to be assigned to parameter [P2700].
NOTE: Preferably, one of the position event numbers [E6010], [E6020], [E6030],
[E6040], [E6050], [E6060], [E6070] or [E6080] should be used to indicate CB
position ON-Feedback.
P2701 Breaker ready

Additional pre-condition option for any AR-attempt; as an additional pre-comndition for
activating event ANSI79 Breaker close command [E2172], the event number of the
binary input, which indicates the CB readyness for closing by signalling a charged
spring of the CB, can be assigned to parameter [P2701].

User Manual
[E2160]
ANSI 79 ready
1
0
[P2679]
ANSI79 Activate Trigger-Event t
1
0
t
[E2163]
ANSI79 Cycle 1
0
t
[P2680]
1. Pause time
[E2164] t
ANSI79 1. Pause time
1
[P2697] t
Breaker close command
time
[E2172] t
ANSI 79 Breaker close
command 1
[P2698]
t
Breaker close success
time
[E2173] t
ANSI 79 Breaker close
success time 1
0
[P2700] t
Breaker closed Feedback event number: ON feedback [E6010]
1
0
t
[P2681]
2. Pause time
[E2165] t
ANSI79 2. Pause time
1
0
[E2174] t
ANSI 79 Success
1
0
[E2175] t
ANSI 79 Fail
1
0
t
[P2699] Off-time
[E2176] t
ANSI 79 Off-time
1
Function Ack
t
0
t
Figure 3-196 Automatic reclosing (AR) functional scheme

User Manual
3.4.28 ANSI 81 Frequency Protection
ANSI 81 Under/Over Frequency

SET PARAMETERS
P1325 Frequency protection ON - ON/OFF
STEP 1
P1334 Limit 51 Hz 0 80,00
P1335 Delay time 2 s 0 999999,999
P1336 Reset limit 50,1 Hz 0 80,00
E1256 ANSI81-1 blocked step by min. start voltage - - -
E1258 ANSI81-1 trip
STEP 2

examples.
SET PARAMETERS
The following SET PARAMETERS of the frequency protection exist only once in each of the
one parameter SET.
P1325 Frequency protection

This parameter enables/disables frequency protection where:
OFF: disables or

User Manual
below the circuit breaker, and which is open, then, undervoltage protection
must be blocked by a suitable event. For this, the related number of such
blocking event has to be assigned to parameter [P1326].
When frequency protection ANSI 81 is enabled by parameter [P1325], then event


Frequency protection can be completely blocked by any active event. For blocking, the
If blocking of the frequency protection is not required, set this parameter to 0.
The following STEP parameters of the frequency protection exist only once in each of the 12
NOTE: The operating mode of each protection STEPcan be adjusted seperately either as
*over frequency protection or as under frequency protection. Changing the option
can be done by parameter Limit [P1334].
Protection STEP 1 Over frequency

frequency protection can be assigned to a certain voltage measurement input (PT1, PT2
or PT3). Parameter [P1331] determines the voltage measurement input which will
provide measurement values as characteristic quantities (frequency) to the frequency
protection:
none: no frequency measurement; protection step is deactivated
CAUTION: SYMAP-Compact(+) device variants which were built according to

ordering option G59:
do not provide frequency measurement via voltage measurement input
PT3!
do provide phase-seggregated frequency measurement (zero
crossings of phase voltages) only at voltage measurement input PT2!

The first step of frequency protection can be blocked by any active event. For blocking,

User Manual
blocking is active, event ANSI81-1 blocked step [E1255] is activated. If the blocking
If blocking of the first step of over frequency protection is not required, set this parameter
to 0.

Minimum limit of the measuring voltage to activate frequency protection; the first
protection step of frequency protection is blocked as long as the measured value of the
characteristic quantity (frequency) remains below this minimum setting at least in one
NOTE: The minimum limit of the measuring voltage to activate frequency protection is
to be set as a percentage of the nominalvalue of the characteristic quantity
(phase-to-phase voltage). The nominal value of the characteristic quantity is to
P1334 Limit
Pick-up value of the first frequency protection element. At the moment that the
characteristic quantity (frequency) exceeds this limit, pick-up event ANSI81-1 pickup
[E1257] will become active, and the trip delay time (Delay time) of the first frequency
P1335 Delay time

control purposes.
In case that the characteristic quantity (frequency) falls below the pick-up value (Limit)
of the first frequency protection step before the trip delay time (Delay time) has run
down, the timer of Delay time will be stopped and the counter value is being saved. If
the characteristic quantity subsequently falls below the Reset limit, then, the Reset
delay time pick-up timer will start and the pick-up event [E1275] will be deactivated.

time).
P1336 Reset limit

Trip reset limit of the first step of frequency protection. As soon as the trip event
ANSI81-1 trip [E1258] is active and the characteristic quantity (frequency) falls below
the Reset limit, the timer of the trip reset delay time (Reset delay time trip) will start.

[E1258].

User Manual
trip [E1258] is deactivated. In case that the characteristic quantity (frequency) exceeds
the pick-up value (Limit) of the first frequency protection element before the timer of
[P1334] limit
[P1336] reset limit
fn
t
[E1257]
ANSI81-1 pick-up
1
0
t
[P1335]
delay time
[P1338]
reset delay time
pick-up
t
[E1258]
ANSI81-1 trip
1
0
t
[P1337]
reset delay time
trip
Figure 3-198 Overfrequency tripping and reset characteristic

User Manual
Protection parameter set 1
First protection element Under frequency

frequency protection can be assigned to a certain voltage measurement input (PT1, PT2
provide measurement values as characteristic quantity (frequency) to the frequency
protection:
none: no frequency measurement; protection step is deactivated
G59:

The first step of frequency protection can be blocked by any active event. For blocking,
blocking is active, event ANSI81 blocked step [E1255] is activated. If the blocking
If blocking of the first step of undervoltage protection is not required, set this parameter
to 0.

Minimum limit of the measuring voltage to activate frequency protection; the first
protection step of frequency protection is blocked as long as the measured value of the
characteristic quantity (frequency) remains below this minimum setting at least in one
NOTE: The minimum limit of the measuring voltage to activate frequency protection is
to be set as a percentage of the nominalvalue of the characteristic quantity
(phase-to-phase voltage). The nominal value of the characteristic quantity is to

User Manual
P1334 Limit
Pick-up value of the first frequency protection element, at the moment that the
characteristic quantity (frequency) falls below this limit, pick-up event ANSI81-1 pickup
[E1257] will become active, and the trip delay time (Delay time) of the first frequency
P1335 Delay time

down, trip event ANSI81-1 trip [E1258] will be activated. This event can be used for
In case that the characteristic quantity (frequency) exceeds the pick-up value (Limit) of
the first frequency protection step before the trip delay time (Delay time) has run down,
the timer of Delay time will be stopped and the counter value is being saved. If the
characteristic quantity subsequently exceeds the Reset limit, then, the Reset delay

time).
P1336 Reset limit :

Trip reset limit of the first step of frequency protection. As soon as the trip event
ANSI81-1 trip [E1258] is active and the characteristic quantity (frequency) exceeds the
Reset limit, the timer of the trip reset delay time (Reset delay time trip) will start.
P1337 Reset delay time trip :

[E1258].
trip [E1258] is deactivated. In case that the characteristic quantity (frequency) falls
below the pick-up value (Limit) of the first frequency protection element before the
timer of Reset delay time trip has run down, the timer of Reset delay time trip will be
reset. Then trip event ANSI81-1 trip [E1258] remains active.

User Manual
fn
[P1334] reset limit
[P1336] limit
t
[E1257]
ANSI81-1 pick-up
1
0
t
[P1335]
delay time
t
[P1338]
reset delay time
pick-up
t
[E1258]
ANSI81-1 trip
1
0
t
[P1337]
reset delay time
trip
Figure 3-199 Underfrequency tripping and reset characteristic

User Manual
3.4.29 ANSI 81R Rate of Change of Frequency (RoCoF)
ANSI 81R df/dt (ROCOF)

SET PARAMETERS
P3582 Rate of Change of Frequency (RoCoF) OFF - ON/OFF
E2471 ANSI81R module active - - -
E2472 ANSI81R blocked module - - -
STEP1
P3587 Min.start voltage delay time 1 s 0 999999,999
P3588 Mode df/dt - df/dt / f>&df/dt /
f<& df/dt / f>& DF/DT /
f<&DF/DT
P3589 Direction none - none/positive/negative
P3590 f< limit 80,00 Hz 0 80,00
P3591 f> limit 0 Hz 0 80,00
P3592 df/dt limit 1 Hz/s 0 20
P3593 Hysteresis 1 Hz/s 0 20
P3594 K2 1 - 0 99,9
P3595 Delay time 1 s 0 999999,999
P3596 DF 1 Hz 0 20,00
P3597 DT 1 s 0 999999,999
P3598 Pickup mode OR - OR/AND
E2473 ANSI81R-1 step active - - -
E2474 ANSI81R-1 blocked step - - -
E2475 ANSI81R-1 pickup - - -
E2476 ANSI81R-1 trip - - -
STEP2

Figure 3-200 ANSI 81R Protection parameters [P] and events [E] of SET 1
examples.
G59:

User Manual

Protection parameters of parameter SET 1 ANSI 81R
SET PARAMETERS
The following SET PARAMETERS of the rate of change of frequency (RoCoF) protection exist
only once in each of the four parameter sets. Thus, the SET PARAMETERS apply to all of the 6
Protection parameters of parameter SET 1 ANSI 81R

The following STEP parameters of the rate of change of frequency (RoCoF) protection exist
only once in each of the 6 independent protection STEPS. Thus, the STEP PARAMETERS
apply only to one of the 6 protection STEPS of one parameter SET.
P3582 ROCOF
This parameter enables/disables rate of change of frequency (RoCoF) protection where:
OFF: disables or
below the circuit breaker, and which is open, then, rate of change of frequency
(RoCoF) protection must be blocked by a suitable event. For this, the related
number of such blocking event has to be assigned to parameter [P3583].
When rate of change of frequency (RoCoF) protection ANSI81R is enabled by

parameter [P3582], then event ANSI81R module active [E2471] is activated.

Rate of change of frequency (RoCoF) protection can be completely blocked by any
is active. As soon as blocking is active, event ANSI81R blocked module [E2472] is
If blocking of the rate of change of frequency (RoCoF) protection is not required, set this
parameter to 0.

User Manual

The following STEP parameters of the rate of change of frequency (RoCoF) protection exist
only once in each of the 6 independent protection STEPS. Thus, the STEP PARAMETERS
apply only to one of the 6 protection STEPS of one parameter SET.
P3584 Pickup source

Depending on the SYMAP-Compact(+) device variant every protection step of rate of
change of frequency (RoCoF) protection can be assigned to a certain voltage
measurement input (PT1, PT2 or PT3). Parameter [P3584] determines the voltage
measurement input which will provide measurement values as characteristic quantities
(see parameterizable protection criteria) to the vector surge protection:
For settings PT1, PT2 or PT3, event ANSI81R-1 acitve [E2473] is activated.
G59:

The first step of rate of change of frequency (RoCoF) protection can be blocked by any
is active. As soon as blocking is active, event ANSI81R-1 blocked step [E2474] is
If blocking of the first step of vector surge protection is not required, set this parameter to
0.

Minimum limit of the measuring voltage to activate rate of change of frequency (RoCoF)
protection; the first protection step of rate of change of frequency (RoCoF) protection is
blocked as long as the measured voltage remains below this minimum setting at least in
one phase. For the duration of blocking event ANSI81R-1 blocked step [E2474] is
activated.
NOTE: The minimum limit of the measuring voltage to activate rate of change of
frequency (RoCoF) protection is to be set as a percentage of the nominalvalue
of the characteristic quantity (phase-to-phase voltage). The nominal value of
the characteristic quantity is to be set by parameter:

User Manual
P3587 Min. start voltage delay time

Delay time to reset the blocking of rate of change of frequency (RoCoF) protection after
voltage restoration; as soon as the minimum limit Min. start voltage [P3586] is
exceeded after a preceded voltage restoration, the counter Min. start voltage delay
time [P1918] starts. Once the time has elapsed the counter is set to zero, the blocking
of rate of change of frequency (RoCoF) protection is deactivated, and event ANSI81R-1
blocked step [E2474] is deactivated.
Application: Min. start voltage delay time is used to detect a stable voltage
restoration.
P3588 Mode
Selction of operating mode according to the protective criterion (characteristic quantity)
of the rate of change of frequency (RoCoF) protection; the first step of the rate of change
of frequency (RoCoF) protection is optionally adjustable. Following setting options for the
characteristic quantity are available:
df/dt: Supervision of the frequency gradient df/dt depending on:
the set value of parameter df/dt limit [P3592], and
the supervision direction of the rate of change of frequency
(positive or negative sign of the frequency gradient slope) set by
parameter Direction [P3589].
If:
the measured frequency gradient exceeds the max. permissible
frequency gradient df/dtmax set by parameter df/dt limit [P3592],
and
the sign of the measured frequency gradient slope is equal to the
set value of parameter Direction [P3589], and
no blocking event (parameter Blocking protection module
[P3583]) is active, and
no blocking event (parameter Blocking protection step [P3585])
is active, and
no blocking by insufficient voltage (parameter Min. start voltage
[P3586]) is active,
then pick-up event ANSI81R-1 pick-up [E2475] is activated, and the
counter of the trip delay time (see parameter Delay time [P3595) is
started. As soon as trip delay time run down, trip event ANSI81R-1
trip [E2476] will be activated. This event can be used for alarm or
In case that the characteristic quantity (df/dt) falls below the pick-up
value (df/dt limit Hysteresis), or the measured slope direction
differs from the set supervision direction before the trip delay time has
run down, the timer of trip delay time will be stopped and reset to
zero, and the pick-up event [E2475] will be deactivated.
f>&df/dt: Supervision of the frequency gradient df/dt depending on:
parameter Direction [P3589], and
the max. permissible frequency limit set by parameter f> limit
[P3591].
If:

User Manual
the measured frequency exceeds the max. permissible frequency

limit set by parameter f> limit [P3591], and
and
is active, and
[P3586]) is active,
In case that the measured frequency gradient df/dt falls below the
pick-value (df/dt limit Hysteresis), or the measured slope
direction differs from the set supervision direction, or the measured
frequency falls below the max. permissible frequency limit before the
trip delay time has run down, the timer of trip delay time will be
stopped and reset to zero, and the pick-up event [E2475] will be
deactivated.
f<&df/dt: Supervision of the frequency gradient df/dt depending on:
parameter Direction [P3589], and
the min. permissible frequency limit set by parameter f< limit
[P3590].
If:
the measured frequency falls below the min. permissible
frequency limit set by parameter f< limit [P3590], and
and
is active, and
[P3586]) is active,

User Manual
In case that the measured frequency gradient df/dt falls below the
pick-up value (df/dt limit), or the measured slope direction differs
from the set supervision direction, or the measured frequency
exceeds the min. permissible frequency limit before the trip delay time
has run down, the timer of trip delay time will be stopped and reset to
zero, and the pick-up event [E2475] will be deactivated.
f>&DF/DT: Supervision of frequency change (time-depending frequency change)
depending on:
the max. permissible frequency limit set by parameter f> limit
[P3591], and
the max. permissible frequency change set by parameter DF
[P3596], and
the supervision time set by parameter DT [P3597], and
If:
is active, and
as soon as the measured frequency exceeds the max.
permissible frequency limit set by parameter f> limit [P3591],
then the pick-up event ANSI81R-1 pick-up [E2475] is activated, and
the counter of the supervision time DT is started.
While the supervision time DT is active, the frequency difference is
calculated form each actual measured frequency value and the
frequency value set by parameter f> limit [P3591]. When the amount
of the frequency difference |DF| exceeds the set value of parameter
DF [P3596], trip event ANSI81R-1 trip [E2476] will be activated.
This event can be used for alarm or output control purposes.
In case that the measured frequency falls below the max. permissible
frequency limit before the supervision time DT has run down, the
timer of trip delay time will be stopped and reset to zero, and the pick-
up event [E2475] will be deactivated.
f<&DF/DT: Supervision of frequency change (time-depending frequency change)
depending on:
the min. permissible frequency limit set by parameter f< limit
[P3590], and
the max. permissible frequency change set by parameter DF
[P3596], and
the supervision time set by parameter DT [P3597], and
If:
is active, and

User Manual

as soon as the measured frequency exceeds the min.
permissible frequency limit set by parameter f< limit [P3590],
then the pick-up event ANSI81R-1 pick-up [E2475] is activated, and
the counter of the supervision time DT is started.
While the supervision time DT is active, the frequency difference is
calculated form each actual measured frequency value and the
frequency value set by parameter f< limit [P3590]. When the amount
of the frequency difference |DF| exceeds the set value of parameter
DF [P3596], trip event ANSI81R-1 trip [E2476] will be activated.
In case that the measured frequency exceeds the min. permissible
frequency limit before the supervision time DT has run down, the
timer of trip delay time will be stopped and reset to zero, and the pick-
up event [E2475] will be deactivated.
P3589 Direction
Operating direction of rate of change of frequency (RoCoF) protection; the working
principle in view of the frequency slope direction (df/dt > 0 => positive slope; df/dt < 0 =>
negative slope) can be chosen by the following setting options of parameter Direction
[P3589]:
none: supervision of the change of frequency independent of a positive
or negative slope of df/dt
positive: supervision for a positive slope of the rate of change of frequency
negative: supervision for a neagative slope of the rate of change of frequency
P3590 f< limit

Frequency limit for activating rate of change of frequency (RoCoF) protection function;
the protective function set to active by parameter Rate of Change of Frequency
(RoCoF) [P3582] = ON will become active only in case that the measured frequency
value falls below the set value of parameter f< limit [P3590].
P3591 f> limit

Frequency limit for activating rate of change of frequency (RoCoF) protection function;
the protective function set to active by parameter Rate of Change of Frequency
(RoCoF) [P3582] = ON will become active only in case that the measured frequency
value exceeds the set value of parameter f> limit [P3591].
P3592 df/dt limit

Pick-up value of frequency gradient df/dt; this parameter is only valid for the following
protective criteria:
df/dt
f> & df/dt
f< & df/dt
P3593 Hysteresis
This parameter [P3593] determines the reset limit for the pick-up event ANSI81R-1
pickup [E2475] of the first protection element. At the moment the characteristic quantity
(rate of change of frequency df/dt) falls below the reset limit, the activated pick-up event
ANSI81R-1 pickup [E2475] will be deactivated:
(reset limit) = K2 [P3594] x df/dt limit [P3592] Hysteresis [P3593]

User Manual
P3594 K2
Correction factor to adjust the maximum permissible rate of change of frequency df/dtmax
dependent of the grid impedance; multiplcation of the correction factor K2 [P3594] by
the setting of parameter df/dt limit [P3592] gives the maximum permissible rate of
change of frequency df/dtmax as the limit for rate of change of frequency (RoCoF)
protection.
Max. permissible rate of change of frequency df/dtmax = df/dt limit [P3592] x K2
[P3594]
Typical rates are:

K2 = 1.0 Correction factor for low impedance grid, and
K2 = 1.6 Correction factor for high impedance grid.
P3595 Delay time

Trip delay time; it is the delay time of the trip event ANSI81R-1 trip [E2476].
As soon as the pick-up event ANSI81R-1 pickup [E2475] is active and Delay time run
down, trip event [E2476] will be activated.
P3596 DF
This parameter defines the limit of the max. permissible frequency difference within the
supervision time set by parameter DT [3597] for the protection criterion DF/DT
P3597 DT
This parameter defines the duration of supervision time of the max. permissible
frequency difference set by parameter DF [3596] for the protection criterion DF/DT
P3598 Pickup mode

Selection of pickup condition for rate of change of frequency (RoCoF) protection; when
no blocking is active the pickup event ANSI81R-1 pick-up [E2475] is activated
according to the following selection options:
OR: Pickup event is activated, if at least in one phase the the selected
protective criterion (see parameter Mode [P3588]) is fulfilled, or
AND: Pickup event is activated, if at least in all three phases the the selected
protective criterion (see parameter Mode [P3588]) is fulfilled.
NOTE: This parameter is only valid for device variants built according to ordering
option G59!

User Manual
3.4.30 ANSI 86 Lockout Relay
ANSI 86 Lockout relay

SET PARAMETERS
OFF/RS-FF volatile/RS-FF non-volatile/SR-FF
none -
P3435 Function volatile/SR-FF nonvolatile
P3436 Reset 0 event 0 9999
Figure 3-201 ANSI 86 Protection parameters [P] and events [E]
parameters. Hence, the parameter descriptions of the SET PARAMETERS
P3435 Function
This parameter enables/disables function ANSI 86 Lockout relay where:
OFF: disables function ANSI 86 Lockout relay or
RS-FF volatile: enables function ANSI 86 Lockout relay, domination of
input element for resetting (R) accords to the RS-FlipFlop
logic scheme; current state of lockout relay output event
(editable) [E4502] is not being saved after system reboot;
or
RS-FF nonvolatile: enables function ANSI 86 Lockout relay, domination of
input element for resetting (R) accords to the RS-FlipFlop
(editable) [E4502] is being saved after system reboot.
SR-FF volatile: enables function ANSI 86 Lockout relay, domination of
input element for setting (S) accords to the SR-FlipFlop
(editable) [E4502] is not being saved after system reboot;
or
SR-FF nonvolatile: enables function ANSI 86 Lockout relay, domination of
input element for setting (S) accords to the SR-FlipFlop
(editable) [E4502] is being saved after system reboot.
When Lockout relay ANSI 86 is enabled by parameter [P3435], then event ANSI86
module active [E2368] is activated.
NOTE: Function ANSI 86 only affects the reset behaviour of the active output event
(editable) [E4502] of the binary output Lockout relay!
When Lockout relay ANSI 86 is disabled by parameter [P3435], then reset of
the output event (editable) [E4502] only accords to the states of its assigned

User Manual
logical input elements and the parameter settings of the binary output Lockout
relay!
P3436 Reset
Assignment of any available event to reset Lockout relay function; function can be reset
by any active event. For reset, the number related to this reset event has to be assigned
to parameter Reset [P3436].
If resetting of lockout relay is not required, set this parameter to 0.
Example 1: Function = RS-FF volatile; reset of lockout relay via binary input FCT. 17
(E4017])
Figure 3-202 ANSI 86 Parameter: Function = RS-FF-volatile
Figure 3-203 Binary output Lockout relay parameters

User Manual
[E6970]
System booting 1
0
t
Function [P3435] = RS-FF volatile
[E2368]
ANSI86 module 1
active
0
t
e.g. [E1425]
ANSI 50/51-1 trip 1
0
t
[E4502]
Lockout relay
1
output
0
t
Reset [P3436] = Name [Exxxx]
[Exxxx]
Name 1
0
t
Figure 3-204 ANSI 86 lockout and reset characteristic of lockout relay: RS-FF-volatile

User Manual
Example 2: Function = RS-FF non-volatile; reset of lockout relay via binary input FCT. 17
(E4017])
Figure 3-205 ANSI 86 Parameter: Function = RS-FF-nonvolatile
Figure 3-206 Binary output Lockout relay parameters

User Manual
[E6970]
System booting 1
0
t
Function [P3435] = RS-FF nonvolatile
[E2368]
ANSI86 module 1
active
0
t
e.g. [E1425]
ANSI 50/51-1 trip 1
0
t
[E4502]
Lockout relay
1
output
0
t
Reset [P3436] = Name [Exxxx]
[Exxxx]
Name 1
0
t
Figure 3-207 ANSI 86 lockout and reset characteristic of lockout relay: RS-FF-nonvolatile

User Manual
3.4.31 ANSI 87 Current Differential Protection
Functioning of the differential protection is based on a balance of phase currents measured at

the input and output of the electrical equipment (longitudinal differential protection). The
resulting variable of this current comparison is the differential current Id as protection criterion
for easy differentiating operating or fault event.
For the operating event ideally applies: I = 0 (Kirchhoffs law)
In the event of fault, a differential current occurs: I 0 = Id
This protection principle is advantageous because of the high degree of selectivity since the
CTs unambiguously define the protection range on both ends of the equipment to protect.
Consequently, fault finding can be effected in fast mode.
The field of application of the current differential protection generally includes protection of
motors, generators and transformers as well as of overhead lines, cables and busbars.
Depending on the type and the operating behaviour of the equipment to protect, certain
particularities (measurement value adaptations as well as operation-relevant and transient error
currents) have to be included into the protective relaying.
Protection zone
I1 I2
Grid 2 PROTECTED OBJECT Grid 2
I1 I2
SYMAP
Compact+
Figure 3-208 ANSI 87 Current differential protection
The differential protection function of the SYMAP-Compact+ has been designed for protection
of motors, generators and two-winding transformers.
For motors and generators, the stator windings of the machine will be monitored. On the one
hand, the two current transformer sets are arranged between the leads of the stator windings on
the star point end of the generator and, on the other hand, at the power input end (motor) or the
power output end (generator). For the transformer differential protection, the transformer sets
will be connected each to the primary and secondary windings of the transformer.

User Manual
Adaptation of the current measurement values
In order to allow comparison of the phase currents on both ends of the equipment to protect
regarding their absolute values and the phasing, the current values need to be elevated to a
common reference plane. And the following is to include for this purpose:
Adaption of the current transformer ratios on both ends of the protection object (amplitude
adaptation):
To adapt the current values for comparison of the phase currents, the transformation ratios
(1, 2) of the current transformers are to be taken into account (see Figure 3-209):
Primary side W 1: I1,transformer = 1 * I1,transformer or I1,transformer,sec = 1 * I1,transformer,pri

Secondary side W 2: I2,transformer = 2 * I2,transformer or I2,transformer,sec = 2 * I2,transformer,pri
Adaptation of possibly differing nominal currents of the current transformer sets to the
transformers transformation ratio (amplitude adaptation):
The primary nominal values of the current transformer sets on both ends of the protection
object (transformer) should be determined on the transformers nominal value. The primary
nominal transformer current I2n,CT,pri of the current transformer set on the secondary end W 2
should, under consideration of the transformer transformation ratio W 1/W 2, correspond to
the primary nominal transformer current I1n,transformer,pri of the current transformer sets on the
primary side W 1:
I2n,transformer,pri = W 1/W 2 * I1n,transformer,pri
Should, due to incorrect transformer selection, the above condition no longer be given, the
factor by which the primary nominal transformer current of the transformer current be
included in the measurement value adaptation.
Example:
Transformer transformation ratio: W1/W2 = 40
CT data at the undervoltage end: 4000/1A
=> correct adaptation: transformer data at the overvoltage end: 100/1A
selected CT: transformer data at the overvoltage end: e.g.: 200/1A
=> I2n,transformer,pri / I1n,transformer,pri W 1/W 2 <=> I2n,transformer,pri / I1n,transformer,pri = 20
=> Adaptation of the secondary transformer measurement values at the overvoltage

end by the factor 2:
Adaptation of the transformation ratio of a transformer (amplitude adaptation):

The transformer transformation ratio conditions occurrence of differing voltages and
currents on the primary side W 1 and the secondary end W 2. In order to adapt the current
values for comparison of the currents on the secondary end, the transformer transformation
ratio is to be taken into account:
Winding number of primary side / winding number of secondary end = W 1/W2
Adaptation of the transformer vector group (adaptation of the phasing):

The transformer vector group defines the connection type of the transformer windings at
high-voltage side and low-voltage side, and the phase shift between phase voltages of
high-voltage side and low-voltage side. Depending on the vector group of the used
transformer, the phase rotation of star point voltage (and thus the current) on the secondary
end shall be taken into account with regard to star point voltage of the primary side and be
adapted. Phase shifting between star point and delta voltage is always 30. Depending on
the vector group, the phase rotation results in a phase angle k, which is defined as a
multiple of 30. For clockwise rotation (L1, L2, L3 or A, B, C) applies: a positive sign for k
corresponds to a time lag of the secondary voltage with regard to the primary voltage.

User Manual
The following table gives an overview about the different transformer vector groups:
Description Vector diagram Circuit Ratio
Secondary neutral
Application
point
Iden- Vector
tifier group
primary secondary primary secondary U1 : U2
1U1 1V1 1W1 2U1 2V1 2W1

1V 2V
W1
Dd0 Not available
W2
1U 1W 2U 2W
1U2 1V2 1W2 2U2 2V2 2W2
1U1 1V1 1W1 1N 2U1 2V1 2W1 2N

1V 2V
W1 Small distribution Loadable up to max.

0 Yy0 1N 2N transformer 10% of rated current
W2
1U 1W 2U 2W
1U2 1V2 1W2 2U2 2V2 2W2
1U1 1V1 1W1 2U1 2V1 2W1 2N

2V
1V
2 W1 Small distribution
Loadable up to rated
Dz0 transformer; for three
current
2N 3 W2 line connection
1U 1W 2U 2W
1U2 1V2 1W2 2U2 2V2 2W2
2W 1U1 1V1 1W1 2U1 2V1 2W1

1V
W1 Large distribution
Dy5 2V 2N transformer
Loadable up to rated
3 W2 current
1U 1W
2U 1U2 1V2 1W2 2U2 2V2 2W2 2N
1U1 1V1 1W1 1N 2U1 2V1 2W1

1V 2U
Power plants and
3 W1 substations
5 Yd5 1N 2W (unit transformer, no Not available
W2 distribution
1U 1W transformer)
2V 1U2 1V2 1W2 2U2 2V2 2W2
2U 1U1 1V1 1W1 1N 2U1 2V1 2W1

1V
2W 2 W1 Small distribution Loadable up to rated

Yz5 1N
2N
transformer current
3 W2
1U 1W
2V 1U2 1V2 1W2 2N 2U2 2V2 2W2
1U1 1V1 1W1 2U1 2V1 2W1
1V 2W 2U
W1
Dd6 Not available
W2
1U 1W 2V
1U2 1V2 1W2 2U2 2V2 2W2
1U1 1V1 1W1 1N 2U1 2V1 2W1

1V 2W 2U
W1 Loadable up to max.
6 Yy6 1N
2N
10% of rated current
W2
1U 1W 2V
1U2 1V2 1W2 2U2 2V2 2W2 2N
1U1 1V1 1W1 2U1 2V1 2W1

1V 2U
2W
2N 2 W1 Loadable up to rated
Dz6
3 W2 current
1U 1W
2V 1U2 1V2 1W2 2U2 2V2 2W2 2N
2U 1U1 1V1 1W1 2U1 2V1 2W1 2N

1V
W1 Loadable up to rated
Dy11 2N 2V
current
3 W2
1U 1W
2W 1U2 1V2 1W2 2U2 2V2 2W2
1U1 1V1 1W1 1N 2U1 2V1 2W1

1V 2U
3 W1 Power plants and

11 Yd11 1N
2V substations Not available
W2 (unit transformer)
1U 1W
2W
1U2 1V2 1W2 2U2 2V2 2W2
2V 1U1 1V1 1W1 1N 2N 2U1 2V1 2W1

1V
2 W1 Loadable up to rated
Yz11 1N 2N current
3 W2
1U 1W 2U 2W
1U2 1V2 1W2 2U2 2V2 2W2
1V1 1U1 1V1 1W1 N

1U2 1V2 1W2
2V1
W1 Loadable up to max.
0 Ya0 Autotransformer
10% of rated current
2U1 N W2
1U1 2W1 1W1
Figure 3-209 Vector groups of transformer

User Manual
Proceed to adaptation of current measurement values in the SYMAP-Compact+ via system

parameter in the menu: SYSTEM\Nominals.
Adaptation of the eventually differing current transformer ratios:
Menu: SYSTEM\Nominals\Current transformers:
For CT1: parameter Primary [P660] and Secondary [P661], and
for CT2: parameter Primary [P669] and Secondary [P670]
Adaptation of the transformer ratio:
Menu: SYSTEM\Nominals\Reference values:
For winding side W1: parameter Voltage (L-L) [P603], and
for winding side W2: parameter Voltage (L-L) [P613]
Adaptation of the vector group of the transformer:
Menu: SYSTEM\Nominals\ Reference values:
For winding side W1: parameter Connection type [P600], and
for winding side W2: parameter Connection type [P610] and Phase shift [P611]
Transformer operating modes

Basically, a transformer can be operated in step-down operation as well as in step-up operation.
Assuming that the reference voltage system is the high voltage system (HV) and the reference
voltage system is leading, the phase shift of the phase voltages of high voltage system (HV)
and low voltage system (LV) are as follows:
YNd5: step-down operation YNd5: step-up operation
Reference voltage (leading) = HV Reference voltage (leading) = HV

0 0
ULx,HV, reference
ULx,LV, lagging
LV-HV = K x 30
= 5 x 30 LV-HV = K x 30
= 150 = 5 x 30
= 150
ULx,HV, reference
ULx,LV, lagging
180 180
Figure 3-210 Transformer operating modes example: YNd5
Transformer differential protection applications

High voltage side (HV) Primary W1 (transformer primary winding)
Independent of the oeprating mode of a transformer (step-up or step down), parameter group
Primary W1 of SYMAP-Compact+ always defines the high voltage side (HV) of the
transformer! This particularly applies to the parameter settings for the transformer vector group!
With regard to current and voltage measuring the measuring location of the high voltage side is
always defined as W1!
This implies that, the assignment of the measuring location to the current transformers which
are installed at the high voltage side and being connected to CT1 or CT2 for phase current

User Manual
measuring and/or to CT-GND1 for ground current measuring shall be according to the following
parameter settings:
CT1: Assignment [P668] = W1, and/or
CT-GND1: Assignment [P684] = W1.
The assignment of the measuring location to the voltage transformers which are installed at the
high voltage side and being connected to PT1, PT2 and/or PT3 for phase-to-neutral voltage
measuring and/or to PT-GND1 for residual voltage measuring shall be according to the
following parameter settings:
PT1: Assignment [P642] = W1 and/or
PT-GND1: Assignment [P651] = W1.
Low voltage side (LV) Secondary W2 (transformer secondary winding)

In accordance with the forestanding parameter group Secondary W2 of SYMAP-Compact+
always defines the low voltage side (LV) of the transformer! This particularly applies to the
parameter settings for the transformer vector group!
With regard to current and voltage measuring the measuring location of the low voltage side is
are installed at the low voltage side and being connected to CT1 or CT2 for phase current
parameter settings:
low voltage side and being connected to PT1, PT2 and/or PT3 for phase-to-neutral voltage

User Manual
Low voltage side (LV) Tertiary W3 (transformer tertiary winding)

NOTE: Protective function ANSI 87 Current differential protection is not applicable for 3-
winding transformers!
In accordance with the forestanding parameter group Tertiary W3 of SYMAP-Compact+
always defines the low voltage side (LV) of the transformer! This particularly applies to the
parameter settings for the transformer vector group!
With regard to current and voltage measuring the measuring location of the low voltage side is
are installed at the low voltage side and being connected to CT1 or CT2 for phase current
parameter settings:
low voltage side and being connected to PT1, PT2 and/or PT3 for phase-to-neutral voltage
The following connection diagrams give examples of two different applications of transformer
differential protection:
YNd5 step-down transformer and
YNd5 step-up transformer (block protection).
In addition to the connection circuit required parameter settings and definition of winding sides
are given.

User Manual
L1
L2
L3
Transformer-Differential protection ANSI 87
(step-down operation, CT1 = reference = high voltage side HV)
-X1.1
P1 1 SYMAP-Compact+
S1
P2 S2
2
P1 3
S1
CT1-M/P
! !
HV = W1 = Primary W1" S2
P2 4
P1 5
S1
P2 S2
6
Parameter settings (example):
Current transformer:
CT1
HV Primary [P660] = 200A
Secondary [P661] = 1A
YN CT1-M: Direction L1 (Measuring) [P662] = 0
YNd5 CT1-M: Direction L3 (Measuring) [P664] = 0
d5 CT1-P: Direction L3 (Protection) [P667] = 0
Assignment [P674] = W1
LV CT2
Primary [P660] = 1000A
CT2-MP: Direction L1 [P671] = 0
-X1.2 Assignment [P674] = W2
P2 7
S2 Reference values:
Primary W1
Connection type [P600] = Y
P1 S1 Star point grounding [P601] = earthed
8 Voltage (L-L) [P602] = 10000V
P2 9
S2
! !
LV = W2 = Secondary W2" CT2-M/P Secondary W2
Connection type [P610] = d
P1 S1 Phase shift [P611] = 5
10 Star point grounding [P612] = isolated
P2 11 Voltage (L-L) [P613] = 400V
S2

P1 S1
12
Figure 3-211 YNd5 step-down operation CT1 = reference = HV

User Manual
L1
L2
L3
Differential protecion ANSI 87
Mains CB (step-up-operation; CT1 = reference = high voltage side HV)
-X1.1
P1 1 SYMAP-Compact+
S1
P2 S2
2
P1 3
S1
CT1-M/P
! !
HV = W1 = Primary W1" P2 S2
4
P1 5
S1
P2 S2 Current transformer:
6
CT1
HV CT1-M: Direction L3 (Measuring) [P664] = 0
YN CT1-P: Direction L2 (Protection) [P666] = 0
YNd5
CT2
d5 Secondary [P661] = 1A
LV CT2-MP: Direction L2 [P672] = 0
Gen. CB Reference values:
Primary W1
Star point grounding [P601] = earthed
Voltage (L-L) [P602] = 10000V

G Secondary W2
3~ Connection type [P610] = d
Phase shift [P611] = 5
Star point grounding [P612] = isolated
! ! Voltage (L-L) [P613] = 400V
LV = W2 = Secondary W2"
-X1.2
P2 7
S2
P1 S1
8
P2 9
S2
CT2-M/P
P1 S1
10
P2 11
S2
P1 S1
12
Figure 3-212 YNd5 step-up operation (block protection) CT1 = reference = HV

User Manual
L1
L2
L3
Differential protecion ANSI 87
Mains CB (step-up-operation; CT1 = reference = low voltage side LV)
-X1.2
P1 7 SYMAP-Compact+
S1
P2 S2
8
P1 9
S1
CT2-M/P
! !
HV = W1 = Primary W1" P2 S2
10
P1 11
S1
P2 S2 Current transformer:
12
CT1
HV CT1-M: Direction L3 (Measuring) [P664] = 0
YN CT1-P: Direction L2 (Protection) [P666] = 0
YNd5
CT2
d5 Secondary [P661] = 1A
LV CT2-MP: Direction L2 [P672] = 0
Gen. CB Reference values:
Primary W1
Star point grounding [P601] = earthed
Voltage (L-L) [P602] = 10000V

G Secondary W2
3~ Connection type [P610] = d
Phase shift [P611] = 5
! ! Voltage (L-L) [P613] = 400V
LV = W2 = Secondary W2"
-X1.1
P2 1
S2
P1 S1
2
P2 3
S2
CT1-M/P
P1 S1
4
P2 5
S2
P1 S1
6
Figure 3-213 YNd5 step-up operation (block protection) CT1 = reference = LV

User Manual
L1
L2
L3
Transformer-Differential protection ANSI 87
(step-down operation; CT1 = reference = low voltage side LV)
-X1.2
P1 7 SYMAP-Compact+
S1
P2 S2
8
P1 9
S1
! ! CT2-M/P
HV = W1 = Primary W1"
P2 S2
10
P1 11
S1
P2 S2
12
CT1
HV Primary [P660] = 1000A
YN CT1-M: Direction L1 (Measuring) [P662] = 0
YNd5 CT1-M: Direction L3 (Measuring) [P664] = 0
d5 CT1-P: Direction L3 (Protection) [P667] = 0
LV CT2
-X1.1 Assignment [P674] = W1
P2 1
S2 Reference values:
Primary W1
P1 S1 Star point grounding [P601] = earthed
2 Voltage (L-L) [P602] = 10000V
P2 3
! ! S2
LV = W2 = Secondary W2" CT1-M/P Secondary W2
Connection type [P610] = d
4 Star point grounding [P612] = isolated
P2 5 Voltage (L-L) [P613] = 400V
S2

P1 S1
6
Figure 3-214 YNd5 step-down operation CT1 = reference = LV

User Manual
Generator differential protection applications

The following connection diagram shows an application of generator differential protection. In
addition to the connection circuit required parameter settings and definition of winding sides are
given.
NOTE: Setting of parameters Connection type [P600] and [P610] as well as Phase shift
[P611] have to meet the requirement of no phase shift between phase voltages of
winding sides W1 and W2!
L1
L2
L3
Gen, CB Generator Differential protection ANSI 87 Incoming feeder
-X1.1
P1 1 SYMAP-Compact+
S1
P2 S2
2
P1 3
S1
CT1-M/P
W1 = Primary W1"
P2 S2
4
P1 5
S1
P2 S2
6
CT1
G CT1-M: Direction L3 (Measuring) [P664] = 0
3~ CT1-P: Direction L2 (Protection) [P666] = 0
CT2
-X1.2
P2 7 CT2-MP: Direction L3 [P673] = 0
S2
Reference values:
P1 S1 Primary W1
8
Connection type [P600] = none
P2 9
S2 Star point grounding [P601] = isolated
CT2-M/P Voltage (L-L) [P602] = 400V

W2 = Secondary W2" S1
P1 10 Secondary W2
11 Connection type [P610] = none
Voltage (L-L) [P613] = 400V

P1 S1
12
Figure 3-215 Generator differential protection incoming feeder

User Manual
Stabilization against operational error currents

In contrast to the theoretical sight on an ideal transformer, the real transformer in its stationary
state shows an operational error current (difference or differential current Id) which is due to the
following causes:
IF1: Error current by idle or magnetizing current (amplitude fault)
IF2: Error current by eventual influence of a transformer tap changer on the
transformation ratio of the transformer (amplitude fault)
IF3: Error current by total fault of the single CTs (amplitude and angle fault)
The single error currents IF1, IF2 and IF3 add up to a total error current IF, which can be shown
as differential current Id depending on the through-current ID as error current characteristic
curve. The through-current ID represents the power led though the object to protect i.e. in case
of increased load or a fault outside the protection range the operational differential current I d
raises as well.
The error current characteristic curve may be represented by the differential protection device
via tripping characteristic with double bend.
Id/In
IF : total fault current
ve
g cur
p pin IF3 : total fault current CTs
Tri stic
cteri
h ara
au lt c
al f IF2 : CT ratio, tap changer
Re (variable transformer)
IF1 : Magnetizing current (Trafo)
ID/In
Figure 3-216 Error current and tripping characteristic curve
Since through-current ID cannot be directly measured, the so-called stabilization current Istab will
be introduced which is a calculated variable. Istab is calculated as follows:
I stab I 1 I 2
The difference current is calculated to form:
Id I1 I 2
NOTE: The reference directions of the currents I1 and I2 are defined acc. to Figure 3-208.

User Manual
The tripping characteristic of the SYMAP-Compact+ stabilized current differential protection

element (STEP 1) is defined by three separately settable points such that the corresponding
parameterization may result in three ranges with differing gradient factor of the tripping
characteristic (stabilization):
Range 1: constant tripping value (gradient factor = 0) up to a settable value for the
stabilization current (see parameters Is0 setting [P1992]; Id0 setting [P1995])
Range 2: stabilized tripping characteristic with 1st gradient factor (see parameters Is1
setting [P1993]; Id1 setting [P1996])
Range 3: stabilized tripping characteristic with 2nd gradient factor (see parameters Is2
setting [P1994]; Id2 setting [P1997])
Id eff/In
Tripping range
Id>>
Id2 setting"
Id1 setting"
Blocking range
Id0 setting"
Is0 setting" Is1 setting" Is2 setting" IStab/In
(IS res")
Figure 3-217 SYMAP-Compact+ ANSI 87-1 tripping characteristic
High current stage without stabilization (Id>>)

The SYMAP-Compact+ includes a differential high current stage which trips in case of internal
high-current faults without stabilization. The differential current setting value (Id>>) keeps to
the used transformers highest possible short-circuit current (short-circuit at the terminals of the
secondary end), which is limited by the transformers short-circuit reactance. The maximum
short-circuit current IK is calculated to form:
100%
IK Ir ,
uK
with:
Ir: transformer rated current
uK: relative short-circuit voltage of the transformer
Consequently, in case of an external fault, the short-circuit current caused by the transformer is
never higher than the transformers short-circuit current and the differential current thus attains

User Manual
a maximum value. In case of a fault outside the protection zone, the maximum differential
current occurs with a single-end, total transformer saturation since, in this case, the short-circuit
current caused by the transformer equals the differential current.
In case of a fault inside the protection zone (i.e. in the transformer) the short-circuit current and,
consequently, the differential current as well could attain higher values. In these cases, the
SYMAP-Compact+ activates instantaneous tripping without stabilization.
The setting value of parameter Id>> [P2022] of the high-current stage should be selected
according to the height of the transformers short-circuit range.
Stabilization against inrush current

Depending on the height of remanence (remaining magnetization, remanent flux density)
attained upon transformer shutdown and depending on the closing time (voltage level and
voltage direction), a high (inrush) current occurs upon reclosing of a transformer in the primary
winding. This magnetizing current may amount to up the 20fold of the transformers nominal
current and last for some seconds. Since this inrush current will not be transferred to the
secondary end, it causes a differential current in the balance which would occasion tripping of
the differential protection function.
The inrush current, however, is not to be seen as a fault event which should lead to tripping on
faults but is a phenomenon against which the differential protection function should be stabilized
i.e. made more insensitive. A characteristic for the inrush current is the amount of 2nd harmonic
in the primary winding phase current. The highest contents for the inrush current are to be
observed for the 2nd harmonic.
Via Fourier analysis, the SYMAP-Compact+ evaluates the contents of the 2nd harmonic
(100Hz) and upon exceeding of a settable value for the ratio of the 2nd harmonic and the
fundamental of current I100Hz/I50Hz, temporary blocking of the pickup of the differential protection
function is activated according to the settings of the harmonic wave stabilization ANSI 95i
function. Blocking is maintained as long as the pick-up value for the 2nd harmonic is fallen below
or the maximum time slot for blocking has elapsed.
Stabilization against overexcitation

An increased magnetizing current occurs if the transformer is operated at the high-voltage coil
with overvoltage (overexcitation of the transformer). This results in heating which could damage
the transformer.
In this case as well, the high magnetizing current leads to a differential current which would
cause activation of the differential protection function. As the transformer withstands
overexcitation for a short while, the differential protection must not trip immediately. Closure is
done after given time via other protection function (over excitation protection).
An important criterion for the overrexcited operation of the transformer is the 4th harmonic wave
(5th harmonic) in the phase current of the primary winding.
Via Fourier analysis, the SYMAP-Compact+ evaluates the contents of the 5th harmonic and
upon exceeding of a settable value for the ratio of the 5th harmonic in relation to the
fundamental of current I250Hz/I50Hz, temporary blocking of the pickup of the differential protection
function is activated according to the settings of the harmonic wave stabilization ANSI 95i
function. Blocking is maintained as long as the pick-up value for the 5th harmonic is fallen below
again or the maximum time slot for blocking has elapsed.

User Manual
Stabilization against transformer saturation

Saturation of the CTs causes an incorrect transformation of the primary phase current values In
case of single-end transformer saturation, in particular, a significant high differential current
occurs in the current balance and would cause tripping of the differential protection function.
Causes for CT saturation are e.g.:

A high-current fault inside the protection zone (exceeding the transformers maximum short-
circuit current)
A high-current fault outside the protection zone (is limited by the transformers maximum
short-circuit current) in case of insufficient transformer dimensioning
The second trial of reclosing by an AR function (heavy pre-magnetization of the transformer
core)
Depending on the cause of CT saturation and the fault location (inside or outside the protection
zone), the protection device has to trip or block.
In case a fault outside the protective zone forces CT saturation, the operating characteristic of
differential current/stabilizing current (Id/Istab) is fundamentally different from that behaviour of a
fault inside the protective zone with CT saturation. Such dynamic operating characteristic of
Id/Istab can be described by a locus curve.
To detect CT saturation SYMAP-Compact+ evaluates the locus curve of Id/Istab. The diagrams
discussed below represents different fault situations for an object tob e protected, and with one-
sided CT saturation.
Regarding faults inside the protective zone, differential current increase proportionally to the
stabilizing current (Id = Istab). Hence follows, that the operating point of the locus curve, e.g. (1) to
(6), proceeds along a straight line with a gradient of 100%.
Id eff/In
Fault characteristic for: Id = Istab
Tripping range 3
2
Blocking range
1
6
IStab/In
Figure 3-218 Locus diagram of fault within the protective zone, without CT saturation
Faults outside the protective zone which do not cause CT saturation yet, stabilisation current
increases rapidly, whereas differential current remains quite low. As consequence, the
operating point of the locus curve, e.g. (1) to (6), proceeds along a straight line with a slight
gradient (the following diagram shows an idealized locus with a gradient of 0%).

User Manual
Id eff/In
Tripping range
Blocking range
5 4
6
3
1 2
IStab/In
Figure 3-219 Locus diagram of fault outside the protective zone, without CT saturation
For faults outside the protective zone which do cause CT saturation, here, stabilisation current
increase rapidly, too, and dfferential current remains at first at a low level. Hence, the operating
points proceed along the straight line towards such fault curve corresponding to faults outside
the protective object and without CT saturation: operating points (1) and (2). As soon as CT
saturation emerges: operating point (2), stabilisation current decreases combined with an
increase of differential: operating point (3). When exceeding the configured tripping curve: (4),
the differential protection function will trip.
To avoid unwanted tripping, SYMAP-Compact+ evaluates the locus curve with reference to the
operating characteristic of Id/Istab in case of a fault. The locus curve displayed above represents
the fundamental criterion to detect faults outside the protective zone and causing one-sided CT
saturation. The range CT saturation stabilisation is defined by parameters [P2005] to [P2008].
The locus curve has to enter the CT saturation stabilisation range definitely, before the
operating point will skip ahead to the tripping zone. If this is the case, differential protection trip
will be blocked.There is a maximum time window for blocking available, which is configurable by
parameter CT saturation blocking time [P2004].

User Manual
Id eff/In
Tripping range
4 Blocking range
[P2008] CT saturation Id1"
5
3
CT saturation stabilisation
[P2007] CT saturation Id0"
Begin of CT saturation
6 1 2
IStab/In
[P2005] CT saturation Is0" [P2006] CT saturation Is1"
Figure 3-220 Locus diagram of fault outside the protective zone, with CT saturation
Zero current compensation

If an earth fault occurs outside the protective zone (transformer winding which holds the earthed
neutral point), the zero sequence current will affect the earthed neutral point. As consequencse,
a differential current will lead to a nuiscance tripping of the differential protection function. To
prevent this happening, the zero sequence current has to be eliminated in the phase current of
that transformer winding which provides the earthed neutral point.
According to the current vectors of odd-numbered transformer vector shift groups.zero current
compensation is conducted automatically.
NOTE: In dependence of the transformer vector shift group, zero compensation can be
activated/deactivated by the following parameters:
W1 zero compensation [P9436],
W2 zero compensation [P9437].
These parameters are located in the submenu: SYSTEM\Measuring\Differential.

User Manual
ANSI 87 Current differential protection

SET PARAMETERS
P1975 Differential protection OFF - ON/OFF
P1977 Mode Trafo - Trafo / Block prot. / Mot/Gen
P1978 Hysteresis 0,0 % 0 1999,9
STEP 1
P1990 Step function ON - ON/OFF
P1992 Is0 setting 80,0 % 0 3999,9
P1993 Is1 setting 500,0 % 0 3999,9
P1994 Is2 setting 1750,0 % 0 3999,9
P1995 Id0 setting 50,0 % 0 3999,9
P1996 Id1 setting 125,0 % 0 3999,9
P1997 Id2 setting 750,0 % 0 3999,9
P1998 Delay time 0,03 s 0 ... 65,535
P1999 Harmonics stabilizer CT1 OFF - OFF / 2H / 5H / 2H/5H
P2000 Harmonics stabilizer CT2 OFF - OFF / 2H / 5H / 2H/5H
P2002 CT saturation supervision ON - ON/OFF
P2003 CT saturation mode 1-phase 1-phase/3-phase
P2004 CT saturation blocking time 0,3 s 0 999999,999
P2005 CT saturation Is0 400,0 % 0 1999,9
P2006 CT saturation Is1 1000,0 % 0 1999,9
P2007 CT saturation Id0 100,0 % 0 1999,9
P2008 CT saturation Id1 250,0 % 0 1999,9
E1653 ANSI87-1 trip - - -
E1654 ANSI87-1 L1 blocked by CTS - - -
E1657 ANSI87-1 CTS supervision active - - -
STEP 2
P2020 Step function OFF - ON/OFF
P2022 Id>> 750,0 % 0 1999,9
P2023 Delay time 0,03 s 0 ... 65,535
E1673 ANSI87-2 trip - - -

User Manual
SET PARAMETERS
The following SET PARAMETERS of the current differential protection exist only once in each
of the four parameter sets. Thus, the SET PARAMETERS apply to protection STEP 1 and
protection STEP 2 of one parameter SET.
P1975 Differential protection :

This parameter activates/deactivates the current differential protection whereby the
setting:
OFF: deactivates the protection function or
ON: activates the protection function.
When current differential protection ANSI 87 is enabled by parameter [P1975], then

event ANSI87 module active [E1630] is activated.
P1976 Blocking protection module :

Current differential protection can be completely blocked by any active event. For
If blocking of the current differential protection is not required, set this parameter to 0.
P1977 Mode :
Application for current differential protection; in dependence of the kind of operating
device to be protected by current differential protection, one of the following applications
can be choosen:
Trafo: application: Transformer differential protection
Block prot.: application: Block protection (protective zone covers the generator
and the block transformer)
Mot/Gen: application: Motor/Generator differential protection
NOTE: For Transformer differential protection the vector shift group and possibly
also zero current compensation (parameter Star point grounding) has to be
considered. Corresponding parameters are to be found in the menu:
SYSTEM\Nominals\Reference values
P1978 Hystersis :
This parameter [P1978] determines the reset limit for the pick-up event ANSI87-1
pickup [E1652] of the stabilized current differential protection element (STEP1) or
ANSI87-2 pickup [E1672] for the unstabilized high-set current differential protection
element (STEP 2). At the moment the characteristic value (phase current) falls below the
reset limit, the activated pick-up event [E1652] or [E1672] will be deactivated.
NOTE: Stabilized differential protection element (STEP 1):

(reset limit) = configured trip curve Hysteresis [P1978]

User Manual
High-set differential protection element (STEP 2):

(reset limit) = Id>> [P2022] Hysteresis [P1978]
Protection parameters Stabilized Differential protection element (STEP 1)
P1990 Step function

This parameter activates/deactivates the stabilized current differential protection element
(STEP 1) whereby the setting:
OFF: deactivates the stabilized current differential protection element or
ON: activates the stabilized current differential protection element.
When stabilized current differential protection element is enabled by parameter [P1990],

then event ANSI87-1 module active [E1650] is activated.

Stabilized current differential protection element (STEP 1) can be completely blocked by
blocking event is active. As soon as blocking is active, event ANSI87-1 blocked step
If blocking of the stabilized current differential protection element (STEP 1) is not
Configuration of the tripping curve
the characteristic quantity (phase current). The nominal value of the characteristic
submenu: SYSTEM\Nominals\Reference values.
P1992 Is0 setting

In combination with parameter Id0 setting [P1995] parameter [P1992] defines the first
straight line segment (as well as the starting point of the second straight line segement)
of the tripping curve of the stabilized current differential protection element (STEP 1).
The first straight line segment is valid for a value range of the stabilisation current
between Istab = 0 and Istab = Is0 setting, in which the tripping characteristic corresponds
to the constant pick-up value of the characteristic quantity (differential current Id) Id0
setting.
P1993 Is1 setting

In combination with parameter Id1 setting [P1996] parameter [P1993] defines the
second straight line segment (as well as the starting point of the third straight line
segement) of the tripping curve of the stabilized current differential protection element
(STEP 1). The second straight line segment is valid for a value range of the stabilisation
current between Istab = Is0 setting and Istab = Is1 setting.
P1994 Is2 setting

User Manual
In combination with parameter Id2 setting [P1997] parameter [P1994] defines the
second point to determine the slope of the third straight line segment of the tripping
curve of the stabilized current differential protection element (STEP 1). An ending point
of the third straight line segment can be set by using parameter Id>> [P2022] which
brings forth a corresponding stabilisation current (IS res). Then, the third straight line
segment is valid for a value range of the stabilisation current between Istab = Is1 setting
and Istab = IS res.
P1995 Id0 setting

First, constant tripping value of the differential current Id for definition of the tripping
characteristic curve; exceeds the characteristic quantity (differential current Id), the set
value of parameter [P1995] for stabilization currents in the range between
Istab = 0 and Istab = Is0 setting the pick-up event ANSI87-1 pick-up [E1652] will be
activated.
If there is no active blocking of the Harmonics stabilizer ANSI 95i or CT saturation
and Delay time (parameter Delay time [P1998]) run down, then, also trip event
ANSI87-1 trip [E1653] is activated. This event can be used for alarm or output control
purposes.
P1996 Id1 setting

In combination with parameter Is1 setting [P1993] parameter [P1996] defines the
second straight line segment (as well as the starting point of the third straight line
segement) of the tripping curve of the stabilized current differential protection element
(STEP 1). If the characteristic quantity (differential current Id) exceeds the range of
values set with the parameters [P1993] and [P1996] for stabilization currents in the
range between Istab = 0 and Istab = Is1 setting the pick-up event ANSI87-1 pick-up
[E1652] will be activated.
and Delay time (parameter Delay time [P1998]) run down, then, trip event ANSI87-1
trip [E1653] is activated. This event can be used for alarm or output control purposes.
P1997 Id2 setting

In combination with parameter Is2 setting [P1994] parameter [P1997] defines the
second point to determine the slope of the third straight line segment of the tripping
curve of the stabilized current differential protection element (STEP 1). If the
characteristic variable (differential current Id) exceeds the range of values set with the
parameters [P1994] and [P1997] for stabilization currents in the range between Istab =
Is1 setting and Istab = Is2 setting the pick-up event ANSI87-1 pick-up [E1652] will
be activated.
and Delay time (parameter Delay time [P1998]) run down, then, trip event ANSI87-1
trip [E1653] is activated. This event can be used for alarm or output control purposes.
P1998 Delay time

As soon as the pick-up event ANSI87-1 pick-up [E1652] is active and Delay time run
down and there is no active blocking of the Harmonics stabilizer ANI95i ,then, trip
event [E1653] will be activated. This event can be used for alarm or output control
purposes.
P1999 Harmonics stabilizer CT1

Blocking of the stabilized current differential protection element (STEP 1) by harmonics
stabilizer ANSI 95i function for measuring values of CT1; according to the settings of
the harmonics stabilizer ANSI 95i function, the stabilized current differential protection
element (STEP 1) may be temporarily blocked upon exceeding of defined contents of
the 2nd and/or 5th harmonic (I100Hz and/or I250Hz) in the phase current:

User Manual

2H: blocking of ANSI 87-1 by ANSI 95i in case of 2nd harmonic
5H: blocking of ANSI 87-1 by ANSI 95i in case of 5th harmonic
2H/5H: blocking of ANSI 87-1 by ANSI 95i in case of 2nd or 5th harmonic

P2000 Harmonics stabilizer CT2

Blocking of the stabilized current differential protection element (STEP 1) by harmonics
stabilizer ANSI 95i function for measuring values of CT2; (see description of parameter
[P1999]).
P2002 CT saturation supervision

This parameter activates/deactivates function CT saturation supervision whereby the
setting:
OFF: deactivates the function or
ON: activates the function.
When CT saturation supervision is enabled by parameter [P2002], then event ANSI87-

1 CTS supervision active [E1657] is activated.
CAUTION: Function CT saturation supervision can only be used for operating

devices, without phase current shifting.
P2003 CT saturation mode

Parameterizable blocking mode:
1-phase: Differential protection trip is blocked only in that phase which is affected
by the CT saturation.
3-phase: Although CT saturation is possibly detected in only one phase,
differential protection trip is to be blocked in all three phases.
In case of CT saturation detection in one or more phases, the following event(s) is (are)
to be activated:
ANSI87-1 L1 blocked by CTS [E1654] and/or
ANSI87-1 L2 blocked by CTS [E1655] and/or
ANSI87-1 L3 blocked by CTS [E1656] aktiviert.
P2004 CT saturation blocking time

Maximum blocking time of differential protection after detecting a CT saturation.
Configuration of the range for CT saturation stabilisation
The range for CT saturation stabilisation can be defined by four parameters: [P2005] to
[P2008].
the characteristic quantity (phase current). The nominal value of the characteristic

User Manual
submenu: SYSTEM\Nominals\Reference values.
P2005 CT saturation Is0

If the stabilisation current value exceeds the set value of parameter CT saturation Is0
[P2005], then, function CT saturation supervision is activated. Corresponding
parameters CT saturation Is0 [P2005] and CT saturation Id0 [P2007] determines the
starting point of the straight line for the range definition of CT saturation stabilisation
P2007 CT saturation Id0

In combination with parameter CT saturation Is0 [P2005] parameter CT saturation Id0
[P2007] defines the starting point of the straight line to determine the range for CT
saturation stabilisation.
P2006 CT saturation Is1

In combination with parameter CT saturation Id1 [P2008] parameter CT saturation Is1
[P2006] defines the second point of the straight line to determine the range for CT
P2008 CT saturation Id1

In combination with parameter CT saturation Is1 [P2006] parameter CT saturation Id1
[P2008] defines the second point of the straight line to determine the range for CT
Protection parameter High-set differential protection element (STEP 2)
P2020 Step function

This parameter activates/deactivates the high-set current differential protection element
(STEP 2) whereby the setting:
OFF: deactivates the high-set current differential protection element or
ON: activates the high-set current differential protection element.
When stabilized current differential protection element is enabled by parameter [P2020],

then event ANSI87-2 step active [E1670] is activated.

High-set current differential protection element (STEP 2) can be completely blocked by
blocking event is active. As soon as blocking is active, event ANSI87-2 blocked step
If blocking of the high-set current differential protection element (STEP 2) is not required,
P2022 Id>>
This parameter defines the pick-up value for the characteristic variable (differential
current Id) of the high-set current differential protection element (STEP 2), disregarding
the height of the stabilization current Istab .
If the characteristic variable exceeds the value set for parameter [P2022], the trip event
ANSI87-2 trip [E1673] will be activated disregarding the stabilized tripping
characteristic. This event can be used for alarm or output control purposes.

User Manual
Current [P614], for secondary side W2
P2023 Delay time

As soon as the pick-up event ANSI87-2 pick-up [E1672] is active and Delay time run
control purposes.

User Manual
3.4.32 ANSI 95i Harmonics stabilizer
In dependence of the SYMAP-Compact(+) device variant, function Harmonics stabilizer ANSI

95i is individually avalilable for the following current measurement inputs:
ANSI 95i-CT1: Harmonics stabilizer for current measurement input CT1
ANSI 95i-CT2: Harmonics stabilizer for current measurement input CT2
ANSI 95i Harmonics stabilizer

No. System Description Value Unit (Setting range)
CT1-Harmonics stabilizer
P1745 Harmonics stabilizer OFF - ON/OFF
P1747 Module blocking current 750 % 5 6553,5
P1748 Mode 1-phase - 1-phase/3-phase
P1749 2H Limit 10 % 1 6553,5
P1750 5H Limit 10 % 1 6553,5
P1751 2H max. blocking time 1 s 0 999999,999
E1470 ANSI95I-CT1 module active - - -
E1471 ANSI95I-CT1 blocked module - - -
E1472 ANSI95I-CT1 blocked by Imax - - -
E1473 ANSI95i-CT1 L1 blocked by 2H - - -
E1479 ANSI95i-CT1 2H supervision blocked - - -
CT2-Harmonics stabilizer
P1763 Mode 1-phase - 1-phase/3-phase
P1764 2H Limit 10 % 1 6553,5
P1765 5H Limit 10 % 1 6553,5
E1485 ANSI95i-CT2 module active - - -
E1486 ANSI95i-CT2 blocked module - - -
E1487 ANSI95i-CT2 blocked by Imax - - -
GND1-Harmonics stabilizer

User Manual

P1794 2H Limit 10 % 1 6553,5
P1795 5H Limit 10 % 1 6553,5
E1515 ANSI95i-GND1 module active - - -
E1516 ANSI95i-GND1 blocked module - - -
E1517 ANSI95i-GND1 blocked by Imax - - -
E1518 ANSI95i-GND1 blocked by 2H - - -
E1519 ANSI95i-GND1 blocked by 5H - - -
E1520 ANSI95i-GND1 2H supervision blocked - - -
E1521 ANSI95i-GND1 5H supervision blocked - - -
Figure 3-222 ANSI 95i Protection parameters [P] and events [E] of SET 1
NOTE: For functions CT1-Harmonics stabilizer, CT2-Harmonics stabilizer and GND1-

Harmonics stabilizer, each of the four parameter SETS always provides only one
protection STEP and, as consequence, only one group of protection parameters.
Thus, SET PARAMETERS are equal to STEP parameters. The protection parameters
of function CT1-Harmonics stabilizer of SET 1 represented below are described in
the following in detail as examples.
Protection parameters of parameter SET 1 (ANSI 95i\CT1-Harmonics stabilizer)

This parameter enables/disables function CT1-Harmonics stabilizer where:
OFF: disables or
ON: enables the function.
When function CT1-Harmonics stabilizer is enabled by parameter [P1745], then event

ANSI95I-CT1 module active [E1470] is activated.
P1746 Blocking module

Function CT1-Harmonics stabilizer can be completely blocked by any active event. For
soon as blocking is active, event ANSI95I-CT1 blocked module [E1471] is activated. If
the blocking event turns inactive, blocking is abandoned and function CT1-Harmonics
stabilizer is effective again. Then, event [E1471] is deactivated automatically.
If blocking of function CT1-Harmonics stabilizer is not required, set this parameter to 0.
P1747 Module blocking current

Maximum phase current limit for harmonics stabilisation (high-current faults); In case that
in at least one phase the phase current exceeds the set value of parameter [P1746],
function CT1-Harmonics stabilizer is blocked, and event ANSI95I-CT1 blocked by
Imax [E1472] is activated. When the current value falls below the set value, blocking of
harmonics stabilization and event [E1472] is deactivated.

User Manual
NOTE: The maximum phase current limit for harmonics stabilisation is to be set as a
percentage of the nominal value of the characteristic quantity (phase current).
The nominal value of the characteristic quantity is to be set by parameter:
Current [P614], for secondary side W2
P1748 Mode
Parameterizable blocking mode:
1-phase: In case that only in one phase the limit of parameter(s) 2H Limit
[P1749] or/and 5H Limit [P1750] is(are) exceeded, then, protection
pickup of those protective functions with activated Harmonic stabilisation
is blocked only in the affected phase.
3-phase: In case that at least in one phase the limit of parameter(s) 2H Limit
[P1749] or/and 5H Limit [P1750] is(are) exceeded, then, protection
pickup of those protective functions with activated Harmonic stabilisation
is blocked in all three phases.
P1749 2H Limit
Pick-up value of 2nd Harmonic stabilisation; when the characteristic quantity (2. harmonic
portion in the phase currrents) exceeds the set value of parameter [P1749] in one ore
more phases, then according to the selected setting option of parameter Mode
[P1748] the following corresponding blocking event(s) is(are) activated:
ANSI95i-CT1 L1 blocked by 2H [E1473] and/or
ANSI95i-CT1 L3 blocked by 2H [E1475]
P1750 5H Limit
Pick-up value of 5th Harmonic stabilisation; when the characteristic quantity (5. harmonic
portion in the phase currrents) exceeds the set value of parameter [P1750] in one ore
more phases, then according to the selected setting option of parameter Mode
[P1748] the following corresponding blocking event(s) is(are) activated:
ANSI95i-CT1 L3 blocked by 5H [E1478]
P1751 2H max. blocking time

Maximum time window for blocking those protective functions by CT1-Harmonics
stabilisation; when in at least one phase the 2. Harmonic portion exceeds the set value
of parameter 2H Limit [P1749], then, the counter of the maximum time window starts.
In case that one of the three blocking events are continuously active, and the counter
has run down, then, blocking events and blocking of the affected protective functions are
being deactivated, and event ANSI 95i CT1-2H supervision blocked [E1479] is
activated. At the moment that the amount of the measured 2nd harmonic falls below the
set value of parameter 2H Limit [P1749] in all three phases, then, event [E1479] is
deactivated.
P1752 5H max. blocking time

User Manual
Maximum time window for blocking those protective functions by CT1-Harmonics

stabilisation; when in at least one phase the 5. Harmonic portion exceeds the set value
of parameter 5H Limit [P1750], then, the counter of the maximum time window starts.
In case that one of the three blocking events are continuously active, and the counter
has run down, then, blocking events and blocking of the affected protective functions are
being deactivated, and event ANSI 95i CT1-5H supervision blocked [E1480] is being
activated. At the moment that the amount of the measured 5th harmonic falls below the
set value of parameter 5H Limit [P1750] in all three phases, then, event [E1480] is
deactivated.

User Manual
3.4.33 CLD Cold Load Detection
CLD Cold load detection

SET PARAMETERS
OFF/I</Event/I< OR Event/
P3325 CLD function OFF -
I< AND Event
P3327 CT reference CT1 - CT1/CT2
P3328 Trigger limit 10,0 - 0 6553,5
P3329 Delay time 3600,000 s 0 999999,999
P3330 Reset delay time 3600,000 s 0 999999,999
P3331 Trigger event 0 event 0 9999
P3332 Fast reset OFF - OFF/ON
P3333 Fast reset limit 100,0 % 0 6553,5
P3334 Fast reset delay time 600,000 s 0 999999,999
P3335 Fast reset blocking 0 event 0 9999
E2330 CLD active - - -
E2331 CLD blocked - - -
E2332 CLD pickup - - -
E2333 CLD cold load - - -
Figure 3-223 CLD Protection parameters [P] and events [E] of SET 1
parameters. Hence, the parameter descriptions of the SET PARAMETERS
Protection parameters CLD
SET PARAMETERS
The following SET PARAMETERS of the CLD function exist only once.
P3325 CLD function

This parameter enables/disables CLD function where:
OFF: disables CLD function or
I<: enables CLD function using criterion I< for working principle, at
the moment that the characteristic quantity (phase current) falls
below the set value of parameter Trigger limit [P3328] in all three
phases, event CLD pickup [E2332] is activated or
Event: enables CLD function using criterion Event for working
principle, at the moment that the trigger event which is assigned to
parameter Trigger event [P3331] is activated, event CLD pickup
[E2332] is activated or

User Manual
I< OR Event: enables CLD function using criterion I< OR Event for working
principle, at the moment that the characteristic quantity (phase
current) falls below the set value of parameter Trigger limit
[P3328] in all three phases or the trigger event which is assigned
to parameter Trigger event [P3331] is activated, event CLD
pickup [E2332] is activated, or
I< AND Event: enables CLD function using criterion I< AND Event for working
principle, at the moment thatthe characteristic quantity (phase
current) falls below the set value of parameter Trigger limit
[P3328] in all three phases and the trigger event which is assigned
to parameter Trigger event [P3331] is activated, event CLD
pickup [E2332] is activated.
P3326 Blocking
CLD function can be completely blocked by any active event. For blocking, the number
related to this blocking event has to be assigned to parameter [P3326]. Blocking is only
effective, however, as long as the blocking event is active. As soon as blocking is active,
event CLD blocked [E2331] is activated. If the blocking event turns inactive, blocking is
abandoned and protective function is effective again. Then, event [E2331] is deactivated
automatically.
If blocking of the CLD is not required, set this parameter to 0.
P3327 CT reference
Depending on the SYMAP-Compact(+) device variant CLD function can be assigned to
a certain current measurement input (CT1 or CT2). Parameter [P3327] determines the
current measurement input which will provide measurement values as characteristic
quantity (phase current) to CLD function:
P3328 Trigger limit

Pick-up value of criterion I< for detecting a cold load situation; at the moment that the
characteristic quantity (phase current) falls below the Trigger limit in all three phases,
criterion I< is fulfilled.
APPLICATION NOTE: In case that the measured phase current is below the set
value of parameter Trigger limit [P3328], it may be concluded
that the circuit breaker is off.
NOTE: Parameter Trigger limit [P3328] is only valid for the following setting options:
I< and
I< OR Event and
I< AND Event
of parameter CLD function [P3325].
Depending on the selected setting option, and in case that

criterion I< is fulfilled or
criteria I< or Event are fulfilled or
criteria I< and Event are fulfilled,
pickup event CLD pickup [E2332] is activated and the Delay time [P3329] for
activating event CLD cold load [E2333] starts.
P3331 Trigger event

User Manual
Trigger event of criterion Event for detecting a cold load situation; criterion Event can
be fulfilled by any active event. For this, the number related to this trigger event has to
be assigned to parameter [P3331].
APPLICATION NOTE: It is recommended to assign the feedback event number of the
circuit breaker (e.g. OFF-feedback [E6011] of breaker no. 1)
to parameter Trigger event [P3331] to indicate cold load
situation while the circuit breaker is off.
NOTE: Parameter Trigger event [P3331] is only valid for setting options:
Event and
I< OR Event and
I< AND Event
of parameter CLD function [P3325].
Depending on the selected setting option, and in case that:

criterion Event is fulfilled or
pickup event CLD pickup [E2332] is activated and the Delay time [P3329] for
activating event CLD cold load [E2333] starts.
P3329 Delay time

Delay time for activating event CLD cold load [E2333]; as soon as event CLD pickup
[E2332] is active and Delay time run down, event CLD cold load [E2333] will be
activated. This event can be used for either for blocking the current protection functions
or to activate the dynamic parameters for current protection functions.
P3330 Reset delay time

Trip reset delay time for resetting event CLD cold load [E2333]; when Reset delay
time has run down, event CLD cold load [E2333] is deactivated. This Reset delay
time determines the duration for blocking the current protection functions or activation of
the dynamic parameters referring to current protection functions.
Fast reset CLD

In case that the load inrush current decreases much faster, then function Fast reset CLD can
be configured as another reset alternative.
P3332 Fast reset

This parameter enables/disables CLD fast reset function where:
OFF: disables or
ON: enables CLD fast reset function.
P3333 Fast reset limit

Pick-up value of fast reset CLD function; at the moment that
function Fast reset is activated and
Fast reset blocking is decactivated and
event CLD Pickup [E2332] is deactivated and
the characteristic quantity (phase current) falls below the Fast reset limit in all three
phases,
then, Fast reset delay time is being startet.

User Manual
P3334 Fast reset delay time

Fast reset delay time; it is the delay time for resetting event CLD cold load [E2333].
When Fast reset delay time run down, event CLD cold load [E2333] is deactivated.
P3335 Fast reset blocking

Fast reset CLD function can be completely blocked by any active event. For blocking,
Blocking is only effective, however, as long as the blocking event is active. If the
blocking event turns inactive, blocking is abandoned and fast reset function is effective
again.
If blocking of the fast reset CLD function is not required, set this parameter to 0.

User Manual
3.4.34 CTS Current Transformer Supervision
Main Menu\Parameters\PROTECTION\CTS Current transformer supervision\

CT1

Symmetry check
P2633 Symmetry quotient 0,5 - 0 1,000
P2634 Delay time 0 s 0 999999,999
E2130 CTS-1 symmetry check active - - -
E2131 CTS-1 symmetry check blocked - - -
E2132 CTS-1 symmetry check fault - - -
E2133 CTS-1 symmetry check fault delayed - - -
Diff check
P2638 Function / Source OFF - OFF/CT-GND1
P2640 Diff current limit 50 % 0 1999,9
P2641 Delay time 1 s 0 999999,999
P2642 Correction factor 0 - 0 1,00
E2135 CTS-1 diff check active - - -
E2136 CTS-1 diff check blocked - - -
E2137 CTS-1 diff fault - - -
E2138 CTS-1 diff fault delayed - - -
Figure 3-224 CTS for CT1 Parameter set 1: Protection parameters [P] & Events [E]
Main Menu\Parameters\PROTECTION\CTS Current transformer supervision\
CT2

Symmetry check
P2648 Symmetry quotient 0,5 - 0 1,000
P2649 Delay time 0 s 0 999999,999
E2140 CTS-2 symmetry check active - - -
E2141 CTS-2 symmetry check blocked - - -
E2142 CTS-2 symmetry check fault - - -
E2143 CTS-2 symmetry check fault delayed - - -
Diff check
P2653 Function / Source OFF - OFF/CT-GND1
P2656 Delay time 1 s 0 999999,999
P2657 Correction factor 0 - 0 1,00
E2145 CTS-2 diff check active - - -
E2146 CTS-2 diff check blocked - - -
E2147 CTS-2 diff fault - - -
E2148 CTS-2 diff fault delayed - - -
Figure 3-225 CTS for CT2 Parameter set 1: Protection parameters [P] & Events [E]

User Manual
NOTE: Each of the four parameter sets always provides the same group sub-functions such
as Symmetry check and Diff check. Hence, the parameter descriptions of
parameter SET 1 represented below are described in the following in detail as
examples.
CAUTION: When Holmgreen connection is used for current measurement and/or all three
CTs fail in a fully balanced 3-phase system, then function CTS Current
Transformer Supervision has to be deactivated!
Protection parameters of parameter SET 1 Current Transformer Supervision at CT1
Symmetry check (Supervision of current symmetry)

Function Symmetry check cyclically (each 2 ms) calcultes the quotient between measured
minimum and maximum phase currents of CT1:
IQ = IL,min/IL,max
In the event that quotient IQ falls below the set minimum permitted value IQ min.perm., it may be
concluded that there is a fault in one or more phase current paths of CT1.
P2630 Function
This parameter enables/disables sub-function Symmetry check of protective function
Current transformer supervision CTS where:
OFF: disables or
ON: enables the supervision function.
When supervision function Symmetry check is enabled by parameter [P2630], then

event CTS-1 symmetry check active [E2130] is activated.
P2631 Blocking
Function Symmetry check of protective function Current transformer supervision CTS
can be completely blocked by any active event. For blocking, the number related to this
blocking event has to be assigned to parameter [P2631]. Blocking is only effective,
however, as long as the blocking event is active. As soon as blocking is active, event
CTS-1 symmetry check blocked [E2131] is activated. If the blocking event turns
If blocking of function Symmetry check is not required, set this parameter to 0.
Current check for the presence of a minimum load as first criterion to detect a faulty current
transformer path of CT1

Minimum limit of the measuring of process quantity phase current to activate
supervision of phase current symmetry by function Symmetry check; function
Symmetry check is blocked as long as the measured current values of all three phases
needed for building the characteristic quantity (quotient of the minimum and maximum
phase current IL,min/IL,max) remain below this minimum setting.

User Manual
NOTE: The minimum limit of measured process quantity phase current is to be set
as a percentage of the nominal value of the process quantity. The nominal
value of the process quantity is to be set by parameter:
Current [P604], for primary side W1,
Check for current loss as second criterion to detect a faulty current transformer path of CT1
P2633 Symmetry quotient

Pick-up value IQ min.perm. of the supervision function Symmetry check; at the moment that
the characteristic quantity (quotient of the minimum and maximum phase current
IL,min/IL,max) falls below this limit, it may be concluded that there is a current loss in one or
more phase current paths of CT1.
P2634 Delay time

Trip delay time; it is the delay time of the trip event CTS-1 symmetry fault delayed
[E2133].
As soon as:
function Symmetry check is activated via parameter [P2630] and
the calculated quotient of the minimum and maximum phase current IL,min/IL,max falls
below the set value of parameter [P2633] and
blocking of function Symmetry check is not activated by the blocking event of
parameter [P2631]
the pick-up event CTS-1 symmetry fault [E2132] is activated and Delay time is being
started.
As soon as the pick-up event CTS-1 symmetry fault [E2132] is active and Delay time
automatically.
In case that the characteristic quantity (quotient of the minimum and maximum phase
current IL,min/IL,max) exceeds the pick-up value (Symmetry quotient.) of the supervision
function Symmetry check before the trip delay time (Delay time) has run down, the
timer of Delay time will be stopped, the counter value is being reset to zero, and the
pick-up event [E2132] will be deactivated.
If the characteristic quantity subsequently exceeds the pick-up value (Symmetry
quotient.), then, the pick-up event CTS-1 symmetry fault [E2132] is activated and
Delay time is being started again.

User Manual
Diff check (Supervision of total current difference)

Function Diff check calcultes the total current difference I between the measured ground
current (CT-GND1) and the total current 3I0 calculated via the measured phase currents of CT1
(3I0 = IL1 + IL2 + IL2). In case that all the current paths of CT1 and CT-GND1 are in proper
conditions and any CT tolerances are being neglected, it is:
I = IG1 3I0 = 0
In the event that quotient I falls below the set minimum permitted value I,max.perm.., it may be
concluded that there is a fault
in the ground current path CT-GND1 or
in one ore more of the phase current paths of CT1.
P2638 Function / Source

This parameter enables/disables sub-function Diff check of protective function Current
transformer supervision CTS to check the total current difference between CT1 and CT-
GND1; where:
OFF: disables or
CT-GND1: enables the supervision function.
When supervision function Diff check is enabled by parameter [P2638], then event
CTS-1 diff check active [E2135] is activated.
P2639 Blocking
Function Diff check of protective function Current transformer supervision CTS can be
completely blocked by any active event. For blocking, the number related to this blocking
event has to be assigned to parameter [P2639]. Blocking is only effective, however, as
long as the blocking event is active. As soon as blocking is active, event CTS-1 diff
check blocked [E2136] is activated. If the blocking event turns inactive, blocking is
abandoned and protective function is effective again. Then, event [E2136] is deactivated
automatically.
If blocking of function Diff check is not required, set this parameter to 0.
P2640 Diff current limit

Pick-up value I,max.perm. of the supervision function Diff check; at the moment that the
characteristic quantity (total current difference I = IG1 3I0) exceeds this limit, it may
be concluded that there is either a fault in in the ground current path CT-GND1 or in one
ore more of the phase current paths of CT1.
As soon as the characteristic value total current difference I exceeds the pick-up
value, pick-up event CTS-1 diff fault [E2137] is activated and Delay time is being
started.
P2641 Delay time

Trip delay time; it is the delay time of the trip event CTS-1 diff fault delayed [E2138].
As soon as:
function Diff check is activated via parameter [P2638] and
the calculated total current difference I = IG1 3I0 exceeds the set value of
parameter [P2640] and
blocking of function Diff check is not activated by the blocking event of parameter
[P2639]
the pick-up event CTS-1 diff fault [E2137] is activated and Delay time is being started.

User Manual
As soon as the pick-up event CTS-1 diff fault [E2137] is active and Delay time run
automatically.
In case that the characteristic quantity (total current difference I = IG1 3I0) exceeds
the pick-up value (Diff current limit.) of the supervision function Diff check before the
trip delay time (Delay time) has run down, the timer of Delay time will be stopped, the
counter value is being reset to zero, and the pick-up event [E2137] will be deactivated.
If the characteristic quantity subsequently exceeds the pick-up value (Diff current limit.),
then, the pick-up event CTS-1 diff fault [E2137] is activated and Delay time is being
started again.
Consideration of current-depending CT-tolerances
P2642 Correction factor

Dynamic correction factor to adopt pick-up value I,max.perm.; in case of high operating
current, measuring inaccuracies of the CTs and ring core type CT can lead to a higher,
absolute value of the total current difference I . By using parameter Correction factor
[P2642] the pick-up value I,max.perm. can be automatically increased according to the
increasing total current difference I
I(IL max) = I,max.perm,dyn.. * IL max + I,max.perm.

= Correction factor [P2642] * IL max + Diff current limit [P2640]
Imax, perm., dyn.
[P2640] Diff current limit
IL max
(IL1; IL2; IL3)
Figure 3-226 Diff check Correction of current-dependent CT-tolerances
If correction of pick-up value I,max.perm. is not required, set this parameter to 0.

User Manual
3.4.35 DCVM DC voltage monitoring
Protective function DC voltage monitoring DCVM) is for monitoring the DC voltage for instance
of a batterie in view of undervoltage and overvoltage. Ground faults of the positive and negative
potential of the DC voltage can be monitored by subfunction Ground fault detection.
NOTE: When using subfunction Ground fault detection it is required to connect terminal N
of SYMAP-Compact(+) device (SYMAP-Compact: -X1.2:18; SYMAP-Compact+: -
X1.2:26) to ground potential!
Basically, each of the voltage measuring inputs PT1, PT2 or PT3 can be used for DC voltage
measurement. Connection diagram is as follows:
+ 17 UL1 PT1
- UDC SYMAP-Compact F3
19 UL2
21 UL3
UDC+ UDC-
26 N
15
PT-GND1
16
Figure 3-227 DCVM connection diagram, e.g. for PT1

User Manual
MainMenu\Parameters\PROTECTION\
DCVM DC voltage monitoring

SATZPARAMETER
P3485 DC voltage monitoring OFF - ON/OFF
E2395 DCVM module active - - -
E2396 DCVM module blocked - - -
STUFE 1
P3489 Nominal DC voltage 24 V 12V/24V/48V/60V/
110V/125V/220V/
250V/440V
P3490 Overvoltage limit 110 % 0 200,0
P3491 Delay time 1,0 s 0 999999,999
P3492 Undervoltage limit 90 % 0 200,0
P3493 Delay time 1,0 s 0 999999,999
P3494 Ground fault detection OFF - ON/OFF
P3495 GF +pole limit 90 % 0 200,0
P3496 Delay time 1,0 s 0 999999,999
P3497 GF pole limit 90 % 0 200,0
P3498 Delay time 1,0 s 0 999999,999
E2397 DCVM-1 step active - - -
E2398 DCVM-1 blocked step - - -
E2399 DCVM-1 overvoltage pickup - - -
E2400 DCVM-1 overvoltage trip - - -
E2401 DCVM-1 undervoltage pickup - - -
E2402 DCVM-1 undervoltage trip - - -
E2403 DCVM-1 GF +pole pickup - - -
E2404 DCVM-1 GF +pole trip - - -
E2405 DCVM-1 GF -pole pickup - - -
E2406 DCVM-1 GF -pole trip - - -
STUFE 2

Figure 3-228 DCVM Protection parameters [P] and events [E] of SET 1
parameters of STEP 1 represented below are described in detail in the following
examples.

User Manual
Protection parameters of parameter SET 1 DCVM
SET PARAMETERS
The following SET PARAMETERS of the DCVM DC voltage monitoring function exist only
P3485 DC voltage monitoring

This parameter enables/disables DCVM DC voltage monitoring function, where:
OFF: disables or
ON: enables the DC voltage monitoring function.
When DC voltage monitoring function is enabled by parameter [P3485], then event

DCVM-1 step active [E2395] is activated.

DCVM DC voltage monitoring function can be completely blocked by any active event.
soon as blocking is active, event DCVM blocked module [E2396] is activated. If the
If blocking of the DCVM DC voltage monitoring function is not required, set this
parameter to 0.

The following STEP parameters of the DCVM DC voltage monitoring exist only once in each
of the 6 independent protection STEPS. Thus, the STEP PARAMETERS apply only to one of
the 6 protection STEPS of one parameter SET.
NOTE: Each protection step can be used individually as overvoltage and/or undervoltage
protection. Working principle should be set by parameters [P3490] to [P3493].
Subfunction Ground fault detection can be configured via parameters [P3494] to
[P3498]
P3487 Pickup source

Depending on the SYMAP-Compact(+) device variant every protection step of DC
voltage monitoring can be assigned to a certain voltage measurement input (PT1, PT2
provide measurement values as characteristic quantities (DC voltage) to the DCVM
DC voltage moniotoring:
none: no DC voltage measurement; protection step is deactivated
PT1: voltage measuring input PT1
For selection options PT1, PT2 or PT3 event DCVM-1 step active [E2397] is
activated.

The first step of DCVM DC voltage monitoring can be blocked by any active event. For
soon as blocking is active, event DCVM-1 blocked step [E2389] is activated. If the

User Manual

If blocking of the first step of DCVM DC voltage monitoring is not required, set this
parameter to 0.
P3489 Nominal DC voltage

Set value of nominal DC voltage to be monitored via the first protection step; the
following DC voltages can be adjusted:
12V DC
24V DC
48V DC
60V DC
110V DC
125V DC
220V DC
250V DC
440V DC
P3490 Overvoltage limit

Pick-up value of the first DC overvoltage monitoring element. At the moment that the
characteristic quantity (DC voltage) exceeds this limit, pick-up event DCVM-1
overvoltage pickup [E2399] will become active, and the trip delay time (see parameter
Delay time [P3491]) of the first protection element will start.
characteristic quantity (DC voltage) set by parameter Nominal DC voltage
[P3489].
P3491 Delay time

Trip delay time; it is the delay time of the trip event DCVM-1 overvoltage trip [E2400].
As soon as the pick-up event DCVM-1 overvoltage pickup [E2399] is active and Delay
time run down, trip event [E2400] will be activated. This event can be used for alarm or
In case that the characteristic quantity (voltage) of the first DCVM DC voltage
monitoring step falls below the reset limit (Hysteresis = 1% Un, not parameterizable!)
before the trip delay time (Delay time) has run down, the timer of Delay time will be
stopped and the counter value is set to zero.
P3492 Undervoltage limit

Pick-up value of the first DC undervoltage monitoring element. At the moment that the
characteristic quantity (DC voltage) falls below this limit, pick-up event DCVM-1
undervoltage pickup [E2401] will become active, and the trip delay time (see parameter
Delay time [P3493]) of the first protection element will start.
characteristic quantity (DC voltage) set by parameter Nominal DC voltage
[P3489].
P3493 Delay time

Trip delay time; it is the delay time of the trip event DCVM-1 undervoltage trip [E2402].
As soon as the pick-up event DCVM-1 undervoltage pickup [E2401] is active and
Delay time run down, trip event [E2402] will be activated. This event can be used for

User Manual
In case that the characteristic quantity (voltage) of the first DCVM DC voltage
monitoring step exceeds the reset limit (Hysteresis = 1% Un, not parameterizable!)
before the trip delay time (Delay time) has run down, the timer of Delay time will be
stopped and the counter value is set to zero.
UDC/Un
[P3490] Overvoltage limit
Hysteresis = 1% Un
100%
t
[E2399]
DCVM-1 undervoltage pickup
0
t
[P3491] Delay time
t
[E2400]
DCVM-1 Overvoltage trip
0
t
Figure 3-229 DCVM: Overvoltage protection UDC tripping and reset characteristic

User Manual
UDC/Un
100%
Hysteresis = 1% Un
[P3492] Undervoltage limit
t
[E2401]
DCVM-1 undervoltage pickup
0
t
[P3493]
Delay time
[E2402] t
DCVM-1 undervoltage trip
0
t
Figure 3-230 DCVM: Undervoltage protection UDC tripping and reset characteristic

User Manual
Ground fault detection

Independent of the overvoltage and undervoltage protection of the first step of the DCVM DC
voltage monitoring function, subfunction Ground fault detection can be activated, and
configured via parameters P3494] to [P3498].
P3494 Ground fault detection

This parameter enables/disables subfunction Ground fault detection of the forst step of
DCVM DC voltage monitoring function, where:
OFF: disables or
ON: enables subfunction Ground fault detection.
P3495 GF +pole limit

Pick-up value of the first DC ground voltage monitoring element. At the moment that the
positive potential UDC+ (+pole) of the monitored DC voltage falls below this limit, pick-up
event DCVM-1 GF +pole pickup [E2403] will become active, and the trip delay time
(see parameter Delay time [P3496]) of the first protection element will start.
NOTE: The pick-up value is to be set as a percentage of the half of the nominal value
of the characteristic quantity (DC voltage) set by parameter Nominal DC
voltage [P3489].
P3496 Delay time

Trip delay time; it is the delay time of the trip event DCVM-1 GF +pole trip [E2404].
As soon as the pick-up event DCVM-1 +pole pickup [E2403] is active and Delay time
control purposes.
In case that the measured voltage of the positive potential (+pole) of the monitored DC
voltage falls below the reset limit (Hysteresis = 1% Un, not parameterizable!) before the
trip delay time (Delay time) has run down, the timer of Delay time will be stopped and
the counter value is set to zero.
P3497 GF -pole limit

Pick-up value of the first DC ground voltage monitoring element. At the moment that the
negative potential UDC- (-pole) of the monitored DC voltage falls below this limit, pick-up
event DCVM-1 GF -pole pickup [E2405] will become active, and the trip delay time (see
parameter Delay time [P3498]) of the first protection element will start.
NOTE: The pick-up value is to be set as a percentage of the half of the nominal value
of the characteristic quantity (DC voltage) set by parameter Nominal DC
voltage [P3489].
P3498 Delay time

Trip delay time; it is the delay time of the trip event DCVM-1 GF -pole trip [E2406].
As soon as the pick-up event DCVM-1 -pole pickup [E2405] is active and Delay time
control purposes.
In case that the measured voltage of the negative potential (-pole) of the monitored DC
voltage falls below the reset limit (Hysteresis = 1% Un, not parameterizable!) before the
trip delay time (Delay time) has run down, the timer of Delay time will be stopped and
the counter value is set to zero.

User Manual
UDC+/Un
100%
Hysteresis = 1% Un
[P3495] GF +pole limit
t
[E2403]
DCVM-1 GF +pole pickup
0
t
[P3496]
Delay time
[E2404] t
DCVM-1GF +pole trip
0
t
Figure 3-231 DCVM: Ground Fault detection UDC+ tripping and reset characteristic

User Manual
UDC-/Un
100%
Hysteresis = 1% Un
[P3497] GF -pole limit
t
[E2405]
DCVM-1 GF -pole pickup
0
t
[P3498]
Delay time
[E2406] t
DCVM-1 GF -pole trip
1
0
t
Figure 3-232 DCVM: Ground Fault detection UDC tripping and reset characteristic

User Manual
3.4.36 PTS Potential Transformer Supervision
Main Menu\Parameters\PROTECTION\PTS Potential transformer supervision\

PT1

Symmetry check
P2543 Symmetry quotient 0,75 % 0 999999,999
P2544 Delay time 5 s 0 999999,999
E2070 PTS-1 symmetry check active - - -
E2071 PTS-1 symmetry check blocked - - -
E2072 PTS-1 symmetry check fault - - -
E2073 PTS-1 symmetry check fault delayed - - -
Fuse failure check
P2547 Function / Source OFF - OFF/CT1/CT2/PT-GND1
P2549 Symmetric current limit 10 % 0 6553,5
P2550 Min. current limit 1 10 % 0 6553,5
P2551 Asymmetric voltage limit 30 % 0 200,0
P2552 Asymmetric quotient 0,4 - 0 1,00
P2553 Voltage lost limit 15 % 0 200,0
P2556 Diff voltage limit 50 % 0 200,0
P2557 Delay time 10 s 0 999999,999
E2076 PTS-1 fuse failure check active - - -
E2077 PTS-1 fuse failure check blocked - - -
E2078 PTS-1 fuse failure 3 phase - - -
E2179 PTS-1 fuse faulure - - -
E2180 PTS-1 fuse failure delayed - - -
General check
P2561 Function / Source OFF - OFF/CT1/CT2
P2563 CB close feedback 0 event 0 9999
P2565 Min. current limit 15 % 0 6553,5
P2566 Max. current limit 10 % 0 6553,5
P2567 Delay time 0 s 0 999999,999
E2084 PTS-1 general check active - - -
E2085 PTS-1 general check blocked - - -
E2086 PTS-1 general check fault - - -
E2087 PTS-1 general check fault delayed - - -
Figure 3-233 PTS for PT1 Parameter set 1: Protection parameters [P] and Events [E]

User Manual

PT2

Symmetry check
P2574 Delay time 5 s 0 999999,999
Fuse failure check
P2587 Delay time 10 s 0 999999,999
General check
P2597 Delay time 0 s 0 999999,999

User Manual

PT3

Symmetry check
P2604 Delay time 5 s 0 999999,999
Fuse failure check
P2617 Delay time 10 s 0 999999,999
General check
P2627 Delay time 0 s 0 999999,999
NOTE: Each of the four parameter sets always provides the same group sub-functions such
as Symmetry check, Fuse failure check and General check. Hence, the
parameter descriptions of parameter SET 1 represented below are described in the
following in detail as examples.

User Manual
Protection parameters of parameter SET 1 Potential Transformer Supervision at PT1
Symmetry check (Supervision of voltage symmetry)

Function Symmetry check cyclically calculates the quotient between measured minimum and
maximum phase-to-phase voltages of PT1:
UQ = UL-L,min/UL-L,max
In the event that quotient UQ falls below the set minimum permitted value UQ min.perm., it may be
concluded that there is a fault in one or more phase-to-phase voltage circuits of PT1.
P2540 Function
This parameter enables/disables sub-function Symmetry check of protective function
Potential transformer supervision PTS where:
OFF: disables or
ON: enables the supervision function.
below the circuit breaker, and which is open, then, supervision of voltage
symmetry must be blocked by a suitable event. For this, the related number of
such blocking event has to be assigned to parameter [P2541].
When supervision function Symmetry check is enabled by parameter [P2640], then

event PTS-1 symmetry check active [E2070] is activated.
P2541 Blocking
Function Symmetry check of protective function Potential transformer supervision
PTS can be completely blocked by any active event. For blocking, the number related to
this blocking event has to be assigned to parameter [P2531]. Blocking is only effective,
PTS-1 symmetry check blocked [E2071] is activated. If the blocking event turns
If blocking of function Symmetry check is not required, set this parameter to 0.
Voltage check for the presence of a minimum measuring voltage as first criterion to detect a
faulty voltage transformer circuit of PT1
P2542 Min start voltage

Minimum limit of the measuring of process quantity phase-to-phase voltage to activate
supervision of voltage symmetry by function Symmetry check; function Symmetry
check is blocked as long as the measured values of the phase-to-phase voltages
needed for building the characteristic quantity (quotient of the minimum and maximum
phase-to-phase voltage UQ = UL-L,min/UL-L,max) remain below this minimum setting.
NOTE: The minimum limit of measured process quantity phase-to-phase voltage is

to be set as a percentage of the nominal value of the process quantity. The
nominal value of the process quantity is to be set by parameter:
Voltage (L-L) [P603], for primary side W1,

User Manual
Check for voltage unsymmetry as second criterion to detect a faulty potential transformer circuit
of PT1
P2543 Symmetry quotient

Pick-up value UQ min.perm. of the supervision function Symmetry check; at the moment
that the characteristic quantity (quotient of the minimum and maximum phase-to-phase
voltage UL-L,min/UL-L,max) falls below this limit, it may be concluded that there is a voltage
loss in one or more phase-to-phase voltage circuits of PT1.
P2544 Delay time

Trip delay time; it is the delay time of the trip event PTS-1 symmetry fault delayed
[E2073].
As soon as:
function Symmetry check is activated via parameter [P2540] and
at least one of the phase-to-phase voltages measured via PT1 exceeds the
minimum voltage limit set by parameter Voltage limit [P2543] (voltage check) and
the calculated quotient of the minimum and maximum phase-to-phase voltage
UL-L,min/UL-L,max falls below the set value of parameter [P2543] (voltage unsymmetry
check) and
blocking of function Symmetry check is not activated by the blocking event of
parameter [P2541]
the pick-up event PTS-1 symmetry fault [E2072] is activated and Delay time is being
started.
As soon as the pick-up event PTS-1 symmetry fault [E2072] is active and Delay time
automatically.
In case that the characteristic quantity (quotient of the minimum and maximum phase-to-
phase voltage UL-L,min/UL-L,max) exceeds the pick-up value (Symmetry quotient.) of the
supervision function Symmetry check before the trip delay time (Delay time) has run
down, the timer of Delay time will be stopped, the counter value is being reset to zero,
and the pick-up event [E2072] will be deactivated.
If the characteristic quantity subsequently falls below the pick-up value (Symmetry
quotient.), then, the pick-up event PTS-1 symmetry fault [E2072] is activated and
Delay time is being started again.

User Manual
Fuse failure check
For supervision of a potential transformer fuse failure (tripping of miniature circuit breaker MCB),
function Fuse failure check provides the following sub-functions:
Sub-function Asymmetric fuse failure: for detection of 1-phase and 2-phase faults in the
secondary voltage measurement circuit of PT1
Sub-function 3 Phase fuse failure: for detection of a 3-phase fault in the secondary
voltage measurement circuit of PT1 (3-pole
PTfuse fail)
Sub-function Voltage difference: for detection of 1-phase and 2-phase faults in the
secondary voltage measurement circuit of PT1 or
in the secondary voltage measurement circuit of
PT-GND1
NOTE: Sub-functions Asymmetric fuse failure and 3 Phase fuse failure are only being
activated for the following parameter settings:
Function / Source [P2547] = CT1 or
Function / Source [P2547] = CT2!
Then, parameter [P2556] of function Fuse failure check will not apply!
Sub-function Asymmetric fuse failure (1-phase and 2-phase PT fuse failures)

At the use of 1-pole miniature circuit breakers (MCB), which are for protecting the secondary
circuits of the potential transformers connected to PT1, function Asymmetric fuse failure
detects the tripping of one or two MCBs (non-symmetrical MCB tripping).
CAUTION: Sub-function Asymmetric fuse failure cannot detect tripping of all of the three 1-
pole MCBs (symmetric MCB tripping)
Supervision of PT secondary circuits according to 1-phase and 2-phase faults is being

conducted by:
check of phase current symmetry by the characteristic quantities: calculated total current 3I0
and negative phase sequence current I2 of symmetrical components,
current check for a minimum load and
check of voltage symmetry depending on the star point treatment (isolated, compensated or
solidly earthed star point)
A1-phase or 2-phase fault is being detected if there is a measured minimum load and an
impermissible voltage unsymmetry, but no impermissible current symmetry.
Sub-function 3 Phase fuse failure (3-phase PT fuse failure)

At the use of three 1-pole miniature circuit breakers (MCB) or a 3-pole MCB, which are for
protecting the secondary circuits of the potential transformers connected to PT1, function
3 Phase fuse failure detects the symmetrical MCB tripping .
Supervision of PT secondary circuits according to a 3-phase fault is being conducted by:

check of voltage loss at voltage measurement input PT1 by the characteristic quantity
phase voltage ULx-E (with: x = 1,2,3) and
current check for high-current faults such as short-circuit.
A 3-phase fault is being detected in case of an impermissibly high voltage drop at PT1 and if
there was no significant, impermissible current increase at current measuring input CT1 within
one measuring period.

User Manual
General parameters of function Fuse failure check

This parameter enables/disables function Fuse failure check of protective function
Potential transformer supervision PTS for PT1 and PT-GND1, where:
OFF: disables function Fuse failure check or
CT1: enables sub-function Asymmetric fuse failure and 3 Phase fuse
failure for PT1 with current check of CT1 or
CT2: enables sub-function Asymmetric fuse failure and 3 Phase fuse
failure for PT1 with current check of CT2 or
PT-GND1: only enables sub-function Voltage difference for PT1 and PT-GND1
When supervision function Fuse failure check is enabled by parameter [P2547], then
event PTS-1 fuse fail check active [E2076] is activated.
P2548 Blocking
Function Fuse failure check of protective function Potential transformer supervision
PTS can be completely blocked by any active event. For blocking, the number related to
this blocking event has to be assigned to parameter [P2548]. Blocking is only effective,
PTS-1 fuse failure check blocked [E2077] is activated. If the blocking event turns
If blocking of function Fuse failure check is not required, set this parameter to 0.
Check of phase current symmetry as first criterion to detect 1-phase and 2-phase tripping of
miniature circuit breakers (MCB) Asymmetric fuse failure
P2549 Symmetric current limit

Minimum limit for detection of no impermissible current non-symmetry; as long as
the first characteristic quantity residual current 3I0, calculated by measured phase
currents and
the first characteristic quantity negative phase sequence current I2 of symmetrical
components
fall below the set value of parameter Symmetric current limit [P2549], the first criterion
for detecting 1-phase or 2-phase tripping of MCBs.
Current check for a minimum load as second criterion to detect 1-phase and 2-phase tripping of
P2550 Min. current limit 1

Minimum limit of phase currents for current check for a minimum load by CT1 or CT2; as
soon as the process quantity phase current ILx (with: x = 1,2,3) exceeds the set value of
parameter Min current limit 1 [P2550] at least in one phase, then, second criterion to
detect 1-phase and 2-phase tripping of miniature circuit breakers (MCB) is fulfilled.
NOTE: Exceeding the set value of parameter [P2565] can be interpreted as live
elelctrical equipment, for instance a substation, so that a measurable voltage
is basically provided.

User Manual
Check of phase current symmetry as third criterion to detect 1-phase and 2-phase tripping of
P2551 Asymmetric voltage limit

Minimum limit for detection of no impermissible voltage non-symmetry; as long as
the first characteristic quantity residual voltage 3U0, calculated by measured phase
voltages and
the first characteristic quantity negative phase sequence voltage U2 of symmetrical
components
exceed the set value of parameter Symmetric voltage limit [P2551], the third criterion
for detecting 1-phase or 2-phase tripping of MCBs is fulfilled.
CAUTION: Parameter Asymmetric voltage limit [P2551] only applies to applications

providing solidly earthed star points; for this, the following parameter
setting applies:
for primary side W1: Star point grounding [P602] = earthed or
for secondary side W2: Star point grounding [P612] = earthed or
for tertiary side W3: Star point grounding [P622] = earthed
P2552 Asymmetry quotient

Minimum limit for detection of no impermissible voltage non-symmetry; as soon as the
characteristic quantity quotient U2/U1 (ratio between the negative phase sequence
voltage U2 and the positive phase sequence voltage U1 of symmetrical components)
exceeds the set value of parameter [P1552], then, the third criterion to detect 1-phase
and 2-phase tripping of miniature circuit breakers (MCB) is fulfilled.
CAUTION: Parameter Asymmetric voltage limit [P2552] only applies to applications

providing isolated or compensated star points; for this, the following
parameter setting applies:
for primary side W1: Star point grounding [P602] = isolated or
for secondary side W2: Star point grounding [P612] = isolatedor
for tertiary side W3: Star point grounding [P622] = isolated or
for primary side W1: Star point grounding [P602] = compensated or
for secondary side W2: Star point grounding [P612] = compensated
or
for tertiary side W3: Star point grounding [P622] = compensated.
Check of voltage loss as first criterion to detect a 3-phase tripping of miniature circuit breakers
(MCB) 3-Phase fuse failure
P2553 Voltage lost limit

Minimum limit of phase voltages for current check for voltage loss at PT1; as soon as the
process quantity phase voltage ULx-E (with: x = 1,2,3) exceeds the set value of
parameter Voltage lost limit [P2553] in all three phases, then, first criterion to detect 3-
phase tripping of miniature circuit breakers (MCB) is fulfilled.
Current check for high-current faults as second criterion to detect a 3-phase tripping of
miniature circuit breakers (MCB) 3-Phase fuse failure
NOTE: The second criterion to detect a 3-phase tripping of miniature circuit breakers (MCB)
is fulfilled only if a minimum load is measured (exceeding of minimum limit set by

User Manual
parameter Min. current limit 2 [P2554]) and if simultaneously, no significant current

increase is detected (undercutting the set value of parameter Diff current limit
[P2555])
P2554 Min current limit 2

Minimum limit of phase currents for current check for aminimum load by CT1 or CT2; as
soon as the process quantity phase current ILx (with: x = 1,2,3) exceeds the set value of
parameter Min current limit 1 [P2550] at least in one phase, then, second criterion to
detect 3-phase tripping of miniature circuit breakers (MCB) is fulfilled.
NOTE: Exceeding the set value of parameter [P2554] can be interpreted as a live
elelctrical equipment, for instance a substation, so that a measurable minimum
load is basically provided, and voltage measuring via PT1 is possible.
P2555 Diff current limit

Minimum limit for detection of no impermissible current increase caused by high-current
faults such as short-circuit; if the characteristic quantity current difference |ILx ILx*|
with: x = 1,2,3 (phase-seggregated difference of the amount of thephase currents
measured at the beginning and the end of the measuring period) remains below the set
value of parameter [P2555], second criterion to detect 3-phase tripping of miniature
circuit breakers (MCB) is fulfilled.
However, if the set minimum limit is being exceeded, it may be concluded that a high-
current fault is present, which causes a significant voltage drop.

User Manual
Sub-function Voltage difference (Supervision of residual voltage difference)
NOTE: Sub-function Voltage difference is only being activated for parameter setting:
Function / Source [P2547] = PT-GND1.
Then, parameters [P2549] to [P2555] of function Fuse failure check will not apply!
Function Voltage difference calcultes the residual voltage difference U between the
measured ground voltage (PT-GND1) and the residual current 3U0 calculated via the measured
phase currents of PT1 (3U0 = UL1-E + UL2-E + UL2-E). In case that all the voltage circuits of PT1
and PT-GND1 are in proper conditions and any PT tolerances are being neglected, it is:
U = UG 3U0 = 0
In the event that quotient U falls below the set minimum permitted value U,max.perm., it may be
concluded that there is a fault
in the ground voltage circuit of PT-GND1 or
in one or two of the phase voltage circuits of PT1 (1-pole or 2-pole fuse fail).
CAUTION: A 3-pole fuse failure cannot be detected by function Voltage difference!
P2556 Diff voltage limit

Pick-up value U,max.perm. of the supervision function Voltage difference; at the moment
that the characteristic quantity (total residual voltage difference U = UG 3U0)
exceeds this limit, it may be concluded that there is either a fault in in the ground voltage
circuit of PT-GND1 or in one ore more of the phase voltage circuits of PT1.
As soon as the characteristic value total residual voltage difference U exceeds the
pick-up value, pick-up event PTS-1 fuse failure [E2079] is activated and Delay time is
being started.
P2557 Delay time

Trip delay time; it is the delay time of the trip event PTS-1 fuse failure delayed [E2080].
As soon as:
function Fuse failure check is activated by assignment of the applied current
measurement channel CT1 or CT2 via parameter [P2547] or of the applied ground
voltage measurement channel PT-GND1 and
either for parameter settings:
Function / Source [P2562] = CT1 or Function / Source [P2562] = CT2,
all of the failure conditions of sub-function Asymmetric fuse failure or
all of the failure conditions of sub-function 3-Phase fuse failure are fulfilled
or for parameter settings:
Function / Source [P2562] = PT-GND1,
all of the failure conditions of sub-function Voltage difference are fulfilled and
blocking of function Fuse failure check is not activated by the blocking event of
parameter [P2562]
the pick-up event PTS-1 fuse failure [E2079] is activated and Delay time is being
started.
As soon as the pick-up event PTS-1 fuse failure [E2079] is active and Delay time run
automatically.

User Manual
In case the voltage and current conditions fail to apply with the foregoing failure
conditions before the trip delay time (Delay time) has run down, the timer of Delay
time will be stopped, the counter value is being reset to zero, and the pick-up event
If the failure conditions subsequently are fulfilled again, then, the pick-up event [E2079]
is activated and Delay time is being started again.

User Manual
General check (Supervision of voltage and current conditions)

This parameter enables/disables sub-function General check of protective function
Potential transformer supervision PTS where:
OFF: disables or
CT1: enables sub-function General check and current check of CT1 or
CT2: enables sub-function General check and current check of CT2.
When supervision function General check is enabled by parameter [P2561], then event
PTS-1 general check active [E2084] is activated.
P2562 Blocking
Function General check of protective function Potential transformer supervision PTS
can be completely blocked by any active event. For blocking, the number related to this
blocking event has to be assigned to parameter [P2562]. Blocking is only effective,
PTS-1 general check blocked [E2085] is activated. If the blocking event turns inactive,
blocking is abandoned and protective function is effective again. Then, event [E2085] is
If blocking of function General check is not required, set this parameter to 0.
Check of voltage condition as first criterion to detect a faulty voltage transformer circuit of PT1
P2564 Voltage limit

Minimum limit of phase voltages for voltage check of PT1; at the moment that the
process quantity (phase voltage ULx-E; with: x = 1,2,3) falls below this limit, it may be
concluded that there is a voltage loss in one or more phase-to-phase voltage circuits of
PT1.
Current check for the presence of a minimum load as second criterion to detect a faulty voltage
transformer circuit of PT1
P2565 Min. current limit

Minimum limit of phase currents for the presence of a minimum load at CT1; at the
moment that the characteristic quantity (phase current ILx; with: x = 1,2,3) falls below
this limit in all three phases, it may be concluded that there is no minimum load, and, as
consequence, there is no active voltage to be measured via PT1.
NOTE: In case that phase currents of all three phase exceeds the minimum limit set
by parameter [P2565], then, it may be concluded that there is an existing
minimum load, and, as consequence, an ative voltage which could be
measured at PT1.
Current check for short circuit as third criterion to detect a faulty voltage transformer circuit of
PT1
P2566 Max. current limit

Maximum limit of phase currents for short circuit check; at the moment that the
characteristic quantity (phase current ILx; with: x = 1,2,3) measured via CT1 exceeds
this limit at least in one phase, it may be concluded that a short circuit occured, which
could cause the loss of voltage measured at PT1. If so, third criterion to detect a faulty
voltage transformer circuit of PT1 is not fulfilled.

User Manual
Circuit breaker (CB) position Closed as an alternative to current check for a minimum load
P2563 CB close feedback

Feedback signal for CB position CLOSED; signalling of position Closed of the circuit
breaker (CB) can be acctivated by any active event. For activation, the number related to
this event has to be assigned to parameter [P2563].
NOTE: Position CLOSED of the CB is preferably indicated by assigning one of the
following Position Event Numbers: E6111], [E6121], [E6131], [E6141],
[E61551], [E6161], [E6171] or [E6181], to parameter [P2563].
assigned event turns inactive, CB position is being interpreted as OPEN and
depending on the PT location no voltage is measured at PT1. In case that measured
phase voltages fall below the set limit of parameter Voltage lmit [P2564], it may not
concluded that there is a faulty voltage transformer circuit of PT1.
If evaluation of the circuit breaker position CLOSED is not required, set this parameter
to 0.
P2567 Delay time

Trip delay time; it is the delay time of the trip event PTS-1 general failure delayed
[E2087].
As soon as:
function General check is activated by assignment of the applied current
measurement channel CT1 or CT2 via parameter [P2561] and
all of the three measured phase voltages fall below the minimum Voltage limit
[P2564] (voltage check) and
either one of the three measured phase currents of CT1 (or CT2) exceeds the
minimum current limit set by parameter Min. current limit [P2565] (current check for
the presence of a minimum load) or the circuit breaker is closed and
none of the three measured phase currents of CT1 (or CT2) exceeds the maximum
current limit set by parameter Max. current limit [P2566] (current check for short
circuit) and
blocking of function General check is not activated by the blocking event of
parameter [P2562]
the pick-up event PTS-1 general failure [E2086] is activated and Delay time is being
started.
As soon as the pick-up event PTS-1 general failure [E2086] is active and Delay time
automatically.
In case the voltage and current conditions fail to apply with the foregoing failure
conditions before the trip delay time (Delay time) has run down, the timer of Delay
time will be stopped, the counter value is being reset to zero, and the pick-up event
If the failure conditions subsequently are fulfilled again, then, the pick-up event [E2086]
is activated and Delay time is being started again.

User Manual
3.4.37 SOTF Switch On To Fault
SOTF Switch on to fault

SET PARAMETERS
P3340 SOTF function OFF - OFF/ON
E2335 SOTF active - - -
E2336 SOTF blocked - - -
STEP 1
P3345 Function OFF -
I< AND Event
P3347 CT reference CT1 - CT1/CT2
P3348 Trigger limit 10 % 5 6553,5
P3349 Trigger pulse OFF - OFF/ON
P3350 Trigger pulse time 2,000 s 0 999999,999
P3351 Delay time 0,03 s 0 999999,999
P3352 Reset delay time 0,000 s 0 999999,999
P3353 Trigger event 0 - 0 9999
P3354 Pickup event 1 0 - 0 9999
P3355 Pickup event 2 0 - 0 9999
P3356 Pickup event 3 0 - 0 9999
P3357 Pickup event 4 0 - 0 9999
P3358 Pickup event 5 0 - 0 9999
P3359 Pickup event 6 0 - 0 9999
P3360 Pickup event 7 0 - 0 9999
P3361 Pickup event 8 0 - 0 9999
P3362 Pickup event 9 0 - 0 9999
P3363 Pickup event 10 0 - 0 9999
P3364 Pickup event 11 0 - 0 9999
P3365 Pickup event 12 0 - 0 9999
P3366 Pickup event 13 0 - 0 9999
P3367 Pickup event 14 0 - 0 9999
P3368 Pickup event 15 0 - 0 9999
P3369 Pickup event 16 0 - 0 9999
E2338 SOTF-1 active - - -
E2339 SOTF-1 blocked - - -
E2340 SOTF-1 trigger - - -
E2341 SOTF-1 pickup - - -
E2342 SOTF-1 trip - - -
STEP 2
P3370 Function OFF -
I< AND Event

Figure 3-236 SOTF Protection parameters [P] and events [E] of SET 1

User Manual
examples.
Protection parameters of parameter SET 1 SOTF

SET PARAMETERS
The following SET PARAMETERS of the SOTF function exist only once in each of the four
parameter SET.
P3340 SOTF function

This parameter enables/disables SOTF function where:
OFF: disables or
ON: enables the SOTF function.
When SOTF function is enabled by parameter [P3340], then event SOTF active

SOTF function can be completely blocked by any active event. For blocking, the number
event SOTF blocked [E2336] and corresponding step events SOTF-1 blocked
[E2339] and SOTF-2 blocked [E2345] are being activated. If the blocking event turns
[E2336] and corresponding step events [E2339] and [E2345] are being deactivated
automatically.
If blocking of the SOTF function is not required, set this parameter to 0.

The following STEP parameters of the SOTF function exist only once in each of the 2
P3345 Function
This parameter enables/disables the first protection step of the SOTF function where:
OFF: disables the first protection step of SOTF function or
I<: enables the first protection step of SOTF function using criterion
I< for working principle, at the moment that the characteristic
quantity (phase current) falls below the set value of parameter
Trigger limit [P3348] in all three phases, event SOTF-1 trigger
[E2340] is activated or
Event: enables the first protection step of SOTF function using criterion
Event for working principle, at the moment that the trigger event
which is assigned to parameter Trigger event [P3353] is
activated, event SOTF-1 trigger [E2340] is activated or
I< OR Event: enables the first protection step of SOTF function using criterion
I< OR Event for working principle, at the moment the
characteristic quantity (phase current) falls below the set value of
parameter Trigger limit [P3348] in all three phases or the trigger
event which is assigned to parameter Trigger event [P3353] is
activated, event SOTF-1 trigger [E2340] is activated, or

User Manual
I< AND Event: enables the first protection step of SOTF function using criterion
I< AND Event for working principle, at the moment the
characteristic quantity (phase current) falls below the set value of
parameter Trigger limit [P3348] in all three phases and the
trigger event which is assigned to parameter Trigger event
[P3353] is activated, event SOTF-1 trigger [E2340] is being
activated.

The first step of SOFT function can be blocked by any active event. For blocking, the
active, event SOTF-1 blocked [E2339] is activated. If the blocking event turns inactive,
blocking is abandoned and protective function is effective again. Then, event [E2339] is
If blocking of the first step of the SOTF function is not required, set this parameter to 0.
P3347 CT reference
Depending on the SYMAP-Compact(+) device variant the first protection step of the
SOTF function can be assigned to a certain current measurement input (CT1 or CT2).
measurement values as characteristic quantity (phase current) to the SOTF function:
P3348 Trigger limit

Pick-up value of criterion I< for triggering event SOTF-1 trigger [E2340] of the first
protection step (STEP 1) of the SOFT function; at the moment that the characteristic
quantity (phase current) falls below the Trigger limit in all three phases, criterion I< is
fulfilled.
APPLICATION NOTE: In case that the measured phase current is below the set
value of parameter Trigger limit [P3348], it may be concluded
that the circuit breaker is off.
NOTE: Parameter Trigger limit [P3348] is only valid for the following setting options:
I< and
I< OR Event and
I< AND Event
of parameter Function [P3345].
Depending on the selected setting option, and in case that

criterion I< is fulfilled or
pickup event SOTF-1 trigger [E2340] is activated in dependence of selected setting

option of parameter Trigger pulse [P3349].
P3353 Trigger event

Trigger event of criterion Event for triggering event SOTF-1 trigger [E2340] of the first
protection step (STEP 1) of the SOFT function; criterion Event can be fulfilled by any
active event. For this, the number related to this trigger event has to be assigned to
parameter [P3353].

User Manual
APPLICATION NOTE: It is recommended to assign the feedback event number of the

circuit breaker (e.g. OFF-feedback [E6011] of breaker no. 1)
to parameter Trigger event [P3353] to indicate CB off
position.
NOTE: Parameter Trigger event [P3353] is only valid for setting options:
Event and
I< OR Event and
I< AND Event
of parameter Function [P3345].
Depending on the selected setting option, and in case that:

criterion Event is fulfilled or
pickup event SOTF-1 trigger [E2340] is activated in dependence of selected setting

option of parameter Trigger pulse [P3349].
P3349 Trigger pulse

This parameter enables/disables SOTF trigger pulse of first protection step (STEP 1) of
SOFT function where:
OFF: disabled trigger pulse; event SOTF-1 trigger [E2340] is activated
as long as the criterion/criteria of the selected working principle of
parameter SOTF function [P3345] is/are fulfilled, or
ON: enabled trigger pulse; event SOTF-1 trigger [E2340] is activated
according to a defined pulse duration set by parameter Trigger pulse time
[P3350]
P3350 Trigger pulse time

Pulse duration of trigger event SOTF-1 trigger [E2340] of the first protection step
(STEP 1) of SOTF function; in case that
the selected criterion/criteria to detect a SOTF situation (see parameter Function
[P3345]) is fulfilled, and
parameter Trigger pulse [P3349] = ON,
then event SOTF-1 trigger [E2340] is activated for the duration set by parameter
Trigger pulse time of the first protection step (STEP 1) of SOTF function.
NOTE: Parameter Trigger pulse time [P3350] is only valid for setting option ON of
parameter Trigger pulse [P3349].
P3354 Pickup event 1

Pickup event of first step SOTF-1 function; in case that
event SOTF-1 trigger [E2340] is active and
at least one of the 16 pickup events is active,
then event SOTF-1 pickup [E2341] is activated. SOTF-1 pickup [E2341] event
becomes inactive when all 16 pickup events are inactive.

to

User Manual
P3351 Delay time

Delay time for activating trip event SOTF-1 trip [E2342]; as soon as event SOTF-1
pickup [E2341] is active and Delay time run down, trip event [E2342] will be activated.

Trip reset limit delay time; it is the delay time for resetting the trip event SOTF-1 trip
[E2342].
If the trip reset delay time (Reset delay time) has run down, trip event SOTF-1 trip
[E2342] is deactivated.

User Manual
3.4.38 TIG Transient/Intermittent Ground Fault Protection
TIG Transient/Intermittent ground fault

GND Power_CT1/GND Power_CT2/
P3477 Pickup source GND Power_CT1 -
GND Power CT-GND1
P3478 Direction Non-directional - Non-directional/Forward/Backward
P3479 Min. ground voltage 0 % 0 200,0
P3480 Absolute limit 0 % 0 6553,5
P3481 Relative limit 0 % 0 6553,5
P3482 Counter trip value 3 - 0 65535
P3483 Reset time 0 s 0 999999,999
P3484 Min. trip time 0 s 0 999999,999
E2390 TIG active - - -
E2391 TIG blocked - - -
E2392 TIG pickup - - -
E2393 TIG trip - - -
Figure 3-237 TIG-Transient/Intermittent Ground fault protection: Parameters [P] and events [E]
Protection parameters of parameter SET 1 TIG Transient/Intermittent Ground Fault

protection
P3475 Function
This parameter enables/disables TIG-Transient/Intermittent Ground Fault protection
function whereby the setting:
OFF: disables or
When TIG-Transient/Intermittent Ground Fault protection is enabled by parameter

[P3475], then event TIG active [E2390] is activated.
P3476 Blocking
TIG-Transient/Intermittent Ground Fault protection can be completely blocked by any
is active. As soon as blocking is active, event TIG blocked [E2391] is activated. If the
blocking event turns inactive, blocking is abandoned and TIG function is effective again.

User Manual
If blocking of the TIG-Transient/Intermittent Ground Fault protection is not required, set

P3477 Pickup source

Depending on the SYMAP-Compact(+) device variant TIG-Transient/Intermittent
Ground Fault protection can be assigned to a certain current measurement input (CT1,
CT2 or CT-GND1). Hence, parameter [P3477] determines the ground current
measurement input and its assigned residual voltage measurement input which will
provide measurement values as process quantities (ground current and phase angle
between ground current and residual voltage as reference voltage) to the TIG-
Transient/Intermittent Ground Fault protection:
(IG = 3 x I0 = [I1 + I2+I3 ]) and
[P9419].
(IG = 3 x I0 = [I1 + I2+I3 ]) and
[P9422].
GND Power CT-GND1: ground current measurement by CT-GND1 and
[P9428].
GND1) to the ground current measurement input CT1, CT2 or CT-GND1 is to
be done by the following parameters (referring to the setting options of
parameter [P3477]), in the submenu SYSTEM\Measuring\Power:
To measure ground current direction correctly, the required zero energy flow
direction is to be defined by following parameters:
potential!

User Manual
P3478 Direction
Selction of operating mode according to the direction of the TIG-Transient/Intermittent
Ground Fault protection; the working principle for direction detection is as follows:
From the moment at which the maximum ground current sample IG,max causes the
exceeding of the set value of parameter Relative limit [P3481], the arithmetical mean
value UG,mean of 6 consecutive samples of the ground voltage UG will be calculated. Then
the signs of IG,max and UG,mean will be compared.
Function TIG-Transient/Intermittent Ground Fault is optionally adjustable as:
Non-directional: The protection function trips in forward and backward direction
Forward: The protection function trips only in forward direction; therefore,
IG,max and UG,mean must be of the same sign (+/+ or -/-).
Backward: The protection function trips only in forward direction; therefore,
IG,max and UG,mean must be of the different signs (+/- or -/+).
P3479 Min. ground voltage

Minimum limit of the measuring ground (residual) voltage to activate directional ground
overcurrent protection; as soon as the measured reference voltage (residual voltage)
falls below this minimum setting, the decision of forward or backward direction cannot be
made. Thus, the occurred ground fault will be ignored!
NOTE: The minimum limit of the measuring ground voltage is to be set as a

percentage of the nominal value of the process quantity (residual voltage).
The nominal value of the process quantity is to be set by parameter:
Ground voltage [P626], for tertiary side W3 .

Absolute ground current value as first criterion to detect a transient/intermittent ground fault
P3480 Absolute limit

Pick-up value IG,TRMS. of the TIG-Transient/Intermittent Ground Fault protection; at the
moment that the characteristic quantity (TRMS value of ground current IG) exceeds this
limit, the first criterion to detect a transient/intermittent ground fault is fulfilled.
Relative ground current value as second criterion to detect a transient/intermittent ground fault
P3481 Relative limit

Pick-up value |IG,max| / IG,TRMS of the TIG-Transient/Intermittent Ground Fault protection; at
the moment that the characteristic quantity (quotient of the absolute value of the
maximum IG sample per cycle and the TRMS value of the ground current IG) exceeds
this limit, the second criterion to detect a transient/intermittent ground fault is fulfilled.

User Manual
Pickup logic
As soon as:
function TIG-Transient/Intermittent Ground Fault protection is activated via parameter
[P3475] and
the measured value of the ground current IG,TRMS exceeds the set value of parameter
Absolute limit [P3480] and
the calculated quotient of the quotient of the absolute value of the maximum IG sample per
cycle and the TRMS value of the ground current IG exceeds the set value of parameter
Relative limit [P3481] and
the measured ground voltage UG exceeds the set value of parameter Min. ground voltage
[P3479] and
optionally (only in case that parameter Direction [P3478] Non-directional): the
measured angle between ground current IG and reference ground voltage UG accords to the
selected direction mode via parameter Direction [P3478] and
blocking of function TIG-Transient/Intermittent Ground Fault is not activated by the
blocking event of parameter [P3476]
the pick-up event TIG pickup [E2392] is activated, Reset time is being started and the rising
edge of the pickup signal increases the counter for detection of an intermittent ground fault.
P3482 Counter trip value

Counter value for detection of an intermittent ground fault; as soon as all tripping criteria
are fullfilled, the rising edge of the counter input signal increases the counter. At that
moment the actual counter value is equal to the set counter value, trip event TIG trip
[E2393] is activated and Min. time trip counter starts. The trip event [E2393] can be
used for alarm or output control purposes.
P3483 Reset time

Monitoring time for detecting an intermittent ground fault; as soon as all tripping criteria
are fullfilled, the reset timer starts for a duration set by parameter Reset time [P3483].
In case that the reset time has not run down and a further transient ground fault is
detected, the reset time will restart.
At the moment
the reset time has run down and
the trip event TIG trip [E2393] is deactivated,
then, the actual counter value is being reset.
P3484 Min. trip time

Minimum tripping duration; this time determines the minimum duration for activating the
trip event TIG trip [E2393]. As long as the trip event [E2393] is active, resetting of the
actual counter value according to the Reset time is blocked.
At the moment the timer Min. time trip run down, the actual counter value is being
reset.

User Manual
3.4.39 YG Neutral Admittance Ground Fault Protection
YG Neutral admittance ground fault

SET PARAMETERS
P2705 Function ON - ON/OFF
P2707 CT source CT1 - CT1/CT2/CT-GND1
P2708 PT source PT1 - PT1/PT2/PT3/PT-GND1
P2709 Direction 0 - 0/180
P2710 Angle correction 0 deg 0 40
E2180 YG active - - -
E2181 YG blocked - - -
STEP 1
P2715 Function OFF - OFF/Yo/Go/Bo
P2717 Direction mode Definite - Non-directional/Forward/Backward
P2718 Admittance 1 mS 0 999999,999
P2721 Conductance forward 1 mS 0 999999,999
P2722 Conductance backward -1 mS 0 999999,999
P2724 Susceptance forward 1 mS 0 999999,999
P2725 Susceptance backward -1 mS 0 999999,999
P2727 Delay time 0,1 s 0 999999,999
P2728 Reset delay time 1 s/- 0 999999,999
E2185 YG-1 active - - -
E2186 YG-1 blocked - - -
E2187 YG-1 pickup - - -
E2188 YG-1 trip - - -
STEP 2
P2735 Function OFF - OFF/Yo/Go/Bo

Figure 3-238 YG-Neutral Admittance Ground Fault Protection Parameter set 1: Protection
parameters [P] and Events [E]
examples.

User Manual
Protection parameters of parameter SET 1 YG Neutral Admittance Ground Fault Prot.
SET PARAMETERS
The following SET PARAMETERS of YG-Neutral Admittance Ground Fault Protection exist only
P2705 Function
This parameter enables/disables YG-Neutral Admittance Ground Fault protection where:
OFF: disables or
When YG-Neutral Admittance Ground Fault protection is enabled by parameter [P2705],

then event YG active [E2180] is activated.
P2706 Blocking
YG-Neutral Admittance Ground Fault protection can be completely blocked by any active
active. As soon as blocking is active, event YG blocked [E2181] is activated. If the
If blocking of the YG-Neutral Admittance Ground Fault protection is not required, set this
parameter to 0.
P2707 CT source
Depending on the SYMAP-Compact(+) device variant the YG-Neutral Admittance
Ground Fault protection can be assigned to a certain current measurement input (CT1,
CT2 or CT-GND1).
Parameter [P2707] determines the current measurement input which will provide the
process quantity ground current IG needed for builing the protective criterion
(characteristic quantity such as: neutral admittance Y0, neutral conductance G0 or neutral
susceptance B0; see step parameters Function [P2715], [P2735], [P2755], [P2775],
[P2795] and [P2815]) to the YG-Neutral Admittance Ground Fault protection:
CT1: Calculation of residual voltage: IG = 3 x I0 = I1+I2+I3 by phase currents
measured via measurement input CT1,
CT2: Calculation of residual voltage: IG = 3 x I0 = I1+I2+I3 by phase currents
measured via measurement input CT2,
CT-GND1: Measurement input CT-GND1 (direct measurement of IG)
P2708 PT source
Depending on the SYMAP-Compact(+) device variant the YG-Neutral Admittance
Ground Fault protection can be assigned to a certain voltage measurement input (PT1,
PT2, PT3 or PT-GND1).
Parameter [P2708] determines the voltage measurement input which will provide the
process quantity residual voltage UG needed for builing the protective criterion
(characteristic quantity such as: neutral admittance Y0, neutral conductance G0 or neutral
susceptance B0; see step parameters Function [P2715], [P2735], [P2755], [P2775],
[P2795] and [P2815]) to the YG-Neutral Admittance Ground Fault protection:
PT1: Calculation of residual voltage: UG = 3 x U0 = UL1+UL2+UL3 by phase
voltages measured via measurement input PT1,

User Manual

PT-GND1: Measurement input PT-GND1 (direct measurement of UG)
potential!
P2709 Direction
Internal adaption of measured Neutral-Admittance Y0 direction; to define the sign of the
complex phasor of Y0, the following setting options are available:
0: no change of sign, und
180: change of sign by 180
B0
Y0
Im
Re
G0
Y0'
Figure 3-239 Internal adaption of Neutral-Admittance direction
P2710 Angle correction

Correction angle for eliminating the angular errors of the potential transformers (PT)
and/or current transformers (CT); measured phase angle deviations caused by
measuring inaccuracy of potential transformers, can be elimintated by the set value of
parameter Angle correction [P2710].
A positive set value will turn the complex phasor Y0 anti-clockwise.
A neagitve set value will turn the complex phasor Y0 clockwise.

User Manual
'' = +15
' = -9
Y0''
B0
Y0
Y0'
Im
Re
G0
with:
Y0': Angle correction [P2710] = -9
Y0'': Angle correction [P2710] = +15
Figure 3-240 Correction of angular errors of PTs and CTs
NOTE: The correction angle is not for transformer vector group matching!
Vector group matching is to be set by appropriate parameter setting in submenu
Protection parameters of parameter SET 1 YG-Neutral Admittance Ground Fault
SET PARAMETERS
The following STEP parameters of the YG-Neutral Admittance Ground Fault protection exist
only once in each of the 6 independent protection STEPS. Thus, the SET PARAMETERS apply
only to one of the 6 protection STEPS of one parameter SET.
P2715 Function
This parameter disables/enables the first step of YG-Neutral Admittance Ground Fault
protection; enabling the first protection step is to be done by selecting the protective
criterion (characteristic quantity); whereas:
OFF: disables first protection step,
Yo: enables first protection step => protective criterion Neutral-Admittance,
Go: enables first protection step => protective criterion Neutral -Conductance,
Bo: enables first protection step => protective criterion Neutral -Susceptance.
When first step of YG-Neutral Admittance Ground Fault protection is enabled by

parameter [P2715], then event YG-1 active [E2185] is activated.
P2716 Blocking
The first step of YG-Neutral Admittance Ground Fault protection can be blocked by any
is active. As soon as blocking is active, event YG-1 blocked [E2186]] is activated. If the

User Manual
If blocking of the first step of YG-Neutral Admittance Ground Fault protection is not

Selction of operating mode according to the direction of the YG-Neutral Admittance
Ground Fault protection; the first step of of YG-Neutral Admittance Ground Fault
protection is optionally adjustable as:
Forward: The protection step trips only in forward direction
Backward: The protection step trips only in backward direction

User Manual
The following figure shows the interactions between different setting options of parameters
Function [P2715] and Direction mode [P2717] according to the tripping and operating ranges
of YG-Neutral Admittance Ground Fault protection:
Im
Re
Direction mode [P2717] = Non-directional Direction mode [P2717] = Forward Direction mode [P2717] = Backward
Function [P2715] = Y0 Function [P2715] = Y0 Function [P2715] = Y0

B0 Y0,fault Y0,fault Y0,fault
Operating zone Operating zone Operating zone
G0 G0 G0
Y0,operating Y0,operating Y0,operating
Trip zone Trip zone Trip zone
Admittance [P2718] Admittance [P2718] Admittance [P2718]
Function [P2715] = G0 Function [P2715] = G0 Function [P2715] = G0

B0 B0 B0
Trip Y0,operating Y0,fault Y0,operating Y0,fault Y0,operating
zone
Y0,fault
G0 G0 Trip G0
zone
Trip
Operating zone Operating zone Trip Operating zone
zone zone
Conductance forward [P2721] Conductance forward [P2721]

Conductance backward [P2722] Conductance backward [P2722]
Function [P2715] = B0 Function [P2715] = B0 Function [P2715] = B0

B0 Trip zone Y0,fault B0 Trip zone
B0
Operating zone
Y0,operating Y0,operating Y0,operating
Operating zone G0 G0 G0
Trip zone Y0,fault Operating zone Y0,fault

Trip zone
Susceptance forward [P2724] Susceptance forward [P2724]

Susceptance backward [P2725] Susceptance backward [P2725]
Figure 3-241 Options of direction mode and protective criterion (characteristic quantity)

User Manual
Pick-up values of different protective criteria

Depending on the selected protective criterion and tripping direction of the first step of YG-
Neutral Admittance Ground Fault protection, the following parameters Parameter [P2718],
[P2721], [P2722], [P2724] and [P2725] apply to the pick-up value.
P2718 Admittance
Pick-up value of the first YG-Neutral Admittance Ground Fault protection element; at the
moment that the characteristic quantity Neutral-Admittance Y0[mS] exceeds this limit,
pick-up event YG-1 pickup [E2187] will become active, and the trip delay time, set by
parameter Delay time [P2727], of the first YG-Neutral Admittance Ground Fault
P2721 Conductance forward

moment that the characteristic quantity Neutral-Conductance G0[mS] exceeds this limit
in forward direction, pick-up event YG-1 pickup [E2187] will become active, and the trip
delay time, set by parameter Delay time [P2727], of the first YG-Neutral Admittance
Ground Fault protection element will start.
P2722 Conductance backward

moment that the characteristic quantity Neutral-Conductance G0[mS] falls below this limit
in backward direction, pick-up event YG-1 pickup [E2187] will become active, and the
trip delay time, set by parameter Delay time [P2727], of the first YG-Neutral Admittance
P2724 Susceptance forward

moment that the characteristic quantity Neutral-Susceptance G0[mS] exceeds this limit in
forward direction, pick-up event YG-1 pickup [E2187] will become active, and the trip
P2725 Susceptance backward

moment that the characteristic quantity Neutral-Susceptance G0[mS] falls below this limit
in back direction, pick-up event YG-1 pickup [E2187] will become active, and the trip
P2727 Delay time

Trip delay time; it is the delay time of the trip event YG-1 trip [E2188].
As soon as the pick-up event YG-1 pickup [E2187] is active and Delay time run down,
trip event [E2188] will be activated. This event can be used for alarm or output control
purposes.
In case that the selected characteristic quantity exceeds the set pick-up value of the first
YG-Neutral Admittance Ground Fault protection step before the trip delay time (Delay
time) has run down, the timer of Delay time will be stopped, the counter value is being
reset and pick-up event YG-1 pickup [E2187] is deactivated.
If the characteristic quantity subsequently exceeds the pick-up value, then, the pick-up
event [E2187] will be activated again and timer Delay time will restart.

Trip reset delay time; it is the delay time for resetting the trip event YG-1 trip [E2188].
If the trip reset delay time (Reset delay time) has run down, trip event YG-1 trip
[E2188] is deactivated. In case that the selected characteristic quantity exceeds the set
pick-up value of the first YG-Neutral Admittance Ground Fault protection element before
User Manual
the timer of Reset delay time has run down, the timer of Reset delay time will be
reset. Then trip event YG-1 trip [E2188] remains active.

Minimum limit of the measuring process quantity residual voltage to activate YG-
Neutral Admittance Ground Fault protection; depending on the selected measuring
method set by parameter PT source [P2708], the first protection step of YG-Neutral
Admittance Ground Fault protection is blocked as long as the measured process value
for building the protective criterion (characteristic quantity, set by parameter Function
[P2715]) exceeds this minimum limit. For the duration of blocking event YG-1 blocked
NOTE: The minimum limit of measuring process quantity residual voltage is to be

set as a percentage of the nominal value of the process quantity. The nominal
Ground voltage [P606], for primary side W1,
Ground voltage [P626], for primary side W3


Minimum limit of the measuring process quantity ground current to activate YG-Neutral
Admittance Ground Fault protection; depending on the selected measuring method set
by parameter CT source [P2707], the first protection step of YG-Neutral Admittance
Ground Fault protection is blocked as long as the measured process value for building
the protective criterion (characteristic quantity, set by parameter Function [P2715])
exceeds this minimum limit. For the duration of blocking event YG-1 blocked [E1056] is
activated.
NOTE: The minimum limit of measuring process quantity ground current is to be set
as a percentage of the nominal value of the process quantity. The nominal
Ground current [P607], for primary side W1,
Ground current [P627], for primary side W3


User Manual
3.5 ALARMS (Parameters of Alarm control and LEDs)
3.5.1 General
Main Menu\Parameters\ALARMS\
General

P5950 Stop event history 0 event 0 9999
P5951 Remote ACK 0 event 0 9999
P5952 Beeper inhibit time 20 s 0,0 6553,5
Figure 3-242 Interrupt of event logging
P5950 Stop event history

Event logging can be completely interrupted (stopped) by any active event. For stopping,
the number related to this stop event has to be assigned to parameter [P5950]. Interrupt
is only effective, however, as long as the stop event is active. If the stop event turns
inactive, interrupting is abandoned and event logging is effective again.
If blocking of event logging is not required, set this parameter to 0.
P5951 Remote ACK

Remote acknowledgement of alarms can be activated by any active event. For
activation, the number related to this stop event has to be assigned to parameter
[P5951]. If there is any active alarm and the assigned event turns active, the active
alarm behaves according to the selected setting option of parameter Condition [P] in
submenu Alarms.
If remote acknowledgement is not required, set this parameter to 0.
P5952 Beeper inhibit time

Blocking time until reactivation of the beeper by subsequent active alarm is allowed; in
case that
an active alarm activates the beeper and
the active alarm is reset by operating function ACK (via button ALARM on front
panel or via function Remote ACK),
then Beeper inhibit time starts for the duration of the set value of parameter Beeper
inhibit time [P9521]. While the timer is running another active alarm cannot reactivate
the beeper. Only when Beeper inhibit time has run down, the next active alarm will
activate the beeper.

User Manual
3.5.2 Alarm channels
Alarm message control is available by 449 different and programmable alarm channels with
output event numbers [E1] to [E449]
Table 3-18 Alarm channels
Alarm channels (No.1 to No.499)
Designation of parameter Setting range Pre-setting Unit

Alarm text up to 40 characters - (char)
Condition OFF / LATCHED / UNLATCHED / NO ACK OFF (textring)
1. Trigger 0 9999 0 (event)
2. Trigger 0 9999 0 (event)
Block 0 9999 0 (event)
Delay 0.0 6500.0 0.0 [s]
1. Group none / 450 499 none (textring)
Option none / Printer none (textring)
Beeper / (tick box)
Trip LED / (tick box)
LED Alarm / (tick box)
LED OFF / Red / Yellow / Green OFF (textring)
Black / Red / Yellow/Green / Blink black/
Text colour Black (textring)
Blink red / Blink yellow / Blink green
NOTE: Configuration of the Alarm channels via configuration software SYMAP-Compact

Parameter Tool (SCPT) only!
Figure 3-243 Configuration of Alarm channels via SCPT

User Manual
P Alarm text
As soon as the alarm is active, this editable alarm text appears on the alarm page.
An alarm text is restricted to 40 characters.
P Condition
At the moment that a trigger event is active the alarm event as well as the display of the
alarm text will become active.
Parameter Condition provides the following modes for variably dealing with the alarm
event and the display of the alarm text after clearance (trigger event = 0):
OFF: The alarm channel is disabled.
Latched: After clearance (trigger event = 0) the alarm event [E1] to [E449]
and the display of the alarm text remain active. Only after operating
the ALARM key or activation of remote acknowledgement via
activating event (see parameter Remote Ack [P5951]), the alarm
event as well as the display of the alarm text will be deactivated.
Unlatched: After clearance (trigger event = 0) the alarm event [E1] to [E449]
is immediately deactivated; however, the display of the alarm text
remains active. Only after operating the ALARM key or activation of
remote acknowledgement via activating event (see parameter
Remote Ack [P5951]), the display of the alarm text will be
deactivated.
No Ack: After clearance (trigger event = 0), both, the alarm event [E1] to
[E449] and the display of the alarm text are immediately deactivated.
Table 3-19 Parameter Condition settings and state changes
tn [trigger event = 1] tn+1 [trigger event = 0]

Parameter Settings
State of State of State of State of
alarm event alarm text display alarm event alarm text display
OFF 0 0 0 0
Latched 1 1 1 1
P Condition
Unlatched 1 1 0 1
No Ack 1 1 0 0
NOTE: In case of temporary loss of device power supply all active alarms are to be
saved failsafe (non-volatile)!
When several alarm events set with different selection options for parameter
Condition are assigned to the same alarm group, the alarm group event
behaves in the same manner as the actual, active events. For instance, one
active alarm event (Condition = No ACK) and another alarm event (Condition
= Latched) are assigned to the same alarm group. Here, the alarm group event
remains active until it is reset by the ALARM key or by assigned, active
activation event of parameter Remote ACK [P5951].
The ALARM key can be used either for:
acknowledgement of all active alarms simultaneously (call-up of Alarm
page and operate ALARM key), or for
individual acknowledgement of active alarms.
For individual acknowledgement the active alarm must be selected via touch
screen. Subsequently, the following window offers two operating options, OK
or Cancel:

User Manual
Figure 3-244 Individual aknowledgement of active alarms

Operating the OK2 key will acknowledge the selected, active alarm; operating
the Cancel key will abort the acknowledgment process. Subsequently, the
alarm page will be shown on the display.
P 1. Trigger
and
P 2. Trigger
Before alarm channels can be activated by so-called trigger events (OR logic), the
parameters 1. Trigger and 2. Trigger must be assigned the number of the events
intended to signal an alarm.
P Block
The alarm channel is blocked and the alarm causing event ([E1] to [E449]) will remain
inactive even if the trigger event is active.
P Delay
Activation of alarm channel can be delayed by the time set here.
P 1. Group
to
P 4. Group
Up to four alarm groups can be assigned to each alarm channel. Creation of up to 50
alarm groups (450 to 499) is available.Such alarm group event is activated as soon as
one alarm channel of this group is active.
P Option
none: no measure taken
Printer: alarm sent to printer (if available).
P Beeper
Select to activate the audible alarm signal (beeper).
P Trip LED
Select to activate LED TRIP at the device frontpage.
P LED Alarm
Select to activate LED ALARM at the device frontpage.
P Active alarm colour

User Manual
Select this parameter to activate the individual graphic array (located between alarm
number No. and Alarm Description) at menu page Active Alarms when alarm is
activated. The following setting options are available:
OFF: no colorization of graphic array when alarm is activated
Red: red colorized graphic array when alarm is activated
Yellow: yellow colorized graphic array when alarm is activated
Green: green colorized graphic array when alarm is activated
P Text colour
Available colours for static and flashing alarm text display:
Black: black colorized alarm text when alarm is activated
Red: red colorized alarm text when alarm is activated
Yellow: yellow colorized alarm text array when alarm is activated
Green: green colorized alarm text array when alarm is activated
Blink black: black-flashing alarm text when alarm is activated
Blink red: red-flashing alarm text when alarm is activated
Blink yellow: yellow-flashing alarm text when alarm is activated
Blink green: green-flashing alarm text array when alarm is activated

User Manual
3.5.3 LEDs (Hardware)
LEDs
Fct 1 Fct. 2 Fct. 3 Fct. 4

LED 1
- Colour red - red/green/yellow
- Status OFF - Slow blink/Fast blink/Const on
- Event No 0 event 0 9999
LED 2
LED 3
LED 4
LED 4
LED 6
LED 7
LED 8
Figure 3-245 LED configuration
There are up to four activation events (see Fct.1 to Fct.4) which can be assigned to activate
each LED individually.
NOTE: Each of the eight LEDs always provides the same group of parameters. Hence, the
LED parameter descriptions of the LED 1 represented below are described in the

User Manual
Fct. 1 LED 1
P Colour
LED colour during activation; as soon as the event which is assigned to parameter
Event number is activated, the LED is illuminated either:
red or
green or
yellow .
P Status (=> LED mode)

Illumination mode for LED; as soon as the event which is assigned to parameter Event
number is activated, illumination of the LED is according to the following setting options:
OFF: LED in disabled
Slow blink: LED is flashing slowly: 1-time per second
Fast blink: LED is flashing quickly: 2-times per second
Const on: LED illuminates continuously
P Event-No.
The LED indication can be activated by any active event. For activation, the number
related to this event has to be assigned to parameter Event-No.. Activation is only
effective, however, as long as the assigned event is active. If the event turns inactive,
the LED turns off.
If LED activation is not required, set this parameter to 0.

User Manual
3.6 I/O (Parameters of binary/virtual inputs and outputs)
The I/O PARAMETER menu provides submenus for setting of

the SYMAP-Compact(+) binary inputs and outputs, and
the connected extension boards of the Extension Board System EBS
3.6.1 General
Parameters of this submenu refer to the voltage settings SYMAP-Compact(+) binary inputs,
and to activation and definition of the extension board system EBS.
The following board types are available:
EP-PS: board for communication to the SYMAP-Compact(+) and power supply
for connected extension boards, 1 binary output: changeo-over contact;
3 binary inputs: transistor technique
EB-BI8-A: 8 binary inputs devided into two groups around 4 binary inputs each:
transistor technique
EB-BI10-OC: 10 binary inputs devided into two groups around 5 binary inputs each:
opto-coupler technique
EB-BO4-R: 4 binary inputs: change-over contacts
EB-BO6-R: 6 binary inputs: normal open (NO) contacts

User Manual
Main Menu\Parameters\I/O\
General
P/ENo. System Description Value Unit (Setting range)

Allgemein
P4000 Binary inputs voltage type DC - AC / DC
P4001 Binary inputs nominal voltage 110 V 24/48/60/110/220/230
EBS General
P4100 EBS enabled Disabled - Ensabled/Disabled
P4101 EBS Ethernet switch Disabled - Ensabled/Disabled
E4100 EBS OK - - -
Board ID1
P4110 Board type EB-PS - EB-PS
P4111 Disable board -
Board ID2
P4112 Board type None - None/EB-BI8-A/EB-BI10-OC/
EB-BO4-R/EB-BO6-R
P4113 Disable board Disabled - Ensabled/Disabled
Board ID3
EB-BO4-R/EB-BO6-R
Board ID4
-
-
Board IDx
EB-BO4-R/EB-BO6-R
Figure 3-246 General parameters of SYMAP-Compact and EBS
Parameter description
General
The following two parameters apply only for the binary inputs of the SYMAP-Compact(+)
device.
P4000 Binary input voltage type

This parameter allows adapting the kind of the applied nominal voltage to the binary
inputs of SYMAP-Compact(+) device to:
AC or
DC.
P4001 Binary input nominal voltage

This parameter allows adapting the binary inputs to the voltage used (common rated
voltages such as: 24V, 48V, 60V, 110V, 220V, 230V). Generellay, it is possible to set
any integer voltage value between 0 and 230V.
Turn-on and drop-off levels of the binary inputs operates according to the set values of
the binary input nominal voltage as follows:

User Manual
Turn-on level: 80% Uset

Drop-off level: 40% Uset
NOTE: The selected setting applies for all binary inputs!
EBS General
The following two parameters apply for the extension board system EBS.
P4100 EBS enabled

This parameter enbles/disables the extension board system EBS, where parameter
setting:
Dieser Parameter aktiviert/deaktiviert das Erweiterungsboardsystem EBS, wobei die
Einstellung:
OFF: disables EBS, or
ON: enbles EBS.
When EBS is enabled via parameter [P4100], event EBS OK [E4100] is activted.
P4101 EBS Ethernet Switch

Internal, cyclical switch-over of the Ethernet port of SYMAP-Compact(+) between
connected EBS and the service port which is for parameter setting of the device. This
parameter enbles/disables switch-over functionality of the Ethernet port, where paramer
setting:
OFF: disables the switch-over function, or
ON: enables the switch-over function.
Board ID 1 (EB-PS)
The following two parameters apply only for the communication and power supply unit EB-PS of
the extension board system EBS
P4110 Board type

This parameter determines the type of board which is assigend to board identification
number 1. At present only the following board type is available for ID 1:
EB-PS: communication and power supply unit
P4111 Disable board

This parameter enable/disables the communication and power supply unit EB-PS, where
parameter setting:
OFF: disables board EB-PS, or
ON: enables board EB-PS.
Board ID 2
Each of the 63 available extension boards have the same parameters for its definition of board
type and activation/deactivation. Hence, the parameter descriptions of Board ID2 represented
below are described in the following in detail as examples.
P4112 Board type

This parameter determies the type of the selected board which is assigend to board
identification number 2. The following board types are available:

User Manual
None: no assigned board

EB-BI8-A: 8 binary inputs, two groups by 4 BIs, transistor technology
EB-BI10-OC: 10 binary inputs, two groups by 5 BIs, opto-coupler technology
EB-BO4-R: 4 binary outputs, switch-over contacts
EB-BO6-R: 6 binary outputs, normal open contacts (NO)
P4113 Disable board

This parameter activates/deactivates that extension board which is assigend to board
indentification number 2, where parameter setting:
OFF: deactivates the assigend board, or
ON: activates the assigend board.

User Manual
3.6.2 Binary inputs
3.6.2.1 Binary inputs (of SYMAP-Compact)
Main Menu\Parameters\I/O\Binary inputs\
Binary inputs SYMAP-Compact
Input Norm. Pre. Inv. Wire Short Filter ON delay OFF delay WF Lim. SC Lim.
No.
Event Clsd. Event Event fault circuit Ev. (0 6500 s) (0 6500 s) (0 255s) (0 255s)
10 4010 4110 4210 4310 4410 0,1 0,0 20 240
11 4011 4111 4211 4311 4411 0,1 0,0 20 240
12 4012 4112 4212 4312 4412 0,1 0,0 20 240
13 4013 4113 4213 4313 4413 0,1 0,0 20 240
14 4014 4114 4214 4314 4414 0,1 0,0 20 240
15 4015 4115 4215 4315 4415 0,1 0,0 20 240
16 4016 4116 4216 4316 4416 0,1 0,0 20 240
17 4017 4117 4217 4317 4417 0,1 0,0 20 240
18 4018 4118 4218 4318 4418 0,1 0,0 20 240
19 4019 4119 4219 4319 4419 0,1 0,0 20 240
20 4020 4120 4220 4320 4420 0,1 0,0 20 240
21 4021 4121 4221 4321 4421 0,1 0,0 20 240
22 4022 4122 4222 4322 4422 0,1 0,0 20 240
23 4023 4123 4223 4323 4423 0,1 0,0 20 240
24 4024 4124 4224 4324 4424 0,1 0,0 20 240
25 4025 4125 4225 4325 4425 0,1 0,0 20 240
26 4026 4126 4226 4326 4426 0,1 0,0 20 240
27 4027 4127 4227 4327 4427 0,1 0,0 20 240
28 4028 4128 4228 4328 4428 0,1 0,0 20 240
Figure 3-247 Parameters and Events Binary inputs
Event and Parameter description
NOTE: Hardware version v1-1.x provides 19 binary inputs with interconnected (rooted)
common terminals.
Hardware version v1-2.x provides 18 binary inputs. Thus, Fct 28 is not available!
The two binary inputs Fct. 26 and Fct. 27 are equipped with a seggregated common
terminal each. Binary inputs Fct. 10 to Fct. 25 are provided with a rooted common
terminal!
No.
Function number of the binary Input
E Input Event
Input-Event of the binary input; the input event is immediately active/deactive after the
binary input has been activated/deactivated with regard to any delay time settings
(parameter ON delay and/or OFF delay).
NOTE: Hardware version v1-1.x:
Each input is assigned its own input event; see event numbers [E4010] to
[E4028].
Hardware version v1-2.x:
Each input is assigned its own input event; see event numbers [E4010] to
[E4027].
P Norm. Clsd.

User Manual
Power to unlock principle (normally closed) of the binary input; this parameter
activates/deactivates the working principle power to unlock principle of the binary input:
: do not tick the box => working principle accords to power to lock principle
(normally open: the corresponding input-event [E40xx] will only be active if an
appropriate potential is present at the terminal of the binary input)
: do tick the box => working principle of the binary input accords to power to
unlock principle (normally closed: the corresponding input-event [E40xx] will
only be active if the appropriate potential is not present at the terminal of the
binary input)
The power to unlock principle (normally closed) can be activated/deactivated

individually for all binary inputs.
P Pre. event
Additional pre-delay event of the binary input; if selected (parameter setting by tick box),
the binary input is attributed an additional pre-delay event [E41xx]. Independent of the
settings of parameters: ON delay or OFF delay, the additional pre-delay event is
immediately active/deactive after the binary input has been activated/deactivated at its
terminals.
To make the additional pre-delay event available, please tick the box in the array of the
inverted event Pre. Event [E41xx]:
41xx: do not tick the box => the additional pre-delay event of the binary input is
not available
41xx: do tick the box => the additional pre-delay event of the binary input is
available
Each input is assigned its own additional pre-delay event; see event numbers
[E4110] to [E4128].
Each input is assigned its own additional pre-delay event; see event numbers
[E4110] to [E4127].
P Inv. event
Additional inverted event; if selected (parameter setting by tick box), the binary input is
attributed an additional inverted event [E42xx]. The state of the additional inverted event
is always equal to the inverted state of the input event [E41xx]. The additional inverted
event is immediately activated/deactivated after the input event has been
deactivated/activated.
To make the additional inverted event available, please tick the box in the array of the
inverted event Inv. Event [E42xx]:
42xx: do not tick the box => the additional inverted event of the binary input is
not available
42xx: do tick the box => the additional inverted event of the binary input is
available
Each input is assigned its own additional inverted event; see event numbers
[E4210] to [E4228].
Each input is assigned its own additional inverted event; see event numbers
[E4210] to [E4227].
P Wirefault

User Manual
Wirefault supervision of the binary input; if selected (parameter setting by tick box), the
external circuit of the binary input (connected pilot wire of the external switching contact)
can be monitored with regard to a broken wiring. For this, an ohmic restistance (R =
10k) must be connected in parallel to the external switching contact.
To activate/deactivate the wirefault supervision of a binary input, please use the tick box
in the array of the wirefault supervision events Wirefault [E43xx]:
43xx: do not tick the box => the wirefault supervision of the binary input is not
available
43xx: do tick the box => the wirefault supervision of the binary input is available

Each input is assigned its own wirefault supervision event; see event numbers
[E4310] to [E4328].
Function Wire fault supervision is not available!
NOTE: The general wirefault monitoring event [E4300] is active if one of the individual
wirefault monitoring events is active. Such events may be used for triggering
the alarms.
P Short circuit
Short circuit supervision of the binary input; if selected (parameter setting by tick box),
the external circuit of the binary input (connected pilot wire of the external switching
contact) can be monitored with regard to a short-circuited wiring.
To activate/deactivate the short circuit supervision of a binary input, please use the tick
box in the array of the short circuit supervision events Short circuit [E44xx]:
44xx: do not tick the box => the short circuit supervision of the binary input is
not available
44xx: do tick the box => the short circuit supervision of the binary input is
available

Each input is assigned its own short circuit supervision event; see event
numbers [E4410] to [E4428].
Function Short circuit supervision is not available!
NOTE: The general short circuit supervision event [E4400] is active if one of the
individual short circuit supervision events is active. Such events may be used
for triggering the alarms.
P Filter event history

Filter function for processing or not processing of all available input events of the binary
input in the event history; if selected (parameter setting by tick box), the input event
[E40xx], the additional pre-delay event [E41xx] and the additional inverted event [E42xx]
are not being registered in the event history.
To activate/deactivate the filter function of a binary input, please use the tick box in the
array of Filter Ev.:
: do not tick the box => the filter function of the binary input is not available
: do tick the box => the filter function of the binary input is available
The filter function Filter event history can be activated/deactivated individually for all
binary inputs.

User Manual
P ON delay
Switch-on delay time of the binary input; if the binary input is activated at its terminals
and the delay time, set by parameter On delay, run down, event [E40xx] is activated.
P OFF delay
Switch-off delay time of the binary input; if the binary input is dectivated at its terminals
and the delay time, set by parameter OFF delay, run down, event [E40xx] is
deactivated.
Wire fault supervision and short-circuit supervision

NOTE: Features Wire fault supervision and Short-circuit supervision are not available for
hardware version v1-2.x!
P WF Lim.
Minimum limit value for triggering the wirefault supervision event; if input signal of the
functional input falls below this value, the related wirefault event Wirefault [E43xx] is
activated.
Default setting: 20 LSB
P SC Lim.
Maximum limit value for triggering the short-circuit supervision event; if input signal of the
functional input exceeds this value, the related short-circuit event Short circuit [E44xx]
is activated.
Default setting: 240 LSB

User Manual
3.6.2.2 EBS Binary inputs
EBS Groups
The following parameters are for setting the applied nominal voltage for the binary input groups
of the extension boards (EB-BI8-A and EB-BI10-OC)
Main menu\Parameters\I/O\Binary inputs
EBS Groups
P/E N0. Beschreibung Value Unit (Setting range)

EB1
P Binary inputs voltage type DC - AC / DC
P Binary inputs nominal voltage 110 V 24/48/60/110/220/230
EB2 Group 1
EB2 Group 2
EB3 Group 1
EB3 Group 2
EB4 Group 1

EBx Group 2
Figure 3-248
P Binary inputs voltage type

This parameter allows adapting the kind of the applied nominal voltage to the binary
inputs of extension board system EBS to:
AC or
DC.
P Binary inputs nominal voltage

This parameter allows adapting the binary inputs to the voltage used (common rated
voltages such as: 24V, 48V, 60V, 110V, 220V, 230V). Generellay, it is possible to set
any integer voltage value between 0 and 230 V.
Turn-on and drop-off levels of the binary inputs operates according to the set values of
the parameters Activate level [P] and Drop-off level [P] (see chapter 3.6.2.2 EBS
Binary inputs)

User Manual
EBS Binary inputs

With the following parameters the binary inputs of all connected extension boards (EB-BI8-A
and EB-BI10-OC) can individually be set.
Main Menu\Parameters\I/O\Binary inputs
EBS Binary inputs
Debouncing time (0 65s)

Activate level (70 120%)
Drop-off level (10 60%)

ON delay (0 6500s)
Off delay (0 6500s)
SC Lim. (0 127%)
WF Lim.(0 100%)
Input event-No.
Predelay event
Normal closed
Inverted event
Short circuit
Wire fault
Input-No.
Filter Ev.
EB-No.
[s] [s] [%] [%] [%] [%] [s]

1 1 4029 4129 4229 0,0 0,0 4329 0 4429 0 80 40 0,100
1 2 4030 4130 4230 0,0 0,0 4330 0 4430 0 80 40 0,100
1 3 4031 4131 4231 0,0 0,0 4331 0 4431 0 80 40 0,100
2 1 4032 4132 4232 0,0 0,0 4332 0 4432 0 80 40 0,100
2 2 4033 4133 4233 0,0 0,0 4333 0 4433 0 80 40 0,100

28 4731 4771 4811 0,0 0,0 4851 0 4891 0 80 40 0,100
Figure 3-249 EBS Binre Eingnge: Gruppenparameter
Event and Parameter description:
EB-N0.
Function number of the extension board (board identification Board Idx)
Input-No.
Function number of the binary Input
E Input event
Input-Event of the binary input; the input event is immediately active/deactive after the
binary input has been activated/deactivated with regard to any delay time settings
(parameter ON delay and/or OFF delay).
P Normal closed
Power to unlock principle (normally closed) of the binary input; this parameter
activates/deactivates the working principle power to unlock principle of the binary input:
: do not tick the box => working principle accords to power to lock principle
(normally open: the corresponding input-event [E4xxx] will only be active if an
appropriate potential is present at the terminal of the binary input)
: do tick the box => working principle of the binary input accords to power to
unlock principle (normally closed: the corresponding input-event [E4xxx] will
only be active if the appropriate potential is not present at the terminal of the
binary input)

User Manual
The power to unlock principle (normally closed) can be activated/deactivated

individually for all binary inputs.
P Predelay event
Additional pre-delay event of the binary input; if selected (parameter setting by tick box),
the binary input is attributed an additional pre-delay event [E4xxx]. Independent of the
settings of parameters: ON delay or OFF delay, the additional pre-delay event is
immediately active/deactive after the binary input has been activated/deactivated at its
terminals.
To make the additional pre-delay event available, please tick the box in the array of the
inverted event Pre. Event [E4xxx]:
4xxx: do not tick the box => the additional pre-delay event of the binary input is
not available
4xxx: do tick the box => the additional pre-delay event of the binary input is
available
P Inverted event
Additional inverted event; if selected (parameter setting by tick box), the binary input is
attributed an additional inverted event [E4xxx]. The state of the additional inverted event
is always equal to the inverted state of the input event [E4xxx]. The additional inverted
event is immediately activated/deactivated after the input event has been
deactivated/activated.
To make the additional inverted event available, please tick the box in the array of the
inverted event Inv. Event [E4xxx]:
4xxx: do not tick the box => the additional inverted event of the binary input is
not available
4xxx: do tick the box => the additional inverted event of the binary input is
available
P Filter Ev.
Filter function for processing or not processing of all available input events of the binary
input in the event history; if selected (parameter setting by tick box), the input event
[E4xxx], the additional pre-delay event [E4xxx] and the additional inverted event [E4xxx]
are not being registered in the event history.
To activate/deactivate the filter function of a binary input, please use the tick box in the
array of Filter Ev.:
: do not tick the box => the filter function of the binary input is not available
: do tick the box => the filter function of the binary input is available
The filter function Filter event history can be activated/deactivated individually for all
binary inputs.
P ON delay
Switch-on delay time of the binary input; if the binary input is activated at its terminals
and the delay time, set by parameter On delay, run down, event [E4xxx] is activated.
P OFF delay
Switch-off delay time of the binary input; if the binary input is dectivated at its terminals
and the delay time, set by parameter OFF delay, run down, event [E4xxx] is
deactivated.

User Manual
Wire fault supervision

NOTE: Function Wire fault supervision is not available for board type EB-BI10-OC!
P Wire fault
Wirefault supervision of the binary input; if selected (parameter setting by tick box), the
external circuit of the binary input (connected pilot wire of the external switching contact)
can be monitored with regard to a broken wiring. For this, an ohmic restistance (R =
10k) must be connected in parallel to the external switching contact.
To activate/deactivate the wirefault supervision of a binary input, please use the tick box
in the array of the wirefault supervision events Wirefault [E4xxx]:
4xxx: do not tick the box => the wirefault supervision of the binary input is not
available
4xxx: do tick the box => the wirefault supervision of the binary input is available
NOTE: EB-BI8-A:
Each input is assigned its own wirefault supervision event.
EB-BI10-OC:
Function Wire fault supervision is not available!
NOTE: The general wirefault monitoring event [E4300] is active if one of the individual
wirefault monitoring events is active. Such events may be used for triggering
the alarms.
P WF Lim.
Minimum limit value for triggering the wirefault supervision event; if input signal of the
functional input falls below this value, the related wirefault event Wirefault [E4xxx] is
activated.
Default setting: 0%
NOTE: This parameter is not available for extension board type EB-BI10-OC !
Short circuit supervision

NOTE: Function Short circuit supervision is not available for board type EB-BI10-OC!
P Short circuit
Short circuit supervision of the binary input; if selected (parameter setting by tick box),
the external circuit of the binary input (connected pilot wire of the external switching
contact) can be monitored with regard to a short-circuited wiring.
To activate/deactivate the short circuit supervision of a binary input, please use the tick
box in the array of the short circuit supervision events Short circuit [E4xxx]:
4xxx: do not tick the box => the short circuit supervision of the binary input is
not available
4xxx: do tick the box => the short circuit supervision of the binary input is
available
NOTE: EB-BI8-A:
Each input is assigned its own short circuit supervision event.
EB-BI10-OC:
Function Short circuit supervision is not available!
NOTE: The general short circuit supervision event [E4400] is active if one of the
individual short circuit supervision events is active. Such events may be used
for triggering the alarms.

User Manual
P SC Lim.
Maximum limit value for triggering the short-circuit supervision event; if input signal of the
functional input exceeds this value, the related short-circuit event Short circuit [E4xxx]
is activated.
Default setting: 0%
P Activate level
Minimum voltage level to activate the binary input; the binaty input is activated when the
voltage at the binary input terminal exceeds the set value of parameter Activate level
[P].
P Drop-off level
Maximum voltage level to deactivate the binary input; the binaty input is activated when
the voltage at the binary input terminal falls below the set value of parameter Drop-off
level [P].
P Debouncing time
Minimum duration of the voltage signal which activates the binary input; to activate the
binary input the voltage of the signal wire which is connected to the binary input has to
exceed the set value of parameter Activate level [P] for a minimum of the set value of
parameter Debouncing time [P].
If the voltages falls below the set value of parameter Activate level [P] before the time
of debouncing time has run down, then the binary input remains inactive.
APPLICATION NOTE: Debouncing time can be used to avoid unwanted activation of
the binary inputs in case that the voltage exceeds the activation
level sporadically, e.g. casused by inductive or capacitive
influences on the signal wiring.

User Manual
3.6.3 Binary outputs (Relay outputs)
Figure 3-250 Binary outputs
Depending on the device variant SYMAP-Compact(+) provides the following binary outputs:
Table 3-20 Binary outputs
additional SYMAP-Compact SYMAP-Compact +F1, +F2, +F3, +F4,
Binary Output Event-No.
pre-delay event F0, F1, F2, F3, F4 SYN, EC, GC, ECG, +GC, +ECG
Shunt Trip 1 4500 -
Shunt Trip 2 4501 -
Lockout relay 4502 4503
Synchron ON 4504 4505 ()
Function 1 4506 4507 ()
Function 2 4508 4509 ()
Function 3 4510 4511 ()
Function 4 4512 4513 ()
Function 5 4514 4515 ()
Function 6 4516 4517 ()
Function 7 4518 4519
Function 8 4520 4521
: Standard
(): Ordering option
CAUTION: When inductive loads are to be switched by the contacts of the binary outputs, the
contacts have to be protected against destruction by contact burning! For this, an
external protective circuit has to be connected to the contacts of the affected
binary output. The protective curcuitry shall be located close to the disturbing
source.
Using DC voltage as switching voltage: protective curcuitry with flywheel diode
Using AC voltage as switching voltage: protective curcuitry with varistor

User Manual
3.6.3.1 Shunt Trip 1
The binary output Shunt Trip 1 provides a change-over contact. Its normally open (NO)
contact is designated for tripping the connected circuit breaker!
The first relay output Shunt trip 1 carries the event-number [E4500].
Figure 3-251 Shunt trip 1
01
to
22
Input elements of the logic scheme of the binary output; these parameters represent the
input elements for the (positive) logic control of output Shunt Trp 1. Each available
event can be used as an input element; therefore the event-number has to be registered
in the arrey besides the number of the input element.
NOTE: Setting 0 means logical 0 (positive logic: untrue)

Setting 9999 means logical 1 (positive logic: true)
Normally closed
Power to unlock principle (normally closed) of the binary output; this parameter
activates/deactivates the working principle power to unlock principle of the binary
output:
: do not tick the box => working principle of the binary output accords to
power to lock principle (normally open)
: do tick the box => working principle of the binary output accords to
power to unlock principle (normally closed)

User Manual
NOTE: Power to unlock principle (normally closed) is only available when selection
button Output function = MONOSTABLE-I. The power to unlock principle
(normally closed) can be activated/deactivated individually for all binary
outputs.
CAUTION: Please note that the output event status of the binary outputs (BOs) do not
correspond to the set working principle (see tick box parameters Normally
closed) of the BOs! The output event status only depends on the
forestanding logic of the BOs!
The set working principle of the binary out only affects the position of the
BO contact!

User Manual
3.6.3.2 Shunt Trip 2
The binary output Shunt Trip 2 provides a normally open (NO) contact which is designated for
tripping the connected circuit breaker!
The second relay output Shunt Trip 2 carries the event-number [E4501].
Figure 3-252 Shunt Trip 2
Parameter description of binary output Shunt Trip 2 is equal to the binary output of the Shunt
Trip 1.

User Manual
3.6.3.3 Lockout relay
Lockout Relay exists only once, and carries event-number [E4502].
NOTE: In case that protective function ANSI 86 Lockout relay is not needed, please
disable the ANSI 86 module via parameter setting: Function [P3435] = OFF.
Figure 3-253 Lockout relay
Normally closed
Power to unlock principle (normally closed) of the binary output; this parameter
activates/deactivates the working principle power to unlock principle of the binary
output:
: do not tick the box => working principle of the binary output accords to
power to lock principle (normally open)
: do tick the box => working principle of the binary output accords to
power to unlock principle (normally closed)
NOTE: Power to unlock principle (normally closed) is only available when selection
button Output function = MONOSTABLE-I. The power to unlock principle
(normally closed) can be activated/deactivated individually for all binary
outputs.
CAUTION: Please note that the output event status of the binary outputs (BOs) do not
correspond to the set working principle (see tick box parameters Normally
closed) of the BOs! The output event status only depends on the
forestanding logic of the BOs!
The set working principle of the binary out only affects the position of the
BO contact!

User Manual
Additional predelay event

Additional pre-delay event of the binary output; if selected (parameter setting by tick
box), the binary output is attributed an additional pre-delay event [E4503]. Independent
of the settings of parameters Output ON delay or Output OFF delay, the additional
pre-delay event is immediately active/deactive after the binary output has been
activated/deactivated.
To make the additional pre-delay event available, please tick the box besides parameter
Additional predelay event [E4503]:
: do not tick the box => the additional pre-delay event of the binary input is not
available
: do tick the box => the additional pre-delay event of the binary input is
available
NOTE: The inverted event is only available for parameter setting:

Output function = MONOSTABLE-I.
Filter event history

Filter function for processing or not processing of all available output events of the binary
output in the event history; if selected (parameter setting by tick box), the output event
[E4502] and the Additional pre-delay event [E4503] are not being registered in the
event history.
To activate/deactivate the filter function of a binary output, please use the tick box
besides parameter Filter event history:
: do not tick the box => the filter function of the binary output is not available
: do tick the box => the filter function of the binary output is available
Output function
Definition of switch behavior of the binary output; in view of the temporal scale the switch
behaviour of the relay contacts after or during activation of the binary output can be
defined by the following setting options of parameter Output function:
Monostable-I: This function generates pulses with monostable behaviour
(monostable interrupted); this means when output relay is
activated/deactivated its output contact closes/opens without any
time delay.
PULSER: This function generates pulses with the ON delay and the OFF
delay.
MONOFLOP-C: This function generates a constant pulse (permanent = ON
delay).
MONOFLOP-I: This function generates a pulse (permanent = ON delay). Pulse
is interrupted if logic turns false during ON delay.
Output ON delay
Switch-on delay time of the binary output; if the binary output is activated and the delay
time, set by parameter Output On delay, run down, event [E4502] is activated.
Setting range: 0 ... 6500 s.
Output OFF delay

Switch-off delay time of the binary output; if the binary output is dectivated and the delay
time, set by parameter Output OFF delay, run down, event [E4502] is deactivated.
Setting range: 0 ... 6500 s.
01
to

User Manual
22
Input elements of the logic scheme of the binary output; these parameters represent the
input elements for the (positive) logic control of output Lockout Relay. Each available
event can be used as an input element; therefore the event-number has to be registered
in the arrey besides the number of the input element.


User Manual
3.6.3.4 Synchron ON
The relay of the binary output Synchron ON is equipped with two separate relay coils with
individually corresponding normal open contact which are connected in series. The sreies
connection is connected to the terminals of the binary output. The two internal relay coils of the
binary output relay Synchron ON are individually controlled by different CPUs. One is
controlled by the CPU ofr the control unit (CU), the other is controlled by the measuring unit
(MU).
The binary output Synchron ON shall preferably be used for switching on the connected circuit
breaker via synchronizing function ANSI 25 Synchro check.
Synchron ON relay exists only once, and carries event-number [E4504].
NOTE: Binary output Synchron ON is foreseen for function ANSI 25 Synchronising.
Alternatively, binary output Synchron ON can be used as a binary output such as
Function 1 or others.
Figure 3-254 Synchron ON
Parameter description of binary output Lockout Relay is equal to the binary output Synchron
ON.

User Manual
3.6.3.5 Function outputs 1 to 8
In dependence of the device variant SYMAP-Compact(+) procides severel relay outputs

(Function 1 to Function 8).
Figure 3-255 Function ouput 1
Parameter description of binary output Lockout Relay is equal to the binary outputs Function
1 to Function 8.

User Manual
3.6.3.6 EBS Function outputs
In dependence of the board types and the number of extension boards connected to the
SYMAP-Compact(+) Extension Board System EBS provides severel relay outputs (Function
output x). By using selection button Selection each relay output can be invoked individually.
Figure 3-256 EBS relay output: Function ouput 1
Parameter description of binary output Lockout Relay is equal to the binary outputs Function
x of the extension board system EBS.
NOTE: Input 01 of Function output 8 is assigned self-supervision event (watchdog)
Common alarm system total error [E9001] as default setting. This event can also be
assigned to another input of the same or another function output.

User Manual
3.6.4 Analog inputs
3.6.4.1 Analog input 1 and Analog input 2 (Resistor)
Analog inputs 1 and 2 designed for resistance Measurement are applicable for the following
applications:
Measuring temperature
Measuring pressure
NOTE: The analog inputs 1 and 2 for the resistance measurement are essentially for a
measuring range between 0 (range start) and 400 (end of range)!
Main Manu\Parameters\I/O\Analog inputs
Analog input 1
P/E No. Description Value Unit (Setting range)

Input
P5788 Enable OFF - OFF/PT100/0400
P94175 Name Analog input 1 - (editable text parameter)
Filter
P5794 Integrator 0,0 s 0,0 999,9
P5795 Average 0,0 s 0,0 10,0
Options
P5796 Freeze 0 Event 0 9999
P5797 Substitute 0 Event 0 9999
P5798 Substitute value 0,00 C / 10.000.000,00
Figure 3-257 Analog input 1 Parameters [P]
Analog input 2

Input
P5772 Enable OFF - OFF/PT100/0400
Filter
P5778 Integrator 0,0 s 0,0 999,9
P5779 Average 0,0 s 0,0 10,0
Options
P5782 Substitute value 0,00 C / 10.000.000,00
NOTE: Each of the two analog inputs (resistance measurement) provides the same
parameters. Hence, the parameter descriptions of analog input 1 represented below
are described in the following in detail as examples.

User Manual
Input
P5788 Enable
This parameter enables/disables analog output 1, where:
OFF: disables or
PT100: enables the analogue input for temperature measurement
according to the PT100 temperature-resistance characteristic in the
range between 0 and 400 or
0 400: activates the analogue input for a direct, linear measurement of
resistance in the range between 0 and 400.
Curve definition for input signal PT100

The characteristic of the analogue input for measuring a PT100 sensor is defined by
permanently stored values:
400
350
300
Resistance R []
250
200
150
100
50
0
-200 -100 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800
Temperature T [C]
Figure 3-259 Analog input 1 and 2 PT100 temperature-resistance characteristic
Curve definition for input signal resistance 0400

The characteristic curve of the analogue input for measuring a resistance is linear in the range
of 0 to 400.
P94175 Name
Text editor for analog input 1; the name of analog input 1 can be changed by the user
according to the customerspecific designation (max. 24 characters).

User Manual
Filter
P5794 Integrator
Attenuation of the measured signal for display of rapidly changing measured values; the
magnitude of digital, scaled value of the analogue input is calculated according to the
integrator defined by parameter [P5794].
In an instantaneous change in the magnitude of the measured signal between 0 (range
start) and 400 (end of range), the digital, scaled measuring value follows the measured
input signal within the time set with parameter [P5794].
P5795 Average
Representation of the analog measurement signal as a digitized, statistic value (eg for
measured value displays) of constantly fluctuating, analog measured signals; for the
displayed magnitude of the input signal, an average value is cyclically calculated,
according to the time period set by parameter [P5795].
Options
P5796 Freeze
Event-controlled saving of the actual value of the input signal; saving can be activated by
any active event. For activation, the number related to this event has to be assigned to
parameter [P5796]. Activation of saving function is only effective, however, as long as
the assigned event is active. As soon as the assigned event becomes inactive, the
saved value is erased and and the magnitude of the displayed value is equal to the
actual measuring value.
If event-controlled saving of the actual input value is not required, set this parameter to
0.
P5797 Substitute
Event-controlled provision of a pre-defined value for the actual input value; provision of a
pre-defined value can be activated by any active event. For activation, the number
related to this event has to be assigned to parameter [P5797]. Provision of a pre-defined
value is only effective, however, as long as the assigned event is active. As soon as the
assigned event becomes inactive, the pre-defined value is erased and and the
magnitude of the displayed value is equal to the actual measuring value.
0.
P5798 Substitude value

Pre-defined value for the event-controlled provision of a pre-defined value for the actual
input value; the pre-defined value of the input value is according to the measuring value
selected by parameter Enable [P5788].

User Manual
3.6.4.2 Analog input 3 and Analog input 4 (0 to 20mA)
Analog inputs 3 and 4 designed for mA current Measurement are applicable for the following
applications:
Measuring values from external process automation systems such as eg. current,
temperature, or pressure (eg. lub. oil pressure of an engine)
Measuring of setpoints for controlling of system-related process values such as active load
control bias signal and power factor control bias signal (NOTE: Measuring of setpoints is
not available yet!)
Analog input 3

Input
P5756 Enable OFF - OFF/0 20mA/4 20mA
Scale
P5757 Select [%] - Percent [%];Current [mA];Current
[A];Voltage [mV];Voltage [V];Active
power [kW];Reactive power
[kVAR];Apparent power
[kVA];Speed [rpm];Pressure
[bar];Pressure [kPa];Temperature
[C];Temperature [F];Fuel [l];Fuel
[m3];Fuel [gal]
P5758 Zero scale 0,00 - 10.000.000,00
P5760 Full scale 0,00 - 10.000.000,00
Filter
P5762 Integrator 0,0 s 0,0 999,9
P5763 Average 0,0 s 0,0 10,0
Options
P5766 Substitute value 0,00 - 10.000.000,00
Supervision
P5768 Wirefault limit 0,0 mA 0,0 20,0
E4902 Wirefault limit AI3 - - -

User Manual
Analog input 4

Input
P5740 Enable OFF - OFF/0 20mA/4 20mA
Scale
P5741 Select [%] - Percent [%];Current [mA];Current
[A];Voltage [mV];Voltage [V];Active
power [kW];Reactive power
[kVAR];Apparent power [kVA];Speed
[rpm];Pressure [bar];Pressure
[kPa];Temperature [C];Temperature
[F];Fuel [l];Fuel [m3];Fuel [gal]
P5742 Zero scale 0,00 - 10.000.000,00
P5744 Full scale 0,00 - 10.000.000,00
Filter
P5746 Integrator 0,0 s 0,0 999,9
P5747 Average 0,0 s 0,0 10,0
Options
P5750 Substitute value 0,00 - 10.000.000,00
Supervision
P5752 Wirefault limit 0,0 mA 0,0 20,0
E4901 Wirefault limit AI4 - - -
NOTE: Each of the two analog inputs (resistance Measurement) provides the same
parameters. Hence, the parameter descriptions of analog input 1 represented below
are described in the following in detail as examples.
Input
P5756 Enable
OFF: disables or
0 20mA: enables the analogue input for mA measurement in the range
between 0 to 20mA or
4 20mA: enables the analogue input for mA measurement in the range
between. This setting should be selected when using the wirefault
monitoring.

User Manual
Curve definition for input signal mA current

The analog input curve is defined by a starting point and a final point. The starting point as well
as the final point is determined by a value pair which should be set by the following parameters:
analog input range: 0 to 20mA
Value pair starting point: Zero range 0mA / Zero scale [P5758]
Value pair final point: Full range 20mA / Full scale [P5760]
analog input range: 4 to 20mA

Value pair starting point: zero meas. range = 4mA / Zero scale [P5758]
Value pair final point: full meas. range = 20mA / Full scale [P5760]
Meas. range - input signal
[mA]
20mA (full meas. range)

Final point
0mA (zero meas. range)

Starting point Measuring value scale
Zero scale [P5758] = 0C e.g. Temperature [C]
Full scale [P5760] = 120C
Figure 3-262 Analog input 3 Example: Meas. value Temperature
NOTE: Depending on the measuring quantity (see parameter Select [P5757]), the set
values to define the value pairs for starting point and final point should be given as
absolute or percent values. Percent values always refer to the settings of the
reference values (e.g. generator rated power) via submenu
SYSTEM\Nominals\Reference values!
P94125 Name
Text editor for analog input 3; the name of analog input 3 can be changed by the user
Scale
P5757 Select
This parameter defines the measuring quantity of the analog input 3, where:
Percent [%]
Current [mA]
Current [A]
Voltage [mV]

User Manual
Voltage [V]
Active power [kW]
Reactive power [kvar]
Apparent power [kVA]
Speed [RPM]
Pressure [bar]
Pressure [kPa]
Temperature [C]
Temperature [F]
Fuel [l]
Fuel [m3]
Fuel [gal]
HINWEIS: The displayed unit of the measured value is automatically adjusted to the
parameter "Select" [P5757]!
P5758 Zero scale

Starting point of the measuring quantity; together with the zero range-value (0/4mA),
defined with parameter Enable [P5756], the value pair for the starting point of the
analog input curve is defined
P5760 Full scale

Final point of the measuring quantity; together with the full range-value (20mA), defined
with parameter Enable [P5756], the value pair for the final point of the analog input
curve is defined.
Filter
P5762 Integrator
Attenuation of the measured signal for display of rapidly changing measured values; the
magnitude of digital, scaled value of the analogue input is calculated according to the
stabilization defined by parameter [P5762].
In an instantaneous change in the magnitude of the measured signal between 0/4mA
(range start) and 20mA (end of range), the digital, scaled measuring value follows the
measured input signal within the time set with parameter [P5762].
P5763 Average
Representation of the analog measurement signal as a digitized, statistic value (eg for
measured value displays) of constantly fluctuating, analog measured signals; for the
displayed magnitude of the input signal, an average value is cyclically calculated,
according to the time period set by parameter [P5763].

User Manual
Options
P5764 Freeze
Event-controlled saving of the actual value of the input signal; saving can be activated by
any active event. For activation, the number related to this event has to be assigned to
parameter [P5764]. Activation of saving function is only effective, however, as long as
the assigned event is active. As soon as the assigned event becomes inactive, the
saved value is erased and and the magnitude of the displayed value is equal to the
actual measuring value.
0.
P5765 Substitute
Event-controlled provision of a pre-defined value for the actual input value; provision of a
pre-defined value can be activated by any active event. For activation, the number
assigned event becomes inactive, the pre-defined value is erased and and the
magnitude of the displayed value is equal to the actual measuring value.
0.
P5766 Substitude value

input value; the pre-defined value of the input value is according to the measuring value
selected by parameter Enable [P5757].
Supervision
P5768 Wirefault limit

Monitoring the level of the current input signal to fall below a minimum value; the set with
this parameter value defines the minimum value of the input signal, which is not
undershot in an error-free measured value acquisition. If the level of the current input
signal falls below the value set with this parameter, the event Wirefault limit AI3
[E4902] becomes activated for the duration of the shortfall.
If no level-monitoring of the current input signal is required, the parameter must be set to
"0.0".

User Manual
3.6.5 Analog outputs
3.6.5.1 Analog output 1 and Analog output 5 (+/-10V)
Analog outputs designed for a signal range of +/-10V are applicable for the following
applications:
Provision of measuring values for external process automation systems
Provision of setpoints for controlling of system-related process values such as speed and
voltage (NOTE: Provision of setpoints is not available yet!)
Main Manu\Parameters\I/O\Analog outputs
Analog output 1

Output
P5878 Enable OFF - OFF/ON
P94275 Name Analog output 1 - (editable text parameter)
P5879 Zero range -20 V -20,0 20,0
P5880 Full range 20 V -20,0 20,0
Scale
P5881 Select none none/(see table of meas. values)
P5882 Zero range 0 % 0,0 100,0
P5883 Full range 100 % 0,0 100,0
Filter
P5884 Integrator 0 s 0,0 999,9
P5885 Average 0 s 0 999999,999
Options
P5888 Substitute value 0 % 0,0 1000,0
Figure 3-263 Analog output 1 Parameters [P]
Analog output 5

Output
P5893 Zero range -20 V -20,0 20,0
P5894 Full range 20 V -20,0 20,0
Scale
P5896 Zero range 0 % 0,0 100,0
P5897 Full range 100 % 0,0 100,0
Filter
P5899 Average 0 s 0 999999,999
Options

User Manual
NOTE: Each of the two analog outputs (+/-10V) provides the same parameters. Hence, the
parameter descriptions of analog out 1 represented below are described in the
Output
P5878 Enable
OFF: disables or
ON: enables the analog output.
Curve definition for output signal

The analog output curve is defined by a starting point and a final point. The starting point as well
as the final points is determined by a value pair which should be set by the following
parameters:
Value pair starting point: Zero range [P5879] / Zero scale [P5882]
Value pair final point: Full range [P5880] / Full scale [P5883]
Output signal
[V]
Full range [P5880] = 10V

Final point
Zero scale [P5882] = -100%
Measuring value scale

e.g. P/Pn [%]
Full scale [P5883] = 100%
Zero range [P5879] = -10V

Starting point
Figure 3-265 Analog output 1 Example: measuring value active power
reference values via submenu SYSTEM\Nominals\Reference values!

User Manual
P94275 Name
Text editor for analog output 1; the name of analog output 1 can be changed by the user
P5879 Zero range

Minimum limit of the measuring range for the measuring quantity; together with
parameter Full range [P5880] the operating range of the analog output should be
adapted to the measuring range of the external signal receiver. For this, parameter
[5879] defines the beginning of the measuring range for the +/-10V standard signal type.
P5880 Full range

Maximum limit of the measuring range for the measuring quantity; together with
parameter Zero range [P5879] the operating range of the analog output should be
[5880] defines the end of the measuring range for the +/-10V standard signal type.

User Manual
Select
P5867 Select
This parameter defines the measuring quantity which is to be provided by the analog
output 1, where:
none: does not provide any measuring value, or
the measuring quantity to be provided can be selected via selection button.
Depending on the SYMAP-Compact(+) device variant the following measuring
quantities are provided:
Table 3-21 Analog output 1 Measuring quantity selection
Name of meas. quantity Description Setting range Unit
none none 0-100.0 -
f,PT1 Frequency,PT1 0-99.99 Hz
U12,PT1 Phase-to-phase voltage U12,PT1 0-6000.0 %
U23 PT1 Phase-to-phase voltage U23 PT1 0-6000.0 %
UL1,PT1 Phase voltage UL1,PT1 0-6000.0 %
UG,PT-GND1 Residual voltage UG,PT-GND1 0-6000.0 %
UG,PT1 Residual voltage UG,PT1 0-6000.0 %
Udc,PT1 DC voltage, PT1 -3276.7-3276.7 %
Udc+,PT1 DC voltage (+pole),PT1 -3276.7-3276.7 %
Udc-,PT1 DC voltage (-pole),PT1 -3276.7-3276.7 %
IL1,CT1 Phase current IL1,CT1 0-6000.0 %
IG,CT-GND1 Ground current IG,CT-GND1 0-6000.0 %
IG,CT1 Ground current IG,CT1 0-6000.0 %
Id1 Differential current Id1 0-6000.0 %
Is1 Stabilizing current Is1 0-6000.0 %
P,CT1 Active power,CT1 3000.0 %
Q,CT1 Reactive power,CT1 3000.0 %
S,CT1 Apparent power,CT1 0-6000.0 %
PF,CT1 Power factor, CT1 -0.99 ... +1.00 -
PL1,CT1 Active power, phase L1,CT1 3000.0 %

User Manual

QL1,CT1 Reactive power, phase L1,CT1 3000.0 %
SL1,CT1 Apparent power, phase L1,CT1 0-6000.0 %
PFL1,CT1 Power factor, phase L1,CT1 -0.99 ... +1.00 -
PG,CT-GND1 Active power, zero system,CT-GND1 3000.0 %
QG,CT-GND1 Reactive power, zero system,CT-GND1 3000.0 %
SG,CT-GND1 Apparent power, zero system,CT-GND1 0-6000.0 %
PFG,CT-GND1 Power factor, zero system,CT-GND1 -0.99 ... +1.00 -
PF,CT2 Power factor,CT2 -0.99 ... +1.00 -
PG,CT1 Active power, zero system,CT1 3000.0 %
QG,CT1 Reactive power, zero system,CT1 3000.0 %
SG,CT1 Apparent power, zero system,CT1 0-6000.0 %
PFG,CT1 Power factor, zero system,CT1 -0.99 ... +1.00 -
NOTE: Setpoint of controller functions for process automation systems such as

speed and voltage are not available yet!
P5882 Zero scale

Starting point the measuring quantity; together with parameter Zero range [P5879] the
value pair for the starting point of the analog output curve is defined.
P5883 Full scale

Final point the measuring quantity; together with parameter Full range [P5880] the
value pair for the final point of the analog output curve is defined.

User Manual
Filter
P5884 Integrator
Attenuation of the output signal for display of rapidly changing measurement values; the
magnitude of the output signal is calculated by the set value (time) of parameter [P5884].
If the magnitude of the measuring value jumps between the set values of parameters
Zero scale [P5882] und Full scale [P5883] without any delay, then duration for
changing the output signal from the set value of parameter Zero range [P5879] to the
set value of paramter Full range [P5880] is equal to the duration set by parameter
[P5884].
P5885 Average
Signal output as statistical value for display of continually changing measurement values
over an extended period of time (minutes to hours); for the displayed magnitude of the
output signal an average values is cyclically calculated according to the time period set
by parameter [P5885].
Options
P5886 Freeze
Event-controlled saving of the actual ouput signal; saving can be activated by any active
[P5886]. Activation of saving function is only effective, however, as long as the assigned
event is active. As soon as the assigned event becomes inactive, the saved value is
erased and and the magnitude of the output signal is equal to the actual measuring
value.
If event-controlled saving of the actual ouput signal is not required, set this parameter to
0.
P5887 Substitute
Event-controlled provision of a pre-defined value for the actual ouput signal; provision of
a pre-defined value can be activated by any active event. For activation, the number
assigned event becomes inactive, the pre-defined value is erased and the magnitude of
the output signal is equal to the actual measuring value.
If event-controlled provision of a pre-defined value for the actual ouput signal is not
P5888 Substitute value

ouput signal; the pre-defined value of the output signal is according to the measuring
value selected by parameter Select [P5881].

User Manual
3.6.5.2 Analog output 2 (+/-20mA)
Analog outputs designed for a signal range of +/-20mA are applicable for the following
applications:
Provision of measuring values for external process automation systems
Provision of setpoints for controlling of system-related process values such as speed and
voltage (NOTE: Provision of setpoints is not available yet!)
Analog output 2

Output
P5837 Zero range -20 mA -20,0 20,0
P5838 Full range 20 mA -20,0 20,0
Scale
P5840 Zero range 0 % 0,0 100,0
P5841 Full range 100 % 0,0 100,0
Filter
P5843 Average 0 s 0 999999,999
Options
Output
P5864 Enable
OFF: disables or

parameters:

User Manual
Output signal
[mA]
Full range [P5852] = 20mA

Final point
Zero scale [P5854] = -100%

e.g. Q/Qn [%]
Full scale [P5855] = 100%
Zero range [P5851] = -20mA

Starting point
Figure 3-267 Analog output 2 Example: measuring value reactive power
reference values via submenu SYSTEM\Nominals\Reference values!
P94250 Name
P5865 Zero range

[5867] defines the beginning of the measuring range for the +/-20mA standard signal
type.
P5866 Full range


User Manual
[5866] defines the end of the measuring range for the +/-20mA standard signal type.

User Manual
Select
P5867 Select
output 2, where:
none: does not provide any measuring value, or
none none 0-100.0 -
Udc,PT1 DC voltage, PT1 0-6000.0 %

User Manual

NOTE: Setpoint of controller functions for process automation systems such as

speed and voltage are not available yet!
P5868 Zero scale

P5869 Full scale


User Manual
Filter
P5870 Integrator
[P5870].
P5871 Average
Options
P5872 Freeze
value.
0.
P5873 Substitute


User Manual
3.6.5.3 Analog output 3 and Analog output 4 (0 to 20mA)
Analog outputs designed for a signal range of 0 to 20mA are applicable for the following
applications:
Provision of measuring values for external analog measurement instruments
Provision of process values for externeal plant components such as building control
systems, ship automation systems, etc.
Analog output 3

Output
P5837 Zero range 4 mA 0,0 20,0
P5838 Full range 20 mA 0,0 20,0
Scale
P5839 Select keine none/(see table of meas. values)
P5840 Zero range 0 % 0,0 100,0
P5841 Full range 100 % 0,0 100,0
Filter
P5843 Average 0 s 0 999999,999
Options
Analog output 4

Output
P5851 Zero range 4 mA 0,0 20,0
P5852 Full range 20 mA 0,0 20,0
Scale
P5854 Zero range 0 % 0,0 100,0
P5855 Full range 100 % 0,0 100,0
Filter
P5857 Average 0 s 0 999999,999
Options

User Manual
NOTE: Each of the two analog outputs provides the same parameters. Hence, the parameter
descriptions of analog out 3 represented below are described in the following in detail
as examples.
Output
P5850 Enable
OFF: disables or

parameters:
Output signal
[mA]

Final point
Zero range [P5851] = 4mA

Starting point

e.g. P/Pn [%]
Zero scale [P5854] = -10% Full scale [P5855] = 120%
Figure 3-270 Analog output 3 Example: Meas. value Active power and 10% reverse power
reference values (e.g. generator rated power) via submenu
SYSTEM\Nominals\Reference values!

User Manual
Example: Analog measuring instrument for active power

Display area of measurement instrument: -100kW to 1100kW
Measuring range of measurement instrument: 4 to 20mA
Generator rated power: 800kW
On the assumption that power measurement is done via current measurement input
CT1 and voltage measurement input PT1, the following parameter setting should be
done in submenu SYSTEM\Measuring\Power:
On the assumption that current and voltage measurement is located at winding side
W1, the following parameter setting for voltage measurement should be done in
submenu SYSTEM\Nominals\Potential transformers:
Assignment [P642] = W1 , and
in submenu SYSTEM\Nominals\Current transformers the following parameter
setting should be done for current measurement:
Assignement [P668] = W1
The generator rated power value should be set in submenu:

SYSTEM\Nominals\Reference values as follows:
Leistung [P605] = 800,00kW
Parameter setting necessary to adjust the analog output 3 is as follows:

Zero range [P5851] = 4mA
Select [P5853] = P,CT1
Zero scale [P5854] = [scale initial value / generator rated power] 100%
= [-100kW / 800kW] 100%
= -12.5%
Full scale [P5855] = [scale final value / generator rated power] 100%
= [1100kW / 800kW] 100%
= 137.5%
P94225 Name
P5851 Zero range

[5851] defines the beginning of the measuring range for the 0 to 20mA standard signal
type.
P5852 Full range

[5852] defines the end of the measuring range for the 0 to 20mA standard signal type.

User Manual
Select
P5853 Select
output 3, where:
none: does not provide any measuring quantity, or
none none 0-100.0 -

User Manual

P5854 Zero scale

P5855 Full scale

Filter
P5856 Integrator
[P5856].
P5857 Average

User Manual
Options
P5858 Freeze
value.
0.
P5859 Substitute


User Manual
3.7 LVM Limit Value Monitoring
Main Menu\Parameters\
GW-Grenzwertberwachung

LVM step 1
P74500 Function OFF - OFF/Low limit/High limit
P74501 Type Voltage - Voltage /Current/
Power/Power factor/Frequency/
Analog inputs
P74502 Select U12,PT1 (see table of meas. values)
P74503 Limit 0 % 0 3000,0
P74505 Delay time 0 s 0 999999,999
P74507 Reset limit 0 % 0 3000,0
E8100 LVM pickup - - -
E8101 LVM trip - - -
LVM step 1
P74509 Function OFF - OFF/Low limit/High limit

Figure 3-271 LVM-Limit Value Monitoring: Parameters [P] and Events [E]
NOTE: Each of the 100 steps of limit value monitoring function provides the same parameters.
Hence, the parameter descriptions of LVM step 1 represented below are described in
the following in detail as examples.
P74500 Function
This parameter disables/enables the first step of the LVM-Limit Value Monitoring
element; enabling the first step is to be done by selecting its working principle; whereas:
"OFF: disables first monitoring step, or
High limit: ensables first monitoring step => monitoring according to
threshold exceedance,
Low limit: ensables first monitoring step => monitoring according to
threshold undercut,
P74501 Type
This parameter defines the physical type of the measuring quantity for the first step of
the LVM-Limit Value Monitoring element; The measuring range of the physical quantity
accords to its type which can be selected as follows:
Voltage
Current
Power
Power factor
Frequency
Analog inputs

User Manual
P74502 Select
This parameter defines the measuring quantity of the first setp of the LVM-Limit Value
Monitoring function, whereby the measuring quantity to be provided can be selected via
selection button. Depending on the SYMAP-Compact(+) device variant the following
measuring quantities are provided:
Table 3-24 LVM step 1 Selection of measuring quantity
Name of meas.
Description Setting range Unit
quantity
TYPE: VOLTAGE
MIN,PT1 Minimum phase-to-phase average voltage, PT1 0-3000.0 %
Max,PT1 Maximum phase-to-phase average voltage, PT1 0-3000.0 %
ULxMIN,PT1 Minimum average phase voltage, PT1 0-3000.0 %
ULxMAX,PT1 Maximum average phase voltage, PT1 0-3000.0 %
Uo, PT1 Zero sequence voltage Uo, PT1 0-3000.0 %
U1,PT1 Positive sequence voltage U1 , PT1 0-3000.0 %
U2,PT1 Negative sequence voltage U2, PT1 0-3000.0 %
ULxMAX,PT2 Maximum average phase voltage , PT2 0-3000.0 %
Uo, PT2 Zero sequence voltage Uo , PT2 0-3000.0 %
U1,PT2 Positive sequence voltage U1, PT2 0-3000.0 %
ULxMAX,PT3 Maximum average phase voltage, PT3 0-3000.0 %
Uo, PT3 Zero sequence voltage Uo , PT3 0-3000.0 %
U1,PT3 Positive sequence voltage U1, PT3 0-3000.0 %
TYPE: CURRENT
MIN,PT1 Minimum average phase current, CT1 0-6000.0 %
Max,PT1 Maximum average phase current, CT1 0-6000.0 %
Io, PT1 Zero sequence current Io, CT1 0-6000.0 %
I1,PT1 Positive sequence current I1, CT1 0-6000.0 %
I2,PT1 Negative sequence current I2, CT1 0-6000.0 %
MIN,CT2 Minimum average phase current, CT2 0-6000.0 %
Max,CT2 Maximum average phase current, CT2 0-6000.0 %
Io, CT2 Zero sequence current Io, CT2 0-6000.0 %
I1,CT2 Positive sequence current I1, CT2 0-6000.0 %
I2,CT2 Negative sequence current I2, CT2 0-6000.0 %
TYPE: POWER
P,Power,CT1 Active power,CT1 3000.0 %
Q,Power,CT1 Reactive power,CT1 3000.0 %
S,Power,CT1 Apparent power,CT1 0-3000.0 %

User Manual
Name of meas.
Description Setting range Unit
quantity
P,Power,CT2 Active power,CT2 3000.0 %
Q,Power,CT2 Reactive power,CT2 3000.0 %
S,Power,CT2 Apparent power,CT2 0-3000.0 %
TYPE: POWER FACTOR
PF,Power,CT1 Power factor, CT1 -0.99 ... +1.00 -
PF,Power,CT2 Power factor,CT2 -0.99 ... +1.00 -
TYPE: FREQUENCY
TYPE: ANALOG INPUTS
Analog input 1 Resistance measurement: see parameter Enable [P5788] 10000000.00 -
Analog input 2 Resistance measurement : see parameter Enable [P5772] 10000000.00 -
Analog input 3 Measurement value selection: see parameter Type [P5757] 10000000.00 -
Analog input 4 Measurement value selection: see parameter Type [P5741] 10000000.00 -
P74503 Limit
Pick-up value of the first LVM-Limit Value Monitoring element. At the moment that the
value of the monitored measuring quantity (see parameter Select [P74500]),
exceeds/falls below this limit, pick-up event LVM-1 pickup [E8100] will become active,
and the trip delay time (Delay time) of the first LVM-Limit Value Monitoring element will
start.
P74505 Delay time

Trip delay time; it is the delay time of the trip event LVM-1 trip [E8101].
As soon as the pick-up event LVM-1 pickup [E8100] is active and Delay time runs
control purposes.
P74507 Reset limit

Reset limit of the first LVM-Limit Value Monitoring element. When the value of the
monitored measuring quantity falls below/exceeds the set value of parameter Reset
limt [P74507} before the delay time has run down, the timer of Delay time will be set to
zero and and the pick-up event LVM-1 pickup [E8100] will be deactivated.

User Manual
3.8 Virtual IO
3.8.1 IEC 61850 subscribers
Main Menu\ Parameters\I/O\ Virtual IO\
IEC 61850 subscribers

Subscribers
P92549 Number of active Subscribers 0 - 0 128
Source subscribe ID 1
P92550 Multicast MAC address 01-0C-CD-01- 00-01 - 00-01 99-99
P92551 Application ID 1 - 0 65535
E9640 Subscriber in TEST mode - - -
P92549 Number of active subscribers 0 - 0 128
..
Figure 3-272 IEC 61850 Subscribers
Subscribers
P92549 Number of active Subscribers

Defines the numbers of the active source subscribers Id in the device. The maximum
number is 128. For instance, if the user chooses set value 10, then condition check
will be conducted only for source Subscriber ID 1 to source Subscriber ID 10.
Source Subscriber ID 11 to source Subscriber ID 128 will not be checked!
Source subscribe ID n
There are 128 Subscribers available. Each Subscriber is to defined individually by one
group named Source subscriber ID n, whereby n is some number from1 to128.
NOTE: Each Source subscribe ID always provides the same group of parameters. Hence,
the parameter descriptions of Source subscribe ID 1 represented below are described
in the following in detail as examples.
P92550 Multicast MAC address 01-0C-CD-01-

This parameter defines the Multicast MAC address of the subscribers. The first part of
the address is fix and accords to the IEC61850 standard 01-0C-CD-01. The second
part of the address has to be set.
P92551 Application ID
This parameter defines the Application ID of the subscribers. The setting range is from
0 65535
NOTE: The combination of Multicast MAC address and Application ID must be
unique in the Source subscriber ID table. This combination defines the
Publisher/address of the device which is sending the GOOSE message.

User Manual
Example: As Source subscriber 1 you must set parameter Multicast MAC address 01-0C-CD-
01- P[92550] = 00-01 to get the elements of device B. In device B and the
parameter Application IDP[92551] = ID1 in Device B from the same Publisher 1.
Device A Device B Device C

ID1 Publisher 1 Publisher 2
MAC address 1 Some dataset X Some dataset Y
Application ID 1 Ind5StVal Ind1StVal
ID2 Ind5q Ind1q
MAC address 2 Ind9StVal Ind3StVal
Application ID 2 Ind9q Ind3q
... Ind10StVal Ind99StVal
... MAC address 1 ... MAC address 2
Application ID 1 Application ID 2
whereby:
Device A: Receiving GOOSE messages
Device B: Sending GOOSE messages
Device C: Sending GOOSE messages
Figure 3-273 Example: Subscribers

User Manual
3.8.2 IEC 61850 inputs mapping
Main Menu\Parameters\I/O\ Virtual IO\
IEC 61850 inputs mapping

GGIO7$ST$Ind1 - trigger setting
P92900 Source subscriber ID OFF - OFF/1 128
P92901 Dataset position ID StVal OFF - none/1 128
P92902 Dataset position ID Q OFF - none/1 128
E9200 GOOSE input event 1 (stVal) - - -
E9330 GOOSE input event 1 (q) - - -
P92903 Source subscriber ID OFF - OFF/1 128
..
Figure 3-274 IEC 61850 Inputs mapping
GOOSE inputs represents the node GGIO7 of IEC61850 data model in SYMAP-Compact(+).
GGIO7$ST$Ind1- trigger setting to GGIO7$ST$Ind128- trigger setting defines the Ind1 to
Ind128 in logical node GGIO7 in SYMAP-Compact(+) icd file/Compact IEC61850 data model.
Each trigger setting provides the following parameters and events:
P92900 Source subscriber ID

For selecting setting option OFF the trigger/filter is not in use.
If active number defines what Source Subscriber ID is used for this trigger/filter. This
table defines Source Subscriber ID 1 to 128 with MAC address and Application ID each.
P92901 Dataset position ID StVal

This parameter defines the position of the dataset element StVal in the dataset of CID
file (data of the source device). The dataset element represents event (trip event, binary
input event, alarm, PLC, ) needed to build some PLC logic, alarm, interlocking or
trigger output of the device.
P92902 Dataset position ID Q

This parameter defines the data quality and his position in dataset. If the Data IndStVal
is send without quality this parameter will be set to none. If the data StVal is sent with
quality this parameters will have number StVal position +1

User Manual
Example:
IED Device A IED Device B

Source subs. ID1 Publisher 1
MAC address 1 Some dataset X
Application ID 1 Ind5StVal
Source subs. ID2 Ind5q
MAC address 2 Ind9StVal
Application ID 2 Ind9q
... Ind10StVal
... MAC address 1
Application ID 1
IED Device C
Publisher 2
Some dataset Y
Ind1StVal
Ind1q
Ind3StVal
Ind3q
Ind99StVal
...
MAC address 2
Application ID 2
Figure 3-275 Example: Inputs mapping
Event description:
P9200 GOOSE input event 1 (stVal)

This event is active when the Data Parameter Dataset position Ind StVal has
changed its status.
This event can be used after in any part of the PLC, Alarms, Outputs
P9330 GOOSE input event 1 (q)

This event is active when the Parameter Dataset position Ind - Q has changed his
status. If the quality is good this parameter will not be active. If the quality is bad the user
should use this event for defining the behaviour of event GOOSE Input Event 1 (stVal).
Example:
IED Device B
Publisher 1
MAC address 1
Some dataset X
Application ID 1
Ind5StVal
Ind5q
Ind9StVal
Ind9q
Ind10StVal
...
Figure 3-276 Position of dataset

User Manual
You see the dataset X with the following elements:

Ind5StVal,
Ind5q,
Ind9StVal,
Ind9q, and
Ind10StVal
Dataset is connected to Publisher1 (example gcbA) with defined MAC address 1

and Application ID1.
Positions of the elements are as follows:

Table 3-25 Elements/positions of dataset X
Elements in dataset X Position in dataset X is

Ind5StVal 1
Ind5q 2
Ind9StVal 3
Ind9q 4
Ind10StVal 5

User Manual
3.8.3 IEC 61850 ouputs mapping
GOOSE Output GGIO6$ST$Indn - trigger setting
The name GGIO6$ST$Ind n( whereby n is the number between 1 and 128) correspondents
to the element in logical device System/GGIO6/ST /Indn StVal (whereby n is the number
between 1 and 128 ) in SYMAP-Compact(+) ICD file /Compact IEC61850 Data model.
It is possible to define 128 virtual free programmable outputs.
GGIO6$ST$Indnumber between 1 and 128- trigger setting
GOOSE output is the logical node GGIO6
GGIO6$ST$Ind1- trigger setting to GGIO6$ST$Ind128- trigger setting defines the Ind1 to Ind
128 in logical node GGIO6 in SYMAP-Compact(+) IEC61850 Datamodel.
IEC 61850 outputs mapping

GOOSE Output GGIO6$ST$Ind1 - trigger setting
E9800 GOOSE Output Event 1 - - -
E9801 GOOSE Output Event 2 - - -
..
Figure 3-277 IEC 61850 Outputs mapping
P93300 Trigger event

This parameter defines that event which will activate GOOSE output event 1 [E9800].
This can be any event in the device for example: trip event, binary input event, alarm,
PLC,

This parameter defines that event which will activate GOOSE output event 2 [E9801].
This can be any event in the device for example: trip event, binary input event, alarm,
PLC,

This parameter defines that event which will activate GOOSE output event 128
[E9927]. This can be any event in the device for example: trip event, binary input event,
alarm, PLC,

User Manual
Event description:
E9800 GOOSE Output Event 1

This event is active when parameter Trigger event [P93300] is active. This event is the
same as the element Ind1 StVal in GGIO6 in SYMAP-Compact(+) ICD file/Compact
IEC61850 data model. The status of GGIO6/ST/Ind1/StVal element in SYMAP-
Compact(+) IEC61850 data model corresponds to the GOOSE output event 1 [E9800].

Compact(+) IEC61850 data model corresponds to the GOOSE output event 2 [E9801].

Compact(+) IEC61850 data model corresponds to the status of GOOSE output event
128 [E9927].
Figure 3-278 Outputs Mapping

User Manual
3.8.4 IEC 61850 device test mode
IEC 61850 device test mode

Test mode device trigger setting
P93431 TEST MODE Device trigger 0 - 0 9999
E9931 Device is in TEST mode
Figure 3-279 IEC 61850 device test mode
Test mode device trigger setting
P93431 TEST MODE Device trigger

IEC 61850 test mode can be activated by any active event. For activation, the number
related to this activation event has to be assigned to parameter [P93431]. Activation is
only effective, however, as long as the assigned event is active. As soon as activation of
test mode is active, event Device in TEST mode [E9931] is being activated. If the
assigned event turns inactive, test mode is being deactivated. Then, event [E9931] is
being deactivated automatically.
If activation of test mode is not required, set this parameter to 0.
Device in IEC61850 TEST mode performs the following actions:

have all published GOOSE messages marked as Test
refuse normal commands from Clients
set Test flag of all relevant qualities
set all Beh DataObjects to value 3 (test).

User Manual
3.8.5 Communication events transfer table
Main Menu\Parameters\Virtual IO\
Communication events transfer table
P/E No. System description Value Unit (Setting range)

P6600 Communication out event 0 - 0 9999
... ... ... - ....
Figure 3-280 Event status transmission via SCADA communication
Communication events transfer table
P6600 Communication out event

The status of any event can be transmitted as datapoints via the following SCADA
communication protocols:
Modbus RTU,
Profibus DP,
IEC 60870-5-103 and
IEC 61850.
For event status transmission, the number related to this event has to be assigned to
parameter [P6600].
If event status transmission is not required, set this parameter to 0.
NOTE: Description of the communication protocols and the corresponding addressing
can be found in the documents:
SYMAP-Compact Appendix_Modbus_Profibus_IEC-103_vx.x.docx and
SYMAP-Compact Appendix _IEC61850_vx.x.docx

to

User Manual
3.9 SWITCHGEAR CONTROL
A switching operation of function SWITCHGEAR CONTROL is defined as a given contol

command to a switching element which provides electrical drives for opening and closing its
primary contacts (e.g. circuit breaker, disconnector, load break switch, eathing switch, etc.). A
given control command is for both, switching on and switching off the switching element.
CAUTION: Switching operations of function Breaker control are being conducted only
under faultfree operation conditions of the switchgear. Any disconnecting due tue
a faulty condition is being conducted by protection tripping, which is treated
separately. Disconnection of a faulty part of the electrical power system is always
of higher priority than any switching operation under faultfree operation
conditions.
Switching operations can be launched either locally (directly in font of the cubicle), or remotely
(by SCADA or any other automation system). For reasons of personal and system protection
the possibility of local and remote operation in parallel is not permitted. This requires an
adjustment capability of the protection and control system SYMAP-Compact(+) to differentiate
cearly the local operation mode from the remote operation mode referring to switching
operations.
Moreover, switching operations in electrical power sytems underly certain authorisation, which
are being defined and given by the system operator.
Hence, switching operations triggered via the protection and control system SYMAP-
Compact(+) require several, different user levels. Entering a certain user level can be done
either by:
hardware-coded password (such as key switches or different USB sticks) or by
software-coded password via touchscreen (see chapter User levels)
of SYMAP-Compact (+).
In order to meet the requirements mentioned above, SYMAP-Compact (+) provides different
functions ensuring the unambiguous allocation of password-protected user level and local or
remote operation for function Breaker control.
Konfiguration of functional keys for switching ON/OFF in case of local control

Local control can be conducted either by the configurable function keys at the front late of
SYMAP-Compact (+); see chapter Parameter/SYSTEM/Graphic/Button configuration:
Parameter [P60010] to [P60015]).
Function Emergency-OFF
This function is required to switch off the circuit breaker locally as quick as possible, in case of a
hazardous situation. The local switch-off of the circuit breaker must occur independent of the set
mode for local or remote control, and independent of any active interlockingcondition for the
breaker.
For this, two of the function keys of SYMAP-Compact (+) can be configured in a manner, that
the circuit breaker will open when function keys are beioing operated simultaneously. There are
two setting options for the function keys available: Emergency 1 and Emergency 2(see
menu: Parameter/SYSTEM/Graphic/Button configuration: Parameter [P60010] to [P60015]).

User Manual
Configuration of SWITCHGEAR CONTROL

For function Breaker control following sub.menus are available:
Figure 3-281 Menu SWITCHGEAR CONTROL
3.9.1 General
Main Menu\Parameters\SWITCHGEAR CONTROL\
General

P6001 Breaker locked 0 - 0 9999
E6002 Block/Cancel control 0 - 0 9999
Figure 3-282 Breaker control General parameters [P] for blocking functions
General
The following parameters apply for all of the 8 switching elements in common.
P6001 Breaker locked

Blocking of switching elements selection for control via touchscreen; switching element
selection can be blocked by any active event. For blocking, the number related to this
event has to be assigned to parameter Breaker locked [P]. Blocking is only effective,
however, as long as the assigend event is active. If the event turns inactive, blocking of
switching element selection is abandoned.
If blocking of switching element selection is not required, set this parameter to 0.
P6002 Block/Cancel control

Blocking of switchgear control or interrupt of switching operation of the selected
switching element; control or interrupt of a switching operation can be blocked by any
active event. For blocking, the number related to this event has to be assigned to
parameter Block/cancel [P]. Blocking is only effective, however, as long as the
assigend event is active. If the event turns inactive, blocking/interrupt is abandoned.
If blocking of switching element selection is not required, set this parameter to 0.

User Manual
3.9.2 Feedback
The graphic display of the SYMAP-Compact(+) shows the individual single line diagram of
switch panel configuration. The actual displayed symbols of the switching elements correspond
to the current position.
For instance, the position of a circuit breaker (CB) is acquired via two separate signal lines
captured by the auxiliary contacts of the CB. They are connected each to a binary input of the
SYMAP-Compact(+). An auxiliary contact (normally open) signals ON position of the CB while
the second (normally closed) signals OFF position.
Circuit breaker
SYMAP - -X 2.3
Compact+
30
31
32
.
Binary inputs . +
24V/48/60/110/220/230V AC/DC
. -
43
44
GND2
Figure 3-283 Acquisition of CB positions
Apart from the ON/OFF position, the breaker positions DIFF and FAIL may also be
acquired and signaled with these two signals.
Table 3-26 Breaker positions
Return signal 1 (NO) Return signal 2 (NC) Position indication of switching element
0 1 OFF
1 0 ON
"0 0 DIFF (Moving)
1 1 FAIL

User Manual
The device type of switching elements (SE) is assigned via parameter Type [P] in submenu:
Parameters\SWITCHGEAR CONTROL\Feedbacks. The following selection options are
available:
Disconnector
Circuit breaker (CB)
Load break switch (LBS)
Circuit breaker truck (CB Truck)
3-position diconnector (3 Position Disconnector)
3-position circuit breaker (3 Position CB)
3-position load break switch (3 Porition LBS)
3-position circuit breaker truck (3 Porition CB Truck)
Figure 3-284 Switchgear control Definition of SE device type
Moreover, the displayed SE- symbol can be configured via parameter Breaker style [P]
according to different standards in User page menu. The following setting options are
available:
IEC
IEEE
Neutral

User Manual
Figure 3-285 Selection of switching element symbol according to different standards or neutral
symbol

User Manual
EARTHED OPEN CLOSED DIFF FAIL
Plain Disconnector
Plain CB
Plain Load Break Switch
Disconnector
CB
Load Break Switch
3 Position Plain CB
3 Position Plain Disconnector
3 Position Plain Load Break Switch
CB Truck (operating position)
CB Truck (test position)
3 Position Disconnector
3 Position CB
3 Porition LBS
3 Porition CB Truck (operating position)
3 Porition CB Truck (test position)
Disconnector Round
CB Square
Figure 3-286 Active symbols of switching elements

User Manual
Main Menu\Parameters\ SWITCHGEAR CONTROL\
Feedbacks
Parameter Breaker 1 Breaker 2 Breaker 3 Breaker 4 Breaker 5 Breaker 6 Breaker 7 Breaker 8

Feedback/General Parameters
ON-Feedback 09999 09999 09999 09999 09999 09999 09999 09999
OFF-Feedback 09999 09999 09999 09999 09999 09999 09999 09999
OUT-Feedback 09999 09999 09999 09999 09999 09999 09999 09999
IN-Feedback 09999 09999 09999 09999 09999 09999 09999 09999
EARTH ON-Feedback 09999 09999 09999 09999 09999 09999 09999 09999
EARTH OFF-Feedback 09999 09999 09999 09999 09999 09999 09999 09999
Blink by event 09999 09999 09999 09999 09999 09999 09999 09999
Invisible by event 09999 09999 09999 09999 09999 09999 09999 09999
Check OPEN ERROR / / / / / / / /
Feedback Event Numbers
ON-Feedback 6010 6020 6030 6040 6050 6060 6070 6080
OFF-Feedback 6011 6021 6031 6041 6051 6061 6071 6081
OUT-Feedback 6012 6022 6032 6042 6052 6062 6072 6082
IN-Feedback 6013 6023 6033 6043 6053 6063 6073 6083
EARTH ON-Feedback 6014 6024 6034 6044 6054 6064 6074 6084
EARTH OFF-Feedback 6015 6025 6035 6045 6055 6065 6075 6085
Position Event Numbers
OPEN 6110 6120 6130 6140 6150 6161 6170 6180
CLOSED 6111 6121 6131 6141 6151 6161 6171 6181
OUT OPEN 6112 6122 6132 6142 6152 6162 6172 6182
OUT CLOSED 6113 6123 6133 6143 6153 6163 6173 6183
EARTH 6114 6124 6134 6144 6154 6164 6174 6174
DIFF (Moving) 6115 6125 6135 6145 6155 6165 6175 6185
FAIL 6116 6126 6136 6146 6156 6166 6176 6186
OPEN ERROR 6117 6127 6137 6147 6157 6167 6177 6187
Figure 3-287 Feedback/General Parameter feedback signals (e.g. by binary inputs)
Feedbacks
Feedback/General parameter
The following parameters are individually available for all 8 switching elements.
P ON Feedback
Parameter for feedback signal for ON position; to determine the feedback signal for ON
position of a switching element the event number of the applied signal is to be set to
parameter ON-Feedback [P]. Usually, an auxiliary contact (NO) of the switching
elelement is to be connected to a binary input of the SYMAP-Compact(+). In that case
the event number of the binary input is to be used for parameter setting.
P OFF Feedback
Parameter for feedback signal for OFF position; to determine the feedback signal for
OFF position of a switching element the event number of the applied signal is to be set
to parameter OFF-Feedback [P]. Usually, an auxiliary contact (NC) of the switching
elelement is to be connected to a binary input of the SYMAP-Compact(+). In that case
the event number of the binary input is to be used for parameter setting.
P OUT Feedback

User Manual
Parameter for feedback signal for extended position of a truck; to determine the
feedback signal for extended position of a 3-position-switch the event number of the
applied signal is to be set to parameter OUT-Feedback [P]. Usually, an auxiliary
contact (NC) of the truck is to be connected to a binary input of the SYMAP-
Compact(+). In that case the event number of the binary input is to be used for
parameter setting.
P IN Feedback
Parameter for feedback signal for retracted position of a truck; to determine the feedback
signal for retracted position of a 3-position-switch the event number of the applied signal
is to be set to parameter IN-Feedback [P]. Usually, an auxiliary contact (NO) of the
truck is to be connected to a binary input of the SYMAP-Compact(+). In that case the
event number of the binary input is to be used for parameter setting.
P EARTH ON Feedback
Parameter for feedback signal for earthing position of an earthing switch or 3-position-
switch; to determine the feedback signal for earthing position of an earthing switch or 3-
position-switch the event number of the applied signal is to be set to parameter EARTH
ON-Feedback [P]. Usually, an auxiliary contact (NO) of the earthing switch or 3-position-
switch is to be connected to a binary input of the SYMAP-Compact(+). In that case the
event number of the binary input is to be used for parameter setting.
P EARTH OFF Feedback

Parameter for feedback signal for non-earthing position of an earthing switch or 3-
position-switch; to determine the feedback signal for non-earthing position of an earthing
switch or 3-position-switch the event number of the applied signal is to be set to
parameter EARTH OFF-Feedback [P]. Usually, an auxiliary contact (NC) of the
earthing switch or 3-position-switch is to be connected to a binary input of the SYMAP-
Compact(+). In that case the event number of the binary input is to be used for
parameter setting.
P Blink by event
Flashing mode for breaker symbol on the device display; flashing mode can be activated
by any active event. To activate, the number related to this event has to be assigned to
parameter Blink by event [P]. Activation is only effective, however, as long as the
assigend event is active. If the event turns inactive, activation of the flashing mode is
abandoned.
If activating of the flashing mode is not required, set this parameter to 0.
P Invisible by event
Mode for hiding the breaker symbol on the device display; hiding mode can be activated
by any active event. To activate, the number related to this event has to be assigned to
parameter Invisible by event [P]. Activation is only effective, however, as long as the
assigend event is active. If the event turns inactive, activation of the hiding mode is
abandoned.
If activating of the hiding mode is not required, set this parameter to 0.
P Check OPEN ERROR

Supervision mode for any out-of-control switch-off of a switching element; opening of the
primary contacts of a switching element by other reason than protection trip or a given
control command by SYMAP-Compact(+), is attributable, for instance, to weak switching
mechanic components or even to an earthquake. Such a situation can be detected for
each switching element separately by activating the supervision mode.
To activate/deactivate the supervision mode for any out-of-control switch-off of a
switching element, please use the tick box besides parameter Check OPEN ERROR:

User Manual
: do not tick the box => the supervision mode is not activated
: do tick the box => the supervision mode is activated
As soon as an out-of-control switch-off of a switching element is detected, event OPEN

ERROR [61xx] is activated.
Event description:
Feedback Event Numbers

The following events are individually available for all 8 switching elements.
E60x0 ON Feedback
Feedback event for ON position; as soon as the feedback signal of ON position set by
parameter ON Feedback [P] is active, the referring feedback event ON
Feedback [E60x0] is being activated.
E60x1 OFF Feedback

Feedback event for ON position; as soon as the feedback signal of OFF position set by
parameter OFF Feedback [P] is active, the referring feedback event OFF
Feedback [E60x1] is being activated.
E60x2 OUT Feedback

Feedback event for extended position of a truck; as soon as the feedback signal of
extended position set by parameter OUT-Feedback [P] is active, the referring
feedback event OUT-Feedback [E60x2] is being activated.
E60x3 IN Feedback
Feedback event for retracted position of a truck; as soon as the feedback signal of
retracted position set by parameter IN-Feedback [P] is active, the referring
feedback event IN-Feedback [E60x3] is being activated.
E60x4 EARTH ON Feedback

Feedback event for earthing position of an earthing switch or 3-position-switch; as soon
as the feedback signal of ON position set by parameter EARTH ON-Feedback [P]
is active, the referring feedback event EARTH ON -Feedback [E60x4] is being
activated.
E60x5 EARTH OFF Feedback

Feedback event for non-earthing position of an earthing switch or 3-position-switch; as
soon as the feedback signal of OFF position set by parameter EARTH OFF-
Feedback [P] is active, the referring feedback event EARTH OFF -Feedback [E60x5]
is being activated.
Position Event Numbers

The following events are individually available for all 8 switching elements.
E61x0 OPEN
Position event for OFF position; the position event OPEN [E61x0] is only being
activated in case that a switching element has taken a definite position. A definite
position is determined by evaluating both, feedback event ON-Feedback [E60x0] and
feedback event OFF-Feedback [E60x1]. To activate position event OPEN [E61x0],
feedback event OFF-Feedback [E60x1] has to be activated, and
feedback event ON-Feedback [E60x0] has to be deactivated.

User Manual
E61x1 CLOSED
Position event for ON position; the position event CLOSED [E61x1] is only being
activated in case that a switching element has taken a definite position. A definite
position is determined by evaluating both, feedback event ON-Feedback [E60x0] and
feedback event OFF-Feedback [E60x1]. To activate position event CLOSED [E61x1],
feedback event OFF-Feedback [E60x1] has to be deactivated, and
feedback event ON-Feedback [E60x0] has to be activated.
E61x2 OUT OPEN

Position event for truck withdrawn and CB off position of operating device combination
Truck/Circuit breaker (CB); the position event OUT OPEN [E61x2] is only being
activated in case that both, the truck and the CB have taken its definite position. A
definite position is determined by evaluating both, feedback events of the truck OUT-
Feedback [E60x2] and IN-Feedback [E60x3], and feedback events of the CB OFF-
Feedback [E60x1] and ON-Feedback [E60x0]. To activate position event OUT OPEN
[E61x2],
feedback event OUT-Feedback [E60x2] of the truck has to be activated, and
feedback event IN-Feedback [E60x3] of the truck has to be deactivated, and
feedback event OFF-Feedback [E60x1] of the circuit breaker has to be activated,
and
feedback event ON-Feedback [E60x0] of the circuit breaker has to be deactivated.
E61x3 OUT CLOSED

Position event for truck withdrawn and CB on position of operating device combination
Truck/Circuit breaker (CB); the position event OUT CLOSED [E61x3] is only being
activated in case that both, the truck and the CB have taken its definite position. A
definite position is determined by evaluating both, feedback events of the truck OUT-
Feedback [E60x2] and IN-Feedback [E60x3], and feedback events of the CB OFF-
Feedback [E60x1] and ON-Feedback [E60x0]. To activate position event OUT
CLOSED [E61x3],
feedback event OUT-Feedback [E60x2] of the truck has to be activated, and
feedback event IN-Feedback [E60x3] of the truck has to be deactivated, and
feedback event OFF-Feedback [E60x1] of the circuit breaker has to be
deactivated, and
feedback event ON-Feedback [E60x0] of the circuit breaker has to be activated.
E61x4 EARTH
Position event for earthing position of a 3-position switch; the position event EARTH
[E61x4] is only being activated in case that 3-position switch has taken a definite
position. A definite position is determined by evaluating its feedback events EARTH ON-
Feedback [E60x4] and EARTH OFF-Feedback [E60x5] as well as ON-Feedback
[E60x0] and OFF-Feedback [E60x1]. To activate position event EARTH [E61x4],
feedback event EARTH OFF-Feedback [E60x5] has to be deactivated, and
feedback event EARTH ON-Feedback [E60x4] has to be activated and
feedback event ON-Feedback [E60x0] has to be deactivated.
E61x5 Diff (Moving)

Position event for Difference position; the position event DIFF (Moving) [E61x5] is only
being activated in case that a switching elelement has taken an undefinite position. An
undefinite position is determined by evaluating both, feedback event ON-Feedback

User Manual
[E60x0] and feedback event OFF-Feedback [E60x1]. To activate position event DIFF
(Moving) [E61x5],
feedback event OFF-Feedback [E60x1] has to be deactivated, and
feedback event ON-Feedback [E60x0] has to be deactivated as well.
E61x6 FAIL
Position event for failure position; the position event FAIL [E61x6] is only being
activated in case that a switching elelement has taken an undefinite position. An
undefinite position is determined by evaluating both, feedback event ON-Feedback
[E60x0] and feedback event OFF-Feedback [E60x1]. To activate position event FAIL
[E61x6],
feedback event ON-Feedback [E60x0] has to be activated as well.
NOTE: Physically, such position state is impossible; however, a defective (stuck)

auxiliary contact of the switching element could cause this failure event.
E61x7 OPEN ERROR

Error-event for undefined switch-off of a switching element; as soon as the activated
supervision mode (see parameter: Check OPEN ERROR [P]) detects a switch-off of a
switching element caused by other reason than protection trip or a given control
command by SYMAP-Compact(+), error-event OPEN ERROR [E61x7] is being
activated.
NOTE: The activated error-event OPEN ERROR [E61x7] can be deactivated by a

hotkey of the touchscreen or a function key of the frontplate, if the setting
option ACK is assigned to the keys.
Reset of the activated error-event is also possible
by the communication command ACK of the different data protocols and
by function Remote ACK [P5951].

User Manual
3.9.3 Control & Interlocking
Depending on the SYMAP-Compact(+) device variant up to 8 switching elements (SE) can be

configured individually according to control and interlocking functions.
NOTE: Submenus for switching elements SE6 to SE8 are available for SYMAP-Compact+ in
cooperation with extension board system EBS only!
For this, SYMAP-Compact+ order code requires selection of ordering option:
Indirect control: 8 SE; field interlocking 8 SE; SYMAP-Compact+ only and via
additional extension board system EBS!
of ordering identifier:
Control & Interlocking.
Figure 3-288 Control & Interlocking of switching devices
Each of the switching elements (SE) can be configured individually according to its control
timing as well as to its switching direction:
Timing: Settings for activation duration, activation-delay and postactivation of
corresponding binary output (BO)
Closing: Switching direction: OFF to ON
Opening: Switching direction: ON to OFF
Extending: Draw-out of the truck while CB is open
Retracting: Insertation of the truck while CB is open
Earthing: Switching direction of 3-postion switch: OFF to EARTHED
Unearthing: Switching direction of 3-postion switch: EARTHED to OFF

User Manual
Figure 3-289 SE 1 to SE 8 Configuration of switching operation conditions

User Manual
Timing (control timing) and display representation of SE symbol

Activation duration, activation-delay and postactivation of the corresponding binary output for
controlling the drives of a switching element can be set by the three control parameters listed
below. Moreover, the indication mode based on a 1-bit feedback for representing the SE symbol
on the display can be acitvated.
Figure 3-290 Control timing and display representation of SE symbol
Main Menu\Parameters\ SWITCHGEAR CONTROL\SE 1
Timing
P/E System Description Value Unit (Setting range)

P Control time (fail event) 0 s 0,0 6500,0
P ->OPEN Control fixed delay 0 s 0,0 6500,0
P OPEN-> Control fixed delay 0 s 0,0 6500,0
P Show last position if control - /
Figure 3-291 Control timing and display representation of SE symbol Parameters [P]
Following parameters are individually available for each switching element.
P Control time (fail event)

Maximum control time (activation duration) to switch on/off the switching element; as
soon as a control command is given, the assigned binary output is activated for the
duration of time set by parameter Control time (fail event) [P].
In case that there is no final position feedback of switching element no. 1 within the set
maximum control time, the assigned fail-event Control fail event [E6217] is activated
P -> OPEN Control fixed delay

Open control delay time (activation delay) to switch on/off the switching element; as
soon as a control command is given, the activation of the assigned binary output is
delayed for the duration of time set by parameter
->OPEN Control fixed delay [P]. When open control delay time has run down, the
binary output is being activated for the duration of time set by parameter Control time
(fail event) [P] at maximum.
maximum control time, the assigned fail-event Control fail event [E6217] is activated.

User Manual
P OPEN-> Control fixed delay

Extended control time (postactivation) to switch on/off the switching element; in case that
there is no final position feedback of switching element no. 1 within the set maximum
control time, the deactivation of the assigned binary input is delayed for the duration of
time set by parameter OPEN -> Control fixed delay [P]. During this time fail -event
Control fail event [E6217] remains deactivated.
extended control time, the assigned fail-event Control fail event [E6217] is activated.
Display representation of SE symbol
P SE symbol 1-bit feedback

Indication mode for display of static symbol of switching element during switching
operating; the indication mode can be selected in case that there is only one signal wire
for position feedback (auxiliary contact of switching element: normal open).
If activated, the indication mode will remain showing the previous switch position until
the switching element has reached the final position For instance, when switching
direction is CLOSED to OPEN, then, whilst differential position the device display still
shows position CLOSED. When final position (OPEN) is gained before the control
supervision time set by parameter Control time (fail event) [P] has run down, device
display will show symbol OPEN.
In case of a wire-break or a stuck auxiliary contact, device display shows symbol FAIL.

User Manual
Control & interlocking logic

Parameter setting can be done individually according to the switching direction of the switching
element.
Closing direction
Figure 3-292 Configuration of SE closing direction
Opening direction
Figure 3-293 Configuration of SE opening direction

User Manual
Extending direction
Figure 3-294 Configuration of SE extending direction
Retracting direction
Figure 3-295 Configuration of SE retracting direction
Earthing direction
Figure 3-296 Configuration of SE earting direction

User Manual
Unearthing direction
Figure 3-297 Configuration of SE unearthing direction
Main Menu\Parameters\ SWITCHGEAR CONTROL\Control & Interlocking\SE1
Closing
P System Description Value Unit (Setting range)

Control logic (input elements)
P 01 0 (event) 0 9999
P 02 0 (event) 0 9999
P 03 0 (event) 0 9999
P 04 0 (event) 0 9999
P 05 0 (event) 0 9999
P 06 0 (event) 0 9999
P 07 0 (event) 0 9999
P 08 0 (event) 0 9999
P User description (editable control logic event) Control event - (1 16 characters)
Interlocking logic
P Enable OFF - OFF/ON
P Logic 0 (event) 0 9999
P Bypass 0 (event) 0 9999
P User description (editable interlock logic event) Interlock error event - (1 16 characters)
Figure 3-298 Control & Interlocking logics Parameters [P]
Control & Interlock event numbers

E System Description SE 1 SE 2 SE 3 SE 4 SE 5 SE 6 SE 7 SE 8
Control logic events
E OPEN->CLOSED 6210 6220 6230 6240 6250 6260 6270 6280
E CLOSED->OPEN 6211 6221 6231 6241 6251 6261 6271 6281
E OPEN->OUT 6212 6222 6232 6242 6252 6262 6272 6282
E OUT->OPEN 6213 6223 6233 6243 6253 6263 6273 6283
E OPEN->EARTH 6214 6224 6234 6244 6254 6264 6274 6284
E EARTH->OPEN 6215 6225 6235 6245 6255 6265 6275 6285
E Control fail event 6217 6227 6237 6247 6257 6267 6277 6287
Interlock logic events
E Interlock error event 6216 6226 6236 6246 6256 6266 6276 6286
Figure 3-299 Control & Interlocking Events [E]

User Manual
Control logic
P 01
to
P 08
Input elements (events) of the Control logic to activate the switching operation for the
switching direction of the selected switching element (SE x); to this parameter events are
to be assigned to set preconditions for triggering the switching operation for individual
switching direction.
Interlocking logic
P Enable
This parameter activates/deactivates interlocking logic by following setting options:
OFF: interlocking logic is deactivated,
ON: interlocking logic is activated.
P Logic
Activation of the configurated logic for switching conditions of the switching element to
be set by programmable logic control (PLC); the output event of the logical function,
which determines the switching conditions of the selected switching direction of the
selected switching element, can be activated for module Interlocking by any active
Logic [P]. Activation of the logical function for switching conditions is only effective,
however, as long as the assigned event is active. If the event turns inactive, the output
event of the logical function is blocked.
If switching conditions for the selected switching direction of the selected switching
element are not required, set this parameter to 0.
NOTE: Switching conditions of a switching element is equal to the negated form (acc.
to Boolean algebra) of its Interlocking conditions!
Interlocking condition:
Defined conditions which have to be fulfilled to prohibit closing or opening of a
switching element, e.g. the CB.
Switching conditions:
Defined conditions which have to be fulfilled to allow closing or opening of a
switching element, e.g. the CB.
One can use a logical equation (Boolean algebra) to express defined
interlocking conditions. Moreover, negating a logical equation for interlocking
conditions will result in switching conditions.
P Bypass
Blocking of the configurated logic for switching conditions of the switching element to
be set by programmable logic control (PLC); the output event of the logical function,
which determines the switching conditions of the selected switching direction of the
selected switching element, can be blocked for module Interlocking by any active
parameter Bypass [P]. Blocking is only effective, however, as long as the assigned
event is active. If the event turns inactive, the output event of the logical function for
switching conditions is effective again.
If blocking of the configurated logic for switching conditions of the selected switching
direction of the selected switching element not required, set this parameter to 0.

User Manual
User description (Text editor for editable user description of events)
P6210 (Control event)

Event (via text editor) to indicate a given control command to the corresponding biary
output; 16 characters at maximum
P6216 (Interlock error event)

Event (via text editor) to indicate an interlocking infringement; 16 characters at maximum

User Manual
3.9.4 Counter (Counter and events of control operations)
Main Menu\Parameters\ SWITCHGEAR CONTROL\
Counter
Parameters SE 1 SE 2 SE 3 SE 4 SE 5 SE 6 SE 7 SE 8
Closed->OPEN cycles 065000 065000 065000 065000 065000 065000 065000 065000
Closed->OPEN cycles max 065000 065000 065000 065000 065000 065000 065000 065000
OPEN->EARTH cycles 065000 065000 065000 065000 065000 065000 065000 065000
OPEN->EARTH cycles max 065000 065000 065000 065000 065000 065000 065000 065000
Breaker Counter Events
Closed->OPEN cycles max 6311 6321 6331 6341 6351 6361 6371 6381
OPEN->EARTH cycles max 6313 6323 6333 6343 6353 6363 6373 7383
Figure 3-300 Counter functions of control operations
Breaker Counter parameters of control operation counter

Following parameters are individually available for each of 8 switching elements.
P Closed->OPEN cycles
Set counting start value for all the switching operations of a switching element with
switching direction CLOSED to OPEN; this counter is being incremented, if switching
operation was conducted for the switching direction CLOSED to OPEN.
P Closed->OPEN cycles max

Maximum set counting limit for all the switching operations of a switching element with
switching direction CLOSED to OPEN; as soon as the counter has reached the set
counting limit, the event Closed->OPEN cycles max [E63x1] is activated.
P OPEN->EARTH cycles
Set counting start value for all the switching operations of a 3-position switch with
switching direction OPEN to EARTH; this counter is being incremented, if switching
operation was conducted for the switching direction OPEN to EARTH.
P OPEN->EARTH cycles max

Maximum set counting limit for all the switching operations of a 3-position switch with
switching direction OPEN to EARTH; as soon as the counter has reached the set
counting limit, the event OPEN->EARTH cycles max [E63x3] is activated.
Event description:
Breaker Counter Events events of control operation counter

Following events are individually available for each of 8 switching elements.
E63x1 Closed->OPEN cycles max

As soon as the set counting limit for all the switching operation with switching direction
CLOSED to OPEN set by parameter Closed->OPEN cycles max [P] has been
reached, event Closed->OPEN cycles max [E63x1] is activated.
NOTE: Event [E63x1] can be used for indicating the need for revising the primary
contacts of the switching element.
E63x3 OPEN->EARTH cycles max

User Manual
As soon as the set counting limit for all the switching operation with switching direction
OPEN to EARTH set by parameter OPEN->EARTH cycles max [P] has been
reached, event OPEN->EARTH cycles max [E63x3] is activated.
NOTE: Event [E63x3] can be used for indicating the need for revising the primary
contacts of the switching element.

User Manual
3.10 RECORDER
3.10.1 Fault Recorder
Main Menu\ Parameters\RECORDER\
Fault recorder

P8061 Trigger event 0 event 0 9999
Figure 3-301 Fault recorder Parameter [P]
P8061 Function
Fault recording can be activated by any active event (activation-event) assigned to
parameter P[8061] or by any active trip-event. For activation via activation-event the
number related to this event has to be assigned to parameter Function. At the time the
trigger-event is being activated, the rising signal edge of the trigger-event starts the
recording (snapshot of the measuring values).
If fault recording is not required, set this parameter to 0.
3.10.2 Disturbance Recorder
NOTE: Function Disturbance Recorder is not available for hardware version HW v1-1.x!
For function Disturbance recorder the device is equipped with a volatile 20 MB RAM-memory
for buffering the measuring data. That RAM-memory can be devided in up to 10 idividual
memory sections (buffers for recorded data) by parameter Number of internal buffers [P8002].
Each buffer provides the following states:
ready
recording
data
backup
inactive
When there are two buffers adjusted: Number of internal buffers [8002] = 2, buffer 1 assumes
state ready; whereas buffer 2 assumes state inactive.
NOTE: At the time, one of the buffers claims state ready, event DiREC Ready [E8000] is
being activated.
Then, the disturbance recorder first saves the recorded data of each sample in buffer 1. When
memory capacity limit of buffer 1 is reached, the oldest recorded sample of buffer 1 will be
overwritten according to the FIFO-principle.
As soon as:
one of the assigned trigger-events (see parameters Trigger [P8018] to [P8027]) is
activated or
a manual trigger of the disturbance recorder takes place by operating hotkey Trigger
Snapshot via touchscreenm (menu: Main Menu/Recorder/Disturbance recorder),

User Manual
the state of buffer 1 changes over from ready to recording (recording mode), and event
DiREC Recording [E8001] is being activated.
In case a pre-trigger-time was taken into account by the set value of parameter Pre-trigger
time [P8007], the point of time of trigger does not represent the point of time of recording.
According to the set pre-trigger-time the recording duration is calculated which is for recording
data before the point of time of activating the trigger-event. Thus, the date of recording start is
befor the date of triggering the recorder.
The maximum recording time results from the size of the buffer memeory, the sample rate, and
the data volume of each sample.
Example: Size of buffer memory = 20 MB / 2

= 10 MB
= 10485760 B
Sample rate (dep. on net frequency) = 50Hz * 36 Abtastungen pro Periode
= 1800 Abtastungen/s
Data volume of one sample (Sample width = Standard) = 92 B
=> Max. recording time = 10485760 B / 1800 Hz / 92 B
= 63,31s
Maximum recording time can be reduced by parameter Recording time [P8006].
As long as the trigger-event is activated, recording is for the set recording time. In case that
this time has not run down and the trigger-event becomes inactive, recording duration is
according to the recording time-after-trigger set by parameter Follow-up time [P8008] or the
recording time-after-manual trigger set by parameter Follow-up time (manual) [P8009].
When recording has finished the state of buffer 1 changes from recording to data (waiting
mode), and event DiREC Recording [E8001] is being deactivated. Hence follows, that buffer 1
contains recorded data which are prepared to be stored in a non-volatile manner on the memory
of SD-card.
Subsequently, function disturbance recorder tries buffer 1 to assume state ready. Hereby,
the following cases have to be taken into account:
Table 3-27 Disturbance recorder changes of states
Actual state Follow-up state

inactive ready
data + Parameter Overwrite = ON ready
data + Parameter Overwrite = OFF data
backup backup
Only if buffer 1 gains state ready, the disturbance recorder is able to processanother active
trigger-event; otherwise the new active trigger-event is being ignored.
As promptly as practicable, copying of data from buffer 1 to the memory of SD card will start.
Depending on the recording time and processor workload, transmitting data could last up to
several minutes. At the time the copy process is started buffer 1 assumes state backup, and
event DiREC Backup [E8003] is being activated.
After copy process has finished buffer 1 assumes state inactive, and event [E8003] is being
deactivated.
NOTE: At the time, the memory of the SD-Card is fully occupied, event DiREC Full memory
[E8004] is being activated.
In case that there is no SD-card available, the Event DiREC No memory card

User Manual
At the time, writing/reading the memory of the SD-card fails for any reason, event
DiREC Memory error [E8006] is being activated.
At the time, a CRC error of a recorded file is indicated, event DiREC File error
Main Menu\ Parameters\RECORDER\
Disturbance recorder

General
P8001 Sample width Standard - Standard/Development
P8002 Number of internal buffers 5 - 1 10
P8004 Overwrite OFF - ON/OFF
P8006 Recording time 2,0 % 0,1 126,0
P8007 Pre-trigger time 25 % 0 100
P8008 Follow-up time 25 % 0 100
P8009 Follow-up time(manual) 25 % 0 100
Trigger events
P8018 Trigger #1 0 event 0 9999
Recording events
P8028 Event #1 9999 event 0 9999
P8029 Event #2 9999 event 0 9999
P8030 Event #3 9999 event 0 9999
P8031 Event #4 9999 event 0 9999
P8032 Event #5 9999 event 0 9999
P8033 Event #6 9999 event 0 9999
P8034 Event #7 9999 event 0 9999
P8035 Event #8 9999 event 0 9999
P8036 Event #9 9999 event 0 9999
P8037 Event #10 9999 event 0 9999
P8038 Event #11 9999 event 0 9999
P8039 Event #12 9999 event 0 9999
P8040 Event #13 9999 event 0 9999
P8041 Event #14 9999 event 0 9999
P8042 Event #15 9999 event 0 9999
P8043 Event #16 9999 event 0 9999
P8044 Event #17 9999 event 0 9999
P8045 Event #18 9999 event 0 9999
P8046 Event #19 9999 event 0 9999
P8047 Event #20 9999 event 0 9999
P8048 Event #21 9999 event 0 9999
P8049 Event #22 9999 event 0 9999
P8050 Event #23 9999 event 0 9999
P8051 Event #24 9999 event 0 9999
P8052 Event #25 9999 event 0 9999
P8053 Event #26 9999 event 0 9999
P8054 Event #27 9999 event 0 9999

User Manual
P8055 Event #28 9999 event 0 9999

P8056 Event #29 9999 event 0 9999
P8057 Event #30 9999 event 0 9999
P8058 Event #31 9999 event 0 9999
P8059 Event #32 9999 event 0 9999
E8000 Di-REC-Ready - - -
E8001 Di-REC-Recording - - -
E8002 Di-REC-Buffer overflow - - -
E8003 Di-REC-Backup - - -
E8004 Di-REC-Full memory - - -
E8006 Di-REC-No memory card - - -
E8007 Di-REC-Memory error - - -
E8000 Di-REC-File error - - -
Figure 3-302 Fault recorder Parameter [P] and Events [E]
General parameters
P8000 Function
This parameter enables/disables disturbance recording function where:
OFF: disables or
ON: enables the disturbance recording function.
When disturbance recording function is enabled by parameter Function [P8000], then

event Di-REC Ready [E8000] is being activated.
P8001 Sample width

Operating mode for selecting measurement quantities which are to be recordered; this
parameter determines the group of measurement quantites recordered per sample.
Standard: measurement quantities according to the following table
(Development: only for manufacturers purposes)
Table 3-28 Analog data of disturbance recordings for parameter setting:

Samle width [P8001] = Standard
Measuring quantity Unit Description Remark

CT1_I1 A Phase current I1 of measuring input CT1
CT-GND1_IG A Ground current IG of measuring input CT-GND1
ID1 A Differential current of phase L1
ID2 A Differential current of Phase L2
ID3 A Differential current of L3
PT1_UL1E V Phase-to-earth voltage (L1 and earth) measured via PT1
PT-GND1_UG V ber PT-GND1 measured residual voltage
PT1_FL12 Frequency of phase-to-phase voltage U12 measured by PT1

User Manual

PT2_FL1N Frequency of phase-to-neutral voltage UL1 measured by PT2 G59 only
Parameter-Events Events of parameters [P8028] to [P8059]
BIO Events of binary inputs and outputs
Table 3-29 Binary data of disturbance recordings for parameter setting:

Samle width [P8001] = Standard
Event-Nr. Bezeichnung Beschreibung

E4010 Fct. 10 Binary input Funktion 10
E4028 Fct. 28 Binary input Funktion 28 NOTE: hardware version 1-1.0 only!
E4500 Shunt Trip 1 Binary output for protection trip
E4501 Shunt Trip 2 Binary output for protection trip
E4502 Lockout relay Binary output asLockout relais
E4504 Synchron ON Binary output for funktion Synchronising
E4506 Function 1 Binary output forFunktion 1
P8002 Number of internal buffers

Partitioning the RAM memory for buffering recorded data; the available RAM memory
(20 MB) can be devided into a maximum of 10 individual buffers.
The more buffers there are the more trigger-events can be processed. .
Example: If there were only one buffer (Number of internal buffers = 1) and recording
was finished successfully, the copy operation would have started to transmit
recorded data from the buffer to the SD-card. As consequence, any active
trigger-event could not start a further recording.
On the contrary, if there are two buffers (Number of internal buffers = 2), a
further active trigger-event would have started another recording via saving
data in the second buffer.
P8004 Overwrite
Release for overwriting the next buffer; in case that all buffers provide recorded data for
saving at the SD-card and another trigger-event becomes active, then overwriting the
memory section of the next buffer can be released, however, the next buffer has to
provide status data. Setting option:
OFF: deactivates the release for overwriting,
ON: activates the release for overwriting.

User Manual
At the time, overwriting of the next buffer starts, event DiREC Buffer overflow [E8002]
is being activated.
P8006 Recording time

Reduction of the maximum recording time; the maximum recording time which is given
by set value of parameter Number of internal buffers [P8002], can be reduced by
parameter [P8006].
P8007 Pre-trigger time

Recording time-to-trigger; this parameter determines the recording duration before the
point of time of activation:
by the corresponding trigger-event [P8018] to [P8027] or
by manual trigger via touchscreen (operating the hotkey Trigger snapshot).
P8008 Follow-up time

Recording time-after-trigger; this parameter determines the recording duration since the
point of time of deactivation of the corresponding trigger-event [P8018] to [P8027].
NOTE: The recording time-after-trigger set by parameter Follow-up time [P8008] is
only valid for the trigger-events assigned to parameters [P8018] to [P8027]!
P8009 Follow-up time (manual)

Recording time-after-manual trigger; this parameter determines the recording duration
since the point of time of deactivation of the manual trigger via touchscreen (operating
the hotkey Trigger snapshot).
NOTE: The recording time-after-trigger set by parameter Follow-up time (manual)
[P8009] is only valid for manual trigger via touchscreen!
Trigger events
P8018 Trigger #1
to
P8027 Trigger #10
Data recording via disturbance recorder can be triggered by any active event. For
triggering, the number related to this blocking event has to be assigned to parameter
[P2876]. There are up to 10 individual trigger-events, see parameters [P8018] to
[P8027].
If triggering the disturbance recording by any trigger-event is not required, set this
parameter to 0.
Recording events
P8028 Event #1
to
P8059 Event #32
Freely-parameterizable events as measuring data for the disturbance file; for additional
recording of binary channels there are up to 32 parameters available which can be used
to assign any of the available events.
If none of the binary channels as measuring data required for recording, set this
parameter to 0.

User Manual
3.11 PLC (Programmable logic control)
Table 3-30 Programmable logic functions

Number of available Number of
Type Event-No. Number of parameters
logic elements input elements
AND/OR 500 5000-5499 2-5 3
NOT (Inverter) 30 5500-5529 1 2
XOR (Exclusive OR) 20 5530-5549 2 2
Flip-Flop 20 5550-5569 2 4
Counter 20 5570-5589 4 6
Timer 80 5600-5679 1 6
Timer switch 20 5680-5699 - 6
3.11.1 Logic elements
3.11.1.1 AND/OR
By using selection button Selection the first of 500 available logic elements AND/OR can be
invoked. It carries the event-number [E5000].
Figure 3-303 PLC Logic element AND or OR
NOTE: Each one of the 500 logic elements AND/OR always provides equal parameters.
Hence, the parameter descriptions of the first logic element AND/OR represented

User Manual
P Enable
This Parameter activates/deactivates the logic element AND/OR invoked by selection
button Selection.
: do not tick the box => logic element is deactivated
: do tick the box => logic element is activated

Filter function for processing or not processing of the output event of the selected logic
element AND/OR in the event history; if selected (parameter setting by tick box), the
output event [E5000] is not being registered in the event history.
To activate/deactivate the filter function of a logic element, please use the tick box
: do not tick the box => the filter function of the logic element is not available
: do tick the box => the filter function of the logic element is available
P Type
Assignment of the logic scheme to the selected logic element AND/OR via the
AND: logic scheme accords to an AND gate
OR: logic scheme accords to an OR gate
P Number of inputs
Definition of the number of applied input elements of the selected logical element
AND/OR via the following setting options:
2: logic element provides two input elements,
3: logic element provides three input elements,
4: logic element provides four input elements,
5: logic element provides five input elements.
P 01
to
P 05
Assignment of any available event to an input element of the selected logic element
AND/OR; the number of available input elements of the logic element is being
determined by parameter Number of inputs.
Each available event can be used as an input element; therefore the event-number has
to be registered in the arrey besides the number of the input element.

Inversion of input elements and output-event

Input elements: parameters [P01] to [P05] and output-event e.g. [E5000] of logic elements
AND/OR can be inverted separately. By double-click to the icon of the logical element a new
windows appears in which inversion can be conducted.

User Manual
Figure 3-304 PLC AND/OR: inversion of input elements and output-event

User Manual
3.11.1.2 NOT (Inverter)
By using selection button Selection the first of 30 available logic elements NOT(Inverter) can
be invoked. It carries the event-number [E5500].
Figure 3-305 PLC Logic element NOT(Inverter)
NOTE: Each one of the 30 logic elements NOT(Inverter) always provides equal parameters.
Hence, the parameter descriptions of the first logic element NOT(Inverter)
P Enable
This Parameter activates/deactivates the logic element NOT(Inverter) invoked by
selection button Selection.

element NOT(Inverter) in the event history; if selected (parameter setting by tick box),
the output event [E5500] is not being registered in the event history.

User Manual
P 01
Assignment of any available event to the input element of the selected logic element
NOT(Inverter)


User Manual
3.11.1.3 XOR (Exclusive OR)
By using selection button Selection the first of 20 available logic elements XOR (Exclusive
OR) can be invoked. It carries the event-number [E5530].
Figure 3-306 PLC Logic element XOR (Exclusive OR)
NOTE: Each one of the 20 logic elements XOR (Exclusive OR) always provides equal
parameters. Hence, the parameter descriptions of the first logic element XOR
(Exclusive OR) represented below are described in the following in detail as
examples.
P Enable
This Parameter activates/deactivates the logic element XOR (Exclusive OR) invoked
by selection button Selection.

element in the event history; if selected (parameter setting by tick box), the output event
[E5530] is not being registered in the event history.

User Manual
P 01
and
P 02
XOR (Exclusive OR)


Input elements: parameters [P01] and [P02] and output-event e.g. [E5530] of logic elements
XOR(Exclusive OR) can be inverted separately. By double-click to the icon of the logical
element a new windows appears in which inversion can be conducted.
Figure 3-307 PLC XOR(Eclusive OR): inversion of input elements and output-event

User Manual
3.11.1.4 FlipFlops
By using selection button Selection the first of 20 available logic elements FlipFlop can be
Figure 3-308 PLC Logic element FlipFlop
NOTE: Each one of the 20 logic elements FlipFlop always provides equal parameters.
Hence, the parameter descriptions of the first logic element FlipFlop represented
P Enable
This Parameter activates/deactivates the logic element FlipFlop invoked by selection
button Selection.

element FlipFlop in the event history; if selected (parameter setting by tick box), the
P Store non-volatile

User Manual
Definition of storing behaviour for the current state of the output event [E5550] of
selected logic element FlipFlop after system reboot:
: do not tick the box => current state of output event [E5550] of selected logic
element is not being saved after system reboot
: do tick the box => current state of output event [E5550] of selected logic
element is being saved after system reboot
P Type
Assignment of the logic scheme to the selected logic element FlipFlop via the following
setting options:
RS: logic scheme accords to RS-FlipFlop; domination of input element
for resetting (R) the flipflop or
RS-EDGE: logic scheme accords to RS-FlipFlop; setting of the flipflop only in
by rising edge signal of the event assigned to the input element S or
SR: logic scheme accords to SR-FlipFlop; domination of input element
for setting (S) the flipflop or
T: logic scheme accords to Toggle-FlipFlop;setting of the flipflop
by rising or a falling edge signal of the event assigned to the input
element S
P 01
and
P 02
FlipFlop


Input elements: parameters [P01] and [P02] and output-event e.g. [E5550] of logic elements
FlipFlop can be inverted separately. By double-click to the icon of the logical element a new

User Manual
Figure 3-309 PLC FlipFlop: inversion of input elements and output-event

User Manual
3.11.1.5 Counter
By using selection button Selection the first of 20 available logic elements Counter can be
Figure 3-310 PLC Logic element Counter
NOTE: Each one of the 20 logic elements Counter always provides equal parameters.
Hence, the parameter descriptions of the first logic element Counter represented
P Enable
This Parameter activates/deactivates the logic element Counter invoked by selection
button Selection.

element Counter in the event history; if selected (parameter setting by tick box), the

User Manual
P Store non-volatile
Definition of storing behaviour for the current counter value of selected logic element
Counter after system reboot:
: do not tick the box => current counter value of selected logic element is being
reset to the value given by parameter Start value
: do tick the box => current counter value of selected logic element is being
saved after system reboot
P Count edge
Definition of counting behaviour to increment/decrement the counting value of the
selected logic element Counter; depending on the following setting options the counter
value is being incremented/decremented:
RISING: only in case of a rising edge signal of the event assigned to the input
element Count or
FALLING: only in case of a falling edge signal of the event assigned to the input
element Count or
ANY: only in case of a rising or falling edge signal of the event assigned to
the input element Count.
P Start value
Start value of the selected logic element Counter; after system reoboot
incrementing/decrementing of the counting value starts at the set value of parameter
Start value [P] (setting range: 0 to 65000).
P Count limit
End value of the selected logic element Counter; as soon as the counter has reached
the set value of parameter Count limit [P] (setting range: 0 to 65000), counting is being
stopped and the output event [E5570] is activated.
Input elements of logic element Counter

Each counter provides four input elements: Count, Block, Reset and Direction. Each
available event can be used as an input element; therefore the event-number has to be
registered in the arrey besides the designation of the input element.

P Count
Assignment of any available event to the input element Count of the selected logic
element Counter to increment/decrement the counting value; as soon as the assigned
event is active, the counting value is being incremented/decremented.
NOTE: The counting behaviour of the logic element Counter is set by parameter
Direction.
The counting behaviour for incrementing/decrementing depends on the signal
edge of the counting-event which is being set by parameter Count edge
P Block
Assignment of any available event to block counting procedure of selected logic element
Counter; counting procedure can be completely blocked by any active event. For
Block. Blocking is only effective, however, as long as the blocking event is active. As
soon as blocking is active, counting is stopped and the current counter value is saved. If

User Manual
the blocking event turns inactive, blocking is abandoned and counting is effective again
continuing with the saved value.
If blocking of counting is not required, set this parameter to 0.
P Reset
Assignment of any available event to block counting procedure and reset of counitng
value to the start value of selected logic element Counter; counting procedure can be
completely blocked by any active event. For blocking, the number related to this blocking
event has to be assigned to parameter Block. Blocking is only effective, however, as
long as the blocking event is active. As soon as blocking is active, counting is stopped
and the current counter value is saved. If the blocking event turns inactive, blocking is
abandoned and counting is effective again continuing with the saved value.
If blocking of counting and resetting of counting value is not required, set this parameter
to 0.
P Direction
Definition of the counting behaviour according to incrementing/decrementing the
counting value of the logic element Counter; depending on the setting option:
0: the counter is being incremented or
1: the counter is being decremented.

Input elements: parameters [P01] to [P04] and output-event e.g. [E5570] of logic elements
Counter can be inverted separately. By double-click to the icon of the logical element a new
Figure 3-311 PLC Counter: inversion of input elements and output-event

User Manual
3.11.1.6 Timer
By using selection button Selection the first of 80 available logic elements Timer can be
Figure 3-312 PLC Logic element Timer
NOTE: Each one of the 80 logic elements Timer always provides equal parameters. Hence,
the parameter descriptions of the first logic element Timer represented below are
P Enable
This Parameter activates/deactivates the logic element Timer invoked by selection
button Selection.

element Timer in the event history; if selected (parameter setting by tick box), the
P Function

User Manual
Definition of working priciple of the logic element Timer according to the following
setting options:
Delay: on-delayed/off-delayed activation of output event [E5600]; in case that
the event which is assigned to the input element 01 is activated and
delay time set by parameter ON time has run down, the output event
[E5600] is being activated. As soon as the event of the input element
has become deactivated and the delay time set by parameter OFF
time has run down, the output event is being deactivated.
Pulse-C: constant pulse duration (C); in case that the event which is assigned
to the input element 01 is activated, output event [E5600] is being
activated for the duration of time set by parameter ON time.
Pulse-CR: constant pulse duration (C) and possibility of restart (R); in case that
the event which is assigned to the input element 01 is activated,
output event [E5600] is being activated for the duration of time set by
parameter ON time. In case that during on-time the event of the input
element is activated once again (rising edge of event signal), the
output event [E5600] remains active for the duration of set on-time.
Pulse-I: pulse duration and possibility of interrupt (I);in case that the event
which is assigned to the input element 01 is activated, output
event [E5600] is being activated for the duration of time set by
parameter ON time. In case that during on-time the event of the input
element is deactivated (falling edge of event signal), the on-time is
stopped and output event [E5600] is being deactivated.
Pulses: pulses of defined duty cycle; in case that the event which is assigned
to the input element 01 is activated, output event [E5600] is being
activated for the duration of time set by parameter ON time. As soon
as the on-time has run down, the output event is being activated for the
duration of time set by parameter OFF time.
P ON time
Settable time delay (setting range: 0 to 65000ms/s/min/h) of an on-delayed activation of
the output event [E5600] of the logic element Timer
P OFF time
Settable time delay (setting range: 0 to 65000ms/s/min/h) of an off-delayed deactivation
of the output event [E5600] of the logic element Timer
P Unit
Unit of time for setting options of parameters ON time and OFF time;
ms: millisecond
sec: second
min: minute
h: hour
NOTE: The tolerance specification is valid for the following setting options of the
logical element Timer:
ms and sec: +/- 10 ms
min and h: +/- 1 s
P 01
Assignment of any available event to the input element of the selected logic element
Timer

User Manual

Inversion of input element and output-event

Input element: parameter [P01] and output-event e.g. [E5600] of logic elements Counter can
be inverted separately. By double-click to the icon of the logical element a new windows
appears in which inversion can be conducted.
Figure 3-313 PLC Timer: inversion of input element and output-event

User Manual
3.11.1.7 Timer switch
By using selection button Selection the first of 20 available logic elements Timer switch can
be invoked. It carries the event-number [E5680].
Figure 3-314 PLC Logic element Timer switch
NOTE: Each one of the 20 logic elements Timer switch always provides equal parameters.
Hence, the parameter descriptions of the first logic element Timer switch
P Enable
This Parameter activates/deactivates the logic element Timer switch invoked by
selection button Selection.

element Timer switch in the event history; if selected (parameter setting by tick box),
the output event [E5680] is not being registered in the event history.
P Mode

User Manual
Operating mode for termination of activating the output event [E5680] for a duration set
by parameter Pulse according to following setting options:
Day in month: output event [E5680] is being activated on a certain day of
each calendar month, at a specific time set by parameter
Time and for a specific duration of time set by parameter
Pulse.
Day of week: output event [E5680] is being activated on a certain day of
each week, at a specific time set by parameter Time and
for a specific duration of time set by parameter Pulse.
Weekday in month: output event [E5680] is being activated on a certain weekday
of each month, at a specific time set by parameter Time
and for a specific duration of time set by parameter Pulse.
P Day
Termination of the day of activating the output event [E5680] in dependence of the
setting options of parameter Modus and for a duration time set by parameter Pulse;
According to the selected mode for the logic element Timer switch, there are different
setting options of the parameter Day:
Modus = Day in month:
1: activation of output event [E5680] occurs on the 1rst calendar day of each
calendar month
:
31: activation of output event [E5680] occurs on the 31rst calendar day of each
calendar month
CAUTION: Choice of calendar day depends on the maximum number of days of the
different months!
Modus = Day of week:

Monday: activation of output event [E5680] occurs on Mondays
Tuesday: activation of output event [E5680] occurs on Tuesdays
Wednesday: activation of output event [E5680] occurs on Wednesdays
Thursday: activation of output event [E5680] occurs on Thursdays
Friday: activation of output event [E5680] occurs on Fridays
Saturday: activation of output event [E5680] occurs on Saturdays
Sunday: activation of output event [E5680] occurs on Sundays
Daily: activation of output event [E5680] occurs daily
Modus = Weeday in month:

1. Monday: activation of output event [E5680] occurs on the first Monday of
each month
:
1. Friday: activation of output event [E5680] occurs on the first Friday of
each month
2. Monday: activation of output event [E5680] occurs on the second Monday of
each month
:
2. Friday: activation of output event [E5680] occurs on the second Friday of
each month
3. Monday: activation of output event [E5680] occurs on the third Monday of
each month
:
3. Friday: activation of output event [E5680] occurs on the third Friday of
each month

User Manual
4. Monday: activation of output event [E5680] occurs on the fourth Monday of

each month
:
4. Friday: activation of output event [E5680] occurs on the fourth Friday of
each month
5. Monday: activation of output event [E5680] occurs on the fifth Monday of
each month
:
5. Friday: activation of output event [E5680] occurs on the fifth Friday of
each month
P Time
Specific time at which the output event [E5680] is being activated in dependence of the
selected mode and of the specific duration set by parameter Pulse; the set time is to be
registered as hours:minutes:seconds = 00:00:00
P Pulse
Specific duration of time delay (setting range: 0 to 65000ms) of the output event [E5680]
is being activated for, in dependence of the selected mode, selected setting option of
parameter Day and specific time set by parameter Time.

User Manual
3.12 PMS (Power management system)
The "Power Management System (PMS)" controls and ensures the provision of electrical
energy in a consumer system.
SYMAP-Compact(+) is an independent PMS with many features for managing and monitoring
of energy generation and distribution systems in low and medium voltage range. The functions
of the PMS are included in each SYMAP-Compact(+) device of a system and are not part of an
external controller. If one of the SYMAP-Compact(+) fails, the PMS function is maintained by
the remaining devices. Thus, the control of energy supply is independent of all other automation
systems and redundant in itself.
SYMAP-Compact(+) is suitable for the control of various equipment, such as:
Emergency power systems
Naval equipment (auxiliary diesel, emergency generator, shaft generators) and turbines
Because of its extensive features, it is the ideal solution for many applications:
Power Plant systems / Emergency power systems:
Monitoring of one or more utility grids by one device
Automatic start of the genset in case of mains failure (AMF)
Monitored control of engine start and stop phase
Group start of multiple gensets and synchronization during starting (dead-field paralleling )
Energizing of transformers or electric motors by generator during starting phase
Control of one or more mains breaker
Automatic synchronization and control of the generator breaker
Generator protection
Protection of the prime mover
Control of generator voltage and frequency
Balancing of active and reactive power in multi-generator operation
Separate load balancing on each bus section
Load shedding on overload
Automatic load transfer from generator to mains with synchronization
Test run parallel to the mains
Functions for mains decoupling according to VDE-AR-4105 / BDEW
Active and reactive power control in accordance with VDE-AR-4105 / BDEW

User Manual
Mains 1 Generator Generator Mains 2

1 2
G G
Bus bar 1 Bus bar 2
Bus tie
Consumer Consumer
Figure 3-315 Example: Emergency power system
Naval power systems / auxiliary diesel / emergency generator:

Monitoring of one or more bus bars by one device
Automatic start of the genset at Blackout
Automatic start of standby generators in case of malfunction
Blackout monitoring on each bus section
Monitored control of engine start and stop phase
control of one or more bus bar tie breakers
Automatic synchronization and control of the generator breaker
Generator protection
Protection of the prime mover
Control of generator voltage and frequency
Balancing of active and reactive power in multi-generator operation
Separate load balancing on each bus section
Load shedding on overload
Automatic load transfer from generator to shore connection with synchronization
Load-dependent starting and stopping of the gensets
Load reservation by large consumers
start-stop control according to priorities
Automatic changing of the start-stop priorities by hours of operation
Control and load balancing of shaft generators

User Manual
Emergency-
generator
G
Shaft- 1st Aux.- 2nd Aux.-
generator generator generator
G G G
Bus bar 1 Bus bar 2
Bus tie
Consumer
essential unessential Shore- Consumer
connection
Figure 3-316 Example: Naval power system

User Manual
3.12.1 Generator Control
3.12.1.1 General settings
Main menu\Parameters\POWER MANAGEMENT SYSTEM\Generator control\
General
P7000 Device number 1 - 1 127

P7001 Automatic mode 0 event 0-9999
P7002 Busbar connected 0 event 0 9999
P7003 Measurement source - - POWER_CT1/POWER_CT2
P7004 Max. frequency 52,00 Hz 0 99,99
P7005 Min. frequency 48.00 Hz 0 99,99
P7006 Max. voltage 100.0 % 0 999,9
P7007 Min. voltage 90.0 % 0 999,9
P7008 Max. load 100,0 % 0 999,9
P7009 Min. load 40,0 % 0 999,9
P7010 Max. power factor 1,00 - -0,99 1,00
P7011 Min. power factor 0,80 - -0,99 1,00
E7000 Manual mode - - -
E7001 Automatic mode - - -
E7004 Collective event: speed increase - - -
E7005 Collective event: speed decrease - - -
E7006 Collective event: voltage increase - - -
E7007 Collective event: voltage decrease - - -
Figure 3-317 Generator control General settings
P7000 Device number

Device assignment to the generator; device numbers can be given in a range between 1
and 127. For assignment, the number is to be set by parameter Device number
[P7000].
NOTE: Every device number may occur only once in the system!
P7001 Automatic mode

Event-controlled activation of the automatic mode for the local genset; while in automatic
mode the genset can be started and stopped automatically if the condition set in sub
menu Start/Stop (not available yet) is activated. All the controllers whose activation
parameter is set to Auto will be activated only via automatic mode.
The automatic mode can be activated by any active event. For activation, the number
related to the activation event has to be assigned to parameter [P7001]. Automatic mode
is only effective, however, as long as the assigned event is active. As soon as automatic
mode is active, event Automatic mode [E7001] is activated, and by using button
Auto/Man the user may switch between automatic mode and manual mode. If the
assigned event becomes inactive, automatic mode is abandoned and manual mode is
effective. Then, event [E7001] becomes inactive and Event Manual mode [E7000] is
activated automatically.
If automatic mode is not required (e.g. when using a shaft generator or turbine drive), set

User Manual
P7002 Busbar connected

Event-parameter to indicate CB position closed;matching of active and reactive power
only takes place for those generators which are connected (closed) to the same busbar
section. For indication, the number related to this event has to be assigned to parameter
[P2700].
NOTE: Preferably, one of the position event numbers [E6110], [E6120], [E6130],
[E6140], [E6150], [E6160], [E6170] or [E6180] should be used to indicate CB
position ON-Feedback.
If no event is assigned to parameter [P7002] (Busbar connected [P7002] = 0), then the
local generator does not contribute to power matching.
P7003 Measurement source

Selection of the measuring source for generator power; the active power controller and
the power factor controller can be assigned to a certain current measurement input (CT1
or CT2). Parameter [P7003] determines the current measurement input which will
provide measurement values as characteristic quantities to the directional power
protection:
POWER_CT1: measurement values by CT1, and the assigned voltage
transformer
POWER_CT2: measurement values by CT2, and the assigned voltage
transformer
To measure power direction correctly, the needed energy flow direction is to

Maximum frequency limit of the operating range of the generator voltage; to avoid any
damage of the genset or its powered electrical consumers the generator frequency must
not exceed this limit.
When the frequency of the measured generator voltage exceeds the maximum
frequency limit set by parameter Max. frequency [P7004], frequency increase is
abandoned by blocking the activation of events Collective event: speed increase
[P7004], Active power increase [P7123] and Frequency increase (P7183].

Minimum frequency limit of the operating range of the generator voltage; to avoid any
damage of the genset or its powered electrical consumers the generator frequency must
not fall below this limit.
When the frequency of the measured generator voltage falls below the minimum
frequency limit set by parameter Min. frequency [P7005], frequency decrease is
abandoned by blocking the activation of events Collective event: speed decrease
[P7005], Active power decrease [P7124] and Frequency decrease (P7184].

User Manual
P7006 Max. voltage

Maximum voltage limit of the operating range of the generator phase-to-phase voltages
U12, U23 and U31; to avoid any damage of the genset or its powered electrical
consumers the generator voltage must not exceed this limit.
When at least one of the three phase-to-phase voltages of the measured generator
voltage exceeds the maximum voltage limit set by parameter Max. voltage [P7006],
voltage increase is abandoned by blocking the activation of events Collective event:
voltage increase [P7006], Voltage increase [P7223] and Excitation increase [P7273].
NOTE: The maximum voltage limit of the generator phase-to-phase voltages is to be

set as a percentage of the nominal value of the chosen characteristic quantity
(phase-to-phase voltage). However, the characteristic value refers to the
nominal value of the phase-to-phase voltage to be set by parameter:
P7007 Min. voltage

Minimum voltage limit of the operating range of the generator phase-to-phase voltages
U12, U23 and U31; to avoid any damage of the genset or its powered electrical
consumers the generator voltage must not fall below this limit.
When at least one of the three phase-to-phase voltages of the measured generator
voltage falls below the minimum voltage limit set by parameter Min. voltage [P7007],
voltage decrease is abandoned by blocking the activation of events Collective event:
voltage decrease [P7007], Voltage decrease [P7224] and Excitation decrease
[P7274].
NOTE: The minimum voltage limit of the generator phase-to-phase voltages is to be

set as a percentage of the nominal value of the chosen characteristic quantity
(phase-to-phase voltage). However, the characteristic value refers to the
nominal value of the phase-to-phase voltage to be set by parameter:
P7008 Max. active power

Maximum limit Pmax of the operating range of the active power controller; to avoid any
damage of the genset or its powered electrical consumers the generator active power
must not exceed this limit.
When the measured active power of the local generator exceeds the maximum active
power limit set by parameter Max. active power [P7008], active power increase is
abandoned by blocking the activation of events Collective event: speed increase
[P7004], Active power increase [P7123] and Frequency increase [P7183].
NOTE: The maximum limit Pmax of the operating range of the active power controller is
to be set as a percentage of the nominal value of the chosen characteristic
quantity generator power (nominal value of the motor drive [kW]). This
nominal value is to be set by parameter:

User Manual

Here, it is that winding side relating to the active power measurement, which is


P7009 Min. active power

Minimum limit Pmin of the operating range of the active power controller; to avoid any
must not fall below this limit.
When the measured active power of the local generator falls below the maximum active
power limit set by parameter Max. active power [P7009], active power increase is
abandoned by blocking the activation of events Collective event: speed decrease
[P7005], Active power decrease [P7124] and Frequency decrease [P7184].
NOTE: The minimum limit Pmin of the operating range of the active power controller is


P7010 Max. power factor

Maximum limit PFmax of the operating range of the power factor controller; to avoid any
damage of the genset or its powered electrical consumers the generator reactive power
When the measured power factor of the local generator exceeds the maximum power
factor limit set by parameter Max. power factor [P7010], reactive power increase is
abandoned by blocking the activation of events Collective event: voltage increase
[P7006], Excitation increase [P7273] and Voltage increase [P7223].

User Manual
P7011 Min. power factor

Minimum limit Qmin of the operating range of the power factor controller; to avoid any
damage of the genset or its powered electrical consumers the generator reactive power
When the measured power factor of the local generator falls below the minimum power
factor limit set by parameter Min. reactive power [P7011], reactive power increase is
abandoned by blocking the activation of events Collective event: voltage decrease
[P7007], Excitation decrease [P7274] and Voltage decrease [P7224].

User Manual
3.12.1.2 Net configuration
If a busbar of a power system (network) is powered by several generators and divided into
several busbar sections (subnetwork) by sectionalizers (switching elements), then it is
necessary to adapt the energy of the generator(s) feeding to one busbar section to the
remaining load connected to that subnetwork.
When several generators are connected to one busbar section, these generators have to
contribute proportionally to provide the required feed-in power. The shared provision of power is
called load sharing, whereby power control of each generator is to be done by its individual
SYMAP-Compact generator control unit.
Establishing of the busbar sections is a dynamic process and depends on the positions of the
sectionalizers (see various operating modes of the power system).
For a load sharing process within one busbar section the following requirements should be met:
It has to be assigned an individual net number to each busbar section
The net number of a busbar section has to be set in all those SYMAP-Compact generator
control units which conrtibutes to provide feed-in power to the same busbar section
Recognition of the switch positions of all sectionalizers which contributes to built a busbar
section
Establishment of device-device-communication between all SYMAP-Compact generator
control units of the power system
Possibility to adapt the set net number of each SYMAP-Compact generator control unit
depending on the actual operating mode (net selection procedure)
Net configuration

Default/Net selector/
P7050 Net selection mode Default - Binary code/Automatic/
communication/Last command
P7051 Net default number 1 - 1 63
Net selector
P7052 Net selector enable by event 0 event 0 9999
P7053 Net number 1 - 1 63
Binary code net selector
P7054 Net binary selector enable 0 event 0 9999
P7055 Net binary code bit 1 0 event 0 9999
P7056 Net binary code bit2 0 event 0 9999
Figure 3-318 Net configuration Parameters [P]

User Manual
P7050 Net selection mode

Selection mehtod for net switching procedure; this parameter defines the working
principle for assiging the new net number (busbar section) to the SYMAP-Compact
generator control unit, whereby setting:
Default: assigns a fixed net number set by paramater "Net default
number [P7051] to the generator control unit. When there
is no sectionalizer in the power system, all generator
control units have to be assigned the same set net default
number by parameter [P7051].
Net selector: event-controlled net selection (see parameter Net selector
enable by event [P7052]) between the net default
number (see parameter [P7051]) and the pre-defined net
number set by parameter Net number [P7053]. This
method is suitable for applications with only one
sectionizer.
Binary code: event-controlled net selection by a binary-coded switch
(see parameter Net binary selector enable [P7054])
according to an event-controlled activation of individual bits
for binary coding (6-bit coding; see parameters Net binary
code bit x [P7055] to [P7060]). Via binary code it is
possible to select between 63 different net numbers.
Automatic: (not available yet!)
Communication: (not available yet!)
Last command: net selection occurs according to the latest given command
of the method Net selector or Binary code.
P7051 Net default number

Definition of the default net number for SYMAP-Compact; this parameter sets that
default net number:
the generator control unit is operating with, in case that parameter Net selecton
mode [P7050] is set to selection option Default, or
the generator control unit is operating with, in case that parameter Net selectoion
mode [P7050] is set to selection option Net selector and activation event assigned
to parameter Net selector enable by event [7052] is inactive, or
the generator control unit is operating with, in case that parameter Net selectoion
mode [P7050] is set to selection option Binary code and activation event assigned
to parameter Net binary selector enable [P7054] is inactive.
Net selector:
P7052 Net selector enable by event

Event-controlled net selection via net selector; this method can be activated by any
active event. For activation, the number related to this event has to be assigned to
parameter [P7052] and parameter Net selectoion mode [P7050] is set to selection
option Net selector. Activation of net selector is only effective, however, as long as the
assigned event is active.
If event-controlled net selection via net selector is not required, set this parameter to 0.

User Manual
P7053 Net number

This parameter defines the net number the generator control unit is operating within
case that the event which is assigned to parameter Net selector enable by event [7052]
is active. The net number set by parameter Net number [P7053] is only effective,
however, as long as the assigned event is active. When the event becomes inactive, the
generator control unit operates to the busbar section which is assigned the net number
set by parameter Net default number [P7051].
Binary code net selector
P7054 Net binary selector enable

Event-controlled release of net selection via binary code; release of the binary-coded net
selection can be activated by any active event. For activation, the number related to this
event has to be assigned to parameter [P7054] and parameter Net selection mode
[P7050] is set to selection option Binary code. Activation of net selector is only
effective, however, as long as the assigned event is active. This method is applicable for
net selection between more than two busbar sections.
If event-controlled release of net selection via binary code is not required, set this
parameter to 0.
NOTE: If:
either the event assigned to parameter [P7054] is inactive, or
parameter Net binary selector enable [P7054] = 0,
then the generator control unit operates to the net number set by parameter
Net default number [P7051].
P7055 Net binary code bit 1

First digit (first bit = 20) to establish the binary value (6 bits) which accords to one of 63
possible net numbers; binary states 0 and 1 of the first digit are represented by the
status of any active bit-event which is assigned to parameter [P7055]. Here, the bit-
event status active corresponds to binary state 1; bit-event status inactive
corresponds to binary state 0.
Parameter setting Net binary code bit 1 [P7055] = 0 is equal to the steady binary state
0 of the first digit; parameter setting Net binary code bit 1 [P7055] = 9999 is equal to
the steady binary state 0.
The dual digits of the 6 bits built the dual numbers and the addition of their decimal
numbers result in the net number.
Table 3-31 Binary coding for net numbers
Parameter no. Parameter name Dual number of the digit Decimal number of the digit
P7055 Net binary code bit 1 20 1
B P7057 Net binary code bit 3 22 4
e P7058 Net binary code bit 4 23 8
24
i P7059 Net binary code bit 5 16
B
Example: Determination of net number 23
Activation/deactivation of the bit-events corresponds to the switch positions
of the sectionalizers. Hence, via binary coding the binary states of the bit-
events represent dual numbers which accords to decimal numbers. Addition
of the decimal numbers results in that net number the generator control unit
shall operate with.

User Manual
Table 3-32 Binary coding of bit-events determined net number 23

Digit bit 1 bit 2 bit 3 bit 4 bit 5 bit 6
Binary value of the digit 20 21 22 23 24 25
Decimal value of the digit 1 2 4 8 16 32
Actual state of bit-event active active active inactive active inactive
Binary state of digit 1 1 1 0 1 0
Addition of decimal values 1+ 2+ 4+ 0+ 16 + 0
Decimal number = net number = 23
NOTE: When all digits are of binary state 0, the generator control unit
operates with net number 1!

See description of parameter [P7055], but with the corresponding binary value of the
second digit, see Table 3-32 Binary coding of bit-events determined net number 23

third digit, see Table 3-32 Binary coding of bit-events determined net number 23

fourth digit, see Table 3-32 Binary coding of bit-events determined net number 23

See description of parameter [P7055], but with the corresponding binary value of the fifth
digit, see Table 3-32 Binary coding of bit-events determined net number 23

sixth digit, see Table 3-32 Binary coding of bit-events determined net number 23

User Manual
3.12.1.3 Active Power Controller
If several energy recources contribute to provide electrical energy in a power system (mains
parallel operation or parallel operation in isolated operation), the control of active power (feed-in
power) provided by generators always becomes necessary.
As opposed to that, for isolated operation of a single genset (motor drive + generator) no load
sharing is possible, and as a result, control of active power is not necessary.
Parallel operation differentiates between the following, different applications:
Parallel operation of several gensets (isolated operation of more than two gensets)
Parallel operation: genset / grid
Parallel operation: genset / genset (isolated operation of two gensets)
Different kinds of parallel operation require different ways to distribute the load
(symmetrical/asymmetrical) to the applied energy recources. Hence, different methods for
controlling the active power of the generator(s) are required.
Parallel operation of several gensets (symmetrical load sharing)

For an uncontrolled genset, the load variation within an isolated operated network leads to the
following:
In case that consumer load increases, the generator active output power increases and
speed of the motor drive decreases, or
in case that consumer load decreases, the generator active output power decreases and
speed of the motor drive increases.
To avoid any speed changes the motor drive of the gensets are always equipped with a speed
controller. Parallel operation of such gensets would only be possible:
if a load balancing signal is available (symmetrical load sharing), or
if the genset(s) are equipped with an additional droop control (asymmetrical load sharing).
For parallel operation of gensets without load balancing signal the motor drives must be
equipped with additional droop controllers.
If the motor drive does neither provide a load balancing signal nor a droop controller, then droop
functionality can be established by the setpoint parameters of the SYMAP-Compact(+)
frequency controller (see chapter 3.12.1.4 Frequency Controller):
1. Droop [P7166],
2. Droop [P7169], or
3. Droop [P7172]
CAUTION: The parameters for droop control are not available yet!
By using a droop controller the genset is able to operate according to a static characteristic
curve which defines the linear dependence between machine rotation speed n and generator
output active power Pout.

User Manual
Idling speed
Full load speed
Pn Pout
Figure 3-319 Static characteristic curve (frequency droop) of a genset

The static characteristic frequency curve represents the defined speed decrease (proportionality
factor) by reference to idle mode and rated operation of the genset. However, in parallel
operation of several gensets with different static characteristic curves, load changes would lead
to different speed setpoints for the gensets. Hence, the generators are subjected to
asymmetrical loads.
To compensate asymmetrical loads for the generators in turn, each generator control unit needs
to be equipped with an active power controller. Each generator control unit measures the output
power of its local generator and measuring value of active power is to be transmitted via
CANBUS communication to the other generator control units operating with the same net
number. Based on all the measuring values of all generators each generator unit calculates the
average value as new setpoint for its active power controller.
By such pre-setting of the active power setpoints for the active power controllers, in parallel
operation the output power of the generators is adjusted to an certain level.
Mains parallel operation (asymmetrical load sharing)

Analogous to the isolated parallel operation of several generators the genset has to provide a
static characteristic curve also in mains parallel operation (e.g. decentral energy recources DER
such as block heat and power plants, wind turbines, turbine installations). Here, supply of
setpoints for active power controller of the local generator cannot base on calculating the
average power value as setpoint since the actual active power measuring values of the mains
energy recources are not available. Hence follows that a symmetrical load distribution is not
possible! Thus, supply of setpoints has to use different methods; for instance by:
a fixed setpoint supply (control of generator power to a fixed value, e.g. in case of base
load operation, peak load operation, or trial operation of emergency power systems), or
a network reference scheme (adapting the mains feed-in/output active power to a certain
value by controlling the generators active power (dynamic supply of setpoints) according to
the actual consumed load)
a zero reference scheme (adapting the mains feed-in/output active power to zero by
controlling the generators active power (dynamic supply of setpoints) according to the
actual consumed load)

User Manual
Parallel operation in isolated operation (asymmetrical load sharing)

Here, the local generator is in parallel operation with one ore more generators. Supply of
setpoints for the local generator is fixed.
In such operating mode the local generator feeds energy of fixed power value, and another
genset operating in parallel compensates any load changes by keeping its speed (frequency) at
a constant level. For this, the parallel operating genset has to be equipped with a speed
controller without additional droop controller, or with a speed controller with additional droop
controller and a frequency controller by the generator control unit
When several generators operate in parallel to the local genset, each of these generators has to
be equipped with a speed controller and a droop controller. Active power control of those
generators which are forseen for compensating the load changes can be designed for
symmetric as well as asymmetric load sharing.
Active power controller

P7100 Function OFF - ON/AUTO/OFF
P7101 Blocking local device 0 event 0 9999
P7102 Blocking local net 0 event 0 9999
P7103 Balanced mode 0 event 0 9999
E7100 Active power controller active - - -
E7101 Active power controller blocked - - -
Setpoints
P7105 1. Setpoint (default) 30,0 % 0 999,9
P7106 2. Setpoint enable 0 event 0 9999
P7107 2. Setpoint 60,0 % 0 999,9
P7108 3. Setpoint enalble 0 event 0 9999
P7109 3. Setpoint 100,0 % 0 999,9
P7110 4. Setpoint enable (communication) 0 event 0 9999
3-point controller
P7122 1. Interval time 2,0 s 0,1 999,9
P7123 1. Pulse duration at 100% deviation 2,0 s 0,1 999,9
P7124 1. Dead band 1,5 % 0 999,9
P7125 2. Settings enable 0 event 0 9999
P7126 2. Interval time 3,0 s 0,1 999,9
P7128 2. Dead band 1,0 % 0 999,9
E7123 Active power increase - - -
E7124 Active power decrease - - -
Active power limits
P7140 1. Limit enable 0 event 0 9999
P7141 1. Limt 100 % 0,0 999,9
P7143 2. Settings enable 60 % 0,0 999,9
P7145 3. Limit 30 % 0,0 999,9
E7140 Limit active - - -
E7141 Limit reached - - -
Frequency-dependent load reduction
P7146 Frequency-dependent load reduction enable 0 event 0 9999
P7147 Activation limt 50,2 Hz 0,00 99,99
P7148 Load slope per Hz 40 % 0,0 999,9
E7147 Frequency-dependent load reduction active - - -
Figure 3-320 Active power controller Parameters [P] and events [E]

User Manual
P7100 Function
This parameter activates/deactivates the active power controller, whereby setting:
OFF: deactivates the active power controller, or
AUTO: activates the active power controller automatically as soon as events
assigned to parameters Automatic mode [P7001] and Busbar
connected [P7002] becomes active, or
ON: activates the active power controller automatically as soon as event
assigned to parameter Busbar connected [P7002] becomes active.
When active power controller is activated by parameter [P7100] event Active power
controller active [E7100] becomes active.
P7101 Blocking local device

Blocking of the local active power controller in the local net (busbar section); the local
active power controller can be blocked by any active event. For blocking, the number
event Active power controller blocked [E7101] becomes active. If the blocking event
becomes inactive, blocking is abandoned and the local active power controller is
If blocking of local active power controller is not required, set this parameter to 0.
P7102 Blocking local net

Blocking of all the active power controllers in the local net (busbar section); all active
power controllers operating with the local net can be blocked by any active event. For
soon as blocking is active, all active power controller operating with the same net are
blocked (a blocking command of the local generator control unit is transmitted to all the
other, relevant generator control units via CAN 1 communication), and event Active
power controller blocked [E7101] becomes active in all the generator control units. If the
blocking event becomes inactive, blocking is abandoned and all active power controllers
are effective again. Then, event [E7101] is deactivated automatically.
If blocking of all the active power controllers in the local net is not required, set this
parameter to 0.
P7103 Balanced mode

Symmetric load sharing in the local net (balanced load distribution in the same busbar
section); symmetric load sharing can be activated by any active event. For activation, the
number related to this activation event has to be assigned to parameter [P7103].
Activation is only effective, however, as long as the assigned event is active.
As soon as symmetric load sharing is active, the consumed load is distributed to all the
active power controllers which are operating with the same net (busbar section). This
load sharing is performed symmetrically and accords to the rated power of the
generators. Because of the different levels of distributed load the setpoint for the local
active power controller has to be supplied dynamically. This means the setpoint is
cyclically calculated and transmitted to the local active power controller.
If the activation event becomes inactive, the control of the generator ouput power is
performed according to one of the following fixed pre-set setpoints (asymmetrical load
sharing, see parameters [P7105] to [P7110]).
If symmetric load sharing is not required, set this parameter to 0.

User Manual
P7008 Max. load

Maximum limit Pmax of the operating range of the active power controller; to avoid any
When the measured active power of the local generator exceeds the maximum active
power limit set by parameter Max. load [P7008], active power increase is abandoned
by blocking the activation of events Collective event: speed increase [P7004], Active
power increase [P7123] and Frequency increase [P7183].
NOTE: The maximum limit Pmax of the operating range of the active power controller is


P7009 Min. load

Minimum limit Pmin of the operating range of the active power controller; to avoid any
When the measured active power of the local generator falls below the maximum active
power limit set by parameter Max. load [P7009], active power increase is abandoned
by blocking the activation of events Collective event: speed decrease [P7005], Active
power decrease [P7124] and Frequency decrease [P7184].

User Manual
Setpoints (fixed setpoint supply)

Generally, the SYMAP-Compact(+) generator control provides an event-controlled switchover
of pre-set setpoints for the active power controller. There are up to four different pre-set
setpoints available. However, active power control for the local generator is only possible for the
following operating modes:
Mains parallel operation (asymmetrical load sharing), or
CAUTION: When setting the setpoint for active power control of the local generator the
following should be taken into account:
Mains parallel operation: here, the setpoint for the feed-in power of the local
generator must not exceed rated power at the network connection point!
Parallel operation in isolated operation (asymmetrical load sharing): the feed-
in power of the local generator must not exceed the consumed load; otherwise
busbar frequency would increase!
When several events for activating the different setpoints are simultaneously activated, the
following table gives conclusion about the priority of the setpoint supplied to the active power
controller:
Table 3-33 Priorities of setpoint supply to the active power controller
Status of activation-events
Active setpoint
2.Setpoint enable 3. Setpoint enable 4. Setpoint enable (Communication)
[P7106] [P7108] [P7110]
inactive inactive inactive 1. Setpoint (default) [P7205]
inactive inactive active 4. Setpoint (Communication) [P7110]
inactive active inactive 3. Setpoint [P7109]
inactive active active 3. Setpoint [P7109]
active inactive inactive 2. Setpoint [P7107]
active inactive active 2. Setpoint [P7107]
active active inactive 2. Setpoint [P7107]
active active active 2. Setpoint [P7107]
P7105 1. Setpoint (default)

Fixed setpoint for active power controller of the local generator; when symmetrical load
sharing (Balanced mode) is inactive, setpoint supply to the active power controller of
the local generator is according to the set value of parameter [P7105].
NOTE: The setpoint settings are to be set as a percentage of the nominal value of the
chosen characteristic quantity generator power (nominal value of the motor
drive [kW]). This nominal value is to be set by parameter:


User Manual

P7106 2. Setpoint enable

Event-controlled changeover of the active power controller to the second,
parameterizable setpoint; changeover can be activated by any active event. For
activation of changeover, the number related to this activation event has to be assigned
to parameter [P7106]. Activation is only effective, however, as long as the assigned
event is active. As soon as changeover of setpoint is active, the active power controller
operates according to the setpoint set by parameter 2.Setpoint [P7107]. If the
assigned event becomes inactive, activation of changeover is abandoned and the local
active power controller either operates according to the first setpoint or any other active
setpoint.
If changeover of the active power controller to the second, parameterizable setpoint is
not required, set this parameter to 0.
P7107 2. Setpoint
Second setpoint for the event-controlled changeover of the active power controller; when
event-controlled function asymmetrical load sharing (see Parameter Balanced mode
[P7103] is deactivated and event-controlled changeover of the active power controller to
the second setpoint (see parameter 2.Setpoint enable [P7106]) is active, the active
power controller operates according to the setpoint set by parameter [P7107]

P7109 3. Setpoint
P7110 4. Setpoint enable (Communication)

Event-controlled changeover of the active power controller to the setpoint given by
communication interface; changeover can be activated by any active event. For
event is active. As soon as changeover of setpoint is active, the active power controller
operates according to the setpoint given by the communication interface (Profibus or
Modbus only!). If the assigned event becomes inactive, activation of changeover is
abandoned and the local active power controller either operates according to the first
setpoint or any other active setpoint.
If changeover of the active power controller to the setpoint given by communication
interface is not required, set this parameter to 0.

User Manual
3-point controller
The Active power controller of SYMAP-Compact(+) is designed as a three step control
including the output states: active power increase and active power decrease. For this, the
following two control-events are provided:
Active power increase [E7123]: signal to external speed governer to increase machine
rotation speed (motor drive) => increase of output
active power of a single generator in mains parallel
operation, or several, parallel operating gensets in
isolated operation, and
Active power decrease [E7124]: signal to external speed governer to decrease machine
rotation speed (motor drive) => decrease of output
isolated operation.
Additionally, two further collective events are provided:
Collective event: speed increase [E7004]: this event becomes active when event(s)
[E7183] or/and event [E7123] is/are active,
and
Collective event: speed decrease [E7005]: this event becomes active when event(s)
which are individually OR-connected with both, the events of the frequency controller:
Frequency increase [E7183]: signal to external speed governer to increase machine
rotation speed (motor drive) => increase of generator
frequency for islolated operation (single genset or
several gensets in parallel operation), and
Frequency decrease [E7184]: signal to external speed governer to decrease machine
rotation speed (motor drive) => decrease of generator
several gensets in parallel operation),
and the event of the active power controller: [E7123] or [E7124].
Depending on the type of motor speed governer the control events have to be assigned to:two
different binary outputs of the SYMAP-Compact(+) (binary control, e.g. for naval applications)
REMARK: In view of the following statements the momentary control deviation (active power
difference Pset, act.) is given as a percentage P[%] of the nominal power Pn set
by parameter Power [P605].
The procedure of active control is to be described as follows:

1. Determination of the control direction:and control deviation P[%]:
Depending on the circumstance, wether the momentary active power is lower/higher than
the active setpoint, the active power controller needs to increase/decrease speed of the
motor drive.
a. Pact < Pset
The actual measured output active power Pact of the generator is less than the active
setpoint Pset; according to the measuring algorithm Pset,act = Pset Pact, it follows a
positive sign for the calculated active power difference:
P[%] > 0 => active power increase!

User Manual
b. Pact > Pset

The actual measured output active power Pact of the generator is higher than the active
setpoint Pset; according to the measuring algorithm Pset,act = Pset Pact, it follows a
negative sign for the calculated active power difference:
P[%] < 0 => active power decrease!
The speed of generator active power control is proportional of the level of control deviation
P[%]. Pulse times are calculated according to the amount of the control deviation P[%].
control-event which is to increase/decrease the generator active power.
Pulse times are recaculated immediately after the break time has run down. The break
time starts cyclically for a duration set by parameter 1. Interval time [P7122].
Depending on the activation of function Symmetrical load sharing (see parameter Balanced
mode [P7103], active power control is according to either a dynamic setpoint (symmetrical load
sharing) or a static setpoint (asymmetrical setpoint).
p2 p4 p7 p9 p11 p13 p14 p16 p18 p20 p23

p1 p3 p5 p6 p8 p10 p12 p13 p15 p17 p19 p22
p
1.Deadband [P7124]
pset 1.Deadband [P7124]
pact(t)
t
Counter Pulse time
[P7123]
1. Pulse duration at 100% deviation
0
tP-contr., pulse time 1
t
tP-contr., pulse time 8 tP-contr., pulse time 15
Counter Interval time

[P7272] 1. Interval time
0
t
tP-contr., Interval time tP-contr., Interval time tP-contr., Interval time
Active power decrease [E7124]
0
t
Active power increase [E7123]
0
t
Figure 3-321 Active power control dynamic setpoint supply (symmetrical load sharing)

User Manual
p2 p4 p7 p9 p11 p13 p14 p16 p18 p20 p23

p1 p3 p5 p6 p8 p10 p12 p13 p15 p17 p19 p22
p
Deadband [P7124]
pset
Deadband [P7124]
pact(t)
t
Counter Pulse time
[P7123]
0
tP-contr., pulse time 1
t
tP-contr., pulse time 8 tP-contr., pulse time 15

0
t
tP-contr., interval time tP-contr., interval time tP-contr., interval time
[E7124] Active power decrease
0
t
[E7123] Active power increase
0
t
Figure 3-322 Active power control static setpoint supply (asymmetrical load sharing)
P7122 1. Interval time

Defined break time tP-controller,interval time between the times of calculating the pulse times tP-
controller,pulse time x; the break time always triggers the cyclic calculation of the pulse time, and
P7123 1. Pulse duration at 100% deviation

Fundamental value T[P7123] for calculating the pulse time tP-controller,pulse time x; while active
power controlling, the fundamental value meets a defined pulse time which is needed to
equalize 100% of active power deviation referring to the nominal power Pn[%] (see
parameter Power [P605]).
Active power deviations less than 100% of nominal power Pn are considered by
individually calculated pulse times depending on the amount of the active power
difference P. As calculation approach, the ratio of the pulse time tP-controller,pulse time x to be
calculated to the fundamental value T[P7123] is equated with the ration of the measured
active power difference P to the maximum active power difference (Pn[%] = 100% Pn).

User Manual
tP-controller,pulse time x[s] / T[P7123][s] = P[%] / Pn[%]

= P[%] / 100%

=> tP-controller,pulse time x[s] = T[P7123][s] x P[%] / 100%
= 1. Pulse duration at 100% deviation [P7123] x P[%] / 100%
Example: Parameter 1. Pulse duration at 100% deviation [P7123] = 2s (typical set

value)

P[%] > 0
If the active power difference P is positive (Pact < Pset), event Active power
increase [E7123] is activated for the duration of the calculated pulse time
(speed increase).
P[%] < 0
If the active power difference P is negative (Pact > Pset), event Active power
decrease [E7124] is activated for the duration of the calculated pulse time
(speed decrease).

P[%] = 100%
An active power difference Pset; act = Pset Pact of 100% of the nominal power,
set by parameter Power [P605], will result in the calculated pulse time of:
tP-controller,pulse time x[s]= 2s.
P[%] = 1%
An active power difference Pset; act = Pset Pact of 1% of the nominal power,
set by parameter Power [P605], will result in the calculated pulse time of:
tP-controller,pulse time x[s]= 0,01s.

calculated pulse time is below the set value of the set break time (see
parameter 1. Interval time [P7122]) or if the control direction changes for the
next calculated pulse time.
P7124 1. Deadband
Deadband of the 3-point controller; when control deviation is below the set value of
parameter 1. Deadband [P7124], then events Active power increase [P7123] and
Active power decrease [P7124] are deactivated (blocked).
P7125 2. Settings enable

Event-controlled changeover of the 3-point controller to the second interval time and
pulse time; changeover can be activated by any active event. For activation of
changeover, the number related to this blocking event has to be assigned to parameter
[P7125]. This function can be used to activate an alternative dynamic controller
performance. Activation is only effective, however, as long as the assigned event is
active. As soon as changeover is active, the 3-point controller operates according to the
interval time and pulse time (see parameters 2.Interval time [P7126] and 2.Pulse
duration at 100% deviation [P7127]). If the assigned event becomes inactive, activation
of changeover is abandoned and the 3-point controller operates according to the 1.
settings.
If changeover of the 3-point controller to the second interval time and pulse time is not

User Manual

Second interval time which is used by the 3-point controller when the event assigned to
parameter 2 Settings enable [P7125] is active.

Second pulse time which is used by the 3-point controller when the event assigned to
P7128 2. Deadband
Second deadband which is used by the 3-point controller when the event assigned to

User Manual
Subfunctions Active power limits and Frequency-depending load reduction were

implemented in SYMAP-Compact(+) according to the following directives:
Power generation systems connected to the low-voltage systems distribution network;
VDE-AR-N-4105:2011-08
Generating plants connected to the medium-voltage network; BDEW Bundesverband der
Energie- und Wasserwirtschaft e.V.:2008-06
Active power limits

Remote-controlled limitation of active power output
In case of excess capacity in the power grid, grid operators are entitled to limit the active power
output of the connected power generation systems (grid parallel operation). Hence follows that
connected power generation systems (>100W) have to provide the possibility to reduce their
active power output in steps of at most 10% of their rated power.
The limit of the actual, maximum active power output will be required by the grid operator either
in steps or continuously, and refers to a percentage of the connected power generation
systems rated power.
When limit is required by steps, then the following tried and true limit values shall be applicable:
100%, 60%, 30% and 0%. The grid operator provides the signals for switching from one limit
value to another by potential free contacts. Signals are to be processed by SYMAP-
Compact(+) via binary inputs which provides the events for activating one of the pre-set active
power limits.
While a pre-set active power limit is active, the setpoint for the active power controller given by
the operator of the connected power generation system has to be limited to the required, active
limit. Here, wo different scenarios must be distinguished:
1. Pset,actual > Limit
If the actual setpoint is higher than the activated, required limit, then active power output
shall be reduced until its value meets the required limit.
2. Pset,actual < Limit
If the actual setpoint is lower than the activated, required limit, then control of active power
output still depends on the setpoint given by the operator of the connected power
generation system.
NOTE: When several switch-over signals for limit activation are activated simultaneously by
the grid operator, the active power output is controlled according to the lowest active,
required limit!
Table 3-34 Prioritization of active power limits
Activation-events of parameters:
active limit
1. Limit enable [P7140] 2. Limit enable [P7142] 3. Limit enable [7144]
inactive inactive inactive no limit active
active inactive inactive 1. limit active
inactive active inactive 2. limit active
inactive inactive active 3. limit active
active active inactive 1. limit active
active inactive active 1. limit active
inactive active active 2. limit active
active active active 1. limit active
Controllable, connected power generation systems have to launch active power output
reduction immediately, and finish within one minute. When required limit value is less than 10%
of rated power, the operator of the connected power generation system is entitled to disconnect
the power system from the grid.
P7140 1. Limit enable

User Manual
Event-controlled changeover of the active power controller to the first active power limit
set by parameter 1. Limit [P7141] to meet the required maximum active power output;
changeover can be activated by any active event. For activation of the first active power
limit, the number related to this activation event has to be assigned to parameter
soon as the first active power limit is active, the active power output of the connected
power generating system is limited to the set value of parameter [P7141] and event
Limit active [E7140] is activated. If the assigned event becomes inactive, event [E7140]
is deactivated unless the 2. limit or 3. limit is activated.
If activation of the first, parameterizable active power limit for the active power controller
is not required, set this parameter to 0.
P7141 1. Limit
Set value for the first limit for the required maximum active power output; as soon as the
event which is assigned to parameter 1. Limit enable [P7140] turns to active, the active
power output is limited to the set value of parameter [P7141].

Event-controlled changeover of the active power controller to the second active power
limit set by parameter 2. Limit [P7143] to meet the required maximum active power
output; changeover can be activated by any active event. For activation of the second
active power limit, the number related to this activation event has to be assigned to
parameter [P7142]. Activation is only effective, however, as long as the assigned event
is active. As soon as the second active power limit is active, the active power output of
the connected power generating system is limited to the set value of parameter [P7143]
and event Limit active [E7140] is activated. If the assigned event becomes inactive,
event [E7140] is deactivated unless the 1. limit or 3. limit is activated.
If activation of the second, parameterizable active power limit for the active power
controller is not required, set this parameter to 0.
P7143 2. Limit
Set value for the second limit for the required maximum active power output; as soon as
the event which is assigned to parameter 2. Limit enable [P7142] turns to active, the
active power output is limited to the set value of parameter [P7143].

Event-controlled changeover of the active power controller to the third active power limit
set by parameter 3. Limit [P7145] to meet the required maximum active power output;
changeover can be activated by any active event. For activation of the third active power
limit, the number related to this activation event has to be assigned to parameter
soon as the third active power limit is active, the active power output of the connected
power generating system is limited to the set value of parameter [P7145] and event
Limit active [E7140] is activated. If the assigned event becomes inactive, event [E7140]
is deactivated unless the 1. limit or 2. limit is activated.
If activation of the third, parameterizable active power limit for the active power controller
P7145 3. Limit
Set value for the third limit for the required maximum active power output; as soon as the
event which is assigned to parameter 3. Limit enable [P7144] turns to active, the active
power output is limited to the set value of parameter [P7145].

User Manual
Frequency-dependent load reduction while grid over-frequency

During undisturbed grid operation the frequency of the connected power generation system is
equal to the grid frequency: 50Hz or 60Hz.
CAUTION: Function Frequency-dependent load reduction is only applicable when nominal
frequency of the electrical power system is 50Hz!
When grid frequency exceeds the set value of parameter Activation limit [P7147] according to
BDEW directive: 50,2Hz, the actual active power output value is saved, and active power
control algorithm is launched to start load reduction. Here, wo different scenarios must be
distinguished:
1. Frequency increase
If grid frequency fGrid increases within the frequency range from 50,2 Hz to 51,5Hz, then
active power output is to be decreased according to the set slope value of parameter Load
slope/Hz [P7148].
2. Frequency decrease
If grid frequency fGrid decreases within the frequency range from 50,2 Hz to 51,5Hz, then
active power output is to be increased according to the set slope value of parameter Load
slope/Hz [P7148].
Gradient definition for increase/decrease of active power output is as follows:

fGrid
fGrid P
p
P = 40%PM/Hz
50,2Hz fGrid
p = 20 PM
50Hz
50,2Hz < fGrid <51,5Hz
P M: actual active power output when fGrid > 50,2Hz

p: frequency-dependent load reduction (active power output reduction)
FGrid: actual grid frequency
Figure 3-323 Frequency-dependent load reduction acc. to BDEW directive
NOTE: When grid frequency exceeds 51,5Hz the connected power generating system has to
be immediately disconnected from the grid!
When grid frequency falls below the set value of parameter Activation limit [P7147]
according to BDEW directive: 50,2Hz, increase of the active power output is performed
according to the set values of the active power controller (see BDEW directive: 10%
rated power of the connected power generating system per minute).
P7146 Frequency-dependent load reduction enable

Event-controlled activation of frequency-dependent load reduction; the frequency-
dependent load reduction can be activated by any active event. For activation, the
number related to the activation event has to be assigned to parameter [P7146].
Activation is only effective, however, as long as the assigned event is active. As soon as
frequency-dependent load reduction is active, event Frequency-dependent load
reduction active [E7147] becomes active. If the assigned event becomes inactive,
activation is abandoned. Then, event [E7147] is deactivated automatically.
If frequency-dependent load reduction is not required, set this parameter to 0.

User Manual
P7147 Activation limit

Set value for the limit to launch control algorithm for starting load reduction; when grid
frequency exceeds the set value of parameter [P7147] load reduction is to be performed
according to the set slope value of parameter Load slope/Hz [P7148].
P7148 Load slope per Hz

This parameter determines the relative increase/decrease of the active power output per
Hz referring to the active power value saved at the point of time when grid frequency had
exceeded set value of parameter Activation limit [P7147].

User Manual
3.12.1.4 Frequency Controller
If several energy recources contribute to provide electrical energy in an isolated operated power
system, frequency control of the generator(s) individually equipped with a droop controller
(static characteristic curve of machine rotation speed/output power) always becomes
necessary.
As opposed to that, for isolated operation of a single genset (motor drive + generator) the droop
controller can be neglected or switched off.It is the speed of the motor drive which obtains a
constant frequency along the whole range of consumed load. Hence, it is not necessary to
provide frequency control via SYMAP-Compact(+) .
Parallel operation of several gensets with (e.g. shaft generator)
Synchronisation process of local genset to another network

following:
In case that consumer load increases, the generator active output power increases and
speed of the motor drive decreases (= generator frequency decrease), or
in case that consumer load decreases, the generator active output power decreases and
speed of the motor drive increases (= generator frequency increase).
To avoid any speed changes the motor drive of the gensets are always equipped with a speed
if a load balancing signal is available (symmetrical load sharing), or
if the genset(s) are equipped with an additional droop control (asymmetrical load sharing).
equipped with additional droop controllers (static characteristic speed curve with proportionality
factor or droop).
frequency controller:
1. Droop [P7166],
2. Droop [P7169], or
3. Droop [P7172]
curve which defines the linear dependence between machine rotation speed n and generator
output active power Pout.

User Manual
Idling speed
Full load speed
Pn Pout
Figure 3-324 Static characteristic curve (voltage droop) of a genset

The static characteristic frequency curve represents the defined speed decrease (proportionality
factor) by reference to idle mode and rated operation of the genset.
To compensate any change of generator frequency depending on consumed load in turn,
each busbar section requires generator(s) equipped with a frequency controller. Each generator
control unit measures the frequency of its local generator voltage which is used for frequency
control.
Mains parallel operation (asymmetrical load sharing)

such as block heat and power plants, wind turbines, turbine installations). Since frequency is
determined by the mains, the SYMAP-Compact(+) frequency controller has to be deactivated.

genset operating in parallel compensates any load changes by keeping its speed (frequency) at
a constant level. For this, the parallel operating genset has to be equipped with a speed
controller.
be equipped with a speed controller and a droop controller. Active power control of those
generators which are forseen for compensating the load changes can be designed for
symmetric as well as asymmetric load sharing.
Since frequency is determined by the mains, the SYMAP-Compact(+) frequency controller has
to be deactivated.

User Manual

P7160 Function - - OFF/AUTO/ON
E7160 Frequency controller active - - -
E7161 Frequency controller blocked - - -
Setpoints
P7165 1. Setpoint (Default) 50,00 Hz 0 99,99
P7166 1. Droop 4,00 % 0 99,99
P7168 2. Setpoint 51,00 Hz 0 99,99
P7169 2. Droop 3,00 % 0 99,99
P7171 3. Setpoint 49,00 Hz 0 99,99
P7172 3. Droop 0,00 % 0 -99,99
3-point controller
P7182 1. Interval time 2,0 s 0,1 999,9
P7184 1. Dead band 1,5 % 0 999,9
P7186 2. Interval time 3,0 s 0,1 999,9
P7188 2. Dead band 1,0 % 0 999,9
E7183 Frequency increase - - -
E7184 Frequency decrease - - -
Figure 3-325 Frequency controller Parameters [P] and events [E]
P7160 Function
This parameter activates/deactivates the active frequency controller, whereby setting:
OFF: deactivates the active frequency controller, or
AUTO: activates the active frequency controller automatically as soon as events
ON: activates the active frequency controller automatically as soon as event
When active frequency controller is activated by parameter [P7160] event Frequency

Blocking of the local frequency controller in the local net (busbar section); the local
frequency controller can be blocked by any active event. For blocking, the number
event Frequency controller blocked [E7161] becomes active. If the blocking event
becomes inactive, blocking is abandoned and the local frequency controller is effective
If blocking of local frequency controller is not required, set this parameter to 0.

User Manual

Blocking of all the frequency controllers in the local net (busbar section); all frequency
controller operating with the local net can be blocked by any active event. For blocking,
blocking is active, all frequency controller operating with the same net are blocked (a
blocking command of the local generator control unit is transmitted to all the other,
relevant generator control units via CAN 1 communication), and event Frequency
controller blocked [E761] becomes active in all the generator control units. If the
blocking event becomes inactive, blocking is abandoned and all frequency controllers
If blocking of all the frequency controllers in the local net is not required, set this
parameter to 0.

User Manual

of pre-set setpoints for the frequency controller. There are up to four different pre-set setpoints
available. However, frequency control for the local generator is only possible for the following
operating modes:
Isolated operation of the local genset, or
Parallel operation in isolated operation
CAUTION: When setting the setpoint for frequency control of the local generator the following
should be taken into account:
Isolated operation of the local genset: here, the frequency setpoint of the local
generator must not exceed rated frequency of the genset (rated speed of
motor drive)!
Parallel operation in isolated operation: all generator controls of the gensets
have to be supplied with the same setpoint for their frequency controllers.
following table gives conclusion about the priority of the setpoint supplied to the frequency
controller:
Table 3-35 Priorities of setpoint supply to the frequency controller
Active setpoint
[P7167] [P7170] [P7173]

Fixed setpoint for frequency controller of the local generator; this parameter defines the
common frequency setpoint for all the generators which are operating with the same
busbar section.
(P7166 1. Droop)
Proportionality factor for speed decrease in dependence of generator output active
power; when the local genset is in parallel operation with several gensets or with the
grid, the motor drive of the local genset needs to be provided with a load balancing
signal or a droop controller (static characteristic frequency curve). If the local genset is
only equipped with speed controller, then the required static control function can be
established by the following frequency controller parameters of SYMAP-Compact(+):
1. Droop [P7166],
2. Droop [P7169], or.
3. Droop [P7172]
NOTE: The Proportionality factor for speed decrease is to be set as a percentage of

the nominal value of the chosen characteristic quantity speed (nominal value
of the motor drive) and as a percentage of the nominal value of the chosen

User Manual
characteristic quantity power (nominal value of the motor drive in [kW]). This


Function of droop parameters could only be applied when the speed setpoint
is supplied as an analog signal or via CAN 1 communication, and the supplied
setpoint is transmitted to the speed controller of the genset motor drive!

Event-controlled changeover of the frequency controller to the second, parameterizable
setpoint; changeover can be activated by any active event. For activation of changeover,
changeover of setpoint is active, the frequency controller operates according to the
setpoint set by parameter 2.Setpoint [P7168]. If the assigned event becomes inactive,
activation of changeover is abandoned and the local frequency controller either operates
according to the first setpoint or any other active setpoint.
If changeover of the frequency controller to the second, parameterizable setpoint is not
P7168 2. Setpoint
(P7169 2. Droop)

P7171 3. Setpoint
(P7172 3. Droop)

User Manual

Event-controlled changeover of the frequency controller to the setpoint given by
activation of changeover, the number related to this actiation event has to be assigned to
is active. As soon as changeover of setpoint is active, the frequency controller operates
according to the setpoint given by the communication interface (Profibus or Modbus
only!). If the assigned event becomes inactive, activation of changeover is abandoned
and the local frequency controller either operates according to the first setpoint or any
other active setpoint.
If changeover of the frequency controller to the setpoint given by communication

User Manual
3-point controller
The Frequency controller of SYMAP-Compact(+) is designed as a three step control
including the output states: frequency increase and frequency decrease. For this, the following
Frequency increase [E7183]: signal to external speed governer to increase machine
rotation speed (motor drive) => increase of generator
several gensets in parallel operation), and
Frequency decrease [E7184]: signal to external speed governer to decrease machine
rotation speed (motor drive) => decrease of generator
several gensets in parallel operation).
Collective event: speed increase [E7004]: this event becomes active when event(s)
and
Collective event: speed decrease [E7005]: this event becomes active when event(s)
which are individually OR-connected with both, the events of the active power controller:
Active power increase [E7123]: signal to external speed governer to increase machine
rotation speed (motor drive) => increase of output
Active power decrease [E7124]: signal to external speed governer to decrease machine
rotation speed (motor drive) => decrease of output
isolated operation,
and the event of the frequency controller: [E7183] or [E7184].
REMARK: In view of the following statements the momentary control deviation (frequency
difference fset, act.) is given as a percentage f[%] of the nominal frequency fn set
by parameter Frequency [P603].

1. Determination of the control direction:and control deviation f[%]:
Depending on the circumstance, wether the momentary frequency is lower/higher than the
active setpoint, the frequency controller needs to increase/decrease the generator
frequency.
a. fact < fset
The actual measured output frequency fact of the generator is less than the active
setpoint fset; according to the measuring algorithm fset,act = fset fact, it follows a positive
sign for the calculated frequency difference:
f[%] > 0 => frequency increase!
b. fact > fset
The actual measured output frequency fact of the generator is higher than the active
setpoint fset; according to the measuring algorithm fset,act = fset fact, it follows a

User Manual
negative sign for the calculated frequency difference:

f[%] < 0 => frequency decrease!
The speed of generator frequency control is proportional of the level of control deviation
f[%]. Pulse times are calculated according to the amount of the control deviation f[%].
control-event which is to increase/decrease the generator frequency.
f2 f4 f7 f9 f11 f13 f14 f16 f18 f20 f23
f1 f3 f5 f6 f8 f10 f12 f13 f15 f17 f19 f22
f
1.Deadband [P7184]
fset
1.Deadband [P7184]
fact(t)
t
Counter Pulse time
[P7183]
0
tf-contr., pulse time 1
t
tf-contr., pulse time 8 tf-contr., pulse time 15

0
t
tf-contr., interval time tf-contr., interval time tf-contr., interval time
Frequency decrease [E7184]
0
t
Frequency increase [E7183]
0
t
Figure 3-326 Frequency controller supply of static setpoint

User Manual

Defined break time tf-controller,interval time between the times of calculating the pulse times tf-

Fundamental value T[P7183] for calculating the pulse time tf-controller,pulse time x; while frequency
controlling, the fundamental value meets a defined pulse time which is needed to
equalize 100% of active power deviation referring to the nominal frequency fn[%] (see
parameter Frequency [P603]).
Frequency deviations less than 100% of nominal frequency fn are considered by
individually calculated pulse times depending on the amount of the frequency difference
f. As calculation approach, the ratio of the pulse time tf-controller,pulse time x to be calculated
to the fundamental value T[P7183] is equated with the ration of the measured frequency
difference f to the maximum frequency difference (fn[%] = 100% fn).
Tf-controller,pulse time x[s] / T[P7183][s] = f[%] / fn[%]
= f[%] / 100%

=> tf-controller,pulse time x[s] = T[P7183][s] x f[%] / 100%
= 1. Pulse duration at 100% deviation [P7183] x f[%] / 100%
value)

f[%] > 0
If the frequency difference f is positive (fact < fset), event Frequency increase
[E7183] is activated for the duration of the calculated pulse time (speed
increase).
f[%] < 0
If the frequency difference f is negative (fact > fset), event Frequency
decrease [E7184] is activated for the duration of the calculated pulse time
(speed decrease).

f[%] = 100%
An frequency difference fset; act = fset fact of 100% of the nominal frequency,
set by parameter Frequency [P603], will result in the calculated pulse time of:
tf-controller,pulse time x[s]= 100s.
f[%] = 1%
An frequency difference fset; act = fset fact of 1% of the nominal frequency, set
by parameter Frequency [P603], will result in the calculated pulse time of:
tf-controller,pulse time x[s]= 1s.

P7184 1. Deadband

User Manual
Deadband of the 3-point controller; when control deviation is less than the set value of
parameter 1. Deadband [P7184], then events Frequency increase [P7183] and
Frequency decrease [P7184] are deactivated (blocked).

settings.


P7188 2. Deadband

User Manual
3.12.1.5 Voltage Controller
If several energy recources contribute to provide electrical energy in an isolated operated power
system, voltage control of the generator(s) individually equipped with a droop controller (static
characteristic voltage curve of generator voltage/generator reactive power) always becomes
necessary.
As opposed to parallel operation, for isolated operation of a single genset (motor drive +
generator) the droop controller can be neglected or switched off.It is the generator voltage
control which obtains a constant voltage along the whole range of consumed load. Hence, it is
not necessary to provide voltage control via SYMAP-Compact(+) .
Parallel operation of several gensets operating with droop control
Synchronisation process of local genset to another network

following:
In case that consumer load increases, the generator reactive output power increases and
generator voltage decreases, or
in case that consumer load decreases, the generator reactive output power decreases and
generator voltage increases.
To avoid any voltage changes the generators of the gensets are always equipped with a speed
if a load balancing signal is available (symmetrical reactive load sharing), or
if the genset(s) are equipped with an additional droop control (asymmetrical reactive load
sharing).
equipped with additional droop controllers (static characteristic voltage curve with proportionality
factor or droop).
frequency controller:
1. Droop [Pxxxx],
2. Droop [Pxxxx], or
3. Droop [Pxxxx]
voltage curve which defines the linear dependence between generator voltage UGen and output
generator reactive power Qout.

User Manual
UGen
Idling voltage
Full load voltage
Qn Qout
Figure 3-327 Static characteristic voltage curve (voltage droop) of a genset

The static characteristic voltage curve represents the defined voltage decrease (proportionality
factor) by reference to idle mode and rated operation of the genset.
To compensate any change of generator voltage depending on consumed load in turn, each
busbar section requires generator(s) equipped with a voltage controller. Each generator control
unit measures the voltage of its local generator which is used for voltage control.
Mains parallel operation (asymmetrical reactive load sharing)

such as block heat and power plants, wind turbines, turbine installations). Since generator
voltage is determined by the mains, the SYMAP-Compact(+) voltage controller has to be
deactivated.
Parallel operation in isolated operation (asymmetrical reactive load sharing)

genset operating in parallel compensates any load changes by keeping its voltage at a constant
level. For this, the parallel operating genset has to be equipped with a voltage controller.
Since generator voltage is determined by the mains, the SYMAP-Compact(+) voltage controller
has to be deactivated.

User Manual
Voltage controller

P7202 Bocking local net 0 event 0 9999
E7200 Voltage controller acitve - - -
E7201 Voltage controller blocked - - -
Setpoint
P7205 1. Setpoint (Default) 100,00 % 0 999,99
P7207 2. Setpoint 102,00 % 0 999,99
P7209 3. Setpoint 98,00 % 0 999,99
3-point controller
P7222 1. Interval time 2,0 s 0,1 999,9
P7224 1. Dead band 1,5 % 0 999,9
P7226 2. Interval time 3,0 s 0,1 999,9
P7228 2. Dead band 1,0 % 0 999,9
E7223 Voltage increase - - -
E7224 Voltage decrease - - -
Figure 3-328 Voltage controller Parameters [P] and events [E]
P7200 Function
This parameter activates/deactivates the active frequency controller, whereby setting:
OFF: deactivates the active frequency controller, or
AUTO: activates the active frequency controller automatically as soon as events
ON: activates the active frequency controller automatically as soon as event
When active frequency controller is activated by parameter [P7160] event Frequency

Blocking of the local frequency controller in the local net (busbar section); the local
frequency controller can be blocked by any active event. For blocking, the number
event Frequency controller blocked [E7161] becomes active. If the blocking event
becomes inactive, blocking is abandoned and the local frequency controller is effective
If blocking of local frequency controller is not required, set this parameter to 0.

User Manual
Blocking of all the frequency controllers in the local net (busbar section); all frequency
controller operating with the local net can be blocked by any active event. For blocking,
blocking is active, all frequency controller operating with the same net are blocked (a
blocking command of the local generator control unit is transmitted to all the other,
relevant generator control units via CAN 1 communication), and event Frequency
controller blocked [E761] becomes active in all the generator control units. If the
blocking event becomes inactive, blocking is abandoned and all frequency controllers
If blocking of all the frequency controllers in the local net is not required, set this
parameter to 0.

User Manual

of pre-set setpoints for the voltage controller. There are up to four different pre-set setpoints
available. However, voltage control for the local generator is only possible for the following
operating modes:
Isolated operation of the local genset, or
Parallel operation in isolated operation
CAUTION: When setting the setpoint for voltage control of the local generator the following
should be taken into account:
Isolated operation of the local genset: here, the voltage setpoint of the local
generator must not exceed rated generator voltage of the genset!
Parallel operation in isolated operation: all generator controls of the gensets
have to be supplied with the same setpoint for their voltage controllers.
following table gives conclusion about the priority of the setpoint supplied to the voltage
controller:
Table 3-36 Priorities of setpoint supply to the voltage controller
Active setpoint
[P7206] [P7208] [P7210]

Fixed setpoint for voltage controller of the local generator; this parameter defines the
common voltage setpoint for all the generators which are operating with the same
busbar section.
NOTE: The setpoint for voltage controller of the local generator is to be set as a
percentage of the nominal value of the chosen characteristic quantity (phase-
to-phase voltage or phase-to-neutral voltage). However, the chosen
(Pxxxx 1. Droop)
Proportionality factor for voltage decrease in dependence of generator output reactive
power; when the local genset is in parallel operation with several gensets or with the

User Manual
grid, the motor drive of the local genset needs to be provided with a load balancing
signal or a droop controller (static characteristic voltage curve). If the local genset is only
equipped with voltage controller, then the required static control function can be
established by the following voltage controller parameters of SYMAP-Compact(+):
1. Droop [Pxxxx],
2. Droop [Pxxxx], or.
3. Droop [Pxxxx]
NOTE: The Proportionality factor for voltage decrease is to be set as a percentage of

the nominal value of the chosen characteristic quantity voltage (nominal
value of the generator) and as a percentage of the nominal value of the
chosen characteristic quantity power (nominal value of the motor drive in
[kW]). This nominal value is to be set by parameter:
Here, it is that winding side relating to the reactive power measurement, which


Function of droop parameters could only be applied when the voltage setpoint
is supplied as an analog signal or via CAN 1 communication, and the supplied
setpoint is transmitted to the voltage controller of the generator!

Event-controlled changeover of the voltage controller to the second, parameterizable
setpoint; changeover can be activated by any active event. For activation of changeover,
changeover of setpoint is active, the voltage controller operates according to the setpoint
set by parameter 2.Setpoint [P7207]. If the assigned event becomes inactive,
activation of changeover is abandoned and the local voltage controller either operates
according to the first setpoint or any other active setpoint.
If changeover of the voltage controller to the second, parameterizable setpoint is not
P7207 2. Setpoint
(Pxxxx 2. Droop)
See description of parameter [Pxxxx]

User Manual

P7209 3. Setpoint
(Pxxxx 3. Droop)
See description of parameter [Pxxxx]

Event-controlled changeover of the voltage controller to the setpoint given by
activation of changeover, the number related to this actiation event has to be assigned to
is active. As soon as changeover of setpoint is active, the voltage controller operates
according to the setpoint given by the communication interface (Profibus or Modbus
only!). If the assigned event becomes inactive, activation of changeover is abandoned
and the local voltage controller either operates according to the first setpoint or any other
active setpoint.
If changeover of the voltage controller to the setpoint given by communication interface

User Manual
3-point controller
The Voltage controller of SYMAP-Compact(+) is designed as a three step control including
the output states: voltage increase and voltage decrease. For this, the following two control-
events are provided:
Voltage increase [E7223]: signal to external voltage controller to increase
generator excitation current => increase of generator
voltage in isolated operation (single genset or several
gensets in parallel operation), and
Voltage decrease [E7224]: signal to external voltage controller to decrease
generator excitation current => decrease of generator
gensets in parallel operation).
Collective event: voltage increase [E7006]: this event becomes active when event(s)
and
Collective event: voltage decrease [E7007]: this event becomes active when event(s)
which are individually OR-connected with both, the events of the power factor controller:
Excitation increase [E7273]: signal to external voltage controller to increase
generator excitation current => increase of output
reactive power of a single generator in mains parallel
Excitation decrease [E7274]: signal to external voltage controller to decrease
generator excitation current => decrease of output
isolated operation
and the event of the voltage controller: [E7223] or [E7224].
REMARK: In view of the following statements the momentary control deviation (voltage
difference Uset, act.) is given as a percentage U[%] of the nominal voltage Un set
by parameter Voltage [P603], Voltage [P613], or Voltage [P623].

3. Determination of the control direction:and control deviation U[%]:
Depending on the circumstance, wether the momentary voltage is lower/higher than the
active setpoint, the voltage controller needs to increase/decrease the generator voltage.
c. Uact < Uset
The actual measured voltage Uact of the generator is less than the active setpoint Uset;
according to the measuring algorithm Uset,act = Uset Uact, it follows a positive sign for
the calculated voltage difference:
U[%] > 0 => frequency increase!
d. Uact > Uset
The actual measured output voltage Uact of the generator is higher than the active
setpoint Uset; according to the measuring algorithm Uset,act = Uset Uact, it follows a

User Manual
negative sign for the calculated voltage difference:

U[%] < 0 => frequency decrease!
The speed of generator voltage control is proportional of the level of control deviation
U[%]. Pulse times are calculated according to the amount of the control deviation U[%].
control-event which is to increase/decrease the generator voltage.
u2 u4 u7 u9 u11 u13 u14 u16 u18 u20 u23
u1 u3 u5 u6 u8 u10 u12 u13 u15 u17 u19 u22
uGEN
1.Deadband [P7224]
uset
1.Deadband [P7224]
uact(t)
t
Counter Pulse time
[P7223]
0
tU-contr., pulse time 1
t
tU-contr., pulse time 8 tU-contr., pulse time 15

0
t
tU-contr., interval time tU-contr., interval time tU-contr., interval time
Voltage decrease [E7224]
0
t
Voltage increase [E7223]
0
t
Figure 3-329 Voltage controller supply of static setpoint

User Manual

Defined break time tU-controller,interval time between the times of calculating the pulse times tU-

Fundamental value T[P7223] for calculating the pulse time tU-controller,pulse time x; while voltage
controlling, the fundamental value meets a defined pulse time which is needed to
equalize 100% of active power deviation referring to the nominal voltage Un[%] (see
parameter Voltage [P603], Voltage [P613] or Voltage [P623],).
Voltage deviations less than 100% of nominal voltage Un are considered by individually
calculated pulse times depending on the amount of the voltage difference U. As
calculation approach, the ratio of the pulse time tU-controller,pulse time x to be calculated to the
fundamental value T[P7223] is equated with the ration of the measured voltage difference
U to the maximum voltage difference (Un[%] = 100% Un).
TU-controller,pulse time x[s] / T[P7223][s] = U[%] / Un[%]
= U[%] / 100%

=> tU-controller,pulse time x[s] = T[P7223][s] x U[%] / 100%
= 1. Pulse duration at 100% deviation [P7223] x U[%] / 100%
value)

U[%] > 0
If the voltage difference U is positive (Uact < Uset), event Voltage increase
increase).
U[%] < 0
If the voltage difference U is negative (Uact > Uset), event Voltage decrease
decrease).

U[%] = 100%
A voltage difference Uset; act = Uset Uact of 100% of the nominal voltage, set
by parameter Voltage [P603], Voltage [P613], or Voltage [P623]., will
result in the calculated pulse time of:
tU-controller,pulse time x[s]= 10s.
U[%] = 1%
A voltage difference Uset; act = Uset Uact of 1% of the nominal voltage, set by
parameter Voltage [P603], Voltage [P613], or Voltage [P623]., will result
in the calculated pulse time of:
tU-controller,pulse time x[s]= 0,1s.


User Manual
P7224 1. Deadband
parameter 1. Deadband [P7224], then events Voltage increase [P7223] and Voltage
decrease [P7224] are deactivated (blocked).

settings.


P7228 2. Deadband

User Manual
3.12.1.6 Power Factor Controller
If several energy recources contribute to provide electrical energy in a power system (mains
parallel operation or parallel operation in isolated operation), the control of reactive power by
power factor control (reactive load sharing) provided by generators always becomes necessary.
As opposed to that, for isolated operation of a single genset (motor drive + generator) no
reactive load sharing is possible, and as a result, power factor control for reactive load sharing
is not necessary.
Parallel operation of several gensets (isolated operation)
Different kinds of parallel operation require different ways for reactive load sharing
(symmetrical/asymmetrical) to the applied energy recources. Hence, different methods for
power factor control of the generator(s) are required.
Parallel operation of several gensets in isolated operation (symmetrical reactive load sharing)
following:
In case that inductive, reactive power increases, the generator output reactive power
increases and generator voltage decreases, or
in case that inductive, reactive power decreases, the generator output reactive power
decreases and generator voltage increases.
To avoid any voltage changes the generators of the gensets are always equipped with a voltage
if a load balancing signal between the voltage controllers is available (symmetrical reactive
load sharing), or
if the genset(s) are equipped with an additional voltage droop control (asymmetrical
reactive load sharing).
For parallel operation of gensets without load balancing signal the generators must be equipped
with additional droop controllers.
If the generator does neither provide a load balancing signal nor a droop controller, then droop
functionality can be established by the setpoint parameters of the SYMAP-Compact(+) voltage
controller (see chapter 3.12.1.5 Voltage Controller):
1. Droop [Pxxxx],
2. Droop [Pxxxx], or
3. Droop [Pxxxx]
voltage curve which defines the linear dependence between generator voltage UGen and
generator output reactive power Qout.

User Manual
UGen
Idling voltage
Full load voltage
Qn Qout
Figure 3-330 Static characteristic curve (voltage droop) of a genset

The static characteristic voltage curve represents the defined voltage decrease (proportionality
factor) by reference to idle mode and rated operation of the genset. However, in parallel
operation of several gensets with different static characteristic curves, load changes would lead
to different voltage setpoints for the gensets. Hence, the generators are subjected to
asymmetrical loads.
To compensate asymmetrical loads for the generators in turn, each generator control unit needs
to be equipped with an power factor controller. Each generator control unit measures the power
factor of its local generator and measuring value of power factor is to be transmitted via
CANBUS communication to the other generator control units operating with the same net
number. Based on all the measuring values of all generators each generator unit calculates the
average value as new setpoint for its power factor controller.
By such pre-setting of the power factor setpoints for the power factor controllers, in parallel
operation the power factor of the generators is adjusted to an certain level.
Mains parallel operation (asymmetrical reactive load sharing)

static characteristic voltage curve also in mains parallel operation (e.g. decentral energy
recources DER such as block heat and power plants, wind turbines, turbine installations). Here,
supply of setpoints for the power factor controller of the local generator cannot base on
calculating the average power value as setpoint since the actual power factor measuring values
of the mains energy recources are not available. Hence follows that a symmetrical reactive load
sharing is not possible! Thus, supply of setpoints has to use different methods; for instance by:
a fixed setpoint supply (control of generator power factor to a fixed value, e.g. in case of
base load operation, peak load operation, or trial operation of emergency power
systems), or
a network reference scheme (adapting the mains feed-in/output reactive power to a certain
value by controlling the generators power factor (dynamic supply of setpoints) according to
the actual consumed reactive load)
a zero reference scheme (adapting the mains feed-in/output reactive power to zero by
controlling the generators power factor (dynamic supply of setpoints) according to the
actual consumed reactive load)

User Manual

In such operating mode the local generator feeds reactive energy of fixed power value, and
another genset operating in parallel compensates any reactive energy changes by keeping its
voltage (excitation) at a constant level. For this, the parallel operating genset has to be
equipped with a voltage controller without additional droop controller, or with a voltage controller
with additional droop controller and a voltage control by the generator control unit.
be equipped with a voltage controller and a droop controller. Power factor control of those
generators which are forseen for compensating the reactive power load changes can be
designed for symmetric as well as asymmetric reactive load sharing.
Power factor controller

P7253 Balanced mode 0 event 0 9999
P7254 Min. start current 20,0 % 0,0 999,9
E7250 Power factor controller active - - -
P7251 Power factor controller blocked - - -
Setpoint
P7255 1. Setpoint (Default) 0,95 % -0,99 1,00
P7257 2. Setpoint 1,00 % -0,99 1,00
P7259 3. Setpoint -0,98 % -0,99 1,00
3-point controller
P7272 1. Interval time 2,0 s 0,1 999,9
P7274 1. Dead band 1,5 % 0 999,9
P7276 2. Interval time 3,0 s 0,1 999,9
P7278 2. Dead band 1,0 % 0 999,9
E7273 Excitation increase - - -
E7274 Excitation decrease - - -
Power factor curve
P7290 Power factor curve enable 0 event 0 9999
P7291 1. Active Power Point -80,0 % 0,0 999,9
P7292 1. Power Factor Point 0,95 - 0,00 1,00
P7293 2. Active Power Point 0,0 % 0,0 999,9
P7294 2. Power Factor Point 1,0 s 0,00 1,00
P7296 3. Power Factor Point -0,95 - 0,00 1,00
P7298 4. Power Factor Point 0,00 - 0,00 1,00
E7290 Power factor curve active - - -
Figure 3-331 Power factor controller Parameters [P] and events [E]

User Manual
P7250 Function
This parameter activates/deactivates the power factor controller, whereby setting:
OFF: deactivates the power factor controller, or
AUTO: activates the power factor controller automatically as soon as events
ON: activates the power factor controller automatically as soon as event
When power factor controller is activated by parameter [P7250] event Power factor

Blocking of the local power factor controller in the local net (busbar section); the local
power factor controller can be blocked by any active event. For blocking, the number
event Power factor controller blocked [E7251] becomes active. If the blocking event
becomes inactive, blocking is abandoned and the local power factor controller is
If blocking of local power factor controller is not required, set this parameter to 0.

Blocking of all the power factor controllers in the local net (busbar section); all power
factor controllers operating with the local net can be blocked by any active event. For
soon as blocking is active, all power factor controller operating with the same net are
blocked (a blocking command of the local generator control unit is transmitted to all the
other, relevant generator control units via CAN 1 communication), and event Power
factor controller blocked [E7251] becomes active in all the generator control units. If the
blocking event becomes inactive, blocking is abandoned and all power factor controllers
If blocking of all the power factor controllers in the local net is not required, set this
parameter to 0.
P7253 Balanced mode

Symmetric power factor control in the local net (balanced distribution of reactive load in
the same busbar section); symmetric power factor control can be activated by any active
event. For activation, the number related to this activation event has to be assigned to
is active.
As soon as symmetric power factor control is active, the consumed reactive load is
distributed to all the power factor controllers which are operating with the same net
(busbar section). This reactive load sharing is performed symmetrically and accords to
the rated power of the generators. Because of the different levels of distributed reactive
load the setpoint for the local power factor controller has to be supplied dynamically.
This means the setpoint is cyclically calculated and transmitted to the local power factor
controller.
If the activation event becomes inactive, the control of the generator power factor is
performed according to one of the following fixed pre-set setpoints (asymmetrical
reactive load sharing, see parameters [P7255] to [P7260]).

User Manual
If symmetric power factor control is not required, set this parameter to 0.

Minimum limit of the measuring of process quantity phase current to release activation
of the local power factor controller; the local power factor controller is blocked as long as
the measured current values of all three phases remain below this minimum setting.
NOTE: The minimum limit of measured process quantity phase current to release
activation of the local power factor controller is to be set as a percentage of
the nominal value of the process quantity. The nominal value of the process
Current [P604], for primary side W1,

User Manual

of pre-set setpoints for the power factor controller. There are up to four different pre-set
setpoints available. However, power factor control for the local generator is only possible for the
following operating modes:
Mains parallel operation (asymmetrical reactive load sharing), or
CAUTION: When setting the setpoint for power factor control of the local generator the
following should be taken into account:
Mains parallel operation: here, the setpoint for the feed-in reactive power of
the local generator must not exceed rated power at the network connection
point!
Parallel operation in isolated operation (asymmetrical load sharing): the feed-
in reactive power of the local generator must not exceed the consumed
reactive load; otherwise busbar voltage would increase!
following table gives conclusion about the priority of the setpoint supplied to the power factor
controller:
Table 3-37 Priorities of setpoint supply to the power factor controller
Active setpoint
[P7256] [P7258] [P7260]

Fixed setpoint for power factor controller of the local generator; when symmetrical
reactive load sharing (Balanced mode) is inactive, setpoint supply to the power factor
controller of the local generator is according to the set value of parameter [P7255].
A positive setpoint (represented without sign) is for the leading operating range of the
generator; a neagaitve setpoint (represented with a negative sign) is for lagging
operating range of the generator. This means that in SYMAP-Compact(+) the sign of
the power factor PF is equal to the sign of the reactive power Q.
The following generator operating diagram gives conclusion about the above mentioned:

User Manual
-0.98 P 0.98
0.98 100% 0.98 Representation of
-0.9 0.9 power factor in
0.9 0.9 SYMAP-Compact(+)
-0.8 0.8
0.8 0.8
real power factor
50%
Operating range
Generator Generator
lagging leading
0% Q
-100% Generator -50% 0% 50% Generator 100%
consumes output
reactive power reactive power
Figure 3-332 Power diagram: Esample for permissable operating range of a generator
NOTE: The setpoint settings are to be set as a percentage of the nominal value of the
chosen characteristic quantity generator power (rated value of the generator
[kW]). This nominal value is to be set by parameter:



Event-controlled changeover of the power factor controller to the second,
parameterizable setpoint; changeover can be activated by any active event. For
event is active. As soon as changeover of setpoint is active, the power factor controller
operates according to the setpoint set by parameter 2.Setpoint [P7257]. If the
assigned event becomes inactive, activation of changeover is abandoned and the local
power factor controller either operates according to the first setpoint or any other active
setpoint.
If changeover of the power factor controller to the second, parameterizable setpoint is
not required, set this parameter to 0.

User Manual
P7257 2. Setpoint
Second setpoint for the event-controlled changeover of the power factor controller; when
event-controlled function asymmetrical reactive load sharing (see Parameter Balanced
mode [P7253] is deactivated and event-controlled changeover of the power factor
controller to the second setpoint (see parameter 2.Setpoint enable [P7256]) is active,
the power factor controller operates according to the setpoint set by parameter [P7257]

P7259 3. Setpoint

Event-controlled changeover of the power factor controller to the setpoint given by
event is active. As soon as changeover of setpoint is active, the power factor controller
operates according to the setpoint given by the communication interface (Profibus or
Modbus only!). If the assigned event becomes inactive, activation of changeover is
abandoned and the local power factor controller either operates according to the first
setpoint or any other active setpoint.
If changeover of the power factor controller to the setpoint given by communication

User Manual
3-point controller
The Power factor controller of SYMAP-Compact(+) is designed as a three step control
including the output states: excitation increase and excitation decrease. For this, the following
Excitation increase [E7273]: signal to external voltage controller to increase
generator excitation current => increase of output
Excitation decrease [E7274]: signal to external voltage controller to decrease
generator excitation current => decrease of output
isolated operation
Collective event: voltage increase [E7006]: this event becomes active when event(s)
and
Collective event: voltage decrease [E7007]: this event becomes active when event(s)
which are individually OR-connected with both, the events of the voltage controller:
Voltage increase [E7223]: signal to external voltage controller to increase
generator excitation current => increase of generator
gensets in parallel operation), and
Voltage decrease [E7224]: signal to external voltage controller to decrease
generator excitation current => decrease of generator
gensets in parallel operation).
and the event of the power factor controller: [E7273] or [E7274].
Depending on the type of motor speed governer the control events have to be assigned to:two
different binary outputs of the SYMAP-Compact(+) (binary control, e.g. for naval applications)
REMARK: In view of the following statements the momentary control deviation is given as
power factor difference PFset, act..
The procedure of power factor control is to be described as follows:

1. Determination of the control direction:and control deviation PF[%]:
Depending on the circumstance, wether the momentary power factor is lower/higher than
the active setpoint, the power factor controller needs to increase/decrease generator
voltage (excitation).
c. PFact < PFset
The actual measured output power factor PFact of the generator is less than the active
setpoint PFset; according to the measuring algorithm PFset,act = PFset PFact, it follows
a positive sign for the calculated reactive power difference:
PF[%] > 0 => excitation increase!

User Manual
d. PFact > PFset

The actual measured output power factor PFact of the generator is higher than the
active setpoint PFset; according to the measuring algorithm PFset,act = PFset PFact, it
follows a negative sign for the calculated reactive power difference:
PF[%] < 0 => excitation decrease!
The speed of generator power factor control is proportional of the level of control deviation
|PF|[%]. Pulse times are calculated according to the amount of the control deviation
|PF|[%]. The duration of one pulse time is equal to the period of activation of the
corresponding control-event which is to increase/decrease the generator reactive power.
Depending on the activation of function Symmetrical reactive load sharing (see parameter
Balanced mode [P7253], power factor control is according to either a dynamic setpoint
(symmetrical reactive load sharing) or a static setpoint (asymmetrical reactive load sharing).
l2 l4 l7 l9 l11 l13 l14 l16 l18 l20 l23
l1 l3 l5 l6 l8 l10 l12 l13 l15 l17 l19 l22
l PF
0 1
1.Deadband [P7274]
lset 1.Deadband [P7274]
1 0
t
lact(t)
0 -1
Counter Pulse time

[P7273]
0
tPF-contr., pulse time 1
t
tPF-contr., pulse time 8 tPF-contr., pulse time 15
Counter Interval
time
0
t
tPF-contr, interval time tPF-contr, interval time tPF-contr, interval time
Excitation decrease [E7274]
0
t
Excitation increase [E7273]
0
t
Figure 3-333 Power factor control dynamic setpoint supply (symmetrical reactive load sharing)

User Manual
l2 l4 l7 l9 l11 l13 l14 l16 l18 l20 l23

l1 l3 l5 l6 l8 l10 l12 l13 l15 l17 l19 l22
l PF
0 1
1.Deadband [P7274]
lset
1.Deadband [P7274]
1 0
t
lact(t)
0 -1
Counter Pulse time

[P7273]
0
tPF-contr., pulse time 1
t
tPF-contr., pulse time 8 tPF-contr., pulse time 15

0
t
tPF-contr., interval time tPF-contr., interval time tPF-contr., interval time
Excitation decrease [E7274]
0
t
Excitation increase [E7273]
0
t
Figure 3-334 Power factor control static setpoint supply (asymmetrical reactive load sharing)
P7272 1. Intervall time

Defined break time tPF-controller,interval time between the times of calculating the pulse times tPF-

Fundamental value T[P7273] for calculating the pulse time tPF-controller,pulse time x; while power
factor controlling, the fundamental value meets a defined pulse time which is needed to
equalize 100% of maximum control deviation PFmax.
Power factor control deviations PF 100% are considered by individually calculated
pulse times depending on the amount of the power factor control deviation PF. As
calculation approach, the ratio of the pulse time tPF-controller,pulse time x to be calculated to the
fundamental value T[P7273] is equated with the ration of the measured power factor
deviation PF to the maximum power factor deviation (PFmax = 2).

User Manual
tPF-controller,pulse time x[s] / T[P7273][s] = PF / PFmax

= PF / 2

=> tPF-controller,pulse time x[s] = T[P7273][s] x PF / 2
= 1. Pulse duration at 100% deviation [P7273] x PF / 2
value)

PF > 0
If the power factor control deviation PF is positive (PFact < PFset), event
Excitation increase [E7273] is activated for the duration of the calculated
pulse time (voltage increase).
PF < 0
If the power factor control deviation PF is negative (PFact > PFset), event
Excitation decrease [E7274] is activated for the duration of the calculated
pulse time (voltage decrease).

PF = 2
When the amount of power factor control deviation |PFset; act |= PFset PFact is
equal to 2, the calculated pulse time result in: tPF-controller,pulse time x[s] = 10s.
PF = 0,1
When the amount of power factor control deviation |PFset; act |= PFset PFact is
equal to 0,1, the calculated pulse time result in:: tPF-controller,pulse time x[s]= 0,5s.

P7274 1. Deadband
parameter 1. Deadband [P7274], then events Excitation increase [P7273] and
Excitation decrease [P7274] are deactivated (blocked).

settings.

User Manual
P7276 2. Intervallzeit
P7277 2. Pulsdauer bei 100% Regelabw.

P7278 2. Totzone

User Manual
Power factor curve control of reactive power

Required control of reactive power is performed by control of power factor PF. During
undisturbed grid operation the setpoint for the connected power generation systems power
factor controller is set to a certain value to provide energy to the grid without any reactive power
proportions.
Depending on the grid conditions the grid operator is entitled to determine different setpoints for
the power factor control of the connected power generation system. These setpoints result from
the so-called power factor curve.
Generally, the power factor curve, given by the grid operator, is defined by two points but not
more than four points. Each point is defined by a PF-coordinate as well as a P-coordinate (see
parameters [P7291] to [P7298]).
For power factor setpoint definition there are different power factor curves, one for low-voltage
power systems and another for medium-voltage power systems. The different power curves are
represented below:
PF
0,9
lagging
1
P/PE,max
leading
0,9
0,2 0,5 1
Figure 3-335 Power factor curve PF(P) for power generation systems in parallel operation with the low-
voltage power system acc. to VDE-AR-N-4105
PF
0,95
lagging
-1
1 P/PE,max
leading
0,95
Figure 3-336 Power factor curve PF(P) for power generation systems in parallel operation with the
medium-voltage power system acc. to BDEW
P7290 Power factor curve enable

Event-controlled activation of power factor curve (dynamic PF setpoint setting) for power
factor control; power factor curve can be activated by any active event. For activation,
the number related to the activation event has to be assigned to parameter [P7290].

User Manual
power factor curve is active, event Power factor curve active [E7290] becomes active.
If the assigned event becomes inactive, activation of power factor curve is abandoned.
If Event-controlled activation of power factor curve (dynamic PF setpoint setting) for
power factor control is not required, set this parameter to 0.
P7291 1. Active power point

This parameter determines the P-coordinate (active power) to define the first point of the
configurable power factor curve; in colaboration with the PF-coordinate (power factor)
which is set via parameter 1.Power factor point [P7292], parameter [P7291] defines the
starting point of the first straight of power factor curve.
P7292 1. Power factor point

This parameter determines the PF-coordinate (power factor) to define the first point of
the configurable power factor curve; in colaboration with the P-coordinate (active power)
which is set via parameter 1.Active power point [P7291], parameter [P7292] defines the
starting point of the first straight of power factor curve.

This parameter determines the P-coordinate (active power) to define the second point of
the configurable power factor curve; in colaboration with the PF-coordinate (power
factor) which is set via parameter 2.Power factor point [P7294], parameter [P7293]
defines the final point of the first straight as well as the starting point of the second
straight of power curve.

This parameter determines the PF-coordinate (power factor) to define the second point
of the configurable power factor curve; in colaboration with the P-coordinate (active
power) which is set via parameter 2.Active power point [P7293], parameter [P7294]
defines the final point of the first straight as well as the starting point of the second

This parameter determines the P-coordinate (active power) to define the third point of
defines the final point of the second straight as well as the starting point of the third

This parameter determines the PF-coordinate (power factor) to define the second point
of the configurable power factor curve; in colaboration with the P-coordinate (active
power) which is set via parameter 3.Active power point [P7295], parameter [P7296]
defines the final point of the second straight as well as the starting point of the third

This parameter determines the P-coordinate (active power) to define the fourth point of
defines the final point of the third straight of power factor curve.

This parameter determines the PF-coordinate (power factor) to define the fourth point of
the configurable power factor curve; in colaboration with the P-coordinate (active power)

User Manual
which is set via parameter 4.Active power point [P7297], parameter [P7298] defines the
final point of the third straight of power factor curve.

User Manual
4 Maintenance, Servicing and Retesting
The devices of SYMAP-Compact product line were designed numerically. All functions base on
tested hardware and software.
Maintenance
All devices of SYMAP-Compact product line are maintenance-free. However, there are some
certain, life-limited components, which cause replacement according to the given replacement
cycles listed in the table below. Following components are to be considered:
1 x rechargeable battery, Type ML2430; for storage of data in the RAM memory and for
maintenance of counting date and time. The buffering time of a fully charged battery (stand-
by operation) is about 50 days. Manufacturers warranted life time of the accumulator type
is about 10 years.
2 x rechargeable battery, Type ML2430; for storage of data in the RAM memory and for
maintenance of counting date and time. The buffering time of a fully charged battery (stand-
by operation) is about 100 days. Manufacturers warranted life time of the accumulator type
is about 10 years.
NOTE: To avoid any loss of data, batteries shall be replaced one after another!
Table 4-1 Life-limited components

Replacement
Component Type Function Failure consequences Replacement
cycle
Loss of data after complete
discharge of the
battery/batteries:
PLC Flip-Flop status
PLC Counter status
Event history last 32
Storage of data in
items
the RAM memory
Status of all Alarms
Power counter of the
Stucke
ML2430 last hour c. every
Akku Elektronik
(removable) Work hours counter of 10 years
GmbH
the last hour
ANSI 49 thermal level
Maintenance of
counting date and
Reset of date and time to
time after
default values after
disconnecting
complete discharge of the
SYMAP-
battery/batteries
Compact(+)
power supply
Battery charging and discharging

The charging voltage level of the batteries applied in SYMAP-Compact(+) is 3.2V. This value is
reached after 40 hours of charging the battery. When voltage drops below 2V, time and date as
well as data saved in SRAM memory will be lost.
Battery voltage is monitored cyclically on the level of 2.4V, where the cycle time is 1s. When
voltage drops below this level of 2V, event MU Battery low alarm [E9046] is activated. Event
[E9046] is deactivated when voltage exceeds 2V.
CAUTION: Before commissioning the SYMAP-Compact(+) device shall be connected to
power supply for a duration of 40 hours to ensure the batteries are of full capacity.

User Manual
In addition to the first cyclic voltage monitoring, another cyclic monitoring of the battery voltage
starts right after 40 hours of device operation. Here, cycle time is 1s and monitored voltage level
is 2.9V. When voltage drops below 2.9V, then event MU Battery low alarm [E9046] is
activated.
CAUTION: In such a case batteries are faulty and have to be replaced. If event [E9046] is still
activated after battery replacement, then SYMAP-Compact(+) device has to be
replaced by another one!

User Manual
Servicing
All devices of the product line SYMAP-Compact provide extensive self supervision functions
for signalling different internal faults. Replacement of the life-limited components (see table
above) may be undertaken only under ESD-conform conditions at the device manufacturers
facility.
Retesting
A repeating secondary test is mainly to check the function of the hardware including the wiring
on a regular basis. Moreover, any non-documented changes of parameter settings can be
detected.
Retesting intervalls are to be allocated by the user. All repeated tests for functionality checks as
simplified functionality tests and secondary protection tests as complete check of the protection
system fall in the scope of the regulation, which apply to valid standards for the plant area
requiring the use of SYMAP-Compact(+) devices.

User Manual
5 Safety guidelines
CAUTION: Please take note of the following safety guidelines for the procedures listed
below!
Table 5-1 SYMAP-Compact(+) Safety guidelines
Procedure Safety guidelines Link
CAUTION:
If a parameter file is directly loaded in the SYMAP-
Compact(+), the device proceeds to new start of the system See document
Load parameter file
(system reboot). Booting time takes ca 4 s. During the booting SCPT manual vx.x.docx
time SYMAP-Compact(+) does not provide any protective
function!
CAUTION:
While being in booting mode SYMAP-Compact(+) does not See document
Firmware-Update
provide any device functionality in particular no protective SCPT manual vx.x.docx
function!

User Manual
6 Trouble-shooting
Find some of the devices error messages or messages occurring during application of the
configuration software SYMAP-Compact Parameter Tool (SCPT) listed in the following.
Beyond that, details on the messages are given and measures for clearance suggested.
SYMAP-Compact(+):
Table 6-1 Watchdog event

Event no. Error message Meaning Measure
Hardware reset (system reboot)
9000 Watchdog event System-internal hardware error If not successful please contact
manufacturer
SYMAP-Compact Parameter Tool (SCPT):
Table 6-2 Error messages
Error message Meaning Measure

Check connection between computer/
Error in communication Faulty communication
notebook and device
Re-establish connection and repeat
Error while sending data Faulty data transmission
loading procedure
Check connection between
computer/notebook and device
Set device to boot loader mode
Communication link interrupted or again by holding depressed the
Update failed (firmware) Device not operating in boot loader key at the back of the device and
mode or proceed to hardware reset before
releasing key
Faulty firmware
Repeat flashing procedure
If not successful please contact
manufacturer

User Manual
7 Technical Data
7.1 General Technical Data
7.1.1 SYMAP-Compact Hardware version v1-1.x
Table 7-1 HW v1-1.x: General Technical data of the SYMAP-Compact(+) device variants
Description Specification
Design Flush-mounted housing for front panel cutout

Front panel dimensions SYMAP-Compact: 210 210 87 (mm)
(W x H x D*) SYMAP-Compact+: 210 x 250 x 90 (mm)
Front panel cut-out SYMAP-Compact: 192 x 192 (mm)
(W x H) SYMAP-Compact+: 192 x 232 (mm)
SYMAP-Compact: ca. 2,2kg
Weight
SYMAP-Compact+: ca. 2,6kg
Installation position vertical; +/-34
According to ordering options:
9-36V DC; (Ur: 24V DC) or
Power supply
40-160V DC; (Ur: 48V DC**; 60V DC; 110V DC) or
120-370V DC; 85-264V AC; (Ur: 220V DC; 110V AC; 230V AC***)
Power consumption < 20 W
External fuse 4A; T-type
Duration between switching on power supply to activation of device functions (full functionality) is
Boot phase
10s
Front panel IP54 (IEC 60529)
Protection type
Back housing IP20 (IEC 60529)
Spring-loaded terminals Max. 1,5mm2
Cross section, max.
Measuring input terminals (CT, PT) Max. 6mm2
* D = maximum installation depth: incl. plugs, excl. fibre optic plugs
** Ur +20%/-16%
*** Ur +15%/-20%

User Manual
7.1.2 SYMAP-Compact Hardware version v1-2.x (SYMAP-Compact+ only!)
Table 7-2 HW v1-2.x: General Technical data of the SYMAP-Compact(+) device variants
Design Flush-mounted housing for front panel cut-out

Graphical LC-display/touchscreen (320x240 pixel)
Display
Screen refresh rate: 250ms, cyclic
Front panel dimensions (W x H x D*) SYMAP-Compact+: 210 x 250 x 90 (mm)

Front panel cut-out (W x H) SYMAP -Compact+: 192 x 232 (mm)

Weight SYMAP -Compact+: ca. 2,5kg
Installation position vertical; +/-34
24V DC** or
Power supply 48V DC** or
60V DC** or
110V AC/DC*, 220V DC*, 230V AC***
Power consumption < 20W
2 x 100mAh; removable batteries, accessible on the housing rear.
Rechargeable battery
NOTE: in case of battery replacement, please exchange one after another.
Duration between switching on power supply to activation of device functions (full
Boot phase
functionality) is 10s
Front panel IP54 (IEC 60529)
Protection type
Back housing IP20 (IEC 60529)
Spring-loaded terminals Max. 1,5 mm2
Cross section, max.
Measuring input terminals (CT, PT) Max. 6 mm2
* D = maximum installation depth: incl. plugs, excl. fibre optic plugs
** Ur +/-20%
*** Ur +15%/-20%

User Manual
7.1.3 Extension board system EBS Hardware version v1-0.x
Table 7-3 EB-PS General technical data
Application Power supply & Communication

Design DIN rail TS35
Housing dimensions
(91,4 x 91,4 x 76,2)mm
(W x H x D)
Weight ca. 0,7kg
Installation position vertical
12V DC* or
Power supply 24V DC* or
48V DC* or
60V DC* or
110V AC/DC*, 220V DC*, 230V AC**
Power consumption:
< 2W
EB-PS operation only
Power consumption:
< 20W
EBS operation
Duration between switching on power supply to activation of EBS functions (full functionality) is
Boot phase
<1s
Protection type IP20 (IEC 60529)
Cross section, max. Spring-loaded terminals Max. 1,5mm2
* Ur +/-20%
** Ur +15%/-20%
Table 7-4 EB-BI8-A General technical data
Application Binary inputs

Housing dimensions
(W x H x D) (30,5 x 91,4 x 76,2)mm
Weight ca. 0,25kg

Power consumption: idle < 0,42W
Power consumption: operation < 0,57W
Boot phase
< 1s

User Manual
Table 7-5 EB-BI10-OC General technical data
Application Binary inputs (opto-couplers)

Housing dimensions
(W x H x D) (30,5 x 91,4 x 76,2)mm
Weight ca. 0,25kg

Boot phase
< 1s
Table 7-6 EB-BO4-R General technical data
Application Binary outputs (function outputs; change-over contacts)

Housing dimensions
(W x H x D) (30,5 x 91,4 x 76,2)mm
Weight ca. 0,3kg

Boot phase
< 1s
Table 7-7 EB-BO6-R General technical data
Application Binary outputs (function outputs; normal open contacts)

Housing dimensions
(W x H x D) (30,5 x 91,4 x 76,2)mm
Weight ca. 0,3kg

Boot phase
< 1s

User Manual
7.2 Type tests Hardware
7.2.1 Environment
7.2.1.1 SYMAP-Compact Hardware version v1-1.x
Table 7-8 HW v1-1.x: Type tests Environment
Description Specification Test method
Temperature/Humidity
Operating temperature: -20C to +70C

Environment
Storage temperature: -40C to +70C DIN EN 60255-27: 2005
Transport temperature: -40C to +70C
Rel. humidity: < 80 % EN 60068-2-30: 2006
Vibrations, sinusoidal form
Frequency range: 10Hz to 150Hz

Accelaration: 1,0g
DIN EN 60255-21-1: 1996
Testing time per axis: 20 cycles
Sweep velocity: 1,0 Okt/min
Earthquake test
Frequency range: 5Hz to 35Hz

Crossover frequency: 8,1Hz
+/- 7,5mm X- and Y-Achse;
Magnitude:
+/- 3,5mm Z-Achse
DIN EN 60255-21-3: 1995
Mechanical strength 2.0g X- and Y-Achse;
Accelaration:
1,0g Z-Achse
Testing time per axis: Je 1 cycle
Sweep velocity: 1,0 Okt/min
Shock test
Shock form: Half sinus

Spitzenbeschleunigung: 5,0g
Schockdauer: 11ms
Richtung: +/- X; +/- Y; +/- Z DIN EN 60255-21-2: 1995
Temperature: Room temperature TR
No. per direction and temperature: 3
Total no.: 18

User Manual
7.2.1.2 SYMAP-Compact Hardware version v1-2.x (SYMAP-Compact+ only!)
Table 7-9 HW v1-2.x: Type tests Environment
Description Specification / Test method Standard
Dry-heat test operational
Temperature of exposure: 70C

IEC 60068-2-2: 2007
Duration: 16h
Cold test-operational
Temperature of exposure: -25C

IEC 60068-2-1: 2007
Duration: 16h
Dry-heat test storage
Temperature of exposure: 70C
IEC 60068-2-2: 2007
Duration: 16h
Cold test- storage
Temperature of exposure: -25C
Climatic environmental IEC 60068-2-1: 2007
test Duration: 16h
Damp-heat test
Temperature: (40 2)C
Humidity: (93 3)% IEC 60068-2-78: 2001
Duration of exposure: 10 days
Cyclic temperature with humidity test
NOTE: Not tested. This test is an alternative to the damp-heat test! IEC 60068-2-30: 2005
Change of temperature testof IEC 60255-1: 2009
Lower temperature: (-40 2)C IEC 60068-2-14: 2009
Upper temperature: (70 2)C
Ramp rate: (1 0,2)C/min
Time at lower and upper temperature: 3h
Duration of exposure: 5 cycles
Vibration endurance test
Orientation: x-, y-, z-axis
Pulse shape: half-sine
Acceleration: 150m/s2 IEC 60255-21-1:1988
Duration of the pulse: 11ms IEC 60068-2-6:1995
18: 3 shocks in two directions
Number of shocks:
Mechanical tests at of the three axis: x,y,z
non-operating Bump test
condition
Pulse shape: half-sine
Acceleration: 100m/s2 IEC 60255-21-2:1988
Duration of the pulse: 16ms IEC 60068-2-27:2009
6000: 1000 shocks in two
Number of shocks: directions of the three axis
x,y,z
Vibration response test
Frequency range: 10 150Hz
10 60Hz: Amplitude =
Frequency:
0,07mm (peak-to-peak) IEC 60255-21-1:1988
Mechanical tests at 60 150Hz: Acceleration IEC 60068-2-6:1995
Frequency:
operating condition amplitude = 5m/s2
Sweep rate: 1 oct/min
Duration of the test: 1 cycle per axis
Shock response test
Orientation: x-, y-, z-axis IEC 60255-21-2:1988
Pulse shape: half-sine IEC 60068-2-27:2009

User Manual
Acceleration: 50m/s2
Duration of the pulse: 11ms
18: 3 shocks in two directions
Number of shocks:
of the three axis: x,y,z
Seismic test (seismic parameters: class 2)
Orientation: x-, y-, z-axis DIN EN 60255-21-3: 1993
Frequency range: 5 35Hz
5 9Hz:Amplitude = 3,5mm
Z-axis frequency:
(7mm, peak-to-peak)
9 35Hz: Acceleration
Z-axis frequency:
amplitude = 10m/s2
5 9Hz:Amplitude = 7,5mm
x- and y-axis frequency:
(15mm, peak-to-peak)
9 35Hz: Acceleration
x- and y-axis frequency:
amplitude = 20m/s2
Sweep rate: 1 oct/min
Duration of the test: 1 cycle per axis
Insulation
Auxiliary
Dielectric test voltage power
NOTE: Test was conducted without supply, BIs, 2.8kV DC
installed overvoltage protection BOs, CTs,
Safety related (MOVs) for power supply input VTs
ELV circuits 700V DC EN 60255-27
Auxiliary
Impulse test voltage power
NOTE: Test was conducted without supply, BIs, 5kV; 1.2/50s
installed overvoltage protection BOs, CTs,
(MOVs) for power supply input VTs
ELV circuits 1kV; 1.2/50s

User Manual
7.2.2 Electromagnetic capability (EMC)
Table 7-10 HW v1-2.x: Type tests EMC
Conducted emission
Limit CLASS A
Frequency (dBuV)
(MHz) Quasi- Average EN 60255-25:2000
peak
Auxiliary power supply port EN 55022: 2010
0.15 0.5 79 66 EN 61000-6-4: 2007
0.5 5.0 73 60
5.0 30.0 73 60
Radiated emission
Frequency Class A (at 3

Fully operating device (MHz) m) (dBuV/m) EN 60255-25: 2000
NOTE: Radiated emission test above 1 GHz is not EN 55022: 2010
applicable since the highest internal frequency is 30 230 50
less than 108 MHz EN 61000-6-4: 2007
230 1000 57
Immunity to damped oscillatory wave
Aux power 2.5kV

supply, BIs, common mode
BOs, CTs and 1kV differential
Damped oscillatory wave EN 60255-22-1
VTs mode
1kV
communication
0kV
Slow oscillatory wave ? ?
EN 61000-4-18
Fast oscillatory wave ? ?
Immunity to electrostatic discharge
Electromagnetic EN 60255-22-2: 2008
compatibility Discharge voltage Contact (level x) = 15kV EN 61000-4-2: 1995 +A1:
all tests were performed acc. - on both polarities for at least 1 second
to EN 60255-26 - at least 10 discharges at each point Air (level 4) = 15kV 1999 + A2: 2001
IEEE C37.90.3-2001
Immunity to radiated RF electromagnetic fields
80 2700MHz
Frequency sweep
80 1000MHz (keying test)
10 / 20V/m
Field strength
20V/m (keying test)
1kHz sine wave, 80%, AM
Modulation
modulation
Frequency step 1% of fundamental
Dwell time / 2s
ON / OFF period 2s / 2s
Polarity of antenna Horizontal and vertical
3m for the test level 10V/m EN 60255-22-3: 2008
Test distance
1.8m for the test level 20V/m IEEE C37.90.2-2004
80, 160, 450, 900, 1850, 1890, EN 61000-4-3: 2006 + A1:
Tested spot frequencies (MHz)
2150 2008
Immunity to fast transients (severity level 4)
5kHz and
Repetition
100kHz
frequency
Auxiliary power supply 2.5kHz
functional earth 15ms at 2.5kHz
and 5kHz, EN 60255-22-4: 2008
binary inputs Burst duration
0,75ms at EN 60255-4-4: 2004
binary outputs
100kHz IEEE C37.90.1-2002
CTs
VTs 60s at each
Test duration
polarity
Common mode 4kV

User Manual

Transverse
4kV
mode
Repetition 5kHz and
frequency 100kHz
15ms at 2,5kHz
and 5kHz,
Burst duration
0,75ms at 100
kHz
Communication
60s at each
(over capacitive coupling clamp) Test duration
polarity
2kV at 5kHz and
Common mode 100kHz;
4kV at 2,5kHz
Transverse
0kV
mode
Immunity to surge voltages (severity level 4)
Auxiliary power supply

functional earth Common mode 4kV
binary inputs
binary outputs
CTs* EN 60255-22-5: 2002
VTs Differential EN 61000-4-5: 2006
2kV
*NOTE: The operating time of instantaneous mode
protection function elements shall be time
delayed by 30ms to prevent mal-operation!
Communication screen 4kV
Immunity to conducted disturbance (severity level 3)
Frequency range 0.15MHz 80MHz

Spot frequencies 27MHz, 68MHz
Field strength 10 Vrms
EN 60255-22-6: 2001
1kHz sine wave, 80%, AM
Modulation EN 61000-4-6: 2007
modulation
2s
Dwell time
10s (spot frequencies)
Immunity to electrical disturbance (class A)
Differential
150Vrms EN 60255-22-7: 2003
Binary inputs mode
EN 61000-4-16: 1998
Common mode 300Vrms
Immunity to electromagnetic fields (severity level 5)
100 A/m for 1 minute and 1000

Field strength EN 61000-4-8: 2010
A/m for 3s, 50/60Hz
Immunity to pulsed electromagnetic field (severity level 5)
Field strength 1000 A/m

EN 61000-4-9: 1993 + A1:
Number of pulses 5 of each polarity
2001
Time between pulses 10s
Immunity to damped oscillatory magnetic field (severity level 5)
Frequency 100kHz and 1MHz

Field strength 100A/m (peak)
40/s at 100kHz and
Repetition rate EN 61000-4-10: 1998
400/s at 1MHz
Test duration 2s
Positions X, Y, Z
Immunity to dips, short interruptions and AC ripple on the auxiliary voltage
Performance
Specification
level
Voltage dips (110V DC power
0% (50ms) A
supply) EN 60255-11: 2010
40% (200ms) C
EN 61000-4-11: 2004
70% (500ms) C
EN 61000-4-17: 1997
0% (25 cycles) A EN 61000-4-29: 2000
Voltage dips (230V AC power 40% (10/12
supply) cycles at C
50/60Hz)

User Manual

70% (10/12
cycles at C
50/60Hz)
Voltage interruptions (110V DC) 0% (5s) C
0% (250/300
Voltage interruptions (230V AC) cycles at C
50/60Hz)
15% of rated
Alternating component in DC voltage value of
A
(DC power supply) 100/120Hz at
rated 50/60Hz
60s shut-down,
Gradual shut-down / start-up (for DC 5 minutes
C
power supply) power-off, 60s
start-up
(required C)
Reversal of DC power supply polarity 1 minute performed at
A

User Manual
7.3 Type tests Software
7.3.1 Protection and monitoring functions Accuracy
Table 7-11 HW v1-1.x: Overview of accuracies of measuring inputs concerning protection

functions
Pick-up Measurement Delay time Measurement

Protection function
Steps
ACCURACY ACCURACY
ANSI (ref. to
Range (ref. to nominal [%] Setting range (tset) (ref. to nominal [%]
nominal
or absolute value) or absolute value)
value [%])
27 5.0 % to 200.0 % +/-5% of tset or +/-
0.1 % +/-0.5 % 0 s to 999999.999 s
Undervoltage of Un 20ms
27T
5.0 % to 99.9 % +5% of tset or
Undervoltage, 0.1 % +/-0.5 % see curve
of Un +25ms
time-depend.
80 % to 90 %
0.1 % +/-0.5 %
of Un
27Q
2% to 20% of In 0.1 % +/-0.5 % +/-5% of tset or +/-
Undervoltage/ 0 s to 999999.999 s
45ms
Reactive Power +/- 0.5% of Sn and
1% to 10% of Sn 0.1 % +/-20% of max. set
value
50 up to 3In +/-0.5 %
0.1 % 0 s to 999999.999 s
Instantaneous overcurrent up to 30In +/-1.0 %
50G
up to 3In +/-0.5 %
Instantaneous 0.1 % 0 s to 999999.999 s
up to 20In +/-1.0 %
groundovercurrent
up to 3In 0 s to 999999.999 s
51 +/-0.5 %
up to 30In 0.1 % (DEFT) or
Time overcurrent +/-1.0 %
see IDMT curve
0 s to 999999.999 s
51G up to 3In +/-0.5 %
0.1 % (DEFT) or
Time groundovercurrent up to 20In +/-1.0 %
see IDMT curve
59 5,0 % to 200,0 % +/-5% of tset or +/-

0.1 % +/-0.5 % 0 s to 999999.999 s
Overvoltage of Un 20ms
59N/G
5.0 % to 200,0 % +/-5% of tset or +/-
Neutral voltage 0.1 % +/-0.8 % 0 s to 999999.999 s
of Un 20ms
displacement (NVD)
+/- 5% of tset or +/-
1 to 13 0.1 +/- 0.7 0.5 to 999999.999s
60ms
78 13 to 25- - +/- 1.7- Reset delay time trip +/-10ms
Vector surge
+/-5% of tset or +/-
- - - Current increase time
50ms
81 +/-5% of tset or +/-
10 Hz to 70 Hz 0.1 % +/-10 mHz 0 s to 999999.999 s
Under-/Over frequency 65ms
0.1Hz to 1Hz +/- 0.05 Hz/s

81R
1Hz to 10Hz 0.001 Hz/s +/- 0.10 Hz/s - -
RoCoF (df/dt)
10Hz to 25Hz +/- 0.25 Hz/s
87
up to 3In +/-1.0 %
Current differential 0.1 %
up to 20In +/-2.5 %
protection

User Manual
HW v1-2.x: Overview of accuracies of measuring inputs concerning protection functions
Table 7-12 ANSI 21FL Fault locator
ANSI 21FL
CT1: 1A; PT1: 100V*/400V*

Operate quantity Set range Deviation
Fault distance (1-phase faults) for In I 10 x In; 0.1*Un U Un and 48 90 5.5% Xset
Fault distance (ph-ph faults) for In I 10 x In; 0.5*Un U Un and 50 90 6.5% Xset
Functional test Activation criterion Test result
1-phase fault (1ph-groundshort circuit) passed
Fault distance calculation depending on fault
2-phasige Kurzschlsse ohne Erdberhrung passed
type
3-phasiger Kurzschlu ohne Erdberhrung passed
Length unit km or miles passed
Cable length; reactance per km or Meile per km or miles passed
kE factor Magnitude, phase angle passed

ANSI 50/51; ANSI67; ANSI 50/51G; ANSI 67G Start fault locator passed
CT1: 5A; PT1: 100V*/400V*
Fault distance (1-phase faults) for In I 4 x In; 0.1*Un U Un and48 90 4.5% Xset
Fault distance (ph-ph faults) for In I 4 x In; 0.5*Un U Un and50 90 3% Xset
Xset is set reactance which is equal to distance (see parameter: Reactance per km/miles [P3470] = 1)
*: fn = 50Hz

User Manual
Table 7-13 ANSI 25 Synchrocheck

ANSI 25 Synchrocheck
PT1, PT2: 100V*
Magnitude min/max dU (voltage difference) at dU: +/-1% +/-10% Un** 1.5%Un**
Magnitude min/max df (frequency difference) at df: +/-0.05Hz +/-0.5Hz 10mHz
Magnitude min/max dPHI (angle difference) at dPHI: +/-0.5 +/-10 2
Magnitude min/ max voltage limit see test ANSI 27 and ANSI 59 see test ANSI 27 and ANSI 59
Magnitude min/max frequency limit see test ANSI 27 and ANSI 59 see test ANSI 27 and ANSI 59
Delay time (Synchrocheck) at tset: 0s 60s 5ms
Delay time (Voltage check) at tset: 0s 60s 5ms
PT1, PT2: 400V*
Magnitude min/max dU (voltage difference) at dU: +/-1% +/-10% Un*** 1.5%Un***
Magnitude min/max df (frequency difference) at df: +/-0.05Hz +/-0.5Hz 10mHz
Magnitude min/max dPHI (angle difference) at dPHI: +/-0.5 +/-10 0.5
Magnitude min/ max voltage limit see test ANSI 27 and ANSI 59 see test ANSI 27 and ANSI 59
Magnitude min/max frequency limit see test ANSI 27 and ANSI 59 see test ANSI 27 and ANSI 59
Delay time (Synchrocheck) see test: PT1, PT2 100V see test: PT1, PT2 100V
Delay time (Voltage check) see test: PT1, PT2 100V see test: PT1, PT2 100V
Functional test (General settings) Activation criterion Test result
Voltage reference PT1/PT2 Passed
Max. operating time (manual) at tset: 0s 600s Passed
Rotating field supervision ON/OFF Passed
Functional test (Synchrocheck) Activation criterion Test result
Min/Max voltage - Passed
Min/Max frequency - Passed
No voltage limit - Passed
Correction angle - Passed
CB closing delay at tset: 0s 1s Passed
Functional test (Voltage check) Activation criterion Test result
!PT1 & PT2; PT1 & !PT2; !PT1 & !PT2;
Function Passed
!PT1 | !PT2
Min/Max voltage - Passed
Min/Max frequency - Passed
No voltage limit - Passed
*: fn = 50Hz
**: Un = 100V
***: Un = 400V
Table 7-14 ANSI 25A Automatic Synchronizing

ANSI 25 A
PT1,PT2,PT3: 100V*
Functional test Item Test result
Frequency controller interval time Passed

Frequency controller max. pulse time Passed
Phase controller active at Passed

Phase controller
Phase controller max. pulse time Passed
Voltage controller interval time Passed

Voltage controller
Voltage controller max. pulse time Passed
*: fn = 50Hz

User Manual
Table 7-15 ANSI 27 Undervoltage protection
ANSI 27
PT1, PT2, PT3: 100V*/400V*

at Uset: 10% 60% Un** 0.9% Un**
Magnitude (voltages UL-L; UL-N)
at Uset: 60% 200% Un** 0.5% Uset
Trip time: Definite time (DT) at tset: 0s 60s 30ms or 5% of tset
Reset time: Definite time (DT) at tset: 0s 60s 40ms or 5% of tset
Activate start condition Activation-event passed
Magnitude (minimum start voltage Umin; => UL-L) see test ANSI 59 and ANSI27 see test ANSI 59 and ANSI27
Magnitude (minimum start frequency fmin) See test ANSI 81O and ANSI 81U See test ANSI 81O and ANSI 81U
*: fn = 50Hz
**: Un = 100V, 400V
Table 7-16 ANSI 27Q Reactive Power / Undervoltage protection
ANSI 27Q
CT1: 1A***, PT1: 100V***/400V***

Magnitude (voltages UL-L) see test ANSI 27 see test ANSI 27
Magnitude (positive sequence current I1) at I1set: 1% 100% In* 1% In*
Magnitude (frequency) see test ANSI 81 O/U see test ANSI 81 O/U
Magnitude (positive sequence reactive power Q1) at Q1set: 1% 75% Qn* 1% Qn*
for 1 (sin ) 0.766 at Q1set: 75% 100% Qn* 1.5% Qn*
at Q1set: 1% 40% Qn* 1% Qn*
Magnitude (positive sequence reactive power Q1)
at Q1set: 40% 50% Qn* 1.5% Qn*
for 0.766 (sin ) 0.5
at Q1set: 50% 100% Qn* 5% Qn*
CT1: 5A***, PT1: 100V***/400V***
Magnitude (positive sequence current I1) at I1set: 1% 100% In** 1% In**
Magnitude (frequency) see test ANSI 81 O/U see test ANSI 81 O/U
Magnitude (positive sequence reactive power Q1) at Q1set: 1% 50% Qn** 1% Qn**
for 1 (sin ) 0.766 at Q1set: 50% 100% Qn** 1.5% Qn**
Magnitude (positive sequence reactive power Q1) at Q1set: 1% 50% Qn** 1% Qn**
for 0.766 (sin ) 0.5 at Q1set: 50% 100% Qn** 5% Qn**
Trip time: Definite time (DT) See test CT1: 1A See test CT1: 1A
Reset time: Definite time (DT) See test CT1: 1A See test CT1: 1A
Reclosing Frequency and voltage recovering passed
Deactivation of Reclosing Parameter [P1616] passed
*: Qn = 173 [var] at 100V and Sn, Pn, Qn = 693 [var] at 400V
**: Qn = 866 [var] at 100V and Sn, Pn, Qn = 3464 [var] at 400V
*: In = 1A; **: In = 5A; ***: fn = 50Hz

User Manual
Table 7-17 ANSI 27T Undervoltage protection (time-dependent)
ANSI 27T
PT1, PT2, PT3: 100V*

Trip time Instantaneous operation 35ms
Reactivate delay time: Definite time (DT) at tset: 0s 10s 35ms

Time dependant tripping passed
Functional tests**
Time independent tripping passed
*: fn = 50Hz
**: only PT1!
Table 7-18 ANSI 32 Directional power protection
ANSI 32
CT1: 1A (test: up to 8A); PT1:100V***/400V***

at Sset: 1% 200% Sn* 1% Sn*
Magnitude (apparent power S)
at Sset: 200% 400% Sn* 0.5% Sset
at Pset; Qset: 1% 100% Pn*; Qn* 1% Pn*; Qn*
Magnitude (active power P, reactive power Q)
for 1 (cos/sin ) 0.939
at Pset; Qset: 210% 400% Pn*; Qn* 0.75% Pset; Qset
for 0.939 (cos/sin ) 0.766
at Pset; Qset: 210% 400% Pn*; Qn* 1% Pset; Qset
at Pset; Qset: 1% 50% Pn*; Qn* 2.5% Pn*; Qn*
at Pset; Qset: 50% 210% Pn*; Qn* 9.5% Pn*; Qn*
for 0.766 (cos/sin ) 0.5
at Pset; Qset: 210% 400% Pn*; Qn* 2.5% Pset; Qset
CT1: 5A (test: up to 20A); PT1: 100V***/400V***
at Sset: 1% 200% Sn** 0.5% Sn**
Magnitude (apparent power S)
at Sset: 200% 400% Sn** 1% Sn**
Magnitude (active power P, reactive power Q) at Pset; Qset: 1% 100% Pn**; Qn** 1% Pn**; Qn**
for 1 (cos/sin ) 0.939 at Pset; Qset: 100% 200% Pn**; Qn** 2% Pn**; Qn**
at Pset; Qset: 1% 50% Pn**; Qn** 1% Pn**; Qn**
for 0.939 (cos/sin ) 0.766
at Pset; Qset: 1% 30% Pn**; Qn** 1.5% Pn**; Qn**
for 0.766 (cos/sin ) 0.5
at Pset; Qset: 100% 200% Pn**; Qn** 9.5% Pn**; Qn**
Supervision modes S<; S>; P<; P>; Q<; Q>; Pr<; Pr>; Qr<; Qr> passed
*: Sn, Pn, Qn = 173 [VA, W, var] at 100V and Sn, Pn, Qn = 693 [VA, W, var] at 400V
**: Sn, Pn, Qn = 866 [VA, W, var] at 100V and Sn, Pn, Qn = 3464 [VA, W, var] at 400V
***: fn = 50Hz

User Manual
Table 7-19 ANSI 32N/G Zero power protection
ANSI 32N/G
CT-GND1: 1A (test: up to 8A); PT-GND1: 100V***

at S0,set: 1% 200% S0n* 1% S0n*
Magnitude (zero apparent power S0)
at S0,set: 200% 400% S0n* 1% S0,set
Magnitude (zero active power P0, zero reactive power Q0) at P0,set; Q0,set: 1% 100% P0n*; Q0n* 2.5% P0n*; Q0n*
for 1 (cos/sin ) 0.939 at P0,set; Q0,set: 100% 400% P0n*; Q0n* 3% P0,set; Q0,set
at P0,set; Q0,set: 1% 100% P0n*; Q0n* 6.5% P0n*; Q0n*
Magnitude (zero active power P0, zero reactive power Q0)
at P0,set; Q0,set: 100% 200% P0n*; Q0n* 5.5% P0,set; Q0,set
for 0.939 (cos/sin ) 0.766
Magnitude (zero active power P0, zero reactive power Q0) at P0,set; Q0,set: 1% 100% P0n*; Q0n* 15% P0,set; Q0,set
for 0.766 (cos/sin ) 0.5 at P0,set; Q0,set: 100% 400% P0n*; Q0n* 12.5% P0,set; Q0,set
CT-GND1: 5A (test: up to 20A); PT-GND1: 100V***
at S0,set: 1% 100% S0n** 0.5% S0n**
Magnitude (zero apparent power S0)
at S0,set: 100% 200% S0n** 0.5% S0,set
at P0,set; Q0,set: 1% 30% P0n**; Q0n** 1% P0n**; Q0n**
at P0,set; Q0,set: 30% 100% P0n**; Q0n** 3% P0,set; Q0,set
at P0,set; Q0,set: 100% 200% P0n**; Q0n** 2.5% P0,set; Q0,set
at P0,set; Q0,set: 1% 30% P0n**; Q0n** 2% P0n**; Q0n**
for 0.939 (cos/sin ) 0.766
at P0,set; Q0,set: 1% 30% P0n**; Q0n** 5.5% P0n**; Q0n**
for 0.766 (cos/sin ) 0.5
CT-GND1: 2 3000mA (test: up to 3000mA); PT-GND1: 100V***
at S0,set: 1% 30% S0n* 0.5% S0n*
Magnitude (zero apparent power S0) at S0,set: 30% 100% S0n* 1% P0,set; Q0,set
at S0,set: 100% 150% S0n* 2% P0,set; Q0,set
at P0,set; Q0,set: 1% 30% P0n*; Q0n* 1% P0n*; Q0n*
at P0,set; Q0,set: 30% 100% P0n*; Q0n* 3% P0,set; Q0,set
Magnitude (zero active power P0, zero reactive power Q0) at P0,set; Q0,set: 1% 30% P0n*; Q0n* 2.5% P0n*; Q0n*
for 0.939 (cos/sin ) 0.766 at P0,set; Q0,set: 30% 150% P0n*; Q0n* 6% P0,set; Q0,set
at P0,set; Q0,set: 1% 30% P0n*; Q0n* 6% P0n*; Q0n*
for 0.766 (cos/sin ) 0.5
S0<; S0>; P0<; P0>; Q0<; Q0>; P0r<; P0r>; Q0r<;
Supervision modes passed
Q0r>
*: S0n, P0n, Q0n = 100 [VA, W, var]
**: S0n, P0n, Q0n = 500 [VA, W, var]
***: fn = 50Hz

User Manual
Table 7-20 ANSI 37 Undercurrent protection

ANSI 37
CT1,CT2: 1A
Magnitude (phase currents: IL1, IL2, IL3) at Iset: 1% 100% In* 1%In*
Instantaneous operation 35ms

Trip time: Definite time (DT)
at tset: 0.1s 60s 35ms or 5% of tset

Reset time: Definite time (DT)
CT1,CT2: 5A
Magnitude (phase currents: IL1, IL2, IL3) at Iset: 1% 100% In** 1%In**
Trip time: Definite time (DT) See test CT1,CT2: 1A See test CT1,CT2: 1A
Reset time: Definite time (DT) See test CT1,CT2: 1A See test CT1,CT2: 1A
Reset delay time pickup / Passed
Blocking protection module/step Activation-event Passed
*: In = 1A
**: In = 5A

User Manual
Table 7-21 ANSI 46 Negative phase sequence current (NPS) protection
ANSI 46
CT1: 1A; PT1: 100V***

at Iset: 1% 100% In* 0.5% In*
Magnitude (negative phase sequence current I2) at Iset: 200% 300% In* 1% In*
at Iset: 300% 3000% In* 1% Iset
Trip time: IDMT IDMT curve (IEC, ANSI) 45ms or 5% of tcalc
Reset time: IDMT IDMT curve (IEC, ANSI) 45ms or 5% of tcalc
Trip time: IDMT curve (Thermal) IDMT curve (Thermal) 55ms or 5% of tcalc
Reset time: IDMT curve (Thermal) IDMT curve (Thermal) 45ms or 5% of tcalc
I2/In; passed
Supervision mode
I2/I1 passed
Voltage restrained Voltage dependend current limit passed
Dynamic parameters Activation-event passed
CT1: 5A
at Iset: 1% 100% In** 0.5% In**
Magnitude (negative phase sequence current: I2/In; I2/I1)
at Iset: 200% 600% In** 1% Iset
Trip time: IDMT IDMT curve (IEC, ANSI) 45ms or 5% of tcalc
Reset time: IDMT IDMT curve (IEC, ANSI) 45ms or 5% of tcalc
Trip time: IDMT curve (Thermal) IDMT curve (Thermal) 55ms or 5% of tcalc
Reset time: IDMT curve (Thermal) IDMT curve (Thermal) 45ms or 5% of tcalc
I2/In; passed
Supervision mode
I2/I1 passed
*: In = 1A
**: In = 5A
***: fn = 50Hz

User Manual
Table 7-22 ANSI 47 Negative phase sequence voltage protection

ANSI 47
PT1,PT2,PT3: 100V*
Magnitude (negative phase sequence voltage U2) at Uset: 2% 200% Un** 1,2% Un**

at tset: 0s 60s 50ms or 5% of tset

PT1,PT2,PT3: 400V*
Magnitude (negative phase sequence voltage U2) at Uset: 2% 100% Un*** 1% Un***


*: fn = 50Hz
**: Un = 100V
***: Un = 400V

User Manual
Table 7-23 ANSI 49 Thermal replica
ANSI 49
CT1: 1A
Trip time calculation accuracy t(Ieq) *** (Ieq: 120% IB 500% IB) at IB: 10%In* 100% In*; t: 10s 3000s 5% Icalc or 1s
Trip time delay: Warning limit at tset: 0s 60s 10ms
Trip time delay: Trip limit at tset: 0s 60s 10ms
Warning limit at (t): 50% 100% passed
Trip limit at (t): 50% 100% passed
Basic current factor k at k: 0.5 3 passed

volatile passed
Store thermal limit
non-volatile passed
Current heating threshold - passed
CT1: 5A
Trip time calculation accuracy t(Ieq) *** (Ieq: 120% IB 500% IB) at IB: 10%In** 100% In**; t: 10s 3000s 5% Icalc or 1s
Trip time delay: Warning limit at tset: 0s 60s 10ms
Trip time delay: Trip limit at tset: 0s 60s 10ms
Warning limit See test: CT1 = 1A See test: CT1 = 1A
Trip limit See test: CT1 = 1A See test: CT1 = 1A
Basic current factor k See test: CT1 = 1A See test: CT1 = 1A
Store thermal limit See test: CT1 = 1A See test: CT1 = 1A
Current heating threshold See test: CT1 = 1A See test: CT1 = 1A
*: In = 1A
**: In = 5A
***: Trip time depends on equivalent heating current Ieq
****: (t): Thermal level at time t
Table 7-24 ANSI 50BF Breaker failure protection
ANSI 50BF
CT1: 1A
Magnitude (phase currents: IL1, IL2, IL3) see test ANSI 67* see test ANSI 67*
*: In = 1A
NOTE: CT1 = 5A: see test ANSI 67!

User Manual
Table 7-25 ANSI 51/46VR Voltage restrained protection
ANSI 51/46VR
CT1: 5A; PT1, PT2, PT3: 100V*

Voltage dependent tripping passed
Functional mode Blocking passed
Blocking protection passed
*: fn = 50Hz
Table 7-26 ANSI 50/51 Overcurrent protection
ANSI 50/51
CT1: 1A; PT1: 100V*

Magnitude (phase currents: IL1, IL2, IL3) see test ANSI 67** see ANSI 67**
Trip time: IDMT IDMT curve (IEC, ANSI) see test ANSI 67
Reset time: IDMT IDMT curve (IEC, ANSI) see test ANSI 67
*: fn = 50Hz
**: In = 1A
NOTE: CT1 = 5A: see test ANSI 67!
Table 7-27 ANSI 50/51G Ground overcurrent protection
ANSI 50/51G
CT-GND1: 1A
Magnitude (ground current IG) see test ANSI 67G* see test ANSI 67G*
Trip time: IDMT IDMT curve (IEC, ANSI) see test ANSI 67G
Reset time: IDMT IDMT curve (IEC, ANSI) see test ANSI 67G
*: In = 1A
NOTE: CT-GND1 = 5A and CT-GND1 = 2 3000mA: see test ANSI 67G!

User Manual
Table 7-28 ANSI 52 Pole discordance protection

ANSI 52
CT1: 1A
Magnitude (phase currents: IL1, IL2, IL3) see test ANSI 37 see test ANSI 37

CT1: 5A

Auxiliary contacts (Open L1, L2 and L3) Activation-event Passed
Auxiliary contacts (Close L1, L2 and L3) Activation-event Passed
External pole discordance detection Activation-event Passed
Table 7-29 ANSI 59 (incl. ANSI 59AV) Overvoltage protection
ANSI 59 / ANSI 59AV
PT1, PT2, PT3: 100V*/400V*

at Uset: 10% 60% Un** 0.9% Un**
Magnitude (voltages UL-L; UL-N)
at Uset: 60% 200% Un** 0.5% Uset
ANSI 59AV: Uavg 10 min pickup source 10 min average overvoltage Passed
Voltage reference L-L or L-N Passed
*: fn = 50Hz
**: Un = 100V, 400V
Table 7-30 ANSI 59N/G Neutral voltage displacement (NVD) protection
ANSI 59N/G
PT-GND1: 100V*
Magnitude (residiual voltage UG) at Uset: 1% 100% Un** 0.5% Uset
PT1, PT2, PT3: 100V*
at Uset: 1% 70% Un** 0.5% Uset
Magnitude (voltages UL-N => calculated residiual voltage UG)
at Uset: 70% 100% Un** 1% Uset
PT1, PT2, PT3: 400V*
at Uset: 1% 70% Un*** 0.5% Uset
Magnitude (voltages UL-N => calculated residiual voltage UG)
at Uset: 70% 100% Un*** 1% Uset

User Manual
*: fn = 50Hz
**: Un = 100V
***: Un = 400V

User Manual
Table 7-31 ANSI 64REF Restricted earth fault protection
ANSI 64REF
CT1: 1A; CT-GND1: 1A
at Id: 1% 300 In* 1% In*

Magnitude (differential ground current Id)
at Id: 300% 2000 In* 1%Iset
at Istab: 4% 200% In* 2% In*

Magnitude (stabilisation current Istab)
at Istab: 200% 1000% In* 1%Iset
Trip time: Step 1 at tset: 0s 60s 35ms
Trip time: Step 2 at tset: 0s 60s 35ms
CT1: 5A; CT-GND1: 5A
at Id: 1% 100 In** 1% In**

Magnitude (differential ground current Id)
at Id: 100% 1000 In** 1%Iset
at Istab: 4% 200% In** 1% In**

at Istab: 200% 1000% In** 1%Iset
Trip time: Step 1 see test: CT1: 1A; CT-GND1: 1A see test: CT1: 1A; CT-GND1: 1A
CT1: 1A; CT-GND1: 2mA-3000mA
at Id: 1% 100 In* 1% In*

Magnitude (differential ground current Id) at Id: 100% 500 In* 1%Iset
at Id: 500% 600 In* 4%Iset
at Istab: 4% 200% In* 1% In**

at Istab: 200% 1000% In* 1%Iset
ID>> / Passed
Hysteresis / Passed
Harmonic stabiliser / Passed
Blocking protection module/step / Passed
Settable curve / Passed
*: In = 1A
**: In = 5A

User Manual
Table 7-32 ANSI 67 Directional overcurrent protection
ANSI 67
CT1: 1A; PT1: 100V*/400V*

Protection core:
at Iset: 12% 75% In** 0.5% In**
at Iset: 75% 200% In** 1% In**
Magnitude (phase currents: IL1, IL2, IL3) at Iset: 200% 2000% In** 0.5% Iset
at Iset: 2000% 3000% In** 1% Iset *
Measuring core:
at Iset: 1% 200% In** 0.5% In*
Protection core:
at Iset: 13% 16% In** 2.5
at Iset: 16% 22% In** 2
at Iset: 22% 75% In** 1.5
at Iset: 75% 2000% In** 1
Angle (between phase current and reference voltage Uref) Measuring core:
at Iset: 2% 4% In** 6
at Iset: 4% 6% In** 3.5
at Iset: 6% 14% In** 2.5
at Iset: 14% 20% In** 1.5
at Iset: 20% 200% In** 1
Trip time (non-directional feature): Definite time (DT)
Reset time (non-directional feature): Definite time (DT)
Trip time (non-directional feature): IDMT IDMT curve (IEC, ANSI) 35ms or 5% of tset
Reset time (non-directional feature): IDMT IDMT curve (IEC, ANSI) 40ms or 5% of tset
Trip time (directional feature): Definite time (DT)
at tset: 0.1s 60s 75ms or 6.5% of tset
Reset time (directional feature): Definite time (DT)
Trip time (directional feature): IDMT IDMT curve (IEC, ANSI) 65ms or 5% of tset
Reset time (directional feature): IDMT IDMT curve (IEC, ANSI) 70ms or 5% of tset
Blocked passed
Voltage low mode
Non-directional operation passed
CT1: 5A; PT1: 100V*/400V*
Protection core:
at Iset: 12% 100% In*** 0.5% In***
Magnitude (phase currents: IL1, IL2, IL3) at Iset: 100% 600% In*** 1% Iset
Measuring core:
at Iset: 1% 200% In*** 0,5% In***
Protection core:
at Iset: 12% 16% In*** 6
at Iset: 16% 22% In*** 2.5
at Iset: 22% 30% In*** 2
at Iset: 30% 75% In*** 1.5
Angle (between phase current and reference voltage Uref) at Iset: 75% 400% In*** 1
Measuring core:
at Iset: 2% 4% In*** 7
at Iset: 4% 6% In*** 3
at Iset: 6% 16% In*** 2.5
at Iset: 16% 200% In*** 1
Trip time (non-directional): IDMT IDMT curve (IEC, ANSI) 35ms or 5% of tset
Reset time (non-directional): IDMT IDMT curve (IEC, ANSI) 35ms or 5% of tset
Trip time (directional): IDMT IDMT curve (IEC, ANSI) 65ms or 5% of tset

User Manual
Reset time (directional): IDMT IDMT curve (IEC, ANSI) 70ms or 5% of tset
*: fn = 50Hz; **: In = 1A; ***: In = 5A
Table 7-33 ANSI 67G Directional ground overcurrent protection
ANSI 67G
CT-GND1: 1A; PT-GND1: 100V*

at Iset: 2% 100% In** 0.5% In**
Magnitude (ground current IG) at Iset: 100% 2000% In** 1% Iset
at Iset: 2000% 3000% In** 2.5% Iset
at Iset: 2% 8% In** 6
Angle (between ground current and residual voltage) at Iset: 8% 20% In** 2.5
at Iset: 20% 500% In** 1
Trip time: IDMT IDMT curve (IEC, ANSI) 40ms or 5% of tset
Reset time: IDMT IDMT curve (IEC, ANSI) 40ms or 5% of tset

Blocked passed
Voltage low mode
Non-directional operation passed
CT-GND1: 5A; PT-GND1: 100V*
at Iset: 5% 100% In*** 0.5% In***
Magnitude (ground current IG)
at Iset: 100% 600% In*** 1% Iset
at Iset: 2% 8% In*** 6
Angle (between ground current and residual voltage) at Iset: 8% 12% In*** 2
at Iset: 12% 400% In*** 1
CT-GND1: 2 3000mA (sensitive input); PT-GND1: 100V*
at Iset: 0.2% 10% In** <1mA
at Iset: 10% 100% In** 0.6% In**
Magnitude (ground current IG)
at Iset: 100% 250% In** 1% Iset
at Iset: 250% 285% In** 3.5% Iset
at Iset: 0.2% 0,5% In** 6
Angle (between ground current and residual voltage) at Iset: 0.5% 2% In** 3
at Iset: 2% 280% In** 1

*: fn = 50Hz
**: In = 1A
***: In = 5A

User Manual
Table 7-34 ANSI 74TC Trip circuit supervision
ANSI 74TC
Binary inputs: Fct. 26, Fct. 27; Binary output: Shunt trip 1
Functional test Set mode Test result

Both passed
Supervision modes Closed passed
Open passed
Table 7-35 ANSI 78 Vector surge protection
ANSI 78
PT1: 100V* (tested at nominal voltage and nominal frequency)

Magnitude (voltage angle difference ) at set: 1 25 0.5
Reset delay time trip (test only for PT1: 100V) at tset: 0.25s 60s 5ms or 5% of tset
Minimum start voltage delay time (test only for PT1: 100V) at tset: 0.5s 60s 20ms or 5% of tset
Current increase time (test only for PT1: 100V) at tset: 0.05s 60s 5ms or 5% of tset
PT2: 100V/400V (tested at nominal voltage and nominal frequency)
at set: 1 20 0.5
Magnitude (voltage angle difference )
at set: 20 25 1
PT3: 100V/400V (tested at nominal voltage and nominal frequency)

G59 device type PT1: 100V/400V (tested at nominal voltage and nominal frequency)

G59 device type PT2: 100V/400V (tested at nominal voltage and nominal frequency)
at set: 1 6 0.5
Magnitude (voltage angle difference ) at set: 6 15 1
at set: 15 25 2
K1 factor K1 * Limit passed
Magnitude (minimum start voltage voltages UL-L) see test ANSI 27 and ANSI 59 see test ANSI 27 and ANSI 59
OR passed
Pickup mode
AND passed
*: fn = 50Hz

User Manual
Table 7-36 ANSI 79 Automatic reclosing (AR)
ANSI 79

Timer: Pause time at tset: 0s 60s 15ms or 5% of tset
Lock and Unlock passed
Activate passed
Pause time passed
Breaker close command passed
Feature
Breaker close success passed
Off time passed
Breaker closed passed
Breaker ready passed
Table 7-37 ANSI 81 Frequency protection
ANSI 81O Overfrequency
PT1, PT2, PT3: 100V*/400V*

Magnitude (frequency) at fset: 100.4% 200% fn* 2mHz
ANSI 81U Underfrequency
PT1, PT2, PT3: 100V*/400V*

Magnitude (frequency) at fset 80% 99.6% fn* 2mHz
*: fn = 50Hz

User Manual
Table 7-38 ANSI 81R Rate of change of frequency (ROCOF) protection (standard device)
ANSI 81R
PT1: 100V* (standard device**)
at dfset: 5mHz/s 600mHz/s 45mHz/s

Magnitude (df/dt)
at dfset: 600mHz/s 10Hz/s 35mHz/s
Trip time (positive and negative direction) at tset: 0s 200ms 90ms
Min. start voltage( UL-L) see test ANSI 27 and ANSI 59 see test ANSI 27 and ANSI 59
Min. start voltage delay time at tset: 0s 60s 40ms
df/dt passed
f> & df/dt passed
Mode f< & df/dt passed
f> & DF/DT passed
f< & DF/DT passed
none passed
Direction positive passed
negative passed
f> & f< limits see test ANSI 81O and ANSI 81U see test ANSI 81O and ANSI 81U
Hysteresis K2 * (Limit Hysteresis) passed
DF DF Limit passed
DT DT Limit passed
Blocking protection module/step Activation-event passed
*: fn = 50Hz; **: Parameter Logic works only on G59 device variant!
Table 7-39 ANSI 81R Rate of change of frequency (ROCOF) protection (G59)
ANSI 81R
PT1: 100V* (G59**)
Magnitude (df/dt) at dfset: 130mHz/s 10Hz/s 150mHz/s
Trip time (positive and negative direction) at tset: 0s 200ms 90ms
Min. start voltage( UL-L) see test ANSI 27 and ANSI 59 see test ANSI 27 and ANSI 59
Min. start voltage delay time at tset: 0s 60s 40ms
df/dt passed
f> & df/dt passed
Mode f< & df/dt passed
f> & DF/DT passed
f< & DF/DT passed
none passed
Direction positive passed
negative passed
f> & f< limits see test ANSI 81O and ANSI 81U see test ANSI 81O and ANSI 81U
Hysteresis K2 * (Limit Hysteresis) passed
DF DF Limit passed
DT DT Limit passed
Logic AND/OR passed
Blocking protection module/step Activation-event passed

*: fn = 50Hz; **: Parameter Logic works only on G59 device variant!

User Manual
Table 7-40 ANSI 86 Lockout Relay
ANSI 86
Functional test Set mode Test result

RS-FF Volatile passed
SR-FF Volatile passed
Function mode
RS-FF Non-volatile passed
SR-FF Non-volatile passed
Table 7-41 ANSI 95i Harmonics stabilizer
ANSI 95i
CT1: 1A
Operate quantity Test range (phase current) Set range (IH/IFH) Deviation
at I2H,set: 1% 15% IFH* 0.5% IFH*
2nd (2H) harmonic (phase currents: IL1, IL2, IL3) at IFH,test: 300% 1000% In** at I2H,set: 15% 50% IFH* 1% IFH*
at I5H,set: 1% 15% IFH* 0.5% IFH*
5th (5H) harmonic (phase currents: IL1, IL2, IL3) at IFH,test: 300% 1000% In** at I5H,set: 15% 50% IFH* 1% IFH*
CT-GND1: 1A
Operate quantity Test range (ground current) Set range (IH/IFH) Deviation
nd
2 (2H) harmonic (ground current IG) at IFH,test: 300% 1000% In** at I2H,set: 1% 50% IFH* 0.5% IFH*
th
5 (5H) harmonic (ground current IG) at IFH,test: 300% 1000% In** at I5H,set: 1% 50% IFH* 1% IFH*
CT1: 5A
Operate quantity Test range (phase current) Set range (IH/IFH) Deviation
at I2H,set: 1% 15% IFH* 0.5% IFH*
2nd (2H) harmonic (phase currents: IL1, IL2, IL3) at IFH,test: 100% 260% In*** at I5H,set: 15% 50% IFH* 1% IFH*
at I2H,set: 1% 15% IFH* 1% IFH*
5th (5H) harmonic (phase currents: IL1, IL2, IL3) at IFH,test: 100% 260% In*** at I5H,set: 15% 50% IFH* 1% IFH*
CT-GND1: 5A
at I2H,set: 1% 15% IFH* 0.5% IFH*
2nd (2H) harmonic (ground current IG) at IFH,test: 100% 260% In*** at I5H,set: 15% 50% IFH* 1% IFH*
5th (5H) harmonic (ground current IG) at IFH,test: 100% 260% In*** at I5H,set: 15% 50% IFH* 1% IFH*
CT-GND1: 2 3000mA (sensitive input)
at I2H,set: 1% 3% IFH* 3.5% IFH*
2nd (2H) harmonic (ground current IG) at IFH,test: 50% 200% In** at I2H,set: 3% 15% IFH* 2% IFH*
at IFH,test: 50% 100% In** at I5H,set: 3% 15% IFH* 6% IFH*
5th (5H) harmonic (ground current IG) at I5H,set: 15% 50% IFH* 1% IFH*
at IFH,test: 100% 200% In** at I5H,set: 1% 50% IFH* 1% IFH*
*: portion of current at Fundamental Harmonic (50Hz)
**: In = 1A;
***: In = 5A;

User Manual
Table 7-42 CLD Cold Load Detection
CLD Cold Load Detection
CT1: 1A
I< passed
Event passed
Supervision modes
I< OR Event passed
I< AND Event passed
Table 7-43 CTS Current Transformer Supervision
CTS
CT1: 1A, CT-GND1: 1A

Magnitude (ground current IG) see test ANSI 67G see test ANSI 67G
Symmetry check:
Delay time: Definite time (DT)
Diff check:
Symmetry check passed
Min. start current passed
Supervision mode Diff check passed
Diff. current limit passed
Correction factor passed

User Manual
Table 7-44 DVCM DC Voltage Monitoring

DCVM
PT1, PT2, PT3: 100V*/400V*
at Uset: 3% 160% Un** 1.3% Un**
at Uset: 160% 200% Un** 0.9% Uset

Magnitude (DC voltage UDC)
at Uset: 3% 50% Un*** 0.6% Un***
at Uset: 50% 130% Un*** 1.1% Uset
at Uset: 3% 100% Un** 1% Un**
at Uset: 100% 200% Un** 0.9% Uset

Magnitude (GF+ pole voltage)
at Uset: 3% 50% Un*** 0.5% Un***
at Uset: 50% 130% Un*** 1.1% Uset
at Uset: 3% 100% Un** 2.5% Un**
at Uset: 100% 200% Un** 2.2% Uset

Magnitude (GF- pole voltage)
at Uset: 3% 50% Un*** 1% Un***
at Uset: 50% 130% Un*** 1.2% Uset
UDCnom = 12V passed
UDCnom = 24V passed
UDCnom = 48V passed
Nominal DC voltages UDCnom = 60V passed
UDCnom = 125V passed
UDCnom = 220V passed
UDCnom= 250V passed
*: fn = 50Hz
**: Un = 110VDC
***: Un = 440VDC

User Manual
Table 7-45 PTS Potential Transformer Supervision
PTS
CT1: 1A; PT1, PT2, PT3, 100V*; PT-GND1: 100V*

Magnitude (voltages UL-L, UL-N) see test ANSI 27, ANSI 59 see test ANSI 27, ANSI 59
Magnitude (ground voltage UG) see test ANSI 59N/G see test ANSI 59N/G
Symmetry check:
Fuse Fail check:
Delay time: Definite time (DT)
General check:
Symmetry check passed
Min. start voltage passed
Symmetry quotient passed
Fuse failure check passed
Asymmetric fuse failure passed
Supervision mode 3-Phase fuse failure passed
Voltage difference passed
General check passed
CB closed Feedback passed
Voltage limit passed
Min/Max current limit passed
*: fn = 50Hz
Table 7-46 SOTF Switch on to fault protection
SOTF
CT1: 1A
Magnitude (phase currents: IL1, IL2, IL3) see test ANSI 67 see ANSI 67
Trigger pulse Set trigger pulse duration passed
NOTE: For CT1 = 5A: see test ANSI 67!

User Manual
Table 7-47 TIG Transient/Intermittend ground fault protection
TIG
CT-GND1: 1A (test: up to 20A); PT-GND1: 100V*

Magnitude (Min. ground voltage UG) see test ANSI 59N/G see test ANSI 59N/G
Magnitude (Absolute limit IG) see test ANSI 67G see test ANSI 67G
Magnitude (Relative limit |IG, max|/IG, TRMS) see test ANSI 67G see test ANSI 67G**
Counter trip value 1 10 -
Reset time at tset: 0.1s 60s 40ms or 5% of tset
Min. trip time at tset: 0.1s 60s 5ms
*: fn = 50Hz
**: max. deviation is IG * 2
Table 7-48 YG Neutral admittance ground fault protection
YG
CT-GND1: 1A (test: up to 20A); PT-GND1: 100V*

Magnitude (neutral admittance Y0, neutral conductance at Yset; Gset; Bset: 0,2mS 30mS 0.4% Yn**; Gn**; Bn**
G0, neutral susceptance B0) at Yset; Gset; Bset: 30mS 40mS 1% Yset; Gset; Bset
CT-GND1: 2 3000mA (sensitive input; test: up to 2800mA); PT-GND1: 100V*
at Yset; Gset; Bset: 0.01mS 1mS 0.04% Yn**; Gn**; Bn**
Magnitude (neutral admittance Y0, neutral conductance at Yset; Gset; Bset: 1mS 20mS 0.5% Yset; Gset; Bset
G0, neutral susceptance B0) at Yset; Gset; Bset: 20mS 50mS 0.7% Yset; Gset; Bset
at Yset; Gset; Bset: 50mS 60mS 2% Yset; Gset; Bset
Trip time: Definite time (DT) see test: CT-GND1: 1A; PT-GND1 see test: CT-GND1: 1A; PT-GND1
Reset time: Definite time (DT) see test: CT-GND1: 1A; PT-GND1 see test: CT-GND1: 1A; PT-GND1
Magnitude (minimum start voltage UG) see test ANSI 59N/G see test ANSI 27 and ANSI 59
Magnitude (minimum start current IG) see test ANSI 50/51G see test ANSI 50/51G
*: fn = 50Hz
**: Yn; Gn; Bn: nominal values accord to primary set values of CT-GND1 and PT-GND1

User Manual
Table 7-49 LVM Limit value monitoring

LVM
CT1,CT2: 5A; PT1,PT2,PT3,PT-GND1: 100V*; Analog Input 1-4

Voltage limits Low limit/High limit Passed
Current limits Low limit/High limit Passed
Power limits Low limit/High limit Passed
Power factor limits Low limit/High limit Passed
Frequency limits Low limit/High limit Passed
Analog input limits Low limit/High limit Passed
*: fn = 50Hz
NOTE: Other protection and monitoring functions have not been type-tested yet!

User Manual
7.4 Binary Inputs and Outputs
7.4.1 Binary Inputs
Table 7-50 HW v1-1.x: Specifications of binary inputs of the SYMAP-Compact(+) device

variants
Number 5 pcs or 19 pcs (depending on device variant)

Voltage range 5 -230 V AC/DC
X2.3:30 (Function 10) 20ms
X2.5:66 (Function 24) 20ms
Max. turn-on delax
General X2.3:31 to 43 50ms
X2.5:67 to 70 50ms
X2.3:30 (Function 10) < 1ms
X2.5:66 (Function 24) < 1ms
Max. turn.off delay
X2.3:31 to 43 100 ms
X2.5:67 to 70 100 ms
Power consumption 0,5W 30%
Max. current 7mA
HIGH level 5,1mA 10%
10 75V DC
LOW level 4,1mA 10%
Kurzschluss1 5,9mA < x < 6,1mA
Drahtbruch 2mA < x < 3mA
DC
Max. current 3,5mA
HIGH level 1,7mA 10%
75 230V DC
LOW level 1,4mA 10%
Kurzschluss 2,2mA < x < 2,3mA
Drahtbruch 0,75mA < x < 1mA
Max. current 4mA 10%
10 75V AC
HIGH level x > 2,5mA
LOW level 2,2mA < x < 1,2mA
AC
Max. current 2mA
75 230V AC
HIGH level x > 0,95mA
LOW level 0,6mA < x < 0,4mA
1
Short circuit and wire break only for DC!

User Manual
Table 7-51 HW v1-2.x: Specifications of binary inputs (BI) of the SYMAP-Compact(+) device
variants
Number of BIs depends on device variant

Number SYMAP-Compact: 7 BIs (Standard)
Generally SYMAP-Compact+ : 18 BIs (Standard)
24/48/60/220V DC, 110V AC/DC, 230V AC (parameterizable)
Voltage
NOTE: maximum permitted voltage for all BIs = 270V AC/DC
BIs Fct.10 to Fct 25: X2.3:34 to 45 and X2.5:66 to 70 13 ms
Max. turn-on delay
BIs Fct.26 and Fct 27: X2.3:30 to X2.3:33 40 ms
Max. turn-off delay
BIs Fct.10 to Fct 25: X2.3:34 to 45 and X2.5:66 to 70 8,16 mW
Power consumption
BIs Fct.26 and Fct 27: X2.3:30 to X2.3:33 4,32 mW
24V DC
BIs Fct.10 to Fct 25: X2.3:34 to 45 and X2.5:66 to 70 0,34 mA
Current
BIs Fct.26 and Fct 27: X2.3:30 to X2.3:33 0,18 mA
BIs Fct.10 to Fct 25: X2.3:34 to 45 and X2.5:66 to 70 18 V
HIGH level
BIs Fct.26 and Fct 27: X2.3:30 to X2.3:33 19 V
BIs Fct.10 to Fct 25: X2.3:34 to 45 and X2.5:66 to 70 7V
LOW level
BIs Fct.26 and Fct 27: X2.3:30 to X2.3:33 8V
Max. turn-on delay
Max. turn-off delay
Power consumption
48V DC
Current
HIGH level
LOW level
Max. turn-on delay
Max. turn-off delay
Power consumption
60V DC
Current
HIGH level
LOW level
Max. turn-on delay
Max. turn-off delay
BIs Fct.10 to Fct 25: X2.3:34 to 45 and X2.5:66 to 70 174 mW
Power consumption
110V DC BIs Fct.26 and Fct 27: X2.3:30 to X2.3:33 88 mW
Current
HIGH level
LOW level BIs Fct.10 to Fct 25: X2.3:34 to 45 and X2.5:66 to 70 38 V

User Manual
Max. turn-on delay
Max. turn-off delay
Power consumption
BIs Fct.26 and Fct 27: X2.3:30 to X2.3:33 352 mW
220V DC
Current
HIGH level
LOW level
Max. turn-on delay
Max. turn-off delay
Power consumption
110V AC
Current
HIGH level
LOW level
Max. turn-on delay
Max. turn-off delay
Power consumption
BIs Fct.26 and Fct 27: X2.3:30 to X2.3:33 215 mW
230V AC
Current
HIGH level
LOW level

User Manual
7.4.1.3 Extension board system EBS Hardware version v1-0.x
Table 7-52 EB-PS Specification of binary inputs (BIs)
Number 3 ninary inputs (BIs); rooted COM
General 24/48/60/220V DC, 110V AC/DC, 230V AC (parameterizable)
Voltages
NOTE: max. permissible voltage for all BIs = 270V AC/DC
Max. turn-on delay 10ms
Max. turn-off delay 10ms
Power consumption 1,2mW
24V DC BIs Fct.1 to Fct 3: X2:1 to 4
Current 50A
HIGH level parameterizable
Max. Einschaltverzgerung 10ms
Max. Ausschaltverzgerung 10ms
Leistungsaufnahme 4,8mW
Strom 100A
HIGH-Pegel parameterizable
LOW-Pegel parameterizable
Max. Einschaltverzgerung 10ms
Max. Ausschaltverzgerung 11ms
Leistungsaufnahme 7,5mW
Strom 125A
HIGH-Pegel parameterizable
LOW-Pegel parameterizable
Current 230A
Current 460A
110V AC BIs Fct.1 to Fct 3: X2:1 to 4
Current 254A
230V AC BIs Fct.1 to Fct 3: X2:1 to 4
Current 531A

User Manual
Table 7-53 EB-BI8-A Specification of binary inputs (BIs)
Number 8 binary inputs (BIs); 2 groups by 4 BIs each, rooted COM
General 24/48/60/220V DC, 110V AC/DC, 230V AC (parameterizable)
Voltages
Power consumption BIs Fct.1 to Fct 4: X1:1 to 6 and 1,2mW
24V DC
Current BIs Fct.5 to Fct 8: X1:7 to 12 50A
48V DC
60V DC
110V DC
220V DC
110V AC
230V AC

User Manual
Table 7-54 EB-BI10-OC Specification of binary inputs (BIs)
Number 10 binary inputs (BIs); 2 groups by 5 BIs each, rooted COM
General 24/48/60/220V DC, 110V AC/DC, 230V AC (not parameterizable => see
Voltages ordering information!)
Max. turn-on delay In process (type test)
Max. turn-off delay In process (type test)
Power consumption BIs Fct.1 to Fct 5: X1:1 to 6 and In process (type test)
24V DC
Current BIs Fct.6 to Fct 10: X1:7 to 12 In process (type test)
HIGH level In process (type test)
48V DC
60V DC
110V DC
220V DC

User Manual
7.4.2 Binary Outputs
Table 7-55 HW v1-1.x: Specifications of binary outputs of the SYMAP-Compact(+) device

variants
Designation Description Specification
General
Number 5 pcs or 12 pcs (depending on device variant)
NOTE For switching of inductive loads by DC voltage: Protective circuit
with flywheel diode for output contacts is required!
For switching of inductive loads by AC voltage: Protective circuit
with varistor for output contacts is required!
Contact load
Rated voltage (AC) 250V (AC*)
Max. Switching voltage 300V DC; 400V AC
Continuous current 8A (AC/DC)
Max. making current 15A (AC/DC) for 4s
Max. breaking capacity (AC) 2000VA
Sync. 1 ON Max. breaking capacity (DC)
(2 normally open 24V 192W
contacts in series) 48V 384W
60V 300W
110V 88W
220V 66W
Contact switching times
Mechanical contact life-cycle > 2 x 106 Operating cycles (ON->OFF->ON, or OFF->ON->OFF)
Contact load
Shunt 1 (Trip),
Shunt 2
(normally open
contacts)
Max. breaking capacity (DC)
NOTE:
24V 192W
The normally
48V 96W
open (NO)
60V 60W
contact is
110V 66W
designated for
220V 88W
tripping the
connected circuit
breaker!
Contact load
LOCKOUT Max. breaking capacity (DC)
(normally open 24V 192W
contact) 48V 100W
60V 60W
110V 33W
220V 55W

User Manual
Contact load
Function 1 Max. making current 10A (AC/DC) for 4s
Function 2 Max. breaking capacity (AC) 1500A
Function 3 Max. breaking capacity (DC)
Function 4 24V 144W
Function 5 48V 19,2W
contacts) 110V 22W
220V 33W
Mechanical contact life-cycle 10 x 106 Operating cycles (ON->OFF->ON, or OFF->ON->OFF)
Contact load
Function 6 Max. breaking capacity (AC) 2000VA
Function 7 Max. breaking capacity (DC)
Function 8 24V 192W
contacts) 60V 60W
110V 55W
220V 66W
*: U = URMS

User Manual
Table 7-56 HW v1-2.x: Specifications of binary outputs of the SYMAP-Compact(+) device

variants
General
Number: 5 pcs or 12 pcs (depending on device variant)
Contact load
Rated voltage (AC) 250V (AC)
Sync. 1 ON Max. breaking capacity (DC)
(2 normally open 24V 144W
contacts in series) 48V 19,2W
60V 18W
110V 22W
220V 33W
Contact load
Shunt Trip 1 Max. making current 30A (AC/DC) for 4s
(change-over contact) Max. breaking capacity (AC) 4000VA
NOTE: 24V 288W
The normally open (NO) 48V 63W
contact is designated for 60V 48W
tripping the connected 110V 44W
circuit breaker! 220V 66W
Contact load
Shunt Trip 2 Max. making current 30A (AC/DC) for 4s
(normally open contact) Max. breaking capacity (AC) 4000VA
NOTE: 24V 288W
The normally open (NO) 48V 53W
contact is designated for 60V 48W
tripping the connected 110V 44W
circuit breaker! 220V 66W
Contact load
Max. Switching voltage 300V DC; 400 VAC
LOCKOUT Max. making current 15A (AC/DC) for 4s
(normally open contact) Max. breaking capacity (AC) 2000VA
24V 192W
48V 100W
60V 60W
110V 33W

User Manual
220V 55W
Contact load
24V 144W
Function 1 48V 19,2W
Function 2 60V 18W
Function 3 110V 22W
Function 4 220V 33W
Function 5 Contact switching times
Function 6 Max. turn-on delay 12ms
(normally open Max. turn-off delay 5ms
contacts) Mechanical contact life-cycle 10 x 106 Operating cycles (ON->OFF->ON, or OFF->ON->OFF)
NOTE: Function 1 and Function 2 relay contacts are connected
to the same common (rooted contact)! Thus, total
continuous current for the rooted contact of Function 1
and Function 2 contacts must not exceed 6A!
Function 3 to Function 6 relay contacts are connected to
the same common (rooted contact)! Thus, total continuous
current for the rooted contact of Function 3 to Function
6 contacts must not exceed 6A!
Contact load
Function 7
Function 8 (Watchdog)
24V 192W
(normally open
48V 96W
contacts)
60V 60W
110V 55W
220V 66W
*: U = URMS

User Manual
7.4.2.3 Erweiterungsboardsystem EBS Hardwareversion v1-0.x
Table 7-57 EB-PS Specification of binary output (BO)
General
Number 1 BO (change-over contact)
Contact load
Max. Switching voltage 300V DC; 400 V AC
Max. making current 25A (AC/DC) or 4s
Fct 1 24V 288W
(change-over 48V 63W
contact) 60V 48W
110V 44W
220V 66W
Max. turn-on delay
Mechanical contact life-cycle 6ms
> 30 x 103 Operating cycles (ON->OFF->ON, or OFF->ON->OFF)
*: U = URMS
Table 7-58 EB-BO4-R Specification of binary outputs (BOs)
General
Number 4 BOs (change-over contact)
Contact load
Max. Switching voltage 300V DC; 400 V AC
Max. making current 25A (AC/DC) or 4s
Fct 1 Max. breaking capacity (AC) 3000VA
Fct 2 Max. breaking capacity (DC)
Fct 3 24V 288W
Fct 4 48V 63W
(change-over 60V 48W
contacts) 110V 44W
220V 66W
*: U = URMS

User Manual
Table 7-59 EB-BO6-R Specification of binary outputs (BOs)
General
Number 6 BOs (normal open contact)
Contact load
Max. Switching voltage 300V DC; 400 VAC
Fct 1 Max. making current 15A (AC/DC) or 4s
Fct 2 Max. breaking capacity (AC) 2000VA
Fct 3 Max. breaking capacity (DC)
Fct 4 24V 192W
Fct 5 48V 96W
Fct 6 60V 60W
(normal open 110V 55W
contacts) 220V 66W
*: U = URMS

User Manual
7.5 U/I Measuring Inputs Hazardous live voltage (HLV)
Table 7-60 HW v1-1.x: Specifications of the SYMAP-Compact(+) current measuring inputs

(CT: conventional current transformers)
No. Description Specification

Current measuring inputs: CT1, CT2, CT3, CT-GND1, CT-GND2,
frequency: 45 Hz to 65 Hz
Nominal current In: 1A or 5A
Meas. range: 0 to 20 x In => Tolerance: 0,5% In
20 to 40 x In => Tolerance: 5% In
Accuracy*: 0,2% at 0 to 2 x In (M: measuring transformer);
0,5% at 2 to 20 x In (P: protection transformer)
Relative accuracy refers to full scale value (2 x In or 20 x In)!
Accuracy of angle measurement Current/Voltage:

at I < 20% In: +/- 2
Load per phase 1A: at 1 x In: approx. 0,007VA
at 20 x In: approx. 2,8VA
Conventional current at 100 x In: approx. 1,5kVA
Current inputs for Devices with differential current input (compensation) have a load of:
1 transformer (CT)
I-measurement 0,014VA / 5,6VA per phase
Load per phase 5A: at 1 x In: approx. 0,13VA
at 20 x In: approx. 45VA
at 100 x In: approx. 15kVA
Devices with differential current input (compensation) have a load of:
0,26VA / 90 VA per phase
AC overcurr. 1A: 250 x In for 0,5 oscillations
100 x In, up to 1s
30 x In, up to 10s
20 x In, continuous
AC overcurr. 5A: 100 x In for 0,5 oscillations
50 x In, up to 1s
30 x In, up to 5s
4 x In, continuous
Combined sensors Up to 3; nom. voltage: 150mV
With a connecting cable (4 mm; Lnge:2,5 m) and a 5 A current transformer, the total load at 20 x In (5A) amounts to 227VA
Voltage measuring inputs: PT1, PT2, PT3, PT-GND1
Typical nominal voltages Un(AC): 100V/110V/400V/690V
Measuring ranges
Lower range: 50 to 200V AC
Conventional potential Upper range: 200 to 700V AC
Voltage inputs for Accuracy: 0,5%
2 transformer (PT)
U-measurement Relative accuracy refers to full scale value (2 x Un)!
Load per phase: at Un=100 V: approx. 0,3VA
at Un=200 V: approx. 0,6VA
Combined sensors Up to 3; nom. voltage: 150mV
For current and voltage measurement (No. 1 + No. 2), a distortion factor k < 5% is assumed.
* Accuracy value only applies for SYMAP-Compact+ devices with separate measuring and protection transformers.

User Manual
Table 7-61 HW v1-2.x: Specifications of the SYMAP-Compact(+) current measuring inputs

(CT: conventional current transformers)
The following specifications of measuring accuracy are only valid for the set nominal frequeny:
50Hz/60Hz
DEVIATION (MAGNITUDE)
Secondary nominal current In: 1A
Measuring ranges*: 0,02 ...1 x In, deviation: 0,5% In
1 ... 10 x In, deviation: 0,5% of meas. value
10 ... 20 x In, deviation: 1% of meas. value
20 ... 32 x In deviation: 3% of meas. value
Temperature influence: 0 ... 60C: deviation: 1% In
Frequency influence
- with adaption of sample time: fn +/-5Hz deviation: x%/Hz
- constant sample time: fn +/-5Hz deviation: x%/Hz
CT1**, CT-GND1 Harmonics influence: 20% of 3rd or 5th harmonic deviation: 1% In
Secondary nominal current In: 5A
Measuring ranges*: 0,02 ...1 x In, deviation: 0,5% In
1 ... 2 x In, deviation: 0,5% of meas. value
Frequency influence
- with adaption of sample time: fn +/-5Hz deviation: x%/Hz
Harmonics influence: 20% of 3rd or 5th harmonic deviation: 1% In
DEVIATION (MAGNITUDE)
Total measuring range: 2 ... 3000mA
Measuring ranges*: 2 ... 100mA, deviation: 1mA
100 ... 2500mA, deviation: 1% of meas. value
2500 ... 2800mA, deviation: 3% of meas. value
CT-GND1(sensitive input)
Frequency influence
- with adaption of sample time : fn +/-5Hz deviation: x%/Hz
Harmonics influence: 20% of 3rd or 5th harmonic deviation: 1% In
POWER CONSUMPTION
1A inputs*: at 1 x In: approx. 0,007VA
at 20 x In: approx. 2,8VA
at 100 x In: approx. 1,5kVA
CT1, CT-GND1 5A inputs*: at 1 x In: approx. 0,13VA
at 20 x In: approx. 45VA
at 100 x In: approx. 15kVA
NOTE: With a connecting cable (4mm; length:2,5m) and a 5A current transformer, the total load
at 20 x In (5A) amounts to 227VA
POWER CONSUMPTION
CT-GND1 (sensitive input) 2 ... 3000mA*: at 100mA: approx. 0,007VA
at 3000mA: approx. 2,8VA
AC OVERCURRENT PROOF
1A inputs*: at 250 x In: for 10ms (half- oscillation)
at 100 x In: up to 1s
at 5 x In: continuous
CT1, CT-GND1
5A inputs*: at 50 x In: for 10ms (half- oscillation)
at 32 x In: for 0,5s
at 5 x In: continuous

User Manual
AC OVERCURRENT PROOF
2 ... 3000mA*: at 50A: for 10ms (half- oscillation)
CT-GND1(sensitive input) at 30A: up to 1s
at 15A: up to 10s
at 3A: continuous
For current measurement, a distortion factor k < 5% is assumed.
* Environmental temperature: 20C; humidity: non-condensing; protection relay at steady operation at nominal values
** Information about deviation refers to both, CT1-M/P and CT1-M
Table 7-62 HW v1-2.x: Specifications of the SYMAP-Compact(+) voltage measurement inputs

(PT: conventional potential transformers)
Typical nominal voltages Un(AC): 100V/110V/400V/(690V)

MEASURING RANGES (parameterizable PT input modes)
Low range: 0 ... 200V AC
High range: 0 ... 1100V AC
CAUTION: Product design accords to pollution degree 2, overvoltage category 3, for
measurement phase-to-neutral voltages up to 300V RMS!
PT1, PT-GND1 DEVIATION (MAGNITUDE)
Measuring ranges*: 0,05 ... 1,0 x Un: deviation: 0,9% of Un
1,0 ... 2,0 x Un: deviation: 0,4% of Un
POWER CONSUMPTION
Load per phase: at Un=100V: approx. 0,1VA
at Un=200V: approx. 0,2VA
at Un=400V: approx. 0,4VA
at Un=700V: approx. 1VA
AC OVERVOLTAGE PROOF
2000V up to 1s
2x Un: continuous
For voltage measurement, a distortion factor k < 5% is assumed.
* Environmental temperature: 20C; humidity: non-condensing; protection relay at steady operation at nominal values

User Manual
7.7 Analog outputs (AO) Extra low voltage (ELV)
7.7.1 SYMAP-Compact Hardware version v1-1.0
Table 7-63 Specification of analog outputs (AO) of the SYMAP-Compact(+) device variants
Description Designation Specification
The number and type of available analog outputs (AO) depends on
Number:
selection option of the order code
between potential group and device
720V DC, for 1s
housing
Isolation to between two analog potential groups

other circuits (ELV circuits) and communication 1,4kV DC, for 1s
interfaces
to all other potential groups 3,1kV DC, for 1s
Meas. range -20 20mA

Analog Out 1
20mA Accuracy 2% of |20mA| or 0,4mA
-X 2.4: 50, 49 rooted COM via Max. burden 300
GND4
-X2.4: 49 Meas. range -20 20mA
Analog Out 2
-X 2.4: 51, 49
Max. burden 300
Meas. range 0 20mA
Analog Out 3
0 20mA Accuracy 1% of 20mA or 0,2mA
GND5
-X2.4: 52 Meas. range 0 20mA
Analog Out 4
-X 2.4: 54, 52
Max. burden 250
Meas. range -10 10V
-X 2.5: 63, 62 10V Accuracy 2% of |10V| or 200mV
rooted COM via Max. burden 2000
Analog Out 5 GND7
-X2.4: 62
(-X 2.5:64, 62)* (PWM)* * *

User Manual
7.7.2 SYMAP-Compact Hardware version v1-1.1 and v1-2.x
Table 7-64 Specification of analog outputs (AO) of the SYMAP-Compact(+) device variants
The number and type of available analog outputs (AO) depends on
Number:
selection option of the order code
between potential group and device
720V DC, for 1s
housing
Isolation to between two analog potential groups (ELV
other circuits 1,4kV DC, for 1s
circuits) and communication interfaces
Meas. range -10 10V

Analog Out 1
10V Accuracy 2% of |10V| or 200mV
GND4
-X2.4: 49 Meas. range -20 20mA
Analog Out 2
-X 2.4: 51, 49
Max. burden 300
Meas. range 0 20mA
Analog Out 3
GND5
-X2.4: 52 Meas. range 0 20mA
Analog Out 4
-X 2.4: 54, 52
Max. burden 250
Meas. range -10 10V
10V 10V Accuracy 2% of |10V| or 200mV
rooted COM via Max. burden 2000
Analog Out 5 GND7
-X2.4: 62
(PWM)* (PWM)* * *

User Manual
7.8 Analog inputs (AI) Extra low voltage (ELV)
7.8.1 SYMAP-Compact Hardware version v1-1.x and v1-2.x
Table 7-65 Specification of analog inputs (AI) of the SYMAP-Compact(+) device variants
- Number: 4 analog inputs
between potential group and device housing 720V DC, for 1s
Isolation to other between two analog potential groups (ELV

- 1,4kV DC, for 1s
circuits circuits) and communication interfaces
Measuring range 0 400
Analog in 1 Accuracy < 1,25% of the measuring range end value
Resistor
-X 2.4: 56, 55 Measuring range PT100: -200 800C
Accuracy < 2,5C
Measuring range 0 400
Analog in 2 rooted COM via GND3 Accuracy < 1,25% of the measuring range end value
Resistor
-X 2.4: 57, 55 -X2.4: 55 Measuring range PT100: -200 800C
Accuracy < 2,5C
Analog in 3 Measuring range 0 20mA
-X 2.4: 58, 55 0 20mA Accuracy < 0,5% of the measuring range end value
Analog in 4 Measuring range 0 20mA
-X 2.4: 59, 55 0 20mA Accuracy < 0,5% of the measuring range end value

User Manual
7.9 Communication Interfaces
7.9.1 SYMAP-Compact Hardware version v1-1.x
Table 7-66 HW v1-1.x: Specification of SYMAP-Compact(+) communication interfaces

Service interface
MSD Interface: standard; mini USB; for parameter setting
(side of housing)
Service interface Interface: standard; USB-A; for parameter setting and optional
(front panel) - selection of user levels
Interface: standard; electrical; galvanically isolated
Terminals, half duplex: X2.6: 26, 27
Settable symbol rates (Baud rate): 9600Bd, 19200Bd, 38400Bd and 57600Bd
Transmission distance, max.: 1km
RS485 Data protocol: Modbus RTU
X2.6
(back panel)
Number of users: max. 255
Signal wiring: shielded, twisted-pair
NOTE: Characteristic impedance between 108 and 132. The A/B lines of the two
devices with the maximum distance between them should be limited by a 120
resistor at both ends. We recommend a maximum length of A/B lines of 10m.
Interface: ordering option; electrical
D-SUB Terminals: socket, 9-pole
X17
(back panel) Data protocol: Profibus DP
Interface: ordering option; fibre optics (FO); multimode
Terminals: X4: 3(TxD), 4(RxD)
Fibre type: glass fibre or plastic fibre
Diameter sleeve: 125m
Diameter core: 50m or 62,5m
Connection type: ST
Wavelength: 1300nm
IEC61850 Transmitter (TxD) output
X4
(back panel) optical power 62,5/125 m: -20dBm avg.
Transmitter (TxD) output
optical power 50/125 m: -23,5dBm avg.
Receiver (RxD) input
optical power minimum: -31,8dBm avg.
Network topology: star

User Manual
7.9.2 SYMAP-Compact Hardware version v1-2.x (SYMAP-Compact+ only!)
Table 7-67 HW v1-2.x: Specification of SYMAP-Compact(+) communication interfaces

Designation
Data protocol Specification
phys. interface
Interface: RJ45 (standard equipm.), electrical, galv. isolated
TCP/IP Location: side of housing
X2.7
(Ethernet) Target termianl: PORT 1 of connected extension board EB-PS
Transmission distance: max.3m
Interface: mini USB (standard equipm.); service interface for
USB protocol X2.8 parameter setting
Location: side of housing
Interface: USB-A (SYMAP-Compact(+)Fx: standard
equipm.); service interface for parameter setting
USB protocol X2.9 and selection of user levels
Location: front panel
Interface: RS485, serial port 1 (standard equipm.);
electrical; galv. Isolated
Terminal connection: terminal screws
Location: back panel
Signal transmission type: differential / half duplex
Terminals, half duplex: X2.6: 26, 27
Modbus RTU X2.6
Selectable symbol rates (Baud rate): 9600Bd, 19200Bd, 38400Bd and 57600Bd
Network topology: bus system
Selectable ID addresses: 0 255 (parameterizable)
NOTE: Termination of 120 on both ends of the bus system is required!
Interface: RS485, serial port 1 (standard equipm.);
electrical; galv. isolated
Terminal connection: terminal screws
Terminals, half duplex: X2.2: 22 (High), 23 (Low)
Selectable symbol rates (Baud rate): 15,6kBd; 25kBd; 50kBd, 100kBd, 125kBd;
CAN Bus 1 X2.2 250kBd; 500kBd; 1000kBd
Transmission distance, max.: 100m
Max. number of connected devices: 32
Interface: RS485 (ordering option); electrical; galv. isolated
Connection type: D-SUB; socket, 9-pole
Terminals, half duplex: A2(+), B2(-)
X4.7 Selectable symbol rates (Baud rate): 9600Bd, 19200Bd, 38400Bd and 57600Bd
Transmission distance: max.1km
Profibus DP
Interface: fibre optics (FO) (ordering option); multimode
X4.8 Terminals: TxD, RxD
Fibre type: glass fibre

User Manual
Designation
phys. interface
Connection type: ST
Wavelength: 820 nm (Multimode)
Transmission distance: max. 2km
Laser class: 1
Terminals: star: TxD 1, RxD 1
star redundancy: TxD 1, RxD 1; TxD 2, RxD 2
double star: TxD 1, RxD 1; TxD 2, RxD 2
ring: TxD 1, RxD 1; TxD 2, RxD 2
X4.3 (star) /
ring redundancy: TxD 1, RxD 1; TxD 2, RxD 2
X4.4 (double
star, star Fibre type: glass fibre
redundancy, ring Diameter sleeve: 125m
or ring
redundancy)
Connection type: ST
Wavelength: 1300 nm
IEC 61850
Selectable source subscriber IDs: 0 128 (parameterizable)
Laser class: 1
Interface: RJ45 (ordering option), electrical, galv. isolated
X4.3 (star) /
X4.4 (double Terminals: star: Port 1
star, star star redundancy: Port 1; Port 2
redundancy, ring double star: Port 1; Port 2
or ring ring: Port 1; Port 2
redundancy) ring redundancy: Port 1; Port 2
Selectable source subscriber IDs: 0 128 (parameterizable)
Terminals: TxD, RxD
Fibre type: glass fibre
X4.5
Connection type: ST
Wavelength: 820 nm (Multimode)
Laser class: 1
Interface: RS485; serial port 2 (ordering option); electrical;
IEC 60870-5-103 galv. isolated
Connection type: 2-pole connector
Terminals, half duplex: A1(+), B1(-)
Selectable symbol rates (Baud rate): 9600Bd, 19200Bd, 38400Bd and 57600Bd
X4.6 Transmission distance: max.1 km
Bus load: 1/4 UL (unit load)
=> max. number of users depends on bus load of
the master connected to the bus system;e.g.
Master: 1/4 UL => max. 128 SYMAP-Compact(+)

User Manual
7.9.3 Extension Board System EBS Hardware version
Table 7-68 EB-PS Specification of communication interfaces

Designation
phys. interface
Interface: RJ45 (standard equipm.), electrical, galv. isolated
TCP/IP Location: side of housing
X2.7
(Ethernet) Target termianl: PORT 1 of connected extension board EB-PS
Interface: RJ45
Location: top of housing
Terminals: OUT (interlink to next connected EBS board)
INTERLINK OUT
Transmission distance: max. 0,15m
NOTE: Abschlusswiderstand / EBS-Terminator beim letzten Board verwenden!
NOTE: For internal board-to-board communication only!
Table 7-69 EB-BI8-A Specification of communication interfaces

Designation
phys. interface
Interface: RJ45
Location: Gehuseoberseite
Terminals: IN (Interlink of incoming EBS-Board)
INTERLINK IN/OUT OUT (Interlink of outgoing EBS-Board)
Transmission distance: max. 0,15 m
Table 7-70 EB-BI10-OC Specification of communication interfaces

Designation
phys. interface
Interface: RJ45
Table 7-71 EB-BO4-R Specification of communication interfaces

Designation
phys. interface
Interface: RJ45

User Manual
Table 7-72 EB-BO6-R Specification of communication interfaces

Designation
phys. interface
Interface: RJ45

User Manual
8 Order Information
8.1 SYMAP-Compact Hardware versions v1-1.x and v1-2.x
(HW v1-2.x only available for SYMAP-Compact+!)
Order code: v1-6.0; Order information: v1.14.0 Ordering identifier 1 2 3
Product line SYMAP-Compact Ordering option
1. Device variant
Protection system: voltage relay (6 x U; 1 x UG1)
F0 ANSI: 25, 27, 27T, 47, 59, 59AV; 59N/G, 74TC, 78, 81, 81R, 81RAV, 86, DCVM, PTS
Protection system: current relay (3 x I, 1 x I1)
F1 ANSI: 37, 46, 46BC, 48, 49, 50BF, 50/51, 50/51G, 51LR, 51MS, 52, 64REF, 66, 74TC, 79, 86, 87GH,
87H, 95i, CLD, CTS, SOTF
Protection and control system: current relay (3 x I, 1 x IG1)
+F1 ANSI: 37, 46, 46BC, 48, 49, 50BF, 50/51, 50/51G, 51LR, 51MS, 52, 64REF, 66, 74TC, 79, 86, 87GH,
87H, 95i, CLD, CTS, SOTF
Protection system: current relay (3 x I, 1 x IG1, 1 x UG1)
F2 ANSI: 32N/G; 37, 46, 46BC, 48, 49, 50BF, 50/51, 50/51G, 51LR, 51MS, 52, 59N/G, 64REF, 66, 67G,
74TC, 79, 86, 87GH, 87H, 95i, CLD, CTS, SGF, SOTF
Protection and control system: current relay (3 x I, 1 x IG1, 1 x UG1)
+F2 ANSI: 32N/G; 37, 46, 46BC, 48, 49, 50BF, 50/51, 50/51G, 51LR, 51MS, 52, 59N/G, 64REF, 66, 67G,
74TC, 79, 86, 87GH, 87H, 95i, CLD, CTS, SGF, SOTF
Protection system: current and voltage relay (3 x I, 3 x U, 1 x IG1, 1 x UG1)
ANSI: 21FL, 24, 27, 27Q, 27T, 32, 32N/G; 37, 40, 46, 46BC, 47, 48, 49, 50BF, 50/51, 50/51G, 51LR,
F3 51MS, 51/46VR, 52, 55, 59, 59AV, 59N/G, 64REF, 66, 67, 67G, 74TC, 78, 78S, 79, 81, 81R, 81RAV,
86, 87GH, 87H, 95i, CLD, CTS, DCVM, PTS, SGF, SOTF
Protection and control system: current and voltage relay (3 x I, 3 x U, 1 x IG1, 1 x UG1)
ANSI: 21FL, 24, 27, 27Q, 27T, 32, 32N/G; 37, 40, 46, 46BC, 47, 48, 49, 50BF, 50/51, 50/51G, 51LR,
+F3 51MS, 51/46VR, 52, 55, 59, 59AV, 59N/G, 64REF, 66, 67, 67G, 74TC, 78, 78S, 79, 81, 81R, 81RAV,
86, 87GH, 87H, 95i, CLD, CTS, DCVM, PTS, SGF, SOTF
Protection system: current and voltage relay (3 x I, 6 x U, 1 x IG1, 1 x UG1)
ANSI: 21FL, 21B, 24, 25, 27, 27Q, 27T, 32, 32N/G; 37, 40, 46, 46BC, 47, 48, 49, 50BF, 50/51, 50/51G,
F4 51LR, 51MS, 51/46VR, 52, 55, 59, 59AV, 59N/G, 64REF, 66, 67, 67G, 74TC, 78, 78S, 79, 81, 81R,
81RAV, 86, 87GH, 87H, 95i, CLD, CTS, DCVM, PTS, SGF, SOTF
Protection and control system: current and voltage relay (3 x I, 9 x U, 1 x IG1, 1 x UG1)
ANSI: 21FL, 21B, 24, 25, 27, 27Q, 27T, 32, 32N/G; 37, 40, 46, 46BC, 47, 48, 49, 50BF, 50/51, 50/51G,
+F4 51LR, 51MS, 51/46VR, 52, 55, 59, 59AV, 59N/G, 64REF, 66, 67, 67G, 74TC, 78, 78S, 79, 81, 81R,
81RAV, 86, 87GH, 87H, 95i, CLD, CTS, DCVM, PTS, SGF, SOTF
Protection system: synchronizing relay (9 x U)
SYN ANSI: 25, 25A, 74TC, 86, DCVM,
Engine control (without U/I measuring)
EC ANSI: 5, 12, 14, 15
Generator control incl. protective functions (3 x I, 9 x U)
ANSI:15, 24, 25, 25A, 27, 27Q, 27T, 32, 32N/G; 40, 46, 46BC, 47, 49, 50BF, 50/51, 50/51G, 51/46VR,
GC 52, 55, 59, 59AV, 59N/G, 67, 67G, 74TC, 78, 78S, 81, 81R, 81RAV, 86, 95i, SGF, SOTF, CLD, CTS,
DCVM, PTS
Engine control and Generator protection (3 x I, 9 x U)
ANSI: 5, 12, 14, 15, 24, 25, 25A, 27, 27Q, 27T, 32, 32N/G; 40, 46, 46BC, 47, 49, 50BF, 50/51, 50/51G,
ECG 51/46VR, 52, 55, 59, 59AV, 59N/G, 67, 67G, 74TC, 78, 78S, 81, 81R, 81RAV, 86, 95i, SGF, SOTF,
CLD, CTS, DCVM, PTS
Generator control incl. protective functions (3 x I, 9 x U, 1 x IG1, 1 x UG1)
ANSI:15, 21B, 21FL, 24, 25, 25A, 27, 27Q, 27T, 32, 32N/G; 40, 46, 46BC, 47, 49, 50BF, 50/51,
+GC 50/51G, 51/46VR, 52, 55, 59, 59AV, 59N/G, 64REF, 67, 67G, 74TC, 78, 78S, 81, 81R, 81RAV, 86,
87GH, 87H, 95i, SGF, SOTF, CLD, CTS, DCVM, PTS
Engine control and Generator protection (3 x I, 9 x U, 1 x IG1, 1 x UG1)
ANSI: 5, 12, 14, 15, 21B, 21FL, 24, 25, 25A, 27, 27Q, 27T, 32, 32N/G; 40, 46, 46BC, 47, 49, 50BF,
+ECG 50/51, 50/51G, 51/46VR, 52, 55, 59, 59AV, 59N/G, 64REF, 67, 67G, 74TC, 78, 78S, 81, 81R, 81RAV,
86, 87GH, 87H, 95i, SGF, SOTF, CLD, CTS, DCVM, PTS
2. Phase current transformer CT1
A without (device variants: SYMAP-Compact F0, EC0, EC1 only)
B CT1: 1A secondary, rated current (HW v1-1.x: 0,02-20 x In; HW v1-2.x: 0,02-32In)
C CT1: 5A secondary, rated current (HW v1-1.x: 0,02-20 x In; HW v1-2.x: 0,02-32In)
CT1: 1A and 5A secondary, rated current (1A: HW v1-1.x: 0,02-20 x In; HW v1-2.x: 0,02-32In or
D 5A: 0,02-5xIn), Gen-Set controls only
CT1-MP: 1A secondary, rated current (M: 0,02-2In, P: HW v1-1.x: 0,02-20 x In; HW v1-2.x:
E 0,02-32In), SYMAP-Compact+ only, and only device variants without CT-GND2 and without CT3 !
CT1-MP: 5A secondary, rated current (M: 0,02-2In, P: HW v1-1.x: 0,02-20 x In; HW v1-2.x:
F 0,02-32In), SYMAP-Compact+ only, and only device variants without CT-GND2 and without CT3 !
CT2: 1A secondary, rated current (HW v1-1.x: 0,02-20 x In; HW v1-2.x: 0,02-32In),
1 SYMAP-Compact+ only !
CT2: 5A secondary, rated current (HW v1-1.x: 0,02-20 x In; HW v1-2.x: 0,02-32In),
2 SYMAP-Compact+ only !

User Manual
Ordering identifier 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Ordering option

CT3: 1A secondary, rated current (HW v1-1.x: 0,02-20 x In;
B HW v1-2.x: 0,02-32In), SYMAP-Compact+ only, and only device variants
without CT-GND2 and without CT1-M !
CT3: 5A secondary, rated current (HW v1-1.x: 0,02-20 x In;
C HW v1-2.x: 0,02-32In), SYMAP-Compact+ only and only device variants
without CT-GND2 and without CT1-M !
5. Ground current transformer CT-GND1
0 without (device variants: SYMAP-Compact F0, SYN, EC only)
CT-GND1: 1A secondary, rated current (HW v1-1.x: 0,02-20 x In;
1 HW v1-2.x: 0,02-32In)
CT-GND1: 5A secondary, rated current (HW v1-1.x: 0,02-20 x In;
2 HW v1-2.x: 0,02-32In)
3 CT-GND1: 2-3000mA, secondary rated current
CT-GND2: 1 A secondary rated current (HW v1-1.x: 0,02-20 x In;
B HW v1-2.x: 0,02-32In), SYMAP-Compact+ only, and only device variants
without CT3 and without CT1-M !
CT-GND2: 5 A secondary rated current (HW v1-1.x: 0,02-20 x In;
C HW v1-2.x: 0,02-32In), SYMAP-Compact+ only, and only device variants
without CT3 and without CT1-M !
CT-GND2: 0,02 - 50 A DC (UL: upt to 35A DC, IEC: up to 41A); SYMAP-
D Compact+ only, and only device variants without CT3 and without CT1-M !
7. Power supply Device
0 12V DC; Gen-Sets controls only!
1 24V DC
2 48V DC
3 60V DC
4 110V AC/DC; 220V DC; 230V AC
8. Binary Inputs
19 pcs (HW_v1-1.x) or 18 pcs (HW_v1-2.x or HW_v1-3.x);
B SYMAP-Compact F0 to F4 only!
18 pcs. (Un: 24/48/60/220V DC; 110V AC/DC; /230V AC: parameterizable;
C HW_v1-3.0 only!); Gen-Set controls only!
Speed sensing input (magnetic pickup, proximity switch; incl. ANSI 12 and
D ANSI 14), not Gen-Set controls!
9. Binary Outputs
1 12 pcs.; SYMAP-Compact F0 to F4 only !
10. Analog Inputs and Outputs
2 pcs. Analog Inputs (4-20mA)
B and 2 pcs. Analog Inputs (Resistive sensor)
and 2 pcs. Analog Outputs (4-20mA)
and 2 pcs. Analog Inputs (Resistive Sensor)
C and 2 pcs Analog Outputs (4-20mA)
and 1 pcs Analog Outputs (+/-20mA)
and 1 pcs Analog Output (+/-10V)*
and 2 pcs. Analog Inputs (Resistive sensor)
D and 2 pcs. Analog Outputs (4-20mA)
and 1 pcs Analog Outputs (+/-20mA)
and 2 pcs. Analog Inputs (Resistive sensor)
and 2 pcs. Analog Outputs (4-20mA)
E and 1 pcs. Analog Outputs (+/-20mA)
and 1 pcs Analog Output (+/-10V)
and 1 pcs. Analog Output (PWM)
11. Communication SCADA Port-1
Profibus DP; RS485;
1 No combinations with ordering options of ordering identifiers 12 and 13!
2 Profibus DP (Star); fibre optic (FO)
3 Profibus DP (Ring/Line); fibre optic (FO), SYMAP-Compact+ only !
4 Profinet

User Manual
Ordering identifier 12 13 14 15 16 17
Ordering option

B IEC 61850 (single), fibre optic (FO) & RJ45; HW v1-2.x and SYMAP-Compact+ only!
C IEC 61850 (single), RJ45; not SYMAP-Compact !
D IEC 61850 (single), fibre optic (FO); not SYMAP-Compact !
E IEC 61850 (redundancy), RJ45; HW v1-2.x and SYMAP-Compact+ only!
F IEC 61850 (redundancy), fibre optic (FO); HW v1-2.x and SYMAP-Compact+ only!
1 IEC 60870-5-103; RS485; SYMAP-Compact+ only!
2 IEC 60870-5-103; Fibre optic; HW v1-2.x and SYMAP-Compact+ only!
3 DNP3.0; RS485
4 DNP3.0; fibre optic (FO)
5 Modbus TCP/IP (star); RJ45
6 Modbus TCP/IP (star); fibre optic (FO)
7 Modbus TCP/IP (ring); RJ45; not SYMAP-Compact !
8 Modbus TCP/IP (ring); fibre optic (FO); not SYMAP-Compact !
14. Communication Interfaces
B CANBUS3 (Engine control); Gen-Set controls only !
C USB-A (front plate); Gen-Set controls only !
D CANBUS3 (Engine control) and USB-A (front plate); Gen-Set controls only !
E IRIG-B (modulated/non-modulated: parameterizable); not Gen-Set controls !
Line diff. protection; fibre optic (FO): 2km; POF 2,5 (ST-connector); multimode 860 nm;
F diameter 65/125 um; not SYMAP-Compact F0, SYN and Gen-Set controls !
Line diff. protection; fibre optic (FO): 20km; POF 2,5 (ST-connector); monomode 1300
G nm; diameter 9/125 um; not SYMAP-Compact F0, SYN and Gen-Set controls !
Line diff. protection; RS422: full-duplex, max. distance: 300m; not SYMAP-Compact
H F0, SYN and Gen-Set controls !
IRIG-B (modulated/non-modulated: parametrierbar) + Line diff protection, fibre optic
I (FO): 2km; not SYMAP-Compact F0, SYN and Gen-Set controls !
IRIG-B (modulated/non-modulated: parametrierbar) + Line diff protection, fibre optic
J (FO): 20km; not SYMAP-Compact F0, SYN and Gen-Set controls !
IRIG-B (modulated/non-modulated: parametrierbar) + Line diff protection; RS422:
K 300m; not SYMAP-Compact F0, SYN and Gen-Set controls !
15. Frequency measurement
G59 (ANSI 78 and 81R acc. to British GridCode; CAUTION: no f-measuring at PT3!);
1 SYMAP-Compact F0, F3, F4, +F3, +F4, GC, ECG, +GC, +ECG only!
16. Additional protection function
B ANSI 21 Distance protection; SYMAP-Compact F3, F4 and+F3, +F4 only !
ANSI 87 Current differential protection (2-winding transformer only!);
C SYMAP-Compact+ only !
Extended Groundfault protection: YG, TIG;
D SYMAP-Compact F2, F3, F4 and +F2 +F3, +F4 only !
E ANSI 25A: Automatic Synchroniser; SYMAP-Compact F0, F4 and +F4 only !
ANSI 21 and ANSI 87 (2-winding transformer only!);
F SYMAP-Compact +F3, +F4, +ECG only !
ANSI 21 and Extended Groundfault protection: YG, TIG;
G SYMAP-Compact F3, F4 and+F3, +F4, +ECG only !
ANSI 87 (2-winding transformer only!) and Extended groundfault protection: YG, TIG;
H SYMAP-Compact +F2 +F3, +F4, +ECG only !
ANSI 87 (2-winding transformer only!) and ANSI 25A: Automatic Synchroniser;
I SYMAP-Compact+F4 only !
ANSI 21 andANSI 87 (2-winding transformer only!) and Extended groundfault
J protection: YG, TIG; SYMAP-Compact +F3, +F4, +ECG only !
17. User levels
1 3 x USB-Stick, hardware-coded (4 user levels)
2 1 key switch (3 user levels)
3 2 key switches (4 user levels)

User Manual
Ordering identifier 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
Ordering option
18. Control and interlocking

Direct control: 8 SE, via ext. power circuit module; SYMAP-
B Compact+ only and via additional extension board system EBS!
Indirect control: 8 SE; field interlocking 8 SE; SYMAP-Compact+
C only and via additional extension board system EBS!
Indirect control: 1 SE; field interlocking: 3 SE; SYMAP-Compact F0
D to F4 only !
19. Safety Device
DTOC protection (redundancy of first degree);
1 SYMAP-Compact+ only!
20. Front plate (Design)
A Standard (design "Stucke")
B OEM design (On request!)
21. Detached HMI panel
1 Basic device with detached HMI
2 Basic device without detached HMI
22. Voltage measurement inputs
Seperated, neutral conductors (NOTE: no PT-GND1 available!);
B SYMAP-Compact F0, F4, +F4, +GC and+ECG only!
Seperated, neutral conductors and PT-GND1; SYMAP-Compact F0
C and F4 only!
Seperated, neutral conductors (NOTE: no PT3 available!); SYMAP -
D Compact GC andECG only!
23. LED indications front plate
1 16 parameterizable LEDs; SYMAP-Compact+ only ! (On request!)
8 LEDs and 8 puhs buttons: parameterizable; SYMAP-Compact+
2 only !
24. Firmware version (FW)
B Archived version (FW version must be specified when ordering!)
25. Hardware version (HW)
0 v1-2.x; SYMAP-Compact+ only !
1 v1-1.x
: Not available yet!

* : Not available yet within this ordering option!

User Manual
Order code_v1-6.0; Order information: v1.14.0
Ordering Ordering
option identifier
SYMAP-Compact 1. Device variant
7. Power supply device
8. Binary Inputs
9. Binary Outputs
10. Analog Inputs and Outputs
14. Communication Interfaces
15. Frequency measurement
16. Additional protective function
17. User levels
18. Control and interlocking
19. Safety Device
20. Front plate (design)
21. Detached HMI
22. Voltage measurement inputs
23. LED indications front plate
24. Firmware version (FW)
25. Hardware version (HW)

User Manual
8.2 Extension Boards System EBS
8.2.1 EB-PS Communication and Power supply
Hardware version: v1-1.3
Order code: v1-0.0; Order information: v1.1.2 Ordering identifier 1
Extension Boards System EBS Ordering option EB-PS-

Device variant
Application: "Power supply and communiaction"
Dimensions:
Housing dimensions: (BxHxT): (91,5x91,5x76,2)mm
Mounting:
DIN rail TS35
Device front:
"Stucke"-Design
LED indication:
1 status LED (System: red/green)
PS- 1 status LED (binary output: green)
3 status LEDs (binary input: green)
Binary inputs:
3 BIs (Un: 12/24/48/60/220V DC; 110V AC/DC; 230V AC: parameterizable)
Binary outputs:
1 BO (potential-free change-over contact)
Communication interfaces:
2 x RJ45, 1: Communication to basic device (SYMAP-Compact); 2: Service interface
(parameter setting)
1 x RJ45, Inter-Link (out)
1. Power supply Device
0 12V DC*
1 24V DC
2 48V DC
3 60V DC
4 110V AC/DC; 220V DC; 230V AC
*: not available yet !
8.2.2 EB-BI8-A 8 Binary inputs
Order code: v1-0.0; Order information: v1.1.2 Ordering identifier
Extension Boards System EBS EB-BI8-A

Device variant
Application: "Binary inputs"
Dimensions:
Mounting:
DIN rail TS35
Device front:
"Stucke"-Design
LED indication:
1 status LED (Power: green)
BI8- 8 status LEDs (binary inputs: green)
Binary inputs:
8 BIs (Un: 12/24/48/60/220V DC; 110V AC/DC; 230V AC: parameterizable)
Grouping of Binary inputs:
2 groups of 4 BIs each
Technical design:
Transistor technique (A)
2 x RJ45, Inter-Link (in/out)
Power index: 5

User Manual
8.2.3 EB-BI10-OC 10 Binary inputs (opto-couplers)
Order code: v1-1.0; Order information: v1.1.2 Ordering identifier 1
Extension Boards System EBS EB-BI10-OC-

Ordering option
Device variant
Application: "Binary inputs (opto-couplers)"
Dimensions:
Mounting:
DIN rail TS35
Device front:
"Stucke"-Design
LED indication:
1 status LED (Power: green)
BI10- 10 status LEDs (binary inputs: green)
Binary inputs:
10 BIs (Un: see ordering option 1. "Nominal voltage - Binary inputs")
Grouping of Binary inputs:
2 groups of 5 BIs each
Technical design:
Opto couplers (OC)
Power index: 5
1. Nominal voltage - Binary inputs
0 12V DC
1 24V DC
2 48V DC
3 60V DC
4 110V DC
5 220V DC
8.2.4 EB-BO4-R 4 Binary outputs (change-over contacts)
Extension Boards System EBS EB-BO4-R

Device variant
Application: "Binary outputs (change-over contacts)"
Dimensions:
Mounting:
DIN rail TS35
Device front:
"Stucke"-Design
LED indication:
BO4- 1 status LED (Power: green)
4 status LEDs (binary output: green)
Binary outputs:
4 BOs (potential-free change-over contacts)
Technical design:
Relay technique (R)
Power index: 18

User Manual
8.2.5 EB-BO6-R 6 Binary outputs (normal open NO contacts)
Extension Boards System EBS EB-BO6-R

Device variant
Application: "Binary outputs (normal open NO contacts)"
Dimensions:
Mounting:
DIN rail TS35
Device front:
"Stucke"-Design
LED indication:
BO6- 1 status LED (Power: green)
6 status LEDs (binary output: green)
Binary outputs:
6 BOs (potential-free normal open (NO) contacts)
Technical design:
Relay technique (R)
Power index: 18

User Manual

User Manual

Https WWW - Stuckegmbh

Transféré par

Informations du document

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Https WWW - Stuckegmbh

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

SYMAP -Compact

Protection & Control

ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Document version: v18.0

- 2/839 - SYMAP-Compact_Manual_v18.0_GB.docx SYMAP-Compact

SYMAP-Compact SYMAP-Compact_Manual_v18.0_GB.docx - 3/839 -

2 Operation of SYMAP-Compact(+) ..................................................................................................... 66

- 4/839 - SYMAP-Compact_Manual_v18.0_GB.docx SYMAP-Compact

3 System settings ................................................................................................................................. 119

SYMAP-Compact SYMAP-Compact_Manual_v18.0_GB.docx - 5/839 -

4 Maintenance, Servicing and Retesting ............................................................................................ 767

5 Safety guidelines ............................................................................................................................... 770

6 Trouble-shooting ............................................................................................................................... 771

7 Technical Data.................................................................................................................................... 772

8 Order Information .............................................................................................................................. 830

- 8/839 - SYMAP-Compact_Manual_v18.0_GB.docx SYMAP-Compact

1.1 SYMAP-Compact General Outline

1.2 Human machine interface (HMI)

Programming and operating a SYMAP-Compact(+) device is very easy. A resistive touch

To guarantee the highest possible safety standards, access to SYMAP-Compact(+) settings is

1.3 Extension Board System EBS

SYMAP-Compact SYMAP-Compact_Manual_v18.0_GB.docx - 9/839 -

1.4 Functional scope

1.4.1 SYMAP-Compact: Hardware and Software standard equipment

The SYMAP-Compact product line comprises two different device types:

- 10/839 - SYMAP-Compact_Manual_v18.0_GB.docx SYMAP-Compact

* not available yet!

Table 1-2 Standard equipment of SYMAP-Compact(+) Genset device variants HW v1-1.x

SYMAP-Compact SYMAP-Compact_Manual_v18.0_GB.docx - 11/839 -

Hardwareversion v1-2.x (SYMAP-Compact+ only!)

- 12/839 - SYMAP-Compact_Manual_v18.0_GB.docx SYMAP-Compact

Table 1-4 Standard equipment of SYMAP-Compact(+) Genset device variants HW v1-2.x

SYMAP-Compact SYMAP-Compact_Manual_v18.0_GB.docx - 13/839 -

- 14/839 - SYMAP-Compact_Manual_v18.0_GB.docx SYMAP-Compact

SYMAP-Compact SYMAP-Compact_Manual_v18.0_GB.docx - 15/839 -

Table 1-6 Standard equipment of SYMAP-Compact(+) Genset device variants Software

- 16/839 - SYMAP-Compact_Manual_v18.0_GB.docx SYMAP-Compact

SYMAP-Compact SYMAP-Compact_Manual_v18.0_GB.docx - 17/839 -

Hardware version v1-1.x and HW v1-2.x

- 18/839 - SYMAP-Compact_Manual_v18.0_GB.docx SYMAP-Compact

18 pcs. (Un: 24/48/60/220V DC; 110V AC/DC; /230V AC:

SYMAP-Compact SYMAP-Compact_Manual_v18.0_GB.docx - 19/839 -

G59 (ANSI 78 and 81R acc. to British GridCode);

- 20/839 - SYMAP-Compact_Manual_v18.0_GB.docx SYMAP-Compact

Table 1-8 Ordering options for SYMAP-Compact(+) Genset device variants

SYMAP-Compact SYMAP-Compact_Manual_v18.0_GB.docx - 21/839 -

0 Standard (see device variant)

- 22/839 - SYMAP-Compact_Manual_v18.0_GB.docx SYMAP-Compact

C ANSI 87 Current differential protection (2-winding transformer only!) - - - -

SYMAP-Compact SYMAP-Compact_Manual_v18.0_GB.docx - 23/839 -

1.4.2 Extension Board System EBS

Figure 1-1 Extension Board System EBS connection overview

CAUTION: For EBS constellation the following rules shall apply:

- 24/839 - SYMAP-Compact_Manual_v18.0_GB.docx SYMAP-Compact

1.4.2.1 EB-PS Communication and Power supply

Figure 1-2 Communication and Power supply: EB-PS

SYMAP-Compact SYMAP-Compact_Manual_v18.0_GB.docx - 25/839 -

1.4.2.2 EB-BI8-A 8 Binary inputs

Figure 1-3 8 Binary inputs: EB-BI8-A

- 26/839 - SYMAP-Compact_Manual_v18.0_GB.docx SYMAP-Compact

1.4.2.3 EB-BI10-OC 10 Binary inputs (opto-couplers)

Figure 1-4 10 Binary inputs (opto-couplers): EB-BI108-OC

SYMAP-Compact SYMAP-Compact_Manual_v18.0_GB.docx - 27/839 -